Teri Sati voc Th Vd)
re t
sy
Vag nore a doa
AO rt oui
ape
eA
avy vert
Pent Wy
Patras
eb eh am ae ey
haem
Veaee ay
‘viery tata
Sie Sao
Demarini:
vee
Dank ene
Rew Oe
STE T OILS eth
Sout
oo
SRC EK Yh)
eee
oo ‘*
SOLOMON ETN,
Seb bw ks @ be
eee
eh oee
:
eect oeertt be TL
VAST ieee arort
aoe oer
vee
ie ee
oe
Ny
oe)
est
Nien,
Mi
arate
wearers tert oot)
rape tie eae bom
co i Le
4 We lhekeprae
eter etait)
penionant?
Anion? fst Thiet rh
eh erst ce te tetes Ae
pperets Pe ere
anh peeteny
Un T Lt trans
Siblelaees eee
ae ’
SOE eee Repro e mut:
™
Ae hee:
ATA Aa
ya Soon ah
io ereeasarnsee ae!
Dearie
Te weer
ey
aipTatarin orien,
Darlene:
tes
fo teatac ete
wi
on
mayb te StS rth Yt ey
PaOCUCODES A:
7
~
Boor
Nearer a mite
Cotes prater arenes
oor
ae
i
Ane aha pete rer or mans Some tea
veeee tear rateer ye errno L ae
Sans he pease,
pam Semen gy tometer ert
Pores
ale bewe a
Ayton tome eee
ae a heen ame
sserere
ot
spin ese eT
prep ees
oo bameete OTS he By me way
tenner tt cot t
POS rE rEMaEe PEC
Shiela
Hee OS bys ceprpeal rohan BM"
Racists abe
OUSori F Wuiiseh
ee aba d bs
SUOLASIG rte erie st aw
vay bare andies 2
vane barbara arse ible
Borie init eI
Ve ea awe ees
eee
.
. Seren
ke bee ee ae eek ek
Bur
Cones
piv wre ay begeayay to
Ck ese
arb >. & ne ory
oo
hye tetiea
sleet
See
nue
mathe age pM
aoe
hie
ys
[ae ab er tta:
ip ion
*
Poe
at alae 9 at
“para e tow ge
et: ‘ore
peee ee ee Skewers ae
*
Se, rirerers
Rhpeests a
ener
prea res
eranabarane aire:
mae
Ora
NIRIANTT Sires areas
tales
™ rrasinesarsrenmian ec”
Tiare brenteren. 9
errr ens
Venetemoens
bys poees
MLE
o eererereecttts are toas ties
Hire: Sse char OCT hota he teenth
Sa teepeptenient ese mescrten
Sieceabeee
PAs pte te sete hs
iar Sieyeet
oo
Wake
CUS etree
Tecpeteme tata tte
She
Bebe Et Bet tees Siem
pres
sThrerme Arete Ste tety ye he OT
oy We Sete matpee teres tate EME
poaretnae tc Seer ae)
be Re Sete r heme
eee ia ate tS ee
mete
SS
el yeretetes
. prereset
Srnt ae he tet
CULE ada
Serom
dapat
2 theps b sib tered
amar
we aettnerel nes
bes Mog eraryeve
oot <
Waele e
ee
crass Tasinstoracerenere ren eeetes
tRutasivaeeererereren parean an
deatal aver teleanaatetetareggtereavend
arerere tana ener aner arat
Eee
ELE Aa ele eter cie vet
Foti taee
Ss seactien eneerer sas RR
eacslecs ive sters omega tees
Tai ol aeenaronatare ree
atacniel toa
resares
"ytacacaua’ a
Men bi he te artearthengea?!
WAAAY
RAIA AAR
RAR
ABPEPRRE
SO AL AE
-__- \ ov catia amt |e | come, cn | |
ENN NS NOR A x on ah in
i
PA\,
A ARRRPRAn aa Re
erence peeseeeeeit ~~. pea maAae
—WV =~
~V ~RAaeaAARRR
Asan Aaananrw
PAPAS A
\AAAAAAATY alae len, a aa
aN Ay VAAAEe
PARRA naan ane nal,
VVAINO YN =
ERS
SS NSN RAR Nae oo
FN ae ae NINES NS So ow on AA AAAAZ - ce alms YA AAA
DARA = SA SARA AAA AAAS
f A | { * A a ee A yaeE aN
BER AANA A AAA AA \q| penewornne tener cy
= { NAA A aé EA
pannacanaccetonencescamapanpenee ag
ar ra é
eS alana
maAnaeaaaans 2222
AARARAA me ask a
. RAAA dana
SancicaaetSNaNennanamannaan
RRA RRRAA
ve
Rm NN NNN ey"
5 A AAR ABRARABRAAA Ana a RA ARARL
si ee
S\N AANA AAA
-
)»)
) )
alalalaintl Vt tt lalaalnaaan ee
ARRARAm a . SPAR
~
BARA een ne nalaa ane P PRR
A ay ea ee UB | \ AR PR
ee —
RRAARARAAH-
oN ee a
= AN FF
saanaaannnnene”’
ane OaaRAAAaae
AAPA ARACARSAAPE
NE NI ES BS WY)
MARARAAR AAAI Oooo AAARAAAIA AR A A AAAS ar
A \
AAMAR nano = 225 2AAARRERARaoA AN APRPOPAPREY
AAR AAS
aA AA AAR AA AANA AA AAA
\
}
aaa Wy Ree amaaacs
AANA
An
lala
| AAA RAR ARRAS
AAAARAREF AARAAAAA RA |
poetry Creams aaa ARAARAAACAR ps0
AA a a alanine
=a = > AD Anne
~ A ANAS AAA RN a2 = eh Yay S,
=~
NAA
PR
— :
VA" RBAARAS AAA ARARARA RB fm ER ARARAAAS = 3
AAARa cocoon a anna aa aaaaannae er
ARAAAAA aan a SaAAAAAae
AANA ~ (amlam ome) rs | I
naAannanaannamannna naan aaa aA mencccan Bee
\aamalnalaialaia sa | ppanreeeeer
aan EES > Vz i tm gs im RARRREREE E
AAAAE DAR ARARRRRARRARRE
a
RAnaanaaannnann
naannannncnennnann
OS & oo pnnananaAnn
Ane”
AYE om ARAARR r | ae
AAPA AaRAARRRARRARE ~ RAnnnnnrnnriryy
cin Vaaes
Sos fe ry Ties! -,
NAAR een YY |
r
ey
7
: i
' 6
= é
oh Oy
- ¢
>
* A
ie a
. ~~
-
®
Pos
oe
oh he
oe
-
7
a
*
«i ay
-
7
: :
> « >)
ie — ha
al
Pa.DS
, ry
a |
DISCOVERY
REPORIS
‘Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands
Vol. Ill, pp. i-viii
TTTELE-PAGE, List OF CONTENTS
AND LIST OF PERSONNEL
CAMBRIDGE
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
E9G2
Price one shilling net
at
\
DISCOVERY REPORTS
VOLUME III
Cambridge University Press
Fetter Lane, London
New York —
Bombay, Calcutta, Madras
Toronto
Macmillan
Tokyo
i Maruzen Company, Ltd
All rights reserved
f
Great Brit. Cole. A
DISCOVERY REPORTS
Issued by the Discovery Committee
Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies
of the Falkland Islands
VOEUNME TIT
CAMBRIDGE
Pe WEE WNT ERS YP RES 'S
1932
: te
es Char ¥ Be
r : ol
: F
¥
> - | % . =
= 7 i
e ave
il
a
iG
. PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN
.
1 ot |
mn ' —_ _ ors | ~~,
CONTENTS
LIST OF PERSONNEL . : : : : ‘ : : : 5 . page vil
STATION LIST, 1927-1929 (published 1st January, 1931)
INTRODUCTION . : : : : ; : : : : : : ; ; : page 3
R.R.S. ‘WILLIAM ScoreEsBy’, STATIONS 137-433 : ; : : : ; : : : 6
SouTH SANDWICH IsLANDs, STATIONS 1-58 : : : : : ; : ; : 5 Wil
Ross SEA, STATIONS I-29 : : : : : ‘ : : ; : : : 5 la
SUMMARISED LisT OF STATIONS : : : 2 : : : : : 3 : a2
Pirates I-X : : : ; : ‘ : : : : : : following page 132
THE SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS (published 19th November, 1931)
By S. Kemp, Sc.D., F.R.S., and A. L. Nelson, R.N.R., with a Report on Rock Specimens by
G. W. Tyrrell, A.R.C.Sc., D.Sc., F.G.S., F.R.S.E.
INTRODUCTION . ; ; : ; 6 5 é ; : : : : : . page 135
HIsTORY OF THE ISLANDS . : F : : : : : ; : : 7 : 7 136
ITINERARY : : ; : ‘ 3 : : : ‘ P F : : ‘ er
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS. é : : ‘ . ; : : : : ; tA
INDEX 3 3 i : ; : ; 3 ‘ : : : ‘ ; : : . 190
APPENDIX: REPORT ON ROCK SPECIMENS. : : d F : : : : : Lon
Piates XI-XXXI_. ; : : é E : : ; : ; 5 following page 198
CHART OF SOUTH SANDWICH GROUP . : : : : ; ‘ ‘ ‘ . in pocket at end
NEBALIACEA (published 4th December, 1931)
By H. Graham Cannon, Sc.D.
NEBALIOPSIS TYPICA . ; : : : : : : : : : : ; . page 201
NEBALIELLA EXTREMA : ; é 5 5 : : ' : ; ; z : 20
NEBALIA LONGICORNIS ; ; : : ; : : ; : ‘ : : : 4 Pai
LITERATURE : : é ; : : ; : ; : 3 : : : : 5 ORE
PLATE XXXII . ; ‘ ‘ : F ‘ ; : F ; ‘ . following page 222
CEPHALODISCUS (published 4th December, 1931)
By C. C. John, M.A.
INTRODUCTION : : : . . ; : : ; : : j . page 225
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT : : : : : : ‘ : : : : : : 2277
INTERNAL ANATOMY . . F : ; . : c ‘ : : : : : a 245
CLASSIFICATION OF THE SPECIES OF CepHaLopiscus WITH A List OF KNOWN Forms . : ees 4
New Data SUMMARIZED . : : : : Fo as : : : ; : ‘ . +259
List oF LITERATURE ‘ : : : 3 ‘ ‘ : : ‘ : : . 259
Pirates XXXITI-XXXVIII_. : : F : ; ‘ , : ; following page 260
CONTENTS
vi
SPIDERS COLLECTED BY THE DISCOMERY EXPEDITION. Wi SADIE
SCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES FROM SOUTH GEORGIA (published
4th December, 1931)
By W. S. Bristowe, B.A., F.Z.S.
ANALYSIS OF THE COLLECTION . 3 5 ; : : ; : : : : . page 263
NOTES ; : ; : ; : x : : F ; 5 ‘ : : 5 202
MOLLUSCA: GASTROPODA THECOSOMATA AND GYMNOSOMATA (pub-
lished 4th March, 1932)
By Anne L. Massy
INTRODUCTION : : 5 : : : é : 0 : c : c . -page 269
List OF STATIONS 270
List OF SPECIES 271
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 272
List OF REFERENCES . : : . Gc ADS,
PLATE XXXIX 3 : : : : : ; : ‘ : 3 . following page 296
NARRATIVE OF HYDROGRAPHIC SURVEY OPERATIONS IN SOUTH
GEORGIA AND THE SOUTH SHETLAND ISLANDS, 1926-1930 (published
17th June, 1932)
By Lieut.-Commander J. M. Chaplin, R.N.
SURVEY OPERATIONS IN THE R.R.S. ‘ DIscOvERY,’ 1926-7 . : : : : : . page 299
SURVEY OPERATIONS, SEASON 1928-9 303
SuRVEY OPERATIONS, SEASON 1929-30 318
CONCLUSION 335
APPENDICES . : . : : : : 5 37
Pirates XL-XLIV . : ; : : : : : : : : : following page 344
CHARTS 1-4 . : ; : : : 5 2 : : : : : . in pocket at end
LIST OF PERSONNEL
January, 1932
DISCOVERY COMMITTEE
E. R. Darnley, M.A., B.Sc. (Chairman), Colonial Office
Sir S. F. Harmer, K.B.E., Sc.D., F.R.S. (Vice-Chairman), British Museum
A. L. Ayton (finance Member), Colonial Office
J. O. Borley, O.B.E., M.A. (Fisheries Adviser), Colonial Office
Vice-Admiral H. P. Douglas, C.B., C.M.G., Admiralty
Sir J. Fortescue Flannery, Bt., M.1.C.E. (Consulting Naval Architect)
H. G. Maurice, C.B., Ministry of Agriculture and Fisheries
J. M. Wordie, M.A., Royal Geographical Society
Secretary: F. H. Harper, M.B.E.
Naval Architect: A. Harker, O.B.E., M.I.N.A., F.C.M.S. (of Messrs Flannery,
Baggallay and Johnson, Ltd., Consulting Engineers)
Technical Officer: H. Horsburgh, A.M.1.C.E., Crown Agents for the Colonies
Shipping Officer: E. A. Nattriss, Crown Agents for the Colonies
Accountant: E. W. A. Scarlett
Clerical Assistants: Miss B. M. Borley Miss W. J. Hope
Miss M. E. Jeffries Miss D. B. Meggitt
SCIENTIFIC STAFF
Director of Research
S. Kemp, ‘Sc.D., F.R.S.
Zoological Staff
N. A. Mackintosh, A.R.C.S., D.Sc. J. W. S. Marr, M.A., B.Sc.
J. E. Hamilton, M.Sc. G. W. Rayner, B.Sc.
E. R. Gunther, M.A. 105 Wo laleree, 1BSye
D. D. John, M.Sc. F. D. Ommanney, B.Sc.
F. C. Fraser, B.Sc. A. H. Laurie, M.A.
Hydrological Staff
H. F. P. Herdman, M.Sc. G. E: R. Deacon, B.Sc.
A. J. Clowes, A.R.C.S., M.Sc.
Curators: Miss H. E. Bargmann, Ph.D. Mrs M. E. White, Ph.D.
Clerical Assistant: Miss S. M. Isaacson
LIST OF PERSONNEL
Vili
MARINE EXECUTIVE STAFF
Comdr. W. M. Carey, R.N. (Retd.), Executive officer in command. Captain R.R.S. “Discovery II’
Comdr. T. A. Jolliffe, R.N. (Retd.), Captain R.R.S. ‘William Scoresby’
Sub-Lieut. A. L. Nelson, R.N.R., Chief Officer Sub-Lieut. W. A. Ellison, R.N.R., Chief Officer
R.R.S. ‘Discovery I’ R.R.S. ‘William Scoresby’
Sub-Lieut. R. A. B. Ardley, R.N.R., Second Officer Sub-Lieut. L. C. Hill, R.N.R., Fourth Officer
R.R.S. ‘Discovery II’ R.R.S. ‘Discovery II’
F. E. C. Davies, Third Officer R.R.S. ‘Discovery II’
Eng. Lieut.-Comdr. W. A. Horton, R.N. (Retd.), Principal Marine Engineer. Chief Engineer RRS.
‘Discovery IT’
D. Roy, R.N. (Retd.), Chief Engineer R.R.S.‘ William G. S. Hunter, Second Engineer R.R.S. ‘William
Scoresby’ Scoresby’
A. N. Porteous, Second Engineer R.R.S. ‘Dis- R. Gourlay, Third Engineer R.R.S. ‘Discovery II’
covery II’
G. M. Gibbon, M.B., Ch.B., Surgeon.
Boe 99
TS
DISCOVERY
REPORTS
Vol. Ill, pp. 1-134, plates L-X
Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands
STATION LIST
1927-1929
:
ARSON TITS
eeseye
* JAN 20 831%
_
Strona, museF
CAMBRIDGE
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
1930
Price fourteen shillings and sixpence net
[Discovery Reports. Vol. III, pp. 1-132, Plates I-X, December, 1930]
DISCOVERY INVES TiGATTONS
ro) Levee Ie UA GUINE Sil Sys b
QUIEN)
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION : : : : ; ; . page 3
R.R.S. ‘WILLIAM SCORESBY ’, STATIONS 137-433 : : : 6
SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS, STATIONS 1-58 : : : IT4
ROSS SEA, STATIONS I-29. : : : : : 124
SUMMARISED LIST OF STATIONS : : : 132
PLATES I-X : ‘ : . following page 132
i
PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN, AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS, CAMBRIDGE
50E 4
fr
pees
DISCOVERY INVESTIGATIONS
SL AT EOIN ei Sak
O27 929
(Plates I—X)
INTRODUCTION
HE following lists contain particulars of all stations made by the R.R.S. ‘ William
Scoresby’ between January 1928 and the 6th of May 1929, of stations made by a
member of the Discovery Investigations staff from the whaling factory S.S. ‘Anglo-
Norse’ near the South Sandwich Islands from November 1927 to February 1928, and
of stations made by another member of the staff from the whaling factory S.5. ‘°C. A.
Larsen’ in the Ross Sea from November 1928 to February 1929.
Stations made by the ‘William Scoresby’ are entered first and have the letters WS
prefixed to their numbers. Those made near the South Sandwich Islands follow (pp.
114-123) and are distinguished as SS 1, SS 2, etc. Finally (pp. 124-131) those made
in the Ross Sea are given, numbered RS 1, RS 2, etc.
Details of the nature of the data in the lists are to be found in the Introduction
(pp. 3-5) of the previous Station List (vol. 1, pp. 1-140) except those noted below.
The abbreviations used in denoting the nature of the bottom, now being used by
the Admiralty, are as follows:
b. blue G. gravel Po. polyzoa
bl. black gn. green R. rock
br. brown gy. grey S. sand
c. coarse h. hard sm. small
ca. calcareous l. large Sn. shingle
Co. coral It. light Sh. shells
Cy. clay M. mud Sp. sponge
d. dark Md. madrepore St. stones
Di. diatom Oz. ooze w. white
faite P. pebbles y. yellow
~ placed above the figure for the sounding indicates that bottom was not reached.
Estimation of hydrogen-ion concentration was made by the colorimetric method,
cresol red being used as indicator with McClendon’s standards. Phosphate content was
again determined by Atkins’ method. It was not possible to make determinations of
phosphate content and hydrogen-ion concentration at the time the samples were taken.
The date on which the estimations were made is entered in the “‘ Remarks” column after
the letter A (analysed), thus A 18. ix. 28, etc.
3 I-2
The following symbols (employed previously) are those used for nets, apparatus, etc. :
B Oblique.
DC Conical dredge. Mouth 16 in. in diameter (40°5 cm.), with canvas bag.
DLH Large dredge. Heavy pattern, 4 ft. in length (1-2 m.).
H Horizontal.
KT Kelvin tube.
Naru Nets with mesh of 4 mm. or 7 mm. (0°16 in. or 0-28 in.) attached to back of trawl.
Nao)
N 50 50 cm. tow-net. Mouth circular, 50 cm. in diameter (19°5 in.): 200 meshes to the linear
inch.
N 70 70 cm. tow-net. Mouth circular, 70 cm. in diameter (27:5 in.): mesh graded, at cod-end
74 to the linear inch.
N1roo 1m. tow-net. Mouth circular, 1 m. in diameter (3-3 ft.): mesh graded, cod-end of stramin
with 11-12 meshes to the linear inch.
NCS-T Tow-net of coarse silk, with 16 meshes to the linear inch, attached to dredge, trawl, or
other net.
OTC Commercial otter trawl. Head rope 80 ft. long (24:5 m.): mesh at cod-end 13 in. (3-8 cm.).
V Vertical.
To the symbols for the tow-nets (N 100, N 70, N 50) B, H or V is always added to
indicate the direction in which the haul was taken.
For determining the depths from which oblique nets were hauled, Kelvin tubes were
constantly employed. ‘The symbol KT in the ‘‘ Remarks” column indicates their use and
where it does not occur it is to be understood that the depth was estimated.
Times are expressed on the 24-hour system, the day ending with midnight (0000).
The entry under “from” states the time when all the warp was paid out. ‘That under
“to” either gives the time when hauling began, or, with oblique nets, the time when
the nets reached the surface. When series of vertical nets were taken only the times
for the beginning and end of the series are given. The times given are “ship’s time’’,
corresponding nearly with local mean time. In order to distinguish hauls which were
made when it was dark, those times which fall between sunset and sunrise are printed
in heavy type.
At the end of the lists (p. 132) will be found a summary of the stations made by the
‘William Scoresby’ with references to the charts on which the positions are marked.
— ———————— ——. es
a
R.R.S. ‘WILLIAM SCORESBY’, STATIONS 137-433
SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS, STATIONS 1-58
ROSS SEA STATIONS 1-29
R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA B @ 6.
Station Position Date | Hour Sounding Weather gE 2 iS &
(metres) 9 9 oR 1S)
Direction & | Direction 5B a & = °
oa ca iw
1928
WS 187 | 52° 08’ 00"'5, 54° 55’ 00” W | 8-9 ii | 2050 1538 WSW | 3 SW 3 Onc. || LOOAS5 416-1
WS 138 | 52° 36’ 00” S, 52° 16’00” W | gii | 1700] 3381 WSW. | e5an Wis Vim iied! 0.¢. ggo0 | 6-1
WS 139] 53° 00’ 00” S, 49° 50’ 00” W | oii | 1840 2520
WS 140] 53° 17’ 00" S, 47° 02’ 00” W} 11 ii [1535] 3831 WNW /7-9| WSW | 2 | o.c. 986-9 | 5°6
Remarks
Station
WS 137
WS 138
WS 139
WS 140
Age of moon
(days)
16-
17
7
18
ug)
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
R.R.S. William Scoresby
Depth | Temp.
(metres) | ° Cent.
° 6:05
Sel) 6:07
10 6:07
20 6:03
30 5°99
40 5°95
50] 5°89
75 | 5°86
100 4°92
150 4°79
200 4:69
4°54
o| 6°55
5 | 674
ste) 6-79
20 6°17
30 6:17
40 6-16
50 6-14
75| 6:03
100 5°84
fe) 6°15
5 4°99
10 4°94
20 4:89
30 4°79
40 | 4°69
50
fe) 3°65
5 3°79
10 | 3°79
20 4:09
30} 4:24
40 | 4:29
50} 4°39
60] 4:39
80
P05] 6
iste aoe ce. p.l. SES
_- -_— = N70V
—— = oe »”»
a — =F ”
— aa) s5oV
N100B
N70B
N50 V
N100B
N70B
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Depth
500-250
(eae
1000~750
: Length
of tow
(miles)
100-0
0545
137-0 0616 | 0636
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
To omS9o
1000~—710
100-0
1710
2140
} 166-0 2210 | 2230
100-0 1840
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-200
Tom oS,
- 161-0
2240
2351 | oor
50-0
100-50
250-90 1645
500-250
750-460
1000~750
100-0 1930
I1I-O 2109 | 2124
colto
colt
colbo
WS 137—140
Remarks
obtained successfully on
fourth attempt
KT
KT. Net a little torn
high up
KT. Net broken away
around bucket
within 2-4 miles of an
enormous iceberg 70
miles long. Many
growlers and much
loose ice
KT
WS 140—144
Sounding
Station Position Date | Hour (metres)
"1928
Ili
WS 140] 53° 17’ 00” S, 47° 02’ 00” W
cont.
WS 141 | 53° 32’ 00" S, 44° 52’ 00” W | 13 ii | 1250] 3520M.
WS 142] 53° 33’ 00” S, 42° 03’ 00” W | 14 ii | 0810 220
WS 143] 53° 58’ 00” S, 40° 30’ 00” W | 14-15 | 2135 1719
ll
WS 144] 54° 08’ 00” 5S, 36° 10’ 00” W} 19 ii | 0745 279
M.
gn.
R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA
Weather
¥ 3
Direction | = | Direction | §
iS
cm By
NNE 2 N 2 b.c
W W f.e
NW SW Oo.
SW 2 —- fe) oO
Barometer
(millibars)
Air Temp.
° Cent.
998-9 | 6-1
984°8
ggo'8
1003°3
He
ye
2°8
_ Remarks
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 140—144
g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
ae
Station | = R k
og PO, TIME Length Cae
2~ | Depth| Temp. | g o és AA || (Op : Depth pe
< (aetres) Centa| > 7/2 ; oe me ce. p. 1. ea (metres) From | To (miles)
WS 140 500 2°28 | 34°43 | 27°52
cont 750 2°19 | 34°57 | 27°63
1000 2°08 | 34°62 | 27-69
1500 LETAD || Sede’ | Te)
WS 141 | 21 fo) 5°15 | 33°82 | 26°75 —: _- N70V 50-0 1250
emer Olli 33-02) )20;08 I) 33 100-50
10 APAQN 332921 120:025| ll = 5 250-100
20 | 4°47 | 33°79 | 26°80 et Be » 500-250
BO) |) 453911033: 79) | 20°81) || 1 |) . 750-490
40 | 4°39 | 33°84 | 26°84) — | — | — 55 1000-750
50 4°39 33°84 se — | — — N50 V 100-0 — | 1543
60 | 4:39 | 33°87 | 26-87 | — | — | — | Ni00B)|\ 2
80 2:24 | 33°96 | 27-14| — | — | — ]| N7oB |J Lou 1718 || 1738 S il
100 1-09) 33°99) | 27525
150 0°51 | 34°11 | 27°38
200 1°31 | 34°23 | 27°43
30° 2°17 | 34°42 | 27°51
400 | 269 | 34°59 | 27°60
500 | 220 | 34°59 | 27°65
750 | 2°16 | 34°67 | 27-72
1000 2°03 | 34°77 | 27°81
1500 1°65 | 34°76 | 27°82
WS 142 | 22 ° Bors || S¥e307{0) || PAOHy) || —— || = — N70V 50-0 o810
5 229981) 33279) 202950 ee cee |) » 100-50
10 PROD) || B70) || AOS || — = ||) == || == 96 210-100 | — | 0930
20 PILO{D) || 2121290) || AOA || <= || —= — | N100B |) 2 z
30 | 2-99 | 33°79 | 26-95 Fe | Niro \y 72-2 7p ert 237 |e ae
40 | 2°99 | 33°79 | 26°95
50 | 2°89 | 33°79 | 26-96
60 2°71 | 33°80 | 26-97
80 | 1°59 | 33°96 | 27°19
100 I'1g | 33°96 | 27°22
150 1-81 | 34°14 | 27°32
200 1°69 | 34°25 | 27°41
WS 148 | 22- ) HOG || BOs || 27K || —= |] —— — N70V 50-0 2140
23 5 3°50))|1346001 27-038 |e = 100-50
10 2:8Q)|| 34500) 27.03) |) —— | = = oD 250-100
20 2°89) 34501 ||'27:03) |e —— | = % 500-240
BO 3:89 134505) 27:00 |i » 750-470
40 aso) || Syirols || Ay Aels) || <= || ——= || —— % 1000-710
50 22891345051 27-00) | ne = N50 V 100-0 — | 0002
Goules 70134205 2707)| —— = |) Noo Be 2
80 | 2:59] 34:14 | 27-26| — | — | — | N70B [J tere See Wet : a
100 2°39 | 34°14 | 27°28
150 2°31 | 34°14 | 27-2
200 2°19 | 34°14 | 27°2
300 2°81 | 34:23 | 27°32
40o | 2°89 | 34°35 | 27°41
590 — || sarae
750 | 2°47 | 34°55 | 27°60
1000 2°16 | 34°58 | 27°65
E500 1°99 | 34°74 | 27°79
WS 144] 28 ) 2:67 | 33°52 | 26:76] — | — | — | N7o0V 50-0 0745
5 | 2°79 | 33°49 | 2672 | — | — | 6°80 » 100-50
10 Pra) || Beelsat || OA Lt || —— || —— = 3 270-100
20 2-79 | 33°51 | 26°74] — | — | 6:95 | Ns50V 100-0 — | 0845
30 Zoho) || ayesolgat || eAeea/.k || — || — — |Nr100B a 2 KT
40 2-79 | 33°51 | 26-74 | — | — | 6:92 | N70B 73° Esa ee
WS 144—149 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA ue || c,
= : od fe
Station Position Date | Hour Sounding Weather Bs BS Remarks
(metres) gv | ze
Direction | 5 | Direction ae cai
&
Ries Ges lass ~~ ll, le le
WS 144] 54° 08’ 00” S, 36° 10’ 00” W | 19 it
cont.
287 NW 4 NW 0.c. | 1003°0| 2°8
WS 145] 54° 00’ 00” S, 36° 00’ 00” W | rg it | 1135
gn. M.
WS 146 | 53° 50’ 00” S, 35° 50’ 00” W | 1g ii | 1505 1096 NW 6 NW
WS 147 | 53° 50’ 00” S, 35° 50’ 00” W | arii | 2030] 274 M. NW 2 NW — 996-7 | 10-0
2 Ob Ge 992°4.] 1°7
WS 148 | 53° 40’ 00” S, 35° 35’ 00” W | 22 ii |o410 — WNW | 2 | WNW
3009 WNW | 3 | WNW | 3 0.C¢. ggro| 1-7
WS 149} 53° 32’ 00” S, 35° 22’ 00” W | 22 ii |o6r15
gy. M.St.
Io
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 144—149
5 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Ee
Station 3g eed larep P,O, 5 tee TIME Length Remarks
2B | metres)| © Cent. | 8 "loo | of | PH [mem.| ccip1| Gear (metres) |Fon) to | OR
WS 144 50 2°81 | 33°47 | 26-70
cont. 60 PEL I0) || SENG) || A072} || — || —— || too
80 1°49 | 33°61 | 26-92
100 ONG \\ eats) || B7Re) || —= || == || 72
150 | 0°34 | 33°95 | 27°26] — | — | 6:32
200 COREIS) || SHIM | 7a ||) ae | am Srey
250 E19) 34527 27534) ae || ae || 4574:
WS 145 | 28 fo) apne || SieS3} || Berets) || —— || — Ns5o0V 100-0 1135
5 21Q)|\'33°57)|(20:93)|| — || — | 7:00 | Ni7oV 50-0
10 209 | 33°58 | 26:85 | — | — _ 5 100-50
20 2:07 | 33°58 | 20°85 | — | — | 7:08 3 275-100 | — | 1210
fe) 2-001 /33°50)| 20-649 || —— | — |N100B 5 :
a 1:96 | 33°55 | 26°84 | — | — | 7:02 | N70B |{ see 733° | 1350 S eo
50 1°16 | 33°69 | 27-00
Gy!" 90:76) 113327% ||27-°04)|) — || — | 6777
80 0°52 | 33°87 | 27°19
100 ©:2.0)1|133290))|k272 2778 I ll ee O27
B5ON}) 0:59) 34-151) 27°28) = |) = || 5°87
200 nO || SY eAo) || Areva} || —— || —— I oils)
250 12591) 34°45 27°58 = | || 4:23
WS 146 | 28 fo) PEI) || Rar || AAoPG7/ || —— || — —- N70V 50-0 1507
5 noe) || Berg] |) Alot) |) <= || —— |! GEO +p 100-50
10 oie || Seekonk} || AXeteIs || ——= || ——= -- 6 250-100
20 sone) || Severe || eAoeteto) || = 1] —— || Geto) 9 500-250
30 seen || gear its} || Loeteey || —— || — ° 750-500
40 1-19)|'33-49)|| 20:84) ——. |=" || 7-26 1000-750
50 neal |] Serenity || AOey-b || ——> || — — N50 V 100-0 — | 1817
60 0-89 | 33°58 | 26:93 | — | — | 6:96
80 0-19 | 33°81 | 27-16
100 0:16 | 33:97 | 27-29 | — | — | 6-12
150 nT S| | yA || 7S || |) —— || pie)
200/750 | 34:39)| 27°52] — | — | 4:83
309 1°79)| 344911 2759 | — | — | 449
400 | 1°89 | 34°58 | 27-67 | — | — | 3°99
500 | 1°97 | 34°54 | 27°63 | — | — | 4°14
WSO || 2700! /°34-03))27-70 | —— | — 11 3:57
1000 | 1-90 | 34°70 | 27°77| — | — | 3°46
WS 147] o ) 2 AO) |§AB%5 0020252) — N70V 50-0 2120
5 0) || SeeGs) || AoesKo) || |] | Oy 3p 100-50
10 AMY || Belts) || Alorte6) || |] —— — 250-100
20 2:09 | 33°58 | 26:86 | — | — | 660 |] N50V 100-0 — | 23r0
) 2°10 os) || Adele) || = || —= — | N100B }\ o 3
re 2°03 Bale 26:88 | — | — | 6-70 | N70B |j nee pa desl lata : KE
SO || 33:80
60 0°20)||'33:87 27-201 — || — ||| 6:25
80 | 0°19 | 33°95 | 27°25
100 | 0°29 | 33°97 | 27:28 | — | — | 5°91
150 TT 34°20\|(2724'0) ||) —— | — 9) 5-04
200 I-14 | 34°36 | 27°54 | — | — | 4°32
250} 1-30] 34°40] 27°55| — | — | 438
lia Ni eee a 99-0 | 0433 | 0453) § | KT
WS 149] 1 ) Oz{o) || Seegpe || AI || — || — — | N70V 50-0 0617
5 1:02 | 33°46 | 26:82 |} — | — | 6:86 x 100-50
10 nO? ||| a¥erolsie || AAoteiy/ || | = ro 250-100
20 0°99 | 33°51 | 26°87 | — | — | 6:66 rr 500-250
30 ORey || seme || AloHe%/ |) —— || — = % 750-500
it
WS 149—156 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND
Sounding
Hour (metres)
Station Position Date
Direction
Force
eS | 8 ee ee
cont.
WS 150] 53° 23’ 00” S, 35° 15 00” W
WS 1514 | 53° 17’ 00” S, 35° 08’ 00” W | 2211 | 1415 3841
WS 152] 53° 12’ 00” S, 34° 52’ 00” W NW 6
WS 153] 54° 02 00” S, 35° 30’ 00” W WNW | 4
WS 154
54° 00’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W NNW | 6
WS 155 | 53° 50’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W WNW | 7
WS 156
53° 40’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W WNW | 7
I2
SEA
Direction
NW
WNW
NNW
NW
NW
Force
Weather
Remarks
Barometer
(millibars)
° Cent.
1000°3
998°4
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 149—156
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Station Remarks
Age of moon
Depth | Temp. oy. 2 O; : Pength
(metres) | ° Cent. 5 “loo zm. ay —_——— ek iy
0-79 : 1000—750
0°78 100-0
0°53
0°31
o-19
0°13
1°03
1°59
1°88
1°95
1°83
1°58
i 103-0
i 65-0 1215 | 1235
50-0 1420
100-50
250-100
500-250
TS
1000-750
100-0
} 88-0
13
WS 156—163 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA
Remarks
sus Sounding ne
Position (metres) Weather
Barometer
(millibars)
Station
Direction Direction
1928
WS 156] 53° 40’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W | 26i1
cont.
WS 157 | 53° 30’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W
WS 158 | 53° 20’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W
WS 159] 53° 10’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W | 2711 | 1348
3182 1:7 | slight swell
WS 160] 53° 00’ 00” S, 36° 52’ 00” W | 27 ii | 1520
gy. M. St.
0. g. I'r | sea conf.
WS 161 | 52° 50’ 00" S, 36° 52’ 00” W | 27 ii | 1958
0.g.r. | 999°4| 41
WS 162] 53° 42’ 00" S, 36° 17’ 00” W | 28 ii | 0850
WS 163] 53° 54'S, 38° 18’ W 29 li | 1548 0.q.r. | 9924] 4:4
14
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 156—163
8 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
E@
Station 3.8 P.O. ue TIME Length Remarks
o~ | Depth} Temp. oy Bisse O, z ae
2 |imetresi| ° Cent, |S “leo | of | PH )mem.|_.5.,] Gear Gees) ea pate
WS 156 60 1°37 | 33°68 | 27:03
cont. 80 0°31 | 33°90 | 27°22
100 0:24 | 33°98 | 27°30
150 OS ON SA eal 27,42
200 9°97 | 34°35 | 27°55
Sao 0 NEA I 84-0 0800 | 0820 % KT
WS 158] 6 fo) 2255133755 (20:79) — | Nso0V 100-0 1027
5 2.8) (033251) 20:801 = N70V 50-0
10 2445|/33°50)|| 20:00 | | o 3 100-50
20 2 AQ33-50i|(20:01e | — 5 250-100
30 2 A2N\33855 Ol) 20:01" |e | — % 500-250 | — | 1233
) 2ATHQ3-50N|20:80 |) —— ||) —— — |N100B a °
us Boe 33°52 | 2678 | — | — | — | N70B Tee Ouse | eu e HSE
60 2°39 | 33°56 | 26-81
70 1°87 | 33°62 | 26-91
80 0°38 | 33°78 | 27°12
100 0°19 | 33°90 | 27°22
150 1:09 | 34°20 | 27°41
200 1°57 | 34°32 | 27°47
afore) 1°99 | 34°47 | 27°57
400 | 2°07 | 34°53 | 27°61
500 2°10 | 34°63 | 27°69
ByS159)) 6 pees } 104-0 1355 | 1415 3 KT
WS 160] 6 0) 2 AS03325 09 | 20:00) |e — N50 V 100-0 1600
5 ZA || Ye{O| Aor!) || —— || —— — N70V 50-0
10 ZLOy|33250)|-20:03 0) | ee — 5 100-50
20 2°18 | 33°56 | 26°83 | — | — | 6:86 7 250-100
30 ZA Ba5 on 202049 | — % 500-250 | — | 1723
fo) 2°16 59 | 26°37 | — | — | 7-02 | NxrooB || 2 ,
eS 2°16 an ATS) || — || — | N7o0B |J 2° 1534 | 1554 2 ey
60 2°17 | 33°60 | 26°86
80 1*89 | 33°64 | 26-92
go 0:31 | 33°82 | 27°13
100 SHC) || SeHhe} |] Syerks) ||P —— | | O77
150 piss) || Syicids) || yee |) — | | ay
200 | 1°59 | 34°34] 27°49] — | — | 4°64
300 Me SON 345521237202) |e || O8
400 TOS 2425002700) — saa | acrs
500 reays) || ZVI) || 7R7(@) || —= || =" lI) oy
WS 161) 6 NCA } 104-0 | 2004 | 2024} 3 |KT
S162) 7 a f 93-0 0858 | og18 3 KT
WS 163] 8 fo) Preis) || SH) || AOGyu ||) — |] _ N70V 50-0 1550
5 E80) |)33503)| 20:92) —— ||) || 6:03 3 80-50
10 I-79 | 33:63 | 26:92 | — | — | — | N50V 85-0 — | 1623
20 1-72 ‘60 | 26:90 | — | — | 6:85 | N100B || y an
30 a 33-68 AKO || —= || = — | N7oB |/ ee e732 720 x y
40 1°59 | 33°68 | 26-96 | — | — | 6:90
50] 1°47 | 33°69 | 26-98
60 HONS) || 3773 || Q7RCHE |) ——— | = | ORI)
80 0°70 | 33°82 | 27°14
go O46)|33:80N 7207 elt 10258
15
R.R.S. William Scoresby
WS 164—169
WIND SEA cee as
: o¢ fe
Station Position Date | Hour eee a » | Weather Be as Remarks
Direction 5 Direction E a& ac
1928
WS 164] 53° 40’ S, 38° 32’ W 29 ii |1842| 153R. NE 6 NE 6) |Monghrs 992-45 353
WS 165] 53° 44'S, 38° 46’ W I ill |0130 164 NE 4-5 NE 4 f. 987°2 | 2-7
gen. M.
WS 166 | 53° 36’ S, 39° 08’ W I iii {0530 153 W 3 WwW 2 | b.c. | 985-9] 3:3
WS 167} 53° 31'S, 39° 22’ W T iii | 0845 740 W 3-5 W 3-5] ©. 986-4 | 3:3
WS 168 | 53° 26’ S, 39° 36’ W Iili |1310] 2496 WxN | 9 | WxN | 6 | 0.q.r. | 985-2] 3:9
gy. M.
WS 169] 54° 36’ 00” S, 35° 40’ 00” W | 6 iii 1145 114 S 3 S 3 v.c 993°4 | 83
gy. M.
16
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 164—169
g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
oN
: £e
Station | +5 / Remarks
3~ | Depth | Temp. $ °/ t H P,Os O, G Depth ae Henge
= | (metres) | ° Cent. 00 = P mgm! cc. p. 1. ae (metres) ob low
p.m.* From To (miles)
WS 164] 8 fo) 2 AONl~ S350) || 20:62) | — |N100B 5 Z
5 2:10 | 33°62 | 26-89 | — | — | 7:03 | N70B cui £853) 1983 8 us
10 AGI || See) || AAO) || — > || — _ N50V 100-0 1933
20 2:09 | 33°64 | 26-90 | — | — | 7-00 | N7oV 50-0
30 2:00)|| 33-025 |'20:89)|5 =| ~- ; 100-50
40 1°89 | 33°66 | 26-93 | — | — | 6:95 5 140-100 | — | 2118
50 1°59 | 33°68 | 26-96
Go| 1-18 | 33°75. | 27-05 | — | — | 6-74
80 0:29 | 33°95 | 27°26
100 O:19}|(33;901||27-25 || — || ——||"6:00
140 | 0:24 | 33°98 | 27°30] — | — | 5-90
2°48 | 33°63
S|) 2723,|33758)| 20:85 | — |) — || 690 | N7oV | 50-0
10 2°25 33°59 26:86 a = —— a 100-50
Zoli 2:19) 33°59) 20:80| — | — ||| 6:96 »» 150-100 | — | 0240
Boul (e291 (337591) 20:50) — || — || — || Nizoo BY) 7 ,
40 2:19 | 33°58 | 26°85 | — | — | 7or | N70B |f 133-0 0341 | 0404 4 KT
50 2:02 | 33°56 | 26°85
60 0:82 | 33:75 | 27:07 | — | — | 6:62
80 0:29 | 33°87 | 27°19
100 | 0:27 | 33°98 | 27:29 | — | — | 6:09
0°38 | 34:00 | 27°30 | — | — | 6:26
WS 166 | 10 Co) 2°35 | 33°65
5 2-119) 1033-05) |, 20:90))|) —— || — | N70V 50-0
10 215 t33°05)|20:01)|| | — ms 100-50
20 2:56i| 33°05 (26:91) —— | = | — op 140-100 | — | 0613
30 Pra || BAO) || AOXo pi || || — |N100B }) ie 2 ;
40 | 2:09 | 33°68 | 26-93 | — | — | — | N70B |f 97-0 | 0659 | 9719 % |KT
50 2°10 | 33°72 | 26°97
60 2:06 | 33°72 | 26°97
80 0°53 | 33°89 | 27°20
100 O-41
0°78 | 34°23 | 27°46
PASE || exzpt || Aoxsh) || —= || — — Ns50V 100-0 ogol
5 ZY.) || Setepe || ASOe) || —— || —— = N70 V 50-0
10 2°40) |/33-00)||'2.0:90) || ——) ||) — — 5 100-50
20 22481) 33-72)|20:03) ||| —— ||) = — 33 250-100
30 Aviat || Sext7 || ALOrGy || —= |p — = 63 460-250 | — | I0I5 — | net touched bottom
40 Penge || areKafe) |! AQ) || —— || —— — |N100B c 2
50 Be aa aile6ro6 || | — -_ N70B \ 104-0 I115 | 1135 2 KT
60 | 1°49 | 33°73 | 27°01
80 | 0°59 | 33°91 | 27°21
100 0°48 | 33°92 | 27°23
150 0°89 | 34°18 | 27°42
200 1-29 | 34-32 | 27°50] — | — | 4°68
1°89
WS 168] 10 | — = =
WS 169} 14 °
17
R.R.S. William Scoresby
WS 169—176
WIND SEA by a
: F a8 ss
Station Position Date | Hour ee 4 » | Weather es ES
Direction 5 Direction 8 ae ae
1928 oe aay es | eae | bee a tee
WS 169] 54° 36’ 00” S, 35° 40’ 00” W | 6 iii
cont.
WS 170| 54° 36’ 00” S, 35° 18’ 00” W | 6 iii | 1424 — S 3 S 3 v.c 993°4| 83
WS 171 | 54° 36’ 00” S, 35° 00’ 00” W | Gili | 1600} 274 R. Bex Nese eaeN alias itoncad 993°6 | 2:8
WS 172 | 54° 36’ 00” S, 34° 50’ 00” W | Oil | 1907 NNE 2 — || CHEE |! Gogo || SH)
WS 173] 54° 36’ 00” S, 34° 25’ 00” W | 6-7 |2145 1243 NNE I ~- 0) |/0..c.-m\ || 1993;4)|| 2:2
ili gy. M.
sm. P.
WS 174] 54° 36’ 00" S, 34° 08’ 00” W | 7 ili | 0123 — NNE I — o | 0.c.m.| 9934] 2:2
WS 175 | 54° 36’ 00” S, 33° 50’ 00” W | 7 1 | 0255 2578 N 3 N 3 0.c 988-0 | 11
WS 176 | 54° 36’ 00” S, 33° 35’ 00” W | 7iii |0720 a N 3 N 3 o.c 988-0 | I:
18
I
Remarks
Station
WS 172
WS 178 | 14-
WS 174
WS 175
WS 176
Age of moon
(days)
14
14
14
15
a5)
15
15
R.R.S. William Scoresby
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
P.O;
ee aor: Savon ot pH eae oe l
60 I-71 | 33°46 | 26-78
80 1°39 | 33°55 | 26°88
100 0°99 | 33°62 | 26-96
fo) PEAS || BY 10) || ACH sh0) || —= || —— =
5 PERIC) || Yareysl || Adkele) || —— || — —
IO | 2-09 | 33°64 | 26-90 | — | — | —
20 | 2°07 | 33°65 | 26-91 | — | — | —
30 204511 33°05 | 26:92))|| — |) =
40 203) ||133:66)|/26:92) | — ||| =
50 2°02 | 33°68 | 26-93
60 | 1-99 | 33°69 | 26-94
80 | 1-99 | 33°71 | 26°94
100 ‘OI | 33°82 | 27°12
50 E78) || Heys || ales
200 | 0°85 | 34:25 | 27°47
250 | 1°17 | 34°41 | 27°58
ON 82245) 13377701, 20-925) |)
Balin? 95)1|' 33,091 |120:91 ayaa ||| a
10 PAPA || Be o}s) || PAOHONE || —— |) =
20 Pew | eke ots) | PXerons || —= |] _=
30 Pe) || Bests) || Aopoyi || <= || — =
40 2249133608 1:20:02) (alee =
BORN E891 1536 7902703) | a aa
60 I-00 | 34:02 | 27-28
80 | 0°84 | 34°09 | 27°34
100 I'II | 34°16 | 27°38
150 I°I5 | 34°16 | 27-38
200 2°19 | 34°42 | 27°52
300 2°09 | 34°49 | 27°59
400 | 2:09 | 34°53 | 27°61
500 | 209 | 34°63 | 27-69
fo) (9) || GYOEY || AAaHeh6) || —— ||| — =
5 WOES) || BCI) || AOS) |} ——— |]! aya
10 TOE || ero) || eo} || <= || —
20 | 1°44 | 33°53 | 26°85 | — | — | 7°04
30: |) 1:33) 3375512088 |) — | | —
40 1:32)((33-55 | 26:88 || — ||| — | 7:06
50 TO) |h33-04) | 20:06) | |) ae aa
60 | 0°79 | 33°78 | 27°09 | — | — | 679
80 0°81 | 34°11 | 27°36
100 0°79 | 34°18 | 27-42 | — | — | 5°89
150} 1°37 | 34°27 | 27-45 | — | — | 4°98
200 | 1°49 | 34°34 | 27°950| — | — | 4°66
300 | 1°98 | 34:48 | 27°58] — | — | 3°98
400 | 1°84 | 34°58 | 27-67 | — | — | 3°90
500 | = 1°85 | 34°67 | 27°74 | — | — | 3°99
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
N100B
N70B
19
Depth
\
J 109-0
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
+ 102-0
J
} 102-0
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
j 103-0
} g8-o
TIME
2001
0130
0305
0553
0731
1451
1749
1745
2021
2300
ooI2
0150
0431
0613
0752
WS 169—176
Length Remarks
| of tow
(miles)
2 |KT
2 |KT
2 |KT
2 KT
2 |KT
g | KT
WS 177—184 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA
Sounding Weather Remarks
Date | Hour (metres)
Barometer
(millibars)
Station Position
Direction
1928
WS 177 | 54° 58’ 00” S, 35° 00’ 00” W | 7 iu
WS178|10 miles SE of Cooper] 7 ili
Island, South Georgia
WS 179 | 55° 08’ 00” S, 35° 20’ 00” W | 7iii | 1833
WS 180] 55° 18’ 00” 5, 35° 10’ 00” W |} 7 iii |2130] 150M.
WS 181 | 55° 25’ 00" S, 35° 00’ 00” W | 8 ili | 0035
8 iii | 0315 878
WS 182] 55° 30’ 00” S, 34° 50’ 00” W
o715 1048
0830
WS 183] 55° 36’ 00” S, 34° 40’ 00” W | 8 iii
WS 184] 55° 12’ 00” S, 37° 50’ 00” W | 8 iii | 1907
20
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 177—184
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Station TIME Length Remarks
of tow
From To (miles)
Age of moon
Depth| Temp. P,Os O, (Gla Depth
(metres)| ° Cent. ° ; pane ce. p.1. (metres)
1339 | 1400 touched bottom. KT
1545
WS 179 | 15
many icebergs in vicinity
5
16
Colbo colto
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
750-520
1000-759
100-0
16
colo
WS 184] 16
Colne Colpo
21
WS 185—195 R.R.S. William Scoresby
on
Sau eae
: == | ee eS
ee Sounding Weather Eze Yo Remarks
Station Position Date | Hour (metres) 9 9 ee E oO
Direction | & | Direction | % Ps} 5°
: 2 28
55° 06’ 00” S, 37° 30’ 00” W
54° 55 00" 5, 37° 10’ 00" W | 8ili | 2224 = = fe) = o | 0.c.m, | 1007:2 | 2°8
54° 50 00" S, 37°05’ 00” W 1007°2
1007°2
54° 42" 00” Ss 36° 55' 00” WwW
53° 30’ 00" S, 38° 35’ 00” W 1005°4
55 miles NW of Bird I,J roiii }orrs 2158 — ° — Oo) || (0m. || t00K:2)3°3
S Georgia
65 miles NW of Bird I,
S Georgia
From 200 — fo) — fo) 0.¢. 99770] 28
54° 22’ 06"S, 38° 30’ 00” W | 10-11 | 2045 m. (3)
to lll —
54° 08" 18” S, 38° 26’ 42” W
53° 42’ 00” S, 38° 28’ 00” W
From _ _- fo) — (o) Opies || serosa} || ea)
53° 23'00"S, 37° 10’ 00” W | 11-12 | 1445
to ill —
53° 03/00" S, 36° 52’ 00” W
From — ESE 33 ESE 2 Cc 1004'2 | 2:2
54°00’ 00"S, 34° 45’ 00” W | 12-13 | 1800
to iii —
53° 42’ 00”S, 34° 10’ 00” W
22
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 185—195
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Station TIME Length Remarks
—<$<—_ | OoO7
From To (miles)
Age of moon
Depth] Temp. - Depth
(metres) } ° Cent. 00 el Gear (metres)
V'86-6
|
| oe
\
| 86-0
r+ I1Q—O
100-0
50-0
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
Dae)
1000~750 net very slightly torn
f 110-0
KT
27 consecutive hauls
(A-AA) each of 15
mins. duration. Sun-
set 1839; sunrise 0543
KT
23 consecutive oblique
hauls (A—-W) each of 20
mins. duration. Sunset
1835; sunrise 0545
26 consecutive oblique
hauls (A—Z) each of 20
mins. duration. Sunset
1834; sunrise 0546
H
co
a)
-
eo
w
ia)
i,
7
-
\o
pas
nN
=
i)
w
a
/
/
Nv
N
Lend
N
Nv
N
w
Nv
/
/
i=}
=)
>
a
°
-
)
77)
/
/
/
i;
°
7)
°
>
23
WS 196—199 R.R.S. William Scoresby
SEA
Sounding
Position Hour (metres) A
Direction
Station
Direction
1928
14 iv | 1640 235
WS 196] 54° 36’ 00” S, 38° 38’ 00” W
gn. M.
WS 197] 56° 00’ 00” S, 40° 50’ 00” W | 17 iv | 0500 2492
WS 198 | 57° 30’ 00” S, 42° 52’ 00” W | 19 iv | 1300 3775
ExN
WS 199] 58° 10’ 00” S, 44° 10 00” W | 20 iv | 1025 3813
gn. gy. M.
24
Weather Remarks
Barometer
(millibars)
slight NW
swell
1003°9 | — 0:3] v. heavy swell
992°7 | 0-6 |slight swell
991°7 | — 1:7 | slight swell
R.R.S. William Scoresby
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
WS 196—199
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Station P.O;
mgm.
p.m.*
Depth| Temp.
(metres)] ° Cent.
Age of moon
WS 197 | 27
WS 198 | 29
TIME Length Remarks
of tow
(miles)
Depth
Gear (metres)
From To
N70V 50-0
3 100-50
200-100
100-0
1717
N50 V
- 103-0
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-265
71595590
3 1000-800
N 100 B || ear
N70B || 3
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
750-500
a 1000-740
N 100 B
N70B |/ 109-0
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
Taleo le
I000~750
- LIg-O
25
WS 199—202 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA aa |S
is ; oa Gas
Station Position Date | Hour eae 9 3 Weather Be Ba Remarks
Direction | 5 | Direction] § ae ae
ey ea
1928 al Saale Se a ile eal a
WS 199] 58° 10’ 00” S, 44° 10’ 00” W | 20 iv
cont.
WS 200 | 59° 05’ 00” S, 46° 32’ 00” W | 21 iv | 1215 1317 SW 4 SW I 0.c. | 1007°7 | — 1°7
gn. M.
WS 201 | 59° 57’ 00" S, 50° 12’ 00” W | 22 iv | 1840 4134 NW I NW I fe 999°7 | — 2:2
WS 202 | 60° 23’ 00” S, 52° 52’ 00” W | 23 Iv | 1830 3987 SW I — fo) b. 980-2 | — 1-1 | station
gn.M worked in
sm. P. open lane
inside
pack ice
26
Station
WS 202
Age of moon
(days)
3
R.R.S. William Scoresby
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
P.O;
Depth | Temp. 0 Oo
(metres)| ° Cent. S "Too cu pH Saar ce. p. 1.
300 | 1°51 | 34°62 | 27°73
400 | 1°52 | 34°69 | 27°77
500 | 1°59 | 34°70 | 27°78
750 I-10 | 34°69 | 27-80
oO OAT 343047 2732)|| ae oe ||| on
5 O59) 34500 27:29) | me
10 (©0601 /§34°018)|:27-20) ||| —— | —
20 O.0481| 24-008 1827-20) || —
30 (0:04)|(24-010|127:20) | —— || =
40 (0:62) 134-01) |(27-20)|| —— | —— —
50 Or52a (Is 4com 127-30) | |
60 Oss ONS 4501" (27-20) —
80 ©: 04534-20127 445 || —
100 0°66 | 34°30 | 27°51
150 | 0°99 | 34°46 | 27°63
200 1-22) |/ 34253) 27-07
300 | 1°58 | 34°64 | 27°74
400 | 1°59 | 34°64 | 27°74
500 | = 1°55 | 34°69 | 27°77
750 | 1°31 | 34°68 | 27°79
1000 0°92 | 34°70 | 27°83
OR O:0511/34°05 127530) ) 1 ye
5 || = xe || eyicery || yectss || —— || —= || =
M05 |—=10-03)1134205.|||27°39)|6 =) —
20 | — 0°62 | 34:06 | 27°39 | — | — =
30 | — 0-61 | 34:06 | 27-39 | — | — =
40 | — 0:61 | 34°07 | 27-40 | — | — —
50) || 10-68 94207) 27-40) || — ||| — =
60 | — 0-61 | 34:07 |.27-40 | — | — —
80 | — 0°53 | 34:10 | 27-42 | — | — =
100 | — 0°35 | 34°18 | 27-48
150 | — 0°47 | 34°34 | 27°62
200 | — 0°56 | 34-41 | 27°67
300 | — 0°39 | 34°56 | 27°79
400 | — 0-28 | 34°57 | 27°79
BINS) || CP) || BES) | TTS)
750 0-01 | 34°60 | 27-80
1000 | — 0:06 | 34-61 | 27-82
1500 | — 0°17 | 34°65 | 27°85
Onl —et-OSN33°70) |f27-2 0 |e |
By |] = ots) || sy3e7Rs) || ape || || =
NOW |i-——2-009))|1 33-78) [27-20 | —— || — =
20 | — 1°69 | 33°78 | 27-21 | — | — =
BON 1:0451'33779) 27:22) — | = |
AON — ESA 33°83//27°25 | — | — |
50 | — 1-49 | 33°87 | 27:26] — | — | —
Coq 23751135595 27733)|\ a= | = |
70 | — 0°86 | 34:09 | 27-42 | — | — =
80 | — 0-71 | 34°14 | 27°47
100 | — 0-61 | 34:21 | 27°51
150 | — 0°47 | 34°33 | 27°60
200 | — 0°49 | 34°33 | 27°60
300 | — 0°61 | 34°53 | 27°78
400 | — 0°51 | 34°56 | 27°80
500 | — 0-26 | 34-61 | 27°82
750 | 0°02 | 34°64 | 27°84
1000 O-01 | 34°65 | 27°84
1500 | — 0-19 | 34°65 | 27°85
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Gear
N 100 B ||
N70B |/
N 100 B ||
N70B |{
2,
Depth
(metres)
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
750-500
1000-730
Okie
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
750-500
1000~—750
995°
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
oom
1000-750
TIME
From To
1220
— 1420
1444 | 1505
1847
— | 2255
2322 | 2344
1845
— | 2115
2135 | 2210
2240 | 2315
2335 | 2352
Length
of tow
(miles)
cole
eolto
colo
WS 199—202
Remarks
KT
AE
ship moved
pack ice
”
ship moved
KT
to
clear
WS 203—206 R.R.S. William Scoresby
SEA 3e
. og
Station Position Date | Hour eeene Weather eS Remarks
Direction Direction eis)
1928
WS 203] 57° 42’ 00” S, 53° 12’ 00” W | 25 iv | 1845 4259 heavy swell
br. gy. M.
St.
b.c. | 1012°6 | — 2:2] v. heavy swell
WS 204] 56° 27’ 00” S, 54° 22’ 00” W | 26 iv | 1900 3388
br. gy. M.
4207 NWxN}| 1
27 IV | 1715
y- gy. M.
WS 205] 55° 49’ 00” S, 56° 18’ 00” W
28 iv }og5o| 389 G. | SWxW]| 1 | SWxW] 1
WS 206 | 54° 43’ 00” S, 58° 02’ 00” W
Station
Depth
(metres)
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
ONT Ww
nN
54
5°5
5°6
5°6
5:60
55
55
5
54
Nomo Noe e)
LY YC) Co tus Gig SACs
WrAINMHMNO NS
HOMO OM Ww +S
R.R.S. William Scoresby
WS 203—206
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Depth
(metres)
TIME Length Remarks
From
100-0
500-250
USS
250-100
100-50
1000-750
50-0
N r00 B ||
N70B || 93°
100-0
500-310
250-100
100-50
(eee
1000~750
gI—-o
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
350-250
1915
2112
of tow
To (miles)
2245
2346
WS 206—213
Station Position
R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND
Sounding
(metres)
Weather
Barometer
(millibars)
Direction Direction
WS 206] 54° 43’ 00” S, 58° 20’ 00” W
cont.
WS 207 | 54° 12’ 00” S, 58° 40’ 00” W
WS 208] 54° 10’ 00” S, 59° 38’ 00” W
WS 209] 54° 08’ 00” S, 60° 40’ 00” W
WS 210] 50° 17’ 00” S, 60° 06’ 00” W
WS 211 50° 17’ 00" S, 60° 06’ 00” W
WS 212] 49° 22’ 00” S, 60° 10’ 00” W
WS 213] 49° 22’ 00” S, 60° 10’ 00” W
0800
1230
9940
100 G. SWxs
161 gn. S. SW
— SW
174 gn. S.
242
gn.S.M.P.
249
gn.S. M.P.
249 SE
gn.S. M.P.
239
gn.S. MP.
30
Air Temp.
° Cent
4:2
Station
Depth | Temp.
(metres) | ° Cent.
Age of moon
(days)
5°89
50 39%
60 5°85
80 5°85
100 5°83
150 5°52
200 5°27
300 5°06
andl
6:02
5 6:02
IO 6-02
20 6:02
30 6:02
40 6-02
50 6-02
60 6:02
80 6:02
fo) 6:22
5 6:22
10 6:22
20 6-22
30 6:22
40 6:22
50 6-22
60 6:22
WS 209 | 10 o) 6-21
5 6:21
sf) 6°23
20 6:23
30 6:27
40 6-27
50 6-21
60 6-21
||
°
Soo
34°10
34°10
34°10
34°14
34°16
34°16
34°20
34°23
34°34
34°97
S107,
34°07
34°07
Sy
34507)
34°07
34597
34°97
34°06
34:06
34:06
34:06
34:06
34:06
34:06
34:06
34:06
34:06
34:06
34:06
34:06
34°07
34°97
34°07
34°97
34°07
34°07
33°88
ot
26°87
26°87
26°88
26:92
26°93
26:97
27°03
27°07
26:84
26°84
26°84
26°84
26°84
26°84
26°84.
26°84
26°84.
26:80
26:80
26°80
26:80
26°80
26:80
26°80
26:80
26°80
26:80
26:80
26:80
26:80
26:80
26°81
26:81
R.R.S. William Scoresby
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
pH
P.O;
eaa8 O, Depth
aaa? ccnp. Ll: Gear (metres)
= — N50 V 100-0
= = N70V 50-0
= = +) 100-50
= — | N100B ||
—|— | N7BIj 75°
N50 V
N70V
N 100 B ||
N70B |/J
N50 V
N70V
N 100 B ||
N70B |/{
70-0
70-0
65-0
80-0
80-0
36-0
TIME
To
From
— | 1500
1600
— | 2044
2125
— | 0040
Length
of tow
(miles)
H
Ny
ie)
co
colto
colto
Oe
OI21 4
WS 206—213
Remarks
KT. Heavy rain
snow-squalls
trawl hitched; did not
fish properly
trawl hitched; no catch
WS 214—223
R.R.S. William Scoresby
Station
WS 214
WS 215
WS 216
WS 217
WS 218
WS 219
WS 220
WS 221
WS 222
WS 223
WIND SEA
Position Date | Hour cca 9 9
Direction | § | Direction | 5
ez ez
1928
48° 25’ 00" S, 60° 40’ 00” W | 31 v | 0630 208 SE I SE I
fades.
1100 219
Hie Gla Sk
47° 37’ 00” S, 60° 50’ 00” W | 31 v | 1500 219 SE I SE 2
f.gn.5.
1720 146
f.gn.S.
47° 37' 00" S, 60° 50’ 00” W | 1 vi |0645) 219f.S. E 3 E 3
1030| 133f.S.
46° 28’ 00” S, 60° 18’ 00” W | xvi | 1530 146 E 3 E 3
f.gn.S.
1820 146
f.gn.S.
45° 45°00" S, 59° 35’ 00" W | 2vi |0630| 311.5. E 3 E 3
1020] 247d.5.
47° 06’ 00” S, 62° 12’ 00” W | 3 vi |0630] 116d.5S. SE 2 SE 2
0955) 114d.58.
47° 56’ 00” S, 62° 38’ 00" W | 3 vi | 1530] 108 br. S. E 4 E 3
1740 | 104 br. 5.
48° 23’ 00" 5, 65° 10’ 00" W | 4 vi |0735 76 N 3 N 3
br. S. M
P.1.St. Sh
1000 91
br. 5S. M
P.1.St. Sh
48° 23' 00” S, 65° 00’ 00” W | 8 vi | 0615 100 NECGES | P4e eNie Ese:
c. br. 5
Sh.
0930 106
c. br. S
Sh.
49° 13’ 00" S, 64° 52’ W 8vi | 1445 114 NE 5 NE 4
c. br. S.
Sh.
1715 II4
c. br. S.
Sh.
32
Weather
Barometer
(millibars)
1028-9
1027°6
1024°3
1023°8
1018-9
IOI7"I
1004'8
1007°7
1009"I
1002°2
Air Temp.
° Cent
Ww
No)
44
3°9
3°3
3°9
3°9
3°9
das
72
Remarks
slight E swell
mod. E swell
slight E swell
mod. N swell
heavy NE
swell
v. heavy N
swell
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 214—223
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Station
TIME Dength Remarks
———_———| of tow
From To (miles)
Depth | Temp. o/ O, Depth
cc. pel. Gear (metres)
Age of moon
(days)
208 0630 | 0650
208-219 | Ogio trawl torn
trawl hitched; did not
fish
219-133
311-247
trawl hitched
100-106
114
II4-114
33
WS 224—235 R.R.S. William Scoresby
SEA
Sounding
Stati iti Rema:
Station Position (metres) emarks
Barometer
(millibars)
Direction Direction
50° 18’ 00” S, 65° 07’ W 124 gn. 58. x 5 . . mod. N swell
126 gn.S.
50° 20’ 00" S, 62° 30’ 00” W 71 162 gn. 5. BGs ‘2 |mod. N swell
Shee
161 gn. S.
Sh. P.
49° 20’ 00” S, 62° 30’ 00” W 144 gn. S.
152 ¢n.S.
51° 08’ 00” S, 56° 50’ 00” W
50° 50’ 00” S, 56° 58’ 00” W
236 Sh.
Cc. Ww. 5.
50° 35' 00” S, 57° 20’ 00” W 210
50° 10’ 00” S, 58° 42’ 00” W
50° 10’ 00" S, 58° 42’ 00” W
49° 25’ 00" S, 59° 45’ 00” W
49° 25'00"S, 59° 45’ 00” W
48° 52’ 00” S, 60° 25’ 00” W
47° 56’ 00” S, 61° 10’ 00” W p A e sea conf.
34
Station
Age of moon
(days)
R.R.S. William Scoresby
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Depth | Temp.
(metres) | ° Cent.
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Gear
Depth
(metres)
195
195-207
155
155-155
TIME Length
of tow
(miles)
WS 224—235
Remarks
trawl clear; did not fish
on bottom continu-
ously?
trawl clear; did not fish
on bottom continu-
ously?
trawl hitched and badly
torn
catch of trawl negligible ;
left bottom with change
of depth?
trawl badly hitched
trawl appeared to have
fished properly
trawl badly hitched; no
catch
R.R.S. William Scoresby
WS 236—246
WIND
Fabs Sounding
Station Position Date | Hour (metres)
Direction
1928
WS 236 | 46° 55’ 00" S, 60° 40’ 00” W | 6 vii | 1500 “the oes N
1755 | 300 d. gn.
S.M.
WS 237] 46° 00’ 00" S, 60° 05’ 00” W | 7 vil | 0950 150 N
c.br.S.Sh
1235 256
c.br.S. Sh
WS 238} 48° 30’ 00” S, 61° 50’ 00” W | 8 vii | 0820 148 NE
Cabraoak
St. b. Cy
1100 148
CabieiSak
St. b. Cy
WS 239] 51° 10’ 00” S, 62° 10’ 00” W | 15 vii | 1600 196 W
c.d.S
1900 193
c.d.S
WS 240] 51° 55’ 00" S, 65° 10’ 00” W | 16 vii | 0845 144 S
c.br.S
1100 41
c. br. 5
WS 244 | 51° 55’ 00" S, 65° 10’ 00” W | 16 vii | 1505 143 WSW
c. br. S
1700 157
c. br. S
WS 242] 51° 06’ 00” 5, 66° 30’ 00” W | 17 vii | 0610 119 WSW
5 Glb tip JE
ogt4. 119
Cok te lee
WS 243] 51° 06’ 00” S, 64° 30’ 00” W | 17 vii | 1530 144 WSW
c.d.S
1740 141
c.d.5
WS 244 | 52° 00’ 00” S, 62° 40’ 00” W | 18 vii | 0645 253 W
f.d.S.M
0945 247
f.d.S.M
WS 245 | 52° 36’ 00”S, 63° 40’ 00” W | 18 vii | 1535 304 SW
d.gn.S.
Md.s. P.Sh.
1900 290
d.gn.S.
Md.s. P. Sh.
WS 246 | 52° 25’ 00” S, 61° 00’ 00” W | 19 vii | 0855 267 SSW
c.gn.S.P
1200 208
c.gn.S.P
1250 192
c.gn.S
Sh. St. Po
36
Ww
Nv
7-8
SEA
Direction
NE
WSW
WSW
WSW
SW
SSW
Weather
Cc.
oo
i
Barometer
(millibars)
998-1
1003'5
985°9
9997),
995°8
IOOI*O
1002°7
1006°5
1010°7
1018-4
bio
6-7
I°7
— 06
oy)
3°9
359
Siz
Remarks
heavy N swell
slight NE
swell
slight NW
swell
heavy WSW
swell
heavy SW
swell
slight W swell
slight W swell
mod. W swell
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 236—246
g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Station =f Deoth | T P.O. O | Deow TIME Length Remarks
o~ t. emp. | qo pa. 2 . ept >
a2 Genes Cae S “Too ot pH Bae ce. p.1 Gear Gees) noe To as
WS 236] 18 ° 6-09 | 33°99 | 26-77} — | — _ DC 272 1508 | 1531
265 6:01 OTC bottle touched bottom
° 6:07 | 33°94 | 26-72 |} — | — — N 7-T Le
295 4-91 | 34°15 | 27-04] — | — = N4T 272-300 | 1608 | 1708 4
NCS-T
WS 237 | 1 ) 6-1 “go | 26-69 | — | — — DC 150 fo) IOI — | soundings changed
9 $) || SES 9 5 955 9
145 5:29 | 34:10 | 26-95 | — | — — OTC abruptly 10 minutes
) 6-13 | 33°90 | 26-69 | — | — — N 7-T € 5 - before end of trawl
Bolles | a¢o7 | 260) =) ==) 2 | ger || 15°25 |) 2055 || mass
NCS-T
WS 238 | 20 fo) 6:41 | 33°74 | 26°53 | — | — — DC 148 0830 | 0855
ae OREN SIESTA | ASE | a) a Sone trawl torn away from
N Ut 148-148 | 0932 | 1032 4 foot-rope; no catch in
NCS_T it or in fine nets
WS 239 | 28 ) 5°91 | 33°74 | 26°59] — | — -- DC 196 1613 | 1634
190 5°68 | 33-90 | 26-75 |} — | — —- OTC
I) SES |e) ee ee 1708 | 1811
175 | 5°93 | 34°00 | 26-79] — | — | — | Nar | '9"*% 4
NCS-T
WS 240 | 29 fo) fe) || eons APPL y || |) = DC 144 0853 | ogio
140 es se ae | || es wee trawl badly hitched; no
2 SS eile Oe Woe (|| ea 5 144-141 | 0942 | 1044 4 catch. NCS-T torn
135 | 5°64 | 33°62 | 26-53] — | — | — | Nq-T |p *44°%4" | 094 ees
NCS-T
WS 241 | 29 OTC | _ trawl had not fished on
Nie | HGS || MR) Re bottom; empty
N 4-T
WS 242] o fe) (OHA || seis || Aexey) || —= || = DC 119 0625 | 0650
110 6224533 -18) (20-0115 | — OTC |
fe) 6:27 | 33°13 | 26:06 | — | — = N7-T |; 119-119 | 0740 | 0841 4
110 6:29 | 33°14 | 26:07 | — | — — N 4-T |
WS 243] o fo) Gran || serene || Adwy || = || — = DC | 144 1535 | 1550
140 Hoon || ere || AOA) || —— || — — OTC | P
fo) Spey || epee} || tote) || —— || —— = N7-T [ 144-141 | 1616 | 1716 4
F358 G:031195'°45) (20°34). i Naot
WS 244) 1 fo) E077 || 3272) || 2oeee) || —= || = — DC 253 0648 | 0733
245 53a 4500 (20:07 |e = OTC | ; Ae |
fe) Hone || oe e7e} || Aero || —— |) — = N 7-T 253-247 | 0813 | 0913 4
240 Rey || evicey) || eXeHets) |) <= || — = N4-T
WS 245] 1 ° Goo || Sept) || Aeey, || —— || — DC 304. 1540 | 1630
285 537/ || eYkely || Acros |) = || — OTC |
fe) BO || se Heq7 || Begs || == || = = N7-T 304-290 | 1705 | 1810 4
285 55244134200) 20:92) || — || — = N 4-T
WS 246] 2 ° Reafi|| gers || oR || = || == || — DC 267 0900 | 0930
260 SOS) || Sie Rale) || AeRsze || —— |) — — OTC | Lon
fo) BoA, || Sete) || ova | = | — aes | 267-208 | rors | 1115 4
200 “41 qo) || As e7k0) |) = |) = oe
DIAS 359) 7 ae aes peel soee
37 ;
WS 247—253
Station Position
1928
WS 247 | 52° 40’ 00" 5, 60° 05’ 00” W | 19 vil
20 Vil
WS 248 | 52° 40’ 00” 5, 58° 30’ 00” W
WS 249] 52° 10’ 00” 5, 57° 30’ 00” W | 20 vii
WS 250] 51° 45’ 00” 5S, 57° 00’ 00” W | 20 vii
WS 251 | 52° 02’ 00" S, 55° 05’ 00” W] 19-20
Vill
WS 252 52° 20’ 00” S, 52° 22’ 00” W | 20 viii] 1700
WS 253] 52° 40’ 00” S, 49° 40’ 00” W | ar viii] 1300
R.R.S. William Scoresby
SEA
Sounding
(metres)
Direction Direction
f.gn.S.
1578
2962
3895
Weather
Barometer
(millibars)
1006-2
AY]
Remarks
§
Station ae
2
WS 247] 2
WS 248] 3
WSs 249] 3
WS 250] 3
WS 251 | 4-5
WS 252] 5
WS 253} 6
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
R.R.S. William Scoresby
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
P.O;
(een vee S*Too oe De mgm. eae Grau
p.m.
DLH
) 5°13 | 33°88 | 26-80} — | — — DC
200 5:21 | 33°99 | 26°87] — | — — OTC
° 5°19 | 33°88 | 26-80 N 7-T
235 5:28 | 33°98 | 26-86 | — | — | — N 4-T
co) 5:21 | 33°93 | 26-81 | — | — — DLH
160 5:28 | 33°97 | 26°85 | — | — — DC
fo) 5:09 | 34:01 | 26:90 | — | — — DC
245 FROG || Zyl) Ape | — || = OTC
fo) 5°12 | 34-01 | 26-90 | — | — = N 7-T
B05 apd) || Beet |) 7 SEs N4qT
fo) 4°50 | 34°17 | 27°09 | 7-92 | 118 | — N50 V
5 4°50 | 34°18 | 27-10 | 8-06 | 134 | — | N7o0V
sf) 4°49 | 34°18 | 27-11 | 8-or | 122 | — o
20 4°49 | 34°18 | 27°11 | 8-01 | 133 | — 55
30 4°48 | 34°18 | 27-11 | 8-02 | 122 | — 3
40 4°48 | 34°18 | 27-11 | 8-09 | 129 | — 5
50 4°48 | 34°18 | 27-11 | 7-91 | 112 | — %
60 4°48 | 34:18 | 27-11 | 8-02 | 129 | — | Ni100B
70 4:48 | 34°18 | 27°11 | 7-99 | 124 | — | N70B
80 4°48 | 34°18 | 27-11 | 7-90 | 136
100 4°47 | 34°18 | 27-11 | 8-or | 140
150 4°44 | 34°18 | 27-11 | 8-07 | 136
200 4°41 | 34°19 | 27°12 | 8-10 | 102
see) 4°31 | 34°18 | 27°13 | 7°95 | 93
tOO 4:07 | 34°16 | 27°13 | 7°94 | Tor
500 3°82 | 34:21 | 27:20 | 8-14] 115
75° | 3°09 | 34°18 | 27°25 | 8-00 | 137
) 3°55 | 34°13 | 27°15 | 8-02 | 127 | — | N7o0V
5 | 3°48] 34°13 | 27°16 | 8:04 | 127 | — ”
10 | 3°68 | 34°14 | 27°16 | 7-99 | 133 | — »
20 3-64) (134-16) |) 27-1 897209) P1277) 5
30 BrOsi 4405) 27218) 7292) iter |) 5
40 3°61 | 34°15 | 27°18 | 8-01 | 125 | — ¥
50 BGO sdens | 2721 oa|e7290)| ek LO: | N50 V
60 3°24 | 34°12 | 27°19 | 7°95 | 122 | — | N100B
70 3°21 | 34°12 | 27°19 | 77996] 129 | — | N70B
80 3°20 | 34°12 | 27-19 | 8:00 | 132
150 2°98 | 34°12 | 27°21 | 7-96 | 144
200 2°91 | 34°12 | 27°22 | 8-01 | 150
300 2°79 | 34°15 | 27°26 | 7:90 | 166
400 2°61 | 34:19 | 27-30 | 7-90 | 182
500 2°47 | 34:20 | 27°31 | 7:90 | 202
750 | 2°23 | 34°22 | 27°34 | 7°89 | 188
1000 | 2°39 | 34°43 | 27°51 | 7°85 | 190
fo) B77 34203) 27-145 |.6:02) || LO) | — N50 V
5 grat || gyicice) || ag Pay’l |! cestoe || z4e} dy N70V
10 Be7 | 24°13 27204) |Lo:02) rar |) —— ”
20 3°71 | 34°14 | 27°15 | 7°98 | 116 | — 5
30 3°69 | 34°14 | 27°16 | 8-02 | 129 | — %
40 3°68 | 34:14 | 27°16 | 8-or | 136 | — *
50 | 3°65 | 34°15 | 27°17 | Sor | 143 | — »
60 3°63 | 34:16 | 27°18 | 8-02 | 137 | — | NrooB
Depth
(metres)
172
} 210
|
{ 210-242
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
USE
1000-750
| os
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
750-480
1000-750
100-0
j 140-0
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-230
750-670
1000-670
102-0
TIME
From To
0750 | 0850
1445 | 1507
1755 | 1850
1944 | 2047
2325 | —
— | 0221
0439 | 0500
1700 | —
— 1945
2143 | 2204
1300)
— 1855
1914 | 1935
Length
of tow
(miles)
Cael
elite
wre
WS 247—253
Remarks
A 18 ix 28
A 21 ix 28
KT
A 24 ix 28
WS 253—256 R.R.S. William Scoresby
; me Sounding
Station Position Date | Hour (metres)
1928
WS 253] 52° 40 00” S, 49° 40’ 00” W Jar vill
cont.
WS 254] 53° 03’ 00” S, 46° 58’ 00” W | 22 vili| 1010 3557
WS 255] 53° 23’ 00” S, 44° 10’ 00” W | 22-23 | 2325 3003
vill gy. M.
WS 256 | 53° 42’ 00” S, 40° 33’ 00” W | 23-24 | 2130 4110
Viil
WIND
SEA
Direction
WxN
WNW
40
Barometer
(millibars)
ro
Ee
a)
HO Remarks
Ho
<
i) 8
Sy Directions| sys
q oa
3 | WxN
2 W
2 | WNW
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 253—256
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Station
P.O; TIME Length
; Dek of tow
(GREE) From To (miles)
Depth] Temp. | go
(metres)| ° Cent, | 5 /co ee aes
Age of moon
(days)
80 3°61 | 34-16 . . 140 1914
100 3°58 | 34:16 : ° 130
150 3°56 | 34°16 | 27- : 127
200 3°38 | 34°14 : : 130
329 ZO TAN SASS : : Mars}
400 2°76 | 34°12 : : 139
2°86 | 34°14 | 27° "92 | 135
ZEA ON Sate. : 3 NBS
2°57 3413.9 ; : 1)
7 0°30 | 33°92 : ¢ 145 100-0 A 27 ix 28
0°30 | 33°92 “240 (77: 144 100-50
0°28 | 33°92 24. | 7° 138 250-100
P2743 3592 ; 143 500-250
0°24 | 33°92 ; q r49 USB
0°26 | 33°94 : : 149 1000-750
0:24 | 33794 : : 153 5050
0°23 | 33°94 | 27° "go | 156 L eres
0°22 | 33°94 | 27° "93 | 151 J
PLS) || See: : : 144
0°23 | 33°96 | 27° "93 | 165
0°22 | 34°02 c . 167
1°60 | 34:25 : : 190
NS) || Shes i ; ge)
2°11 | 34°37 | 27°48 | 7°94 | 167
2:09 | 34°54 : : 137
2°01 | 34°56 ° : 160
WS 255 | 7-8 0°32 | 33°89 | 27: : 135 50-0 A 28 ix 28
0°38 | 33°89 : A 133 100-50
0°35 | 33°89 | 27° "06 | 133 250-100
0°35 | 33°91 | 27° "05 | 134 500-270
0°34 | 33°92 | 27° "97 | 135 750-480
0°34 | 33°92 | 27° a 136 1000—700
0°34 | 33°92 | 27° "04 | 134 100-0
0°34 | 33°92 | 27° "00 | 141 YAR
0°33 | 33°92 | 27-24 | Sor | 138 ee
0°32 | 33°92 | 27° "00 | 139
0-48 | 33°94 | 27° “gt | 41
1-21 | 34°09 | 27° 84 | 159
1°76 | 34°30 | 27° "84 | 159
2°01 | 34°40 . : 162
2°05 | 34°43 | 27°54 | 7°90 | 168
2°07 | 34°52 ; : 160
1-96 | 34°60 | 27- 87 | 159
WS 256 | 8-9 1-09 | 33°83 . : 156 100-0 A 29 ix 28
1-08 | 33°83 C : 153 50-0
1-08 | 33°83 | 27: 2 153 100-50
1:08 | 33°83 : : 149 250-100
1-08 | 33°83 : 2 152 500-250
1-08 | 33°83 | 27° "94 | 155 750-500
1-08 | 33°83 : 155 1000~780
I-1r | 33°83 | 27° "90 | 155 \eookS
r-11 | 33°83 | 27-23 | 7°89 | 155
0°89 | 33°91 | 27° ‘87 | 151
PES) || Seed || ah : 153
I-49 | 34°29
1-84 | 34°49
1°89 | 34°51 | 27° ‘70 | 198
1-90 | 34°55 | 27° "86 | 189
1°78 | 34°61
41
WS 257—262 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA b> &
x : 5 wy ge
Station Position Date | Hour are au 2 ‘eat 8 Weather Ee gg Remarks
Direction é Direction é as | °
F 1928 ee Caen a edn nen ae
WS 257 | 54° 04’ 00” S, 36° 18’ 00” W | 27 vili| 1600 188 NW /|6-7} NW 13-4] b.c. | 1003-5] o:0
WS 258 | 53° 56’ 00” S, 36° 06’ 00” W | 27 viii] 1915 157 NW 5 NW 5 bac 1002"1 | — 0-6
WS 259] 53° 49’ 00" S, 35° 53’ 30” W | 27-28 | 2305 549 WANK |) eo] SRASINIE |) C: 1000°8 | — 0:6
Viii
WS 260] 53° 42’ 00” S, 35° 41’ 00” W | 28 viii| 0503 — E I W I b. 999'8 | — 0°6
WS 261 | 53° 34’ 30” S, 35° 28’ 30” W | 28 viii| 0650 3798 ESE I ESE I c 1002°6 | — I°I
= E I E I oO. 10049 | — 1°7
WS 262] 53° 27’ 00” S, 35° 17’ 00” W | 28 viii| 1150
42
Station
(days)
Depth
(metres)
Age of moon
WS 258 | 12 fe)
WS 259 | 12- fo)
13 5
WS 260] 13 | —
WS 261 | 13 fo)
150
200
300
400
500
122
I000
WS 262] 13
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
R.R.S. William Scoresby
Sy TY
272,
SEBS
WS 257—262
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
a Depth TIME Length Remarks
eat (metres) = | om BELO
From To (miles)
N70V 50-0 1610 | — — || AN sess
5 100-50 much stray on wires
- I50-II0
N50V 100-0 — | 1658
N 100B || 2 =
N70B || 84-0 1728 | 1748 = KT
N70V 50-0 1935). — — ||\A 2x28
~ 100-50 much stray on wires
% I50-I10
N50 V 100-0 — | 2025
N 100 B || 2 z
N70B |j gI-o 2055 | 2118 3 KT
N70V 50-0 2315 | — ae LAN 225
*6 100-50
°¢ 250-100
: 500-250
N50 V 100-0 _— 0130
N 100 B || 2 z
N70B |j 103-0 0332 | 0353 3 KT
N 100 B |) 2 2
N70B |/ 86-0 0515 | 0535 3 KT
N70V 50-0 0700 | — | PAun2xa28
5 100-50
os 250-100
a 500-250
- 750-520
" 1000~750
N50V 100-0 — | I0I5
N100B 2 :
- KT
N70B } 104-0 1031 | 1051 5
N 100 B || - - 9 KT
N70B |{ 85-0 1200 | 1223 3
WS 263—268 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND
Date | H Sounding Remarks
ane our) (metres)
Barometer
(millibars)
Station Position
Direction Direction
1928
WS 263 | 53° 20’ 00” S, 35° 04’ 00” W | 28 viii} 1320 3511
WS 264] 53° 13’ 30” S, 34° 51’ 00” W | 28 viii] 1840 WwW
WS 265 | 52° 40’ 00” S, 37° 05’ 00” W | 29 vili| 1215 WNW
2215 WNW
WS 266 | 52° 50’ 00” S, 37° 05’ 00” W } 29 vill| 1415
WS 267 | 53° o1’ 00” S, 37° 05’ 00” W | 29 vili| 1830
WS 268 | 53° 11’ 00” S, 37° 05’ 00” W | 29 vili| 2015
44
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 263—268
8 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Eo
Station 38 P.O TIME L h Remarks
2~ | Depth| Temp. | « 25a] | Os : Depth euge
Ue ee eee es) Oe | (cree) eet aes
WS 263 | 13 o | — 1°65 | 33°87 | 27°27 | 7-94 | 136 | — N50 V 100-0 1320 | — — |A 3x28
5 | — 1°65 | 33°87 | 27°28 | 7-91 | 132 | 7:96 | N70V 50-0
10 | — 1-70 | 33°87 | 27°28 | 7-94 | 133 | — ” LOOSS ©
20 | — 1°70 | 33°87 | 27:28 | 7-91 | 130 | 8-02 3 250-100
30 | — 1°70 | 33°87 | 27:28 | 7-90 | 163 | — ' 500-0
40 | — 1°70 | 33°87 | 27-28 | 7-91 | 162 | 7-94 - 500-250
50 | — 1°70 | 33°87 | 27°28 | 7-92 | 160 | — 3 750-500
60 | — ue 33°87 cles ee r45 7:96 < 1000-750 | — | 1630
80 | — 1:69 | 33°87 | 27-28 | 7 169 | — |Nuioo B 5 z
100 | — 1-49 | 33°91 | 27-30] — | — | 7-48 | N70B B70,“ |e720, |) 2730) et ae
150 0°70 | 34°15 | 27°41 | 7°86 | 187 | 5-81
200 | 1-60 | 34°35 | 27°51 | 7°79 | 189 | 4°56
300 1°90 | 34°50 | 27-60 | 7-68 | 189 | 4:11
400 1°70 | 34°58 | 27-68 | 7-71 | 183 | 4:14
500 1-78 | 34°61 | 27°70 | 7°83 | 136 | 4:12
750 1°68 | 34°62 | 27°72 | 7°84] 144 | 4:21
1000 1°50 | 34°69 | 27°77 | 7°88 | 127 | 4:32
I
pes 26423 pa } 97-0 1848 | 1908 KT
WS 265 | 14 ean } 130-0 1230 | 1250 3 KT
WS 266 | 14 o | — 0°78 | 33°89 | 27:26 | 7°81] 117 | — | N70V 50-0 IPAS) || = — |A 3x28
5 | — 0°80 | 33°89 | 27-26 | 7°89 | 150 | 7°69 . 100-50
10 | — 0°80 | 33°89 | 27-26 | 7°85 | 137 | — " 250-100
20 | — 0°80 | 33°89 | 27:26 | 7-90 | 145 | 7°68 500-250
30 | — 0°80 | 33°89 | 27-26 | 7°89 | 155 | — 5 750-500
40 | — 0°80 | 33°89 | 27:26 | 7°87 | 160 | 7-67 " 1000~760
50 | — 0°80 | 33°89 | 27-26 | 7°88 | 160 | — | Ns5o0V 100-0 — | 1640
60 | — 0°82 | 33-91 | 27:28 | 7°89 | 160 | 7-70 | N70B || 5
80 | — 0°82 | 33-91 | 27-28 oe 159 a N 100 B |/ ye BES 2733 5 ist
100 | — 0-82 | 33-91 | 27-28 | 7-90 | 159 | 7-70
150 0:26 | 34:05 | 27-34 | 7°82 | 139 | 7°62
200 1°89 | 34:24 | 27°40 | 7°79 | 142 | 6:38
300 | 1°94 | 34:44 | 27°55 | 7°78 | 149 | 5-12
ACO 2°01 | 34°50 | 27°59 | 7°77 | 158 | 4-40
500 | 2°05 | 34°53 | 27-62 | 7°85 | 144 | 4:06
750 | 195 | 34°66 | 27-72 | 7°85 | 144 | 4:02
1000 1°75 | 34°68 | 27-76 | 7°82 | 144 | 4:18
EET es Rote } 79-0 1845 | 1907 2 KT
WS 268 | 14 o | — 1:40 | 33°89 | 27-28 | 7°89 | 125 | — | Ns50V |] 100-0 2020 | — — |A 4x28
5 | — 1:40 | 33°89 | 27:28 | 7°89 | 136 | — | N70V 50-0
10 | — 1-06 | 33-90 | 27:28 | 7-90 | 118 | — * 100-50
20 | — 1:06 | 33°90 | 27°28 | 7-91 | 116 | — % 250-100
30 | — 1:06 | 33-90 | 27°28 | 7-92 | 126 | — . 500-250
40 | — 1:06 | 33°90 | 27-28 | 7°85 | 122 | — %p 750-100
50 | — 1:06 | 33°90 | 27°28 | 7°86] 125 | — 5 750-500
60 | — 1:06 | 33-90 | 27-28 | 7-86 | 121 | — 3 1000-750 | — | 2300
80 | — 1:08 | 33-90 | 27-28 | 7°87 | 121 | — | N7oB }) 2
100 | — 1-08 | 33-92 | 27-30 | 7°88 | 121 | — | N100B pee 232% | 2340 w KT
150 | — O°I5 | 34:05 | 27:37 | 7°86 | 128
200 I°Io | 34°24 | 27°45 | 7°80 | 155
300 | 1-71 | 34°46 | 27°58 | 7-70 | 155
400 | 1°89 | 34°52 | 27-62 | 7°75 | 156
500 | 1°96 | 34°55 | 27°64 | 7°75 | 165
75° | 1°93 | 34°66 | 27-72 | 7-82 | 163
Hsiels) X°74 | 34°79 | 27°77 | 7°79 | 152
45
WS 269—275 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA
ona Ss 6980 ie
Position Date | Hour Gasca Weather
Barometer
(millibars)
a.
Be
aro) Remarks
4 °
uw & =]
Station Position Date | Hour ey eae 3 ee 8 Weather ae ed Remarks
irection é irection é S& a
1928 ane io (eg cea | ame oe
WS 275] 53° 38’ 00” S, 38° 34’ 00” W | 41x
cont.
WS 276 | 53° 45’ 00" S, 38° 22’ 00” W} 4ix | 1850 2121 NW 2 NW 3 | 0.c.f. | r001-5 | 0:0 | ship rolling
heavily
WS 277 | 53° 52’ 30” S, 38° 09’ 30” W | 5 ix | 0800 132 NW |4-6| NW 4 Cyt. 993°9 | Iz
WS 278 | 54° 23’ 00" S, 35° 52’ 00” W | 12 ix | 1800 238 NW |6-7| NW 6 b. 987:6 | 0:6
1800 — NW |5-10| NW /4-7] 0.q. 99772 | 0-6 |v. heavy sea
WS 279 | 54° 23’ 00” S, 35° 35’ 00” W | 13 ix
WS 280] 54° 23’ 00S, 35° 18’ 00” W | 17 ix | 1330 234
Station
Age of moon
WS 276 | 20
WS 277 | 21
WS 278 | 28
WS 279 | 29
WS 280] 4
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 275—280
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Depth
(metres)
Length
of tow
To (miles)
1721
100-50
250-100
500-250
US
2135
2220
100-0
50-0
100-50
200-120
124-0
27°27 | 7:88
27°27 We
WS 280—286 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA
SCOLeTG heey | | $< ——— Weather
Position Hour (metres)
Station
Direction Direction
WS 280] 54° 23’ 00” S, 35° 18’ 00” W
cont.
WS 281 | 54° 23’ 00"S, 35° 00’ 00” W | 17 ix | 1635
WS 282 | 54° 22’ 30” S, 34° 43’ 00” W | 17 1x | 1810 2597
WS 283] 54° 22’ 00” S, 34° 25’ 00” W | 17 ix | 2300
WS 284] 54° 21’ 45” S, 34° 08’ 00” W | 18 ix | 0615 3640
WS 285 | 54° 21’ 30” S, 33° 53’ 30” W | 18 ix | ro10
18 ix | 1830 4023
WS 286 | 55° 00’ 00” S, 32° 55’ 00” W
50
Barometer
(millibars)
Remarks
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 280—286
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Station
Depth | Temp. ; : TIME Length Remarks
cmetr es) (ie Cent |e co :| ce. p. 1. Sia OL tow,
i To (miles)
Age of moon
(days)
— 0:98
— 1:00 : : .; 200-100
— I:00 . . |
— 1:00 af |
— 0:98
— 0:98
we93
— 0°85
— 9°43
0°45
g2-0
KT
A 10x28
78-0 Kel
100-0 A 10x28
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
+ ILOO—O
89-0 KT
100-0 A 11x 28
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
759-500
1000~780
| 100-0
j
51
WS 286—292 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA ee |
Ser os | §¢
Station Position Date | Hour eS 9 eerste Weather Se Bd _ Remarks
Di : u 5 7 2 da Ho
irection & Direction é sé a
1928
WS 286] 55° 00’ 00” S, 32° 55’ 00” W] 18 ix
cont.
WS 287 | 54° 54’ 00” S, 32° 08’ 00” W | 19 ix | 0800 4023 — fo) — fo) 0.c. | 1008-6] 06 | station
worked
inside light
pack ice, a
few miles
from edge
WS 288 | 54° 52’ 00” S, 32° 19’ 00” W | 19 ix | 1410 — N 2 N I Cc: IOII'5 | — 1-7] Station
worked just
outside edge
of pack ice
WS 289] 54° 55’ 30”S, 35° 30'00” W | 1x | 1430 311 SWS 7] SWaee|i3=5 b. 1013°3 | o-o | blowing v.
heavily—
station
abandoned
WS 290] From
54° 23/10" S, 35° 44’00” W| 1x |2000 = NW 3 NW 3 | o.r.m. | 1016-6 | — 1-1
to
54 12'45"S, 35° 24'30" W] 2x |o4oo = ESE 3 ESE 2 Cs 10175 | — I'l
WS 291 | 54° 53’ 00"S, 35° 31’00” W | 2x |0930 283 WS Ws 7 WS WV ns Cc: 1016:6 | 0-3 |v. heavy sea
WS 292] 55° 02’ 00"'S, 35° 16’ 40” W | 3x |1500 113 WSW | 3 WSW | 2 oO. 1018-5 | 2:2 | light WSW
swell
52
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 286—292
F HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Station | 32
g~ | Depth | Temp. | ¢ » . F081, a Depth ne Length ee
= |(metres)} ° Cent. | 9 /co uv pH ae ceape!: Gear Gees) Gee nee ae
‘WS 286 150 | — 0-15 | 34:22 | 27°50 | 7°78 | 153
cont. 200 0°18 | 34°43 | 27°65 | 7°78 | 153
300 I-02 | 34°60 | 27°74 | 7-71 | 156
400 I-21 | 34°68 | 27-80 | 7-78 | 153
500 1-22 | 34°68 | 27-80 | 7°82 | 149
750 | 1-01 | 34°70 | 27°83 | 7°81 | 139
1000 0-90 | 34°69 | 27°83 | 7°89 | 135
WS 287] 6 © | — 1-70 | 33°88 | 27-29 | 7°83 | 74] — | Ns50V_| 100-0 | 0815 | — S| Avaexes
5 | — 1-70 | 33°95 | 27°34 | 7°87] 138 | — | N70V 50-0
10 | — 1°78 | 34:00 | 27°38 | 7-88 | 144 | — “3 100-50
20 | — 1-78 | 34:00 | 27-38 | 7°87 | 139 | — 29 250-100
30 | — 1°78 | 34-00 | 27-38 | 7°89 | 145 | — 55 500-250
40 | — 1°79 | 34:00 | 27°38 | 7°85 | 150 | — » 750-500
es a L719) 34:08 | 27539 ie 143°) — ae I000-750 | — | 1055
©) | UES) || SAPO AO NA || || ae 100 B || oan
80 | — 1-70 | 34:02 | 27-40 | 7°83 | 145] — | N70B |{ OES es | eee t KT
100 | — 1°52 | 34:02 | 27-40 | 7°81 | 145
150 | 0°50 | 34°34 | 27°56 | 7°77 | 143
200 | 0°78 | 34°54 | 27°71 | 7°76 | 141
300 | = 1-18 | 34°61 | 27°74 | 7°79 | 144
400 | 1-14 | 34°61 | 27°75 | 7°78 | 144
500 I-21 | 34°62 | 27-76 | 7°86] 145
750 | 0°88 | 34-63 | 27°78 | 7-91 | 141
1000 0°53 | 34°66 | 27-82 | 7-97 | 138
WS 288] 6 — | N1r00B })\ a Z
N 70 B if 102-0 1429 1449 3 KT
WS 289} 17 oO | — 1:08 | 33°74 | 27°15 | 7:94 | 123 | — | N70V 50-0 1430 | 1500 | — |A 12x28
5 | — 1:12 | 33°75 | 27:16 | 8-00 | 107 | 7-98
IO | — 1-12 | 33°75 | 27°16 | 7-90 | 123
20 | — 1-12 | 33°74 | 27°15 | 7°94 | 134 | 8:10
30 | — 112 | 33°75 | 27°16 | 7°95 | 134
40 | — 1°12 | 33°74 | 27°15 | 7°96 | 139 | 7°38
50 | — 1-12 | 33°75 | 27°16 | 7°95 | 144
WS 290 | 17 N 70H O-5 2000 | 2015 | — _ | 32 consecutive hauls
Dea (A-GG)each of 15 mins.
18 5 %5 0345 | 0400 duration. Samples CC
and DD lost. Sunset
18133; sunrise 0526
WS 291 | 18 © ||— 4:08} 33°75 | 27:16 | 7-96) 155 | — | N7oWV | 200-100] tors | — — |A 12x28
Salas EONS S275 27-20 7-97 | 237 |) » 100-50
IO | — 1-12) | 33°75 | 27°16 | 7-96 | 136 | — ¥ 50-0 = || wie
PXo) || aici : 27200))7-96)) 155) || == i Nixoo)B))\\ 2 ae | ee 2 :
30 | = 1-13 ee 27:16 | 7-93 | 121 | — | N70B |j 170° 1227 | 1247 3 |KT
40 | — 1-14 | 33°75 | 27°16 | 7-96 | 116
50 | — 1-13 | 33°75 | 27°26 | 7°95 | 113
60) |= r-139/133°715)| 27-10)||7-91 | 123
80 | — 1-14 | 33°78 | 27°19 | 7°92 | 139
100 | — 1-14 | 33°78 | 27°19 | 7°99 | 121
150 | — 1:08 | 33°78 | 27°19 | 7-91 | 114
200 | — 0-70 | 33°85 | 27-23 | 7:94. | 121
250 OB ON 4e03 274° 7690) 134:
WS 292 | 19 o | — 0:98 | 33-77 | 27°17 | 7°92 | 119 | — | N70V 50-0 1505 | — — |A 13x28
5 | — 1:00 | 33°77 | 27°17 | 7-90 | 118 | — 9 100-50
Lo | — 1:04 | 33°77 | 27°17 | 7°92 | 124 | — | N50V 100-0 — | 1525
20) — 5-06 ar e27aley | p92: I20 —— EN) roo ||| aoe , ; zs
30 | — 1:06 ee Aiea 70) eL22, || N70B || (eo nee noo a et
~I
53
WS 292—298
Station Position
R.R.S. William Scoresby
Sounding
(metres)
1928
WS 292] 55° 02’ 00" S, 35° 16’ 40” W] 3x
cont.
WS 293] 55° 09’ 00” S, 35° 05’00" W} 3x
WS 294] 55° 17’ 00” S, 34° 53’00" W | 3x
WS 295 | 55° 23’ 40” S, 34° 41’ 00” W | 3-4 x
WS 296 | 55° 31’ 00" S, 34°29’ 00” W | 4x
WS 297 | 55° 34’ 05” S, 33° 1400” W | 4x
Shy Sa Dit Moy NY || Bare
Direction
WSW
54
Direction
Weather
Barometer
(millibars)
Air Temp.
° Cent
2°2
1018-1 | o-0
Remarks
light WSW
swell
W swell
1017°6 | — 0-3
oo |station work-
ed 1 mile to
windward of
dense pack
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 292—298
8 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
ge
Station | 58 P.O. a TIME ean Remarks
S liockes| eee |S%o | oe | PH |mam| | Gear | caekey [| of tm
p.m. From To (miles)
WS 292 AO — L-O6N 38-77) |27-0-7)|| 7:93) | 127
cont. EO! || — 1-08) 33°77 || 27°17 | 7:92 | 119
60 | — I-10 | 33°77 | 27°17 | 7°93 | 126
80 | — I-10 | 33°80 | 27°20 | 7°95 | 126
100 | — 1°10 | 33°80 | 27-20 | 7-91 | 136
WS 293 | 19 o | — 0:97 | 33°81 | 27°21 | 7°93 | 141 | — N50 V 100-0 1720) | — — ANTS x25
5 | — 0-99 | 33°81 | 27:21 | 7°93 | 138 | 8:06 | N70V 50-0
10 | — 1:00 | 33°81 | 27-21 | 7°93 | 159 | — + 100-50 — | 1748
20 | — 1:00 | 33°81 | 27:21 | 7°93 | 144 | — | Nr0oB || 5 E
30 | — 1-00 | 33°81 | 27-21 | 7-94 | 162 | — | N70B |{ ome ueoOt gne23 2 aS
40 | — 1°00 | 33°81 | 27-21 | 7°95 | 155 | 7°76
50 | — 1-00 | 33°81 | 27-21 | 7°94 | 155
60 | — 1:00 | 33°81 | 27-21 | 7°94 | 155
80 | — 1-00 | 33°83 | 27°23 | 7°94 | 135
100 | — 1-00 | 33°84 | 27:23 | 7°95 | 126 | 7-76
NEA) 7 ee g8-o 1951 | 2011 KT
WS 295 | 19- o | — 1-10 | 33°83 | 27°23 | 7-91 | 123 N50 V 100-0 2132 | — A 15x28
20 5 | — 1:10 | 33°83 | 27:23 | 7°92 | 137 | 6:09 | N70 V 50-0 Considerable stray on
TON} — 1-12) 33°83) || 27-23, || 7-93 | 138 | — 7 100-50 wires
20 | — 1°12 | 33°83 | 27-23 | 7°93 | 138 | 7:60 FA 250-100
JO || = eS 33°83 27:23) 7-92 || 133) || => » DoCEz 5°
40 | — I-10 | 33°83 | 27°23 | 7°92 | 133 | 7°75 » USTED
Ge) || = renee || SR || yg || Geone || aes 5 1000-750 | — _ | o108
60 | — 1°12 | 33°83 | 27:23 | 7-91 | 118 | 7:99 | N100B || © 2 KT
80 | — 1-08 | 33°84 | 27:23] 7-95 | 126| — | N70B |{ ed i eos :
100 | — 1:00 | 33°83 | 27°23 | 7°94. | 136
1) I-12 | 34°21 | 27-42 | 7°85 | 144 | 5°77
200 | 1°60 | 34°30 | 27°45 | 7°84 | 160 | 4:99
300 | 182 | 34-41 | 27°52 | 7°84 | 173 | 4°43
400 1:95 | 34°46 | 27°56 | 7-81 | 162 | 4:20
500 | 1-96 | 34°53 | 27°62 | 7-93 | 162
750 2:29 | 34°61 | 27-65 | 7:89 | 156 | 4:01
LO09 1-95 | 34°72 | 27°77 | 7°95 | 119 | 4:06
Wi = = fs a9
S 296 | 20 NEE on 0338 | 0359 P KT
WS 297 | 20 o | — 1:60 | 33:90 | 27:30 | 7-90] 116 | — | N70V 50-0 1020 | — — |A 16x28
5 | — 1-68 | 33°88 | 27-29 | 7-94. | 134 | — 5 100-50
LO || — 1-68 | 33:89 | 27-29) | 7-90'| 133 | — 5 250-100
2,0)|| —sl:70)|| 33588) 27°20) | 7:90 | 13 n | —— 5 500-210
30 | — 1-69 | 33°89 | 27-29 | 7°89 | 129 | — » 750-500
Mon || —eE-70)\033.G0)|'27-301l)7-91 || 1203|| — 5 1000~750
50 | — 1°70 | 33°90 | 27°30 | 7:89 | 129 | — N50V 100-0 — || Lens
60 | — 1°70 | 33°92 | 27°32 | 7-90] 130 | — | Nx00B || ‘ om ae 2 KT
80 | — 1-65 | 33-94 | 27:33 | 7°86 | 113 | — | N70B |jJ ee moo W329 i
too | — 1:63 | 33°98 | 27°37 | 7°87 | 120
150 0°40 | 34:24 | 27°50 | 7°84 | 126
200 I'II | 34°40 | 27°57 | 7°80 | 128
300 1-49 | 34°52 | 27°65 | 7°77 | 134
400 1°50 | 34°61 | 27°71 | 7°75 | 128
500 1:60 | 34°63 | 27°73 | 7°88 | 110
750 | 1-46 | 34°65 | 27°75 | 7°85 | 106
1000 1°32 | 34:68 | 27-79 | 7°90 | 103
WS 298 | 21 o | — 1:76 | 33-92 | 27°32 | 7°87 | 143 — N70V 50-0 0640 — — Ne 11g) 3s
5 | — 1°76 | 33-92 | 27°32 | 7°88 | 147 | — 3 100-50
10 | — 1-78 | 33°94 | 27°33 | 7°89 | 149 | — » 250-100
WS 298—303
R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA
Station Position Date | Hour eae a
Direction = Direction
ca
1928
WS 298} 55° 27’ 30’ S, 32°21’ 40° W | 5x
cont.
WS 299] 55° 18’ 30” S, 32°05 20” W | 5x |1152 — Ww 3 W
WS 300] 55° 07’ 30” S, 31° 56’ 55” W | 5x | 1400 4057 Ww I Ww
WS 301 | 55° 00’ 05” S, 32° 08’ 25” W | 5x | 1900 — NW I —
WS 302} 54° 57’ 20S, 31° 4935” W | 6x |0455 — = O =
WS 303] 54° 51’ 25" 5, 31° 20’ 10” W | 6x |0745 4590 — fo) =
56
» | Weather
13}
u
3
Ry
I oO.
2 16)
Co) 0.g
ie) 10)
re) oO
Seas || cee
5= ae Remarks
ae |e
ice. At end
of station
the ship had
drifted right
to edge of ice.
Water v.
transparent
1012°5 | 0-6 | station worked
at edge of
pack ice
1012°3 | — 0-3 | station worked
at edge of
pack ice
1013°5 | — 0°6 | station worked
8 miles out-
side pack ice
10126 | — 1-0 | station worked
in edge of
pack ice
1013°4 | — 0-6 | much ice
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 298—303
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Station TIME Length Remarks
——— a] OE Oe
From To (miles)
Age of moon
(days)
1eOy
Depth | Temp. 205
Gee = Gan / pH mniem
p.m.
2 +e Depth
cCupels Gear (metres)
Ny
160 N70V 500-250
152 3 750-500
155 : 1000-800
155 Ns5o0V 100-0 0945
I
a Rea j 94-0 1008 | 1028
156
169
HT
198
198
181
181
181
N NNN
NNN
TAN How wo
H OW BR HAM OH AH
— hb - if
N
~sI
OWW DrIwWwWtE NN
N
IWIN SINT SIS ST SN I
Ny
WS 299 | 21
50-0 A 18x28
100-50
250-100
500-250
URS
' 1000~750
N50 V 100-0
N 100 B ||
N 70 B , IOO—O
T 9%
ORE
7°86
7°82
7°81
7
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
Toe
1000~750
, IL0g—-O
a7
WS 304—308 R.R.S. William Scoresby
Soumchiae: |S iS Weather Remarks
Hour (metres)
Barometer
(millibars)
Air Temp
Station Position
Direction
1928
WS 304] 54° 54’ 40” S, 30° 21’ 20” W | 6x
WS 305 | 54° 44’ 00” S, 29° 49’ 00" W | 7x
1009'0 | — 1:6] V. many
WS 306 | 54° 41’ 50S, 30° 49° 35" W | 7x | 1412 j
icebergs
WS 307 | 54° 19’ 30” S, 30° 31’ 30° W] 7x 11735 NW 1008-7 | — 2-8 | station
worked 1
mile from
edge of
pack ice
o | o.p.s. | 1005-7 | — 0-6} v. slight W
swell
WS 308] 54° 04’ 05”S, 30° 18’ 00” W | 8x |0815
R.R.S. William Scoresby
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
§ HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Eg
Station | $2
Ses) m P.O;
o- Peper i Ce ame Sieise ot pH mgm. al
p.m.
WS 304] 22 o | — 1°58 | 34:02 | 27:40 | 7°88 | 137 | —
5 | — 1°60 | 34-02 | 27-40 | 7°88 | 135 | —
10 | — 1°58 | 34:02 | 27°40 | 7-90 | 135 | —
20 | — 1°65 | 34:02 | 27-40 | 7°89°| 135 | —
30 | — 1°68 | 34:03 | 27-41 | 7°87 | 135 | —
40 | — 1°68 | 34:02 | 27-40 | 7-90 | 135 | —
SOR een || 348022 1 27-4051,7-90))| 23'5)) | a
60 | — 1-78 | 34:03 | 27-41 | 7-90 | 142 | —
80 | — 1°80 | 34:05 | 27-42 | 7-93 | 142 | —
100 | — 1°72 | 34:08 | 27-45 | 7°89 | 142
150 | 0°15 | 34°45 | 27°67 | 7°79 | 155
200 | 0-66 | 34°57 | 27°74 | 7°85 | 155
300 0°88 | 34°62 | 27-78 | 7°82 | 149
400 0°86 | 34°65 | 27°80 | 7°84 | 144
500 | 0°79 | 34°68 | 27-82 | 7°87 | 145
750 | 0°64 | 34°67 | 27°82 | 7-90 | 147
1000 0°46 | 34:67 | 27-83 | 7-90 | 148
WS 305 | 23 ©} |= 2-62) |34°02)(27-40) | 7-80) | 139) ||| —
bil 2 1-02) 2AsO2N 27-40 \7-88 |) 145, | —
10 | — 1:68 | 34-02 | 27-40 | 7°89 | 143 | —
20 | — 1:68 | 34:01 | 27-39 | 7°89 | 143 | —
30 | — 1°72 | 34-01 | 27°39 | 7-90 | 138 | —
40 | — 1°75 | 34°01 | 27°39 | 7°87 | 141 | —
50 | — 1°76 | 34-01 | 27-39 | 7-90 | 138 | —
60 | — 1°79 | 34:02 | 27-40 | 7-90 | 148 | —
80 | — 1-80 | 34:02 | 27-40 | 7-91 | 149 | —
100 | — 1-62 | 34-11 | 27-47 | 7°88 | 159
150 0:00 | 34°44 | 27°68 | 7-81 | 149
200 | 0°58 | 34°56 | 27°74 | 7°82 | 147
300 | 0°82 | 34°65 | 27°79 | 7°82 | 147
400 0°80 | 34°65 | 27-79 | 7°81 | 148
500 | 9°90 | 34°67 | 27°81 | 7-91 | 135
750 | 0°69 | 34°67 | 27°82 | 7°89 | 135
1000 | 0°49 | 34°68 | 27-84 | 7-94 | 145
WS 306 | 23
WS 307 | 23 o | — 1°55 | 33°97 | 27°36 | 7°88 | 12 =
5 | — 1°55 | 33°97 | 27°36 | 7°88 | 134 | —
10 | — 1°56 | 33-99 | 27°38 | 7°89 | 123 | —
15 | — 1°70
20 | — 1°74 | 33°99 | 27°38 | 7°88 | 123 | —
30 | — 1-76 | 33°98 | 27°37 | 7°88 | 128 | —
40 | — 1°74 | 34:01 | 27°39 | 7°88 | 135 | —
50 | — 1°74 | 34°02 | 27-40 | 7°88 | 135 | —
60 | — 1°75 | 34°03 | 27-41 | 7°87 | 125 | —
80 | — 1°79 | 34°03 | 27°41 | 7°89 | 133
100 | — 1-80 | 34°03 | 27-41 | 7°87 | 12
150 | — 1°16 | 34°23 | 27°55 | 7°85 | 137
175 | — 0°02 | 34°46 | 27-69 | 7°77 | 147
200 | 0°75 | 34°50 | 27°67 | 7°80 | 143
300 0:68 | 34°64 | 27-80 | 7-80 | 143
400 | 0°68 | 34-67 | 27°82 | 7°79 | 135
500 0-66 | 34°68 | 27-83 | 7°84 | 135
75° | 0°54 | 34°68 | 27-84 | 7-87 | 135
1000 0°43 | 34:68 | 27°84 | 7-90 | 12
WS 308 | 24
Gear
59
Depth
(metres)
| 110-0
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
750-500
1000~750
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
759-509
1000-780
100-0
j 105-0
r I20—-0
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
759-500
1000-780
TIME
From To
1843 | 1908
1920
— | 2205
0620 | —
= || tolgtexy
0945 | 1005
1427 | 1447
1751 | 1811
1840
— | 2125
0830 | 0850
Length
of tow
(miles)
alan
cote
colo
WS 304—308
Remarks
KT
A 22x28
ACR bxe25
KT
KT
KT
A 24x28
Kel
WS 309—315
Station Position
WS 309] 53° 58’ 50” S, 28° 50’ 10” W
WS 310] 54° 00’ 00” S, 28° 38’ 00” W
54° 45° 00" S, 35° 11’ 00” W
From
54° 00’ 00" S, 36° 12’00” W
to
53°48" 30" 5, ae 40' 30" W
54. 48’ 00” S, 33° 28’ 00” W
53° 36’ 00" S, 41° 05’ 00” W
WS 315] 53° 26’ 30” S, 43° 49’ 00” W
R.R.S. William Scoresby
Sounding
(metres)
Direction
2 Xil
60
Remarks
Barometer
(millibars)
Air Temp.
° Cent
SW 2 3 (2 — 1-1 | station worked
at edge of
pack ice
WSW 10059 | — 1°1 | Station
worked in
bay in edge
of pack ice
iC
— 2:8] Wx N swell.
8} Mod. gale
2
= )0
2
— |station
worked on
board whale
catcher
A.W. Sorle,
3 mile from
pack ice
4 |o.m.d.
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 309—315
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Station TIME ibaa Remarks
of tow
From ‘ic (miles)
P.O;
mgm. 0:
p.m.*
Depth
(metres)
Age of moon
(days)
Depth | Temp. oy pe
(metres) | ° Cent, Gear
ce. p. 1.
|
N100B 1610
WS 310] 24
Ny
WAUKHSSHGd Sd
OnNTW EW HN Ha
INISI SIS SSINI NT ST ST
°
aay alae
OOM
NN NWN N
NNNNNNNNDNDN
~I
(oe)
A
es
io)
na
as
Ww
KT. Nets fished for
+ mile at 116 m.
12 consecutive oblique
hauls (B—M) each of
approx. 20 mins. dura-
tion. Sunset 1844
water samples lost over-
board
KT
bottle struck bottom
50-0 - A 21 xii 28
100-50
250-100
20
NNNNNNNNNDN DN
SSS STS SST I “NI ~I
61 :
WS 315—318 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA
eae Be Sone | SKS Se
Station Position Date | Hour Gnctres) Weather Remarks
Direction Direction
Barometer
(millibars)
Air Temp.
° Cent
Force
Force
1928
WS 315] 53° 26’ 30S, 43° 49’ 00” W | 2 xii
cont.
WS 316] 52° 56’ 00” S, 46° 26’ 00” W | 3 xii | 1115 723 W 3 — 4 oO. 981:2 | 3:1 |sea conf.
WS 317 | 52° 41’ 00” S, 49° 39’ 30” W | 4 xii | 0425 336 NW R NW I b.c. | 1004:2 | 6-7 | heavy swell
daGARe vis. 8
rN)
o
No)
No}
ay
Ne)
ron
N
WS 318] 52° 26’ 00"S, 52°07’ 00” W | 4-5 | 2005 3186 NW 3 NW
Xil
62
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 315—318
g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
EG
Station | s 2 Remarks
oe Depth | Temp. oy P.Os O. ae. Depth. TIME Length
=< | (metres) | ° Cent. 8 “Too of ne! aan ce. p. 1. = Gree) ns cael Gnile)
WS 315 200 1°30 | 34°19 | 27-40 | 7°84 | 179
cont. 300 I-QI | 34°40 | 27°52 | 7-80 | 188
400 | 2°00 | 34°49 | 27°58 | 7°79 | 200
500 | 2°07 | 34°55 | 27°63 | 7-79 | 188
600 2°03 | 34:61 | 27-69 | 7°87 | 185
800 1°95 | 34°63 | 27-70 | 7°84 | 200
1000 1-80 | 34°68 | 27-75 | 7°84 | 214
1500 I-21 | 34:68 | 27-80 | 7°89 | 179
WS 316 | 21 ° 1°88 | 33°88 | 27-11 | 8:07 | 107 | — N70V 50-0 I120 | — — |A 24 xii 28
5 1°85 | 33°88 | 27-11 | 8-08 | 105 | — 3 100-50
10 1-78 | 33°88 | 27-12 | 8-09 | 104] — _ 250-100
20 1°78 | 33°87 | 27-11 | 8-09 | 113 | — 3 500-250
30 1°73 | 33°87 | 27°11 | 8:08 | 105 | — a 750-500
40 168 | 33°88 | 27-12 | 8-08 | 105 | — - 1000-750
50 1°55 | 33°89 | 27°13 | 8:07 | 105 | — N50 V 100-0 — 1635 — net choked with dia-
60 0°82 | 33°88 | 27-18 | 8-06 | 127 toms—split on raising
80 0-60 | 33°90 | 27:20 | 8-05 | 121 | — |Nz100B}] 107-0 1656 | 1716 = KT [out of water
100 0:68 | 33-91 | 27-21 | 8-04 | 121
eo AS] Sees) || aap || PB She
200 | 1°58 | 34°15 | 27°35 | 7°87 | 148
ele) 1-95 | 34°27 | 27°41 | 7°84 | 157
400 1-98 | 34:36 | 27°48 | 7-81 | 168
500 | 2°15 | 34°46 | 27°55 | 7°87 | 168
600 2°19 | 34°53 | 27°60 | 7-82 | 170
800 2°16 | 34°62 | 27-69 | 7°86 | 162
1000 2:04 | 34:64 | 27°71 | 7°89 | 170
1500 1-60 | 34°68 | 27°77 | 7-92 | 158
1650 1-44 | 34°68 | 27-78 | 7-90 | 158
WS 317 | 22 fo) 4°49 | 34:10 | 27-04 | 8-04 | 103 | — | N70V 50-0 0430 | — — |A 27x11 28
5 4°50 | 34:09 | 27-03 | 8-05 | 106 | — 100-50
10 4°50 | 34:09 | 27:03 | 8:05 | 106 | — 5% 250-100
20 4°49 | 34:10 | 27-04. | 8:05 | 106 | — 5 500-250
30 4°46 | 34:11 | 27:05 | 8-05 | 106 | — " 750-500
40 4°34 | 34:09 | 27-05 | 8-04 | 106 | — 5 1000-790 | — | 0705
50 4:27 | 34°10 | 27:06 | 8-04 | 111 | — Ns5o0V 100-0 ogo5 | OgI5
60 4°13 | 34°10 | 27-08 | 8-04 | 113 | — | N1i100B]| __ 2 -
80} 3°41 sie 27-15 | 8-04 | 115 | — | N70B |{ 7° ° eS ere 3 KT
100 2°96 | 34:07 | 27°17 | 8-04 | 116
150 | 2°73 | 34°07 | 27°19 | 7°98 | 121
200 2°74 | 34°11 | 27°22 | 7:95 | 142
300 | 2°64 | 34:20 | 27°30 | 7-95 | 146
qr 2°40 | 34°27 | 27°38 | 7°87 | 153
500 | 2°54 | 34°33 | 27°41 | 7°90 | 160
600 2°50 | 34°40 | 27-47 | 7°87 | 168
800 | 2°42 | 34°47 | 27°54 | 7°90 | 168
1000 2°39 | 34°52 | 27°58 | 7°83 | 18z
1500 2:27 | 34:63 | 27-68 | 8-20 | 149
3200 0°87 | 34°72 | 27°85 | 8:04. | 145
WS 318 | 22- fo) 5°34. | 34°17 | 27:00 | 8-07 | 106 | — | N70V 50-0 2015 | — — |A 27 xii 28
23 5 5°35 34:18 27°01 8-05 Ill — oH 100-50 considerable stray on
sie) 5°34 | 34°17 | 27:00 | 8-08 | 115 | — 250-100 wires for earlier hauls
20 5234q)|) 34-171) 277,00) | 5-08 | 17 || —— * 500-250
30 5°34. | 34°18 | 27-01 | 8-08 | 113 | — 5 750-500
40 | 5°33 | 34°17 | 27-00 | 8-08 | 113 | — » 1000-790
50 5-20)|'34-07 ||| 2720 8-09) || 110) |) — N50V 100-0 — | 2310
60 -07 | 34°18 | 27:04 | 8-09 | 123 | — | Ni100B]| 9 | 29 rr
80 pe aa aan 8:05 | 128 | — | N70B ee 2 alla oo an
100 4°17 | 34°18 | 27-14 | 8:05 | 133
150 | 3°89 | 34°18 | 27°17 | 7°96 | 117
63
WS 318—322 R.R.S. William Scoresby
Remarks
finer material
WIND SEA na |
Sounding oa § &
Station Position Date | Hour (Gee) A » | Weather Ex HO
Direction 5 Direction 5 a £ S| *
1928
WS 318] 52° 26’ 00" S, 52°07’ 00” W | 4-5
cont. Xil
WS 3819] 52° o1’ 00" S, 54° 52°00” W | 5 xii | 1340 1602 NNW |3-4| NNW |3-4 b. 9877 | 8-8
G.c.5S. vis. 7
WS 320] 53° 34’ 00” S, 41° 06’ 00” W | 15-16 | 2317 981 WNW | 4 | WNW | 3 b. I007*I | 2°5
xi vis. 7
WS 3821 | 53° 52’ 40" S, 38° 10’ 00” W | 16 xii | 1700 146 NNW | 5 NW 6 o.r. 994°3 | 2:2
vis. 4
WS 822) 53° 45’ 30” S, 38° 23’ 00” W 16-17 | 2105 258 N 5 N 4 Out 9981 | 2:8
xii c. bl. S.
from bottom
sample
washed out
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 318—322
§ HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Eg
Station os PO; TIME Tae Remarks
2~ | Depth | Temp. D5 : Dep euge
2 ee) : Gant. =) ee pH mane cc. p. 1. Gear SS isan To Gnile)
WS 318 200 3°65 | 34°19 | 27°20 | 7°94 | 123
cont. 300 Relea Act | 27-245 7-94 |er33
400 2°57 | 34°16 | 27-28 | 7-91 | 126
500 2°51 | 34°18 | 27-30 | 7-94 | 128
600 | 2°48 | 34:23 | 27°34 | 7°91 | 145
800 | 2°61 | 34°35 | 27°42 | 7°89 | 155
1000 2°48 | 34:46 | 27°52 | 7°84 | 170
1500 2°24 | 34°61 | 27:66 | 8-00 | 151
3000 1°39 | 34°72 | 27°82 | 7-92 | 109
WS 319] 23 fo) 6-11 | 34°16 | 26-90 | 8-12 | 105 | — N70V 50-0 131503) — |A 28 xii 28
5 6:09 | 34°17 | 26-91 | 8-11 | 106 | — id 100-50
10 6:09 | 34°16 | 26-90 | 8-11 | 107 | — = 250-100
20 6-06 | 34°16 | 26-90 | 8-12 | 105 | — . 500-250
30 6:04 | 34°16 | 26-91 | 8-12 | 108 | — “ 750-500
40 5°81 | 34°16 | 26-94 | 8-11 | 111 | — % 1000~750
50 5°71 | 34°16 | 26-95 | 8-11 | 113 | — N50 V 100-0 = |) wos
60 42 | 34°16 | 26-98 | 8-09 | 117 | — | N1r00B 2 Ps : Ba
80 ee 34:16 | 27:02 | 8-06 | 125 | — | N70B ais m7 EOL e780 3 KT
100 4°39 | 34°16 | 27-10 | 8-05 | 136
150 4°41 | 34°24 | 27°16 | 7-96 | 117
AN© A2AN 3452327 27 | 7:92 || 123
399 SE || SPS | SaPere || 72) || Iss)
400 | 3°33 | 34°18 | 27:22 | 7-91 | 140
500 | 3°07 | 34°16 | 27-23 | 7-91 | 140
600 2°84 | 34:20 | 27-28 | 7-91 | 140
800 | 2°71 | 34°30 | 27°38 | 7°89 | 153
1000 2°62 | 34°43 | 27°49 | 7°86 | 170
1500 2°37 | 34:61 | 27°65 | 7°80 | 160
WS 320 | 3-4 fo) 1°85 | 33°94 | 27°16 | 8:04 | 109 | — | N50 V 100-0 2325 | — — |A 29 xii 28
5 M95) 1133294: ||| 27210) 8:05 || 174. |) — N70V 50-0
10 1°85 | 33°94 | 27-16 | 8:07 | 115 | — H 100-50
20 1°83 | 33°96 | 27°18 | 8:05 | 119 | — 5 250-100
30 1°70 | 33°98 | 27-19 | 8:06 | 120 | — * 500-250
40 1-69 | 33°98 | 27-19 | 8-06 | 123 | — 5 750-500
50 1°70 | 34:01 | 27-22 | 8-06 | 127 | — > goo~750 | — | 0300
60 1°70 | 34°02 | 27°23 | 8:05 | 127] — | Nui100B| 118-0 0334 | 0354 2 Kel
80 1°69 | 34:06 | 27:27 | 8-05 | 133 | — N70B 164-0 0420 | 0440 $ KT
100 1-69 | 34:10 | 27°30 | 8-04 | 133
159 WET || See 2 || 27S || PL || a
200 1-81 | 34°15 | 27:33 | 7°98 | 164
300 1-80 | 34:29 | 27°44 | 7°85 | 186
400 | 1-98 | 34°37 | 27°49 | 7°86 | 189
500 | 2:05 | 34°42 | 27°53 | 7°87 | 184
600 2°09 | 34:48 | 27°57 | 7°86 | 184
800 2:06 | 34:62 | 27-69 | 7°89 | 192
goo 2:02 | 34:68 | 27-74 | 7:86 | 194
WS 321] 4 fo) 0°63 || 33°75 | 27°09 | 8-or | 119 | — N50V 100-0 1705 | — — |A 2129
5 0:60 | 33°76 | 27:10 | 8:04 | 114 | 8:17 | N7oV 50-0
10 0:60 | 33°76 | 27-10 | 8-or | 113 | — 100-50 — | 1800
20 0°58 | 33°75 | 27:09 | 8:02 | 113 | 8-03 | NrooB || 5 aa
30 ae 33°76 | 27°10 | 8-03 | 120 | — | N7oB |/{ Lo058 ELE) | Os e eh
40 0°50 | 33°77 | 27:11 | 8:00 | 120 | 7-96
50 | 0°38 | 33°75 | 27°10 | 7°99 | 120
60 0°14 | 33°83 | 27°18 | 7-98 | 128 | 7-75
80 | — 0°03 | 33-91 | 27°25 | 7°95 | 139
100 | — 0:03 | 33°92 | 27:26 | 7°95 | 139 | 7°37
WS 322 | 4-5 fo) 0-80 | 33°8z | 27-12 | 8-07 r| — | Ns5o0V 100-0 2115 | — — |A 2129
5 0:80 | 33°79 | 27:11 | 8:06 | 123 | 8-09 | N70 V 50-0
WS 322—327 R.R.S. William Scoresby
Remarks
Sounding Weather
Date | Hour (metres)
Barometer
(millibars)
Air Temp.
* Cent.
Station Position
Direction Direction
1928
23° 00” W | 16-17
xl
WS 822} 53° 45’ 30” S, 38°
cont.
WS 323] 53° 38’ 30” S, 38° 35’ 10" W
heavy swell
WS 324] 53° 31’ 40” 5, 38° 47’ 30” W | 21 xii | 1015 SE x E |\4-5| SE x E
21 Xl | 1205 vy. heavy swell
WS 325 | 53° 24’ 30” S, 39° 00’ 00” W
21 xii | 1920
WS 3826 | 53° 17’ 10" S, 39° 12’ 10” W
WS 327] 53° 35’ 00” S, 37° 50’ 00” W | 22 xii | 0330
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 322—327
§ HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Ee ——
Station | =2 Remarks
* pepe pane: Safes ot pH ee Ox Gear Depth babi cartel Bee
: pamesy|CcaP (metres) From To (miles)
0°80 | 33°79 | 27°11 | 8-04 | 128 N70 V 100-50
cont. 20 0°80 | 33°81 | 27-12 | 8-06 | 128 | 8-08 3 200-100 | — | 2205
30 0°78 | 33°81 | 27°12 | 8-05 | 135 | — | Nx100B || 5 ;
40 0°78 | 33°81 | 27°12 | 8-05 | 135 | 8-07 | N70B || 280 234% | Ce0x 3 Ei
50 0°64 | 33°81 | 27°13 | 8-05 | 135
60 0°63 | 33°81 | 27°13 | 8-04. | 140 | 8:03
80 0°38 | 33°80 | 27-14 | 8-02 | 142
100 0°10 | 33°87 | 27-21 | 7-97 | 162 | 7-62
150 0°31 | 33°90 | 27°22 | 7-90 | 162 | 6-64
200 | 1°16 | 34:27 | 27°47 | 7°85 | 179 | 5°45
1°32 179
WS 323 | 9- fo) 1°12 | 33°78 | 27-08 | 7-99 | 109 |} — N50 V 100-0 2205 | — — |A 3129
10 5 1°12 | 33°77 | 27:07 | 8:02 | 110 | 7°96 | N70 V 50-0 — |considerable stray on
10 1°14 | 33°77 | 27°07 | 8:02 | 110 | — 55 100-50 wires
20 0°84 | 33°78 | 27-10 | 8-o1 | 117 | 8-06 . 250-100
30 0°73 | 33°78 | 27°11 | 8-or | 110 | — i 500-250
40 0°65 | 33°78 | 27-11 | 8-01 | 110 | 8-04 5 750-500
50 0:60 | 33°78 | 27-11 | 8-01 | 110 | — 3 1000-750 | — | 0000
60 0°55 | 33°80 | 27°13 | 8:00 | 114 | 7-91 | N100B ;
80 0:34 | 33°85 | 27°18 | 8:00 | 126 | — | N70B |{ re OSAAE OA O2 3 —
100 0:28 | 33°85 | 27-18 | 8-00 | 126 | 7-82
150 0°78 | 34:15 | 27°40 | 7°87 | 162 | 6-13
200 1°48 | 34:30 | 27°47 | 7°83 | 166 | 5-31
300 | 1-98 | 34°48 | 27°58 | 7°81 | 179 | 4°36
400 | 2°01 | 34°54 | 27°63 | 7°82 | 177 | 4°31
500 | 2°01 | 34°53 | 27°62 | 7°90 | 177
600 2°02 | 34°56 | 27-64 | 7-97 | 170 | 4:16
800 | 1-98 | 34°65 | 27°72 | 7°87 | 179 | 4:24
1000 1°87 | 34:66 | 27-73 | 7°88 | 179 | 4:15
1500 | 1°58 | 34°69 | 27°78 | 7°92 | 179
2000 1°17 | 34°70 | 27°82 | 7-92 | 162 | 4:77
WS 324} 10 N 100 B || KT
eo
‘i
(o}
cro
WS 325] 10 fo) 0:83 | 33°79 | 27-11 | 8:04 | 112 | — | N5oV 100-0 1210 | — — |A 3129
5 0°83 | 33°79 | 27°11 | 8-04 | 115 | 8:15 | N70V 50-0 considerable stray on
10 0:83 | 33°79 | 27-11 | 8:04 | 116 | — 3 100-50 wires
20 0°83 | 33°79 | 27°11 | 8-04 | 118 | 7-84 55 250-100
30 0:83) || 33°79) 27-11 || 8:04 | 118 | — 5 500-250
40 0°83 | 33°80 | 27-11 | 8-05 | 116 | 8-or _ 750-500
50 | 0°83 | 33°79 | 27°11 | 8:05 | 115 » 1ooo-750 | — | 1545
60 0°83 | 33°79 | 27-11 | 8-05 | 116 | 7-99 | N 100B || £ * 7
80 ne aaa Boe 8-04 | 121 ee N70B |j 7°9° HAO || eM 3 _
sSI~sININI
WS 328—332
Station Position
WS 328 | 54° 04’ 00” S, 36° 18’ 00” W
WS 329] 53° 56’ 30” S, 36° 06’ 00” W
WS 330] 53° 49’ 30" S, 35° 53’ 30” W
WS 331 | 53° 42’ 00” S, 35° 40’ 40” W
R.R.S. William Scoresby
_| Sounding
Date | Hour (neces)
1928
27 Xii|1100] 192 R.
27 Xi | 1350 165
d. gy.
gn.s.
27 Xil | 1637 1031
27 Xil | 2142 —
27-28 | 2335 3813
WS 3382] 53° 35’ 00” S, 35° 29’ 00” W
Xil
WIND SEA HA | 8
oe eliaeie
2 2 Weather ais ES
Direction é Direction 5 BE ae
E 2 E 2 p.s 989°8 | 1-7
viS. 7
E 3 E 2 oO. ggo'l | 3°2
vis. 6
ENE 2 E 2 0. 989°3 | 1:6
vis
ENE E 2 oO. 989°3 | 1-6
ENE ENE 4 fers 988-0 | 0-5
vis.
68
Remarks
R.R.S. William Scoresby
WS 328—332
§
Ee
Station | <=
=
WS 328 | 15
WS 329} 15
WS 330] 15
WS 331 | 15
WS 332 | 15-
16
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Depth | Temp. | g 0) P PA EAOe |i co) Deo TIME Length Remarks
(metres) | ° Cent. [oo 7 e ea conp.l! Gear (metres) From To cane
fo) 1-03 | 33°75 | 27°06 | 8-07 | 102 |] — | NsoV 100-0 1105 | — = \ 4129
5 1-03 | 33°75 | 27°06 | 8:06 | 106 | 8-05 | N70 V 50-0
10 1°03 | 33°75 | 27°06 | 8:07 | 102 | — _ 100-50
20 ae 33°74 | 27 aol 102 | 8-24 5 160-100 | — |! 1200
30 0°76 | 33°75 | 27°0 ze) 107 — |Nu100B A pa
40 0:60 | 33°79 | 27:12 ee 111 | 802 | N70B 102-0 1222 | 1242 2 K
50 | 9°50 | 33°79 | 27°13 | 8-05 | 115
60 0°40 | 33°79 | 27°13 | 8-06 | 120 | 7-98
80 0°23 | 33°79 | 27°14 | 8:05 | 120
100 O-12 | 33°83 | 27°18 | 8:05 | 128 | 7-86
150 | 0°23 | 33°98 | 27-29 | 7-90 | 149 | 6-79
fe) 1-25 | 33°79 | 27°08 | 8-07 | 102 | — | N5oV 100-0 1355 | — — A 4129
5 I-21 | 33°80 | 27:09 | 8-08 | 111 | 8-31 | N70V 50-0
10 I'l5 33°79 27°09 oe 113 a ae 100-50 = || arigye
20 1°03 | 33°75 | 27°09 | 8:0 120 7 100 B . cae : Sed
30 0:98 | 33°79 | 27°10 | 8-08 | 123 ee N70B cubs T5143 | 1533 3 KT
40 0°95 | 33°78 | 27-09 | 8-07 | 124 | 8-08
50 0:89 | 33°79 | 27°10 | 8:07 | 127
60 0°50 | 33°78 | 27°12 | 8:06 | 139 | 7-89
80 0:26 | 33°83 | 27-17 | 8:01 | 148
100 | 0°23 | 34°00 | 27°31 | 7°95 | 157 | 6-95
150 0°68 | 34:10 | 27-36 | 7°89 | 174 | 6-22
) 0°82 | 33°83 | 27°14. | 8:05 | 109 | — | N50 V 100-0 1640 | — — A 5129
5 0°80 | 33°83 | 27-14 | 8:05 | 112 | 8-15 | N70 V 50-0
10 0°74 | 33°83 | 27°14 | 8-05 | 112 | — 100-50
20 0°63 | 33°82 | 27-14 | 8-05 | 114 | 8-13 re 250-100
30 0:62 | 33°82 | 27°14 | 8:05 | 114 | — = 500-250
40 ©2473-8351 27:10))|'8:05 || 116 ||| 8:12 750-500
50 0°25 | 33°83 | 27°17 | 8:04 | 118 | — y goo-760 | — | 1930
60 0:22 | 33°83 | 27°17 | 8:03 | 124 | 8-08 | NrooB |) ie. 5 af
80 O-10 ae 27:18 | 8-00 | 124 | — | N70B |{ a0 role 3 ae
100 0-20 | 33°89 | 27°22 | 7°97 | 131 | 7°54
125 — | 34:06) — | 7°87) 151
150 0:94 | 34°18 | 27-41 | 7°85 | 166 | 5-81
200 1°38 | 34:26 | 27-45 | 7°81 | 179 | 5:2
300 | 1°85 | 34°43 | 27°55 | 7°79 | 186 | 4:50
400 2:00 | 34°50 | 27°59 | 7°79 | 181 | 4:20
500 | 2°03 | 34°58 | 27°65 | 7°87 | 174 | 4°15
600 2:00 | 34:60 | 27°67 | 7-90 | 170 | 4°12
800 1°87 | 34°62 | 27°70 | 7-86 | 18x | 4:22
950 1°84 | 34:66 | 27-73 | 7°88 | 186 | 4:27
N 100 B || ' KT
iain |i) 2 2152 | 2213 2 x
fo) 0°58 | 33°78 | 27-11 | 8:07 | 100 | — N50V 100-0 2340 | — — |A 7129
5 0°56 | 33°78 | 27°11 | 8:07 | 105 | 8:26 | N70 V 50-0
se) 0°54 | 33°78 | 27-12 | 8:07 | 107 | — 3 100-50
20 0°52 | 33°78 | 27°12 | 8-07 | 107 | 8-54 8 250-100
30 ORSO) |e Be7.ou 2 7l2n||.0:07)|| Loo) | — 5 500-250
40 0°50 | 33°78 | 27°12 | 8:07 | 105 | 8-53 . 750-500
50 0:48 | 33°78 | 27-12 | 8:07 | 106 | — 5 1000-750 | — | 0245
60 0°30 | 33°78 | 27:13 | 8:06 | 109 | 8:14 |] NrooB || | meh 3 om
80 | — ae aos 27-15 | 8-05 | 123 | — | N70B |{ ‘77 ° O558) | 255° 5 KE
100 | — 0°43 | 33°87 | 27°24 | 7°95 | 140 | 7°70
150 0°30 | 34°11 | 27°39 | 7°87 | 164 | 6-09
200 1:28 | 34°34 | 27°52 | 7°80 | 192 | 5-00
300 | 1°53 | 34°47 | 27°60 | 7°80 | 179 | 4°51
400 1°82 | 34°55 | 27°65 | 7:80 | 174 | 4:22
500 1°86 | 34°56 | 27°65 | 7-80 | 170 | 4:27
69
WS 332—338
Station Position
Sounding
(metres)
WS 3382 | 53° 35’ 00" S, 35° 29’ 00” W
cont.
WS 333] 53° 28’ 00” S, 35° 16’ 30” W | 28 xii | 0850
WS 334] 53° 19’ 00” 5S, 35° 10’ 30” W | 30 xii | 0800
WS 335] 53° 11’ 00” S, 34° 55’ 00” W | 30 xii | 1530
WS 336 | 53° 06’ 00" S, 34° 44’ 00” W | 30-31 | 1720
Xil
WS 387 | 52° 59’ 30” S, 34° 26’ 00” W | 31 xii
1929
| WS 338 | 53° 52’ 00” S, 37° 06’ 00” W | 7-8i
3795
It. gy. Oz.
3647
It. gy. Oz.
R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND
Direction Direction
7°
Weather
Barometer
(millibars)
O°5
Remarks
v. heavy swell
|
§
Ee
Station | 58
2
WS 332
cont.
WS 333 | 16
WS 334] 18
WS 335] 18
WS 336 | 18—
19
WS 337 | 19
WS 338 | 26—
27
R.R.S. William Scoresby
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
WS 332—338
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
P.O;
pes eee Ss" a pH acters ao
p.m.
600 1-86 | 34°59 | 27°68 | 7°86 | 170 | 4:25
800 | 1°74 | 34°66 | 27-74 | 7°86 | 174 | 4°34
1000 | 1°55 | 34°67 | 27°76 | 7°85 | 179 | 4°47
1500 1°34 | 34°67 | 27°78 | 7-91 | 181 | 4°75
3500 0-18 | 34°64 | 27°83 | 7-90 | 186 | 5-15
o| 0°43 | 33°78 | 27°12 | 7°99 | 112 | —
5 0°42 | 33°78 | 27-12 | 8-or | 117 | 7-89
10 Aa Sis 1d || a! || AON) NP AM
20 0-41 | 33°78 | 27°12 | 7°95 | 119 | 7:88
30 0°40 | 33°78 | 27-12 | 7:96] 119 | —
40 | 0°40 | 33°78 | 27°12 | 7-97 | 117 | 8-03
50 0:40 | 33°82 | 27°15 | 7-96 | 120 | —
60 0°40 | 33°82 | 27°15 | 7°95 | 108 | 7-85
80 0°30 | 33°80 | 27:15 | 7-96 | 114 | —
100 | — 0°37 | 33°83 | 27°20 | 7°95 | 116 | 7-81
12 = | S88 || || ASA) te
150 | — 0:06 | 34-19 | 27-48 | 7-86 | 160 | 6-17
200 1°13 | 34:40 | 27°58 | 7-80 | 177 | 5:03
300 1°75 | 34°56 | 27:66 | 7°80] 177 | 4:26
400 1°78 | 34°62 | 27-71 | 7°81 | 172 | 4:28
500 | 1°75 | 34°64 | 27°73 | 7°87 | 172 | 4:38
600 1:68 | 34:67 | 27-76 | 7°86 | 170 | 4°33
800 | 1°58 | 34°70 | 27°79 | 7°84 | 170 | 4°43
1000 | 1°34. | 34°70 | 27°80 | 7-90 | 179 | 4-48
1500 | 0°87 | 34°69 | 27°83 | 7:90 | 179 | 4:62
3500 0-01 | 34°65 | 27°84 | 8-12 | 151 | 4:37
fe) 1°22 | 33°78 | 27:08 | 8-02 | 109 | —
5 +22 | 33°80 | 27-09 | 8-02 | 111 | 7°59
10 22 | 33°79 | 27°08 | 8-02 | 112 | —
20 1:22 | 33°81 | 27-10 | 8:03 | 109 | 7°58
30 I-17 | 33°81 | 27-10 | 8-02 | 109 | —
40 I-15 | 33°81 | 27-10 | 8-02 | 105 | 7-74
50 I°I4 | 33°81 | 27-10 | 8-02 | 110 | —
60 LoL sul) 33.80! | 27210) || S:Or || 108, |) 7-72,
80 0:00 | 33°81 | 27°17 | 7°97 | 116
100 | — 0-48 | 33°92 | 27°28 | 7-91 | 127 | 7°41
150 | 0°78 | 34°23 | 27°46 | 7°83 | 164 | 5°52
200 | 1°58 | 34°38 | 27°53 | 7°81 | 174 | 4:69
300 | 1°76 | 34°49 | 27-60 | 7-76 | 174 | 4:28
400 1°88 | 34°58 | 27-67 | 7-79 | 166 | 4:13
500 1°86 | 34°63 | 27-71 | 7°84. | 166 | 4:26
600 1-76 | 34°66 | 27°74 | 7°84 | 162 | 4:29
800 1°65 | 34°70 | 27°78 | 7°89 | 158 | 4:28
1000 | 1°43 | 34°69 | 27°79 | 7°89 | 155 | 4°36
1500 | 0°99 | 34°69 | 27°82 | 8-or | 155 | 4°53)
3000 | 0:20 | 34°66 | 27°84 | 7-95 | 164 | 4°73
) 1°70 | 33°78 | 27:04 | 8:07 | 109 | —
10 I-70 | 33°78 | 27-04 | 8-07 | 112 | —
20 1°64 | 33°77 | 27°04 | 8:04. | 115 | —
30 0:98 | 33°78 | 27-09 | 8:03 | 120 | —
: Dep TIME Length Remarks
ear (metres) ee Lee | IO. tow
From To (miles)
N 100 B || . 5 oe 2 KT
N70B || 95-0 993 | 9923 3
N50 V 100-0 o805 | 0815 — AW 729
N70V 50-0 0850
<3 100-50
r 250-100
» 500-250
» 750-510
4 1000-770 | — I105
N 100 B || 8 hs KT. Nets fished
N70B |f *7°° prea | ase! 8 128 m. for ;\, mile
oa \ 113-0 1536 | 1556 5 KT
N50V 100-0 1820 | — — |A 8129
N70V 50-0
- 100-50
- 250-100
- 500-250
» 7509-500
a 1000-760 | — | 2040 nf
N70B 109-0 0047 | 0107 2 KT
NOE: | 79-0 0229 | 0249 2 KT
N50 V 100-0 22550 —: A 11129
N70V 50-0
3 100-50 — | 0005 zee
N 100 B 97-0 0040 | 0058 KT
at
WS 338—342
R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA yo c
oe | &e
Station Position Date | Hour] Sounding A » | Weather ES BO Remarks
. (roe tres) Direction é Direction 5 ge a
1929
WS 338] 53° 52’ 00” S, 37° 06’ 00” W | 7-81
cont.
WS 339] 53° 42’ 00” S, 37° 0g’ 00” W | 81 |o240 180 W 3 Ww I c. 998-6 | 11
vis. §
WS 340] 53° 32’ 00” S, 37° 12’ 30” W 81 | 0640 740 WwW 3 W © 999°3 | 2:2
sm. d.G. vis. 8
WS 341 | 53° 23’ 30” S, 37° 08’ 00” W | 8i |1105| 1102R. SSW |3-4 SW G 999° | 3°4
vis. 8
1330)" | — s. f. 5
WS 342] 53° 12’ 00"S, 37° 06’ 00” W | 8i | 1600 1154 SW 3 SW Gs I000:0 | 3:3
vis. 8
72
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 338—342
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Station Deas | arenp Lye P.O, ® — TIME Wenge Remarks
(metres)| ° Cent, | > /ce neers |(Ce D | Sen GEES of tow
p.m. i soa From To (miles)
Age of moon
(days)
+
40 0°90
50 0-90
60
80
N70B 97-0 0040 | 0058
i
4
NNN NWN N
SISININININI
HoH
27 : : ah 3 100-0
50-0
100-50
160-100
gI-o
140-0
RN NN
N
~SININI NI “I “I vf
nN
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
700-500 | —
IW WWW WwW Ww
IW WWW WwW WwW
III SINT SION
go-o OgI5
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
CS ESSE FS ES FS SSS SY
27 . ed a . 100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
[lms O°
1000~770
|
ELO=O
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
Ups
1000-780
103-0
j
73
WS 342—345 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA mee |e
Stati Positi Date iE Sounding Weath 28 Bg Remark
tation ‘osition ate our (metres) 9 2 eather 6 = B oO emarks
Directs S || ions 2 Ee
irection é irection é S & az
be = 75 ed aes
WS 342] 53° 12’ 00" S, 37° 06’ 00” W | 8i
cont.
WS 343] 53° 02’ 00” S, 37° 06’ 00” W | 8-91 | 2105 2856 SW 3 SW B b. 10007 | I°4
gn. gy. M. Vis. 3
WS 344] 52° 50’ 00" S, 37° or’ 00” W | gi |0345 2215 SSW 3 SSW 3 (o 999°7 | 1:9
cuGs vis. 8
WS 345 | 52° 41’ 00” S, 37° 06’ 00” W | gi | 1000 2174 SW 2 SW 2 e: 9991 | 5:0
caGe vis. 8
74
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 342—345
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
PO; TIME ibe Remarks
Beads Ce SO. ot pH mgm. eae Gear ees ———__———_ of ae
p.m. From To (miles)
WS 342 400 1°98 | 34°51 | 27°60 | 7-76 | 174
cont. 600 2:01 | 34°60 | 27°68 | 7°89 | 174
800 1-92 | 34°64 | 27°71 | 7°85 | 166
1000 1°79 | 34°67 | 27-75 | 7°96 | 166
WS 348 | 27- ° 1°93 | 33°77 | 27°02 | 8:02 | 105 | — N50 V 100-0 2110 | — <=
28 10 1-92 | 33°77 | 27°02 | 8-02 | 105 | — N70V 50-0
20 1°91 | 33°78 | 27°03 | 8-02 | 108 | — 100-50
25 Igo
30 1°13 | 33°78 | 27:08 | 8-or | rrr | — 55 250-100
40 1-04 | 33°78 | 27:09 | 8-00 | 116 | — 55 500-250
50 1:00 | 33°78 | 27-09 | 8-00 | 126 | — 0 750-500
60 0°82 | 33°79 | 27°11 | 8-00 | 124 | — 5 1000-750 | — | 2335
80 0:63 | 33°80 | 27°13 | 7°99 | 124 | — | N1i00B || KT. Nets towed for 4
100 0°32 | 33°84 | 27°18 | 7-97 | 126 | — N70B |{ Re mar Vea aean 3 mile at 82 m. :
150 0-60 | 34:11 | 27°38 | 7°84 | 160
200 1°40 | 34:26 | 27-45 | 7-81 | 170
309 1°90 | 34°43 | 27°55 | 777° | 174
400 | 2:00 | 34°50 | 27°59 | 7°76 | 174
600 2:06 | 34°57 | 27°65 | 7:86 | 174
800 1-96 | 34°62 | 27°69 | 7°85 | 166
1000 1-80 | 34°67 | 27°75 | 7°85 | 166
1500 1°41 | 34°68 | 27-78 | 7°85 | 166
2000 1°10 | 34:66 | 27°79 | 7°89 | 160
WS 344 | 28 fo) HOON |I33-77) 127-048 ||S-O1n | L21 | Ni Sony’ 100-0 0350 | — — |A 15129
fe) riiste) || Be keyAoh || Ay Mels |licskxone || aay |) N70V 50-0
20 T2501 33777) 2705) | S.0 | 11S) | — 3 100-50
30 1°39 || 33°77. | 27-00 | 8:00 | 118 | — 4; 250-100
40 Meg Onlhaa-7774|'277200)|.6-O1. |e 120) | % 500-250
50 1:04 | 33°77 | 27°08 | 8-00 | 124 | — " 750-500
60 0°97 | 33°76 | 27:07 | 8-00 | 124 | — 56 1000-790 | — | 0615
80 0:39 | 33°79 | 27°13 | 8:00 | 124 | — | NrooB || 5 2 -
100 0-16 | 33-90 | 27-23 | 7-95 | 142 | — | N70B |J Goro Sues | Go $ aa
150 | 0°96 | 34-14 | 27°38 | 7°84 | 157
200 1°62 | 34°31 | 27°47 | 7°81 | 164
300 | 1°94 | 34°46 | 27°57 | 7°78 | 166
400 2:00 | 34°60 | 27-67 | 7-76 | 166
600 1°95 | 34°66 | 27°73 | 7-8 | 162
800 1°85 | 34°69 | 27°76 | 7-80 | —
1000 1-68 | 34°70 | 27°78 | 7°80 | 166
1500 1°21 | 34°70 | 27-81 | 7°87 | 166
2000 0°95 | 34°70 | 27°83 | 7°85 | 170
WS 345 | 28 fo) 1:26 | 33:82 | 27-10 | 8-02 | 105 | — | N50V 100-0 1005 || — — |A 15129
$e) 1-22) /|(33-00 ||| 27-10) || 8:02) || Tag |) — N70V 50-0
20 T2201] 33260 |27-10) |||'8:03)|| 109) | | — 1 100-50
30 0793; 33:8 || 27-12)|/8:02) || 113 |) — 56 250-100
40 OS 43582427207) ||6-O38l LES) | —— ” DOOR =o
50 O:145)/'33-82) 27-171 8-03) ||| 1240 —— » 750-500
60 Omnsalg3cS2u|272070|08:03) | t20 0 |e 3 1000-750 | — | 1215
80 | — 0:03 | 33°88 | 27-23 | 7:97 | 1330 | — | Nz00B/| 92. 3 * 2
100 | — 0-04 | 33-99 | 27°31 oe 148 | — | N70B |jJ ao ao ee ee
150 0°58 | 34°17 | 27°43 | 7°86 | 160
200 1:60 | 34:36 | 27°51 | 7-81 | 166
300 1°95 | 34°50 | 27°60 | 7-79 | 166
400 2:00 | 34°58 | 27:66 | 7-78 | 168
600 1-96 | 34°65 | 27°72 | 8-05 | 158
: 8-08 | 153
72D) || 255
7-91 | 166
7°88 | 170
a
WS 346—351
Station Position
WS 346] 52° 31’ 20” S, 37° 07’ 00” W
WS 347 | 52° 23’ 30” S, 37° 08’ 00” W
WS 348 | 54° 23’ 10” 5, 35° 52’ 00” W
WS 349] 54° 23’ 00” S, 35° 32’ 30” W
WS 350] 54° 23’ 30” 5S, 35° 17’ 00” W
WS 351 | 54° 21’ 30” S, 34° 59’ 00” W
R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND
Date | Hour Wee
Direction
1929
gi |1420 = SW
gi |1555 2524 SW
Ili | 1220 135 SE x E
f. gy. M.
Sh. Sp.
IIi | 1505 267 S)
f.gn. 5.
Ili | 1720 256 S
Iri | 1958 1170 S)
gy. M.R.
76
SEA
3)
5 | Direction
em
2 SW
2 SW
4) SE XE
4 S
4-5 Ss
As S
Se | &
9 Weather 5S Ie)
e ae | <
2 G: 9991 | 570
vis. 8
2 G: 10000 | 4°4
vis. 8
4 bach |) £008-2))| 2-2
vis. 8
4 & ERS) || 2S)
vis
4-5 @ 1008-9 | 0-8
vis. 7
4-5 Ck 1008-9 | 08
vis. 7
Remarks
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 346—351
§ HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Ee
Station | 32 5 Remarks
2~ | Depth| Temp. | ¢ o, P:O; oO, 7 Depth TIME Length
= metres) | °C Silico ot pH |mgm.|_~2 Gear P ————_———] of ;
oe oat aaa pa || pt eet) From To (miles)
WS 346 | 28 N
NCan: I 10-0 1428 | 1448 3 KT
|
_ | WS 347] 28 fo) 1-38 | 33°78 | 27:06 | 8-06 | 108 | 8-30 | NsoV 100-0 1557 | — — A 16129
| 10 1°34 | 33°77 | 27:06 | 8-06 | 108 | — | N70V 50-0
20 1°24 | 33°78 | 27°07 | 8-06 | 111 | 7-85 ss 100-50
30 I-14 | 33°77 | 27°07 | 8:06 | 113 | — % 250-100
40 | 0°44 | 33°77 | 27°11 | 8:06 | 113 | 8-45 - 500-250
} 50 | — o-or || 33°76 | 27°13 | 8:05 | 124 | — FF 750-500
60 | — 0°05 | 33°78 | 27°15 | 8-05 | 124 | 8-18 5 1000-780 | — | 1820
80 | — 0:18 | 33°78 | 27°15 | 8-or | 130 | — | Nx100B }) y . :
100 | — 0-40 | 33-94 | 27-29 | 7-94. | 148 | 7-42 | N7oB | 40° | 1939 | 1959) § | KT
150 | 0°63 | 34°21 | 27-45 | 7°83 | 166 | 5-75
200 1°40 | 34°37 | 27°53 | 7°81 | 168 | 4-91
300 1°80 | 34°52 | 27°62 | 7°80 | 170 | 4:44
400 | 1°85 | 34°61 | 27-69 | 7°79 | 172 | 4:24
600 1°87 | 34°65 | 27-72 | 8-12 | 162 | 4:00
800 1-69 | 34°66 | 27°75 | 8-03 | 151 | 3°94
1000 | 1°42 | 34°67 | 27°77 | 7°95 | 164 | 4:40
| 1500 1-04 | 34°68 | 27°81 | 7-91 | 170 | 4°71
2000 — | 3468} — |7-90| 172 | 4:83
WS 348] 1 fo) 1-36 | 33°82 | 27-10 | 8-03 | 106 | — N50 V 100-0 1225 | — PAT 29
10 1°30 | 33°83 | 27°11 | 8-or | 106 | — N70V 50-0
) 20 1:25 ons 27°10 ae a) — * 100-50 — | 1245
| 30 1-23 | 33°82 | 27-10 | 8-02 | 11 — |Nro00B]| _ 3 2 z
40 1-20 | 33°81 | 27-10 | 8-or | 110 | — | N70B |{f 97° 1334 | 1354 g ES
50 0-78 | 33°82 | 27°13 | 8-or | 121
60 0°55 | 33°83 | 27°15 | 8-00 | 121
80 0°48 | 33°84 | 27°17 | 8-00 | 121
100 | 0°43 | 33°87 | 27°19 | 7°97 | 124
WS 349] 1 ° 1:06 | 33°83 | 27°12 | 8-04 | 115 | — N50 V 100-0 I5tIo | — —- A171i2
B3503 27 4 5 5 7129
10 1-04 | 33°82 | 27-12 | 8-03 | 117 | — N70V 50-0
20 102 | 33°83 | 27°12 | 8:02 | 119 | — 3 100-50
30 ae 33°85 27°14 pee me — 5 250-100 | — | 1545
40 oO 33°84 | 27°15 | 8:01 | 11 — |Nr100B || ae f 2 >
50 0-60 | 33°85 | 27°17 | 8-o1 | 121 | — | N70B |/ 100-0 HUIS) ek $ uot
60 0°54 | 33°85 | 27°17 | 8-or | 124
80 0°50 | 33°84 | 27-17 | 8-01 | 126
100 0:40 | 33°85 | 27°18 | 8-00 | 126
150 0°50 | 34:02 | 27°31 | 7°89 | 151
200 1-06 | 34°21 | 27°43 | 7°85 | 155
WS 350] 1 fo) I'I0 | 33°80 | 27-10 | 8-or | 106 | — | N50 V 100-0 7) || = — |A17129
10 HONS || G¥eHteto) |) A7Arme) || xekxoue || aire ||) N70V 50-0
20 1:05 | 33°80 | 27-10 | 8-02 | 110 | — 3 100-50
30 1:05 | 33°80 | 27-10 | 8-or | 110 | — - 230-100 | — | 1810
40 LOM (933-00 || 2720 r8:02) | ra) || — | IN to0)B) ||| S 842 2 2 KT
50 | 0-50 | 33°81 | 27-14 | 8-01 | 123 | — | N70B |J ‘+ ° ee tee : se
60 0°41 | 33°86 | 27-19 | 8:00 | 127
80 0°25 | 33°92 | 27°24 | 7°95 | 139
100 | 0°27 | 34°03 | 27°33 | 7°89 | 145
150 | 0°64 | 34°14 | 27-40 | 7°84 | 155
200 | 1°45 | 34°32 | 27°49 | 7°82 | 158
WS 351] 1 fo) 0°72 | 33°78 | 27°11 | 8:03 | 100 | — | N50 V 100-0 2000 | — — |A18i2g
10 0-72} — — | 8-01 | 100 — N70V 50-0
20 0:72) |(33:5227-TAy| 6:02) 103) || x 100-50
30 o-72| — — | 8-02] 108 | — i 250-100
40 0:72) (133-79) 27; LE |\8:03) || LO2 || —— 3 500-250
50 0°65 | 33°79 | 27°12 | 8:02 | 105 | — 58 750-500
WS 351—354
R.R.S. William Scoresby
1:6
WIND SEA alee
ae os Sounding Nee 28 5 §
Station Position Date | Hour (metres) 2 9 eather BES HO
Direction é Direction é ae a
192
WS 351| 54° 21’ 30” S, 34° 59’ 00° W | 111
cont.
WS 352] 54° 20’ 00” S, 34° 42’ 00" W | 121 |0023 2352 SSW 4 SSW 3 @: 1007°4 | 0'5
vis. 6
WS 353] 54° 18’ 00” S, 34° 25’00” W | 121 |o610 4041 SSW 4 SSW 4 G 1005°4| 1:6
It. gy. M. vis. 8
WS 354 | 54° 23’ 20” S, 34°07’ 00” W | 121 | 1435 4750 SSW 4 SSW 4 Gs 10059
vis. 7
78
Remarks
heavy swell
WS 352
WS 354
Age of moon
(days)
2
2
Depth
(metres)
60
80
100
125
150
200
300
400
600
800
1000
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Temp.
* Cent.
0:60
0-02
0:00
0°38
I'I0
TAS
1-98
2°00
1:98
I-90
I-71
0:60
0:60
0:60
0:60
0:60
0°52
Orls
0:06
0:05
1:00
I'I5
1°68
I-go
I°gO
Ig
1°79
1°56
I-14
0°63
0°63
0°59
0°55
0°50
0°50
— 0°36
—o-4I
—o-g1
0:27
0°49
OFT
1:87
1°92
1-78
1°58
1-24
0°82
0°52
Orl5
0°49
0750
0°50
0°50
0:29
— 0:26
me ONS 7
= TRS)
19)
— o-o1
R.R.S. William Scoresby
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
P.O;
ate o 25 O,
5 “loo g pHi an cc. p.1
33°79 | 27°12 | 8-02 | 110 | —
33°88 | 27°22 | 7°95 | 124 | —
33°93 | 27°26 | 7-90 | 139 | —
34°03 | 27°32 | 7°86 | 139
34°20 | 27°42 | 7°81 | 149
34°35 | 27°52 | 7°77 | 155
34°52 | 27°61 | 7°74 | 157
34°59 | 27°67 | 7°74 | 151
34°61 | 27-68 | 7°83 | 145
34°64 | 27°71 | 7°85 | 146
34°65 | 27°74 | 7°82 | 146
33°78 | 27°11 | 8-o1 | 106 | —
33°78 || 27-11 | 8:00 || 108 | —
33°78 | 27-11 | 8:00 | 110 | —
33°78 | 27-11 | 8-00 | rrr | —
33°79 | 27°12 | 8:02 | 10g | —
33°79 | 27°12 | 8:00 | 115 | —
38°S0)|(27-20) 17-924) 135
33°97 | 27°29 | 7°85 | 148 | —
33°96 | 27-29 | 7°86 | 148 | —
34°23 | 27°45 | 7°78 | 158
34°24 | 27°45 | 7°77 | 162
34°40 | 27°54 | 7°76 | 166
— — |7:-74 | 166
34°61 | 27°69 | 7°75 | 166
34°61 | 27-69 | 8-06 | 158
34°65 | 27°73 | 8:07 | 157
34°66 | 27°76 | 7-90 | 153
34°65 | 27°78 | 7°84 | 170
34°65 | 27-81 | 7-80 | 170
33°71 | 27°05 | 8:25} 99] —
BBe7la || 27,000.87 05) | 106) || —
RD || Q7POyp | tse ||| 1igk ||
R37 27-00) |,8203) |) 03) |
Bge7Tall27-00) i212) |) 0x2 | ——
33°75 | 27°13 | 8:05 | 113 | —
23°78 | 27-16 |/8:0n | 127 || —
33°95 | 27°32 | 7°91 | 145 | —
34°18 | 27°45 | 7°84] 15t | —
34°25 | 27°50 | 7°83 | 151
34°35 | 27°56 | 7°82 | 151
34°56 | 27°65 | 7°82 | 151
34°59 | 27°67 | 7°85 | 146
34°64 | 27°72 | 7°86 | 146
34°65 | 27°75 | 7°88 | 146
34°66 | 27-78 | 7°87 | 149
34°61 | 27°77 | 7°87 | 153
34°61 | 27°78 | 7-89 | 155
34°60 | 27°80 | 7-90 | 157
33°72 | 27°07 | 8:07 | 90 | —
BB ZN TOF oso 5 | LOL | ——
33°72 | 27:07 | 8:05 | ror | —
33772127207) 1005, ||| £00) | ——
33°73 | 27:09 | 8:06 | 108 | —
23-020 i27-19)|7-98)| EES | ——
33°97 | 27°23)|'797 | 129 | —
33°89 | 27°26 | 7-96 | 124 | —
34°95 | 27°39 | 7°87 | 139 | —
34°28 | 27°55 | 7°83 | 140
N70V
N 100 B
N70B
N100B
N70B
N 100 B
N70B
|
J
|
}
J
Depth
(metres)
1000-750
go-o
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
Toes tS
1000-750
I1g-O
131-0
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
USO
1000-750
122-0
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
500-250
750-460
1000~750
128-0
TIME Length
of tow
From To (miles)
— | 2214
2307 | 2327 | 3
0027 | — —
0255
0420 | 0440 3
0455 | 0515 5
0615 | — —
— | ogoo
1212 | 1232 2
1440 | — =
=a 1745
1954 | 2014 3
WS 351—354
Remarks
Ket
A 18129
KT
KT
A 19129
KT
A 19129
KT
WS 354—357 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA ey a,
pH & 2
come ae Sounding Wreath es 2 § R k
Station Position Date | Hour (metres) eS 9 eather ae BO emarks
Direction 5 Direction | 5 3 a ae
1000-750 | — | 2140
70 1-96 | 33°86 | 27°09 | 7-96] 131 | — |Niro0oB]| __ | 5 rey
80 — 0:06 | 33°89 | 27-23 | 7-91 | 135 | — | N70B |{ ‘75 ° SEER TS z em
100 | — 0-10 | 34:00 | 27°32 | 7°89 | 148
150 | IIL | 34°23 | 27°44 | 7°86 | 153
200 I-52 | 34°31 | 27°47 | 7°82 | 160
400 2°03 | 34°52 | 27°61 | 7°80 | 164
600 2°00 | 34°64 | 27-71 | 7°79 | 162
800 I'QI | 34°67 | 27-74 | 7-92 | 160
1000 1:80 | 34°70 | 27°77 | 7°92 | 155
jee) 1-33 | 34°70 | 27°80 | 7°89 | 155
2000 0°88 | 34:70 | 27°83 | 7°84 | 157
3000 0°30 | 34°67 | 27-84 | 7°84] 158
WS 376 | 29 fo) I*45 | 33°79 | 27°07 | 7°97 | 105 | — | NsoV 100-0 1410 | — — | A 2oiii 29
10 1°42 | 33°78 | 27°06 | 7-99 | 105 | — N70V 50-0
20 I-41 | 33°78 | 27°06 | 7-99 | 105 | — - 100-50
30 1-42 | 33°79 | 27°06 | 8-00 | 105 | — 3 250-100
40 Te3 77 3Q-S20|2722O)||Ss00) || LET | —— 5) 500-250
50 1°37 | 33°82 | 27°10 | 7-99 | 108 | — Fr 750-500
60 YL) Biateyey || Armen |) 7A \e) || seek || —— * 1000-750 | — | 1645
Oo o-2 95 | 27°27 | 7:92 | 124 | — |N100B]| 2 2, 2 KT
$0 — 0°39 Ae 27°35 | 7:89 | 126 | — | N7oB |/ eS EEE aoe S
100 | — 0°38 | 34°11 | 27-42 | 7°87 | 130
150 | O51 | 34°32 | 27°55 | 7°81 | 136
200 | 0°94 | 34°45 | 27°63 | 7°73 | 136
300 1-48 | 34°56 | 27-68 | 7-80 | 136
400 | 1°41 | 34°64 | 27°75
600 | 1°37 | 34°68 | 27°79 | 7°79 | 131
800 1°25 | 34°67 | 27-79 | 7°86 | 131
1000 1:07 | 34°69 | 27°81 | 7-87 | 130
1500 | 0°65 | 34°69 | 27°84 | 7:90 | 139
2000 0°37 | 34°65 | 27°82 | 7°86} 139 |
3000 | — ort | 34°62 | 27-81 | 7°86 | 139
WS 377 | 29 o| 1°33 | 33-90 | 27:16] 7-94 | 124 | — | Ns50V | rt00-0 | 1445 | — — | A 20111 29
10 ie2/7/\|| 33°09) 27-10) ||7:96 || 132 || — N70V 50-0
20 I-19 | 33°89 | 27:16 | 7°96 | 132 | — 96 100-50
30 1-16 | 33°89 | 27-12 | 7°96 | 130 | — % 250-100
40 LeTTa 33°99) p27207i|| 7290!) L30.| —— » SOOS2Z5°
50 rioaeae || Seon’ || Aprons) |i Ro\y | uy) |) + 750-500
60 | 0°79 | 33°96 | 27°25 | 7°94 | 132 | — ” SIS 72) ES
87
WS 377—380 R.R.S. William Scoresby
Sounding Weather Remarks
Hour (metres)
Station Position Date
Barometer
(millibars)
Direction Direction
1929
WS 877] 58° 34’ 00” S, 44° 47’ 00” W | git
cont.
WS 3878 | 59° 20’ 20"S, 45° 51’ 25” W | 10 i1 | 0950 2853 NE x N| 2
WS 379 | 59° 35’ 00", 47° 15’ 00" W | 11-12 4047 WSW
1 gy. Oz.
WS 380 | 60° 22’ 00”, 50° 33’ 00” W | 1211 | 2020 1365 WNW |3-4] WNW | 3 | o.f.r.
CuGake vis. I
8
_ | ee
Station rons)
2
WS 377
cont.
WS 378| 1
WS 379 | 2-3
WS 380] 3
R.R.S. William Scoresby
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Depth | Temp.
(metres)| ° Cent.
80 0-81
150 1°37
200 1°84
shee 1°97
400 1°53
600 1:60
800 1°38
1000 I'O1
1500 0°63
2000 0°29
fo) or12
10 0:09
20 0:02
30 0°03
G2 0°53
50 o18
60 Ol
80 0°49
100 0-47
150 1°29
200 1°49
300 1°63
400 1°50
600 277
800 107
1000 0-71
1500 0°33
2000 0:08
9 0°74
se) 0°73
20 0:60
30 0-60
40 o's
2 0743
60 0°29
80 | — 0:05
100 0:00
150 o-o1
200 0:46
300 0:62
400 0:83
600 o-gI
800 0°59
1000 0:29
1500 o-21
2000 o-o1
3000 | — 0-22
o |—o-19
10 | — o-Io
20 0:03
30 0-16
40 0°23
50 0°27
60 0:26
80 0:26
WS 377—380
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
P.O; | 0,
ot | pH Baca Gear een
27°37 | 7°82 | 145 | — |NrooB]| |
27°57 7°79 | 157 | — | N7oB |i *3*
27°63 | 7°73 | 157
27°68 | 7°79 | 157
27°72 | 7°78 | 157
27°78 | 7°80 | 157
27°78 | 7°83 | 155
27°78 | 7°87 | 151
27°79 | 7°87 | 151
27°80 | 7°87 | 153
26:86 | 7-90 | 131 | — | NsoV 100-0
26°86 | 7-91 | 133 | — N70V 50-0
26:96 | 7-91 | 137 | — 3 100-50
PagPACG| \7Xa\e) || sexe) |) —— s 250-100
27:29 | 7°89 | 140 | — D 500-250
ASS) | TPS || 3 || » USES
27°43 | 7°87 | 146 | — ” 1000-750
Zp 9) | EST a NOOB |
27°60 | 7°79 | 160 | — N70B || 93
27°66 | 7°72 | 160
27°69 | 7°76 | 158
27°73. | 7°77 | 162
27°74 | 7°78 | 162
27°78 | 7°88 | 153
27°78 | 7°87 | 153
27°78 | 7°87 | 153
27°80 | 7°84 | 164
27°81 | 7:86 | 164
27°22 | 7:91 | 1336 | — | Nzr00B |)
27-21 | 7-91 | 136 | — | N70B |{ he
27°30 | 7°89 | 140} — | N50V 100-0
27°34 | 7°88 | 140 | — N70V 50-0
27°35 | 7°87 | 140 | — 2 100-50
27°36 | 7°79 | 148 | — 2» 250-100
27°39 | 7°87 | 149 | — » 500-250
2752 eto) 249) | ” UBS
27 5ONT70y 151 | » 1000~750
27°65 | 7°79 | 162
27°69 | 7°79 | 155
27°73 | 7°80 | 155
27°72 | 7:80 | 162
27°77 | 7°91 | 158
27°78 | 7°93 | 158
27°79 | 7°88 | 157
27°79 | 7°88 | 166
27°81 | 7°87 | 166
27°82 | 7°84 | 164
27:09 | 7°89 | 148 | — | N100B || Bat
Pagpatly || GRO, || a2) || — N70B |] 3
Pg RPBX || 7330) || lA || N70V 50-0
277-208-700) | 057) || 55 100-50
ZFS NTIS || AST. || ae ” ele
Aig Paks) | GAtsKa) ||| ati7) || —= s 500-250
27°42 | 7°87 | 157 | — y T5520
27°48 | 7°86 | 158 | — N50V 100-0
TIME
From To
1806 | 1826
0958 | —
— 1205
1317 | 1337
2041 | 2101
2115
== || ceRe
2025 | 2045
2115 -
— 001s
Weneth Remarks
of tow
(miles)
KT
Colpo
A 21 i129
colno
va
A
KT
A 21 ili 29
eo[to
KT
considerable
wires
A 21 111 29
cote
stray on
WS 380—384
R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA
Station Position Date | Hour] “ounding : g_| Weather
Direction | § | Direction | §
er es
192
WS 380] 60° 22’ 00” S, 50° 33’ 00” W | 12 11
cont.
WS 381 | 61° 26’ 00” S, 56° 19’ 00” W | 14 11 | 2150 425 — fo) — fo) 0.
d. gy.S. vis. I
WS 382 | 62° 15’ 35” S, 58° 18’ 30” W | 15 ii | 13312 425 WSW | 5 WSW | 3 b.
br. gy. M. vis. 8
WS 383 | 62° 20’ 40” S, 58° 13’ 00” W | 15 ii | 1535 2085 WSW WSW b.
d. gn. M. vis. 8
WS 384 | 62° 25’ 40” S, 58° 06’ 10” W | 15 ii | 1927 1957 SW SW bees
gy. gn. M. vis. 7
go
f= ag Remarks
ae | a
985:2 | 3°3
989°3| 4:4
989°3 | 4°4
990°3 | 3°3
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 380—384
8 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Ee
Station | 38 P.O. TIME iv i Remarks
a Depth | Temp. | ¢ 0, = a™5 (0); Z Depth engt
< (metres)| ° Cent. | > /00 : le oan? CCypele Gear Gaewes) oom To Gale)
WS 380 600 0°50 | 34°58 | 27°76 | 7-81 | 174
cont. 800 0°39 | 34°61 | 27°79 | 7°75 | 168
1000 0°35 | 34°61 | 27°79 | 7°89 | 160
WS 381] 5 fo) 1°65 | 34:02 | 27°23 | 7°79 | 136 | — | NrooB |) : 7
10 1-54 | 34:04 | 27:26 | 7-91 | 143 | — | N70B |{ '°*° Sea) eat) 3 ae “96
20 1°32 | 34:04 | 27°27 | 7°96 | 149 — N50 V 100-0 2225 aes
30 1°15 | 34:06 | 27-30 | 7-92 | 149 | — N70V 50-0
40 OFS} || SVU ARS) || hy || S|) Sa » LOCS5o
5° OTP! || SAE | FST NE || ESS || ae » Z5ORTOO
60 0°62 | 34°13 | 27°39 | 7°91 | 160 | — . 400-250 | — | 2325
80 0:29 | 34°22 | 27°48 | 7°82 | 160
100 0:26 | 34:24 | 27°50 | 7°86 | 158
150 | 0°22 | 34°35 | 27°59 | 7°86 | 158
200 0°39 | 34°43 | 27°65 | 7°82 | 160
300 | 0°64 | 34°55 | 27°73 | 7°84 | 164
400 | 0°62 | 34°54 | 27°72 | 7°84 | 164
WS 382] 6 fe) 1°62 | 33°94 | 27°17 | 7°97 | 139 | — N50 V 100-0 1335 | — — |A 221129
10 MGS 330527520 7:90N 143 | N70V 50-0
Ao) DAT 33:94) 27:29 | 7:95 | 143 || ae ” 100852
30 LeL4y 34-07 27°31 | 7-90) | 150 | — e 250-100
40 0:91 || 44enm|27-364! 7-908 158 | —— 3 400-250 | — | 1423
50 0°82 | 34:14 | 27°39 | 7790] 158 | — | NrooB || 2
60 ©-69) 34cn9) (27-4451 7-86) | 151 |e N70B |{ ieee zo || sol :
80 0°68 | 34:23 | 27°47 | 7°83 | 151
100 0:69 | 34°29 | 27°52 | 7°82 | 157
159 OPEN) || SHES aby II 7G> || eke
200 | 0°37 | 34°41 | 27°63 | 7°77 | 157
300 0°51 | 34°51 | 27-70 | 7°76 | 160
400 | 0°53 | 34°60 | 27-78 | 7-76 | 158
WS 383] 6 fe) 2:09 | 34:00 | 27°18 | 7-90 | 135 | — | N5o0V 100-0 1540 | — — |A2z2 i129
10 209) 34°00) 27°18, |||7°89) |) 135 | — N70V 50-0 very great stray on wires
20 1°59 | 34:04 | 27°26 | 7°88 | 135 | — 5 100-50
30 mors} || Syicere || yaks |Get) || oueyy) || 55 250-100
40 0°95 | 34°11 | 27°35 | 7°85 | 145 | — ” HOOe 25°
50 | 0°62 | 34-11 | 27°37 | 7°87 | 143 | — » 750-480
Pe 0°44 | 34°19 0p ne 145 | — ne ae — | 1740
S) 0:13 | 34°21 | 27°48 | 7° I5r | — 100 oe 2
100 | — o-11 | 34°29 Ba Ly a — | N7oB |j 733° ¥843)/ 1903 :
150 | — 0-51 | 34°31 | 27°59 | 7°83 | 153
200 | — 0°68 | 34°37 | 27°65 | 7°83 | 153
300 | — O51 | 34°45 | 27-71 | 7°81 | 153
400 | — 0°88 | 34°52 | 27-78 | 7-82 | 157
600 | — 0-90 | 34°54 | 27°80 | 7-70 | 151
800 | — 0°72 | 34°55 | 27°80 | 7°85 | 157
1000 | — 0°94 | 34°54 | 27°80 | 7°84 | 157
1500 | — 1°47 | 34°58 | 27°85 | 7°85 | 157
WS 384] 6 fo) 2°13 | 34:05 | 27:22 | 7-92 | 1330 | — | N50V 100-0 1930!) — — | A 23 ili 29
10 ZTANBAsO5 || 27-22)(7-95 | 13005 —— N70V 50-0
20 ZO Aes) \\277°23)\\'7-97) 130s | — : 100-50
30 oH, || eV ony WAL RAG || teks) || ately) || — ¥ 250-100
40 | 0°59 | 34:20 | 27°45 | 7°89 | 139 | — » 500-250
50 | 0°44 | 34°22 | 27°47 | 7°89 | 142 | — » 750-500
60 0:14. | 34:28 | 27°54 | 7°89 | 148 | — 5 1000-750 | — | 2130
80 | — 0:37 | 34:37 | 27°63 | 7°85 | 157 | — | NxooB || cs
100 | — 0-72 Wee Se 2-87 et SSN NGo Bi o> CELE EEE
150 | — 0°88 | 34°47 | 27°74 | 7°85 | 157
200 | — 0°92 | 34°47 | 27°74 | 7°86 | 157
250 | — 0-40 | 34°58 | 27°81 | 7°86 | 157
gI
WS 384—388
Station Position
R.R.S. William Scoresby
Hour
Sounding
(metres)
WS 384] 62° 25’ 40" S, 58° 06’ 10”
cont.
WS 385 | 62° 32’ 00"S, 57° 55’ 00” W
WS 386 | 62° 41’ 00" S, 57° 44’ 00” W
WS 887 | 62° 49’ 00” 5, 57° 40’ 00” W
WS 388 | 62° 55’ 30” S, 57° 40’ 00” W
16 li
16 ii |0420
16 ii | 0850
16 li | 1220
1392
c. gn.
M.G.
WIND
Direction
WSW
Direction
Weather
6
WSW
Barometer
(millibars)
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 384—388
g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Ee
Station ce P.O TIME Te, Remarks
x~ | Depth | Temp. | o, 2 past O, - Depth 1 ength
< | (metres)| ° Cent. | ~ /° pH ae cenpell: eas (metres) ion To as
WS 384 300 | — 0°31 | 34°62 | 27-84 | 7°84 | 157
cont. 350 | — 0°56 | 34°62 | 27-85 | 7-85 | 157
400 | — 0°61 | 34-62 | 27°85 | 7-86 | 157
600 | — 1-08 | 34-61 | 27-86 | 7-90 | 155
800 | — 1-19 | 34°61 | 27-86 | 7-90 | 157
1000 | — 1°48 | 34°63 | 27°89 | 7°79 | 160
1500 | — 1°56 | 34°67 | 27-92 | 7°96 | 157
WS 385] 7 fo) 1°30 | 33°69 | 26-99 | 7°96 | 130 | — N50 V 100-0 0005 | — — |A 23 i129
10 1-30 | 33°69 | 26-99 | 7:96] 136 | — | N70V 50-0
20 1°15 | 33°86 | 27-14 | 7°83 | 137 | — 53 100-50
30 0°93 | 34°08 | 27°33 | 7°95 | 140 | — ” 2Eo—Ucle
40 0°85 | 34°12 | 27°37 | 7°96 | 140 | — 35 500-250
50 | — 0°05 | 34°19 | 27-48 | 7°87 | 146 | — ” 750-500
60 | — 0°37 | 34°25 | 27°54 | 7°87} 146 | — 5 1000-750 } — | 0215
80 | — 0°64 | 34°30 | 27°59 | 786] 151 | — | NrooB/| | 5 E
100 | — o-71 | 34:43 | 27-70 | 7°86 | 151 | — | N70B |j ‘77° mea [cs Y HT
150 | — 0°81 | 34°47 | 27°74 | 7°83 | 153
200 | — 0°86 | 34:52 | 27-78 | 7°85 | 153
300 | — 0°88 | 34°59 | 27°84 | 7-84 | 158
400 | — 1:00 | 34°59 | 27°84 | 7-82 | 160
600 | — 1°12 | 34:61 | 27°86 | 7-86 | 160
800 | — 1°33 | 34°62 | 27°88 | 7-85 | 164
1000 | — 1°52 | 34:63 | 27°89 | 7:86 | 160
1500 | — 1:63 | 34°67 | 27-93 | 7°85 | 160
WS 386] 7 fo) 1-06 | 33°58 | 26-92 | 7-88 | 12 — | Nsov 100-0 0423 | — — |A25 ii29
10 1-04) ||| 33°58, | 26-92 | 7-87 | 136 | — N70V 50-0
20 RON) || SS TD || 7) || OH || SIE | » NSO 3o)
30 1-30 34:00 | 27-25) |7-95 | 145 | — 7 250-100
35 ee *p 500-250
ro HOE)! SPO | ray yoy || Mefe) | ” Tale O°
50 0°82 | 34:08 | 27-34 | 7-96 | 143 | — p 1000-750 | — | 0637
60 0°27:| 34°14 | 27-42 | 7°84] 148 | — |Nro0oB]| _ = 2 KT
80 | — 0:97 | 34:20 | 27°52 | 7°89 | 149 | — | N70B |{ 77 ° Sg | ee
100 | — 0-90 | 34°27 | 27°58 | 7°88 | 155
150 | — 0°53 | 34°43 | 27°69 | 7°82 | 164
200 | — 1°19 | 34°47 | 27°75 | 7°79 | 160
300 | — 1:09 | 34°53 | 27°80 | 7-81 | 160
400 | — 0°94 | 34°56 | 27°81 | 7-84 | 158
600 | — ror | 34°58 | 27-84 | 7-91 | 153
800 | — 1°16 | 34°58 | 27°84 | 7:87 | 157
1000 | — 1°33 | 34°58 | 27°84 | 7°85 | 157
WS 387| 7 fe) 1-29 | 34°09 | 27°32 | 7-92 | 139 | — | Ns5o0V 100-0 0855) — | A 25 ili 29
10 I°I2 | 34°09 | 27°33 | 7:92 | 148 | — N70 V 50-0
20 0°49 | 34°15 | 27°41 | 7-91 | 162 | — 5 100-50
30 | — 0:42 | 34-15 | 27-46 | 7-86 | 164 | — 5 250-100
40 | — 0°78 | 34°15 | 27-48 | 7°88 | 170 | — 5 500-250 | — | 0953
50 | — 1:05 | 34:20 | 27°53 | 786] 177 | — |NrooB]|| _, a Sey 2 KT
60 | — 0-99 | 34:27 | 27°58 | 7°86] 177 | — | N70B |J Pome pees ae
80 | — I-09 | 34:28 | 27°59 | 7°86 | 174
100 | — 1-27 | 34°33 | 27°64 | 7°86 | 170
150 | — 1°07 | 34°45 | 27°73 | 7°85 | 170
200 | — I-21 | 34°51 | 27-78 | 7°85 | 168
300 | — 0°95 | 34°53 | 27°79 | 7°84 | 174
400 | — I-OL | 34°55 | 27°81 | 7°85 | 172
600 | — 0°97 | 34°56 | 27°82 | 7-85 | 172
WS 388] 7 fo) 0772) 34°14 |l/27-39))|(-7-90) |) 172 | — || N50 V 100-0 12229) 9 —— — |A 25 ili 29
10 O64) |) 34-14) |(277-40) (77-01 || 172 |) — N70V 50-0
20 0°62 | 34°14 | 27°40 | 7-91 | 174 | — r 100-50
WS 388—392 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND
Remarks
° Cent.
Weather
Sounding
(metres)
Air Temp.
Barometer
(millibars)
Station Position
Direction Direction
WS 388] 62° 55’ 30” S, 57° 40’ 00” W
cont.
WS 389] 63° 17’ 00” S, 58° 51’ 05” W
16-17 |2350| 749
il
WS 390 | 63° 10’ 30” S, 59° o1' 00” W
v. heavy sea
WS 391 | 63° 02’ 00” 5, 59° 12’ 00” W
gi
WS 392] 62° 52’ 00” S, 59° 26’ 00” W | 17 ii | 1930 5
d
94
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 388—392
g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Ee
Station 38 P.O TIME on Remarks
g~ | Depth| Temp. | g¢ o = a8 O, : Depth engt
= | (metres) | ° Cent. | > loo oe ee eae ce. p. 1. Gear eneues) 5 ee ae a ee
WS 388 30 0:07 | 34°18 | 27-46 | 7-90 | 177 | — N70V 250-100
cont 40 | — 0°27 | 34°23 | 27°52 ie 177} — s 400-250 | — | 1318
On| 102530 342239272531 7 077, — |N100B = -
oe — 0-78 | 34-24 | 27-55 | 7-88] 177 | — N70 I0I-o 1348 | 1408 z KT
80 | — 0:96 | 34°30 | 27-60 | 7°82 | 174
100 | — 1°04 | 34°33 | 27°63 | 7°8r | 174
150 | — 1-28 | 34-41 | 27°70 | 7°87 | 177
200 | — 1°31 | 34°43 | 27°72 | 7°85 | 177
300 | — 1°16 | 34°51 | 27-78 | 7°87 | 179
400 | — 1°13 | 34°51 | 27°78 | 7°86 | 179
WS 389] 7 fe) I-or | 34°10 | 27°34 | 7°87 | 124 — |N100B 5 2
10 I*1g | 34:09 | 27-32 | 7-96 ae — | N70B cade SLIGS) olee 2 io 6 iii
20 0°51 | 34°20 | 27°45 | 7°87 | 145 = N50V 100-0 2145 Oe ae
30 0:63 | 34:21 | 27°45 | 7°85 | 146 | — | N70V 50-0
40 O-7ANl 24°28) (27250) || 7°87 | Sr |) — 49 100-50 — | 2210
50 | — 0°49 | 34°35 | 27°62 | 7°85 | 153
60 | — 0-40 | 34°34 | 27°61 | 7°87 | 153
80 | — 0°55 | 34°40 | 27°67 | 7-90 | 157
100 | — 0-91 | 34°41 | 27-69 | 7°75 | 158
WS 390 | 7-8 fo) 2:09 | 34:00 | 27-19 | 7°86] 118 | — N50V 100-0 2355 | — — |A 26ii29
if) 2°09 | 34:00 | 27-19 | 7°97 | 124 | — N70V 50-0
20 2-028) 340119|27220))|(7-05) | 24) || — 3 100-50
30 LOU || 34-00 27-20 |7-94) || 130 |) — _ 250-100
ate E42 | 34500 | 27:24 | 7°95 | 133 | = wee 52052500 OOSS
Ho 0°74 | 34°99 | 27°35 | 7 3) || roo | 2
eee esis = | Neow Co | tt le
80 | — 0:61 | 34°21 | 27°52 | 7°87 | 142
100 | — 0°76 | 34:27 | 27°57 | 7°86 | 142
150 | — 0:86 | 34-38 | 27-66 | 7°82 | 149
200 | — 0-91 | 34°45 | 27°72 | 7°85 | 149
300 | — 1°16 | 34°49 | 27°77 | 7°86 | 145
400 | — 1°12 | 34°50 | 27°77 | 7°88 | 143
600 | — 1:08 | 34°55 | 27°81 | 7°88 | 143
|
WS 391] 8 ° 1-85 | 34:02 | 27:22 | 8-02 | 126 | — | N5oV | 100-0 o450 | — — | A 26 iti 29 ;
10 1°89 | 34:01 | 27-21 | 7-99 | 127] — | N70V 50-0 great stray on wires
20 1°87 | 34:02 | 27:22 | 7-999 | 127 | — 3 100-50
30 I-09 | 34-11 | 27°35 | 7:96 | 128 | — 5 250-100
40 O-5ON (44-05) b27-4m 78732 | > 500-250
50 O-17)|| 34°18) | 27-46 | 7-87) | 137 || — x 750-500 | — | 0623
60 0°04 21 | 27-49 | 7-90 | 137 | — | Nx00B || 2 zn
80) || — 0°31 oe 27°54) 7:89) 139 | = N70B |{ PS, Ci [eta s a
100 | — 0°85 | 34°30 | 27-60 | 7:86 | 142
150 | — 0°86 | 34-42 | 27-69 | 7°84 | 145
200 | — 0°98 | 34°45 | 27°73 | 7°81 | 145
300 | — 0°96 | 34°52 | 27°78 | 7°82 | 146
400 | — 0°99 | 34°54 | 27°80 | 7°87 | 149
600 | — 1°07 | 34°56 | 27°82 | 7°87 | 148
800 | — 1°12 | 34°57 | 27°83 | 7°87 | 148
WS 392] 8 ° 1-42 | 34:02 | 27:25 | 7-99 | 111 | — N50 V 100-0 1935 | — = PAS 27 129
10 22 Ol 4-03 27-20) [7-90 | LL7) | N70V 50-0
20 1°29)||| 34:05) 27-29) (7:97) LLOQ) || —— ~ 100-50
go) 0°59 | 34°10 | 27°37 | 7°96 | 125 | — ” 25 tee
40 | — 0:21 | 34:20 | 27°49 | 7°92 | 125 | — » 400-250 | — | 2050
SO) | 10:21 “23 |27-n2 7-80) || 13m || — | NizooB || 7-7 2 <
oa owe te she is 7 — | NqoB |f 120° | 2134 | 2754 KE
80 | — 0°56 | 34:27 | 27°56 | 7-87 | 136
100 | — 0°65 | 34:36 | 27-64 | 7°87 | 136
150 | — 0-71 | 34°37 | 27°65 | 7°87 | 139
95
WS 392—397 R.R.S. William Scoresby
Remarks
° Cent.
S di .
Hour renee Weather
Barometer
(millibars)
Air Temp.
Station Position
Direction Direction
WS 392] 62° 52’ 00” S, 59° 26’ 00” W
cont.
WS 393 | 62° 42’ 00"'5, 59° 41’ 00” W
WS 894 | 62° 51’ 00” S, 60° 40’ 00” W | 18 ii
WS 395 | 63° 48’ 30” S, 62° 26’ 00” W | 19 11
WS 396 | 63° 38’ 30” S, 62° 28’ 30” W | 19 1
INE SXaN) | 945 |PNE RX En 3 o.m. 984°4 | 0-6
vis. 2-4
WS 397 | 63° 29’ 25S, 62° 37’ 00” W | 19 ii | 1900
WS 392
cont.
WS 393 | 8-9
WS 394] 9
WS 395] 10
WS 396 | 10
WS 397 | 10
200
300
400
R.R.S. William Scoresby
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Depth | Temp.
(metres)
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
WS 392—397
Remarks
te P,0; || 6. a TIME Length
° Cent. 5 To or pH eae cc. p.1 Gear (ne Geom To eral)
— 0°79 | 34°51 | 27°77 | 7°87 | 139
— 1:05 | 34°52 | 27°79 | 7°87 | 139
— 1:08 | 34°54 | 27°80 | 7°83 | 139
1°59 | 33°86 | 27°11 | 7-996] 109 | — | NrooB Pe 7
1°59 | 33°85 | 27°10 | 7-97 | 118 | — N70B ie 2340 || 0000 3 are -
1-49)|| 33°86 | 27-12 || 7-92 | 113 | — N50 V 100-0 0015 ic ?
0°59 | 33°93 | 27°23 | 7°93 | 124 | — | N70V 50-0
— 0°10 | 33°94 | 27:28 | 7-91 | 124 | — 100-50
— 0:28 | 33°95 | 27:29 | 7°89 |] 130 | — 95 250-100
— o'I§ | 33°98 | 27°31 | 7°87 | 130 | — ¥ 500-250
— 0°08 | 34°02 | 27°34 | 7°85 | 133 | — »» 750-500
— 0:08 | 34°14 | 27°44 | 7°85 | 133 | — 5 goo-650 | — | 0245
0°13 | 34°20 | 27-47 | 7°81 | 133
0°33 | 34°34 | 27°58 | 7°80 | 139
0°52 | 34°46 | 27-66 | 7°75 | 132
0°70 | 34°57 | 27°74 | 7°81 | 139
— 0°56 | 34°54 | 27°78 | 7°81 | 136
— 0°84 | 34°50 | 27°76 | 7°85 | 136
— 0°95 | 34°56 | 27°81 | 7°84 | 136
— 1°23 | 34°57 | 27°83 | 7°89 | 139
— 1°33 | 34°55 | 27°82 bottle had touched
bottom
ESO} |3 4500) 27-20\\7207 ||) 120) | — N50 V 100-0 0759) |) — — |A 26iii 29
1-89 | 33°99 | 27°19 | 7°96 | 128 | — N70V 50-0
1-89 | 33°98 | 27°18 | 7-96 | 131 | — ¥ 100-50
1°87, || 34-00 | 27°20 | 7-92 | 132 | — > 200-100 | — | 0830
1:79) || 34:00! 27-21 ||7-97 ||| 132 | — || NiroolB | 7 2 -
0-77 | 34:03 | 27°30 | 7-92 | 132 | — | N70B |J ea) 0859 | 0919 3 KT
0:26 | 34°11 | 27-40 | 7-90 | 143
o-14 | 34°21 | 27-48 | 7-89 | 139
0°34 | 34°24 | 27°50 | 7°88 | 148
0°36 | 34°36 | 27°59 | 7°83 | 148
0°55 | 34°49 | 27°68 | 7°86 | 148
2:26 | 33°46 | 26-74 | 8-00 | 119 | — | N50V 100-0 1333 | — — |A 28 ili 29
220334302672) |: |, 120) || — N70V 50-0
2228) (038AAal 20-72) |6:00)||(123) | S 100-50
2°09 | 33°45 | 26°75 | 8:00 | 120 | — " 250-100 | — | 1412
0°69 | 33°74 | 27°07 | 7-91 | 136 | — | Ni0oB || 2 >
—O2Ii oe 257-22) eel 43 —— N70B |/{ aaa E4408 1507 $ es
— 009 | 33°94 | 27°28 | 7-91 | 146
— 0:01 | 34°16 | 27-45 | 7°87 | 151
O-1I | 34:27 | 27°53 | 7°85 | 160
0-01 | 34°42 | 27-65 | 7-86 | 160
0:06 | 34°44 | 27-67 | 7°81 | 160
2°12 | 33°46 | 26°75 | 8-00 | 124 | — N50 V 100-0 ne || — — |A 28 ii 29
2:05 | 33°47 | 26°77 | 8:00 | 128 | — N70V 50-0
I-9t | 33°49 | 26°79 | 7°99 | 130) — ” LOO—5O
1°13 | 33°69 | 27-01 | 7°94 | 131 = i 250-100 | — 1645
O77, 33°77, 27-09) | 793) 139) —— | Nxco Bs - - 2 |KT
an 33°85 Back oe 140 | — | N70B |J ae ae 1733 | 1753 : fo
0°29 | 33°95 | 27°26 | 7:90 | 140
— 0°83 | 34°05 | 27°40 | 7°85 | 151
— 0°63 | 34°13 | 27°45 | 7°83 | 153
— 0-01 | 34°32 | 27°58 | 7°83 | 153
0°32 | 34°43 | 27°65 | 7°83 | 158
1-18 | 34°66 | 27-78 | 7-81 | 158
2O)|| 33350-20753) 7297) || LO) ||) —— N50 V 100-0 1905 | — — |A 28129
1°79 | 33°71 | 26:98 | 8-00 | 188 | — N70V 50-0
MY
WS 397—400
R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND
Station Position Date | Hour ee 9
Direction | §
jem
| 1929,
WS 397] 63° 29’ 25" S, 62° 37°00" W} 1911
cont.
WS 398 | 63° 09’ 00” S, 62° 27’ 00” W | 2011 | 0850 274 NW 3
d.gn.S.
WS 399 | 62° 50’ 00" S, 61° 58’ 30” W | 2011 | 1400 738 NE
It. gy.
M.d.58.
WS 400 | 62° 07’ 00” S, 62° 33’ 00” W | 2111 |o4rs 4517 NNE
gy. Oz.
98
SEA
3)
Direction | §
em
NW I
NNE
oe a
os Es
Weather ES ie 3) Remarks
ae | 2
o.m.s.| 988-1] 0-5
o.s.g. | 989:8] 1:4
vis. 2-4.
0. 995°3 | 0:6
vis. 4-5
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 397—400
g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Ee
Station $8 P.O TIME Te h Remarks
2~ | Depth | Temp. ° e Bea O, Depth eueL
<= | (metres) | ° Cent. S *eo : pH one ceup. 1: CoS: (metres) Foon lire aes
WS 397 20 OAS || ately || zu GAGs || was) |) ~ 70 Ae ; 100-50 — | 1930
cont. 30 1:07 | 33°92 | 27°20 | 7°95 | 121 = 100 2 Z
fer lee ga 02)| 27-30 | 71031130 || —= || No lj 79° || 2003) 2023) SIRT
5° SS || ECT || A7F si) eh | a
60 | 0°50 | 34°07 | 27°35 | 7°89 | 136
80 0:34 | 34°22 | 27-48 | 7°87 | 136
100 | 0°39 | 34°29 | 27°53 | 7°86 | 136
150 | 0°59 | 34°46 | 27-66 | 7°84 | 136
WS 398 | 11 fe) 1°76 | 33°80 | 27-05 | 7°96 | 12 — | Nsov 100-0 sss — |A 28 i129
10 1°50 | 33°87 | 27°13 | 7:96 | 1336 | — | N70V 50-0
20 1:22 | 33°89 | 27°16 | 7°95 | 136 | — sp 100-50
30 1:09 | 33°90 | 27°18 | 7°87 | 136 | — 9) 250-100 | — | 0930
40 0:96 | 33:94 | 27°22 | 7°93 | 1440 | — | N100B || z 2 =
Bel Woealias gyi 26ll 790 | 240)| == | NqeR | 72° | 70°° | 1978) FS
60 0°74. | 34:00 | 27°28 | 7:90 | 140
80 | 0°59 | 34°05 | 27°33 | 7°90 | 145
100 | 0°48 | 34°09 | 27°37 | 7°87 | 140
150 0°21 | 34:28 | 27°53 | 7°87 | 146
200 0:60 | 34°50 | 27-69 | 7°80 | 151
WS 399 | 11 ) 2:69 | 33°67 | 26°87 | 8-01 | 113 | — | N50V 100-0 1405 | — PAS 201126
10 2°68 | 33°66 | 26°86 | 8-00 | 115 | — | N70V 50-0
20 2°59 | 33°74 | 26-94 | 8:03 | 116 | — * 100-50
30 2°12 | 33°76 | 26-99 | 8-00 | 114 | — . 250-100
40 0-10 | 33°83 | 27°18 | 7-93 | 126 | — 20 500-250
50 | — o-or | 33°84 | 27-19 | 7°84 | 126 | — ” 700-500 | — | 1515
60 | — 0°35 | 33:93 | 27:28 | 7°81 | 131 | — | Nxr00B || = 2 Z
Bee alecoa ese enlia7 |= | Naow fr5> | 1545) teem ie ES
100 | — 0°37 | 34°14 | 27°45 | 7°82 | 137
39 0°02 | 34°27 | 27°54 | 7°79 | 14°
200 0°44 | 34:40 | 27°62 | 7°81 | 143
300 | 0°75 | 34°51 | 27°69 | 7°79 | 143
400 | 1-06 | 34°59 | 27°73 | 7°75 | 142
600 | 0°59 | 34°60 | 27°77 | 7°81 | 137
20 2°11
30 2°23 these temperatures ob-
35 2°03 |p — _ | |= = _— = — _ — served between 1515
40 0°75 and 1530
50 0-06
WS 400 | 12 fo) 2°42 | 33°69 | 26-91 | 7°97] 114 | — | N50V 100-0 0430 | — — |A 2g ili 29
10 2°46 | 33°65 | 26:88 | 7-99 | 119 | — | N70V 50-0
20 2°46 | 33°65 | 26°88 | 8:or | 119 | — 3 100-50
30 2°47 | 33°68 | 26-90 | 7°89 | 139 | — 250-100
40 | 1°59 | 33°71 | 26-99 | 7°99 | 124 | — » 500-250
5° 0734 | 33277 | 27°22) | 7°97 || 124.) = ” USS
60 0:06 | 33°78 | 27°14 | 7°98 | 126 | — 7 1000-750 | — | 0700
80 | — 1:07 | 33°86 | 27:25 | 7°95 | 139 | — | Ni00B || 7 2 7
100 | — 0:66 | 34:00 | 27:35 | 7°88 | 146 | — | N70B |jJ aoe ROCA port g eu
ESS 0°53 | 34°30 | 27°53 | 7°82 | 151
200 | 1°14 | 34°45 | 27°61 | 7°74 | 151
600 | 1°72 | 34°66 | 27°74 | 7°75 | 131
800 | 1°55 | 34°68 | 27°77 | 7°87 | 152
1000 1°47 | 34°70 | 27°80 | 7°88 | 146
1500 ‘II | 34°70 | 27°82 | 7-90 | 151
2000 0-70 | 34°69 | 27°84 | 8:00 | 151
3000 | 0°44 | 34°69 | 27°85 | 7°93 | 151
99
WS 401—403 R.R.S. William Scoresby
WIND SEA ear Viele
Stati Positi D H Sounding Ww 2s § E i
tation osition ate our! (metres) xe 9 oe 9 Veather 5S ES 6) Remarks
Direction é Direction é Ss & aN
1929
WS 401 | 61° 20’ 00” S, 63° 12’ 00” W | 21-22 | 1930 35606 NE x E /3-4| NExE]| 3 oO. Loor2 | 1-2
il vis. I
WS 402 | 60° 32’ 00” S, 63° 57’ 00” W | 221i | 0850 3786 NE 3 NE 3 Co) IO0I‘4 | 1-9
vis. 7
WS 403] 59° 40’ 00” S, 64° 35’ 00” W | 22-23 | 2040 3721 IND, 5 15; || 3} || INNS S18; |] 2 oO. 100375 | 2:2
H gy: Oz. vis. I
100
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 401—403
g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
°
ne
Station $8 P.O TIME Remarks
e~ | Depth| Temp. s eb O, Depth 2 Length
<2 | (metres)| ° Cent. S *oo ot pH Bee cc. p. 1. Gear Gacees) pee To eas
3°08 | 33°76 | 26-91 | 7-97 | 113 | — N50V 100-0 1935 | — — |A 291129
13 10 3:08 | 33°76 | 26-91 | 8-00 | 115 | — N70V 50-0
20 3°08 | 33°77 | 26-92 | 7-92 | 124 | — ss 100-50
30 | 3°08 | 33°77 | 26-92 | 7°95 | 119 | — » 250-100
40 2°71 | 33°77 | 26°95 | 7-92 | 119 | — »» 500-250
50 1°45 | 33°83 | 27°10 | 7°93 | 123 a 5 750-500 water sample from 80 m.
60 0°70 | 33°87 | 27°18 | 7°93 | 131 — as I000—750 — 2200 turbid
80 0°35 | 33°88 | 27-20 | 7°67 | 113 — |N100B })
100 | — o-14 | 33°91 | 27°25 | 7°89 | 131 = N70B |{ 155° OOF Rone 3 KT
150 0°32 | 34°17 | 27°44 | 7°87 | 151
200 | 0°93 | 34°31 | 27°52 | 7°80 | 157
300 | 1°64 | 34°49 | 27°61 | 7°76 | 157
400 1°83
600 | 1°93 | 34°64 | 27°71 | 7°86 | 149
800 1°90 | 34°65 | 27°72 | 7°81 | 145
1000 1°78 | 34°69 | 27-76 | 7°87 | 145
1500 1°42 | 34°70 | 27°80 | 7°83 | 137
2000 1°13 | 34°69 | 27-81 | 7°83 | 145
34°68 146
WS 402} 13 ° 3°46 | 33°78 | 26-89 | 7-96 | 108 | — | Ns5o0V 100-0 ogoo | — — |A 3011129
10} 3°47 | 33°78 | 26°89 | 7°97 | 113 | — | N70V 50-0
20 3°47 | 33°77 | 26°88 | 7-94 | 118 | — x 100-50 ,
30 1°93 | 33°83 | 27-06 | 7-96 | 127 | — a 250-100
40 1°48 | 33°82 | 27-09 | 7°97 | 125 | — . 500-250
5° 0°75 | 33°8r | 27°13 | 7°96 | 127 | — ” 750-500
60 | — 0°51 | 33°87 | 27:24 | 7°96 | 139 | — 3 1000-750 | — | 1140
80) ||| — 5-2 86 | 27-26 | 7- 140 | — | N1r00B }) , A :
soo | 034 33:96 | 2730 | 7ro4 | 42] — | Now [j 25° [tt] rast] F/T
150 | 0°73 | 34°08 | 27°34 | 7°88 | 148
200 | 0°99 | 34°17 | 27°40 | 7°87 | 148
300 | 180 | 34°34 | 27-48 | 7-81 | 157
400 | 1°92 | 34°42 | 27°54. | 7°77 | 158
600 1°89 | 34°52 | 27-61 | 7-90 | 153
800 2:08 | 34°62 | 27-68 | 7-81 | 153
1000 2°04 | 34°63 | 27°69 | 7-84 | 153
1500 | 1°67 | 34°70 | 27°78 | 7-84 | 149
2000 1°43 | 34°68 | 27°78 | 7-90 | 149
: 149
WS 408 | 13- fe) 4°13 | 33°83 | 26°86 | 7-97} 118 | — | Ns5o0V 100-0 2045 | — — |Atriv29
14 10 4°14 | 33°83 | 26°86 | 8-02 | 116 | — | N70V 50-0
20 4°13 | 33°83 | 26:86 | 8-or | 123 | — * 100-50
30 4°17 | 33°84 | 26°87 | 8-or | 125 | — % 250-100
35 4°16 26 500-250
B/D ee | ae emo || eel) cae tae ” IEE
40 3°75 | 33°84 | 26-91 | 7-96 | 127 | — p 1000-750 | — | 2355
KT
Colne
- 104-0 0133 | 0153
1ol
WS 404—407
R.R.S. William Scoresby
ous Sounding
Position Date | Hour (metres)
Station
Direction
1929
WS 404 | 58° 49’ 00" S, 65° 15’ 00” W | 23 i1 | 0840 3470 NNE
WS 405 | 57° 53’ 00” S, 66° 10’ 00” W | 23-24 | 2102 2941
0830
56° 50’ 30” S, 67° 03’ 00" W | 24 ii
lt-Secas
25 li | 2140 130
WS 407 | 54° 10’ 00” S, 63° 32’ 00” W
sm. St.
102
1234 WSW
Direction
Weather
Barometer
(millibars)
1005'I
977°9
Remarks
heavy swell
6-1 |v. high long
swell
8-3. | high swell
R.R.S. William Scoresby WS 404—407
g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
ae
Station 38 P.O : [ TIME L th Remarks
g~ | Depth} Temp. | ¢ 0, are 2 104-0 2318 | 2340
— 0-6
104-0 2132 | 2150
99-0 2311 | 2329
100-0 0950
50-0
100-50
250-100 | —
+ I41I—-O
- LIQ—-O
100-0
50-0
100-50
250-100
°
ui
°
ox
°
NI
°
nN
n
|
ol
an
SS 28—38
South Sandwich Islands
WIND
Eh eh oe : Sounding
Station Position Date | Hour (metres) Ay
Direction 5
ca
1928 3
SS 28 | 59° 26’ 00" S, 25° 24’00” W | 111 | 1900 — WxN 1455
SS 29 | 60° 05’ 30” S, 24° 19’ 00” W | 131 |og50 = INGaWinlle
SS 30 | 60° 08’ 30” S, 24° 19’ 00” W | 131 | 1115 — INISEME | 3)
SS 31 | 60° 59’ 00” S, 25° 55’ 30” W | 181 | 1200 = SWxW | 2-3
SS 32 | 60° 57’ 00” S, 25° 57’ 30” W | 181 | 1420 — SWxW | 3
SS 33 | 60° 52’ 00” S, 25° 29’ 00” W | 201 | 1600 — SxW | 4
SS 34 | 60° 51’ 00” S, 26° 25’ 00” W | 211i | 1900 — SoA || 2
SS 35 | 60° 49’ 00” 5, 26° 32’ 00” W | 2ri | 2025 — SS lla=@
SS 36 | 60° 58’ 00” S, 26° 20’ 00” W |} 241 | 1030 — NE x E | 1-2
SS 37 | 61° 00’ 20” S, 26° 26’ 00” W | 241 | 1200 — NE Xx Esl 2
SS 38 | 61° 05’ 00” S, 26° 20’ 00” W | 271 |1110 — SxW | 5
118
SEA
Direction
WwxN
Nx W
N x W
SWxW
SWxW
Sx W
Weather
oO.
Onute
e. f.
Barometer
(millibars)
998
999
997
998
996
1007
1007
IOI4
1013
1004
a
Ee
i= ro) Remarks
ei
—o-4
05 | slight
SW swell
06 | slight
SW swell
I'l | slight
NE swell
I'o. | mod.
NE swell
03
NOD
—o'5 | slight
NE swell
103)
2:2
= 1:5
South Sandwich Islands SS 28—38
g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Ee
Station 3.8 P.O. TIME ene Remarks
2— | Depth| Temp. | « o, “AS || (0): Depth ength
a (aeeies) a Cae 8 “loo ou pH ae CONpels Gear (ieee) Foon To Gnile)
SS 28 | 18 30 |—o-2 | 33-771 | 2710} — | — — Ns5oV 100-0 1900
40 |—o-5 | 33°80] 27:18 | — | — — N70V 50-0
SOM team a aeO 5272335) eal ——! Pp %9 100-(0)
COR 20m 3arg0) 27-35) |e 250-(0) | — | 2300
80 |— 1-7 | 34°13 | 27-48
100 |—1°5 | 34°18 | 27°53
C5 |e a2 34532 127,93
150 | — 0°45 | 34°36 | 27°63
200 O15 | 34557 | 27°77
250 0-4 | 34°63 | 27-81
SS 29 | 20 o |—o-7 | 33:10 | 26:62 | — | — — Nae ee 1016 || 1031 2 KT
SS 30 | 20 OW 0:35) 338243 20°72) —9 | | Neon } 219-0 1122 | 1139 3 KT
SS St | 25 DOSS GSO ete ed | oe een i 135-0 1221 | 1240 2 |KT
eisai 25 D | = OS) S| 2 | | ale Roun } 115-0 1440 | 1459 3 |KT
SS 33 | 27 o |—o8 | 33-11 | 26:63 | — | — — N50V 100-0 1945
5 |—o0:8 | 33°16 | 26:68 | — | — — N70V 50-0
LO) || =10:715)|| 33°16) 26:68) — || —— — 4 100-(0)
Z0 ||— 075, || 33°40 | 26:86 | — | — — 5 250-100 | — | 2100
30 |—o8 | 33°87 | 27°25
40 |— 13° | 33°96 | 27°34
50 | — 1°65 | 34°07 | 27°44
60 | — 1-7 | 34°09 | 27°45
80 |— 1-6 | 34:20 | 27°54
HS) |] TEES || Bee || IS
HI! | SCZ) || Sere || <7Fds
200 o-15 | 34°58 | 27°78
250 0-4 | 34°63 | 27°81
eee || 2 27593282975) — | — | — NTR Nageo lxorg | coat | # [KT
SS 35 | 28 OH et 5O5 11035123) 1E2 0074 | iene |||, a || Loos | 119-0 2032 | 2051 3 RT
N70B |j
eon 2) 0} | — 6:35 |133°22 | 26-71 | — | — | — Nee } 128-0 | 1037| 1055 | 3 |KT
SS 37 | 2 OP Or 7 33x3h 20803) = | Sates ; 130-0 1204 | 1220 2 KT
SS 38 5 @ jis || ergy ||apAeo | — |) = N50 V 100-0 IIIO
Ba feet 335.74 2702 | ae a NTOLVS|, © 5e-0
NO) || = uAIS || BOI Ag ene | Ga => ”» 100-50
ZO 125) 133957427021 |e ” BOO meat icone
HO) || = Us} || BFS || 7A
40 |— 1°55 | 33°58 | 27°05
50 |—1°7 | 34°29 | 27°61
60 | — 1-65 | 34:29 | 27-61
80 | — 1-65 | 34°33 | 27°64
100 |— 1:3 | 34°37 | 27°67
150 | — 0-6 | 34°52 | 27°7
200 | — 0°15 | 34°58 | 27°80
250 0-0 | 34°65 | 27°84
119
SS 39—53
Station
,
SS 44
61° 21
GI IAC0" 95205 167 307 Wi
61° 19’ 00" S, 26° 06’ 00” W
Ore 219801 1S 20— 20030) NV
62° 23’ 00” S, 27° 04’ 00” W
2G] Ay “Thy gf tly! Cy NY
62° 00’ 20” S, 27° 05’ 00” W
62° 13/00” S, 27° 10’ 00” W
61° 30’ 00” S, 23° 20’ 00” W
Position
Date
South Sandwich Islands
Hour
Sounding
(metres)
WIND
SEA
Direction
Force
30" 5S, 26° 25’ 00” W
61° 45’ 00” S, 26° 50’ 00” W
62° 45’ 00” S, 25° 42’ 00” W
62° 21’ 30” S, 24° 02’ 30” W
62° 19’ 20” S, 24° 02’ 00” W
62° 11’ 30” S, 21° 30’ 00” W
62° 15’ 00” S, 21° 36’ 20” W
1635
1440
1730
SWxW | 2
Wxs
SW xS
SSW | 3
SEX Ss
120
Weather
oO
. rs Oo
Direction 5
fy
ExN |23 &
SWxW | 2
Wwxs
ssw | 3] .
Air Temp.
° Cent
Barometer
(millibars)
—o6
Remarks
slight
N swell
mod.
NE swell
slight
NW swell
mod.
NW swell
slight
N swell
South Sandwich Islands
SS 39—53
SS 39
SS 40
SS 414
SS 43
— 0°85 | 33°73
— 0°85
— 1:05
— 055
Z
Lal
)
}
ce]
j 995°
- L1Q-O
141-0
iene
2)
8 HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
E@
Station | 3 TM Remarks
pe Fee ee lee || on lnen|o | Gar) | Dems |e
< (metres) | ° Cent. p.m.?| °¢-P- 1 (metres) Tea To (miles)
1142
1314
1658
L757
1420
1734
2057
SS 48 | 19 N50 V 100-0 1405
N70V 50-0
¥ 100-50
> 250-100 | — | 1520
colo
oes
SS 54—58
Date
|
South Sandwich Islands
Hour
Sounding
(metres)
Station Position
SS 54. 60° 59’ 20” S, 2a 21’ 50” W
SS 55 | 61° o1’ 00” S, 23° 30’ 00” W
SS 56 | 61° 49’ 00" S, 23° 54’ 00” W
SS 57 | 61° 49’ 30” S, 23° 28’ 00” W
SS 58 | 61° 55’ 00” 5S, 23° 40’ 00” W
20 il
20 ii
22 il
23 il
23 il
2000
2150
1630
1740
1995
WIND SEA uD ar
38 Be
Weather & = pe Remarks
Fi dead ee oh Reet nC A fap ee
u w oa 2
irection é Direction é & & a
= o-I — 0-1 || 0. fs 995 |— 03
— O-I — o-1| o.f.s 995 |}—90'5
SWxS /3-1] SWxS | 3-1 @ 1002 |— 1:0
o-I o-I oO. 1005 | — 0-6] slight
SE swell
fe) o-I (a) 1006 | — 1:2] mod.
SE swell
South Sandwich Islands SS 54—58
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Station P,O; Rare TIME Teena Remarks
mgm.| oc, ( Gear Gece Sp an|| GE a
p.m. ; To (miles)
Age of moon
(days)
Depth | ‘Temp. 6
(Genes) ° Cent. ) ies pH
1-4 =
unr
250-100
Un
4
6
6
‘7
5
a
7
“4
123
RS 1—8 Ross Sea
WIND SEA wae oe.
; : a6 eR
Station Position Date | Hour pee 2 9 Weather gs eg Remarks
Directi © | Directi 8 Se || tue
irection é irection é geé a
1928 as
RS 1 | 63° 33’ 00” S, 168° 30’ 00” E| 22 xi | 1220 = WANA W965) WEN ea oO. 997'0 | — 2:5 | Station
worked in
open lead in
pack ice
RS 2 | 63° 30’ 00” S, 168° 50’ 00” E | 22 xi | 2000 = ASIA | @ |) WANN |] 2 oO. 997'0 | — 2°5 | Station
worked in
open lead in
pack ice
RS 3 | 63° 25’ 00" S, 169° 50’ 00” E | 23 xi | 1400 = WNW | 4 | WNW | 4 oO. 1005'0 | — 2°5 | station
worked in
open lead in
pack ice
RS 4 | 64° 15’ 00"S, 171° 00’ 00” E} 26 xi | 1330 1200 NW 4 NW 3 0. 971°9 | — 3:0} lying in
pack ice
RS 5 | 66° 35’ 00” S, 177° 40’ 00” E| 4 xii | 0930 = NE 4 NE 2 — 993°6 | — 1°5 | station
worked at
edge of
pack ice
RS 6 | 68° 11'00"S, 179° or’ 00” W | 10 xii | 0930 = WNW | 5 | WNW | 5 Ge LOL2 35) (1 LO
RS 7 | 68° 10’ 00"S, 178° 00’ 00” W | 13 xii | og40 — NW 4 NW 3 CuSs 988-8 | — 1:0
RS 8 | 69°07’ 00"5, 179° 39’ 00” W | 17 xii | — — SW 3 _ “= 0. 967°5 | — 2:0
124
Ross Sea RS 1—8
g HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
ge
Station 38 P.O, TIME enor Remarks
o> | Depth} Temp. | go, 2.5 . ength
B | cmetres)| °Cent.| S°/co | of | PH ass | ens Gay nal
RS1 | to N 100 B 95-0 1240 | 1255 4 KT
RS 2 | to N 100 B 85-0 2000 | 2015 7 KT
RS 3 | 12 Ni100B] 131-0 I4I7 | 1435 3 Ker
RS 4 | 15 o | — 1-60 | 34:00 | 27:38 | — | — — | Ns5oV 100-0 1347 | 1348
5 | — 1°76 | 34-01 | 27°39
10 | — 1°80 | 34°08 | 27°45
20 | — 1°80 | 34:08 | 27-45
30 | — 1°75 | 34°18 | 27°53
40 | — 1:85 | 34°16 | 27-52
50 | — 1°85 | 34°18 | 27°54
60 | — 1°85 | 34:22 | 27°56
80 | — 0:20 | 34:29 | 27°56
LOO FDS) || SHE) || SAAT)
150 1°18 | 34°61 | 27°75
200 1°18 | 34°63 | 27°76
300 1°25 | 34°66 | 27°77
400 1-20 | 34°67 | 27°79
500 1-07 | 34°66 | 27°79
“RS5 | 22 © |— 1°45 | 33°89 | 27:28 | — | — — N50V 100-0 2014 | 2018
5 | — 1°50 | 33°89 | 27-2
10 | — 1°50] 33°89 | 27-2
20 | — 1:60 | 33°89 | 27:2
JO > 72 SEF || 7 =
Aho) NETS) || Sunes |p See
2) || = 7S || Sure || eee)
Gomes
80 | —o-go | 34:39 | 27°68
100 | — 0°35 | 34°43 | 27°68
110 0°25 | 34°58 | 27°77
125 0°65 | 34°57 | 27°74
150 1:05 | 34°62 | 27°77
300 1°32 | 34°66 | 27°77
500 I-15 | 34°71 | 27°83
RS6 | 28 O | = 1-45) 34:01 || 27-38 | — | — — |Nut100B | _ 100-0 0953 | 1015 3 _
Bef 2505)/ 34:01 127-30), —— | => x 117-0 1044 | 1104 3 KT
LON | O54 (34-00 27-39) | —— | IN S0lV 100-0 2010 | 2011
20 | — 1-65 | 34-01 | 27°39
JD | 27! SNe | oe
40 | — 1°80 | 34:22 | 27°55
60 | — 1°80 | 34°22 | 27°55
80 | — 1°80 | 34:23 | 27°57
100 | — 1°35 | 34°36 | 27°66
150 | 0°50 | 34°50 | 27°69
RS7 I N100B| 146-0 0944 | 1006 3 KT
RS 8 (Gal collection of diatoms
from melted ice
125
RS 9—19 Ross Sea
WIND SEA se || Ss
: aa aS
Station Position Date | Hour oes a » | Weather gs BS Remarks
Direction 3 Direction 8 é € Be °
Retry arate nea ei at l,m (Ope een | ay em
RS 9_ | 70° 02’00"S, 180° 10’ 00” W | 18 xii | 2115 = SW 3) = —]| s.q. 993°6 | — 3:0 | in heavy
pack ice
RS 10 | 70° 26’ 00” 5, 177° 43’ 00” E | 20 xii | 1645 -- SW |8&10o) — - s. 952°3
RS 11 | 72° 02’ 00” S, 177° 50’ 00” E | 23 xii | 1100 — SW 3 — —]| b.c. 988-1
RS 12 | 72° 12’ 00"S, 177° 50’ 00” E } 23 xii | 2159 — SW 3 SW 3 |D) © 952°3
RS 13 | 73° 30’ 00” S, 179° 00’ 00” E | 27 xii | 1318 522 SE 4 SE 4 0. 952°3
gy. M.
RS 14 | 73° 32’ 00” S, 177° 45’ 00” E | 31 xii | 1332 = SW 2 SW 2 b. Ne)
1929
RS 15 | 74° 45’ 00"S, 179° 45’ 00” E} 11 |2015 324 NW 3 NW 3 b. 997°5
bl. St.
RS 16 | 74° 42’ 00” S, 177° 48’ 00" E}] 2i | 1805 250 N 2 Saar = b. 996°3
Di. Oz.
RS 17 | 74° 06’ 00"S, 178° 55’00”E] 31 |0g958 — NW I NW I b. 100074
RS 18 | 73° 07’ 00"S, 176° 15’00”E] 4i |1530 = NE 2 NE 2 0. IO00I‘O
RS 19 | 73° 08’ 00" S, 175° 50’ 00” E| 6i |0020 400 h. NNW | 4 — — b. ~ | 1000-4.
126
Station
RS 9
RS 14
RS 15
RS 16
RS 17
RS 18
RS 19
Age of moon
(days)
12
5)
20
21
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Ross Sea
RS 9—19
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
PO;
imezen)| Cent, | 8 los | et | PHT fmm.) 0%) | Gear
o | — 1:60 | 33°98 | 27°37] — | — — | Ns5oV
50 | — 1°80 | 34°22 | 27°55 | — | — — |Nui1o00H
80 | — 0°30 | 34°36 | 27-62
go 0°20 | 34°48 | 27-70
100 0°79 | 34°53 | 27°71
300 1°45 | 34°67 | 27°77
500 I-30 | 34°70 | 27-81
o | — 1-00 | 34°14 | 27-48 | — | — — N50 V
50 | — 1°80 | 34:24 | 27°58
80 0:00 | 34°51 | 27°73
go | 0°60 | 34°58 | 27°75
100 0°85 | 34°59 | 27°75
300 1°48 | 34°70 | 27-80
400 1°35 | 34°70 | 27-81
500 1°20 | 34°75 | 27°86
o | — 0:80 | 34:18 | 27-50 | — | — — |Nr100B
5 || = weete) || eytons))|| yogi |) || = N50 V
IO | — I-E5 | 34°18 | 27-51
ZOD ae ea Stel Oh 27052
30! | — 1°20 | 34°19)! 27-53
40 | — 1°50 | 34:22 | 27°55
60 | — 1°40 | 34°24 | 27°57
80 | — 0°95 | 34°38 | 27°67
TOO | — 9°45 | 34°49 | 27°73
150 0:20 | 34°58 | 27°78
200 | 0°80 | 34°64 | 27°79
300 I-00 | 34°67 | 27°80
400 1-00 | 34°66 | 27°79
500 1-00 |-34°67 | 27-80
Io | — 0-80 | 34-14 | 27-47 | — | — — | Nsov
20 | — 1-05 | 34°14 | 27°48
AOD E451) 34527 [2752
60 | — 1-60 | 34:26 | 27°59
80 | — 1:20 | 34°35 | 27°66
100 | — 0°80 | 34°46 | 27°72
150 0-40 | 34°61 | 27-80
200 0°75 | 34°61 | 27°77
300 0:00 | 34°66 | 27°85
400 | — 0°30 | 34°67 | 27°88
SUG) || ey
= N100B
N100B
N100B
N100B
— — N 100 H
N100B
fo} 1°50 N50V
Io | 0°75 | 34°35 | 27°56
Depth TIME Length Remarks
(metres) F of ON
rom To (miles)
100-0 2207 | 2208
3-0 | 0320 | 0345 | 23
100-0 1826 | 1827
collection of diatoms
from melted ice
gi-o 2159 | 2224 : KT
100-0 2346 | 2347
100-0 1319 | 1320
55-0 1326 | 1356 2 |KTr
46-0 2018 | 2105 4 KT
37-0 1808 | 1850 2$ | KT
gi-o | 2012 | 2105 25 iE
137-0 1008 | 1030 2 KT
I-o 1530 | 1550 ; :
95-0 1618 | 1640 2 KT
100-0 0058 | 0059
RS 19—23 Ross Sea
WIND
4 aa Sounding 7
Station Position (metres) Weather
Barometer
(millibars)
Air Temp.
° Cent
Direction Direction
RS 19 | 73° 08’ 00” S, 175° 50’ 00” E
cont.
RS 20 | 72° 30’ 00” S, 176° 18’ 00" E] 8i
NW-SW| 6
RS 21 | 73° 30’ 00” S, 178° 00’ 00” E} 101 425 R.
RS 22 | 74° 27’ 00"5,.179° 07’ 00” W] 151
RS 23 | 74° 20’ 00” S, 179° 50’ 00” E} 171
128
Station a
a
RS 19
cont.
RS 20 | 27
RS 21 | 29
RS 22 5
RS 23 7
Depth
(metres)
150
210
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Ross Sea
BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
1 P.O; TIME Length
Temp. | co Bab O, : Deptt 2
3 Gant. S “leo or pH Sane Capel: Gear Gaietes) Room To Gale
— 0°45 | 34°35 | 27°63
— 100 | 34°35 | 27°65
— 1°15 | 34°36 | 27°65
— 1°30 | 34°35 | 27°66
ei S0)|| 3444) 2 787°
— 0°78 | 34°50 | 27°75
0°65 | 34°61 | 27°78
0°35 | 34°65 | 27°82
— 1:25 | 34°61 | 27-88
— 1°75 | 34°67 | 27°93
— 1:95 | 34:81 | 28-06
0:00 N50 V 100-0 2352 | 2353
— 0°45 Ni00B | 119-0 0535 | 0600 tt | KT
—o'80
— 0°95 | 34°30 | 27°60
— 0°90 | 34°39 | 27°68
— 0-80
0°50 | 34°59 | 27°77
— 0-40 | 33°83 | 27-21} — | — — |Nui100H O-5 1040 | 1100 2
— 0°52 | 33°85 | 27°22] — | — — N50 V 100-0 I51I | 1512
— 0°55 | 33°85 | 27:22
— 0°55 | 33°85 | 27°22
ay LSE) |EesD pee
— 1:40 | 34°16 | 27°50
— 1°50 | 34°31 | 27°63
— 100 | 34°41 | 27-69
— 0°35 | 34°42 | 27-66
0°25 | 34°62 | 27°81
0°70 | 34°62 | 27°79 |
0:20 | 34°65 | 27°83
— 0°30 | 34:68 | 27-89
10:3011/ 34°80) 127799) | — 1) —— I a= = == rag lel oe
0°50
0°50
974591133193) “7123
0°20 | 33°94 | 27:26
TS ORSI | Seets) | eas)
— 0°60 | 34°27 | 27°56
— 0°98 | 34°37 | 27°66
— I'Io | 34°40 | 27°68
= HIS) || EP aese || SOAS)
— 0°65 | 34°52 | 27°77
— 0°45 | 34°57 | 27°80
—~ 0-70
— 0°50 | 34°61 | 27°85
O85) e4e07n 27241 | — |e == N50 V | 100-0 2145 | 2146
PID || eed | 7
PD) || Sar Ed || Saha
ETO || Seria) | aha
OTC IS A224 27S
0°65 | 34°17 | 27°42
= O25 || SHEL || 27/5)
— 0°80 | 34°33 | 27°61
— 1:00 | 34°42 | 27°69
— 0°95 | 34°48 | 27°75
— 0°90 | 34°57 | 27°83
— 105 | 34°57 | 27°83
— 0°90 | 34°57 | 27°83
129
RS 19—23
Remarks
bottle touched bottom
RS 24—29
Station
Ross Sea
WIND
Direction
SEA
Direction
RS 24 | 75°09’ 00" S, 179° 32’ 00” W
RS 25 | 74° 46’00"S, 179° 12'00” W
RS 26 | 72°55'00"S, 179° 53’ 00” W
RS 27 | 73° 10’ 00” S, 179° 00’ 00” E
RS 28 | 73° 07’ 00” 5, 178° 30’ 00” E
RS 29 | 72° 44’ 00"S, 179° 55’ 00” W
Sounding
Date | Hour (metres)
1929
221 |0930 465
Di. Oz.
241 |0930| — 390
Di. Oz.
301 |2100} 700-goo
S. St.
311 | 1330 800
2ii |OIIO —
I4 li | 2100 1000
SSW
W
NE
NW
W
130
N
Ww
SSW
NE
NW
u@ | &
ae | x
997°0 | — 3°0
994°9 | 070
992'2 | — 1:0
978-6 | — 3°0
968-5 | — 3:0
966-8 | — 1-0
Remarks
Ross Sea RS 24—29
HYDROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS BIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS
Station P.O TIME en Remarks
D Tem 25 D “ gth
epth ESPs yes ot pH |mgm. O, Gear epth ———_——_| of tow
(metres) | ° Cent. pin cc. p. 1. (metres) ie To (miles)
Age of moon
(days)
0°70 27°48 | — | — N50V 100-0 1053 | 1054
Og 27°55
0°05 27°64
—o-80 27°73
= OL) 20
— 0°85 27°08
— 0°85 27°10
— 0°85 27°58
— 0:90
1
SUMMARISED LIST OF STATIONS
The positions of all stations made by the R.R.S. ‘William Scoresby’ between January 1928 and the
6th of May 1929 are shown on the charts reproduced in Plates I-VIII. The following list indicates on
which chart each of the stations is to be found. The stations made near the South Sandwich Islands are
to be found on Plate IX, those made in the Ross Sea on Plate X.
RERESs Wil LAN SCORES Bye
Station Date Place
WS 137-143 8-14. 11. 28 Falkland Islands to South Georgia
WS 144-195 Ig. ii—13. ii. 28 Off South Georgia
WS 196-202 14-23. iv. 28 South Georgia to Clarence Island
WS 203-209 25-29. iv. 28 Clarence Island to Falkland Islands
WS 210-250 29. V.—20. vii. 28 Off Falkland Islands and between Falkland Islands
and South America
WS 251-256 19-24. vill. 28 Falkland Islands to South Georgia
WS 257-285 27. Vili —18. ix. 28 Off South Georgia
WS 286-288 18-19. ix. 28 Edge of pack-ice to east of South Georgia
WS 289-296 I-4. x. 28 Off South Georgia
WS 297-310 4-8. x. 28 Edge of pack-ice to east of South Georgia
WS 311-313 10. X.—5. xi. 28 Off South Georgia
WS 314-320 1-16, xii. 28 South Georgia to Falkland Islands
WS 321-373 16. xii. 28-21. 1. 29 Off South Georgia
WS 374-381 6-14. 1. 29 South Georgia to South Orkneys and South
Shetlands
WS 382-399 15-20. il. 29 Bransfield Strait, South Shetlands
WS 400-406 21-24. ll. 29 Drake Strait
WS 407-409 25-26. 11. 29 Staten Island to Falkland Islands
WS 410-416 13-17. ill. 29 Falkland Islands to South Georgia
WS 417-426 10-15. iV. 29 Off South Georgia
WS 427-433 28. iv.—6. v. 29 South Georgia to Port Stanley
PLATES I—xX
YSIMUseIH Wosy FSO opnyisucTy
oSE 10, oe Oe oh ae BE of Ge Of OF Of Lt? 108
DMO LOTT ny nn rT 10601100111 001 1101 11 TT 1 Vue vt COT MMM} DIM INO. IMO}
9G
FI
2|
eae VIDYOAD HLAOS
Fos zersme 08
1arsMe H
oBt'sme
+el'sime
A e4isme E
A ssisMme H
H ePID Ye i
Sc] | ca Pil; fehl
jos ZLVS'M ML 2458 BLISM | 2, °
| Co, Q 98I\SMe
Oe
= | J 42adoo 2. Zei'sime L
B i 8ersme B
ozisme S21SM PES EZISM IZISM OZISM Gals) spb S4oyg
. ZZVS'M
e0]49Y4) 9
Oe B 3 0 GLAU OLY BOs
; . z6l'sime E
F dor? H
2 ra =
B ip oe *Z6I'SM E
A aP, = ¥ B
F a esse : iat : |
ee 5 S6IS'M, ~Se'S'M,_ ___#SI'SiM,___"__, SS —..-°% 37 SNM |
@? &
ow c:
iP gorsme
E Lol Obl'sme ssi'sme MS ESING :
E eS, sorsme 3
: alsin worse eersme H
B & iS BbI'SMe esisme i
sorsme 20%
6tI'S'Me ie ae DOTEING
ose zsi'sme 6arsme Hoe
E Barsme B
H Osi'sme +6I5'me :
H esis Me o6tisime H
IST B'Me |
161'SMe
re
H EYS me esisme y
: vers'me H
| rath Ree
z isi'S'Me 2
AAT
m1 ————
uoyvelouag Ban Tenby Sqaequeq
s Og GS 0)
009
3% FT 9744979 +
NVHOO [NU
GS
AHLAOS
z
Su Ebrs Me
OF
9
4
: GE? ES EY PH) ED BES LPF EIS FLT) PSY I [sexy alas] = ae a eS ES Ee ee en Ee Ee Be Be ee Ee Be Ee ee ee
of
eo7sme
vOz'sMe
sO
BOSSMe
ovyl Fras : Itl'SMe
Yomuserzy | worF 48eq| epnz.duocTy
Eliz 00S
oS
Q?
ue de
eecavens zdzsm Boz'sm, 6O7'SMA
Gg mugyor? T . \
. | By S
(Fe Qh \g
poompsn g i
EE Si eS! LU Ne = eS ee eee sal
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. Ill PLATE III
66° 65° 64° 63°
a nnn
*WS.236
W.S.21
C.Tres Puntas fs 2
°WS.215.216
*w.S.220 °W.S.235
W.S.221 © ¢/W.S.222 eWS.214
ew.s.223
*WS.226 W.S.212,213 ©
°W.S.232,233
| eWw.S 230,231
°W.S.210,211
a cr
°w.S.225
I a
5m = L, | Va *w.S.229
ie D5
Ss
Jason I> , - tor?
2g "s- sy" fz
OBEECIG Ce ONS 243) Elephant ei , ae 4 pose ule
ve
oW.S 228
W.S.239 ¢
Uee,,
Jason I.
or
mm
°WS.240,241
ewS.244
ews 249
oY
Atos
p.steP™ oW.S.246
\e
°W.S.245 as x
r aw ws.248
nT ——_ 1m
» Beaucheéne I.
D ISLANDS
Bank
6 66° 65° 64° Long fitide West 60m Gre Oleh
WoIMuUseig wore FSO Spnuyzisuo'y
Of LE 8
=
TM an TM
9S
DMT
VIDSYHOUS HLNOS
267 SMe
s6zsmMe
DOM
y6esMe
E67 SMe
NTT
Hl ALND 8
cies Me
ONT
sl THB 810%
my
3 6 GON UIUULy
ty ‘om 1BZSM OBSZSM 6L47SM ed em
_bersmtezsm Bosh : A
8z'SM O6eS Moyo
DO
O6c'SMe
POMONA
ziesme *
o92sMe
sLeosMe
19zZS'Me
bLesMe
QzSMe
Ha ITTUN ALANA
€4es sh
E92z'S'
voeSMe
—I ooo rr rr res
I —— sauners 1.
@ MONTAGU I.
FREEZELAND RK, #** & BRISTOL:
BELLINGSHAUSEN L.
OOK I.
THULE I. @. @)
BONE ees. So x
Fig. 2. The South Sandwich Islands.
to the north and next morning (February 2) yet more, appearing as “two hummocks
just peeping over the horizon”’. Cook approached the land seen the previous evening,
finding it to be of considerable height, with its summit lost in the clouds, and covered
with ice and snow “except on a projecting point on the north side and two hills seen over
this point which probably might be two islands. These only were clear of snow and
HISTORY OF THE ISLANDS 139
seemed to be covered with green turf”. The weather becoming hazy Cook continued to
the north, leaving the land “ under the supposition of its being an island” with the name
Saunders Isle. On the morning of the 3rd he came up with the two hummocks seen
the previous day; he found them to be two islands with a rock between, and he called
them the Candlemas Islands, after the day on which they were discovered.
Cook then continued his voyage to the east and thus missed sighting the three
northern islands of the group. In his journal on February 6 he writes: “I concluded
that what we had seen, which I named Sandwich Land, was either a group of islands,
or else a point of a continent. For I firmly believe that there is a track of land near the
pole which is the source of most of the ice that is spread over this vast Southern Ocean”.
Forty-five years later Cook’s discoveries were completed and extended by the re-
markable work of Capt. Fabian Gottlieb von Bellingshausen! of the Imperial Russian
Navy in the corvettes ‘Vostok’ and ‘Mirnii’.
On December 22 1819, steering east-north-east, an island was sighted to the north
of any of the land discovered by Cook. It proved to be small, high and snow-covered,
and Bellingshausen named it Leskov, after the first lieutenant of the ‘Vostok’. On the
next day another island, which he called Visokoi, was seen to the east. It had a high
mountain in the middle and was almost completely covered with ice and snow. “The
island is round with a circumference of about 12 miles, but it is impossible to land on
the steep rocky shore.” Thinking that certain thick black clouds to the north betokened
more land Bellingshausen sailed in that direction, discovering a third island with a
crater ‘‘ from which a thick vapour of a most unpleasant odour continually rose. As we
sailed with the wind along the island we noted that this vapour made a permanent dense
cloud and gave the impression from afar of the thick smoke which rises from the funnel
of an engine’’. Bellingshausen sailed round the island and called it Zavodovski, after
the second-in-command of the ‘ Vostok’. He hove to for the night and next day lowered
a boat and succeeded in making a landing. The shore party reported that half-way up
the mountain they found the ground warm, and that there were many penguins sitting
on their eggs. “A particularly bad odour came from the great quantity of bird dung,
and forced them to return quickly to the vessel.”’
Bellingshausen called these three new islands the Marquis de Traverse Islands, and
then turned south to examine the lands discovered by Cook. With three chronometers
in place of the one which Cook carried he was able to determine their positions with
greater accuracy, and by sailing to the eastward of them he proved conclusively that all
were islands and that Cape Montagu, Cape Bristol and Southern Thule were not parts
of an Antarctic continent. He pushed far to the south of Southern Thule, meeting much
pack-ice, and on January 4 1820, reached lat. 65° 25'S, when, “with a range of 40 miles
from the look-out, no continuation of the Sandwich Islands could be seen towards the
South”. Returning north he passed to the west of Southern Thule and Bristol and then
1 Bellingshausen’s narrative of his Antarctic voyage is extant only in Russian. The extracts here given
are from a translation made for the Hydrographic Department of the Admiralty. An account of the voyage
will be found in Mill, The Siege of the South Pole, p. 114 (London, 1905).
140 DISCOVERY REPORTS
steered east ‘‘to make a new attempt to get to the southward at another more favourable
point”’.
Bellingshausen reported that there were three Candlemas Islands instead of two—
one of his very few errors; but he stated correctly that there were three islands in
Southern Thule. For one of the latter he retained the name Thule, while another he
called Cook Island. Cook had named the group Sandwich Land, and Bellingshausen
says: “Captain Cook saw these islands first and, as he had thus named them they must
stand, as a memory of the daring explorer to be handed on to posterity. Consequently
I call them, also, Sandwich Islands”’.
Since the time of Bellingshausen little survey work has been attempted at the islands,
and though they must frequently have been sighted by sealers in the last century and in
recent years by whalers, very few have recorded their visits.
Morrell,! whose account of his voyages is generally discredited, says that in 1823 he
examined the islands from the Candlemas Group to Southern Thule. He remarks that
he saw ‘‘nine burning volcanoes”’ and that “three of the islands had vomited out so
much of their entrails that their surfaces were nearly even with the water”. In 1830
Capt. James Brown,* when engaged on a sealing voyage in the schooner ‘Pacific’, re-
discovered the three northern islands first found by Bellingshausen. Knowing nothing
of Bellingshausen’s voyage he gave them new names, and with less reason gave a new
name also to Saunders Island. His men landed on Zavodovyski and noted that steam
was issuing from the ground at many points as well as from the main crater. On
Visokoi they found ‘“‘a burning mountain with smoke issuing in different places”. In
the same year (1830) John Biscoe* in the brig ‘Tula’, with the cutter ‘Lively’ in com-
pany, in the voyage in which he discovered Enderby Land, visited Montagu’ and
sighted Bristol and Saunders Islands.
From 1830 there appear to be no records of any visits to the islands until 1908, when
Capt. C. A. Larsen, the pioneer of modern Antarctic whaling, examined the group in
the S.S. ‘Undine’ in the hope of finding a site for a whaling station. Owing to lack of
harbours he failed in his main object, but in the course of his expedition he was able to
carry out some very useful work. Of the eleven islands he visited seven: he was unable
to approach the Thule Group by reason of pack-ice, and he appears to have missed the
south-western island of the Candlemas Group in the fog. Larsen was extremely suc-
cessful in making landings on the islands. Hitherto Zavodovski was the only island on
1 Morrell, A Narrative of Four Voyages..., p. 66 (New York, 1832).
2 See Fricker, The Antarctic Regions, pp. 62-4 (London, 1904).
3 See E. Fanning, Voyages round the World, pp. 440-3 (London, 1834).
4 The journal of John Biscoe’s voyage, in the possession of the Royal Geographical Society, is printed in
The Antarctic Manual, pp. 305-25 (London, r1gor).
5 The compiler of the Notes on the Sandwich Islands, drawn up for the use of the Hydrographic De-
partment of the Admiralty, calls attention to the curious circumstance that Brown was at Visokoi and Biscoe
at Montagu on the same day (22 December 1830). ‘They do not appear to have met.
6 Larsen’s report does not appear to have been published. The notes and extracts given here are from a
translation prepared for the Colonial Office.
HISTORY OF THE ISLANDS 141
which a landing had been reported. On this island Larsen landed, and he or some of his
party also succeeded in getting ashore on Candlemas, Saunders, Montagu and Bristol.
At each of these islands geological specimens were obtained, and trawls and dredges for
collecting zoological material were used at a number of localities."
Larsen’s landing on Zavodovski was adventurous enough. In his report he says:
One of the boats was a pram, and I went on board that in order to try landing. In a manner we
succeeded in this, but the heavy swell capsized the pram and threw us into the icy water, but on
shore we came... .As the swell was on the increase we were obliged to put out the pram again, and
we brought with us some stone samples. Then we rowed along the coast to the middle of the island
just to where the fuming exhalations are to be found... .Here I went on board the pram again, as
the swell was running too high to land with one of the other boats, but it was a risky affair. The pram
shipped water before we could put on shore and all three were thrown into the icy water again.
It was with great difficulty that we could save pram, oars, guns, etc. The pram capsized in the
breakers, but we succeeded in getting it on shore without other damages than broken tholepins and
a hole in the bottom. All the collection of stone samples from the first landing place were lost.
On shore Larsen became dizzy and was almost poisoned by fumes issuing from cracks
in the ground, and though he succeeded in getting back safely to his ship he was
seriously ill for some months. Of a number of the islands he made rough sketch-plans,
and that these are not more accurate is due no doubt to the illness which overtook him
after his first landing.
In rg11 the second German South-polar Expedition, under Lieut. W. Filchner, visited
the northern islands of the group in the S.S. ‘Deutschland’. The weather appears to
have been bad and no survey work was attempted. Filchner, however, gives in his
book? a description, a photograph and three sketches of Leskov. He notes that puffs of
white cloud rose repeatedly from the summit, but was in doubt whether these were
steam from a volcano or snow driven by the wind. Visokoi was sighted during a break
in the weather and was determined as lying 6 to 8 miles S 55° E of its charted position.
The Candlemas Group must have been passed at some distance, for Filchner, though
giving a fairly accurate sketch, states that there is only a single island. Zavodovski was
seen under better conditions; its volcanic activities are described and two sketches of it
are given.
Shortly after the ‘Deutschland’s’ visit, and in the same season, a small expedition set
out to hunt whales in the vicinity of the islands. Mr H. Jensen, now Chief Engineer of
the whaling transport ‘Peder Bogen’, who took part in the voyage, tells us that it was
undertaken by two vessels under the command of Capt. Ole Jérgensen: a large whale
catcher, the ‘ Thulla’, with the barque ‘ Havfruen’ in company. Four months were spent
near the islands of which eight, apparently the eight southernmost, were seen. A landing
was made in Ferguson Bay on Thule Island, and a barrel containing a notice of the
1 The geological specimens were reported on by Baeckstrém, Bull. Geol. Inst. Upsala, x11, pp. 115-82
(1915), while some parts of the zoological collections (Isopods, Amphipods, Pycnogonids) are described by
Miss Richardson, Chevreux and Bouvier in Anal. Mus. Nac. Hist. Nat. Buenos Aires (3), XIV, pp. 395-413
(1911).
2 Filchner, Zum Sechsten Erdteil, p. 111 (Berlin, 1923).
Dill
142 DISCOVERY REPORTS
visit was left on shore. The ‘Havfruen’ was damaged by ice and sank on December 1
1911, her crew being rescued by the ‘ Thulla’. The latter vessel afterwards operated on
the Patagonian coast; but the voyage proved a commercial failure, as in the course of a
year’s work only twenty-eight whales were taken.
Sir Ernest Shackleton! in 1914, in the auxiliary barquantine ‘Endurance’, passed
between the Candlemas Group and Saunders, on his expedition to the Weddell Sea.
Fifteen miles north-east of Saunders he met a belt of heavy pack-ice, and he notes that
the position of this island, according to observations made by Cmdr. Worsley, is roughly
3 miles east and 5 miles north of its charted position.
In 1922 Cmdr. Frank Wild,? who was in command of the ‘Quest’ after Shackleton’s
death, paid a visit to Zavodovski. Like all others who have seen it he refers to its vol-
canic activity and speaks of caves on the southern side ‘“‘from the mouths of which
sulphurous fumes were issuing in a reddish cloud”. With the help of Cmdr. Worsley
a running survey was made of the island, and a reproduction of the chart has recently
been published.?
In more recent years the islands have been visited on a number of occasions by vessels
of the whaling fleet. Of these visits, as of that of Capt. Jorgensen, no published record
appears to exist, but we have gathered some information regarding them from the
managers of the whaling stations in South Georgia.
In 1927 the Tgnsberg Whaling Co. sent one of their catchers to the islands to prospect
for whales and to discover whether conditions suitable for a whaling factory were to be
found. The catcher was the ‘Busen VII’, under the command of Capt. H. Hansen,
accompanied by Lieut. B. Dingsdr of the Norwegian Navy. A translation of Capt.
Hansen’s report has kindly been placed at our disposal by Capt. J. G. Andersen,
Manager of the Tgnsberg Co.’s station at Husvik in South Georgia.
The ‘Busen VII’ left Husvik on January 20. Course was set for Southern Thule, but
when about 60 miles west of Montagu heavy drift ice was met. Capt. Hansen steered
east, but found that Saunders was the most southern island that he could reach.
Saunders itself was surrounded by a compact belt of ice, but by next day (January 25)
it had drifted away. The report describes the bare hills at the southern end of the
island, and mentions—for the first time—that the northern peak is volcanically active.
There is a reference to a preliminary chart of the island, but this we have not seen;
Holtedahl,* however, has published a sketch made by Lieut. B. DingsGr of the island
seen from the north. ‘The ‘Busen VII’ anchored for the night in Cordelia Bay. On
January 26 she proceeded north to the Candlemas Group, where the existence of two
islands with some rocks between was noted. Little time appears to have been spent at
the group, for though the volcanic activity of the north-eastern island is mentioned, the
Shackleton, South, p. 5 (London, 1920).
Wild, Shackleton’s Last Voyage, pp. 85, 347 (London, 1923).
Rep. Geol. Collections made during the Voyage of the ‘ Quest’. . .in 1921-2, p. 65 (British Museum, 1930).
Holtedahl, ““On the Geology and Physiography of some Antarctic and Subantarctic Islands,” The
Norwegian Antarctic Expeditions, 1927-8, 1928-9, No. 3, p. 102, fig. 44 (Oslo, 1929).
1
9
3
4
HISTORY OF THE ISLANDS 143
report states that “‘no anchorage was found in the southern waters between the islands,
and the soundings gave go fathoms without bottom”’.' The night was spent at Visoko1,
the position of which is given as about lat. 56° 50’ S, long. 26° 55’ W, and here also volcanic
activity was noticed. Visits were paid to Zavodovski on January 27 and to Leskov on
the following day. On the return passage “‘a broad belt of ice-fields”’ was encountered
in lat. 55° 17'S, long. 32° 50’ W, but was penetrated after one hour’s steaming and the
vessel reached Husvik on January 29.
The ‘Busen VII’ reported that whales were plentiful, and, notwithstanding the lack
of anchorages and fresh water, the Tnsberg Co. applied for a licence to work round the
Table I.
IGE 9
g ig) *
e oA, < III x
Saunders x x x x * x x x ;
Montagu x x x * x x
Bristol x xe x * x x
‘ Bellingshausen x x x
Southern Thule | 8 | |
cone + Cook - x x aX x x
P | Thule | x | * x
x = Visited or sighted. * = Landing made.
islands. In the following season (1927-8) they sent out the whaling factory ‘Anglo-Norse’.
Mr J. E. Hamilton, of the Discovery Committee’s scientific staff, accompanied the
expedition, and according to his report the ‘ Anglo-Norse’ carried out most of her work
in the shelter of pack-ice and far from any land. In the first half of the season she was
to the north of the islands and in the second half to the south-east. Visokoi was once
sighted at a distance of 30-35 miles, and it was noticed that a steady stream of white
vapour was issuing from a small crater on the summit. On another occasion the vessel
was within 12 miles of Southern Thule, but the land was not visible owing to fog and
snow. The whale-catchers, however, naturally go further afield, and in one of these
Mr Hamilton visited Bristol, Montagu and Southern Thule. In the last-named group
1 As will be seen farther on there are several good anchorages in the Candlemas Group, and a 10-fathom
channel between the islands.
144 DISCOVERY REPORTS
he was able to verify the existence of the third island described by Bellingshausen,
having steamed between it and Cook Island. The island was named after Bellings-
hausen, and two sketches of it, made by Mr Hamilton, are published in The Antarctic
Pilot (1930).
In the following season, 1928-9, several whaling factories, including the ‘Anglo-
Norse’, the ‘Pelagos’ and the ‘Antarctic’, operated for a time under the lee of the
islands. During 1929-30 the whaling fleet has been working along the ice-edge, far to
the south-east. A ship joining the fleet on a course from South Georgia would pass close
to, or between the islands, which have thus been sighted on a number of occasions both
by the whaling vessels and by their transports.
The first edition of The Antarctic Pilot, published by the Admiralty in 1930, contains
a concise summary of our previous knowledge of the islands, and includes a number of
sketches reproduced from Bellingshausen’s Journal.
Omitting Morrell’s discredited account, previous records of visits to the islands up
to 1928 may be tabulated as on p. 143 (Table I).
ITINERARY
Leaving South Georgia fully bunkered on February 21 we almost immediately met
with heavy weather, and on the 22nd the westerly wind reached the force of a full gale,
with gusts of over 70 miles an hour. In very heavy seas the vessel shipped a good deal
of water, sustaining some minor damage on board, and on the following day we were glad
to find shelter under the lee of an enormous tabular berg. Here on the 24th plankton
observations were made near the iceberg, and later that day and on the 25th, with much
improved weather, we were able, as we had previously arranged, to take full series of
observations at three points in soundings varying from 1785 to 1866 fathoms.
We reached Zavodovski on February 26, dredged on a bottom of scoria in 152 to 180
fathoms and anchored for the night under the lee of the island. For the following two
days another gale, at least as violent as that four days earlier, blew from the west, and
we were obliged to remain at anchor; but it eased on the evening of the 28th and on
March 1 we made our running survey of the island and proceeded to Visokoi. Plankton
nets were hauled the same evening, and next day we finished this survey and crossed to
the Candlemas Group, taking full observations at a point midway between the islands
in 840 fathoms. On the 3rd and 4th we were occupied in running surveys of the two
islands of the group, completing them on the latter day just before the onset of a sharp
blow from the north-east. On each of these nights we lay at anchor between the islands.
It was by now evident that there was a tolerably good prospect of surveying all the
islands, and since pack-ice might arrive at any time from the south-west, Capt. Carey
thought it best to go direct to the most southerly group. On March 5, therefore, we
steamed to Southern Thule, where with great good fortune, we found the islands com-
pletely free of ice and with no indications of pack on the southern horizon. In good
weather the survey of the three islands of the group was completed by March 8, in
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS 145
which time also we dredged and trawled off Cook Island in depths of 42 to 176 fathoms,
landed on Thule Island, and in the deep basin between Cook and Thule ran many lines
of soundings and made a series of observations on the plankton and hydrology. On the
gth we left for Bristol Island, taking another similar series of observations in 966 fathoms ;
but here fortune failed us, and for three and a half days we lay under the lee of the land
in strong westerly winds. A trawl was taken in 10 to 44 fathoms. On March 13 the
weather improved, Bristol was surveyed and we reached Montagu. Again delayed by
westerly winds, we trawled in 54 to 88 fathoms on the 14th, made our running survey
on the 15th and on the 16th crossed to Saunders Island. On the 17th Saunders was
completed and the only remaining island was Leskov. We had found, however, when
plotting our echo-soundings that some taken off Candlemas were curiously irregular,
and wishing to check the work, we decided to call at the group on our way to the north.
We reached Candlemas and verified the soundings on the evening of the 17th, and next
day made our survey of the tiny island of Leskoy, thus completing the entire group.
We then turned to the south-west to take up the next deep-water station on our pro-
gramme.
The actual work at the islands thus occupied twenty days, during six of which we
were delayed by bad weather. Though sights of sun or stars were obtained at all the
islands, dull weather was almost continuous, making it difficult to obtain good photo-
graphs. Temperatures were low throughout, and for a week, while at Bristol, Montagu
and Saunders, the thermometer never rose above freezing-point.
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS
Position and extent. ‘The South Sandwich Islands are situated between lat. 56° 18’
and 59° 28’ S, and long. 26° 14’ and 28° 11’ W, the northernmost of the group being
about 290 miles E $S of South Georgia. In all there are eleven islands; ten of these
form a curved chain stretching north and south, while one—Leskov—ties to the west
of the line near its northern end. The chain is 193 miles in length and is concave to the
westward. The largest of the group is Montagu, with a circumference of about 24 miles,
and the smallest is Leskov with a circumference of about 1} miles. ‘There are two groups
of islands: the Candlemas Group, consisting of Candlemas and Vindication Islands, and
the Southern Thule Group, consisting of ‘Thule, Cook and Bellingshausen Islands.
Apart from these the islands are widely separated, the distances between them ranging
from 24 to 41 miles.
The positions hitherto assigned to the islands on Admiralty charts are those given
by Cook and Bellingshausen more than a century ago, and our survey testifies to the
remarkable accuracy of their work. With modern instruments and wireless time-signals
little alteration has been made. Differences are mainly in longitude, and as will be seen
from Plate XI, our positions are frequently midway between those of Cook and
Bellingshausen. The only exception is Visokoi, which Bellingshausen placed 8 miles
north of its true position.
146 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Pack-ice. During the winter, so far as is known, the South Sandwich Islands are com-
pletely surrounded by pack-ice from the Weddell Sea. The summer conditions vary
greatly : in normal years the more northerly islands are probably free from ice for several
months, but sometimes they are all unapproachable; and occasionally, in a season of
unusual mildness, open water may surround the entire group.
The direction from which the pack-ice reaches the islands is not clear from the
existing records. he set being north-easterly it would be expected that the western
side would be the first to be closed in, and this is what Capt. Hansen found when he
visited the group in 1927. Both Cook and Bellingshausen, however, found the western
side open, and the latter at least, as his chart shows, met with heavy ice to the eastward.
On the whole it seems almost certain that the pack generally arrives from the south-west,
but that its local distribution about the islands may vary greatly in accordance with the
prevailing winds.
Icebergs. Icebergs, both tabular and weather-worn, were plentiful at all the islands,
and many of them were stranded near the shores. They were most numerous at Visokoi
and to the north of the rocky islets lying to the west of Bristol, where nineteen were
visible at one time. The number of black bergs, carrying mud and stones from the
moraines of the glaciers where they were formed, was unusually large during the season
1929-30. Three of the nineteen referred to above were of this type, and later, in the seas
to the west of the islands, many more were observed. ‘These bergs are invariably parti-
coloured, one portion being black and the other white, and it is noteworthy that almost
without exception there is a sharp and perfectly straight line of demarcation between
the black and the white: the black portion is always completely black and quite opaque.
There is in addition another type of berg, of which a good example was seen at Visokoi.
This is in most respects closely similar to the morainic type, and at a distance may easily
be mistaken for it; but on near view it is found that the black is replaced by a very dark
but translucent bottle-green colour. ‘This dark green part, like the black of the morainic
bergs, is always smoothly rounded by water action, pointing to the probability that it
was originally on the underside. We have, however, seen to the north-east of the South
Orkneys a stratified and tri-coloured berg, in which the lower part was black and the
upper dark green, with a narrower middle layer of pure white. We are unable to suggest
how these dark green bergs are formed, and have not found any reference to them in
the literature at our disposal. Priestley, in his valuable account of Antarctic icebergs,’
mentions neither the morainic nor the dark green types, and from this, as well as from
Dr E. H. Marshall’s personal experience in the whaling factory ‘C. A. Larsen” in
1928-9, it appears that such bergs are either absent from the Ross Sea or are extremely
scarce.
No very large tabular bergs were seen round the South Sandwich Islands, but one
with an estimated length of over 60 miles was met on our passage from South Georgia:
we rode out a full gale of wind in comfort under the lee that it afforded. Bergs with
narrow bands of hard blue ice were seen on one or two occasions.
1 Priestley, “Glaciology”, British Antarct. (‘Terra Nova’) Exped. 1910-13, pp. 402-17 (1922).
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS 147
Wind and set. The current in the Southern Ocean from lat. 50° to 60° S and long.
24° to 42° W has proved to be north-easterly and approximately 12 miles per day: it
is constant and can be depended upon. The prevailing winds are north-west and south-
west; both blow with violence, the former coming with a falling barometer and the
latter when it is rising. As a rule neither blows for more than four days and is im-
mediately followed by the other. Swell and sea rise very quickly. At the South Sandwich
Islands the wind was mainly north-west or south-west, but sometimes it blew from the
north-east, bringing fog and mist.
Contrary to that experienced at South Georgia the set round the islands is clockwise.
This we attribute to the trend of the coast-line, which bears more north and south than
at South Georgia, thereby deflecting the usual north-easterly set to the northward and
giving a clockwise motion. At the Candlemas and Southern ‘Thule Groups, where two
or more islands lie close together, a strong southerly set of about 1 knot was experienced
in the channels between them (Nelson and Douglas Straits).
Magnetic variation. The opportunity of swinging ship for magnetic variation oc-
curred but once during our survey, and then, though taken advantage of, was not as
thorough as we might have wished. This was at Montagu, when, during a short clear
period between snowfalls, we swung (to port only, unfortunately) and took observations
for compass error on 16 points. We obtained a variation of 10° 31’ W, and think this
may be taken as fairly accurate, though the continual rolling of the vessel made observa-
tion rather difficult.
Local attraction. Compasses were adjusted on February 21 when leaving South
Georgia, and with observations made when the ship was steady, the standard compass
showed little or no deviation. Later on, under similar conditions at the South Sandwich
Islands, and allowing the variation given on chart no. 3775, it was likewise found that
little or no deviation still existed. This, we consider, may be taken as evidence that
magnetic conditions are quite normal. At no time was any local attraction observed.
Wireless time-signals. Reception of wireless time-signals was found to be very good
at all points in the group with the exception of Bristol and Southern Thule. Signals
received were mainly from Washington, but Nauen was heard on one or two occasions.
Anchorages: Landings. The islands are without harbours, but at most of them there
are anchorages where a vessel may obtain some shelter. The best is Ferguson Bay in
Thule Island, but since this is in the extreme south it will very often be inaccessible
on account of ice. The next best are in Nelson Strait in the Candlemas Group; in
these protection from any wind can be obtained and they are much more likely to
be free of ice during the summer months. Even in the finest weather there is a heavy
swell and the coast is generally precipitous and rocky: where beaches exist they
shelve steeply and there is a strong undertow. As a consequence landings can only be
made with difficulty, and on some islands they are probably impossible. Water could
no doubt be obtained on any of the group by melting snow or ice. Owing to volcanic
heat the ground on some of the islands is warm, and on one—Vindication Island—small
streams from the melting glacier run down to the shore.
148 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Soundings. Most of the soundings taken in shallow water during the course of our
running surveys are shown in the plates accompanying this report, and some reference
is made to them in the descriptions of the individual islands. An interesting feature
revealed by these inshore soundings is the existence of a deep basin, formerly a volcanic
crater, between two of the islands in Southern Thule (see p. 179).
The depths between the islands have not been investigated with any thoroughness,
but soundings of 589, 774 and 840 fathoms were taken between Visokoi and Candlemas,
of 681, 721, 966 and 1062 fathoms between Bellingshausen and Bristol, and 499 and
822 fathoms between Montagu and Saunders. More recently a continuous line of
soundings, taken across the bank between Candlemas and Saunders, showed a minimum
depth of 1196 fathoms. These depths are all considerably less than those of the seas
surrounding the islands: to the west is a basin with over 2000 fathoms and with more
than 3000 fathoms in its centre, while in the east the mean level of the Southern Ocean
is found at depths of more than 2500 fathoms. It is thus evident that the islands are
connected by a low submarine ridge.
The relief of the ocean floor in the neighbourhood of the islands presents features
of considerable interest. ‘To the north of the group very deep soundings have been
reported by the ‘Deutschland’ and by the ‘ Meteor’, the former vessel having found
3068 fathoms? (lat. 54° 27’ S, long. 31° 74’ W) and the latter 3664 fathoms? (lat.
55° 12’ S, long. 29° 13’ W) and 4402 fathoms? (about lat. 55° S, long. 28° W). At the
time it was taken the last of these was the deepest sounding known in the South
Atlantic. Immediately to the south of these great depths geological theory of former
land connections postulates the existence of a shoal or bank linking the South Sandwich
Islands with South Georgia, and one or two of the few soundings taken in this area
seemed to show that such a bank might be found.
In 1931, the succeeding season to that in which the islands were surveyed, we were
able to take a number of lines of echo-soundings, and though much still remains to be
done we believe that the principal features in the topography of the region are already
apparent. The results are shown in the chart in Fig. 3, which indicates the approximate
positions of the 1000 to 4000 fathom contours. It will be seen that the South Sandwich
Deep has been traversed at three points, and we are able to prove that it extends round the
eastern side of the islands far to the south of the position in which it was first discovered.
Probably it is continued as far as the Thule group, but its southern limits have not yet
been determined. We have in all fourteen soundings which exceed 4000 fathoms, the
greatest being 4421 fathoms. We are also able to show with some precision that a
connection, in the form of a narrow ridge, exists between the South Sandwich Islands
and South Georgia, and it seems probable that the greatest depth on this ridge does
not exceed 1500 fathoms.
The line of echo-soundings between Candlemas and Saunders Islands passes through
the widest gap between any two islands of the group. The line was continued to the
1 Brennecke, Arch. Deutschen Seewarte, XXXIX, p. 97, St. 52 (1921).
* Zeitschr. Ges. Erdkunde Berlin, Jahrg. 1926, p. 234. 3 Loc. cit. supra, pp. 225, 274.
‘D ‘gd SV peyzeur oul] oy} Ysnosy} sassed F “SI.y ul UoTDaS dYJ, ‘Udye} Uddq DALY sSuIpuNos asayM suOrsod oy} MOYsS s}Op YORI 9Y,J, “saUI] in0}UO0D
woyiey oooF—ooor 9y} Jo suontsod azeunxosdde 94} Surmoys ‘dnois yormpurg yInog ay} Jo spurs UJDYyIIOU ay) puUL vIBIOaD YINOG Jo yeYyD ‘f “SLY
4000
------ 3000
~ 000¢
PS ree
ORONO DOnG
150 DISCOVERY REPORTS
east until the deep had been crossed, and a section plotted from the data obtained is
shown in Fig. 4. It will be seen that the ocean bed to the west slopes gently upwards,
with some irregularities, from depths of 1880 or 1900 to about 1600 fathoms, and then
rises very sharply to a minimum at 1195 fathoms. In the position where the section
was taken the ridge on which the islands stand has two crests and its breadth is only
fifteen miles. On the eastern side of the ridge there is no abrupt declivity ; the bottom,
however, falls more steeply than in the west to a depth of over 2000 fathoms and then
plunges to the bottom of the deep, which has here a depth of over 4250 fathoms. Farther
to the east the bottom rises as abruptly as it fell, until the mean level of the southern
ocean is reached at under 3000 fathoms. Where cut by our section the deep has a width
of only some twenty miles.
Origin. It is evident that the entire group owes its existence to volcanic disturbance.
The rocks, composed mainly of reddish tuff and black basaltic lava, are closely similar
throughout the group; and in five of the islands there is still volcanic activity in the
form of steam clouds and sulphur fumes. That this chain of volcanoes is bordered by
one of the ocean deeps is significant, and it is a feature which is paralleled in several
other parts of the world.
Volcanic activity. We found, as others have done before us, that it is not always an
easy matter to determine whether steam is or is not rising from a particular island. ‘The
summit is usually wreathed in cloud or mist, which as it clears may assume deceptive
forms, and powdered snow carried by gusts of wind may bear an amazingly close re-
semblance to steam arising from a fissure. We think, however, after examining each
island closely, that the present state of volcanic activity in the group may be summarized
thus:
I. Islands showing definite activity, emitting vapours and fumes.
Zavodovski. Main crater, emitting dense clouds of steam and vapour, near top of
snow-clad summit. Plateau on southern and eastern sides not glaciated and largely
devoid of snow, with small craters and fissures, some of which also are active. Strong
sulphurous fumes detected.
Candlemas. Southern part with its three snow peaks heavily and completely glaci-
ated. Northern part a plateau of lava from which arises a hill with large crater at top.
Another crater at base of this hill a little above sea-level. Plateau and hills entirely
devoid of snow. Both craters active, emitting strong sulphurous fumes.
Bellingshausen. A large crater at summit and fissures on south side of cone, with
steam and vapour rising from both. Entire island without glacier, but with patches of
snow.
Saunders. Greater part of island heavily glaciated, with snow-clad cone ending in
a crater from which clouds of steam arise. South-eastern end of island with little or no
snow and with two extinct craters.
Visokoi. A heavily glaciated cone, with clouds of steam arising from near its summit
and from a fissure on the steep north-western slopes.
“SOUN] BZ payvsadsexe a[vos [kOIVIOA ‘Usye} o19M sSurpunos yory ye suontsod oy} uMoys aie I MOTAq SooRsIns
9y} Sunuasasdas aul] ay} aAoqe UMOYs ae spurs! SuLMOqYSreu ay) Jo autos fo suontsod ayy, *€ “SIq utd ‘g ‘W payseur our] ay} UO
‘] Stepuneg pue dnoss sewaypury oy usemjoq sassed yr‘ yj8u9] ur saptur oo Ayzeau st pure SSUIPUNOS-OYDa Bg UO pase SI UOTDaS JI, T,
‘daoq yorMpuerg yynog pue yueq yoIMpurg yINog ay} ssorde UONDEG “fF “Sry
SWNOHIYLILZE —
ss
00S
000¢-
0067+
* — I $ x t se I
0s oF o¢ 0% oO
SAIN VIS 40 F1VIS
00025 0002
006} ee
SIOHIV] S6IL —
0001 -0001
MLP £2 0] fe oll N £2,620
| ee ied aot “$.F0,86 “V1 |
00¢c it iene
: z
; :
”
Hee SE Se Eee mie ae tinea le
0 i ea ea Veeco nae VON Ince TT
ro = 7
fey a} Ie z
Sie ut K4
Zag Se z
© 6 I 3
os = 5
x2 @ e
na =z
152 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Il. Islands without activity, but showing evidence of warmth.
Leskov!. Apparently only a portion of a pre-existing crater. Probably not now active,
but with no glacier and little snow.
Vindication. Thinly glaciated on higher slopes: extensive areas without snow.
Montagu. Greater part of island and summit deeply glaciated, but with patches of
bare ground and indications of melting snow on and near peak at south-eastern
corner.
III. Glaciated islands showing no signs of warmth or activity.
Bristol. Cook. Thule. Very heavily glaciated throughout, the glacier at sea-level
reaching an average thickness of 200 ft.
During our visit all the volcanoes were quiescent, and the conditions appear to sug-
gest that the volcanic activity is slowly abating: no eruptions were witnessed, nor was
any glow from the craters visible at night. We think it likely, however, that eruptions may
still occur from time to time on Zavodoyski and Candlemas. This may also be true of
Bellingshausen; but Visokoi and Saunders appear to be in the solfatara phase, their
activity being limited to the emission of steam and vapour.
Mode of formation. There is clearly a tendency on some of the islands for volcanic
activity to cease at one point and to break out at another. Thus the northern end of
Candlemas, now the only active part of the island, appears to be a more recent formation
than the high and heavily glaciated southern end. In the Southern Thule Group, Cook
and Thule Islands, with the submerged crater between them (see p. 179), are extinct,
the outlet for volcanic activity having shifted to Bellingshausen. In Montagu also, only
the small cone at the south-east corner, probably the most recently formed part, still
shows traces of warmth. Saunders is a less simple case. The high glaciated cone of Mt
Michael is still active; but to the south-east there are craters formed of volcanic mud
or ash, seemingly extinct, but with most of the ground bare of snow and evidently still
warm. It may perhaps be surmised that the main crater was extinct for a period, during
which the south-eastern outlets were in operation, and that later it resumed its
activity.
If these suppositions are correct the mode of formation of most of the islands is
tolerably evident. For Zavodovski, Visokoi and Bristol retain their original character
of simple volcanic cones, and Leskoy is probably a fragment of what was once a crater.
The only island that presents difficulties is Vindication; for it seems certain that it does
not represent the whole of a cone, and the soundings we have taken do not afford any clue
to the way in which it was formed.
In its original form each island would appear to have consisted of a circular plateau
of basalt, with a central cone formed of alternate layers of tuff and ash—a condition most
nearly realized in Zavodoyski. As a result of the prevailing westerly winds abrasion is
most active on the western aspects of the islands, while lighter materials from volcanic
1 This island was partly covered with mist during almost all the time it was under observation.
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS 153
eruptions are deposited to the east: thus, in most of the islands, it is on the western side
that we find the steepest cliffs and the deepest off-shore soundings.
Glaciation. ‘The islands and portions of islands that have lost all volcanic warmth
are buried deep in glacier, and ice also covers the still active cones of Visokoi and
Saunders. This ice-cap is similar in type to that commonly seen on Antarctic islands,
but it conforms to the larger irregularities of the surface and rarely shows the perfectly
even shield- or dome-shaped contour which characterizes the full development of this
form of glaciation (Plates XXIII, XXV, XXIX). The ice, however, may reach a thickness
of as much as 260 ft. at its coastal margin. Rocks outcropping through the ice-cap were
seldom seen, and there were no bergschrunds; but not infrequently a crevassed pro-
trusion in the glacier spoke of projecting rock beneath. The action of the ice is evidently
to abrade and reduce surface inequalities, rather than to emphasize their relief as in
mountain glaciers.
The term “‘ice-cap”’ is used here in the sense defined by Hobbs! and seems very
appropriate to this form of glaciation; but in Priestley’s more recent classification of
land-ice formations? it has been abandoned and is replaced by “‘island-ice”’ and “‘ high-
land-ice”’. The first of these is applied when the contour is perfectly even, and the latter
when the conformation of the underlying land is not completely obscured. The differ-
ence between the two does not appear important, for it depends merely on the amount
of relief in the land surface and the thickness of the glacier. An island with high hills
and very thick glacier might still be “ highland-ice”’, while one of low ground might be
“sland-ice”’ though its covering were very thin. In their denuding processes and in
their alimentation® the two appear to be indistinguishable.
A type of glaciation agreeing with that in the South Sandwich Is. has been described
by Holtedahl* from Bouvet and from some of the islands in the South Shetlands and
Palmer Archipelago. Holtedahl considers that Priestley’s definitions of ‘island-ice”’
and ‘‘highland-ice”’ do not accord with these formations and he has therefore proposed
a new term, ‘‘the Antarctic ice-mantle type’.
We prefer here to use “‘ice-cap”’ in the sense employed by Hobbs without attempting
any finer classification, but we should perhaps point out that this term is not uni-
versally applicable to island ice-formations in the Dependencies of the Falkland Is.
Insome of the islands of the South Shetlands and Palmer Archipelago—Low and Snow Is.
are examples—the land is covered with a smooth evenly-domed shield of ice, without any
irregularities due to the underlying rock, while in others the formation is closely similar
to that found in the South Sandwich Is. For both these we may use the term “‘ice-
cap’’, and in the first of them it is seen in its most perfect development. But there are
' Hobbs, Characteristics of Existing Glaciers, pp. 7, 8, 285, 286 (New York, 1922). First published in
Igil.
°: Priestley, “Glaciology”, British Antarct. (‘ Terra Nova’) Exped. 1910-13, pp. 147, 148 (1922).
It is these characters that Hobbs uses for his primary division of land-ice formations into ‘inland ice”,
“ice-cap”’ and ‘mountain glacier”’.
4 Holtedahl, “On the Geology and Physiography of some Antarctic and Subantarctic Islands”, The
Norwegian Antarctic Expeditions, 1927-8, 1928-9, No. 3, pp. 121, 122 (Oslo, 1929).
154 DISCOVERY REPORTS
other islands, including all the largest, which are entirely different. In these the “‘ice-
cap’’ exists only as a fringing or foreland glacier, through which protrude hills and
mountain ranges with steep escarpments, and surrounded by a bergschrund. It is
clear that this type of glaciation is a combination of ice-cap and mountain glacier, for
denudation is proceeding by two quite different methods. In the foreland, by plucking
and by erosion, all irregularities have been smoothed away, whereas farther back the ice
is cutting into the hill-ranges and in so doing tends always to sharpen the existing relief.
Geology. It was thought by Suess, and is maintained by many geologists, that the
chain formed by the Burdwood Bank, South Georgia, the South Sandwich Islands and
Graham Land (sometimes known collectively as the South Antillean Arc) represents
an extension of the folds of the Andes, curving eastwards into the Atlantic. Gregory,
on the other hand, considers that so far as South Georgia is concerned this view is un-
tenable and from the evidence afforded both by its igneous and sedimentary formations
he! concludes that South Georgia is ‘‘a fragment of an ancient South Atlantic Land, and
the south-western corner of the Flabellites-land of Schwarz”’, in no way related to the
Andean system. ‘Tyrrell, however, has confirmed Nordenskjéld’s view that the
eruptive rocks of Graham Land and the South Shetlands are completely identical
with those of the Andes, and Holtedahl,* more recently, has contested Gregory’s
views on the relationships of the rocks of South Georgia. The echo-soundings
that we have taken during the last two years show conclusively that most of the sub-
merged portions of the arc claimed by Suess can still be traced in the relief of the
sea-bottom.
In these circumstances the geological structure of the South Sandwich Islands
should be of some interest; it is a matter for regret that our lack of knowledge pre-
cluded field observations of real value, and that owing to the difficulty of making
landings rock samples were obtained only on Thule Island. The specimens from
this island, collected by Mr T. J. Hart, have, however, kindly been examined by
Dr Tyrrell and his report is published as an appendix to this paper (p. 191). From
microscopic examination and chemical analyses Dr Tyrrell has reached the important
conclusion that the South Sandwich rocks are typical Andean lavas—a fact which goes
far to support Suess’s theory.
So far as we were able to observe, the islands themselves are all composed of eruptive
rocks; but Freezeland Peak, situated to the west of Bristol Island, differs conspicuously
from anything seen elsewhere. From a geological point of view this islet appears to be
of considerable interest, for if our view is correct, it is here alone that an exposure of
the underlying sedimentary rocks is to be found. 'To effect a landing on Freezeland
Peak would be extremely difficult, but it might not be impossible in exceptionally good
weather.
1 Gregory, “The Geological History of the Atlantic Ocean”, Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc., LXXXV, p. Cxi (1929).
See also Nature, cxxvi, p. 837 (1930).
2 Tyrrell, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, Lut, p. 78 (1921).
3 Holtedahl, loc. cit. supra, pp. 104-11.
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS 155
It is probable that the volcanic eruptions gave rise to the South Sandwich Islands in
late ‘Tertiary or early Quaternary times. This is the age attributed to the later eruptive
rocks of the South Shetlands and Graham Land.
Seals. Only three species of seal were identified at the South Sandwich Islands. The
most abundant was the Leopard seal (Hydrurga leptonyx), which was very frequently
seen in the water, especially in the neighbourhood of penguin rookeries. In our attempts
to make landings we were often closely followed by these seal, which would come up
from behind to within a few feet, raise their heads from the water to look at us and then
swim alongside or dive underneath. In a small boat the manceuvres of these large
animals may be a little disconcerting; but their motive is only curiosity, though it may
sometimes lead them, as we are informed by the whaling managers at South Georgia,
to lift their heads from the water on to the gunwale. The Leopard seal, as Matthews has
noted,’ does not congregate in rookeries on shore like some other species, and for this
reason it is unlikely that it can ever be taken in sufficient quantity for commercial
purposes. At several of the islands one or two were seen hauled up on shore.
The islands as a whole are very deficient in places where seal can form rookeries, and
even where beaches exist which appear suitable no great numbers were seen. The best
beaches are on Candlemas Island, in Cordelia Bay on Saunders Island, and near Beach
Point on ‘Thule Island. Those on Candlemas were not examined closely, but appeared
to have very few seal on them. At Thule Island a landing was made, and Dr Marshall
reports that the seal here, about forty-five in all, were mainly Weddell seal (Leptonychotes
weddelli). About the same number was seen on Saunders Island and these in all prob-
ability were mainly Weddell seal also, though it was difficult to identify them with
certainty from a boat. Three Weddell seal were seen at Montagu Island, two on the
rocks and one on an ice floe.
Elephant seal (Mzrounga leonina) can be distinguished with more certainty, but were
only seen in very small numbers: about six on the eastern side of Visokoi, one on
Vindication, perhaps a dozen in Cordelia Bay on Saunders, and two near Beach Point
on Thule. The existence of Elephant seal must have been known to the sealers who
visited the islands during the last century, but the species does not appear to have been
previously recorded from the group and it is not mentioned in Larsen’s report. It
occurs in some abundance in the South Orkneys and in former times is said to have been
found in the South Shetlands. At the South Sandwich Is. there is a complete absence of
the tussac grass among which it forms rookeries at its headquarters in South Georgia,
and this, combined with the unsuitable foreshore and the fact that the islands are very
near the southern limit of its range, must be held to account for its scarcity.
No Crab-eater seal (Lobodon carcinophagus) were recognized with certainty, though
some at Cordelia Bay may have belonged to this species. We saw no Fur seal (Arctoce-
phalus australis), and Larsen, who made landings on a number of islands in order to look
for them, reports that he found none. It appears, however, that Fur seal must at one time
' Matthews, ‘‘The Natural History of the Elephant seal, with notes on other Seals found at South
Georgia”, Discovery Reports, 1, p. 253 (1929).
156 DISCOVERY REPORTS
have inhabited the islands, even if they do not still do so, for Larsen stated in 19184 that
American sealers once took 300 at the Sandwich Group.
Whales. In recent years considerable numbers of Blue and Fin whales have been
taken near the South Sandwich Islands, but in 1929-30 no whalers were working in the
neighbourhood. At South Georgia and the other islands of the Falkland Dependencies,
whales—especially Blue whales—tend to be scarce in mild seasons when there is little
ice about. ‘The catches at the South Georgia shore stations during this season were much
below the average, and the vessels of the pelagic whaling fleet were mostly operating far
to the east of the South Sandwich Group. A few whales, apparently Fin whales, were
sighted near the islands; but Black-fish (Globicephala) and Black and White dolphins
(Cephalorhynchus), both seen in the same season in South Georgia, were not observed.
Birds. Birds are numerous on the islands. Penguins are especially abundant and
have built their rookeries in almost every suitable place. ‘They will not nest on the
glacier itself, nor, doubtless because of the danger of falling ice, on the beaches beneath
it. In consequence they find much difficulty in establishing themselves on the more
heavily glaciated and precipitous islands: on some, such as ‘Thule and Bristol, there are
only one or two small headlands which they can occupy, and they appear to be alto-
gether absent from Cook and Leskov. On islands where the warmth of the rock has
melted much of the snow they are particularly abundant, and on Bellingshausen it was
noticed that small groups had climbed the steep slopes of the cone, ascending almost
to the edge of the crater and to a height of at least 450 ft. above sea-level.
The Antarctic or Ringed penguin (Pygoscelis antarctica) is much the commonest
species, and Dr Marshall, who landed near a small rookery on Thule Island on March 7,
tells us that he found the young birds shedding their down coats. Gentoo and King
penguins (Pygoscelis papua and Aptenodytes patagonica) were seen on Zavodovski and
Saunders Islands. They probably occur on other islands also, but even with powerful
glasses it was difficult to identify the species of penguin from on board ship. Those
frequently seen on icebergs were invariably P. antarctica. Capt. J. Brown, who landed
a party on Zavodoyski in 1830, reported that his men found five different species of
penguin, but he does not give their names. On this island Larsen found the Macaroni
penguin (Hudyptes chrysolophus) in addition to those mentioned above. ‘The Adeélie
penguin (Pygoscelis adeliae) probably occurs, but was not recognized with certainty.
Mecking’s statement? that the Emperor penguin (Aptenodytes forsteri) occurs at the
islands in large numbers is certainly incorrect.
The Cape pigeon (Daption capensis), known to some of the early voyagers as “the
Spotted Eaglet”’, is extremely abundant at most of the islands, but seemed to be less
common at the Southern Thule Group. Very frequently it was seen flying or swimming
with the Silver-grey fulmar (Priocella glacialoides), which is equally numerous. Both
1 Report of the Interdepartmental Committee on Research and Development in the Dependencies of the
Falkland Islands, Cmd. 657, p. 92 (1920).
2 Mecking, in Nordenskjéld and Mecking, “‘’The Geography of the Polar Regions”, Amer. Geogr. Soc.,
Special Publication, No. 8, p. 318 (New York, 1928).
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS 157
species were seen in thousands perched on ledges on the steep cliff sides, and we think
it certain that they nest on the islands.
Another species common at many if not all the islands is a tern, doubtless a form of
Sterna vittata: small flocks were frequently seen sitting head to wind on an iceberg in
company with Antarctic penguins. The Giant petrel (Macronectes giganteus) was some-
times numerous, but the Shoemaker (Majaqueus aequinoctialis), a skua which appeared
to be identical with that at South Georgia (Catharacta lénnbergi clarket) and the
Dominican gull (Larus dominicanus) were less common. Wilson’s petrel (Oceanites
oceanicus), a most abundant bird at South Georgia, was here very scarce, and Whale
birds (Prion sp.) were seen only on a few occasions. A Shag (Phalacrocorax atriceps)
was observed at the Candlemas Group, and a large flock of them was constantly around
us while at anchor at Bristol Island. A single Mollymauk (Diomedea melanophrys) was
seen at Saunders. Other Albatross (Diomedea exulans and Phoebetria), the Snow petrel
(Pagodroma nivea), the Diving petrel (Pelecanoides urinatrix) and the Sheath-bill
(Chionis alba) were not seen at all. In the nesting season other birds are doubtless to be
found at the islands: Larsen reports that in November he saw thousands of Pagodroma
nivea nesting with Daption on Leskov.
Fish. At most of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands fish may be caught very
readily with hand-lines or in traps: on some occasions near King Edward Point in South
Georgia several hundred have been taken in the course of an hour or two. At the South
Sandwich Islands we were very unsuccessful in obtaining fish. Frequently nothing
whatever could be caught, and the only anchorage where even moderate numbers were
taken was off Shrove Point, Candlemas I. The fish were all Notothenia rossz, the com-
mon species at South Georgia, or an extremely closely allied form. The few trawls which
were taken yielded only a small number of fish; the commonest was Parachaenichthys
georgianus, but at Bristol a small species, Notothenia angustifrons, was obtained in some
quantity. At most of the places where trial was made the ground was thickly covered
with large simple Ascidians (Ascopera and other genera) ; of these many hundredweight
were brought on board and among them numerous interesting zoological specimens
were obtained.
Vegetation. Tussac grass (Poa flabellata), which grows so luxuriantly at South
Georgia, does not occur anywhere in the South Sandwich Islands. On almost all of
them, however, patches of green vegetation may be found, occurring rarely and nearly
always on a penguin rookery, where the ground is well manured. Cook mentions two
hills, seen beyond the north point of Saunders Island, which were without snow and
“seemed to be covered with a green turf”. The hills must be those at the southern end
of Cordelia Bay, which are bare and formed of volcanic ash or mud, but at the time of
our visit there was no vegetation on them—nor was there any extensive rookery of
penguins. It was on Zavodovski, on steeply sloping ground on the northern side, in-
habited by vast numbers of penguins, that the most abundant vegetation was to be seen,
and here it certainly resembled green turf. The only specimens we have are some col-
lected on Thule by Mr T. J. Hart, and these have kindly been identified for us by Mr
Dt +
158 DISCOVERY REPORTS
G. Tandy as Prasiola crispa, a species of green alga also known from the Arctic and from
the temperate regions of Europe, Asia and Africa. It is possible, though we think it un-
likely, that the green patches on some of the other islands belong to a different species.
That there are other forms of vegetation on the islands was evident; on two at least,
Leskov and Vindication, lichens grow in some abundance. The unicellular alga,
Chlamydomonas, which forms “red snow”’, was observed on a number of islands, pro-
bably occurring on all, and samples were collected on Thule.
In our trawls and dredges we obtained several kinds of red and brown sea-weed, but
kelp, Macrocystis pyrifera, was not found, and its complete absence from the islands is
a noteworthy feature. At South Georgia kelp grows luxuriantly along the shores and on
all reefs, even far out at sea: its fronds, floating on the surface, are a most valuable aid
in navigation. At the South Orkneys kelp also occurs, but less abundantly, while in the
South Shetlands it appears to be absent. Growing kelp is known to be cut away by ice,
but at the South Sandwich Islands it is unlikely that all could have been removed by
this agency, especially in an unusually mild season.
ZAVODOVSKI ISLAND
Lat. 56° 193’ S, long. 27° 343’ W
(Plates XII and XIII; Fig. 5)
This island is about g miles in circumference and is nearly circular in outline. A single
peak, the cone of a volcano, lies a little to the south of its middle point and according
to our observations is 1600 ft. in height.!_ On the western side the coast is precipitous,
with sheer cliffs falling abruptly to the sea, but from the north to the south-east there is
a low-lying plateau rising gently to the base of the cone.
To the west and north-west the water is deep, with 50 to 100 fathoms close inshore,
but on the east and south-east sides soundings of 14 to 20 fathoms may be obtained at
less than a mile from the coast, with good holding ground on a bottom of scoria and
boulders. Owing to the shape of the island the swell carries round and it is necessary to
shift berth as the wind changes.
Seen from the east, with the summit bearing 242°, the island rises as a central cone
from a plateau extending far to both right and left (Plate XIII, fig. 1; Fig. 5c). The cone
from this point of view is snow-covered and during our visit its apex was largely ob-
scured by clouds of steam and vapour issuing from the crater. When these clouds drifted
aside it was possible to see two dark streaks diverging downwards from the lip of the
crater—evidently fissures in which the snow cannot lie owing to the warmth of the
ground. The fissure on the southern side is short and curved ; the other is much longer,
and, with some sharp angular turns in the middle of its course, extends downwards for
about two-thirds the height of the cone. It is perhaps to this long fissure that Bellings-
hausen alludes in an obscure passage in his narrative, which reads (as translated): “the
1 Bellingshausen gives the height as 1200 ft., Brown as 800 ft., Filchner as 350 m. (= 1150 ft.), while
Wild states that it is “‘not more than 3500 ft.”
mm THR AO SA
Fig. 5. Zavodovski Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving.
From the NE: summit bearing 222°, distant 6 miles.
S end of the island seen from the E: south point bearing 251°, distant 1-4 miles.
From the E: summit bearing 242°, distant 2-2 miles.
West Bluff seen over Low Point; the latter bearing 205°, distant 6 cables.
West Bluff from the NNE: bearing 195°, distant 1-3 miles.
From the S: summit bearing 021°, distant 2-2 miles.
West Bluff from the 5S: bearing 346°, distant 2-5 miles.
Another view of West Bluff from the S: bearing 000°, distant 2 miles.
160 DISCOVERY REPORTS
mountain, with sloping sides, in the middle of the island had the appearance of two
Latin ‘SS’ placed side by side”’.
On the lower slopes of the cone several dark patches were conspicuous (Plate XIII,
fig. 1, and Fig. 5 c) and two of these, seen by telescope, were found to be funnel-shaped
cavities. They are no doubt subsidiary craters, but did not show any sign of activity.
The plateau, owing to the warmth of the ground, is free from snow, except for some
patches close to its seaward margin: it is black, with its surface apparently composed of
volcanic ash or scoria. The plateau ends abruptly in low cliffs 30 to 40 ft. in height, with
outlying rocks: all are of black basaltic lava, sculptured and eroded by wave action, and
with deep vertical fissures and gullies up which the surf runs with every swell. Many
penguins were to be seen on this plateau and a brownish band near the edge probably
marks the position of their rookery.
Where the plateau ends at the south side of the island (Fig. 5 5) is another penguin
rookery on which some patches of green vegetation were to be seen.
To the west the ground rises sharply and extends to the northern end of the island as
sheer cliff or very steeply sloping hillside, all entirely free from snow (Plate XIII, fig. 2).
The main crater is immediately above West Bluff (Plate XIII, fig. 3; Fig. 5 g,#) and so
far as could be seen through the dense clouds of steam and vapour that it emitted, its
western edge is broken away, so that it opens obliquely below the highest point of the
island. A little to the south of West Bluff fumaroles are to be seen on the steep hill-side,
and the ground here is mostly reddish in colour with some patches and streaks of sulphur.
At one point horizontal strata were exposed, consisting apparently of alternate layers of
tuff and ash, the former thicker than the latter. Green staining was seen at one place.
On the northern slopes there is a rookery with many thousands of penguins, and here
the most extensive patches of green vegetation seen in the islands were observed. The
plant is almost certainly the same alga that we collected on Thule Island, but it is so
luxuriant that, as Cook said of Saunders Island, it greatly resembles green turf.
The volcanic activities of this island have been noted by all who have visited it, and
the strong sulphurous fumes which swept across us as we lay at anchor 6 cables from
the shore were also remarked upon by Bellingshausen, Larsen, Filchner and Wild. Apart
from the main crater and the fumaroles on the steep western slopes, a great part of the
lava plateau on the east and south-east sides appears to be active, with vapour and fumes
issuing from cracks and crannies in the ground. Wild mentions caves on the southern
side, ‘‘ from the mouths of which sulphurous fumes were issuing in a thin reddish cloud”’.
Larsen says that on landing he found
it was almost intolerable on account of the very hot sulphur and other poisonous fumes, which were
blown out now and then with such force, that small stones were thrown a long way out of innumerable
small holes and cracks in the ground. The fumes were so hot that one could not hold the hand over
the holes without burning it. The air was quite poisoned, so that I turned dizzy, and I am of opinion
that nobody could stay there very long without being poisoned. Pure sulphur was flowing out of
some cracks and the whole shore was composed of layers of it mixed with soft material from the
interior of the island.
There are three records of landings on the island : by Bellingshausen, Brown and Larsen.
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: LESKOV I. 161
Leskov ISLAND
Lat. 56° 392’ S, long. 28° 104’ W
(Plates XIV and XV, fig. 1; Fig. 6)
Leskov, which lies some distance to the west of the arc formed by the other islands,
is the smallest in the South Sandwich Group. Its size has been over-estimated by those
who have previously visited it, for it is only 54 cables in length, in the middle scarcely
3 cables in breadth, while its circumference is about 1} miles.
The island, as Filchner has stated,! is crescentic in outline and is, no doubt, merely a
fragment of a volcanic cone. It appears to have resulted from a small eruption which
took place in deep water, and it is improbable that it was ever much larger than now.
The actual crater presumably lay immediately to the north-east of the existing land, in
the bight which Filchner calls Crater Bay.
PS
pity
HT TH Wh
Fig. 6. Leskov Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving.
a. Conical rock at the E end, seen from the SSE: distant 5 cables.
6b. From the SE: distant 6 cables.
c. From the NE: distant 2 cables; Crater Bay in centre.
d. From the W: distant 5 cables.
During almost all the time that the island was under examination the summit was
shrouded in mist, and though the illustrations in Fig. 6 probably give a fairly correct
indication of its outline, the height (approximately 600 ft.) could not be determined
with any accuracy. By reason of the mist we were not able to decide with certainty
whether the island is still active volcanically—a point which Filchner also was obliged
to leave in doubt. We think it probable that Larsen was right in describing it as extinct ;
but since it had no glacier and on the summit only a thin covering of snow, we believe
that the ground is still warm.
As will be seen from the chart deep soundings were obtained close inshore all round
the island. There is no place where a vessel might anchor, and the land is of such small
extent that it could never afford any protection.
Crater Bay, on the north-east side, is flanked by sheer walls of rock falling almost
vertically from the summit to the sea. Seen from the west the island is domed in out-
line (Fig. 6 d), with a sloping terrace near the top and with precipitous cliffs at the
water-line. At the south-eastern corner there is a conspicuous conical rock, 375 ft. in
1 Filchner, Zum Sechsten Erdteil, pp. 114-116, figs. 32-36 (Berlin, 1923).
162 DISCOVERY REPORTS
height, formed of columnar basalt, joined to the main portion of the island a little above
sea-level (Plate XV, fig. 1, Figs. 6 a, 6). The cliffs all round the southern and western
sides are formed of rugged flows of basaltic lava, in the south inclining towards the
water at an angle of 45° but gradually becoming vertical towards the west. In the north-
west the cliffs reach a height of 170 ft. and here the rock is columnar in structure and
forms three high caverns of no great depth (Fig. 6 c). The rock walls of Crater Bay are
for the most part reddish and yellowish in colour, apparently consisting of tuff, but
much contorted and not showing any definite stratification.
Owing no doubt to the unsuitable character of its shores Leskov is not inhabited by
penguins: the only birds seen round the island were Cape pigeons, Whale birds and
Wilson petrels. Larsen, in November, found thousands of Snow petrels (Pagodroma
nivea) and Cape pigeons nesting on the island. wo small patches of green vegetation
were noted and the basalt rocks at many points are rather thickly grown with lichen.
The only place on the island where a landing could be attempted is in the small bay
to the west of the conical rock at the south-east corner. Filchner remarks that this might
be possible in very fine weather, but we consider it doubtful. Larsen attempted to land,
but failed, and there is no record of anyone having succeeded.
VisoKoI ISLAND
Lat. 56° 423’ S, long. 27° 113’ W
(Plates XIV and XV, figs. 2, 3; Figs. 7, 8)
This island is 44 miles long in an east and west direction, 3} miles wide, and nearly
12 miles in circumference. It is egg-shaped, with Penguin Point projecting at the east,
and with promontories in the north at Finger Point, in the south at Low Point and in
the south-west at Wordie Point.! Off the coast there are a number of rocks, but all lie
close to the shore. The largest is Coffin Rock to the east of Finger Point, and the most
conspicuous is a pinnacle rock on the north-west side. There are possible anchorages on
the eastern side of the island either north or south of Penguin Point; but as at Zavodovski
the swell carries round and no good protection is afforded.
From most points of view the island forms a high rounded mass with very steep coast-
line (Fig. 7). The summit has been named Mt Hodson’; except for brief intervals it was
obscured by cloud or steam? while the survey was in progress, and an accurate measure-
ment of its height could not be obtained: it is possible that it exceeds Mt Belinda on
Montagu Island, and is thus the highest in the group.
Fanning, in his account of Brown’s voyage in 1830, describes Visokoi (under the name
of Willey’s Island) as ‘‘a burning mountain with smoke issuing in different places”’ ;
Larsen in 1908 speaks of it as “this extinct island’’, while Hansen in 1927 and Hamilton
in 1927-8 noted that it was active. Owing to the cloud cap we were at first in some
doubt as to its volcanic activity ; for though a strong fumarole was seen on the northern
1 J. M. Wordie, member of the Discovery Committee.
2 Arnold Hodson, C.M.G., Governor of the Falkland Islands. 3 Omitted in Fig. 7.
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: VISOKOI I. 163
side, the existence of an active crater near the summit could not be established. Later,
however, when the island was again sighted at some miles distance on our passage
from Candlemas to Leskov, clouds of steam and vapour were seen rising from it in a
Fig. 7. Visokoi Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving.
a. From the SW: Saddle Bluff on the left open of Wordie Point, the latter 1 mile distant.
b. The pinnacle rock on the NW side: seen from the SW and bearing 056°, 1-3 miles
distant.
c. From the NE: Finger Point on the right, bearing 277°, distant 2 miles.
d. From the SE: Saddle Bluff on the right, bearing 310°, distant about 2 miles.
e. Wordie Point from the ESE, bearing 290°.
f. Penguin Point in line with Saddle Bluff, seen from the SE: Penguin Point bearing
320°, distant 3 cables.
g. Low Point from the E: bearing 258°, distant 2-4 miles.
h. From the S: Penguin Point on the right, bearing 047°, distant 1-8 miles.
i. Wordie Point and West Bluff from the S: the outlying rock bearing 357°, distant
8 cables.
manner which we all found convincing. The exact position of the crater could not be
decided, but we think it probable that one edge is broken away, as on Zavodovski, and
that it lies to the north of the summit.
So far as we were able to observe the whole island is covered in glacier, which
164 DISCOVERY REPORTS
descends on all sides from the higher slopes (Plate XV, fig. 2). Rock is visible only on the
steep cliff sides and on bluffs or headlands which rise from the water-line and divert the
glacier to right or left. On the north-eastern and south-eastern sides of the island eight
glaciers extend to the sea, most of them having a narrow beach beneath them formed
from their terminal moraine. Between them and on the other sides the cliffs are high
and steep with the glacier hanging at their edges. On the upland slopes the ice was pure
white, but the lower parts were frequently blackened, presumably by wind-borne dust
and debris. On its exposed face the glacier often showed silt bands, and the strata were
frequently contorted. At one place on the south-eastern side the glacier face was not
Fig. 8. Rock exposures on the north coast of Visokoi:
from a sketch by Mr F. C. Fraser.
. Glacier.
Columnar basalt.
Light grey stratified rock.
. Dark grey rock, merging into red and penetrated by dykes.
Ice scree.
Reddish and grey rock, covered with lichen and intersected by dykes.
Debris of terminal moraine at foot of glacier.
. Rock stratified in alternate layers of grey and red.
Fumarole.
. Scree of fine ash and loose stones.
mm HF AO Ss
a >:
vertical but sloped back from a point a little above the water’s edge. The sloping surface
was here deeply carved into close-set pinnacles and ridges of ice, which we believe to
have been formed by unequal melting due to radiation from dust particles (Plate XV,
igs):
The rocks are generally similar to those seen on Zavodovski, but the basaltic plateau
of that island has no counterpart on Visokoi. Basalt forms the rocks which lie off the
coast, but on the island itself was only seen at a few isolated points. The cliffs are mostly
composed of red and grey rock, sometimes stratified and frequently intersected by
vertical dykes. On the north side is an extensive scree of fine ash and loose stones and
about halfway up is a fumarole emitting steam and vapour (Fig. 8).
The steep cliffs on the northern and north-western sides are the resort of great num-
bers of Cape pigeons and Silver-grey fulmars, and there is little doubt that this is one
of their breeding places. The coast is for the most part unsuitable for penguins and the
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: THE CANDLEMAS GROUP 165
only place where they have succeeded in establishing themselves is at Penguin Point.
Here they have their rookery near the sea and large numbers were seen on the steep
slopes above it. They can occupy only a restricted area, for the point is isolated by
glacier, which divides at the back of the headland and extends to the water’s edge on
either side. On the rocky beach below the rookery six Elephant seal had hauled up.
No record of a landing at Visokoi is known to us.
THE CANDLEMAS GROUP
The Candlemas Group was first sighted by Cook on February 2, 1775, when it ap-
peared as two hummocks on the northern horizon. The next day he approached the land
more closely and he tells us! that it “proved to be two isles....A small rock was seen
between them, and perhaps there may be more; for the weather was so hazy that we
soon lost sight of the islands and did not see them again until noon, at which time they
bore West, distant three or four leagues”.
Bellingshausen, however, says in his narrative that the group is composed of three
islands*—though his atlas shows two only—while Filchner,’ in his account of the ex-
pedition of the ‘Deutschland’, states positively that there is only one. Filchner says:
““Candlemas besteht aus nur einer einzigen Insel, eine Feststellung, die auch von
Larsen gemacht worden war. Bellingshausen spricht in seiner Reise-Beschreibung von
drei Inseln, die nahe beieinander liegen. Da die Insel aus drei Erhebungen besteht, die
auf einen niedrigen Sockel aufgesetzt sind, erscheint dieser Irrtum méglich, um so mehr,
als Bellingshausen auf Candlemas nicht gelandet ist. Der Sockel diirfte ca. 33 km
Umfang haben”’.
The reference here made to Larsen appears to be incorrect. In our translation of his
report he nowhere states that there is only one island, though he leaves it to be inferred
Cook, A voyage to the South Pole and round the World..., 1, pp. 228-9 (London, 1777).
In this Fricker (The Antarctic Regions, p. 150 (London, 1904)) has followed him.
Filchner, Zum Sechsten Erdteil, p. 117 (Berlin, 1923).
The sections of Larsen’s unpublished report which deal with the Candlemas Group read (in trans-
lation) as follows:
“November 14th. Gale from NW with foggy weather. ‘Undine’ has been drifting all night. At 8 a.m.
the course was laid for the island named Candlemas. We met with many icebergs in the fog. At 11 a.m.
we were as near the island as it was possible to pass, because here are numerous masses of breakers. On
the east side of the island there is a bay, but across this there appeared to be sunken rocks of which some
were seen in the breakers, and the sea was all in a foam across the bay. Also in the middle of the bay sunken
rocks were seen. The southern point of the island is running out into the sea as a low tongue of land,
where thousands of penguins dwell. Straight out SE of the point about one mile from land there is a small
pointed islet about 35 feet high.
“November 15th. All the night there had been bad weather with snow and fog. During the night the
wind had turned over to SW, but continued foggy southward. More soundings and trawlings were made,
but the results of the latter were small. Along the east side, outside the sunken rocks, was shallow water with
hard bottom. Two trawlings also were made here, but the same small result. A boat was sent ashore to look
for fur-seals, but only some hair-seals were seen. From the boat soundings were taken towards all the
sunken rocks stretching across the harbour, and it was about 5 fathoms of water where shallowest, and inside
all the sunken rocks an excellent harbour for boats was found. On shore here we found a long boom and a
~ wo Oo
D III 5
166 DISCOVERY REPORTS
from his reference to ‘‘the island”’, and from his sketch-plan (Fig. 10) in which only one
is shown.
Provided with this information we concluded that there was one island only; and
when, from Visokoi, we sighted two widely separated peaks of the Candlemas Group,
we still thought they must be connected by low-lying land, as Filchner had said. On
approaching them, steering S 24° E, we found that their outlines agreed closely with
Bellingshausen’s view taken from the NNE (Fig. 9 a), and on closing further it
became more and more improbable that any connection existed. Before long a rock was
seen between the two (Fig. g 4), then more rocks, until finally we learnt that the earliest
description of all was also the most accurate: “two isles...a small rock was seen be-
tween them, and perhaps there may be more’’—exactly as Cook had stated.
Fig. 9. Views approaching the Candlemas Group on a course of 156°:
sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving.
a. From a distance of 17 miles.
b. From a distance of 12 miles. Candlemas Island on the left and Vindication Island on
the right.
c. Nelson Strait, between the two islands, with Cook Rock and Trousers Rock.
On making our running survey of the islands we found that the larger of the two
consists of high snow-covered land at the southern end, while to the north, connected
with it by low ground, is a plateau of bare rock from which a volcanic cone rises. It is
evident that Bellingshausen thought that these two portions were separate and thus
stated there were three islands in the group.
Larsen’s sketch-plan (Fig. 10) has no scale, and does not bear any close resemblance
to our chart; but it is fairly obvious that it represents the larger island only. He ap-
proached the group on a course from Zavodovski, and thus sighted it first at its northern
end. He appears to have cruised along the north-eastern side, spent one night under the
lee of the land, and next day steamed to Saunders: his diary contains no evidence that
battern, also a jaw-bone and a dorsal vertebra of a small whale. There were two races of penguins there: the
black-chinned and that with a black stripe underneath the chin. The boat was brought on board and the
course was laid southwards for the next island named Saunders.”
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: THE CANDLEMAS GROUP 167
he visited the south-western coast. On the course taken he would not have had many
chances of sighting the second island and he notes that the weather was foggy on both days.
Filchner visited the group in very bad weather and his account seems to be largely
based on Larsen’s notes and erroneous sketch-plan. It is clear, however, that he saw
both islands. When he states that the circumference is about 33 km. (18 miles), he is no
doubt taking both together; for the larger island is about 3 miles long by 1 mile broad,
and the smaller about 1 mile long by } mile broad, the circumference of the two being
some 14 miles. His sketch, moreover (p. 117), shows both, the snow summits and vol-
canic crater of the larger island, with the peaks of the
smaller seen across the intervening low-lying land.
After our survey was completed we learnt at South
Georgia that Capt. Hansen, when he visited the
South Sandwich Is. in 1927 (see p. 142), had also
reported the presence of two islands in the Candle-
mas Group.
Cook called the islands Candlemas Islands, after
the day on which they were discovered, but we
think it will be convenient to retain this name only
for the larger of the two, giving a separate name to
the other. And since the re-discovery of the smaller
island has so strikingly vindicated the truth of
Cook’s original description, we suggest that it
should be called Vindication Island.
As will be seen from the chart there are a number
of outlying rocks round the islands, and a dangerous
reef, on which stands the rock that Cook reported,
extends from Vindication Island half-way across
Nelson Strait.! The strait is however navigable,
probably with at least 10 fathoms,” and there is deep "
water inside Santa Rock, which lies some 2 miles Fig. 10. Larsen’s sketch-plan of Candle-
north of Vindication Island. To the west of this mas Island.
island soundings are very uneven, and on the south side of Candlemas there is a bank
with a minimum depth of 42 fathoms, separated from the coast by a channel of over
100 fathoms.®
1 The names attached to the more conspicuous features in the topography of the islands have mainly been
selected by the Navigating Officer, Lieut. A. L. Nelson. We have, however, thought it right that his own
name should find some place on the charts, and we have therefore called the strait between Candlemas and
Vindication Island Nelson Strait—S. Kemp, W. M. Carey.
* At one point a sounding of only 6 fathoms was obtained, but we believe that deeper water is to be
found nearer the reef.
® The existence of this bank became evident when our first series of soundings, taken on March 3 and 4,
was plotted. Thinking that some error might have occurred, an additional series was taken in the same area
when we revisited the island on March 17, the result proving the accuracy of the earlier observations.
5-2
168 DISCOVERY REPORTS
There are good anchorages at the islands, second only to that in Ferguson Bay in
Thule Island. The best is to the east of Vindication Island, between Cook Rock and
Rocky Point in 11 fathoms, where there is protection from the north-north-west to
south-west with good holding ground. There is also a good anchorage to the south of
Candlemas Island for winds from the north, and to the north-east of Vindication Island,
north of Cook Rock, for southerly winds.
CANDLEMAS ISLAND
Lat. 57° 02%’ S; long. 26° 404’ W
(Plates XVI and XVII, figs. 1-3; Plate XVIII, figs. 1, 2; Figs. 10-12)
This island is 3 miles long and 1-4 miles broad, with a circumference of about 73
miles: it lies with its long axis north-west and south-east. The southern end is buried
deep in glacier and bears three peaks, the highest of which is 2580 ft. above sea-level.
The northern part is a lava plateau, entirely free from snow, from which rises the cone
of a volcano (Plate XVII, fig. 1; Figs. 11 a, c). The northern and southern parts are con-
nected by a broad stretch of low-lying ground (Fig. 11 a). On the eastern side, 6 cables
from the coast, is Black Rock, 60 ft. high, while to the south-east and close inshore is
Boot Rock, which is 105 ft. high (Fig. 11 8).
The plateau in the northern half of the island appears to be composed throughout of
rugged flows of black basaltic lava, often showing columnar structure (Plate XVII, fig. 3).
Almost everywhere this plateau is very rough, for though on approaching it closely
masses of clinker and cinders are seen on the surface, it is not overlaid with fine scoria
and ash as on Zavodovski. The north-western coast is bounded by basalt cliffs, 30 to
4o ft. high, much broken by wave action and with deep gullies and chasms. At one point
green staining was seen in the rock. In the vicinity of Vulcan Point are several small
bays ending in beaches of black sand and to the south there are two larger bays, Tow
Bay and Sea-serpent Cove (Fig. 11 a). Elsewhere, both east and west of the low ground
that intervenes between the northern and southern parts, and in the north on either side
of Spit Point, are long, straight, steeply shelving beaches of black sand and boulders.
On the western beach were many large masses of ice cast up by the sea.
The main volcanic cone is on the western side of the plateau and rises to a height of
770 ft., the crater itself opening on the southern side of the summit. The cone was of a
dark brick-red colour, with splashes of sulphur, and clouds of steam and vapour were
issuing from the crater. Immediately to the west of the volcano, and rising to perhaps
half its height, are twin cones, also dark red in colour, but not showing any signs of
activity. Just to the north of them, at the base of the sheer cliffs which here form the
flank of the main cone, is another large crater with its mouth little if at all above sea-
level. Wisps of steam and vapour which seemed to be issuing in regular puffs were
rising from this crater, and blotches and streaks of sulphur could be seen on the cliff
behind it. Members of a boat party, who attempted without success to land near this
crater, told us that the tumbled masses of black lava, the dark red rocks and the evident
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: CANDLEMAS I. 169
volcanic activities of the place combined to produce a hideous and unearthly scene,
reminiscent of Dante’s Inferno. As we passed to leeward of the craters strong sulphurous
fumes swept across the ship.
There are no penguins in this northern part of the island, but on the low intervening
(ZEN
OS ae ee
Fig. rr. Candlemas Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving.
a. From the westward: the actively volcanic northern part of the island on the left and
the glaciated southern part on the right. Tow Bay (left) and Sea-serpent Cove (right)
separated by portions of the basaltic plateau.
b. The eastern side of the island seen from the 5. Boot Rock in the centre bearing 327°,
distant 8 cables. Spit Point and Black Rock on right.
c. From the NW: the volcano bearing 145°, distant 3 miles.
Fig. 12. Rock exposures on the east coast of Candlemas: from a sketch by Mr F. C. Fraser.
a. Shrove Point. f. Stratified grey-black rocks.
b. Boulders on shore. g. Ice screes.
c. Glacier. h. Boot Rock.
d. Dark grey-black rock. j- Yellow-brown staining on rock.
e. Black boulders in dark red-brown ground-mass. k. Spit Point.
ground they occur in large numbers, and in the south they are to be found wherever the
glacier and steep cliffs allow them to establish themselves.
The whole of the southern part is thickly covered with glacier, which, however, only
extends to sea-level at a few points. In one or two places there is an outcropping of rock
through the ice covering, and on the northern side there is a huge bluff of dark grey rock
round which the glacier divides as it descends to the level land beyond (Fig. 11 a). Here,
immediately below the edge of the glacier, conspicuous patches of green vegetation were
170 DISCOVERY REPORTS
to be seen. On the south side of the island, west of Shrove Point, the glacier in some
places hangs at the edge of low cliffs, while in others it falls in huge broken masses to
the sea (Plate XVIII, figs. 1, 2). North of the point the cliffs are much higher, especially
to the north of Boot Rock, the glacier with its sinuous margin often hanging more than
120 ft. above sea-level (Fig. 12). ‘The thickness of the ice-cap, measured at its broken
edge, is about 70 ft.
The exposures on the eastern cliffs were mainly of dark grey rock, which in one place
was Clearly stratified. At two points boulders included in a dark red ground-mass were
seen (Fig. 12), the formation being presumably a tuff agglomerate.
The only recorded landing on this island was made by Larsen in 1908. According to
the arrow-mark on his sketch-plan (Fig. 10, p. 167) his boat harbour should be situated
near our Boot Rock: we did not find it, and the deep bay with rocks and breakers which
he shows on the south-east side has no existence in fact.
VINDICATION ISLAND
Lat. 57° 04’ S; long. 26° 46’ W
(Plates XVI and XVII, fig. 4; Plate XVIII, fig. 3; Fig. 13)
This island is separated from Candlemas Island by Nelson Strait, rather more than
2 miles wide; in outline it is pentagonal, with a circumference of 3 miles and a maximum
breadth in an east and west direction of rather more than 1 mile. At Knob Point in the
south-west it rises to a peak 1395 ft. in height, placed close to the sea (Plate XVIII, fig. 3),
and there is a lesser peak of 260 ft. at Crosscut Point in the north (Fig. 13 a). The surface
of the island is somewhat hollowed, draining towards Rocky Point at the south-east
angle, and except at this point the coast is formed of steep cliffs, in some parts almost
vertical. At the foot of the cliffs, except on the southern side, there is usually a narrow
steeply-shelving beach composed of large boulders.
No signs of volcanic activity were to be seen, but it was evident that the ground re-
tained a certain amount of warmth. In its hollowed surface and on the peaks a small
glacier was lying, but it appeared to be of no great thickness, and in striking contrast to
the glaciated parts of Candlemas Island, the ice melts long before it reaches the coast,
forming two streams. The larger of these reaches the sea to the west of Rocky Point,
the smaller to the north of it, falling steeply to the beach. 'This south-east corner is the
only place where penguins can gain access to the island and they have large rookeries on
either side of the point. They penetrate inland to a considerable distance, and in doing
so make use of well-trampled pathways, on which birds could be seen passing and re-
passing, pausing awhile for chat with a friend and then hurrying on their way, like
people in a crowded village street. As on other islands patches of green vegetation were
to be seen on the rookeries.
The geological structure of the island is specially well seen in the sheer cliff face on
the north-western side between Low Point and Crosscut Point. The rock here is formed
of irregular masses of red and brown colour, presumably tuff, with intrusive dykes of
YY
i WI Yj, >
| L Ba > TMG
Fig. 13. Vindication Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving.
a. From the N: Cook Rock, Trousers Rock and Low Point on left; Crosscut Point and
Saw Rock on right. Saw Rock bearing 180°, distant 1 mile.
b. Nearer view of Crosscut Point from same position. Saw Rock on right and Buddha
Rock in distance.
c. Buddha Rock from the NNW: bearing 160°, distant 1-6 miles.
d,e,f. Santa Rock. d, bearing 290°, distant 1 mile; e, bearing 036°, distant 7} cables;
f, bearing 070°, distant 5 cables.
g. From the NNW, with Buddha Rock on right and Saw Rock in left fore-ground.
Buddha Rock bearing 157°, distant 14 miles.
h, From the NW: Knob Point on right, Crosscut Point on left, the latter bearing 054°,
distant 1-2 miles.
7. From the WSW: Rocky Point and Castor and Pollux Rocks on right; Buddha
Rock in foreground, bearing 059°, distant 54 cables.
j. From the SSW: Rocky Point on right, seen over Castor and Pollux Rocks, bearing
060°, distant 9 cables.
k, From the SSE: Buddha Rock on left; Castor and Pollux Rocks in foreground, bearing
327°, distant 7 cables. On the right Low Point, Trousers Rock and Cook Rock.
172 DISCOVERY REPORTS
grey rock. The dykes run obliquely, vertically and sometimes horizontally, and not in-
‘frequently they cross one another. ‘They are evidently of much harder rock than the
remainder, for they often stand out as ribs from the cliff surface, and it is they that form
all the projecting points on the magnificent saw-edge at Crosscut Point (Plate XVII,
fig. 4). At Rocky Point and to the west of it the foreshore is composed of basaltic lava,
in one place with some green staining, and the outlying Castor and Pollux Rocks (Fig.
13 2, /) are also of basalt.
On the reef which runs north-eastward from Low Point are two large rocks: Cook
Rock and Trousers Rock (Plate XVII, fig. 2; Figs. 9c; 13k). Both of these form arches,
the tunnel through the latter running north and south, and through the former east and |
west. Both show horizontal strata of red tuff and dark grey rock. Other conspicuous
rocks lie north-north-west from Crosscut Point: Saw Rock 4 cables offshore (Fig. 13 6)
and Santa Rock (Fig. 13 d, e, f) at a distance of 1} miles. Buddha Rock (Fig. 13 ¢) is
to the west, rather less than 3 cables from the shore.
Since even the existence of this island has hitherto been in doubt, there is naturally
no record of any landing. We made three attempts: on the beach at the foot of the cliffs,
on the north-western side, and on each side of Rocky Point; but owing to the high swell
all failed.
SAUNDERS ISLAND
Lat. 57° 47'S; long. 26° 263’ W
(Plates XIX, XX and XXI; Fig. 14)
This island is roughly crescentic in outline, with a large bay, Cordelia Bay,! in the
east. Its length in a north and south direction is 5 miles, and its breadth, measured east
and west, is 54 miles. The circumference is about 17 miles.
Offshore on the northern side of Cordelia Bay are several rocks. The highest are the
Brothers Rocks, 70 ft. above sea-level; they lie at the meeting point of three reefs, with
foul ground and breaking water, which completely close the northern entrance to the
bay. In the southern part of the bay, close inshore and to the west of the rocks near
Nattriss Point,” there is a good anchorage in 13 to 14 fathoms, protected from the north-
west, through south to south-east. With north-east winds a vessel would find no
shelter, and would have to shift to the southern side of the island and lie-to in deep water.
To the north of the anchorage our soundings indicate the existence of a closed basin
with depths of 50 to 62 fathoms; outside the reefs there is a large area of shoal water with
less than 20 fathoms, but elsewhere all round the island the bottom shelves steeply.
In its topography and geology the island is one of the most interesting in the group.
The whole of the northern promontory, ending in Harper Point?, is a low plateau.
In the middle of the island is the glaciated cone of Mt Michael,! 2640 ft. above sea-level
and actively volcanic, while the south-eastern corner is composed of bare hills in which
extinct craters are to be seen (Plate XXI, fig. 1).
1 Cordelia A. Carey. 2 E. A. Nattriss, Crown Agents for the Colonies.
3 F.H. Harper, Secretary, Discovery Committee. 4 Michael J. de C. Carey.
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: SAUNDERS I. 173
In all places where the rock is exposed the underlying strata consist of black basalt.
This composes the plateau at the northern end, and here it has the typical columnar
structure seen at Candlemas and Zavodovski, with cliffs 30 to 4o ft. high, eroded by
wave action and carved into small bays and gullies. To the west of Harper Point two
large masses, apparently composed of fine volcanic ash or mud, lie on the surface of the
plateau. Mt Michael, as will be seen from Plate XX, fig. 1, is most evidently volcanic,
a feature first noticed by Capt. Hansen in 1927. During the whole time that the summit
was clear it emitted great puffs of steam and vapour at intervals of a few seconds. The
cone, none the less, is deeply covered with glacier, extending to the sea on both east and
west sides. The surface of the ice is for the most part smooth, with only an occasional
ledge of rock projecting through it; but on the northern side a deep rift or gulley,
partially free from snow, extends up the mountain, calling to mind the curious fissures
seen in the cone of Zavodovski. The lower slopes of the glacier are much blackened
by wind-borne dust and debris.
The south-eastern extremity of the island consists of a range of hills with heights of
700 and 800 ft., on which the snow cannot lie owing to the warmth of the ground
(Plate XX1I, fig. 3). Everywhere, except at Nattriss Point, these hills are composed of a
fine-textured grey material, which we believe must be either fine ash or volcanic mud.
It is very easily eroded and on both north and south sides is scored by streams of water
from the melting snow into parallel runnels and ravines—some of them at least Io ft.
deep. Snow fell while we were at the island: it melted rapidly in most places, but lodged
for a longer time in the ravines, giving the hills the appearance of being covered with a
finely woven white shawl.
Where the hills join the main body of the island, there is a huge yawning crater,
formed of this same ash or mud (Plate XXJ, fig. 2), and, since no steam or vapour could
be seen issuing from it, we assume that it is extinct. On the southern side of the pro-
montory a large portion of the cliff has fallen away, exposing to view a remarkably perfect
half-section of a crater (Plate XX, figs. 2, 3). As the island is approached from the
south this bisected crater is a most conspicuous feature, and on close inspection it can be
seen that the strata in the cliff face on either side of it run parallel to the edges of the
depression and to the top of the cliffs, just as in a text-book section of a typical volcano.
The surface of the depression is scored with radial grooves similar to those on other parts
of the hills and the diameter of the crater is not far short of half a mile. At Nattriss Point
(Plate XXI, fig. 4) and at a number of other places a layer of black basaltic lava can
be seen at the water line. The cliff section, however, shows clearly that the hills are com-
posed throughout of ash or mud, and that their appearance is not due to a mud-flow
covering other materials. At one or two points on the western side of the island ex-
posures of red tuff were seen above the basalt. In the south of the island, to the west of
the bisected crater, a small mound of mud or ash protrudes through the glacier and is
evidently still warm. Water from the snow melting on its surface has carried runlets of
mud over the surface of the glacier towards the sea (Plate XXI, fig. 5).
The formation of the hills in the south-east corner of Saunders has no counterpart in
DIIl 6
174 DISCOVERY REPORTS
any of the other islands, for though material of similar appearance is to be seen on
Montagu and Bellingshausen, it is of small extent and there is no indication that it was
extruded from a separate outlet. Because of the evident way in which the centre of
voleanic activity has shifted from one point to another in certain of the islands (e.g.
Candlemas and Southern Thule), it may perhaps be supposed that Mt Michael—no
doubt the original seat of activity—was for a time quiescent and that it was during this
period that the south-eastern hills were formed.
In his atlas Bellingshausen gives a sketch of Saunders Island seen from the north
(Fig. 14, cf. Pl. XXI, fig. 1), in which the bare hills behind Nattriss Point culminate in a
lofty cone, evidently far higher than at the present day. If this sketch accurately —
represents the conditions in 1820 it is clear that the hills have undergone considerable
alteration, due either to renewed volcanic activity, or to erosion.
Fig. 14. Saunders J., distant about 4 miles. (After Bellingshausen.)
Cook mentions two hills, seen over the northern point, which might be two islands,
and adds, “these only were clear of snow and seemed to be covered with green turf”’.
This statement must refer to the hills at the south-eastern end, but at the time of our
visit they showed no traces of vegetation. In Cordelia Bay, on low ground where the
glacier ends and the mud hills begin, small patches of green were to be seen, and at this
point there is a large rookery of Ringed penguins. A little further east, where a valley
gives greater extent to the foreshore, some Elephant seal had hauled up, and here a
number of giant petrels were gathered. Round the eastern end of the bay is a steeply
shelving beach of black sand where parties of Ringed penguins, with a few King and
Gentoo, were walking, and on which some seal (apparently Weddell) were lying. Other
colonies of penguins are to be found north of Rocky Point on the west coast, and on
Harper and Nattriss Points.
We made an attempt to land in Cordelia Bay, but were prevented by the heavy swell
and strong undertow on the beach. 'The only recorded landing is by Larsen in 1908.
MontTacu ISLAND
Lat. 58° 254’ S; long. 26° 213’ W
(Plates XXII and XXIII)
Montagu is the largest island in the South Sandwich Group. It is roughly quad-
rangular in outline, and is rather less than 6} miles in both length and breadth, with a
circumference of about 24 miles. In the south-east there is a promontory ending in
Allen Point,! and standing on it is a conical hill 1660 ft. in height, which forms a con-
spicuous feature from many points of view. To the west of the hill is Phyllis Bay,?
1 H. 'T. Allen, member of the Discovery Committee. 2 Phyllis V. Horton.
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: MONTAGU I. 175
ending in Scarlett Point.' Further to the west lies Horsburgh? Point. On the northern
and western sides of the island, on either side of Borley Point, are a number of rocks
and reefs lying within a mile of the shore.
There are good anchorages on either side of Allen Point in depths of 20 fathoms and
under. The anchorage to the north of the point gives protection from north-west to
south-west, and that in Phyllis Bay from north-west to south-east. Allen Point prevents
the swell from following round. To the north-east of the island shoal water extends some
distance out to sea but very deep soundings were obtained close inshore in the north-
west.
The island reaches its highest point in the lofty summit of Mt Belinda,' 4500 ft.
above sea-level. It is probably the highest mountain in the group of islands, but may
be exceeded by Visokoi, where mist prevented accurate measurement. It was only for
brief periods that Mt Belinda was in view; no steam was to be seen rising from it and
we think it probable that all volcanic activity has ceased. It is everywhere deeply buried
in glacier, which descends from the higher slopes and at the coast sometimes ends in a
long and straight ice wall, sometimes falls in broken masses to the water’s edge (Plate
XXIII, figs. 2, 3) and sometimes hangs at the top of steep rocky cliffs. The eastern side
of the island is bounded for 5 miles of its length by a vertical ice face, this being the
longest uninterrupted glacier front in the islands.
The conical hill at the south-eastern corner of the island must once have been a
subsidiary volcanic outlet, and though for the most part thickly covered with glacier,
it shows features which lead us to believe that it still retains a certain amount of warmth.
On its north-eastern side dykes protrude through the snow, which here covers the under-
lying rocks but thinly. ‘To the south there is a mass of bare rock, with a deep smoothly
excavated trough or valley in the ice surrounding its base (Plate XXIII, fig. 1). The
trough may be caused by radiation from the rock; but elsewhere, when a rock penetrates
the ice covering, the latter shows sharp fractured edges in place of the smooth contours
here seen. Above Allen Point, on almost level ground that would normally be deep in
glacier, there are several large and almost bare patches, with stones and rock showing
through a very thin covering of snow. We think these patches at least afford evidence
that the south-eastern corner of the island still retains some traces of volcanic heat.
As on other islands the lowest strata seen in rock exposures are usually of black basalt,
often columnar in structure, and it is of basalt that the outlying rocks are formed. Above
it red and yellowish tuffs with some hard grey rock are to be found. At several points
the rocks are clearly stratified, showing three or more horizontal layers of dark grey rock
separated by narrow bands of red tuff. Sometimes yellow tuff with red inclusions was
to be seen and frequently the rocks were much contorted and intersected by dykes. At
the north-eastern corner of the island are low cliffs formed of a light grey rock, perhaps
volcanic ash.
E. W. A. Scarlett, Accountant, staff of Discovery Committee.
1
> H. Horsburgh, Technical Officer to the Discovery Committee, Crown Agents for the Colonies.
3
J. O. Borley, O.B.E., member of the Discovery Committee. + Belinda Kemp.
6-2
176 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Penguins are scarce on the island and were seen only in small numbers on Allen and
Scarlett Points. Two Weddell seal were noticed on some rocks on the north-east side,
with another near by on an ice floe. No sign of plant life was seen anywhere.
The only recorded landing is by Larsen, who with some difficulty succeeded in
putting two men ashore on some rocks “at the southern point of the island” —pre-
sumably on Allen Point.
BRISTOL ISLAND
Lat. 59° o14’ S; long. 26° 31’ W
(Plates XXIV, XXV and XXVI; Fig. 15)
This island is roughly oval in shape, with a projection on the north side ending in
Fryer Point! and with Harker Point? in the south. From east to west it is about 5 miles
in length, and from north to south 4? miles; its circumference is 14 miles. The highest
point of the island is Mt Darnley, 3600 ft. in height, situated to the south of the middle.
To the north-east is a second summit of about 1600 ft., and in the east is a conical hill,
1200 ft. high, which forms a conspicuous land-mark (Plate XXV, figs. 1, 3; Fig. 15 a).
On the south side of the island is a great bluff of rock, rising very steeply from the water-
line to a height of 1900 ft.
yaa aan fom. ( a DA
Fig. 15. Bristol Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving.
a. From the N by E: distant about 6 miles.
b. From the SW: Grindle Rock, the inner of the three outlying rocks about 1 mile distant.
c. Freezeland Peak from the NE: bearing 220° and distant 3:2 miles.
To the west of the island stand three rocky islets of imposing appearance. The outer-
most, situated 3 miles from the mainland, is a magnificent structure, with a towering
pillar of rock goo ft. in height and a lesser summit of about 620 ft. (Plate XXVI, figs. 1, 2;
Fig. 15 c). This rock was the landfall that Cook made when he discovered the South
Sandwich Group, and he named it Freezeland Peak after the man who first sighted it.
The middle and inner rocks, which we have named Wilson Rock! and Grindle Rock,®
are respectively 500 and 700 ft. in height (Plate XXVI, figs. 3, 4).
D. H. Fryer, Lt.-Cmdr., R.N., Captain of H.M. Surveying Ship ‘Fitzroy’.
A. Harker, of Messrs Flannery, Baggallay and Johnson, Consulting Naval Architects.
E. R. Darnley, Chairman of the Discovery Committee.
Sir Samuel H. Wilson, G.C.M.G., K.C.B., K.B.E., Permanent Under-Secretary of State for the
Colonies.
® Sir Gilbert E. A. Grindle, K.C.M.G., Permanent Under-Secretary of State for the Colonies.
1
2
3
4
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: BRISTOL I. 177
At Bristol it is possible to anchor, with good holding ground and protection from
wind, anywhere on the northern and eastern sides; but the shape of the island permits
the swell to follow round, no matter what its direction may be. South of Grindle and
Wilson Rocks there is very deep water, and between them is a basin, apparently en-
closed, with depths of over 50 fathoms. This passage is navigable, as is that between
Wilson and Freezeland where soundings of not less than 25 fathoms were obtained.
Between Grindle Rock and the mainland is a continuous reef with breaking water.
Bristol Island is deeply covered with glacier, which extends to the coast in every
direction (Plate XXV, figs. 1-3): on the eastern side and to the west of Fryer Point are
uninterrupted glacier faces each more than three miles in length. At a number of points
the structure of the rock is exposed in steep cliffs, with the glacier hanging above.
Measurements were made of the height of the glacier face on the eastern side of the
island, and the heights obtained at four points as we moved southwards along the coast
were 175, 210, 140 and 260 ft. We think that the average thickness of the ice-covering
on all the glaciated islands (Montagu, Bristol, Cook and Thule) may be reckoned at
200 ft.
No steam was seen rising from any part of the island: we are satisfied that all volcanic
activity has ceased, and nowhere did we see any indication that the ground still retains
warmth. Looking back on the island from the north, on our passage to Montagu, we
noticed that the highest parts of the island had the shape of a horse-shoe, suggesting
that they once formed part of the rim of a large crater. The appearance is shown, though
not very clearly, in Plate XXV, fig. 3. We were not able, however, to come to any definite
conclusion on this point: the crater, if it ever was one, must have been very large, with
a diameter of about two miles.
The rocks on Bristol are similar to those on the other islands. At Fryer Point black
basaltic lava is to be seen and the rock exposures on the bluff on the south side, at the
western headland and in other parts, are of yellowish and red tuff, or tuff conglomerate,
sometimes stratified with a grey rock interposed between the layers, but frequently much
contorted and with many intrusive dykes.
From a geological point of view the three large outlying rocks appear to be more
interesting than any other place in the entire group of islands (Plate XXV, fig. 4; Plate
XXVI, figs. 1-4). The great pillar on Freezeland is composed of a pale brown rock of a
kind not seen elsewhere. It showed distinct signs of bedding and in the upper part of
the column some broad reddish bands. We believe this may be a sedimentary rock. ‘The
eastern part of Freezeland, forming the lesser of the two summits, is different; it is
formed of a brownish rock, with vertical fissures and striation, and may be meta-
morphic. Wilson Rock, nearer the mainland, is a vast mass of black columnar basalt,
while Grindle Rock repeats the reddish and yellowish tuffs seen on the adjacent
headland of the island. Thus, if our conjectures are correct, the whole succession of
rock formations in the Sandwich Group is to be found in these three islets. Freezeland
shows the only likely exposure of the underlying sedimentary series that we know to
exist, Wilson is of the overlying basalt, here seen in far greater thickness than elsewhere,
178 DISCOVERY REPORTS
while Grindle is formed of the superposed tuffs which are characteristic of all the
islands of the group.
On the main island penguins were seen at one point only—a small rocky headland on
the south-western side. They have, however, established themselves in numbers on
Freezeland, where the slopes of talus from the higher rocks appear to afford an at-
tractive site. No penguins were to be found on Wilson Rock, but they occur on Grindle,
where also there are some small but conspicuous patches of bright green vegetation.
On all three islets great numbers of Silver-grey petrels were seen. Leopard seal were
noticed in the water off the penguin rookeries on Freezeland.
Larsen reports that he landed some men on Bristol to look for Fur seal, but found
none. He does not state where the landing was made. It might be possible to land on
Freezeland in exceptionally good weather, but it would be difficult, as the shore is
fringed with boulders among which a heavy surf breaks.
SOUTHERN THULE GROUP
Cook gave to this group of islands the name of Southern Thule; he saw the land only
from a distance and thought it might be a projecting headland of an Antarctic continent.
Bellingshausen, forty-five years later, sailed round the group, and describes it in the
following manner: ‘Thule consists of one high rock and three small islands, of which
one is notably smaller than the others. These islands are high and unapproachable, and
lie in Lat. 59° 26’ S, Long. 27° 13’ 30” W. The middle one, the largest, is about six
miles long; I called it Cook Island, in honour of the great explorer....The most
westerly island is three miles long and the smallest is two-thirds of a mile in length.
Between the two largest islands we found a rock; all three were covered with snow and
ice.” On his chart, however, Bellingshausen shows only two islands: the western is
named Thule Island and the eastern “‘ Kun Island’’, and the rock lies off the south-east
corner of the former.
Since then, for more than a century, practically no additions to our knowledge of the
group have been made, though interest was aroused by Morrell’s statement in 1832 that
there is a good harbour on the north-east side of the westernmost island. In 1928, how-
ever, Mr J. E. Hamilton in a catcher belonging to the whaling factory ‘ Anglo-Norse’
reported that he had seen the third island described by Bellingshausen and had steamed
through the strait lying between it and the island adjacent to it. In The Antarctic Pilot
(1930) Bellingshausen’s name has been appropriately used for this third island, and
two sketches of it by Mr Hamilton are reproduced.
Our chart of the other two islands differs considerably from that shown in Bellings-
hausen’s atlas; there is, however, a similarity in general outline, and the rock is approxi-
mately in the position in which he placed it. Contrary to Morrell’s statement there is no
harbour in the islands, but a good anchorage exists at the south-east corner of Thule
Island. -
Bellingshausen Island is a volcano which still shows signs of activity. Thule and Cook
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: SOUTHERN THULE GROUP 179
Islands are covered deep in glacier and the way in which they have been formed would
probably have been misinterpreted, or have remained obscure, were it not for an inter-
esting discovery which we owe to our echo-sounding apparatus. With this apparatus we
found that a very deep basin exists between Cook and Thule Islands in Douglas Strait.?
In the middle it has soundings of over 400 fathoms, while at the north and south
4S
358
ela 94 5
106 j24i se ute 240
22 is2 a ree
2
178 ‘81 19
140 168
x
43 lei5 7 \30 32 HH OSA 27
\
ROCKS AWASH a,
ROCK AWASH
eens scan ‘5
BEACH POINT
Ke ae easeeeectnee
@ &
49 78 a s
co? 9 ng 6218995 2
L 165 206
241 258 301307 355
BIB 330 343 «364 373 37
33 x 350 351 346
162 342
389
378
39
aseeed
Rae
REEF POINT
Ye 1 SEA MILE
21
42 60 69 71 69
Fig. 16. Chart of Douglas Strait, Southern Thule, showing
soundings in the submarine crater.
entrances there is less than 20 fathoms. That the basin was once a volcanic crater
scarcely admits of doubt. It is probable that by its eruption it originally formed one
large island, and that of this island Cook and Thule are the only portions now
remaining.
1 Rear-Admiral H. P. Douglas, C.B., C.M.G., member of the Discovery Committee.
180 DISCOVERY REPORTS
The soundings taken in Douglas Strait, with the approximate positions of the 200,
300 and 400 fathom contours, are shown in Fig. 16. It will be seen that deep water
extends close up to the eastern and western shores where the coast on both sides is
formed of high precipitous cliffs and steeply sloping glacier. The northern entrance to
the strait is closed for a great part of its breadth by a reef with sunken rocks extending
eastwards from Beach Point. The southern entrance is narrower and lies between the
end of the rocks off Reef Point and Twitcher Rock, from which shoal water extends
towards Thule Island.
Observations were made on the plankton and hydrology of this submerged crater at
a station situated near the middle of the strait. A sounding with the Lucas machine gave
a depth of 358 fathoms (= 655 metres). ‘The bottom sample was of black mud, and its
strong smell of sulphuretted hydrogen indicated that the lower layers of water were
stagnant.
Table II.
]
Station re 368 9 He
peers a a ae ae ie Between Bellingshausen and
ia we: g Bristol Islands
Depth :
a Ag Ge Sia iae aC: S) I
Fathoms Metres
fo) ) Orr 34°02 0°28 34:01
555 10 (op Ke) 34°04 0°22 34°01
II 20 (op Ce) 34°05 0:20 34°01
16 30 0:09 34:05 o18 34:00
22 40 0:07 34°05 0:08 34°04.
27 50 0505 S05 = (FIO S507
33 60 0°05 34°05 — 0°39 34°16
44 80 0°02 34:07 — 0-60 34°24
55 100 O-o1 34°10 — o'9I 34°41
82 150 = 0:10 34°11 — 0°50 34°50
109 200 — 0-78 34°16 — 031 34:58
164 300 = 1260 34°36 — 0°05 34°60
219 400 — 1:60 34°36 Orl5 34:67
328 600 — 1:63 34°36 0°22 34°67
437 800 = = or19 34°69
547 1000 = = Orl4 34°69
820 1500 — — — 0:05 34:08
‘The temperatures and salinities are given in Table II, and with them, for comparison,
a similar series taken in the open sea between Bellingshausen and Bristol Islands. ‘The
latter series shows the conditions which normally prevail in the area, and it will be seen
that four distinct layers of water are to be distinguished by temperature. Below the
upper layers, warmed by contact with the air, is a cold stratum with a minimum at 55
fathoms; beneath this is a warm layer with a maximum at 328 fathoms, while at the
bottom cold water is again found. In Douglas Strait the temperatures are quite dif-
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: SOUTHERN THULE GROUP 181
ferent; they decrease from top to bottom, and though they fall quickly between 82 and
164 fathoms, no trace of the usual layering for these latitudes is to be seen. This is due
to the fact that the basin is closed. ‘The water that reaches it must flow over either the
northern or southern edges, and since the depths here do not exceed 20 fathoms, only
that from the homogeneous uppermost layer can find access. Since there is a southerly
set of about 1 knot in Douglas Strait the inflowing water will come from the north.
It will be noticed that the bottom temperatures in the basin are extremely low, much
below any of those in the comparative series. We believe this to be the effect of winter
conditions. In winter, and indeed for the greater part of the year, the islands are sur-
rounded by pack-ice, which will also invade the strait. Air temperatures will be very
low and the pack will remain as a solid frozen mass for long periods. Convection cur-
rents will be set up beneath the ice-covering and the whole of the water will become
chilled. When the ice disappears circulation will be restored; but it will be limited to
the upper layers, the bottom water imprisoned beneath it permanently retaining its
winter temperature. The temperatures afford proof—if proof were needed—that no
trace of warmth persists in the crater.
The figures for salinity indicate by their uniformity in the upper layers that active
circulation is in progress down to a depth of 40 fathoms, and in conformity with the
temperature readings they also show an abrupt change between 82 and 164 fathoms
(Fig. 17).
The results suggest that the circulation in the strait, when not closed by ice, is on the
lines indicated in Fig. 18. The current running at the surface from north to south will
set up a flow in the same direction in the water immediately beneath it, with the return
current lying at a depth of 40 fathoms. The latter, by the friction it exerts, will induce
a much slower streaming movement in the water below; this will rotate in the reverse
direction to that above, and its lower level will be at about 130 fathoms, where both
temperature and salinity show that a discontinuity layer exists. ‘The bottom of the basin
from 130 to 400 fathoms must be filled with water which is almost or quite motionless.
The plankton collections show that in Douglas Strait life exists in considerable
quantity down to at least 273 fathoms; for a net hauled from this depth to 137 fathoms
(500-250 metres), and then closed, contained numerous copepods and other organisms.
In all the nets used below 55 fathoms specimens of a very large red and white amphipod,
Eusirus antarcticus, were obtained, and a larger net hauled obliquely from 80 fathoms to
the surface caught great quantities of Euphausia superba, the crustacean which in the
Antarctic forms the food of Blue and Fin whales. At the bottom itself life is deficient:
a dredge brought up a quantity of evil-smelling mud, containing practically nothing
beyond three star-fish and a number of Polychaete worms living in black tubes.
Few instances of volcanic craters inundated by the sea have been recorded: we know
of two only—Deception Island in the South Shetland Group and St Paul Island in the
southern Indian Ocean. Both of these have only one opening and both are much
shallower than Douglas Strait. At Deception the depth of the water in the crater is 93
fathoms and at St Paul 38 fathoms. Cook and Thule Islands, whose steep cliffs border
DIll /
FATHOMS
8
SOUTH NORTH
200
300
Fig. 18. Diagrammatic section of Douglas Strait, showing probable circulation of
the water. Vertical scale exaggerated nearly three times.
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: BELLINGSHAUSEN I. 183
Douglas Strait, are permanently ice-bound, and there is consequently little if any
drainage into the basin. St Paul and Deception Islands, on the other hand, still show
signs of volcanic activity; there is no snow on the former, and on the latter there are
large tracts of bare ground. The considerable depths in Douglas Strait are perhaps due
in part to this lack of drainage, while with two openings and a comparatively rapid sur-
face current suspended matter in the sea water will not readily be deposited.
Soundings taken elsewhere round the islands do not show features of any special
interest. There is very deep water on both the northern and south-western sides of
Thule Island, while Maurice Channel, between Bellingshausen and Cook Islands is
shallow throughout, with 14 to 17 fathoms in the middle.
Ferguson Bay in Thule Island (Plate XXXI, fig. 1) is the best anchorage in the South
Sandwich Group, with good holding ground and protection from the south-west,
through west, to east. Other anchorages are to the north-east and south-east of Cook
Island, though at these the swell may be heavy. Douglas Strait is too steep to be of
much use.
BELLINGSHAUSEN ISLAND
Lat. 59° 252’ S; long. 27° 034’ W
(Plates XXVII and XXVIII; Fig. 19)
Bellingshausen Island is the smallest of the Southern Thule Group and lies to the
north-east of Cook Island, from which it is separated by Maurice Channel,! 13 miles
wide. In striking contrast to its neighbours it still shows evident signs of volcanic
activity. In outline it is irregularly oval, hollowed on the eastern side and with Hardy
Point? projecting to the west: it has a length of 1-1 miles, a breadth of 8 cables and a
circumference of rather more than 3 miles.
The single volcanic cone ends abruptly in the ragged edges of a yawning crater, and
the highest point, on the northern margin of the latter, is 530 ft. above sea-level (Plate
XXVIII, figs. 1-3; Fig. 19). The inner walls of the crater are sheer, or slope very steeply,
and steam and vapour were seen rising from a point below the brim. On the southern
and south-western sides the base of the cone slopes gently upwards from a plateau;
in the west, north of Hardy Point, there are cliffs of no great height, while in the east
a sheer wall of rock rises to the crater’s edge. North of Isaacson Point* so much of the
rock has split away that it looks as if one more fall would breach the crater to sea-level
(Plate XXVIII, fig. 4).
The steep eastern and northern sides are practically devoid of snow, but on the south
and west sides there are large patches and streaks, interspersed with considerable areas
of bare ground (Plate XXVIII, fig. 3). At one point on the south-eastern side, not far
below the brim of the crater, steam was issuing from a fumarole.
H. G. Maurice, C.B., member of the Discovery Committee.
A. C. Hardy, Professor of Zoology, University College, Hull.
Miss S. M. Isaacson, attached to Scientific Staff, Discovery Committee.
o nw
sm He Ao os
Vian
Fig. 19. Bellingshausen Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving.
The steam and vapour from the volcano are not shown.
From the WSW: Hardy Point to right of centre bearing 064°, distant 1-1 miles.
From the SW: Isaacson Point on the right bearing 065°, distant 1-4 miles.
From the SSW: Hardy Point on the left bearing o15°, distant 1-6 cables.
From the SSE: Hardy Point on the left bearing 318°, distant 9 cables.
From the NE: Isaacson Point on the left bearing 240°, distant 6 cables.
From the NNE: Isaacson Point on the left bearing 245°, distant 6 cables.
From the ENE: North Point on the right bearing 270°.
From the W by N: Summit bearing 100°, distant 8-5 miles.
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: COOK ISLAND 185
The coast-line of the plateau on the southern and western sides is everywhere steep
and rocky, and is formed as on other islands of black columnar basalt. The surface of
the plateau appears smooth and is probably overlaid with scoria and ash. The cliffs be-
tween Isaacson Point and Jagged Point are black, brown and red, and seem to be com-
posed mainly of tuff and ash: there are some fallen boulders on the narrow beach at their
base. Above Jagged Point a projecting spur forms an irregular knife-edge of curious
outline (Plate XXVIII, fig. 4) and the rock here is fine-grained and pale yellowish brown,
apparently a hard volcanic mud, with an underlying stratum of black basalt, visible at
the water-line. The lower cliffs on the north-east side are stratified with alternate layers
consisting apparently of tuff agglomerate and ash.
Ringed penguins are very abundant on the island and have formed rookeries near the
shore at a number of points. On the north-east side, as already mentioned, small parties
of them were seen to have ascended the steep slopes of the cone almost to the brink of
the crater and to a height of at least 450 ft. above the sea. For a penguin such a journey
must be very arduous, and their object—unless it be to admire the view—is difficult to
understand.
One or two patches of green vegetation were seen on the plateau and at several places
the snow was remarkably stained with reddish pink, yellow and yellowish green. ‘The
first of these is the familiar ‘‘ red snow”’, caused by the unicellular alga Chlamydomonas,
and samples of it were collected on Thule Island. The yellow and yellowish green
patches were probably also due to algae, but of this it was not possible to be certain.
There is no record of any landing on the island.
Cook Island
Lat. 59° 262’ S; long. 27° 093’ W
(Plates XX VII and XXIX; Plate XXX, fig. 1; Fig. 20)
This island is the largest and highest in the Southern ‘Thule Group. It is rather
regularly oval in outline, but in the west there is a shallow bay which faces Douglas
Strait and is bounded at the south by Reef Point. Elsewhere only small projections
interrupt its even contour: Resolution Point! in the north-east, Swell Point in the east
and Jeffries Point? in the south. The island is nearly 3} miles long and 23 miles wide,
its longer axis lying east and west; in circumference it is 9} miles. It has three ice-
capped peaks, of which Mt Harmer,® situated a little to the north of its middle point,
is the highest, having an altitude of 3660 ft. above sea-level.
Cook Island is buried deep beneath an ice-cap (Plate XXIX; Fig. 20), and it is only
below the hanging glaciers and on headlands that the underlying rocks are visible. The
glacier follows the undulations of the rock beneath, and frequent ridges and protrusions
where the ice is crevassed indicate inequalities in the surface below, which have not yet
H.M.S. ‘Resolution’, in which Cook circumnavigated the globe.
1
* Miss M. E. Jeffries, staff of the Discovery Committee.
8 Sir Sidney F. Harmer, K.B.E., Sc.D., F.R.S., vice-chairman of the Discovery Committee.
186 DISCOVERY REPORTS
been worn away by ice action. No measurements were taken of the glacier face, but
there is no doubt that it is fully as thick as on Bristol Island.
As already explained (p. 179) the crater from which both Cook and Thule originated
is probably that now submerged beneath the sea in Douglas Strait. ‘The two are thus
fragments of a single much larger island, which in size must have approached Montagu
—now the largest of the group.
All round the coast is precipitous, alternating between steep rugged cliffs with glacier
hanging above them and glaciers reaching to the water’s edge. If small ice-falls down
the hill-sides are omitted, there are in all eight glaciers which reach the sea, the largest
being half a mile in breadth. The most extensive rock exposures are to be found .-
as
gph ee
Nasee
Fig. 20. Cook Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving.
. From the W: Reef Point on the right bearing rro°, distant about 2 miles.
From the NE: Swell Point on the left bearing 203°, distant 3-6 miles.
From the SW: Reef Point on the left bearing 009°, distant 1 mile.
From the S: Jeffries Point to right of centre bearing 000°, distant 3 cables.
eS
bordering Douglas Strait, and in the south-east between Swell Point and Jeffries Point.
The rocks here, and indeed at all points where they are visible, are yellow, red or brown
in colour, sometimes showing signs of stratification, but always very much crumpled
and contorted, often seamed with dykes of grey rock and sometimes apparently with
large intrusive masses of brown material showing vertical striation.
Cook Island differs from all the others of the group except Leskov in that, so far as
we were able to observe, penguins are entirely absent. They are certainly extremely
scarce, and this is evidently due to the very steep coast which is at no point suitable for
a rookery. On the high cliffs facing Douglas Strait, myriads of Silver-grey petrels were
perched and we think it more than probable that they nest here.
There is no record of any landing on the island.
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: THULE I. 187
Thule Island
Lat. 59° 262’ S; long. 27° 193’ W
(Plates XXVII and XXX, figs. 2-4; Plate XXXI; Fig. 21)
This island, the westernmost of the Southern Thule Group, is roughly crescentic in
outline, with a large bay in the east, bordering Douglas Strait, and with Cape Flannery*
projecting to the west. Its extreme length, measured in an easterly and westerly direc-
tion, is 34 miles; its breadth is 2} miles and its circumference about ro miles. The bay
ends in the north at Beach Point (Plate XXX, fig. 3), from which a reef with several
rocks awash at the surface extends seawards for over a mile, greatly restricting the
entrance to the strait. At the southern end of the bay, situated about half a mile from
the island and with breakers and foul ground between, is T'witcher Rock? (Plate XX XI,
figs. 3, 4; Fig. 21 e, f). This rock, first seen by Bellingshausen, is a conspicuous feature,
rising to a height of 180 ft. At the south-east corner the land, which is here a low
plateau, trends to the south; it ends in Hewison Point? (Plate XXXI, fig. 1; Fig. 21 g)
and between this and Herd Point? further to the west is Ferguson Bay,’ which affords
the best anchorage in the South Sandwich Group. The island rises to its highest point
in Mt Larsen,® which overlooks Douglas Strait and is 2230 ft. above sea-level.
Like Cook Island, Thule is buried beneath an ice-cap (Plate XXX, fig. 2). In the
middle of the south-western side a jagged ridge of black rock protrudes through the
glacier; in the south-east the lava plateau ending in Hewison Point is largely devoid of
snow (Plate XXXI, fig. 1), and in the north-east the isolated ridge of rock at Beach
Point is also bare (Plate XXXI, fig. 3). With these exceptions the ice-cap is practically
continuous over the island, the glacier sometimes extending to the water’s edge, but
more often breaking off abruptly at the edge of the steep cliffs which form the greater
part of the coast-line. Conspicuous silt bands are to be seen in the face of the glacier at
the head of Ferguson Bay (Plate XXXI, fig. 2), and on its surface some patches of “red
snow’’ were observed.
The plateau at Hewison Point (Plate XXXI, fig. 1) is formed of black columnar
basalt; on its western side it is cut into a number of small creeks in which a landing
could doubtless be made in fine weather. Herd Point is a protruding spur of basalt, as
are also most of the rock exposures visible on the south-western side of the island. Near
Cape Flannery there are beds apparently composed of yellowish tuff and ash, while at
1 Sir Fortescue Flannery, Bart., member of the Discovery Committee.
2 John Montagu, 4th Earl of Sandwich, was First Lord of the Admiralty from 1771-82, during the period
of Cook’s voyages, and the group of islands is named after him. It is said that ‘‘ for corruption and incapacity
Sandwich’s administration is unique in the history of the British Navy’. He was notorious for his evil
living, and having taken a leading part in the prosecution of one of his former associates in vice, was popularly
known by the nickname of “‘ Jemmy T'witcher”’.
3 Lt.-Col. Hewison, of Messrs Ferguson Bros.
4 R. D. Herd, of Messrs Ferguson Bros.
®> Messrs Ferguson Bros., Port Glasgow, builders of the R.R.S. ‘Discovery II’.
6
C. A. Larsen, the pioneer of modern Antarctic whaling.
188 DISCOVERY REPORTS
the cape itself there is reddish tuff below and grey rock above. Farther north, at a point
with outlying breakers, the rocks are definitely stratified, three layers of ash separated
by red tuff lying on a base of black basalt. The isolated ridge at Beach Point is about
150 ft. in height, and is composed of hard grey rock, with outcrops of red tuff, and with
Fig 21. Thule Island: sketches by Lt.-Cmdr. J. Irving.
a. From the E: Twitcher Rock on the left bearing 180°, distant 1:1 miles. Hewison
Point is on the left of the island and Beach Point on the right.
Cape Flannery from the NW: bearing 147°, distant 8 cables.
Cape Flannery from the SE: bearing 326°, distant 1-5 miles.
. From the ESE: Twitcher Rock in the foreground bearing 287°, distant 4 cables.
Twitcher Rock from the WNW: bearing 122°, distant 1-4 miles.
Twitcher Rock from the NNE: bearing 198°, distant 3 cables.
. From the S, showing Ferguson Bay in the centre. Herd Point is on the left side of the
bay; on the right is T'witcher Rock and part of Cook Island.
Eel ap ge es. ee
a soft crumbling black rock, perhaps volcanic ash, at the summit. The steepest cliffs
are on the eastern side facing Douglas Strait, and the rocks here closely resemble those
opposite on Cook Island. They consist of contorted masses of red, yellow and dark
brown, with intrusive grey dykes, the colours showing vividly when lit by a rare gleam
of sunshine.
In 1911 a landing was effected in Ferguson Bay by members of a whaling expedition
DESCRIPTION OF THE ISLANDS: THULE I. 189
under Capt. Ole Jorgensen (see p. 141); here we ourselves attempted to go ashore but
were unable to do so owing to the heavy swell. Near Beach Point, however, we were
more successful, Dr E. H. Marshall and Mr T. J. Hart landing in a pram on a shore
composed of pebbles and boulders. The seal on the beach were found to be mainly
Weddell seal, about forty in all, together with two Elephant seal and several adult and
one young of the Leopard seal. The beach is evidently a resort for Leopard seal during
the breeding season, for it was littered with excreta containing penguin feathers. At
Beach Point there is a rookery of Ringed penguins, with some patches of green vegeta-
tion similar to those seen on other islands. The plant proved to be an alga and has been
identified by Mr G. Tandy as Prasiola crispa, a species of very wide distribution. Among
the earth in which this plant was growing two species of mites and a single insect, a
Collembolan, were found. A sample of ‘‘ red snow”’ (Chlamydomonas) was taken. Some
brackish pools, formed apparently by melted snow, appeared to be without life, but in
mud scraped from the undersides of stones lying in the water some ciliate Protozoa
were obtained. Geological specimens were collected, but unfortunately several of the
most characteristic types of rock did not occur at Beach Point.
Dill
190
Age of islands, 155
Albatross, 157
Algae, 158
Anchorages, 147, 158, 162, 168,
175, 183
“Anglo-Norse’, 143, 144
Antillean Arc, South, 154
Attraction, local magnetic, 147
Bellingshausen, F. G. von, 136,
139, 143, 144, 146, 158, 165
Bellingshausen I., 144, 150, 178,
183
Birds, 135, 156
Biscoe, J., 140, 143
Bristol, I., 138, 152, 176
Brown, J., 140, 143, 156, 162
“Busen VII’, 142, 143
Candlemas group, 139, 140, 165
Candlemas I., 150, 168
Cape Bristol, 138, 139
Cape Montagu, 138, 139
Cape pigeons, 156
Compass deviation, 147
Cook, J., 136, 143, 146, 165, 174,
8
17
Cook I., 140, 152, 185
Crab-eater seal, 155
Crater, submerged, 179, 180
Currents, 147, 181
‘Deutschland’, 141, 143, 148,
165
Dingsér, B., 142
Dredging, 135, 141, 144, 181
Echo-sounding, 135, 148, 179
Elephant seal, 155
‘Endurance’, 142, 143
Eruptions, volcanic, 150
Fanning, E., 140, 162
Filchner, W., 141, 143, 161, 165,
167
Fish, 157
Freezeland Peak, 138, 154, 176,
5 dil
Fricker, 140, 165
Fulmar, Silver-grey, 156
Fumaroles, 160, 164, 183
Fur seal, 155
Geological specimens, 141, 154,
189
Geology, 135, 141, 154, 177
Glaciation, 153, 177
Glaciation in 8. Shetlands, 153
Gregory, 154
INDEX
Gull, Dominican, 157
Hamilton, J. E., 143, 178
Hansen, H., 142, 143, 167, 173
Harbours, 147
“Havfruen’, 141, 142
History, 136, 165, 178
Hobbs, 153
Holtedahl, 142, 153, 154
Hydrology, 135, 145, 180
Icebergs, 144, 146
Ice-cap, 153, 170, 177
Ice conditions, 135, 138, 139,
Win) We
Ice formations, 153, 164, 173, 187
Itinerary of ‘ Discovery II’, 144
Jorgensen, O., 141, 143
Kelp, 158
Landings, 136, 139, 140, 141,
143, 147, 160, 188
Larsen, C. A., 136, 140, 143, 157,
160, 162, 166, 167
Leopard seal, 155
Leskov I., 139, 152, 161
Lichens, 158
‘Lively’, 140
Magnetic attraction, 147
Magnetic variation, 147
Marquis de Traverse Is., 139
Mecking, 156
‘Meteor’, 148
Mill, H. R., 139
‘Mirnii’, 139, 143
Mollymauk, 157
Montagu I., 138, 152, 174
Morrell, 140
Origin of islands, 150
‘Pacific’, 140, 143
Pack-ice, 135, 138, 139, 142, 146,
181
Penguins, 139, 156, 170, 185
Petrels, 157
Plankton, 144, 181
Priestley, 153
‘Quest’, 142, 143
“Red snow’, 158, 185, 187, 189
‘Resolution’, 136, 143, 185
Rock specimens, 141, 154, 189
Salinity of water, 181
Sandwich, Earl of, 187
Sandwich Land, 139, 140
Saunders I., 139, 150, 152, 172
Seals, 155
Seaweeds, 158
Sedimentary rocks, 154, 177
Set, 147
Shackleton, 142, 143
Sheath-bill, 157
Skuas, 157
Snow petrel, 157
Soundings, 135, 148, 167, 177,
179
South Sandwich Deep, 148
Southern Thule, 138, 139, 178
Sulphur, 160, 168
Survey, methods employed, 135
Surveys, previous, 136, 139, 145
Temperature of air, 145
Temperature of water, 180, 181
Terns, 157
Thule I., 140, 152, 187
“Thulla’, 141, 143
Time signals, 147
‘Tonsberg Whaling Co., 142
Trawling, 145, 157
‘Tula’, 140, 143
Tussac grass, 157
Twitcher Rock, 187
‘Undine’, 140, 143
Variation, magnetic, 147
Vegetation, 157
Vindication I., 152, 167, 170
Visokoi I., 139, 150, 162
Volcanic activity, 147, 150, 152
of Bellingshausen I., 183
of Candlemas I., 142, 168
of Leskov I., 161
of Saunders I., 142, 172
of Visokoi I., 140, 143, 162
of Zavodovski I., 140, 142,
160
Volcanic eruptions, 150
‘Vostok’, 139, 143
Weddell seal, 155
Whale-birds, 157
Whalers, 142, 143, 156
Whales, 156
Wild, F., 142, 143, 160
Wind, 147
Wireless time-signals, 147
Worsley, 142
Zavodovski I., 139, 150, 152, 158
Zoology, marine, 141, 157, 181
19I
APPENDIX
REPORT ON ROCK SPECIMENS FROM THULE ISLAND,
SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS
By G.W. DYRRELL, A-R-€:Se., DiSc., E-G:S., F-RS:E-
Lecturer in Geology, University of Glasgow.
THE specimens, fifteen in number, were collected from the scarp at Beach Point (see the
foregoing Report, pp. 188-9). Eight of them were obtained from rock zn situ on the face
of the cliff and at its summit. The remaining seven were beach pebbles. It is stated in
the Report (p. 188) that the ridge is about 150 ft. in height, and is composed of hard grey
rock with outcrops of red tuff, and a soft crumbling black rock, perhaps volcanic ash,
at the summit. The specimens collected im situ bear out this description. From the labels
attached to the material, and from the petrographical examination, the following ad-
ditional facts have been elicited. Six specimens were obtained from a steep escarpment
at about 50 ft. above sea level. Of these, four are dacite lavas with good flow structures,
and two are pyroxene-andesites containing both monoclinic and orthorhombic pyroxenes.
From the fact that a black slaggy andesitic lava with red crusts, diagnosed in the field as
‘tuff’, was obtained at a height of 100 ft. above sea level, it is inferred that the upper
part of the cliff, from the too ft. level at any rate, consists of a flow, or flows, of andesite
lava, whilst the dacite specimens probably came from underlying flows. At the top of
the cliff, 150 ft. above sea level, a true andesite tuff was obtained, which probably repre-
sents the final explosive discharge of the volcano after the andesite lava had been ejected.
The seven beach cobbles and pebbles consist mainly of dacites and andesites entirely
similar to those found zn situ. In addition there is a specimen of a basic type of andesite
containing a notable amount of olivine, and one of andesitic pumice.
PETROGRAPHY.
The dacites (or dacitoids) are greyish green, reddish, or purplish, compact, non-por-
phyritic rocks, the colours of which obviously vary according to the state of oxidation of
their iron. Colour streaks and bands, and a somewhat platy fracture, indicate a flow
structure which is prominent in all specimens when seen in thin section.
Under the microscope these rocks are found to consist mainly of feldspar microlites
which are arranged in more or less parallel streams indicating flow, embedded in a
dense, irresolvable, cryptocrystalline base. The microlites are of plagioclase, and are
referred to oligoclase as they give straight or nearly straight extinctions. The only other
identifiable constituents of the ground-mass are minute spots and streaks of iron oxides
which, when in the form of haematite or limonite, produce the prevailing purplish
and reddish tints of the rocks. There are also tiny crystals of strong birefringence
which may be identified as augite in coarser streaks and bands which are to be found
in one of the specimens. Rare microphenocrysts of andesine (Ab,;An,), which are some-
times euhedral, and sometimes curiously corroded, are the only other crystalline
8-2
192 DISCOVERY REPORTS
constituents of these rocks. Quartz does not appear, although the chemical analysis
(see Table II, 1) discloses no less than 30 per cent of free silica.
Two of the slides show included fragments of a coarse-grained olivine-andesite
consisting of plagioclase laths, elongated crystals of augite studded with granules of
magnetite, and sporadic olivine, in a glassy ground-mass which has been partially
devitrified with the production of ill-defined feldspathic material and quartz. The
angularity of these xenoliths, and the fact that they have obviously chilled a sur-
rounding zone of lava with the production of an opaque envelope of iron ores, indicate
that they are fragments picked up by the lava as it flowed over the surface, and not
cognate xenoliths brought up from great depths.
Table I
Analyses of Dacites, etc.
I A B C D
|
SiO, 69°45 67°71 66°39 69°56 66-9
Al,O, 14°20 14:65 17°62 15-65 | 16:6
Re,O; 2°83 1°59 | I'O1 I-24 Bal
FeO 3°24. 3°29 2:21 o-91 I°4
MgO 0°25 0°85 | 1°32 0-82 12
CaO 3°05 2°34 | Sym) 2°52 3°3
Na,O 415 60g 449 4°09 41
K,O 1°51 1-99 2°13 1 2°19 2°5
H,O + 0-40 0-16 0°39 ree
H,0 — ss — — foe oe ee ees
INO) O15 1:00 | 0°33 — OB
POF O14 0-16 — 0°13 | o'r
MnO 0:07 — — | — 0-04
(Ni, Co)O Nil _ — —
Co, Nil — _- — = |
iS) Trace _- — | — —
| 10004 99°83 99°68 | 100'03 | 100-04
Dacite (Dacitoid), Thule Island, South Sandwich Islands. Anal. F. Herdsman, A.R.S.M.
A. Hyalodacite (‘“‘Trachyte”’), Deception Island, South Shetland Islands. Quoted from H. S. Washington,
“Chemical Analyses of Igneous Rocks”, Prof. Paper 99, U.S. Geol. Surv. pp. 242-3 (1917). Also see
G. W. Tyrrell, Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin. Lu, pt 1, p. 71 (1921).
B. Quartz-diorite, dredged block from sounding in lat. 70° S, long. 81° W (Paris), West Antarctica. Quoted
from H. S. Washington, op. cit. pp. 266-7.
C. Dacite, Guaitara Slope, Loma de Ales, Colombia. Quoted from J. P. Iddings, Igneous Rocks, 11, p. 496
(1913).
D. Dacite, mean of thirty analyses. Quoted from G. W. Tyrrell, Principles of Petrology, p. 124 (1926).
i]
The chemical analysis of a composite sample of three specimens of dacite lava from
the 50 ft. cliff is given in Table I, 1. It is there compared with an analysis of the
hyalodacite of Deception Island in the South Shetland group, which appears to be its
closest affinity in the West Antarctic region (Table I, A). The analyses are closely
comparable, although the Deception Island rock has higher total alkalies, and a higher
ratio of soda to potash, than the Thule Island rock. The closest plutonic analogue to
ROCK SPECIMENS 193
these dacitic lavas in the West Antarctic region is a quartz-diorite (Table I, B) from a
dredged block. The most comparable Andean lava is a dacite from Colombia (‘Table I, C).
The average dacite (Table I, D) compares closely with the rock under investigation,
but is richer in potash relatively to soda, and is somewhat less siliceous.
The normative mineral compositions of these rocks, computed under the rules of
the American Quantitative Classification, are set out in Table II. The Thule Island
dacite is there shown to compare remarkably well with the average dacite (‘Table II, D),
but is somewhat richer in quartz and poorer in orthoclase, features which are also
shown by the Colombian dacite (Table II, C). The assignment of the Thule Island lava
to the dacite group is therefore well founded; but since the quartz is mostly occult in
the cryptocrystalline ground-mass, Lacroix’s term dacitoid,' applied to rocks of this
chemical character in which quartz is not mineralogically expressed, is more appropriate
than dacite. On the evidence of the minerals actually seen in thin section, and without a
corrective chemical analysis, this rock would probably have been called oligoclase-
andesite.
Table II
Norms of Analyses in Table I.
| I A | B Cc D
Quartz 31-4 | 18°5 | 20°9 30°5 24°9
Orthoclase 8-9 11-7 12°2 12°8 15°0
Albite 35°71 51-4 38:2 34°6 34:6
Anorthite 14°5 6-4 18-9 12°5 15°6
Corundum O74 = rare) 2:0 I°4
Diopside — 3:7, — — —
Hypersthene 4:0 By3 59 2°8 30
Magnetite 4:2 2°3 I-4 16 Bu
Ilmenite 0°3 2:0 0-6 — 0-6
Apatite 03 03 Lo 03 03
The norms are arranged in the same order as the analyses in Table I. The symbols of these analyses
in the American Quantitative Classification are given below:
I. I (3) 4 (2) 3 4
A. I (11) 4 1) ie
B. iy 4 we 4
(ep I "4 De 4
D. ie 4 (2)3 4
The andesites are hypersthene-augite-andesites usually containing a little olivine. In
some specimens the olivine becomes a fairly prominent constituent, but without lessen-
ing the andesitic character of the rocks, and the term olivine-andesite may then be
employed. Olivine-andesites, often called andesitic basalt, basaltic andesite, or simply
basalt, are common in many andesitic lava fields. They are, however, easily distinguish-
able on chemical and mineralogical grounds from true basalts.
1 Comptes. Rendus, Paris, CLXVIII, p. 297 (1919).
194 DISCOVERY REPORTS
The Thule Island andesites are dark grey or purplish grey compact rocks without
conspicuous crystals, although many, very small, microporphyritic feldspar crystals may
usually be detected on close inspection. Some of the specimens are highly vesicular or
slaggy; one is pumiceous.
In thin section the analysed rock, collected from a shore boulder, shows numerous
microphenocrysts of euhedral plagioclase, with much less abundant hypersthene and
augite, and fresh but rare olivine, in a ground-mass consisting of minute laths of
plagioclase feldspar, intermingled with grains of pyroxenes and iron ores. Only a very
small amount of cryptocrystalline or glassy base is present. As a whole the rock is
highly feldspathic, and is of andesitic, not basaltic, character, notwithstanding the
presence of a little olivine. The phenocrystic feldspar is highly zonal, ranging from
labradorite (Ab, An,) at the core to oligoclase on the margin. These feldspars also carry
numerous inclusions of ground-mass constituents which are always arranged in regular
zones with reference to the margins of the crystals. The ground-mass feldspar is of
somewhat more sodic composition and seems to be mainly andesine of composition
about Ab,An, . The hypersthene is faintly pleochroic; the augite, however, is practically
colourless.
Other rocks of much the same character, but with a finer ground-mass, and consider-
ably richer in an obscure glassy base, come from the 50 ft. escarpment, and from the
slaggy lava surface (or base) at the 100 ft. level. One of the shore specimens may also be
associated with this group, but shows in addition a well-marked flow structure. Another
specimen from the 50 ft. escarpment shows the phenocrystic constituents embedded in
red and black glassy matter which carries only a few scattered microlites of feldspar and
pyroxene.
The olivine-andesites are represented by three beach pebbles. In their general
characters these rocks conform very closely with the second type of andesite lava described
above, but are somewhat richer in olivine which also occurs in larger crystals. A pebble
of andesitic pumice in thin section shows a solidified froth of colourless isotropic glass in
which scattered crystals of plagioclase, hypersthene and augite are entangled.
The tuff which occurs at the 150 ft. level at Beach Point is composed of little angular
fragments of andesite and dacite, mostly of the more vitreous, slaggy, vesicular, and
altered types, embedded in a paste consisting of comminuted particles of the same
materials, mingled with a few angular grains of quartz, and detached feldspars.
In the only published account of rocks from the South Sandwich Islands O.
Backstrém! has described rock types very similar to the above from Candlemas Island.
He states that the lavas of Candlemas are mostly reddish porphyritic rocks in which the
feldspar phenocrysts are occasionally so numerous as to produce a whitish appearance.
The feldspar is a basic labradorite (Ab,;An,;), and the pyroxene is hypersthene with
mantles of augite. The latter mineral also occurs independently. Corroded crystals of
olivine are present in a few of the rocks, which Backstrém regarded as basalts transitional
1 “Petrographische Beschreibung einiger Basalte von Patagonien, Westantarktika, und den Siid-
Sandwich-Inseln”, Bull. Geol. Inst. Upsala, xi11, pp. 115-82 (1915). South Sandwich Islands, pp. 163-76.
ROCK SPECIMENS 195
to andesites. From Saunders Island he described an “ olivine-free basalt”’, consisting of
plagioclase (with An;;~,;), an almost colourless pyroxene of the enstatite-augite series,
and magnetite. An analysis of this rock, which is reproduced in Table III, 1, was given.
Hypersthene-andesites are common lavas in the Andes and in the South Shetland
Islands. Table III
Analyses of Andesites, etc.
. ‘i
I 2 A B Cc |
SiO, 52°68 | 54-90 57°30 61-80 59°2
Al,O, 16:38 17°62 17°97 18-65 16:8
FeO; Burr 2°70 | 27 2°08 Ber
FeO 7:98 6-80 3°79 2°49 3°6
MgO 747 3°93 2°57 2°60 31
CaO 8-08 9°05 6-72 6°41 6:6
Na,O 2°75 2°90 3°25 4°51 3°4
K,O 0°44 0°54 0-96 0-82 M77
ae 3 0:20 oe 4:26 0°25 Tet
TiO, 0-77 0°70 0°56 0°50 o-7
P50; 0°02 0-09 0°20 o-18 0-2
MnO 0-16 0:23 — 0-08 0-2
(Ni, Co)O — Nil _ — —
CO; — Nil — —
S Trace Trace — O-O1 =
Cl 0°05 — = =>
- 3
100°09 99°96 99°75 100'66 99°7
1. ‘Olivine-free basalt”, Saunders Island, South Sandwich Islands. Anal. N. Sahlbom. Quoted from
O. Backstrém, Bull. Geol. Inst. Upsala, x11, p. 173 (1915).
Hypersthene-andesite lava, Thule Island, South Sandwich Islands. Anal. F. Herdsman, A.R.S.M.
Hypersthene-andesite lava, Admiralty Bay, King George Island, South Shetland Islands. Anal. Lassieur.
Quoted from H. S. Washington, “‘Chemical Analyses of Igneous Rocks”, Prof. Paper 99, U.S. Geol.
Surv. p. 419 (1917).
B. Hypersthene-andesite lava, Mt Burney, Patagonian Andes. Anal. G. Nyblom. Quoted from P. D. Quensel,
Bull. Geol. Inst. Upsala, x1, p. 107 (1911).
C. Average hypersthene-andesite, computed from 114 analyses of rocks called hypersthene-andesite and
pyroxene-andesite (containing hypersthene) from Recent and Kainozoic volcanoes and lava fields of the
circum-Pacific region (including the East and West Indies), and certain European fields (Sardinia,
Hungary, Aegean Sea).
>
A chemical analysis of the hypersthene-andesite of Thule Island by F. Herdsman is
displayed in Table III, 2. It is there compared with the analysis of the “‘ olivine-free
basalt” of Saunders Island (1), the hypersthene-andesite of Admiralty Bay, King
George Island, South Shetland Islands (A), and the hypersthene-andesite of Mt
Burney (B), one of the southernmost volcanoes of the Andes. As a standard of com-
parison a new average analysis of hypersthene-andesite has been computed from 114
analyses found in Washington’s compilation and more recent literature (C). This
average hypersthene-andesite differs remarkably little from the average which was
computed some years ago on the basis of 71 analyses, including, however, some pre-
Kainozoic examples.!
1G. W. Tyrrell, “Some Tertiary Dykes of the Clyde Area,” Geol. Mag. (6), Iv, p. 310 (1917).
196 DISCOVERY REPORTS
With the exception of the average analysis the analyses in Table III are arranged in
order of increasing silica. With that increase there are concomitant decreases in ferrous
iron, magnesia, and lime, increases in potash and soda, but with practically constant
alumina, showing that the chemical variations within this group of andesites arise
chiefly from variations in the relative proportions of the felsic and mafic groups of
minerals. The lavas of the South Sandwich Islands are clearly among the more basic
types of andesite, but are distinguishable from basalts by their richness in feldspars, the
frequent presence of orthorhombic pyroxenes, and their comparatively high degree of
supersaturation with silica (see the norms, Table IV, 1 and 2). The Saunders Island
rock, however, is very near the borderline of the andesites and basalts. The South -
Shetland and Patagonian lavas are much closer to the average hypersthene-andesite, as
is well shown by the norms (Table IV). A notable chemical feature of the hypersthene-
andesites of the region under consideration is their poverty in potash as compared with
the average hypersthene-andesite.
Table IV
Norms of Analyses in Table III.
I 2 A B c
Quartz 3:6 9:2 I5‘1 14:7 14°3
Orthoclase 2°2 2°8 5°6 5:0 10°0
Albite 23°6 24-6 27°8 38-3 | 28:°8
Anorthite Bier 33°6 31°4 28-1 25°6
Diopside 7°4 8-7 09 2°2 or
Hypersthene 25°7 14°9 10:2 7:6 8-6
Magnetite 4:4 3°9 Biz 3:0 4°4
Ilmenite I°5 14 Ter 0:9 I°4
Apatite _ 073 0°3 0°3 0°3
i
The norms are arranged in the same order as the analyses in Table III. The symbols of the rocks in
the American Quantitative Classification are as follows:
I. (11) UI 5 4 Ms
2. II 4 (5) 4 (4) 5
A. “TT 4 (3) 4 4”
B. (1) 4" 3 (4) 5
(Ce II 4” a 4
The mineralogical variations corresponding to the above-described chemical
variations are shown from left to right in the table of norms (‘Table IV) by the increasing
free silica, increasing orthoclase, increasing ratio of albite to anorthite, with a concomi-
tant decrease in the amount of pyroxenes. The norms also illustrate the curious fact,
which was also pointed out in a former paper (Tyrrell, op. cit. supra, p. 311), that
andesites which show no visible quartz may nevertheless contain up to 15 per cent. of
free silica. They must therefore be derived from magmas which, under plutonic
conditions, and with a little differentiation in the direction of further separation of
mafic minerals, would give rise to such rocks as tonalite and quartz-diorite, namely, the
ROCK SPECIMENS 197
plutonic types which occur most frequently in the cores of fold-mountain ranges such
as the Andes in association with andesite lavas. This fact is worth emphasizing because
andesites are frequently thought of as the volcanic representatives of the diorites only.
CONCLUSIONS.
The geology of the South Sandwich Islands, and its bearing on the disputed question
of the tectonics of the “South Antillean Arc”’ of Suess, is discussed on p. 154 of this
Report. The writer has also recently discussed the question in his paper on the petro-
graphy and geology of South Georgia,! in which he states that : “‘ If Suess’s homology of
the Southern Antillean loop with that of the Caribbean Antilles were complete, the
Andean type of volcano erupting andesitic lavas, and batholithic masses of the typical
Cordilleran andendiorites and granodiorites in the cores of the mountain chains, should
be present. They are, however, entirely wanting, with the possible exception of the
South Sandwich Islands, about which the geological information is very scanty”’. The
typical Andean lavas described in this Report therefore go far to support Suess’s view of
the tectonic relations of the “Southern Antilles”. The writer has also pointed out (op.
cit. supra, p. 53) that the South Sandwich Islands, according to O. Pratje’s map,? are
situated on an arcuate ridge which, to the east, is followed by a profound but narrow
deep, and that, in its turn, by another narrow submarine ridge, both of which run
parallel to the are of the South Sandwich Islands. Hence in all probability we have here
two parallel arcs of folding separated by a deep. ‘These facts, which are supported by the
statement in this Report (p. 154) that the echo soundings taken during the Expedition
show conclusively that most of the submerged portions of the South Antillean Are can
still be traced in the relief of the sea bottom, therefore seem to indicate an enormous
protrusion of circum-Pacific tectonic structures, accompanied by circum-Pacific lava
types, for 1500 miles into the heart of the alien tectonic region of the Southern Atlantic
Ocean, conditions which are found nowhere else in the whole vast extent of the Atlantic
Ocean except in the Caribbean region.
1 * Quest’ Expedition Report, British Museum (Nat. Hist.), chapter 11 (1930). See especially pp. 51-4.
> O. Pratje, ‘‘ Beitrag zur Bodengestaltung des Siidatlantischen Ozeans”’, Cenir. f. Min. Abt. B, pp. 129-
52, Map, p. 132 (1928).
ee oil? mond moe bnslei sd3 io Ms sq Istinso ofT ix .gt
_(wogsv bar rasase Jo buols ot wnolotl a pal m ss janteib °sps gaimsd
ad nso ano lt to qo? ont of eorlossr doisiw saeatt goo! sit to be adit
ytatbiedye @xuy esqole rewol odi ao esrotsg dash ont to smo@ .n99e
-wone %o biovsbh bie orinw ai bauorysi0l srt ct usstslg sd3 .eiste20
ule tesW 2: Hol aris nO 424 ant soit ages birelet oli Io heT ss por
bas Sane oot et bryorg wrote? nl .eolins O-s santetb | ERE Botteed
teow sail oil lin csi Sleacd ont | si
Wi .
PREY), fA
\
cae
a N, Marshall phot.
Fig. 3. sf q
ry 7 : _
ZAVODOVSKI ISLAND :
: “ i n Ay ‘
ee .. ie of an Te ~ SS i : Ye i _ ae
PLATE XIII
Zavodovski Island (p. 158)
Fig. 1. The central part of the island seen from the E: the summit
bearing 242°, distant 2-2 miles. Below the cloud of steam and vapour,
the end of the long fissure which reaches to the top of the cone can be
seen. Some of the dark patches on the lower slopes are subsidiary
craters; the plateau in the foreground is warm and devoid of snow.
Fig. 2. Part of the island seen from the SSE. On the left is West Bluff,
bearing 343°, distant 2:6 miles. In the foreground is the southern end
of the basalt plateau, with the steep western cliffs seen on the left. Note
that snow can only lie on the eastern side of the cone.
Fig. 3. Part of the island seen from the W. West Bluff is in the fore-
ground to the left of the middle, bearing 143° and distant 5 cables. Above
the headland is the opening of the main crater, with clouds of steam and
sulphurous vapour rising. On the hill-side to the right a fumarole can be
seen.
DESCOVERY, REPORTS, VOL. III , PLATE XIII
ZAVODOVSKI ISLAND
- ree nie) ee LJ —
fogss spay OnE
SWOHLVS 4) SENIONNOS
qaez Ut szystey
.
(INWISLE AOMSH'T
sig er
(S¢64 Pen. Ses
- aay
4
et
|
|
iE:
3
gine
——— pastel wold bas-basiel
ree ™
2 SE Sanh
: _ 7 = ;
Fo Ey I in tn PO Gy MC ea te EID a
Cogss MUG TINEA
SWOHiwW3s Ҥ SONIONNOS
qeag Ue sag Frey
(INV TISI 1OMOSLA
o. ae ial
Df ‘
Ply uindaay
Sex 08
I vie .
w + +z axsao 9 DY
£s. 2
Sey
ts ce
(qyPloone
- UOSPOH WN
PLATE “X1TV.
Charts of Visokoi Island and Leskov Island
DOIIp) OIF SAM O13 epnytsuoy —z1
Q08's9 Fors Yoenyon Oogel spaIG TONyON
SWOHiIVW4A N!' SONIGNNOS SWOHIV4 Ni SONIGNNOS
420g ur syy sey qeayq ut s7y3 rap
GANW'ISIT AOMSHT Q(NW'ISI IOMOSIA
(47?) 000€
+ UOSPOH AW
IF 48 2
i
y
SX
}
ad jor
ja adury
REeE 0c a6 Wat #
‘TH TOA ‘SLHOdaHU AUDAOOSIGA
Vy Ma | A )
F ij
O1 .G) DORA VE 2
j i) - " f
i t i
ee ofr ak rc 1
{ i Led | i y + i
oC By
{ { ai 1S A a Pi 9G i
=| ty f4 os ; a4
4 (ro ith G 10 GHE GM St so in tO
‘
. > +.
Sus g CES oe) Ti 3G * 2 OG 7th
z yt > be
AEM | WA a ri : i ? “ee
fi ' e yy Cc
ea ne, bye (rk , |
i) 4 TA ta . 4
fAtrer Aa
BV 4 -
)
; , |
: ‘ \ ,
;
.
.
: iene |
ew) hue |
br ae , om o
Pa), a 4 han nt F ?
gel ed a
“PLATE XV
Leskoy Island (p. 161)
Fig. 1. The conical rock at the south-east corner of the island seen from
the WSW: the summit of the rock bearing 065°, distant 5 cables. The
rock is 375 ft. high and is formed of columnar basalt.
Visokoi Island (p. 162)
Fig. 2. Part of the island seen from the E. Penguin Point is to the right
of the centre and is the site of a large penguin rookery; it bears 250°,
distant 6 cables. On the right the surface of the glacier is much blackened
by dust and debris.
Fig. 3. Glacier face on the south-eastern side of the island, showing
ridges and pinnacles of ice probably caused by radiation from dust
particles.
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. III PIVAGIE, XV
E. H. Marshall & A. J. Clowes phot.
Bigaeas
LESKOV AND VISOKOI ISLANDS
SWOHIVE 4! SeNIGHNDS
qweg wm eq@iey
SCN IST SVNGATINYVO
*
cy
ie
ed
S
4
eS
ae oes
‘Se;
© sykaaane ae
PLATE XVi
Chart of Candlemas Islands
ji =i 3 ae 2 | l
o0s'tg 2TOIG TOInqonL
SWOHIVW4S N' SONIGNNOS
qaoq ut syqdray
SANV'IST SVINHTANV)
“te LES9 inges SS $9
99 9L G Ne eer
z9 8&9 ‘9
£9 a oh
we. $2 Fe %
\
\
;
NOTLVOTQNIA
Rid PISSOLD
___ (son
t? yu 200
“TAX WLW Td ' ‘ : — . “TH TOA ‘SLHOdAU ANMAOOSIG
an -
NN Op eee ee ee
j 3
1.0 f ~
2° wee 7 Ppa —
2 ¥ € f = e
wire 93 Ria ? ;
| 1 ney 7
£ LY i . « _
j 2 a of er t 7
ms if rm € { .
J, Sieeeel 1
fe . mi 1 J
Lietel o ‘alate % ‘
fi l iaia :
1 .<}) DAE POU FE
i - J .
WLM Sat MOT sos hos Wy
i ; io Dt
1 4 + aso ial RK
moo Momw at SM 282) 86 DODNTPITt
£
PLATE XVII
Candlemas Island (p. 168)
Fig. 1. The island seen from the NW at a distance of about 5 miles.
At the back are seen the high glaciated summits of the south-eastern part
of the island; in front the north-eastern basaltic plateau with its active
volcanic cone.
Fig. 2. The rocks in Nelson Strait seen from the N, distant 8 cables. On
the left is Cook Rock; Trousers Rock, showing an arch, is in the centre ;
on the right is Low Point, Vindication Island.
Fig. 3. Rocks of columnar basalt on the shores of Tow Bay.
Vindication Island (p. 170)
Fig. 4. Crosscut Point seen from the NNE: the point bearing 205°,
distant 1 mile. The projecting points on the headland are of hard rock,
intruded as dykes in the softer tuffs which compose the greater part of
the island.
SGNV1ISI NOILVOIGNIA GNV SVNYIGNVO
y0yd ASDA OA Q 1PYSMOYN "HA
fre iia. ~-
IIAX @LV'Id III ‘IOA ‘SLUOddauY AUAAOOSIAG
:
4
ee =
pets
— i we ae
ee
)
o oe ae ae he
| re
Ve ae
:
nied sve ir boxze tina ead 2
+0 wey nen ; : se
sa ) bh SSEBIGRD oy
1
re
3Si{tARteih n 1592 iis 9 oka ;
wed str MEY S oS Mette
i 1 PF ‘ '
° ; ’ i
;
é
«
;
!
_ ’ ANID VEIN GD if rcs NDS
é
b #
;
PLATE XVIII
Candlemas Island (cont.)
Fig. 1. Part of the south-eastern side of the island near Shrove Point,
seen from the NE, distant 4 cables. Showing glacier breaking away at
the water’s edge.
Fig. 2. Shrove Point with its covering of glacier seen on the right. In
the distance is Vindication Island, its northern (right-hand) point bear-
ing 280°.
Vindication Island (cont.)
Fig. 3. The island seen from the E, the summit bearing 295°, distant
24 miles. On the left are Castor and Pollux Rocks and Knob Point; Low
Point is on the right.
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. III PAG AVIE XOVALT
E. H. Marshall phot.
Fig. 3.
CANDLEMAS AND VINDICATION ISLANDS
|
5
7 rae a - 7 7 - a = _ :
Re EEA Od PS Se Re ee
— “a a 7 a ¥ + - i — 7 7 » 7 a ¥
yee hi oy ow *- ~ .
e ad 7 . Peale : " Te ; | er es 7 > oz i a — ;
_ oe
ee *.
* _
* =e
ay ia *
j SG).
~s
4
Pal
eh
28
mE
ee
ee
x 4
aol
PLATE XIX
Chart of Saunders Island.
2 : ; ; ‘
|
YSTMUD SIE) MOIS |S9M SZ OG, 1Fu0'T 3 Be 6 08 le ce ee we 8
1 ail i aie iat I l 1 die i ais ats i 1 it L
,OS s
: oS SS:
Sen eg 69 99 09 99 85/4 ‘ES on
> : \e a6:
(5788) 0 4, igor
neSoat y : ze
a SS 3 19 S58)
hig Sy, 6
; eB
» 92
As B oF “e |
| es ;
/6t ;
rea Ie
> es
20 Mnys
€sy Le
: 9
SEED tz
5 ze
2 \
z et
a Ni
A, oz\.
3 \
/8v : ;
ov9a Z a
ISEYD!W AW E ‘
sr |
a
“ee
) ze
ad Soo) ee
: 4 Jee Lt
. : ee oLQ
E os
td
za
Kreyooy ives
umbuag aS
» zi
94 | N :
$ : |
“3 ras es E
F oe :
oe sy SIO GOLT Uy ae j Bs
Tz/ 61 ‘ og ee y :
pe ei :
ere i ogee Knwosy, sypang i
61 | sy
. BR ff ae
\ »
\ . . 2 ;
‘Sb ee . coe Wh FE ae a
x . e y IW ey hoe 4 a fh i
mie AN ‘
\oz \ + a Ye, fe SWOHLV4 4! SONIGNNOS
7 = f *
ae ey... 61) qoag ut 894910}
x or
le
ot 9
is oz uz og a 42
6% Le 4t 1a 9% 9 FE CN "ISI SAUHANAVS
ye ga Gz TBE Ge) 9%) 198) Se) nes) OR) 6) RENEE V
I a |
0% te a4 ns te $8 OZ, iz 22 04 ; Ae AR 1G 5 7 i
XIX WLW 1d
basket ad¥ 30 yrotnomorq otstzes
boeogz:
oif3 to deigis ort 03
=<
16 fae 10 bum otrsaloy ai barrio ,
p:arrsiail
aeons suntan yd Siclsue 2)
ad
oe & -
a ‘ =
is
‘ ;
7
. & ae —
PLATE XX
Saunders Island (p. 172)
Fig. 1. The active volcano of Mt Michael, seen from Cordelia Bay: the
summit bearing 250°, distant 24 miles.
Fig. 2. The southern side of the eastern promontory of the island,
showing a section of a crater, formed in volcanic mud or ash and exposed
by a fall of the cliff. View taken from the SE, the peak to the right of the
crater bearing 310°, distant 7 cables.
Fig. 3. A nearer view of this section of a crater, distant 3} cables, show-
ing the radial grooves formed on its surface by melting snow.
DISCOVERY
REPORTS, VOL. III
SAUNDERS
ISLAND
PLATE XX
PLATE) XX
Saunders Island (cont.)
Fig. 1. Distant view of the island from the N. On the left the bare hills
forming the south-eastern promontory: on the right the glaciated cone
of Mt Michael. The Brothers Rocks, seen opposite the left-hand ter-
mination of the glacier, bearing 190°, distant 2 miles.
Fig. 2. A large crater, apparently extinct, seen across the southern slopes
of Mt Michael at a distance of about 9 cables. In Fig. 1 this crater lies
behind the Brothers Rocks.
Fig. 3. A nearer view of the bare hills on the left of Fig. 1, taken from
the NE. These hills are formed of volcanic mud or ash; owing to their
warmth snow is rapidly melted and has scored deep runnels and ravines
in their surface.
Fig. 4. Nattriss Point, at the south-eastern end of the island, taken from
the N. This point, seen also on the extreme left of Fig. 1, stands on a
platform of columnar basalt, and bears 180°, distant 5 cables.
Fig. 5. A small mound of warm mud protruding through the glacier at
a point to the west of the bisected crater shown in Pl. XX, fig. 2. The
melting snow has carried runnels of mud towards the sea over the surface
of the glacier. View taken from the ESE at a distance of about half a
mile.
GNV'ISI SYAQGNNVS
IXX OLV1d III “IOA ‘SLUOdaY AUAAOOSIG
Stage 202% 8 ees
4
IIZK ATA
baslal ugstnoM to s1sd9D
ao
t
rf
2 =
?
|
a
a
a
2
|
=
2
D
=
Natural Seale ga 556
Heights in Fert
SOUMODINGS in FATHOMS
MONTAGU 18
PLATE XXII
Chart of Montagu Island
AT YOTMUBAIH DOL 989M 0% 5G7 apnzguey
000'se r
SOF PTPPGS TOLrqPON
SWOH1v4 §! SONIGNNGS
aay UT szyFIey
icons Tet GNW IST NOVLINOW
GIO!) 4
keg suphag
oosy
epuyjag yn; -
==
AL |
ny eit
Ss
————=
QE
——-
SEF glee)
vi
1B:
! ex ta & 6 ?
Bor S708 Sb py 19 4 :
Sat 9 8S 9¢ on
slits . PLATE XXU i
‘
ae a7 K 38
{avr aq) bielal es
rien
1p Oey
eee:
PLATE XXIII
Montagu Island (p. 174)
Fig. 1. The conical hill, 1660 ft. high, at the south-east corner of the
island: the summit bearing 000°, distant 1-3 miles. There are indications
at several points that this promontory still retains some of its volcanic
heat.
Fig. 2. The north-eastern end of the island, seen from the NNW at a
distance of 6 cables, showing rock exposures and a glacier falling in
broken masses of ice to the sea-level.
Fig. 3. Part of the northern side of the island, viewed from the N and
distant 5 cables, showing cliffs and a hanging glacier.
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. III IPILYN ANID, DOI
E. H. Marshall phot.
Fig. 3.
MONTAGU ISLAND
.. ie ey —
- syngas ry
P - My * anergy ”
“ . a ee * oo
PX | pous § ; - + Vetere
TerKareD / -Y | ms y ee" ot 7 | pid ne i
C™/ as * oy A *
oF es et a * De
.t : y
4? at i
iy rL we » ;
5 +
[ —
‘ Sty
a f
y gd
a
? fea
jae al 7
. As
+ a 7
Z ; pe
Ne Oe eee eo i asellltaadbtnet
IXX ATAII
?
basil loteinl Yo sed)
4
3
fs
SS ee
+
es
~*~ < 1
ns : 4 2 s a - i 7
¥, PN METeg ¢ \ ? o :
y ; ‘. comreiee ad a : :
e ) = " b 4
. a? ” “=
- s* ii hand '¢
© . “”
a -
o oy 8 i bse
4 = a _ at Pe
Le “7 ai :
< — qo” 7< . Pa = 6 }
mee SW Oe pe ein er ar cree ie we we oe or
gu :
n®
-
coe speg owas
; ; snovive * ¢omoNnos
\ \ ; nang ee emB Cay
E , ; = ae
~ : ae 7 |) =
es
PLATE XXIV.
Chart of Bristol Island.
9% 4
ee mn 2 ee oe
, AX DLW 1d
58.98
| eee eS ee ek ee a
99 2 OL 26. on 891 PE oye
Ss
Lz LE of og 82
> OE Ny
=< betes oe oe Sz Ie uth,
(s0r)006 ~&
~
:
0096 (70) /
Aejusea aw H
1 OF,
es"
* OO9I'Re)
O01 = apoog Ye.rremAy
SWOHLY4 “! SONIGNNOS
eq UL sTysTOH
GNW ISL 'TO.LSIdd
PLATE XXV
Bristol Island (p. 176)
Fig. 1. The north-eastern side of the island seen from the NNW,
showing heavy glaciation. Glacier Bluff is on the extreme left. The
conical hill on the left is 1200 ft. high and bears 150°, distant 34 miles.
Fig. 2. Part of the north-western side of the island. Sunlight and shade
on the glacier.
Fig. 3. The whole island seen from the N by E, distant 6 miles.
Fig. 4. The outlying rocks on the western side of the island, seen from
the W. On the right Freezeland Peak bearing 095°, distant 1-4 miles.
To the left of the centre Wilson Rock, with the summit of Grindle Rock
seen above it. On the extreme left the western point of Bristol.
GNV‘1ISI IOLSIU4d
“youd ]jPYSADN ‘Hd
"2 BUT "1 BI
III “IOA ‘SLUOdaY AUYAAOOSIG
AXX ULV Id
= ee Sa | is —— a
oa FP “
ae
m)
-
a
>
e
-~rn
elal Iq
= cf
be ; ‘ ner é
‘ a s—< ’ - e
oil) 54 i ot x £
ony 6 eae | us) I
10. : i t fis! orlt 9d
he dates 2 -
Sry OF .¥ i JV é i
aight si 4 rot I th ran : 156 *
20 TH S033 174 ’ / nn 7760 ii 3%
= e fk -.:
=IB3d Feces ord 3% £18 rl I it x {
t q } - fo ae ? rt ¥
dosid To bseaqntos ‘ ; fe 1 2901 Br i =. eS1cisD I fg odo
1 Vi bolts D 1 9ibe Pons,
J ' 4 £ ,
2 t : if | , ,
{ ; 7 té ) 1 f Tits i
sg 1s 1
) &t SIE i is! (erwoiley
PLATE XXVI
Bristol Island (cont.)
Fig. 1. Freezeland Peak, the land sighted by Cook when he discovered
the South Sandwich Group in 1775. The rock is seen from the N, the
summit bearing 165°, distant 7 cables. The great pillar on the right,
goo ft. high, is thought to be of sedimentary rock, while the lesser peak
on the left is possibly metamorphic.
Fig. 2. Another view of Freezeland Peak, seen from the SW, with the
summit bearing 045°, distant 54 cables. The slopes of talus on this rock
are the resort of large numbers of penguins. Wilson Rock and part-of
Grindle Rock are seen in the background.
Fig. 3. Wilson Rock, 500 ft. high, seen from the SW, the summit bear-
ing 060°, distant 54 cables. This rock is entirely composed of black
columnar basalt.
Fig. 4. Grindle Rock, 7oo ft. high, seen from the W, the summit bearing
ogo°, distant 3 cables. The rock is mainly composed of the reddish and
yellowish tuffs which are a characteristic feature of most of the islands.
GNV1ISI IOLSIY&@ THO SHOOU
“oyd [JBYSAD IN “H “AL
“2
IAXX ALVId III “IOA ‘SLUYOdaY AUAZAOOSIG
SWOH iva": SOMIANNOS
qeeg Bt equdiay
dNOUD ATIOHL NYAHLAOS |
ms WE
¢ yes, 295 = = gor
ka eat anwrae ae ow ies 42 _
= : a Pa dp rr + sor
J aener “=. seis ox
; a : aos piaee Ss aA ?
a tp ZO, , Mets
a «4 ee OS
: be pe IRON
OF + or Fes ys I
as Oe, ie
= wks (eS? ey af
em Yor ge nee -
ae bos rez ‘tee
« 18 we is
28} woe a sce moll ©
Ex
ad ; oe zoe Z gon
) a # oo Ty TIVaUon a ‘
i ur OS aes a os : bo
bord < -O8ee
scope 2 ris orn? WE - oo ~ es SSe PTL : .
- , > yo @2 TONG ae
> Wtronsw=y Sas oa pelt =
75% wp tee oe me ee ead
< ‘a “ 3 a
u 4 vz yi, : S ad a ad mm fee Oe ee 2 : a
- GZ : er a in
: - “ wy. +h. g . o 3,2 ad Dey or
Ps M5. “ap, Sal oe 8 ay
oy i 5 r = sv eercs) peek eer
: P . re a os é “ yoo qo gi x
; “ — ay ie io (® re :
os: 7 ow. on ae . os ok is rae HP Dret! ceapery rad a {
ee : me REM 9 te as ar gx ks se
2 4 NAS OWNS ORI 'TISA pee a Er es os
'
we ; ra ‘ORs a we om pt stir
t iv ay wr Sc oe wee
: : ; atl for
a me me zit H
id owe at M8 ore » .
S BS TE ae 3: ce tee SH ee fe
te
PLATE XXVII
Chart of the Southern Thule Group.
/{ Tovees a) WorF 489M 01/,,2 epugiduo7y
(ELEN @To0sS (TPOLTTTONT
SWOHIW4d NI SONIGNNOS
qaoq ut sqyusioy
daOWD ATOH.L NYdHinos
Le Or ELE 9 EX pte EZ SF ee
Sy.
T TICUVUOW jes
1 7
+~OEEZ
uassetW i
yo WTAH L
Yysvaew o20y at
mor
sr
TIT N@SOVHSONTTUSE 0000000000 jipeee nt
&r zoe
ie ee, ee ee) asec:
ob Sti
901 on *
on *: z @
£6 16 28 22 coroy se oes tS
"“TIAWY WWW s+ SG ng eR
PLATE 3 1%
CHPraLlODIs Cus
By C. C. John, M.A.
(Plates XX XIII-XXXVIII, text-figs. 1-7)
INTRODUCTION
HE genus Cephalodiscus was founded on the material dredged by the ‘Challenger’
Tin 1876 from the Straits of Magellan. It was first thought to be a compound
Ascidian and later referred to the Polyzoa. In 1887 its structure was satisfactorily
worked out by M’Intosh and Harmer (1887) who assigned it to the phylum Entero-
pneusta.
Although C. dodecalophus is the first recorded species, Ridewood (1921) has shown
that thirteen pieces of C. densus were dredged by the ‘ Challenger’ in 1874 at Kerguelen
Island. These were at first supposed to be Monaxonid sponges and later regarded as
a kind of hydrozoan allied to Spongicola fistularis. 'They were correctly identified only
in 1919 and described by Ridewood in 1921. Material of C. nigrescens had been obtained
as far back as 1841 or 1842 by the ‘Erebus’ and ‘'Terror’, but remained unidentified
until Ridewood described it in 1912.
Under these circumstances C. dodecalophus remained the sole representative of the
genus until 1903, when Andersson (1907) announced the rediscovery of Cephalodiscus
by the Swedish South-Polar Expedition. The Siboga report published by Harmer in
1go5 added three new species. In the meantime Masterman and Schepotieff devoted
several papers to the further description of the Challenger material. ‘The latter also
described an interesting new species, C. indicus, from Ceylon.
Lankester (1905) described a new species, C. nigrescens, from the Discovery material
of the 1901-1904 Expedition. In 1906 Ridewood described C. gilchristi from South
Africa and in 1907 gave an account (1907 b) of the two species which had been dredged
by the Discovery Expedition of 1901-1904. Among the collections of the “Scottish
National Antarctic Expedition” there were some colonies of C. nigrescens, C. hodgsont,
C. solidus and C. agglutinans which were described by Harmer and Ridewood (1913).
Finally when Ridewood (1918 a) published his reports on Cephalodiscus of the ‘Terra
Nova Expedition, he gave a complete synopsis of all the species then known. Before
that time it was found necessary to break up the genus into three sub-genera. ‘Io these
I have found it necessary to add one more sub-genus Acoelothecia to accommodate one
of the new species, C. kempi, of the present collection.
Up to now, sixteen species have been described, including those which are regarded
as doubtful forms, and the present Expedition adds two more new species to the list.
The material of Cephalodiscus collected during the Discovery Investigations occupies
twenty-two jars. Although large quantities were collected from some stations, the yield
I-2
226 DISCOVERY REPORTS
from others was comparatively poor, consisting of small pieces preserved in tubes.
C. nigrescens and C. kempi were dredged in large quantities, but C. fumosus is represented
by one piece and the collection of C. densus and C. hodgsoni is small. When the zooids
had been liberated from the coenoecium and fixed in Bouin’s fluid, the results were good.
But when entire colonies were fixed and preserved, the zooids are not satisfactory for
sectioning, for as the colonies were put into the fixing media, the zooids rushed to the
ostia and blocked the passages, thus preventing the entrance of the fixing fluid.
Following the Station List already published, the stations of R.R.S. ‘Discovery’
are denoted by plain numbers and those of R.S.5S. ‘William Scoresby’ are distinguished
by the prefix WS. The symbols used for nets, apparatus, etc., are as follows:
DLH. Large dredge. Heavy pattern, 4 ft. in length (1-2 m.).
Fi. Horizontal.
N 7-T. Net with mesh of 7 mm. (0:28 in.) attached to back of trawl.
N 200. 2m. tow-net. Mouth circular, 2 m. in diameter (6-6 ft.); mesh graded, at cod-end 4 mm.
(0-16 in.).
NRL. Large rectangular net. Frame 8 ft. long and 2} ft. wide (2:45 m. x 0-7 m.), with bag of
> In. mesh (1275 mm.).
OTC. Commercial otter trawl. Head rope 80 ft. long (24-5 m.); mesh at cod-end 1} in. (3-8 cm.).
OTL. Large otter trawl. Head rope 40 ft. long (12:2 m.); mesh at cod-end 1} in. (3:2 cm.).
The following tables give the geographical and bathymetrical distributions:
Geographical distribution
Name of species Place Latitude
Off South Georgia
Off South Orkneys
Palmer Archipelago
54°-64° S
C. hodgsoni
C. nigrescens Palmer Archipelago 64° 5S
C. densus South Atlantic Ocean (station 82) 32 -64° 5
| Palmer Archipelago
C. fumosus Off Cape Bowles 61° S
Clarence Island
C. kempi Off South Georgia 49-53 9
Between Falkland Islands and South America
It is interesting to note that all the species of Cephalodiscus except C. indicus, C. levin-
sem, C. gracilis, C. sibogae, C. evansi and C. gilchristi have been obtained from the
Southern Ocean between latitudes 49° and 78° S and of these C. hodgsoni, C. solidus,
C. densus, and C. mgrescens have been recorded within the Antarctic Circle by previous
expeditions. The greater part of the present collection was obtained from the neigh-
bourhood of Palmer Archipelago, Falkland Islands and South Georgia lying between
latitudes 49° and 64° S. Only one broken piece of C. densus is from station 82 (South
Atlantic Ocean, 32° S).
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 227
Bathymetrical distribution
| Number of |
Name of species | Depth | Number of specimens Stitions
| |
C. hodgsoni 93-130m. | 10 | 4
259 m. I
| 160-330 m. 1 (fragmentary)
C. nigrescens 93-130 m. | Numerous I
315 m. I
C. densus 75 (-0) m. I 3
140-144 m. I
93-130m. | 2
C. fumosus 342 m. 2 (including a small fragment) I
C. kempi 75-74. m. | 2 (Form B) II
79 m. t (Form B)
82 m. 4 (Form B)
118 m. 1 (Form B)
146-145 m. | Numerous (Form B)
219-133 m. | 7 (Form B)
200-236m. | 1 (Form A)
245 m. 4 (Form A)
40I-41rm. | Numerous (Form A) |
I take this opportunity of offering my thanks to Professor E. W. MacBride, F.R.S.,
for getting the materials on his personal responsibility, and for the facilities he afforded
me for carrying on this investigation in the Huxley Laboratory under his guidance and
supervision; to Dr Stanley Kemp for having entrusted me with the drawing up of the
report on Cephalodiscus; to Mr H. R. Hewer for suggesting names for the new species
and other technical advice; and to Sir Sidney Harmer, K.B.E., F.R.S., for the trouble
he took in revising the original manuscripts and for suggesting corrections and improve-
ments which make this paper acceptable for publication.
So TEMALIC. ACCOUNT
DIAGNOSIS OF THE SPECIES OF CEPHALODISCUS
The most important specific structure is the coenoecium. The classification into
sub-genera is based entirely on the nature of colony formation. Harmer (1905, p. 4)
considers the length of the body and stalk of the zooids as satisfactory specific characters,
but measurement of the zooids of some species does not support this. In C. hodgsoni
the length of the zooids varies from 2 to 32 mm. and that of the stalk from 4 to ro mm.
In C. densus, though normal zooids measure 4 to 7mm., I have obtained giant zooids
Ir to 14 mm. long, with a stalk which varies in length from 25 to 40 mm. The number
of arms can be used as a specific character, as this is constant for each species except
C. hodgsoni in which there may be ro, 11 or 12. The number of buds produced can to a
certain extent aid in describing the different species. In some species like C. fumosus
buds are produced profusely, while in others like C. hodgsoni the number of buds is
only three to five. I doubt whether the production of buds is confined to a definite
228 DISCOVERY REPORTS
season. Specimens of the same species dredged at different times of the year show
uniformity in the number of buds produced and this fact may be sufficient evidence to
show that buds are produced all the year round. Living as they do in the cold waters
of the Antarctic Seas, where submarine conditions are similar throughout the year, it
is not to be expected that the seasons could have much influence on budding. We might
expect to find indications of seasonal changes on the forms from shallower waters such
as C. indicus from the coast of Ceylon, C. levinseni from the coast of Japan or C. gilchristi
from the South African coast, where the changes are very marked; but reports on these
do not mention what influence seasons have on budding. The presence or absence of
end-bulbs on the arms, and sometimes (e.g. C. nigrescens and C. fumosus) the presence
of dark lines along the axes of the arms are also characters which help identification.
Sub-genus Demiothecia
Cephalodiscus hodgsoni, Ridewood. (Pl. XX XIII, figs. 1-5.)
C. hodgsoni, Ridewood, 1907 b.
C. inaequatus (Andersson), 1907.
Diacnosis. Irregularly branched colony without cross bars between branches. Width
of branch excluding spines usually 4 to 6 mm.; some basal stems g mm. Cavity of
coenoecium continuous, the smooth inner lining sometimes traversed by solid bars.
Zooids and buds occupy the cavity in common. Older parts of the coenoecium deep
amber colour. Ostia numerous, irregularly placed, funnel-shaped and each with two to
five simple or forked spines. Zooids: length of a fairly extended zooid from free end of
arms to end of body 2 to 3:2 mm. Colour of preserved zooids, reddish or pale brown.
Arms, five or six pairs. Axes of each arm have an end-swelling, with refractive beads.
Male and female zooids and hermaphrodites occur in the same colony. Buds, two,
three or four to each zooid.
Materia. The material of C. hodgsoni was obtained from the following stations:
St. 167. 20. ii. 27. Off Signy Island, South Orkneys, 60° 50’ 30” S, 46° 15’ 00” W. Gear OTL.
244-344 m. One specimen.
St. 187. 18. iii. 27. Neumayr Channel, Palmer Archipelago, 64° 48’ 30” S, 63° 31’ 30” W. Gear
DLH. 259 m. One specimen.
St. 190. 24. iii. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago, 64° 56’ 00” 5S, 65° 35’ 00” W. Gear
DLH and NRL. 93-126 m. ‘Twelve specimens.
St. WS 18. 26. x1. 26. 54°07’ 00" S, 36° 23’ 00” W. Gear OTL. 160-330 m. Small fragment.
Stations 167 and 187 yielded only two small pieces of dead colonies. Inhabited
colonies, dredged from station 190, consisted of twelve fragments, which were labelled
in two bottles, owing to differences in the spines. The dimensions of entire colonies
given by Ridewood (1907 3, p. 50), show that these are only broken bits of large colonies.
The basal attachment is found in only one possibly entire colony.
The difference between two distinct types of colonies obtained from station 190 is
shown in Pl. XXXIII, figs. 1 and 2. Careful study of their structure shows that the
thickness of the coenoecium, the number of spines and the short branches on the colony
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT ; 229
cause these differences. Between these distinct forms there are colonies which are difficult
to assign to either type. The existence of such intermediate forms proves that the external
differences are the result of the amount of coenoecial material secreted by the animal.
The coenoecium and spines are formed by the secretion of the coenoecial substance,
laid down in thin lamellae. Increase in size is brought about by the deposition of lamellae
over existing layers. Owing to differences in nutrition, and other causes, the amount
of coenoecial substance secreted varies and this may account for differences which are
observed between colonies dredged from different places.
In the absence of zooids in the colonies obtained from stations 167 and 187, the
structure of the coenoecium is the only evidence that these colonies are modified forms
of C. hodgsoni. 'The colour of the
coenoecium, the thickness and length
of spines and the disposition of short
branches are sufficient differences to
separate them from Forms A and B
(see below).
Owing to subtle variations in the
coenoecium of C. hodgsoni any attempt
to give a comprehensive account of the
structure may prove to be unsatisfac-
tory. Generalization is rendered difficult
by intermediate forms between the ex-
treme types; but since the differences
are only due tothe amount of coenoecial
substance secreted by the colony they
do not affect the diagnostic character
of the coenoecium as a whole.
The colony is formed of a main stem
which has many lateral branches. The
stem and branches are hollow and the Fig. 1. C. hodgsoni showing the disposition in form A of
continuous cavity opens externally by ostia and spines onashort lateral branch. 0, ostium; c, cavity
numerous ostia. The sides of the lateral °f cocnoecium.
branches and the edges of the ostia bear varying number of spines. These characters are
constant in all the forms, and variations occur only in the disposition of the lateral
branches, the spines, the number of ostia and the colour of the colony. Ridewood (1918 a,
p. 51) defined two forms based on these variations, which he termed Forms A and B
respectively. The present account follows the same line with a few new observations.
Form A(P1.X XXIII, fig. 1). This form is represented only bya few small pieces, mostly
of a rich amber colour. The thickness of the coenoecium and width of the cavity varies
between different parts. At the base, the cavity is small and circular with a diameter of
1°75 mm. and the coenoecium is about 1-5 mm. in thickness. Farther up, the cavity
gradually widens and the walls become thinner. Towards the tips of the lateral branches
230 DISCOVERY REPORTS
the cavity widens still more and becomes oval in section. The lining of the cavity is
smooth, but near the base of the colony there are stout bars extending at intervals across
the cavity and fused at both ends with the lining. In one specimen a few pocket-like
septa were found on the inner lining, near the base. Pocket-like septa are recorded for
the first time, but they are not homologous with the irregular partitions and pockets
found in C. dodecalophus.
At intervals along the sides of the stem and lateral branches are a number of short
branches bearing funnel-shaped ostia. A short branch bears three, four or five spines
and one or two ostia. The short branches enlarge by further branching of the spines
and the bifurcation of the ostia. In one case as many as seven ostia and fourteen spine-
tips have been counted on one small branch. The diameters of the ostia vary from 1-5
to 2:5 mm. and the number of marginal spines ranges from two to five (Fig. 1).
The short branches are not produced at regular intervals. On some branches they
are wide apart, and on others closely set. On one branch seventeen short branches
were counted in a 5 cm. length; while on another
only nine were found in the same length.
The tips of the main branches also bear ostia
which are identical with those already described.
New ostia are formed by the growth of ridges be-
tween the spines. Ridewood (1918 a) has given a
detailed account of their formation, to which I can
add nothing.
The spines are long, tapering and may be simple
or forked. The forking first appears as a knob of
spine rudiment at some point on the side, very
often near the tip of an old spine. It continues to
grow in length by the deposition of lamellae. Some
of the branches grow upwards, while others, de-
veloping horizontally, fuse with adjacent spines or
with the spines of adjacent short branches.
Form B (Pl. XXXII], fig. 2). The short branches
are much larger and the spine longer and thicker
than those of Form A. Broadly speaking it may be
said that Form B is larger in every way than Form A.
The two forms are distinguished by the spines and
short branches; apart from these there is very Fig. 2. C. hodgsoni. A short branch showing
little difference in the general structure of colonies. the relation of the spines to the ostium in
The cavity is crossed by a few horizontal bars in Form B. 0, ostium; c, cavity of coenoecium;
the basal region, but has no side pouches. , plate,of icgenoecinm connecaty sar
_ with wall of coenoecial cavity.
The short branches of Form B are at least twice
as long as those of Form A. Each branch has a main central ostium and one or two
smaller ostia at the side, a little below the main one (Fig. 2). Typically the main ostium,
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 231
which measures 3 mm. across the longer diameter, is surrounded by four long spines
and leads into a funnel-shaped cavity. Two spines project obliquely upwards from the
branch and are attached to its sides by a plate of coenoecial substance which spreads as
a web between the spines and the side of the branch. Lower there is another small ostium
which has two spines, one at each end of its long diameter.
The spines are thick and blunt but are fewer than those of Form A. While fourteen
spine-tips were counted in an ordinary short branch of Form A, not more than eight or
nine are found in Form B. They are only rarely forked. Many of the spines that are
seen projecting freely from the surface of the coenoecium are embedded for a considerable
proportion of their total length in the
coenoecial wall. ‘These embedded parts
were at one time free spines, but were
later covered by the growth of the
coenoecium, andthe support thus given
was used as skeletal structure on which
the tubes were lengthened. As the
growing tubes thus closed round the
basal parts of the spines, these con-
tinued to elongate by the deposition
of coenoecial material at their tips, so
that they kept a constant length.
The short branches are fewer than
those of Form A. In one specimen, for
a distance of 5 cm., there are only six
short branches, and in another, for a
distance of 6 cm., only eight short
branches were counted.
Besides the two distinct types of the
species already described two speci-
mens were obtained, one from station 167 and the other from station 187. Since both
were dead colonies they cannot be definitely called new forms. Although the coenoecium
shows a general structure greatly resembling that of C. hodgsoni, | do not venture to
base my conclusion entirely on the structure of the coenoecium without examining the
zooids. I shall therefore only describe the two pieces, and leave a definite identification
to the time when inhabited colonies are obtained in sufficient quantity.
Pl. XXXIII, fig. 4 is a photograph of the specimen obtained from station 167, and
Fig. 3 is a short branch of the same. The main stem produces along its sides a number
of secondary branches, and one secondary branch is connected with the main stem by
a lateral bridge. This bar suggests a resemblance to C. dodecalophus, but while the
connecting bars of C. dodecalophus (M’Intosh, 1887, p. 4) are solid, the one in this form
is traversed by the cavity of the secondary branch and main stem.
The main cavity is continuous through the colony and the coenoecial wall is 3 mm.
Dill 2
Fig. 3. C. hodgsoni. A short branch of the single specimen
obtained from St. 167. 0, ostium; c, cavity of coenoecium.
232 DISCOVERY REPORTS
in thickness at the base. It is formed of two distinct layers which can easily be separated
one from the other. The inner layer forms the smooth lining of the cavity and is
occasionally beset with horizontal bars which run across the cavity. This dark reddish-
brown layer is surrounded by a thicker outer layer of a lighter tint.
The main stem and secondary branches bear along their sides a number of short
branches each of which carries a single ostium at its tip. The ostia are almost circular
and each has four short spines at its edges. These spines, which are pointed, may be
forked.
A unique feature of this colony is the dark reddish-brown colour of the coenoectum
which by itself might serve for regarding this as a new form of C. hodgsont.
The small specimen obtained from station 187 is represented in Pl. XXXII], fig. 5.
From such a fragment it is difficult to draw any conclusions about the entire colony.
The coenoecium is yellowish white. It may perhaps be thought that the pale colour is
due to disintegration after the zooids had died or left the colony; but the experiment of
Ridewood (1918 a, p. 60) refutes this. In order to test the durability of the coenoecium
he kept a piece of colony in distilled water partly exposed to air. At the end of two years
there was no difference between this piece and the remainder, preserved in alcohol. The
pale colour of the coenoecium is therefore the natural colour of the entire colony. Short
lateral branches with ostia are borne along the sides. The ostia are like those of Forms
A and B. Each short branch has three or more ostia which may be divided. The edges
of the ostia bear four or more spines which are sometimes forked. The spines are not
more than 1-5 cm. long and are blunt.
The internal anatomy of the zooids is treated in a separate section. Points of systematic
importance are given here. A fairly extended zooid measures from 2-2 to 3:2 mm., and
possesses ten or twelve arms. The stolon arises from the basal region of the body and
carries two or four buds. The length of the stolon depends on the amount of contraction
at the time of death. A fairly extended one measures up to 6 mm. Very often the zooids
are found crowded together into certain parts of the cavity, and the stolons and buds
are entangled in such a way that they cannot be easily separated.
‘The colour of the zooids and the number of arms present an important problem which
has not been properly studied until now. Andersson (1907) stated that in C. inaequatus
the males have twelve arms and females ten. But from the collections of the ‘' Terra Nova’
Expedition Ridewood (1918 a, p. 64) showed that there is no great correlation between
number of arms and sex. One difficulty of verifying this result is that in most zooids
the gonads are immature so that their sex cannot be determined.
In the present collection I was able to distinguish: (a) colonies in which all the zooids
are crimson-brown and bear six pairs of arms, (6) colonies in which all the zooids are
pale brown and possess ten or occasionally eleven arms, (c) colonies in which both kinds
of zooids are present, though the crimson-brown ones predominate. Sections of these
two kinds show that the crimson-brown zooids are always females with well-developed
paired ovaries, and that the pale brown zooids are males. Therefore some of the colonies
are unisexual and others bisexual, although in these female zooids are the more numerous.
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 233
In his description of C. inaequatus, Andersson (1907) says that female zooids have ten
arms and males twelve. This is contrary to my observations and may strengthen the
claims of Andersson for regarding C. inaequatus as a distinct species. But since the
classification of Cephalodiscus is based mainly on the structure of the coenoecium, the
close resemblance between the coenoecium of C. inaequatus to that of C. hodgsoni makes
the line of demarcation very faint.
Sub-genus Idiothecia
Cephalodiscus nigrescens, Lankester.
Lankester, 1905.
Ridewood, 1907 6, 1918 a and 1918 b.
Gravier, 1913.
Diacnosis. Colony massive, branching; maximum width of a single branch 5 to
g mm., branches roughly cylindrical. Colour greyish, translucent. Ostia placed at the
end of peristomial tubes, but in the main stems frequently sessile. Abaxial edge of
peristome produced into a blunt lip. No spines. Each ostium leading into a tube which
ends blindly in the middle of the branch. The length of the peristomial tube depends
on the thickness of the branch. The lower part of the tube is curved downwards slightly
and shut off by a septum, so that the zooids inhabit the upper region only. Width of
the cavity of the peristomial tube 1-2 to 1-3 mm.; length 14 to 21 mm. Length of the
zooid from free end of the body to tip of arms 4 to 6mm. Preserved zooids blackish,
with six or seven pairs of arms. Each arm with two longitudinal black bands running
along the whole length of its axis. Arms without end-swellings. Male, female and
hermaphrodite zooids occurring in the same colony.
Locatity.
St. 190. 24. iil. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago, 64° 56’ 00” S, 65° 35’ 00” W. Gear
DLH and NRL. 93~-126m. Large quantities. Gear DLH. 315 m. One specimen.
It is interesting that C. nigrescens was dredged from the same station which also yielded
a good collection of C. hodgsoni. Much material was dredged from the depth 93 to
126 m. and only one piece of a branch froma depth of 315 m. No differences in structure
or colony formation were observed between specimens from the two depths.
Colonies of C. nigrescens are formed of branching cylindrical stems of varying thick-
ness. The test! is gelatinous and almost transparent in the growing regions.
The older parts are greyish brown with a maximum transverse measurement of 30 mm.
The minimum width of a branch is 5 to 9g mm. The ends of the branches are either
blunt or tapering.
1 The continuous cavity found in Demiothecia, occupied in common by the zooids, is replaced by a number
of small tubes in Jdiothecia, each occupied by one zooid and its buds. These are embedded in a common
mass of coenoecial substance. Because of this differentiation, Ridewood (1907 b, p. 21) introduced the term
“Tube” for the individual cavities occupied by the zooids (instead of cavity) and ‘“‘ Test” for the common
mass of coenoecial substance (instead of coenoecium).
234 DISCOVERY REPORTS
The tubes in which the zooids live open at regular intervals on the surface of the
colony. In the young branches the substance of the test is transparent enough to show
the disposition of these tubes. In the older parts they are reddish brown and can easily
be distinguished from the surrounding substance of the test. ‘They run from the axial
region of the branch obliquely upwards and are not more than 12 mm. long in the young
growing points. They project 3 or 4 mm. from the surface, but as growth proceeds,
more and more coenoecial substance is laid down in strata, filling the depressions and
increasing the thickness of the test so that the ostia come to lie on the surface of the
branch. Any further increase in thickness is accompanied by a corresponding increase
in the length of the tubes, so that the ostia always open on the surface and the lips alone ©
project.
A longitudinal section passing through the axis of an old stem shows the arrangement
of the tubes clearly. Their width is almost constant (1-2 to 1-3 mm.) and they are em-
bedded in the greyish brown mass of the test, forming the bulk of the colony. Near the
ostium the cavity of the tube is wider, and the part remote from the ostium is closed.
In the oldest regions, the tubes are 20 to 24 mm. long, but the lower part is closed by
a septum so that the zooids occupy only the distal half.
The lips are triangular projections of the abaxial margin of the peristomial tube, but
on some they are shifted slightly to the sides. They are 2 to 2:5 mm. long, and project
at right angles to the surface. On older branches they are shorter and thicker.
Some adjacent branches are attached to each other by the secretion of coenoecial
substance. In a few cases the tip of a branch of one colony is attached to the body of a
branch of another colony. From this it seems possible to infer that whenever adjacent
branches of colonies growing close together touch, they fuse, so that disturbing move-
ments in the water may not injure the zooids.
Each tube is occupied by one zooid and its buds, which in the preserved condition
are situated 4 or 5 mm. from the external opening. Owing to their dark colour they are
clearly visible through the test. The zooids measure 3:5 to 4-5 mm. from base of body
to tip of arms, and are deeply pigmented. he body of a full-grown zooid fits fairly
closely in the tube.
The stolon, which is 1 to 1-4 mm. long, projects from the basal part of the body and
ends in a knob on which the young buds grow. A fully formed zooid bears two to nine
buds. The smallest buds are crowded round the tip and in the preserved condition they
are very much contracted, with their stalks twisted about one another owing to the effect
of the fixative. The buds at the tip of the stolon are the youngest ones. These have a
very short body and proboscis. As the stalks lengthen during growth the buds are removed
farther away from the parent stolon. When the mother zooid is freed from the tube,
one or two buds are seen pressed to the side of the body, a few entangled among the
arms, and rarely one or two projecting beyond the tip of the arms. Such a bud is still
connected with the parent stolon by its own stalk, which has grown long enough to carry
it to its present position.
The situation of the older buds suggests the possible mode of liberation. The adult
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 235
zooid of C. nigrescens never completely leaves the tube. It moves forward towards the
ostium and may even push its body out, but the stolon always remains fixed to some
point on the inside of the tube, so that on the slightest danger the body is withdrawn
into the tube (cf. ‘‘ Observations on living zooids,”’ Andersson, 1907). This habit makes
the elongation of the stalk essential for the proper freeing of the buds. The buds when
first formed are sessile. They develop slender stalks which rapidly elongate upwards,
the buds remaining as thin flat plates. The lengthening of the stalks pushes the buds
through the narrow space between the body of the mother and the wall of the tube, and,
reaching beyond the arm-tips of the mother, the buds break away as free individuals.
Serial sections were cut of selected zooids from representative pieces of colonies, but
no new observation that is worth recording has resulted. The blackish colour of the body
is caused by a superficial layer of large brown cells. They occur in great abundance also
on the dorsal wall of the proboscis.
The proboscis, which is attached by its dorsal part to the collar region, is oval with
indented sides. It measures 1 to 1-2 mm. along the antero-posterior axis, and about
o-8 to o-g mm. from side to side. The curved red line runs horizontally between the
indentations. The region just above and below the red line is lighter, the pigmentation
being deepest on the anterior and posterior edges. The middle part of the ventral face
of the proboscis is thick and stains deeper than the rest of the body. In longitudinal
sections passing through the middle of the proboscis one or two narrow invaginations
are found. These may be tracks through which the coenoecial substance formed by the
glandular proboscis flows out.
There are usually seven pairs of arms, but zooids with six pairs are also found. They
are devoid of end-swellings with refractive beads and possess two dark longitudinal
bands along the axis. ‘Towards the tips the two bands approach one another and fuse
into one broad band.
In general, the internal structure of the zooid of C. nigrescens agrees with that of all
other species. For systematic purposes the only noteworthy difference is the position
of the heart and pericardium relative to the notochord. In C. dodecalophus the heart
and pericardium are placed at the tip of the notochord, but in C. nigrescens the pericardial
sac is attached to the notochord subterminally.
Sub-genus Orthoecus
Cephalodiscus densus, Andersson (PI. XXXV, fig. 1).
Andersson, 1907.
Ridewood, 1918 b.
C. rarus (Andersson), Ridewood, 1918 a.
Diacnosis. Colony not branching, a bulky mass or cake, composed of closely set,
vertically directed tubes of uniform diameter (1 to 1-2 m.), measuring up to 70 mm. in
height. Colourless or pale brown. Longest tubes (which are found towards the centre
of the colony) 60 to 70 mm.; those towards the edges, shorter. Ostia transverse and
236 DISCOVERY REPORTS
circular. Tubes ending blindly below, their basal parts held together by common
coenoecial substance, which is very soft and spongy and sometimes encrusted with sand
grains. Zooids greyish white, orange or brown. Length of a fairly extended zooid from
tip of arms to base of body 4 to 7 mm., length from base of arms to end of body 2 to
4mm. Arms, usually eight pairs, no end-swellings. Male, female and hermaphrodite
zooids found in the same colony. 'Testis elongate and pyriform. Buds, six to twelve on
each zooid.
Locatiry.
St. 82. 20. vi. 26. 32° 42’ 00” S, 2° 05’ 00” W. Gear N200. 75 (—o) m. One specimen.
St. 190. 24. ili. 27. Bismarck Strait, Palmer Archipelago, 64° 56’ 00" S, 65° 35’ 00” W. Gea
NRL. 126 m. Two specimens.
St. WS 82. 21. ili. 27. 54° 06’ 00” S, 57° 46’ 00” W. Gear OTC. 140-144 m. One specimen.
The coenoecium of the small piece obtained from station 82 is very much damaged
but the zooids are in an excellent state of preservation. The two specimens (broken pieces
of colonies) from station 190 are well preserved and the tubes undamaged (Pl. XX XIII,
fig. 6). ‘The common coenoecial substance and tubes of one of the specimens contain
sand grains, fragments of shells and sponge spicules.
The colonies of C. densus are formed by closely set, vertically directed tubes which are
held together in the basal region by common coenoecial substance. Since the present
collection is formed only of fragmentary pieces, nothing definite can be said about the
shape of entire colonies. As the tubes are closely set, and new tubes are formed only at
the periphery, the colony increases in bulk laterally. If new tubes are formed uniformly
all over, a large colony may have a flat cake-like appearance, but if growth on any one
side is obstructed, the colony may have a more or less irregular outline. If this is proved
to be the case, the shape of the colony can be regarded only as a secondary factor, de-
pending upon the rapidity with which new tubes are added in any particular region and
the presence or absence of obstruction near any part of the colony. On a plane sub-
stratum, the colony may extend equally on all sides and assume the perfect shape recorded
by Ridewood.
The thickness of the wall of the tube varies. In the specimen obtained from station 82
the external diameter of the tube is 1-3 mm. and the internal diameter 1 mm. But the
external diameter in the specimen obtained from station 190 is 1-6 mm.., and the internal
diameter is only slightly less, the tubular wall being very thin. The tube ends blindly
below in the common coenoecial substance and at the upper free extremity opens by
a transverse circular ostium devoid of any kind of lip-like outgrowth. They are slightly
irregularly curved in the long axis, but there are a few straight tubes in the colony. The
smooth inner lining of the tube is formed of thin rings. These are surrounded by an
outer layer of irregular thickness. When a tube is dissected out in order to remove the
zooids, the outer layer peels off easily, but the thin inner layer adheres closely to the
visceral mass of the zooids, so that often it cannot be removed without damaging them.
Andersson (1907, p. 12) separates C. densus from C. rarus by the nature of the tubes.
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 237
He says that in C. densus the tubes are straight and that in C. rarus they are irregularly
curved. While in C. densus the tubes are 6 to 7 cm. long and the coenoecial substance
at the base free from sand particles, the tubes of C. rarus are only 4 to 5 cm. long and are
distinguished by the presence of sand grains in the coenoecial substance. But Ridewood
(1918 a, p. 40) has shown that these distinctions are the result of variations which do not
affect either the structure of the colony or the characters of the zooid. The colony when
first formed consists only of a few tubes, which, being unimpeded by anything in the
immediate vicinity, are irregular and even straggling. As the zooids multiply, the tubes
become more and more closely set and older tubes become longer and straighter, con-
sequently after a study of complete series of gradations between C. rarus and C. densus,
he concluded that C. rarus is synonymous with C. densus. Even the differences in thickness
of the epidermis of the axis of the arms are such as might occur within the same species.
Nothing more need be said to emphasize Ridewood’s conclusions. The two specimens
obtained from station 190 both possess tubes which are mostly curved. The older tubes
are 5 to 6cm. long and their distal parts straight. In one colony there are a few stray
sand grains embedded in the coenoecial substance, but in the other the sand grains and
diatoms are numerous.
It may be added that the occurrence of sand grains in the common coenoecial sub-
stance is not constant, resulting from selection by the zooids, but depends rather on the
immediate surroundings. If the colony grows in unsheltered spots or at the base of
submarine rocks the particles which constantly rain from the upper regions of the sea
or drop occasionally from the sides of the rocks may fall on the colony and become
embedded in the common coenoecial substance. The quantity of sand grains on the
colony will depend on the intensity of the rain of particles from above, so that it is
possible to find colonies free from sand grains, or with only a few stray particles, growing
in the sheltered places. This is supported by the different colonies of the present
collection in which the quantity of sand grains, included in the common coenoecial
substance, varies markedly.
Each tube is occupied by one zooid and its buds. In the preserved condition the
upper tip of the zooid is situated about 7 to 9 mm. below the ostium. The zooids are
pale white, but the arms are brownish. The body is straight, longer than that of other
species and measures 4 to 10 mm. from base of body to tip of arms. When a zooid is
viewed under a lens, two white elliptical patches can be seen slightly bulging out on
each side of the pharynx. They arise from the base of the collar region between the
opening of the rectum and the pharynx. These are the gonads, which are conspicuous
in this species. All the zooids which have been examined in section are hermaphrodite,
but both Ridewood and Andersson have observed male and female zooids, with paired
testes or ovaries. Ova occupy the upper part of the ovary, the lower part being filled
with yolk granules. Sometimes a few eggs are found in the basal part of the tubes. The
testis is a thick-walled elliptical tubular organ. The sperm are formed in the thick wall
and liberated into the central space from which they pass out through the short vas
deferens which opens between the rectum and the pharynx.
238 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Illustrations of sagittal and transverse sections passing through the gill region are
given in Plate XXXVI, figs. 3-6. The external gill slit (eg) opens into a cavity (gc), placed
between the body wall and the wall of the pharynx. The wall of this gill cavity is formed
of vacuolated tissue, called pleurochord. In other species there is a deep groove running
along the entire length of the pleurochords on either side of the pharynx, which starts
from the gill slit, and probably the respiratory water traverses these grooves. The gill
cavity found in this species may have originated by the enlargement of the groove and
the fusion of the lips, resulting in the formation of a tubular space (gc) between the
pharynx and the body wall, opening on the one side into the external gill slit, and on
the other into the pharynx by a narrow slit, which for convenience will be termed the
internal gill opening (7g). Whereas in other species water passes directly from the
pharynx through the gill slit, the intervention of this cavity makes the passage of the
respiratory water more complicated. Water flows from the pharynx through the internal
gill opening into the gill cavity whence it passes out through the external gill slit.
The proboscis, which is oval with indented sides, is small compared to the zooid. It
is 1°1 mm. long and o-g mm. broad. ‘The red line runs near the posterior margin.
There are always eight pairs of arms without end swellings. The pinnules on the basal
parts are 0-4 to o-5 mm. long. The dorsal wall of the arm has a thick layer of vacuolated
cells each of which encloses a refractive bead similar to those in the end-swellings of
C. dodecalophus and C. hodgsoni. This layer curves over the tip of the arm so that a few
refractive beads occur in the tip also. Thus although end-swellings are not found, there
are refractive beads in the tips. The arms on the extreme right and left sides are directed
downwards on either side of the mouth in the preserved condition. The longest arms
measure 1°7 mm., but those towards the sides are shorter.
The stolon varies considerably in length and thickness. In some it is thin and about
25 mm. long, and in others thick and short, with a brownish tint on one side. The
difference in length of the stolon is probably due to contraction when the zooids were
fixed, but even in the contracted state it is much longer than the stolon of other species?.
Cephalodiscus fumosus, n.sp. (Pl. XXXIV, fig. 1).
Dracnosis. Colony unbranched, in the form of a brittle arenaceous cake, measuring
go mm. across and 16 mm. high and consisting of evenly distributed (5 to 7 mm. apart)
vertically disposed tubes of uniform diameter. 'Tubes pale brown, buried in the common
mass, which is formed of a dense agglutination of minute sand grains. Each ostium
produced on one side into a short thick triangular lip, which can fold over like an oper-
culum. Those in the middle of the colony 14 mm. long, those near the edge shorter.
Width of the tube near the ostium 1-4 mm. Length of fairly extended zooid from tip
of arms to base of body 3:2 mm., length of arms 1-2 mm., width of body 1 mm. Colour
1 Sir Sidney Harmer, when reading through this paper, suggested that during life the length of the stolon
varies greatly from time to time, but that this point was not sufficiently appreciated by earlier workers who
very often cited the length of the stolon of the preserved zooid as a diagnostic character of the species of
Cephalodiscus.
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 239
of preserved zooids—dorsal side of body and stolon light brown, ventral side brownish
white. Proboscis with dark brown upper and lower edges. Usually eight pairs of arms,
each with two black longitudinal bands running along the entire length as in C. nigrescens.
No end-swellings with refractive beads. Female and hermaphrodite zooids found in the
same colony. Up to ten buds on each zooid. The colony has a smoky grey colour which
suggested the specific name.
LOCALITY.
St. 170. 23. ii. 27. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island, 61° 25’ 30” S, 53° 46’ 00” W. Gear DLH.
342 m. One entire colony and a broken piece.
The material of this species consists of a single large colony, and another broken piece
from which the zooids were removed and separately preserved. Sections were made of
the preserved zooids and the large colony was used only for purposes of general
description.
The large colony is flat and semicircular in shape, but since the diametrical edge is
irregular and broken, it may be assumed that an entire colony is oval or circular with a
convex upper surface, thick in the centre and thin towards the edge (PI. XXXIV, fig. 1).
In most other species of Cephalodiscus the colony is formed by the secretion of
coenoecial substance, the inclusion of sand grains being only a secondary factor de-
pending on the nature of the surroundings. In C. solidus (Ridewood, 1918 8, p. 18)
large quantities of sand grains, sponge spicules and diatoms are found in the common
coenoecial substance of some of the colonies, while others are leathery and non-
arenaceous. In C. agglutinans foreign particles are included in the soft substance, but
some parts of the branches may be devoid of sand grains. In C. fusosus the entire mass
of the colony is formed of a dense agglutination of sand grains. The particles are very
minute and of uniform size and being closely packed together give a homogeneous
appearance to the colony. The coenoecial substance is sparsely secreted and is used
only for making the thin-walled tubes and binding the sand grains together. Since the
bulk of the colony is formed of such a consolidation of sand particles, it is very brittle
and easily breaks to pieces when removed from its place of attachment. The basal part
has an irregular surface, because the colony grows on a sandy bottom, to which it is
fixed by the secretion of a thin layer of coenoecial substance. When the colony is
dislodged large particles of the substratum firmly attached to the basal surface come
with it. It seems clear from the nature of the particles that they must definitely be
selected by the zooids for the construction of the coenoecium, in the same way as certain
Foraminifera construct their arenaceous shells. Ridewood (1918 a, p. 41) observed that
the inclusion of sand grains or foreign particles is not a constant character of any species
of Cephalodiscus, and that it may be purely local, depending only on the nature of the
sea bottom where the zooids first settled down. “It is quite possible that in more rocky
parts of the ocean floor the zooids of the species might build up a perfectly clear and
transparent coenoecium.” Though this is applicable to most species of Cephalodiscus,
it cannot be said that the arenaceous nature of the colony of C. fumosus depends on
DIIL 3
240 DISCOVERY REPORTS
chance. If the inclusion of sand grains is regarded as a regular habit of this species,
a rocky substratum would be unfavourable for growth and it is possible that the first
zooids of the colony always selected a loose sandy bottom. An examination of the
coenoecium supports this opinion, but it cannot be definitely established until the habits
of the species are known.
The tubes are uniformly distributed 5 to 7mm. apart. They are thin-walled and
vertical. The entire length of the tube lies within the mass of the colony, so that the
ostium opens on the surface. On one side the margin of the ostium is prolonged into
a vertical triangular lip covered with an outer layer of sand grains. It is capable of
folding over the ostium, so that when the lip is closed the ostium cannot be distinguished
from the rest of the surface. At the ostium, the tube is 1-4 mm. across, but it becomes
slightly narrower at the blind end. The longest tubes in the central region are 14 mm.
long. Towards the edge they become shorter and the shortest ones, close to the margin,
are inclined outwards.
Each tube is occupied by one zooid and its buds. In the preserved condition the
upper tip of the zooid is situated nearly 4 mm. below the ostium. The dorsal part of
the body is dark brown, the ventral part and the sides are brownish white. The dark
brown colour extends along the entire length of the dorsal part of the stolon as a brown
band from the base of the arms to the tip of the stolon.
In the females the ovaries are seen on either side of the pharynx as two conspicuous
white masses, which are directed obliquely ventrally. Hermaphrodite zooids could also
be distinguished, for the white mass is only on one side; the other side being occupied
by the testis, which is not a conspicuous structure. This difference between female
zooids and hermaphrodites can be observed only when the gonads are well developed.
The ovary is an elliptical organ with seven or eight heavily yolked ova. The short
oviduct opens at the base of the collar region between the pharynx and the rectum, just
below the lower end of the main nerve mass.
Between the gonads and the rectum there is a small invagination of the ectoderm
which dilates into a flask-shaped cavity. This is lined with ectodermal cells and opens
through the narrow neck. It is difficult to account for the function of this cavity since
it is found to be almost empty. Its position near the ovary and the proximity of its
opening to the oviduct suggests that it is a kind of brood-pouch in which the developing
ova are received. But since no such structure is found in any other species, this view
must be accepted with caution.
The body is slightly curved like that of C. hodgsoni. The pharynx runs slantwise,
and near the middle of the body opens into the stomach. The ventral wall of the
stomach is very much thicker than the dorsal and contains numerous closely set
transverse folds. The intestine is a long narrow tract which dilates into a spacious
rectum. The epithelial lining of the rectum is also thrown into long narrow folds
(Gab O04 bales, 30),
The stolon originates from the region where the pharynx opens into the stomach. It
is directed downwards following the curve of the body. A thin connection keeps the
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 241
stolon attached to the body. From the base it continues downwards as the free stolon,
which is 4-5 mm. long and ends in a knob.
The proboscis is almost circular. It is of a pale brownish colour, but the edges are
dark brown like the dorsal side of the trunk. The ventral glandular wall of the proboscis
is not as thick as in C. hodgsoni or C. nigrescens, and this accords with the habit of
secreting a limited quantity of coenoecial substance. In the middle of the ventral wall
of the proboscis there is a thin short finger-like protuberance which is directed upwards.
Small sand grains might be held between this protuberance and the proboscis and thus
carried to the edge of the colony, to be there cemented on to the surface.
There are usually eight pairs of arms which are conspicuous by their dark bands and
long pinnules. C. solidus also has eight pairs of arms, but they are devoid of the black
pigmented bands which are seen only in C. nigrescens and this species. The pigmented
bands start from the base of the arm and run on each side. Near the tip they converge
and fuse into a single broad band. The tip has the appearance of a rounded knob without
pinnules. But this knob-like termination cannot be compared with the end-swellings
with refractive beads found in C. hodgsoni and C. dodecalophus. The arms measure
1-2 mm. in length and the pinnules are 0-5 to 0-6 mm. long.
Though the zooids of C. solidus and C. fumosus are of the same size and possess the
same number of arms, the latter can always be distinguished by the presence of the dark
bands in the arms. The zooids of C. solidus are black in the preserved condition; thus
the colour of the preserved zooid of C. fumosus will also serve to separate the two species.
Sub-genus Acoelothecia, sub-gen. nov.
Diacnosis. Colony small or large, and branching; formed of a meshwork of bars and
spines without any definite coenoecial cavities. Spaces between the meshwork irregular
and continuous and occupied in common by the zooids and their buds.
Cephalodiscus kempi, n.sp. (Pl. XXXIV, figs. 2-6).
Diacnosis. Colony small and tuft-like or large and branching. The tuft-like colonies
are about 3°5 to 4:5 cm. from base to tip of spines. ‘The branching forms sometimes
reach a length of 10 cm. and in thickest parts are 3-5 cm. across. The inhabited parts
of the colonies are formed of an elaborate meshwork of cross-bars between spines. The
coenoecium is devoid of definite tubes such as those found in the other three sub-genera,
whence the name Acoelothecia for the new sub-genus. Spines with varying length and
thickness are found all along the sides of the branches. No definite ostia are present.
Spaces between the surface meshwork of bars and spines act as temporary outlets.
Colour of the colony from light brown to reddish brown, older parts always of a deeper
tint. Length of a fairly extended zooid from base of body to tip of arms 1-8 to 2 mm.;
length from base of arms to base of body 1-1 mm.; width of body 0-9 to 1 mm. Colour
of preserved zooids amber. Arms usually five pairs, with end-swellings and refractive
beads. Male, female and hermaphrodite zooids found in the same colony.
242 DISCOVERY REPORTS
LOCALITY.
St. 152) 17.1. 27. 53. 51.30 95,30, 160300 We. Gea DEH. 245m. liworspecimens:
St. 156. 20.1. 27. 53° 51’ 00” S, 36° 21’ 30” W. Gear DLH. 200 to 236m. One specimen.
Si Hey Bila Te ae a 48’ 30” S, 35° 57’ 00” W. Gear DLH. 4o1 to 411 m. Large collection.
St. WS 71. 25: il. 27. 6 miles N 60° E of Cape Pembroke Light, East Falkland Islands.
Filw go OOM. 5732 0" W. Gear OTC. 82-80 m. Three specimens.
Sitio WIS GA. Baill, 27> Git oF. oo” S, 57, 34’ 00” W. Gear OTC. 95 m. One specimen.
St. WS 84. 2 ill. 27 74 miles S of W of Sea Lion Island, East Falkland Islands. From
52° 33° 00" S, 59° 08’ 00” W to 52° 34’ 30’ S, 59° 11’ 00” W. Gear OTC. 75-74 m. Two Sussuneis.
St. WS 85. 25.11.27. 8 miles S 66° E of Lively Island, East Falkland Islands. From 52° 09 fons
58° 14’ 00” W to 52° 08’ 00" S, 5B og’ 00” W. Gear OTC. 79 m. Small fragments.
St. WS 97. 18. iv. 27. 49° 00’ 30” S, 61° 58’ 00” W. Gear OTC. 146-145 m. Large collection.
St. WS 211. 29. v.28. 50° 17’ 00” S, 60° 06’ 00” W. Gear OTC. 161-174 m. Four specimens.
St. WS 216. 1. vi. 28. 47° 37’ 00" S, 60° 50’ 00” W. Gear N7-T. 219-133 m. Seven specimens.
From stations 158, WS g7, and WS 211 a considerable quantity of material was
obtained. ‘The material from station 158 consisted of small tuft-like colonies with radiating
spines. The yield from stations 152 and 156, WS 71, WS 84, WS 97, WS 211, WS 216
consisted of long cylindrical branching colonies.
For the sake of convenience the short tuft-like colonies obtained from station 158
will be called Form A and the branching cylindrical form Form B. Although the habit
of growth of the two forms is quite distinct the structure of the coenoecium and zooids
is the same in both forms.
Form A. Most of the material was collected at station 158, from a depth 4or to 411 m.
Small pieces were obtained from stations 152 and 156 at depths of 245 m. and 200 to
236 m. respectively. Since variation in size and structure is not met with, this form
can be regarded as a distinct type of the species. The coenoecium in the preserved
condition is light brown. The colony consists of a basal region of thick bars and spines
forming a meshwork from which spines radiate on all sides except basally. The spines
are thick, straight and tapering and measure 12 to 17 mm. They may be forked or
branched. The origin and growth of spines are the same as in C. hodgsont, that is, by
deposition of coenoecial substance locally in the form of lamellae. A section of the spine
shows two distinct regions. A transparent core of thin consistency surrounded by a
firm, reddish brown, outer layer formed by a number of close lamellae.
A few colonies are slightly larger than the rest and have longer spines with pointed
tips, though generally the spines measure 1-2 to 2-3 cm. and possess blunt or pointed
tips. They are straight except for slight occasional curvature of the distal part of the
spine by preservation.
When lamellae are deposited on the spine they may enclose any particles which are
adhering to the surface of the older layer. Masses of sand grains, enclosed between
layers of lamellae, appear like nodules on the side. In one instance a slender branch of
a polyzoan colony was attached to the tip of the spine and had been almost enclosed by
coenoecium.
The structure of the coenoecium of this species is such that it cannot be included in
SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT 243
any of the three sub-genera previously recognized. The absence of a definite cavity
forming tubular spaces individually or occupied in common by the zooids is unique.
The spaces between the bars and spines on the surface of the meshwork are the openings
through which the zooids come out and are not homologous with the ostia of other
species, being only temporary outlets, which become part of the internal meshwork
when new bars are formed above the existing ones.
Most of the colonies are attached to calcareous tubes of Polyzoat. Some colonies are
attached to the tips of these tubes, while in others they are horizontally embedded in
the basal region, surrounded by a thin layer of coenoecial substance.
The sexual development of Cephalodiscus has not been thoroughly worked out.
Harmer (1905, p. 102) described the embryonic stages of C. gracilis and C. levinsent,
and Gilchrist (1917) gave an account of the larvae of C. gilchristi, but nothing definite
is known about the metamorphosis and habits of the later stages of the larvae, as they
were not studied in the living condition. In spite of this ignorance, we may assume that
at the end of the free-swimming stage the larvae of C. kempi settle down on some suitably
firm support, such as the calcareous tubes of Polyzoa, and secrete a thin layer of coenoecial
substance which envelops part or whole of the supporting object.
Rudiments of spines are laid down on the surface of this envelope which project at
various angles. As the spines increase in length, lateral bars are formed, which grow at
right angles to the axis and fuse with adjacent spines. A complicated meshwork is thus
produced by the formation of four or five cross-bars between each adjacent pair. By
the additional deposition of coenoecial substance the lateral bars and spines increase in
thickness, the angles become smooth and curved so that the original rectangular spaces
become circular or ovoid. As the zooids increase in number and more space is required,
new lateral bars are formed above, but the colonies do not grow beyond the tuft-like
form.
Two growing colonies have been found attached to flat surfaces (one to the mantle
of an Ascidian, and the other to a broken piece of Lamellibranch shell). In both of these,
a flat, plate-like secretion was first formed. Colonies were also attached to fragments
of sponges. Whatever the object to which the colony is attached, a layer of coenoecium
is spread on the surface of the object, which as growth proceeds becomes partly or
wholly enclosed.
Form B. This form is represented by material obtained from stations WS 71, WS 75,
WS 84, WS 88, WS 97, WS 211 and WS 216. Stations WS g7 and WS 211 gave most
of the collection, while from each of the other stations only one or two pieces were
obtained.
Colonies are formed of massive cylindrical branching stems with a close array of
spines along the sides. The length, thickness and nature of the spines depend on their
1 “The Polyzoon which is associated with C. kempi is Ogivalia elegans, the Vincularia elegans of D’Orbigny,
a species which is abundant in the ‘ Discovery’ collections. This is a branching form with brittle branches.
It seems not unlikely that the Cephalodiscus was growing on it and that the dredge merely broke off the tips
of the branches.”’ Letter from Sir Sidney Harmer.
244 DISCOVERY REPORTS
position. In the basal regions the spines are long, stiff, thick and tapering, while
towards the tips they are slender, shorter and very pliable.
The main stems are 3-7 cm. across in the thickest parts, but the width of the apical
regions is not more than 1 to 1-8 cm. The older parts of the coenoecium are dark reddish
brown and very opaque, so that the zooids inside cannot be seen, even by strong trans-
mitted light. Nearer the tip, the dark mass of zooids can be seen distinctly through the
light brown semi-transparent coenoecium. Usually the main stem grows vertically,
producing secondary branches from its sides. A single stem 8 cm. long may bear as
many as four to six branches. Branches are produced on all sides of the stem, but if the
main stem is horizontal they are found only on the upper side. Entangled among the
branches arenaceous tubes of Polychaetes, calcareous branches of Polyzoa, Ostracods and
small Ophiurids are often found. Big sand particles and masses of mud are also deposited
locally.
The colonies are a meshwork of bars and spines constructed as in Form A, but more
elaborately, due to the greater length and thick-
ness of the colonies. ‘The spines of the tip of the
branch are directed upwards so that the growth
of the spines, accompanied by the formation of
lateral bars between them, increases the length
x
of the branch, while the production of lateral ‘ae
bars between the obliquely directed spines on ‘ae ®@ (eN
the sides increases its thickness. s NN I) ;
Although the meshwork is very distinct in the
apical regions, the bars and spines lose their
identity below by the addition of coenoecial sub-
stance around them. As in Form A, spaces in the en jee Pane
surface meshwork form the openings for the 5) aol a ae
zooids. =| CH eee
A hand-cut longitudinal section, from the VEE NG UNC
interspaces of which the zooids are carefully EEE ha (Goi ai SUITS TNS OL ENE NESTON
washed out, shows the structure of the coenoecium given in Fig. 4. Spines A and B
grow in opposite directions from the axial part of the branch. A lateral bar between
them at the base results in the formation of a closed mesh which is at first rectangular.
Since these two spines diverge, if a second bar is formed between them above the first
one, the space enclosed would be much larger than the first one, so in the middle of the
first bar the rudiment of a new spine is laid down, which grows up as spine C. Between
A and C and C and B two bars are formed simultaneously, thus enclosing two spaces
which are of almost the same size as the one below. As the spine C continues to increase
in length one or two more bars may be formed between A and C and C and B, without
appreciably increasing the size of the spaces enclosed. Now the spines D and £ are
produced. These may be formed in the same way as spine C or may arise as branches
from the side of A or B; but whatever the origin they serve the same purpose as spine C.
INTERNAL ANATOMY 245
When these spines elongate, bars are formed between A and D, D and C, C and E,
E and B. These intermediate spines limit the spaces in the meshwork and also increase
the number of these spaces in almost geometrical ratio. Between diverging pairs of
spines lateral bars are formed on this system, but when two spines run parallel to one
another, as A and X do, a number of bars may be formed between them without inter-
mediate spines. This meshwork is the inhabited part of the colony, beyond which the
spines project.
The spaces between the bars on the surface form the openings for the zooids, but as
the spines increase in length and new bars are developed above the older ones, the former
openings become part of the internal meshwork.
In some branches the upper half is slender and pliable; this represents the growing
part of the colony. When first formed the coenoecium is almost transparent and the
spines are short and slender, but later by the successive deposition of coenoecial sub-
stance, the internal meshwork becomes thicker, and the spines stiff and straight.
Between the fully developed colonies and the newly formed semi-transparent pliable
pieces, branches representing different stages of growth are found. The differences
between them consist mainly in the thickness of the branch, the length and thickness
of the spines, and the colour of the coenoecium.
The zooids are small and measure 1-8 to 2 mm. from tip of arms to base of body. There
are always five pairs of arms which are o-9 to 1 mm. long and possess end-swellings
with refractive beads. The stolon which is 1-3 to 1°7 mm. long originates from the base
of the trunk and carries two to five buds. The rest of the anatomy agrees with that of
C. dodecalophus.
INTERNAL ANATOMY
ORIENTATION
Two opinions are held about the orientation of the zooid. Ridewood considers the
long axis of the body as longitudinal, while Harmer (1905, p. 23) regards this as trans-
verse. The reason advanced for this view is that a section of the adult zooid passing
through the collar region and proboscis at right angles to the long axis of the body shows
all the five coelomic cavities like a frontal longitudinal section of Balanoglossus. Con-
sidering the U-shaped alimentary canal, the positions of the proboscis and the anal
opening, this seems very acceptable. But with the lack of adequate knowledge of the
development this opinion has at least one difficulty ; during the development of the bud,
before the arms are formed, the coelomic cavities are arranged in the long axis, so that
a section passing medianly through the long axis shows the same arrangement of the
coelomic cavities (Fig. 6) as a longitudinal section of Balanoglossus. At a later stage,
when the arms are developed, the proboscis shifts forward and the coelomic cavities
take up the new positions seen in the adult. Although the condition in the young bud
is not regarded as the basis for correct orientation, it has been found convenient to
246 DISCOVERY REPORTS
adopt Ridewood’s orientation, so that in the following account the long axis of the body
is regarded as longitudinal (Fig. 5).
The internal anatomy of Cephalodiscus has been worked out very thoroughly by
Harmer (1905) and Andersson (1907). From sections of the zooids of different species
LONGITUDINAL
VENTRAL
DORSAL
Fig. 5. Orientation of the zooid. a, proboscis; 6, central
nervous system; c, gonad; d, notochord; e, post-oral
lamella; f, stomach; g, intestine; /, pharynx; 7, stolon;
Jj, heart and pericardium.
of the present collection it has been possible to verify these results. The following
account does not attempt to give a complete description of all parts, but only deals with
those organs and systems about which new observations have been made.
PROBOSCIS
The proboscis of Cephalodiscus varies in size and shape, as will have been seen in the
systematic accounts. The discoidal part of the proboscis is attached to the body by a
very short neck, which is always capable of a little extension. That this gives the disc
great mobility is clear from the diverse positions of the proboscis in the preserved
individuals. Observations made on the living zooids show that they come out of the
coenoecium and creep on the surface of the colony, with the disc acting as a sucker.
This was first recorded by Andersson (1907, p. 59) and confirmed by the observations
of Dr Stanley Kemp during the present expedition. The disc is flattened dorso-ventrally.
INTERNAL ANATOMY 247
The ventral wall is formed of elongated gland cells, and in the thickest part, at the base
of the gland cells, there is a thin transparent layer, which looks like nerve tissue. The
ventral wall of the anterior lobe of the proboscis is composed of a thin layer of epidermal
cells, basement membrane, and coelomic epithelium, but in C. densus this region is
comparatively thick and the epidermal cells have vacuoles like the refringent vesicles
in the end-bulbs of C. dodecalophus (P1. XXXVI, fig. 2). Behind the attachment of the
proboscis to the collar, the dorsal and ventral walls approach each other, diminishing the
proboscis cavity. Ultimately by the apposition of the two walls a thin lobe is formed, the
posterior lobe of the proboscis, which functions as the roof of the passage into the mouth.
The point where the two walls touch is the posterior boundary of the glandular part
of the ventral wall, which is invariably marked by a line of red pigment, extending
transversely from edge to edge.
It is difficult to explain the functional significance of this red line. It is surrounded
by a group of minute nuclei and lightly stained large protoplasmic cells which can be
distinguished easily from the glandular cells of the ventral wall. A similar patch of
pigment occurs in the oviduct and M’Intosh (1887) suggested that the pigmented
oviduct was a phosphorescent organ. Harmer (1905, p. 27) assigns to it a sensory
function, though according to him the nerve supply to these regions seemed inadequate
for this purpose. In the account of the nervous system it will be seen that there is a
distinct nerve originating from the back of the main ganglion which runs to the oviduct,
and that the nerve plexus at the base of the glandular region of the ventral wall of the
proboscis does not extend beyond the red line. Although no distinct nerve connection
with the red line is visible, the nerve plexus may end in the pigmented line by breaking
up into very minute branches. The distinct nerve tract in the oviduct suggests that a
similar connection exists in the pigmented line of the proboscis, and this definite relation
to the nervous system confirms the suggestion of Harmer that the red pigment has a
sensory function. This is emphasized by the occurrence of the red line in all known
species, where it is prominent from very early stages in the development of the bud.
The proboscis cavity is traversed by thin strands of protoplasmic fibres and opens
externally by two pores, the proboscis pores, which are on either side of the pericardium
above the end of the anterior horns of the collar cavities.
COLLAR CAVITIES
The two collar cavities together form a ring encircling the pharynx. Dorsally the
cavities are large and are separated into the right and left collar cavities by the dorsal
coelomic mesentery. They descend downwards and extend into the post-oral lamella,
where the two cavities are continuous; there is no ventral coelomic mesentery. The
collar cavities open by the right and left collar pores, on either side of the pharynx, at
the base of the post-oral lamella, just above the gills. The collar pores are thick-walled
ciliated openings which lead by short canals into their respective collar cavities and
control the water currents to maintain the turgidity of the collar and arms.
DI 4
248 DISCOVERY REPORTS
The arms are situated on the dorsal side of the collar. Each arm is a hollow tubular
axis which may have an end-swelling (e.g. C. hodgsoni and C. kempt). The ectodermal
cells of the end-swelling are vacuolated and contain refractive beads. In C. nigrescens
and C. fumosus end-swellings are absent, but in C. densus and C. sibogae, although there
are no end-swellings of the type described by Cole (1900, p. 256), refractive beads are
found the whole length of the dorsal side of the arms. Sections of C. densus stained in
Mallory show the vesicles and refractive beads very clearly (Pl. XXXVI, fig. 2). Some
of the beads are stained blue and others red. They are ovoid or elliptical homogeneous
bodies and normally are in the middle of the vacuolated spaces of the ectodermal cells.
Some of these beads are sometimes found partly protruding from the surface of the cells.
M’Intosh (1887, p. 11), who first observed the refractive beads in the end-swellings
of C. dodecalophus, described them as glandular. Masterman (1898 3, p. 344) suggested
that they were crystalline refractive lenses, and drew the inference that these organs are
rudimentary monostichous compound eyes similar in structure to the branchial organs
found in sedentary Annelids. Later he discarded this view, and Cole (1900, p. 356)
thought them rhabdite-producing organs. The greatest distribution of these refractive
beads occurs in C. densus and C. sibogae; in others they are restricted either to the
swollen tips of the arms or completely absent. The refractive beads therefore cannot
have any general function, but serve more or less a specific purpose which at present is
not understood.
The arms grow from the dorsal wall of the collar on either side of the central nervous
system, and the collar coelom continues to the tip of each arm and into the pinnules on
each side; the whole system thus recalls the water-vascular system and tube feet of
Echinoderms. On the ventral side of the arm there is a longitudinal groove, termed the
food groove. The movements of the pinnules convey food particles into the groove along
which the particles move to the base of the arms. The food grooves of each side of the
body open into a space between the posterior lobe of the proboscis and the ridge on the
anterior margin of the collar. These together form an efficient tract for food particles
to the mouth.
ORGANS OF THE TRUNK
The greater part of the trunk is occupied by the alimentary canal. The pharynx is a
thick-walled chamber which in nearly all species extends half-way down the body and
opens by an obliquely directed narrow oesophagus into the large stomach; this, on its
postero-ventral side, in turn leads into the intestine. The intestine is a narrow tube which
forms a loop and running upwards between the stomach and dorsal body wall opens into
a large rectum. The anus is on the dorsal side just below the collar, at the base of the
central nervous system. The gill slit on each side opens into the pharynx laterally at the
base of the post-oral lamella, below the collar pores. The wall of the gill slits is formed of
vacuolated cells. ‘Transverse sections of the gill region show that the vacuolated cells in
the roof of the gill slit do not extend to the extreme front end of the pharynx as described
by Masterman (1898 4, p. 353), but that the floor of the gill slit continues backwards on
INTERNAL ANATOMY 249
each side of the pharynx as a band of vacuolated cells with a deep internal groove com-
municating with the cavity of the pharynx. The insertion of these lateral bands, the
pleurochords, divides the wall of the pharynx more or less completely into four distinct
regions, two lateral, a mid-dorsal and a mid-ventral. The two lateral regions are formed
of the bands of vacuolated cells, and the mid-dorsal and mid-ventral walls of ordinary
cells of the pharynx. The groove on the inner side of the pleurochords is deep and
conspicuous in C. hodgsoni, and, as already mentioned, in C. densus a tubular space com-
pletely lined with vacuolated cells lies between the external gill opening and a cavity of
the pharynx. This has been termed the gill cavity, and its opening into the pharynx the
internal gill slit. The respiratory water passes through the gill cavity before it finds
outlet through the external gill slit. This gill cavity could have been formed only by the
fusion of the lips of the groove in the pleurochords. In other species where the lips of the
groove stand apart, the respiratory water probably traverses the groove before passing
through the gill slit. Assuming this to be so, it is clear that the pleurochords and the
grooves play a definite part in respiration. Further, the pharyngeal blood vessels lead
to the vacuolated region of the roof of the gill slit, but the mode of exchange of gases
still remains a problem.
A rod-shaped structure with a narrow lumen projects upwards from the dorsal wall of
the anterior diverticulum of the pharynx.
This organ has been variously termed by
different writers. Harmer (1887, p. 40)
compared it with the notochord of
Balanoglossus. Later, Willey (1902) de-
scribed it as the stomatochord, and
Masterman (1898 4, p. 351) regarded it
as the subneural gland; but the view
most generally accepted was that this
organ corresponds to the vermiform pro-
cess of certain Enteropneusta. In this
paper it is called the notochord in accord- Fig. 6. Young bud of C. nigrescens (sagittal sections).
ance with the view of Harmer. The A, early stage; B, later stage. a, proboscis; d, noto-
lumen of the notochord opens into the chord; 7, heart and pericardium; /, collar cavity;
dorsal diverticulum of the pharynx. ”” ene al acer
Masterman thought this the enlarged base of the duct, but the evidence is not strong
enough to support the glandular nature of the notochord: I did not find a trace of
mucus inside the lumen.
Since the development of Cephalodiscus has not been worked out thoroughly it is
difficult to say anything definite about the origin of the notochord, but it may be worth
mentioning that during the development of the bud it is very conspicuous. In Fig. 6,
A and B, drawings are given of sagittal sections of the young bud. The proboscis is very
large and the collar cavities have just appeared as a ring. Within the trunk-cavity is the
rod-shaped primitive gut, which has not as yet mouth-opening or intestinal loop. Later,
4-2
250 DISCOVERY REPORTS
the mouth is formed at about one-third the distance from the anterior end of the
primitive gut. This stage has been figured by Harmer (1905, Pl. XII, fig. 173). Later
still, the pre-oral region of the primitive gut develops the characteristic appearance of
the notochord. From the earliest stage its homology is revealed by the position of the
heart and pericardium.
To draw any general conclusion from the development of the bud may not be justi-
fiable, but it is recorded here since it shows a distinct stage in the formation of the noto-
chord, which may serve for comparison when the embryonic development is worked out.
MUSCULAR SYSTEM
The muscular system of Cephalodiscus is well developed, and the zooids are capable
of vigorous contraction. The chief muscles can be grouped as follows: (a) the muscles
of the stalk, which are continuous with (b) the postero-ventral longitudinal muscles of
the trunk, (c) longitudinal muscles of the collar, (d) longitudinal muscle of the arms,
(e) transverse muscles of the proboscis and (f) “problematic” tissue situated on the
roof of the collar pores.
Longitudinal muscles of the stolon are reflected on the ventral wall of the trunk. At
the junction of the stolon and the body these muscles form three distinct tracts, which,
diverging and broadening out slightly, run along the ventral body wall towards the
bases of the right and left collar pores. On their course forwards some of the fibres ter-
minate in the ventral body wall, so that the two bands become weaker as they approach the
collar pores and are finally inserted into the septum between the trunk and collar cavities.
Two strong muscles are given off from the region of the collar canals; these traverse
the collar cavities on each side of the mouth and end in the septum between the proboscis
and collar cavities. From their relation to the mouth they are called the oral muscles.
In the arms there are four bundles of longitudinal muscles, two strong bundles ventrally,
one on each side of the food groove, and two weaker bundles in the dorsal wall.
The transverse muscles in the proboscis are grouped into bundles, which radiate from
the septum between the proboscis and collar cavities. ‘These muscles are attached to the
ventral wall of the proboscis and their contraction enables the disc of the proboscis to be
used as a sucker for the creeping movement of the zooids when they come out of the ostia.
Besides these definite muscle fibres there is a very prominent bundle of “‘ problematic”
tissue situated on the roof of each of the collar canals. ‘These were regarded as lateral
skeletal masses forming a fulcrum for the pre-oral muscles (Masterman, 1898 b, p. 348),
but Harmer (1905, p. 46) observed that they constitute a series of oval lamellae which
stain like muscle fibres, each connected along half its circumference with the roof of the
collar canal and with the external body wall, the other half being freely exposed in the
collar cavity. The oval lamellae appear in all details to be muscle fibres. They originate
from the roof of the collar pore and radiate towards the dorsal and ventral walls of the
collar. Most of these fibres are inserted into the collar septa, only those towards the
middle remaining free in the collar cavity. In C. densus the distal ends of these fibres
INTERNAL ANATOMY 251
appear to be torn away from their attachments in the dorsal wall of the collar (Pl. XX XVII,
fig. 1, pt). It is therefore probable that these are dilator muscle fibres which widen the
lumen of the collar pores when water is drawn in, the connection of some of the fibres
having been torn away by vigorous contraction when the zooids died.
VASCULAR SYSTEM
The vascular system of Cephalodiscus was described first by Masterman (1898 5,
p- 350). He observed that it is composed of a pericardium situated on the tip of the
notochord, a dorsal vessel running downwards in the mesentery of the collar, a system
of sinuses round the stomach, vessels to the ovaries, a ventral vessel which divides into
two at the base of the notochord and passes round the mouth to the anterior side of the
body and stolon, vessels on the dorsal side of the body cavity of the arms and dorsal
and ventral vessels in the stolon. He stated that the vascular system of Cephalodiscus is
identical with that of Balanoglossus. The dorsal vessel communicates with the heart, and
glomeruli occur in the ventral wall of the pericardium and in the ventral blood sinus.
He also described a blood sinus running in the dorsal wall of the proboscis which was
connected with the anterior glomerulus. Harmer (1905, p. 75) denied the existence of
certain of the vessels described by Masterman. It was difficult to demonstrate that the
dorsal and ventral vessels of the stolon were connected with similar vessels in the trunk;
so he distinguished the spaces in the body as (a) vessels, the vascular nature of which
was very clear, and (6) doubtful spaces. He recognized (1) the existence of the dorsal
vessel which starts from the anterior caecal projection of the stomach and runs upwards
parallel to the pharynx. This vessel, he believed, functioned as a reservoir of blood.
He recognized also (2) vessels in the lateral mesentery passing ventral to the oviduct into
the ovary and supplying it with nutriment, (3) two vessels in the stolon, the anterior
vessel passing into the anterior part of the ventral mesentery and the posterior vessel
passing into the ventral mesentery as far as the alimentary canal. To this detailed account
there are only a few additions to make, and they are based only on the sections of C.
densus. The space inside the heart as well as all the discernible vascular spaces are deeply
stained and so it is easy to distinguish them from non-vascular spaces in the body.
In C. densus the heart is not situated on the tip of the notochord as in C. dodecalophus
but on its ventral surface, so that the pericardium extends backwards almost parallel to
the notochord. The heart is thick-walled and formed by the invagination of the posterior
wall of the pericardium. The space inside the heart is dilated and deeply stained
(Pl. XX XVII, figs. 1-4). This communicates directly with two blood vessels. A blood
vessel originating from the dorsal side of the heart passes round the tip of the notochord,
gives off a branch which runs forwards to the dorsal wall of the proboscis and proceeds
backwards between the collar cavities close to the dorsal side of the notochord. Glomeruli
occur on its walls in the hinder part, where it is very thick. On reaching the roof of the
dorsal diverticulum of the pharynx it divides into two. These branches which I propose
to call the pharyngeal blood vessels (P1. XX XVII, fig. 2, pv, and pv.) pass backwards close
252 DISCOVERY REPORTS
to the right and left sides of the pharynx to the base of the collar pores. The roof of the gill
opening occurs immediately behind the collar pores and the right and left pharyngeal
blood vessels on reaching the gill region come to an end abruptly. Though it could
not be demonstrated in my material, it seems probable that the pharyngeal blood vessels
break up into smaller branches which pass into the vacuolated cells of the gill region
where the blood is oxygenated.
From the ventral posterior side of the heart is given off the ventral blood vessel, which
at the base of the notochord divides into two lateral branches which pass along the
dorsal wall of the collar cavities into the arms. In the arms these vessels are seen as
deeply stained wavy lines running between the basement membrane and the coelomic
epithelium. On the ventral side of the arms similar vessels occur which are directly con-
nected with the median dorsal vessel. Pl. XX XVII, figs. 3 and 4 are transverse sections
of the heart showing the cavity of the pericardium and heart. The pericardial cavity is not
stained at all, whereas the space inside the heart is deeply stained. 'The wall of the heart
is very thick and glomeruli occur on it. The section passes through the lower region of
the heart and so the heart and pericardium appear only on the ventral side of the noto-
chord. Dorsal to the notochord in the median septum between the right and left collar
cavities runs the dorsal vessel already described. On the ventral posterior side of the
heart there opens into it a very large vessel, the ventral blood vessel, which runs on the
ventral side of the notochord. This dilates into a large space before it opens into the
heart (PI. XX XVII, fig. 1, vv). The dilated part has thick walls with glomeruli occurring
on them. It is not certain whether the walls of the vessel are muscular. It follows the
curve of the notochord and ends abruptly on the roof of the pharynx. The vessel which
occurs in the median septum between the pharynx and the rectum is very probably a
continuation of this vessel.
It has not been possible to work out the complete course of the circulation since the
vessels are indistinct in parts of the body. But from the evidence it seems possible that
the dorsal vessel conveys blood from the heart to the gills, arms and proboscis and that
the ventral vessel collects blood and returns it to the heart.
In the stolon there are two vessels, the dorsal and ventral, but I have not been able to
discover the connections of these vessels with the vessels of the body. Considering the
specific differences in the relation of the stolon to the trunk, the connection of these
blood vessels may not be the same in all species. In C. hodgsoni the stolon originates
from the mid-ventral side of the body, in C. densus from the posterior extremity, and
in C. fumosus near the mouth in the pharyngeal region (PI. XXXVI, fig. 1). How far the
position of the stolon would affect the connection of the stalk vessels with the vessels
of the body is difficult to estimate.
NERVOUS SYSTEM
Detailed accounts of the nervous system of Cephalodiscus were given by Masterman
and later by Harmer. Masterman (1898 4, p. 342) recognizes (1) the main ganglion on
the dorsal wall of the proboscis and collar; (2) an anterior pre-oral nerve over the tip
INTERNAL ANATOMY 253
of the proboscis and spreading out as a thin plexus under the glandular part of the ventral
wall; (3) nerves to the arms; (4) a pair of lateral nerves; (5) a post-oral ring from the
posterior edge of the collar and (6) nerves into the stolon. I was not able to find all the
nerves which Masterman described and the main course of the nerve tracts which I have
determined seems to be somewhat different.
Fig. 7 is a drawing of the nervous system. From the anterior end of the main ganglion
arises a thin plexus of nerves which spreads out laterally between the basement mem-
brane and coelomic epithelium of the dorsal wall of the proboscis, the separate nerves
become fused, round the lateral edges, with a thin plate of nerve plexus found under the
QS
SF
Fig. 7. C. densus. Nervous system. A, sagittal section; B, frontal section. 6, ganglion; c, gonad; cp, collar
pore; f, stomach; pn, pre-oral nerve plexus; pv,, nerve plexus in ventral wall of proboscis; /n, post-oral
nerve; /n,, nerve to pharynx; /m,, nerve to post-oral lamella; /n,, nerve to ventral body wall; ng, nerve to
gonad; dn, nerve to dorsal body wall; na, nerve to arms; 7, rectum.
glandular region of the ventral wall. This pre-oral nerve plexus does not extend to the
anterior tip of the proboscis, so that Masterman’s description of its course is incorrect.
From the dorsal side of the ganglion arise the nerves to the arms; from the posterior
end, a pair of post-oral nerves and a median nerve which runs in the dorsal wall of the
trunk. This median nerve gives off a pair of small branches which enter the ducts of
the gonads. The post-oral nerves, homologous with the “ post-oral ring”? of Masterman,
proceed backwards on either side, and at the base of the collar pores each divides into
three branches which enter the pharynx, post-oral lamella and body wall respectively.
Pl. XX XVIII, figs. 1 to 8 are transverse sections which show the course of the main nerve
254 DISCOVERY REPORTS
tracts. Fig. 1 passes through the anterior region of the proboscis in front of the ganglion.
Apart from the three layers of the body wall no trace of nerve plexus is seen in this
region, and this supports my opinion that the pre-oral nerve plexus does not pass round
the anterior tip of the proboscis. Harmer (1905, p. 72) also doubted the existence of
such a nerve, though he believed the nerve plexus at the base of the glandular region of
the ventral wall to be connected with the ganglion by a nerve which passed through the
tip. Fig. 2 shows the region of the proboscis in front of the notochord. The proboscis
cavity is very wide and contains inside it the proboscis canals and the heart and peri-
cardium. Dorsal to the heart is the thick pre-oral nerve plexus which spreads out laterally
on each side and becomes continuous with the nerve plexus of the ventral wall. Fig. 3
shows the ganglion, and, ventral to this, the heart and pericardium, the two proboscis
pores and the anterior horns of the right and left collar cavities. ‘The lateral plexus is
more prominent and is seen extending to the sides. Fig. 4 shows the continuation of
the ganglion in the dorsal wall of the collar from which nerves are given off to the arms.
These nerves pass along the dorsal wall of the axis of the arms, and at the base of each
arm spread out laterally forming a complete ring of nerve plexus. Fig. 5 shows the tip
of the dorsal diverticulum of the pharynx and the origin of the main lateral post-oral
nerves. These nerves proceed downwards along the right and left sides of the pharynx
and in fig. 6 they are seen at the base of the post-oral lamella below the right and left
collar pores. They give off three branches on each side, the first (/m,) proceeds to the
wall of the pharynx, the second (/n,) passes along the posterior wall of the post-oral
lamella, and the third (/n,) goes to the ventro-lateral body wall. By the time fig. 8 is
reached the lateral nerves become so small that they cannot be easily distinguished from
the surrounding tissue. Beyond the region of the gill opening no distinct nerve tract
is visible, and I was not able to discover the nerves in the stolon nor any sign of the
lateral nerves extending into it.
In conclusion it may be pointed out that the pre-oral and lateral plexus together form
a continuous plate of nerve plexus which spreads out from the anterior and lateral sides
of the main ganglion in the dorsal wall of the proboscis. In the present account this
is called the pre-oral nerve plexus. The paired lateral nerves and the “‘ median pre-oral”’
nerve of Masterman are not distinct branches, but are only parts of this continuous
plate of nerve plexus which in individual longitudinal and transverse sections appear
like branches. The paired post-oral nerves do not form a complete ring but break up
into branches at the base of the right and left collar pores.
CLASSIFICATION OF THE SPECIES OF CEPHALODISCUS
WITH A LIST OF KNOWN FORMS
Ridewood (1918 a) gave a synopsis of the species of Cephalodiscus and a list of all
recorded specimens in his contribution to the ‘‘Terra Nova’ reports. The present ex-
pedition has brought to light two new species. I therefore feel justified in revising the
classification especially in view of the fact that a new sub-genus Acoelothecia had to be
INTERNAL ANATOMY 255
made for the new species C. kempi. With the incomplete knowledge of the limited
number of species, it would be futile to search for a primitive type among them. The
zooids of all recorded species, except for differences in the number of arms, size of body
and position of stolon, are uniform in structure except C. densus, in which the structure
of the gill region marks a distinct advance on the general type. The coenoecitum of
Cephalodiscus is marked by great diversity of form and structure upon which the classi-
fication into sub-genera is based.
In Orthoecus the colonies are in the form of cake-like masses, each zooid occupying
a tube of its own. ‘The different tubes are not continuous but are held together by the
secretion of coenoecial substance between them. In one species—C. fumosus—the
individual tubes are arranged vertically inside a common mass which is formed by the
agglutination of minute particles of sand. This species and the diminutive disc-like
colonies of C. indicus can be regarded as the bases upon which a hypothetical primitive
type can be founded. Such a form will be a solitary individual which constructs a tube
of its own, buried in the sand or mud of the sea-bottom, with habits like those of the
allied group Enteropneusta.
The sub-genus Orthoecus is an intermediate stage between the primitive solitary
hypothetical type and the typical colonial forms included in Demiothecia and Acoelothecia.
In fact Orthoecus is only a gregarious group of organisms, each individual having an
independent existence of its own. The tendency towards complete colonial life is more
definite in [diothecia where the colonies grow vertically. Though in C. nigrescens each
individual has a tube of its own, the elaborate branching of the colonies and other habits
are the evidence of a more communal life. This is accentuated in C. agglutinans, in
which the different tubes are connected with each other resulting in a tubular labyrinth
in the middle of the branch and this may be regarded as the bridge between Jdiothecia
and Demiothecia. Complete colonial life is met with in Demiothecta and Acoelothecia.
The spaces inside the colony are continuous and the zooids occupy them in common,
but of these two, Acoelothecia is more advanced, since the central tubular cavities are
replaced by the elaborate meshwork which in Form B of C. kempi reaches great size
and thickness.
In the following classification the diagnoses of the species not recorded in this report
are adopted from Ridewood.
CEPHALODISCIDA
Genus Cephalodiscus, M’Intosh
Sub-genus Orthoecus, Andersson
Colonies in the form of a cake or cone or mass of irregular shape. Zooids occupying
individual tubes, each with an ostium of its own, embedded in a common coenoecial
substance or mass formed by the agglutination of minute particles. The tubes either
closely set and parallel or irregularly bent and straggling.
D Ill 5
256 DISCOVERY REPORTS
C. indicus, Schepotieff. Colony diminutive, in the form of a small round plate;
diameter 7 to 1omm., height 3 to 4mm. Ostia without any definite peristomial lip.
Length of zooid 2:2 mm., arms three pairs, no end-swellings with refractive beads.
South coast of Ceylon and Mahé (Malabar coast of India).
C. fumosus, n.sp. Colony in the form of a flat cake-like mass formed by agglutination
of minute sand particles. Tubes vertical and parallel, with triangular peristomial lips.
Length of zooids 3:2 mm.; dorsal side of body light brown. Arms eight pairs, with two
black bands in the axis. No end-swellings with refractive beads. Buds on each zooid
up to ten. Off Cape Bowles, Clarence Island.
C. solidus, Andersson. Colony not branching, in the form of a bulky mass or cake,
measuring up to 300 mm. across, and roo mm. high; the mass consisting of closely set
vertically disposed tubes each with an ostium and peristomial tube at the upper end.
The common coenoecial substance with or without sand grains. Length of zooid 4 to
5mm. Colour of preserved zooid blackish. Arms eight pairs; no end-swellings with
refractive beads. North of Joinville Island and off Mertz Glacier, Adélie Land.
C. densus, Andersson. Colony in the form of a bulky mass or cake, measuring up to
70 mm. high, consisting of closely set vertically disposed tubes of uniform diameter,
each with transverse ostium at upper end. Common coenoecial substance soft and
spongy, with or without sand grains. Length of zooids 4 to 11 mm. Colour of preserved
zooids greyish or brownish white. Arms usually eight pairs. Buds on each zooid up to
fourteen. Graham Land region, south-east of Seymour Island; Palmer Archipelago;
off Queen Mary Land; McMurdo Sound, Ross Sea.
C. rarus, Andersson. Probably a synonym of C. densus.
C. anderssoni, Gravier. Colony a ragged bulky mass, measuring up to 105 mm.
across; consisting of radially disposed tubes of uniform diameter, each with a transverse
ostium devoid of peristomial lip. Basal parts of tubes cemented by common coenoecial
substance into groups of four or five; partly incrusted with sand grains. Length of zooid
4to 4:5 mm. Arms in buds six pairs, number in adult doubtful. South of Jenny Island,
near Adelaide Island.
Sub-genus Idiothecia, Ridewood
Colony branching, each ostium leading into a tube occupied by one zooid and its
buds. Tubes embedded in common coenoecial substance, and disposed at a more or
less constant angle to the surface, either blind at their inner ends, or connected up in
the middle of the branch.
C. nigrescens, Lankester. Colony branching, branches roughly cylindrical, colour
greyish translucent; ostia at the end of short tubular peristomes, abaxial edge of peri-
stome produced into a blunt lip. No spines. Each ostium leading into a tube which ends
blindly in the middle part of the branch. Length of zooid 4 to 6mm. Arms usually
seven pairs, sometimes six or eight pairs, axis of arms with two black bands; no end-
swellings with refractive beads. North-east of Coulman Island, Victoria Land; south
CLASSIFICATION OF THE SPECIES 257
of Jenny Island, near Adelaide Island; Palmer Archipelago; off Queen Mary Land;
McMurdo Sound, Ross Sea.
C. levinseni, Harmer. Colony reddish orange, slightly branched. Width of branch
not including peristomial tubes 3 to 5 mm. Ostia numerous, each leading into a tube
that ends blindly in the middle part of the branch. Peristomial tubes projecting beyond
the general surface about 4 mm. Length of zooids 2-5 mm. Colour of preserved zooids
whitish. Arms six pairs; no end-swellings with refractive beads. Off west coast of
Japan, at the south end of Corea Strait.
C. evansi, Ridewood. Colony massive, branching, coenoecium friable, cream coloured,
speckled, containing large quantities of shells of Foraminifera, and fragments of shells
of Molluscs and Echinoids. Ostia at the end of tubular peristomes that project 2-5 to
45mm. from the surface of the branch. Length of the zooids 3-5 mm. Colour of
preserved zooids, pale green or white. Arms usually eight pairs, no end-bulbs with
refractive beads. Buds up to nine. New Zealand, Three Kings Islands.
C. gilchristi, Ridewood. Colony of long branches, some of the branches connected
across by solid bars. Width of terminal branches 5 to 8 mm., colour brown or pale
brown. Ostia numerous, except on main stem. Spine-like processes on the coenoecium
numerous, slender, simple or forked. Zooids 1-6 to 1-8 mm. Colour of preserved zooids
brown. Arms usually six pairs; no end-swellings with refractive beads. Off Cape St
Blaize, Knysna Heads; Cape St Francis; East London; other localities on the south
coast of Cape Colony, South Africa.
C. agglutinans, Harmer and Ridewood. Colony massive, branching. Coenoecium
friable, cream coloured, speckled, opaque, containing large quantities of shells of
Foraminifera, fragments of shells of Mollusca and spines of Echinoids and rounded
particles of slate. No peristomial tubes. Each ostium with a thick lip or spine that
projects about 3 mm. beyond the general surface. Each ostium leading into a tube that
communicates at its inner end with a tubular labyrinth in the middle part of the branch.
Length of the zooid 4:5 mm. Colour of preserved zooid blackish, arms eight or nine
pairs, no end-swellings with refractive beads. Burdwood Bank, south of Falkland
Islands.
Sub-genus Demiothecia, Ridewood
Colony branching. Each ostium leading into a cavity which is continuous through the
colony, and is occupied in common by the zooids and their buds. The walls of the
coenoecial cavity usually of irregular thickness and sometimes with inwardly projecting
bars and ridges.
C. dodecalophus, M’Intosh. Colony irregularly branched and straggling; some of
the branches fusing to form a network, the cross-bars being usually solid. Coenoecitum
pale orange-brown or colourless; width of branch excluding spines, 3:5 to 6mm.;
cavity of coenoecium continuous, but partially divided up by bars and incomplete
5-2
258 DISCOVERY REPORTS
partitions ; occupied in common by zooids and their buds. Ostia numerous, irregularly
placed, oval and without peristomial tubes. Spines obviously not related to ostia,
simple, forked or branched. Length of zooids, 2mm. Colour of preserved zooids,
whitish or cream-coloured. Arms usually six pairs, sometimes five pairs, with end-
swellings with refractive beads. Buds two or three. Straits of Magellan; east of
southern end of Tierra del Fuego, Beagle Channel; between Falkland Islands and
Burdwood Bank.
C. hodgsoni, Ridewood. Colony irregularly branched, cavity of coenoecium irregular,
continuous and occupied in common by the zooids and their buds, inner surface smooth
and sometimes traversed by solid bars. Ostia numerous, irregularly placed, lateral or
terminal, each ostium with two to five more or less radiating spines, forked or branched.
Length of zooids 2 to 3:2mm. Zooids dimorphic; red zooids with six pairs of arms,
females; brown zooids with ten or eleven arms, males. Arms with end-swellings with
refractive beads. Buds two, sometimes three or four to each zooid. Ross Sea, east end
of Barrier; in McMurdo Sound, south of Ross Island; Commonwealth Bay, Adélie
Land; off Shackleton Glacier, Queen Mary Land; Graham Land Region, south-east
of Seymour Island.
C. inaequatus (Andersson). Regarded as synonymous with C. hodgsoni by Ridewood.
C. aequatus, Andersson. Nearly related to C. hodgsoni and C. dodecalophus. Colony
irregularly branched and straggling; coenoecium containing diatoms in great numbers.
Length of zooids 2mm. Colour of preserved zooids crimson-brown, fading to pale
brown. Arms, six pairs in both sexes, with end-swellings with refractive beads. Buds
two to four on each zooid. Graham Land Region, north of Joinville Island.
C. gracilis, Harmer. Colony very small and delicate, irregularly branched, creeping
on a species of Polyzoa. Coenoecium almost colourless, the orange-coloured zooids
within imparting a yellow tint to the colony. Cavity of coenoecium continuous, occupied
by zooids and their buds in common. Ostia at the ends of branches, funnel-shaped ;
margin produced into three, four or five spines. Length of zooids 1-3 mm. Stolon with
black pigment in the median line of the ventral surface. Arms five pairs; end-swellings
with refractive beads found on the first pair of arms of the bud, occasionally on the
second and third pairs also, sometimes persisting in the adult. East coast of Borneo.
C. sibogae, Harmer. Colony very small and delicate, irregularly branched, orange-
coloured with dense basal encrusting part of coenoecium attached to stones; cavity of
coenoecium continuous, occupied in common by the zooids and their buds. Ostia at
the end of very short side branches, more or less alternate on opposite sides of the
branch, funnel-shaped, with margin produced into two or three spines. Ordinary
zooids, sterile, with large operculum and four pairs of arms. Male zooids with a single
pair of arms without any trace of pinnules; the dorsal wall of the arms constituted by
large number of refringent vesicles; the alimentary canal vestigial and the operculum
absent. Colour blackish. Zooids, which otherwise resemble neuters, sometimes with
functional testes. Northern entrance of Buton Strait, south-east of Celebes.
CLASSIFICATION OF THE SPECIES 259
Sub-genus Acoelothecia, sub-gen. nov.
Colony small or large and branching, formed of a meshwork of bars and spines without
any definite coenoecial cavities. Spaces between the meshwork irregular and continuous
and occupied in common by the zooids and their buds.
C. kempi, n.sp. Colony small and tuft-like or large and branching. Inhabited part
of coenoecium formed of an elaborate meshwork of bars and spines. Spines found all
along the sides of branches; not related to ostia. Colour of coenoecium light brown to
reddish brown. Length of zooid 1-8 to 2mm. Arms five pairs, with end-swellings with
refractive beads. Off Falkland Islands; off South Georgia.
NEW DATA SUMMARIZED
1. Two kinds of zooids are found in C. hodgsoni. Red zooids with twelve arms
(female) and brown zooids with ten or eleven arms (males). Dimorphism being thus
established, it is possible that C. naequatus of Andersson is synonymous with C. hodgsont,
as suggested by Ridewood.
2. In C. densus a gill sac lies between the external gill opening and the pharynx.
3. C. fumosus is a new species, the zooids of which resemble those of C. nigrescens,
but the coenoecium is formed by the agglutination of minute sand particles.
4. C. kempt is a new species which constructs a coenoecium formed of a meshwork
of bars and spines. Because of this unique structure and the absence of distinct tubes
for the zooids it is found necessary to create a new sub-genus Acoelothecia.
5. The red line on the proboscis and the pigmentation in the oviduct are believed
to be sensory in function.
6. It has been shown that the dorsal vessel gives off two branches—the pharyngeal
vessels—which enter the gills.
7. The main ganglion gives off the pre-oral plexus; and the paired post-oral nerves
divide into three branches.
List OL EITERATURE
Anpersson, K. A., 1903. Eine Wiederentdeckung von Cephalodiscus. Zool. Anz. xxv1, no. 697, pp. 368-9.
—— 1907. Die Pterobranchier der Schwedischen Siidpolar-Expedition, 1901-1903. Wiss. Ergebn. Schwed.
Siidpolar-Exp. v, Stockholm, pp. 1-122.
Cote, F. J., 1900. On the Discovery and Development of Rhabdite-‘ cells’ in Cephalodiscus dodecalophus.
J. Linn. Soc. Zool. xxvu, p. 256.
Gitcurist, J. D. F., 1915. Observations on the Cape Cephalodiscus (C. gilchristi, Ridewood) and some of its
early stages, with an appendix by S. F. Harmer. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 8, xv1, pp. 233-46.
1917. On the Development of the Cape Cephalodiscus (C. gilchristi, Ridewood). Quart. J. Micr. Sci.
LX, pt 2, pp. 189-211.
Gravirr, C., 1912 a. Sur les Ptérobranches rapportés par la seconde Expédition antarctique francaise. Comptes
Rendus Acad. Sci. civ, Séance du 28 Mai 1912, pp. 1438-40.
260 DISCOVERY REPORTS
GRAVIER, C., 1912 b. Sur une espéce nouvelle de Cephalodiscus (C. anderssoni, nov.sp.) provenant de la seconde
Expédition antarctique francaise. Bull. Mus. Hist. nat. Paris, xvii, no. 3, pp. 146-50.
—— 1912¢. Sur larepartition géographique des espéces actuellement connues du genre Cephalodiscus, M’Intosh.
Bull. Mus. Hist. nat. Paris, Xvi11, no. 3, pp. 151-3.
—— 1913. Ptérobranches. Deuxieme Exp. antarct. frangaise 1908-10. Sci. nat. Documents scientifiques,
Paris, pp. 71-86.
Harmer, S. F., 1887. Appendix to Report on Cephalodiscus. ‘Challenger’ Reports, Zool. xx, pt 62, pp. 39-47.
—— 1897. On the Notochord of Cephalodiscus. Zool. Anz. xx, p. 342.
—— 1903. On new localities for Cephalodiscus. . Zool. Anz. XXVI, p. 593.
—— 1904. Article “‘ Hemichordata.” Camb. Nat. Hist. vit, p. 21.
—— 1905. The Pterobranchia of the Siboga Expedition, with an Account of other Species. Siboga-Exp. xx,
monogr. xxvi, bis, Leiden, 132 pp.
—— 1929. Pterobranchia. Ency. Brit. xvii, p. 729, 14th edition.
Harmer, 8. F. and Ripewoop, W. G., 1913. The Pterobranchia of the Scottish National Antarctic Expedition
(1902-4). Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinb. xix, pt 3, no. 7, pp. 531-65.
Lane, A., 1891. Zum Verstdndniss der Organisation von Cephalodiscus. Jen. Zeitschr. xxv, p. 1.
LaANKESTER, E. R., 1884. A Contribution to the Knowledge of Rhabdopleura. Quart. J. Micr. Sci. xxiv, p. 622.
—— 1905. Ona New Species of Cephalodiscus (C. nigrescens) from the Antarctic Ocean. Proc. Roy. Soc.
London, Lxxvi B, pp. 400-2.
M’Intosu, W. C., 1882. Preliminary Notice of Cephalodiscus, a new Type allied to Prof. Allman’s Rhabdo-
pleura, dredged in H.M.S. ‘ Challenger.’ Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, X, pp. 337-48.
—— 1883. Preliminary Note on Cephalodiscus, a new form allied to Prof. Allman’s Rhabdopleura. Rep.
Brit. Ass. (Southampton, 1882), p. 596.
—— 1887. Reports on Cephalodiscus dodecalophus. ‘Challenger’ Reports, Zool. xx, pt 52, with Appendix
by S. F. Harmer, 48 pp.
MastTerMAN, A. 'T’., 1898 a. On the further Anatomy and the budding Processes of Cephalodiscus dodecalo-
phus. Trans. Roy. Soc. Edinb. xxx1x, pt 3, pp. 507-27.
—— 1898 b. On the Diplochorda. II. On the Structure of Cephalodiscus dodecalophus. Quart. J. Micr. Sci.
XL, Pp. 340.
—— 1903. On the Diplochorda. IV. On the Central Complex of Cephalodiscus dodecalophus. Quart. J.
Micr. Sci. XLVI, p. 715.
Ripewoop, W. G., 1906. A new Species of Cephalodiscus (C. gilchristi) from the Cape Seas. Marine Investi-
gations, South Africa, 1v, Cape Town, pp. 173-92.
—— 1907 a. On the Development of the Plumes in Buds of Cephalodiscus. Quart. J. Micr. Sci. n.s. LI,
pp. 221-52.
—— 19076. Pterobranchia; Cephalodiscus. Nat. Antarctic Exp. 1901-4 (‘Discovery’), Nat. Hist. 1,
London (Brit. Mus.), pp. 1-67.
—— 1912. On specimens of Cephalodiscus nigrescens supposed to have been dredged in 1841 or 1842.
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 8, x, pp. 550-5.
—— 1918 a. Cephalodiscus. British Antarctic (‘Terra Nova’) Exp. 1910, Zoology, Iv, no. 2, pp. 11-82.
—— 1918}. Pterobranchia. Australasian Antarctic Exp. 1911-14, Series C, Zoology and Botany, II, pt 2,
pp- I-25.
—— 1920. A Key for the Ready Identification of the Species of Cephalodiscus. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.
ser. 9, V, pp. 407-10.
—— 1921. On Specimens of Cephalodiscus densus dredged by the ‘ Challenger’ in 1874 at Kerguelen Island.
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 9, VIII, pp. 433-40.
ScHEPOTIEFF, A., 1909. Die Pterobranchier des Indischen Oxzeans. Zool. Jahrb., Abt. Syst. xxvil, pt 4,
pp- 429-48.
SPENGEL, J. W., 1897. Bemerkungen zu A. T. Masterman’s Aufsatz “On the ‘ Notochord’ of Cephalodiscus.”
Zool. Anz. XX, p. 505.
Wittey, A., 1894. Amphioxus and the Ancestry of the Vertebrates. Columbia Univ. Biol. Ser. 11.
1902. Enteropneusta from the South Pacific. Willey’s Zool. Results, p. 223.
Saree
Eo oe
Someries
WIAXX ATAII
opr 32 (A mo}.
soe 38 ff onoT
oor 22 .&f mo0F
Jo nsmissge slgmie oT ,
ALODISCUS |
wt i Yereea 44p nn .& -_ = ae a i a 2 a a
PLATE XXXII
Fig. 1. C. hodgsoni. Form A, St. 190.
Fig. 2. C. hodgsoni. Form B, St. 190.
Fig. 3. C. hodgsoni. Form B, St. 190.
Fig. 4. C. hodgsoni. The single specimen obtained from St. 167.
Fig. 5. C. hodgsoni. The single specimen obtained from St. 187.
Fig. 6. C. densus. From St. 82.
PLATE XXXIII
III
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL.
CEPHALODISCUS
= t
'
2
a 7
PI
‘
5
.
We
j
f :
.
je iy
—
; .
~
ere REPO! RTS, VOL. mW
_¢atoloo agisl 8 to neq Isesd YQ GW .3¢ most A moh sont" — aS pe ~
donsid & Yo bas Istetb yo GW 32 mont 2 sro tqansA a a se at
MTOIgeT ATiwoTg iasisqensi orlt gaiwode
Ber we oot A rue Aged .2 of ai
es he
we eva stg uch, fl i I xs) Acre
“high ban
x
(CBE jenn 49 ;
PLATE XXXIV
Fig. 1. C. fumosus. St. 170.
Fig. 2. C. kempi. Form B, from St. WS 97, basal part of a large colony.
Fig. 3. C. kempi. Form B, from St. WS 97, distal end of a branch
showing the transparent growing region.
Fig. 4. C. kempi. Form A, from St. 158.
Fig. 5. C. kempi. Form B, from St. WS 97, the basal part of a thick
branch photographed by transmitted light, showing the meshwork of
the coenoecium.
Fig. 6. C. kempt. Form B, from St. WS 97, distal end of a branch
photographed by transmitted light, showing the meshwork of the
coenoecium and the mass of zooids.
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. III
PLATE XXXIV
CEPHALODISCUS
tai
>
oa
*
bq
fal
>
-
oa
tet tt tet
aes
beh ns ee Lo n
_
228 :
a ak
nanan S
oe 4
=
J oa
a
eo
a oe cane se
PLATE XXXV
Fig. 1. Zooid of C. densus, from St. 82.
Fig. 2. Zooid of C. kempi, from St. WS 97.
Fig. 3. Zooid of C. fumosus, from St. 170.
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. III PLATE XXXV
CEPHALODISCUS
th L vi | ;
PORTS, VOL, Tl PLATE XXXV1
pd
¢iH2 Ire Ismotxs .y
tai ws ;nolote Wan
ob Ax ; amrios ,v ; aloe
oilt 6 on gaieesg moijose s2rovensi) amb
dguowl gnizesq noitose sersvanen wens OD .0 2
Behisiatiy any’ bald taltohn OME avers,
CEPHALODISCUS
t
Pua thw ty i n a af dunes
PLATE XXXVI
a, proboscis; c, gonads; cc, collar cavity ; eg, external gill slit; f, stomach;
g, intestine; gc, gill cavity; h, pharynx; 2, stolon; 7g, internal gill slit;
m, mouth; pd, dorsal wall of the proboscis; 7, rectum; 7b, dorsal wall of
the arms with refractive beads.
Fig. 1. C. fumosus, sagittal section, showing the attachment of the
stolon.
Fig. 2. C. densus, sagittal section, showing the refractive beads in the
dorsal wall of the proboscis and arms.
Fig. 3. C. densus, sagittal section, showing the gill cavity and the
external and internal gill openings.
Fig. 4. C. densus, transverse section, passing through the external gill
slit.
Fig. 5. C. densus, transverse section passing through the gill cavity.
Fig. 6. C. densus, transverse section passing through the internal gill
slit.
XXXVI
PLATE
Ill
VOL.
DISCOVERY REPORTS,
CEPHALODISCUS
:
.
’ ——
.
.
‘
‘
aie .
e
f
,
i A: Fuss yi tas’ als 7 Wives silos .39 70 oilgang , Fp sodatg aN
ee wo8 zloeeov boold [sei0b .wh, ;hrodsoien 3S ES10q,
Wa tae eS Vailinedined ay Renpueays Axaviedg A pile lite 164004
bgold Insgayradg , p04 bas sq ;uzeii onsmoldorg Aq ;yives eiveodorq
-loee 2o7 ba oold lextaoy “oe ; elsezov
4 2 visas .1.3f
~ s tt
id
8 Bd
r]
ab8 esate i
galt BOIS
muibisoiieg bas ngs aks atginaicly A
Mf Sa)
seus sosit As si0992 26192 nerve diss Sy 5 port
3 ts v4 i Oo ug id
j .cwibsoheq
CEPHALODISCUS
he
PLATE XXXVII
a, proboscis; b, ganglion; cc, collar cavity; ch, cavity of heart; cp, collar
pore; d, notochord; dv, dorsal blood vessel; eg, external gill-slit; gr,
roof of gill slit; h, pharynx; /, pericardium; jc, pericardial cavity; p, pc,
proboscis cavity; pt, problematic tissue; pv, and pv,, pharyngeal blood
vessels ; vv, ventral blood vessel.
Fig. 1. C. densus, sagittal section through collar region.
Fig. 2. C. densus, sagittal section through collar region.
Fig. 3. C. densus, transverse section through the heart and pericardium.
Fig. 4. C. densus, transverse section of heart and pericardium.
Fig. 5. C. nigrescens, transverse section passing through heart and
pericardium.
XXXVII
PLATE
III
VOL.
REPORTS,
DISCOVERY
CEPHALODISCUS
PLATE XXXVI
Pit _yot0q-aslloo <4 c¥tivso tslloo .99 > bsnog Py: ely
a -llig yp ¢sllocnel Is10-te0q <9 ;xayusq to
pit llew ybod ot svien , ath :sliomel feared c
my evisn PD a et ¢brodsoiwelg 4; yivso Isibisoi
; _ ipiszodong to Iinw lerinov oi ni euxelg svidt
frutost ,* ;Isnso 910g 6
oeroyennis Yo eoree 18 of x .2gil ¢
ae
;
CEPHALODISCUS
PLATE XXXVIII
b, ganglion; be, body cavity; c, gonad; cc, collar cavity; cp, collar-pore;
d, notochord; dh, diverticulum of pharynx; e, post-oral lamella; eg, gill-
slit; h, pharynx; 7, heart and pericardium; /m, post-oral nerve; /n,, nerve
to pharynx; Jn,, nerve to post-oral lamella; /ns, nerve to body wall; na,
nerve to arms; pc, pericardial cavity; pl, pleurochord; pn, pre-oral nerve
plexus ; pm, , nerve plexus in the ventral wall of proboscis; pp, proboscis
pore canal; 7, rectum.
Figs. 1 to 8. Series of transverse sections of C. densus showing the
nervous system.
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. III PLATE XXXVIII
CEPHALODISCUS
Srext Brit iCstanis & 4 dé, Day die Cate Witten
DISCOV ERY
cane III, pp. 261-266.
cies ‘igjued by ihe Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on on behalf of the aeons of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands
FROM SOUTH GEORGIA
__W. S. Bristowe, B.A., F.Z.S.
Si ery Cee
Beh CAMBRIDGE
| AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
OO aes Cee
Price two shillings net
[Discovery Reports. Vol. IIT, pp. 261-266, November, 1931.]
BEUDERS COLLECTED BY THE DISCOVERY
Peele OITITON WITH A DESCRIPTION OF A
NEW SPECIES FROM SOUTH GEORGIA
By
W.S. BRISTOWE, B.A., F.Z.S.
SS 7 ee
Papen COLLECTED BY THE DISCOVERY
EXPEDITION
WITH A DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES
FROM SOUTH GEORGIA
By W.S. Bristowe, B.A., F.Z.S.
(Text-fig. 1)
ANALYSIS OF THE COLLECTION
le collection comprises nineteen specimens which are attributable to three species
contained in tubes labelled as follows:
Ascension Island
Artema mauricia Walck. 1 3.
“1925. Presented by Mr L. W. Shaw.”
Hermite Island, Cape Horn
Rubrius subfasciatus E. Sim. 1 2, 1 young specimen.
“St Martin’s Cove. St. 222, 23. iv. 27. Sh. coll.”
South Georgia
Myro frigida sp.nov. 7 2, 23,7 young specimens from:
1. E. Cumberland Bay. 3 9. MS to, 28. iv. 25.
. E. Cumberland Bay. 1 9,14, 7 young. MS 71, 9. iii. 26.
. Grytviken. 13. 6. ili. 26.
. New Fortuna Bay. 1 2. Beach Collecting. On Whale Bone.
. Wilson Habour. 1 2. WS 62, 19. i. 27. Moss Dweller.
. South Georgia. 19. 18. ii. 27. Found in jar labelled ‘‘ Whale parasites”.
Aw WN
NOTES
That the collection should comprise but three species is somewhat disappointing,
but, as I shall show below, it is probable that the total spider fauna of South Georgia
consists of a single species and that a very interesting one. If opportunity arises it 1s
to be hoped that spiders will be collected on other Antarctic islands and their discovery
on the Antarctic Continent would be of particular interest. After all Attids of the genus
Sitticus were found living at 23,000 ft. on Mount Everest in spite of the absence of
vegetation, so it may not be too much to expect them on inhospitable Antarctic lands.
Artema mauricia Walck., which was brought back from Ascension Island, is world-
wide in tropical and sub-tropical countries. It has a long list of synonyms including
A, atlanta Walck., Pholcus borbonicus Vinson and Artema convexa Bl., and has been
recorded under the last of these from St Helena, 700 miles south-west of Ascension.
DEC 28 1931
264 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Rubrius subfasciatus Sim. appears to be common in Tierra del Fuego, and has
previously been collected on Hermite Island.
Coming now to the third and new species, which I am calling Myro frigida, we
find much of interest in its discovery in South Georgia.
No spiders had previously been collected in South Georgia and now, out of sixteen
specimens from four or five different localities, this is the only species to be found. It is
small and it is not conspicuous, so we have grounds for thinking that it is the only spider
inhabitant of South Georgia. An interesting fact, which incidentally supports this view,
is that the isolated Antarctic islands of Kerguelen and Macquarie also have one spider in-
habitant in each case peculiar to themselves and in each case belonging to the genus Myro.
So far as I am aware the distribution of this genus is as follows: Cape of Good Hope,
Snares Island, Macquarie Island, Tasmania, Kerguelen and now South Georgia.!
Each locality has its own peculiar species and Snares Island can boast of two.
Myro, and also Rubrius, belong to a sub-family of the Agelenidae, the Cybaeinae,
and L. Berland has recently pointed out that no less than eight out of the fourteen
species known from Bounty, Snares, Auckland, Campbell, Macquarie and Kerguelen
Islands belong to this sub-family,” or nine to the family Agelenidae.
Thus by adding South Georgia to the above list of islands we can say that of their
known fauna ten out of fifteen, or two-thirds, belong to the family Agelenidae and nine
out of fifteen, or three-fifths, to the sub-family Cybaeinae. Furthermore, of the nine
Cybaeinae seven are peculiar to the particular island on which each is found, the other
two being shared by Auckland and Campbell.
This is a very different state of affairs to that existing in the Arctic. There the Liny-
phiidae are the predominant family, and there the isolated small islands do not have
any, or at any rate many, species peculiar to their faunas. Taking the four islands of
Jan Mayen, Bear Island, Spitsbergen and the New Siberian Islands we find that out of
ten species, nine belong to the Linyphiidae and one, Micaria eltoni Jacks., to the Clubi-
onidae. Three of the four Jan Mayen species are found on Spitsbergen and the fourth
on Bear Island. ‘The three species recorded for the New Siberian Islands are all present
on Spitsbergen.
This comparison of Arctic with Antarctic islands shows us (1) that in the former it is
the Linyphiidae, in the latter the Agelenidae that are dominant, and (2) that in the
former the restriction of species to particular islands is the exception, whilst in the
latter it is the general rule. Have these two points any connection with one another? Is
there any connection between the facts that in the Arctic eight out of nine Linyphiids on
these four islands are not peculiar to any one of them (and most of them are found in
Arctic Europe or Greenland), whilst in the Antarctic seven out of nine Cybaeinae are
restricted to particular islands? Elsewhere® I have stressed the fact that the ballooning
1 Myro backhauseni Sim. and M. paupercula Sim. described from the south of South America have now
been transferred to the genus Myropsis and the family Dictynidae.
2 Compte Rendu Sommaire des Séances de la Soc. de Biogéographie, 1930, p. 90.
3 Proc. Zool. Soc. Pt 4, 1929, p. 633.
SPIDERS 265
habit is the most efficient means that spiders have of dispersing themselves and that the
Linyphiidae are the most frequent aeronauts. Still more recently in a paper on the
spiders of Krakatau Island, which is in course of publication in the Proceedings of the
Zoological Society, | have suggested that certain families never make use of this means
of dispersal and the Agelenidae seldom or never. This does not mean that it is impossible
for the Cybaeinae to cross the sea, but it does remove their most efficient means of doing
so, and it suggests to our minds that a simple explanation of our difficulties would be
that land connections existed in the past between these Antarctic islands and a main-
land, such as the Antarctic Continent.
Fig. 1. Myro frigida, sp.nov. a, eyes and chelicerae. b, female epigyne. c, d, male palp from below and above.
Myro frigida, sp.nov.
Size. Female 2:5 to 3 mm., male 2 to 2:5 mm.
Eyes. Median anterior eyes easily the smallest; seen from in front, they lie slightly
above a line joining the base of the anterior lateral eyes, but not nearly so far above such
a line as in the type species WM. kerguelenensis Camb. or M. caffer Sim. (Compare Fig. 1a
with figure by O. P. Cambridge in Proc. Zool. Soc. 1876, p. 258, and E. Simon in
Histoire Naturelle des Araignées, ‘Tome 2, p. 237.) Eyes on dark patches.
CHELICERAE. Vertical. The dentition of the teeth differentiates this species from those
previously described in so far as the descriptions allow such a comparison being made.
In the present species the front or outer row consists of six rather sharp thin teeth
diminishing in size at each end of the row. The inner row comprises three small teeth.
STERNUM. Dark and somewhat heart-shaped with a narrow extension posteriorly
passing between the hind coxae.
266 DISCOVERY REPORTS
ABDOMEN. Clothed with short fine hair. A tolerably clear pattern somewhat similar
to that of Myro kerguelenensis Camb., posteriorly with pale bars on a dark background
meeting at an angle directed forwards. Anteriorly these bars give place to pale elon-
gated patches or spots.
The female vulva is fairly large, dark and prominent.
The inferior spinners are the longest and strongest.
CEPHALOTHORAX. Yellow-brown with dark line markings as in M. kerguelenensis.
A few spinous hairs anteriorly.
Lecs. Pale yellow-brown, the third pair being slightly the shortest. Terminated by
three claws. Legs clothed mainly with stiff bristles.
Hasitat. Various localities in the island of South Georgia under stones on beach
and amongst moss. Also ‘“‘on the walls and stones outside the Marine Biological
Station, Grytviken”’.
| é & Loe ¥ : f
ae i ; : eke. ¥ ke “ ,
Be Re aa nae Rl IRR TS BA fee ecasisete is PRINTED
BH hae Far rene iad nee tA being tis ap tee Cavey DANG R RA TORRE ER MM 5.6
: WALTER © “LEWIS MA
deal "THE CAMBRIDGE
See yee ge ES FiO MOE 8 ORE RET Ne OME ve gr
: PRU Ace. ais Ca se ie PRE SIR GAA TPE,
tet > 3 Sy Se Si kia : : 2
; ;
. oh
ne
* e ‘ ripen
om ie iiss
; i
‘ ue
bo¢nrnt Mes
DISCOVERY ©
REPORTS
a “ee Vol Ill, pp. 267-296, plate XXXIX
vied by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
‘on behalf of the ae of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands _
“AND GYMNOSOMATA
me
1932
‘Price four shillings net
ey ee by the late
a . _ Anne L. Massy
Chloe WH
paar
cs & APR 4A 4932 a?
CAMBRIDGE
: re AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
t
ve on
ei
Sh hats es
[Discovery Reports. Vol. IIT, pp. 267-296, Plate XX XIX, March 1932]
MOLLUSCA: GASTROPODA THECOSOMATA
AND GYMNOSOMATA
By (THE LATE)
ANNE L. MASSY
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION .
List OF STATIONS .
List OF SPECIES
SysTEeMATIC ACCOUNT
Evrreropopa (‘Thecosomata)
Cavoliniidae .
Limacinidae
Procymbultidae
Cymbuliidae .
PrEROTA (Gymnosomata)
Pneumodermatidae
Cliopsidae
Clionidae .
List OF REFERENCES
PLaTE XXXIX .
page
. following page
269
270
271
272
273
281
285
287
289
289
293
294
295
296
MObEUSCA: GASTROPODA THECOSOMATA
AND GYMNOSOMATA
By (the late) Anne L. Massy
(Plate XX XIX; text-fig. 1)
PNA RO Dw eT LON
HE pelagic Mollusca, usually known as Pteropods, which form the subject of this
ik report, attracted at an early date the attention of ship captains and naturalist voyagers,
for they exist in the open sea far from any shelter other than that afforded by drifting
weed and sometimes occur in vast swarms. Individually they are very small. Indeed,
one of the larger species fully extended measures scarcely more than an inch.
The Thecosomata are protected by fragile shells, which may be coiled, triangular or
needle-shaped. One family, the Cymbultidae, possesses slipper-shaped gelatinous
conchae of great beauty. ‘The Gymnosomata, as their name implies, are without shells.
All are hermaphrodite and some species of Gymnosomata have been observed to be very
precocious in reaching sexual maturity: thus, Pelseneer (1887, p. 49) alludes to a speci-
men of Clione flavescens (Ggbr.) that was able to lay eggs although it was hardly 2:0 mm.
in length and still possessed ciliated rings. Kwietniewski (1902, p. 17) states that in a
number of other species the sexual elements develop early. In 1917 I noted that speci-
mens of Pneumodermopsis paucidens (Boas) from the west of Ireland, measuring only
I-25 mm. in length, had external accessory glands, and an individual measuring only
o-75 mm. had the penis evaginated (Massy, 1917, pp. 231-232).
Diurnal migration is a well-established phenomenon in this group.
Pteropods serve as food for some of our most valuable food fishes! and for sea birds.
They are said also to form the food of whales, and as early as 1770 Cranz, in his Historie
von Gronland, named Clione ‘‘ Walfischfrass”’ (food devoured greedily by the whale).
The earliest mention of the group appears to have been made in 1780 when Fabricius
produced his Fauna of Greenland and described Limacina helicina, Phipps, under the
name Argonauta arctica.
In the course of the Discovery Investigations many thousands of Pteropods have been
taken. A special study of the plankton has been made in southern waters near South
Georgia, the South Sandwich and the South Shetland Islands and the distribution of the
five species of Pteropods, to one or other of which the many individuals belonged, is
dealt with in a separate report. In warmer regions far fewer individuals were captured,
but thirty-one species belonging to eighteen genera were represented.
1 Statistics in the Irish Fisheries Office of the stomachs of herring and mackerel taken on the west coast
of Ireland show that Clione is a common food in spring and autumn.
270 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Much has been written about the bipolarity of pelagic animals. Prof. D’Arcy 'Thomp-
son}, in his paper on “ Marine Faunas”’ (p. 348), shows that the bipolar hypothesis may
be rejected in the case of the Tunicata, Holothurians, Crustacea and fish. As regards
the Pteropods, Cleodora sulcata (Pfeffer) and Clione antarctica, E. A. Smith, seem to be
closely allied to, but specifically distinct from, Cleodora pyramidata (L.) and Clione
limacina, Phipps. Limacina helicina, Phipps, on the other hand, is distributed at both poles.
Some writers have thought that the more archaic species might be expected to exist
near the poles, while others have suggested that the more original forms would be found
in the warmer regions of the ocean. It seems probable that Chun’s theory, that in the
case of pelagic animals the deep-sea fauna contains the most primitive types, is right.
Bonnevie has shown that three deep-water species, namely Peraclis diversa, Montero-
sato, Limacina helicoides, Jeft., and Cleodora falcata, Pfeffer, all exhibit archaic characters.
These are all represented in the present collection: Peraclis diversa, Monterosato was
taken north of the equator at o-800 m. and at 2500-2700 m. L. helicoides occurred
north-east of the Falkland Islands, off Tristan da Cunha and in three hauls west of the
Cape of Good Hope: the nets were fished at 600-2500 m. Cleodora falcata, Pfeffer,
was taken north-east of the Falkland Islands in soundings of 1050-1350 (—o) m.
I wish to express my thanks to Dr Kemp and the Discovery Committee for allowing
me to work out this collection, to Miss Barnes of the Dublin Museum, and lastly to
Madame Pruvot-Fol, who spared time to give me valuable help on several points and
whose drawings of the radula and jaws of the rare Spongiobranchaea intermedia, Pruvot-
Fol, are included in this Report.
List OF STALLIONS
The following table gives the positions and other data of the stations to which refer-
ence is made in the text. Stations made by R.R.S. ‘ Discovery’ have no letters prefixed
to the numbers; those of the R.R.S. ‘ William Scoresby’ have the prefix WS; and those
made from the 8.5. ‘Anglo-Norse’ have the prefix SS denoting ‘South Sandwich.’
Sounding
Station Position Date (m.)
8 42° 36’ 30” S, 18° 19’ 30” W 8. li. 25 3375
II 50° 26’ 00” S, 30° 27’ 00” W 16, ii, 26 5000
12 leah ROOMS 6322 77/a3 OMA) 18. i. 26 2744.
37 28 miles N 36 E of Jason Lt, 18-19. ili. 26 =
S. Georgia
62 49° 22' 00" S, 54’ 48’ 00” W 22. Vv. 26 —
66 48° 09’ 00" S, 52° 50’ 00” W 23. V. 26 —
68 46° 40’ 00” S, 51° 22’ 00” W 24. V. 26 =
71 43° 20’ 00" S, 46° 02’ 00” W 30. v. 26 5460
72 AI” 43’ 20" S, 42° 20’ 40” W I. vi. 26 5420
7 35. 18’ 00” S, 19° o1’ 10” W 12. vi. 26 3410
80 32° 46’ 00” 5S, 10° 00’ 00” W 17. vi. 26 =
81 32° 45°00" S, 8° 47’ 00” W 18. vi. 26 =
84 By) Gd Tele} Si,” Isl Cle 1B 22. V1. 26 2233
85 Sei, ol IS), AS ayy’ Bel" 18; 23. Vi. 26 4943
86 385 25000) 1S Om aie COME, 24. Vi. 26 —
1 Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinburgh, 1808.
Sounding
Station Position Date (m.)
87 Be SB AG, GPAs sy 18, 25. Vi. 26 5081
88 34° 04’ 00" S, 13° 00’ 00” E 27. Vi. 26 —
89 34° 05’ 15” S, 16°00’ 45” E 28. vi. 26 3926
100 33° 20’ 00” to 33° 46’ 00” S 2-4. X. 26 —
15° 18’ 00” to 15° 08’ 00” E =
101 33° 50’ 00” to 34° 13'00"S 14-15. x. 26 3734
16° 04’ 00” to 15° 49’ 00” E
107 45, 03/00" S, 17° 03’ 00” E 4. x1. 26 —
110 7m 5As00n 5, 124 39/30. E Ff AAS) —
II4 52° 25'00"S, 9°50’ 00” E 12. Xi. 26 —
130 54. 06’ 00” S, 36° 23’ 00” W 20. Xil. 26 122
133 53° 45 30° S, 35° 46’ 30” E 20-21. xii. 26 802
136 54. 22’ 00” S, 35° 21’ 00” W 21. Xil. 26 246
231 51° 29’ 30” S, 57° 18’ 15” W Ash Wo 27 143
238 48° 12’ 00” S, 51° 56’ 30” W Ble Ve 27 —
239 46° 56’ 00" S, 46° 03’ 00” W Zp Ville 2g) —
244 38° 26’ 30” S, 24° 48’ 30” W Q. Vi. 2 —
257 35° o1’ 00" S, 10° 18’ 00” E 24. Vi. 27 —
270 ugh Gfsh. SYoN" SS} gunn rig! Yay" 18) 27. Vil. 27 —
273 9° 38’ 00" S, 12° 42’ 30” E BiG NAb Hy) _
276 5a54, 007 Sy Ti 19) co” EF 5. vill. 27 —
279 Off Cape Lopez, French Congo. From 10. Vill. 27 58-67
8-5 miles N 71° E to 15 miles N 24° E
of Cape Lopez Lt.
287 2° 49’ 30S, 9° 25’ 30” W 1Q. Vili. 27 —
288 00° 56’ 00” S, 14° 08’ 30” W 21. Vili. 27 —
289 3° 04' 45” N, 16° 52’ 00” W 23-24. Vill. 27 —
294. Ange ls Nit6n 52) 45 Wi 25. Vill. 27 —
295 5° 30° 30” N, 17° 45’ 00” W 25. Vill. 27 —
207 12’ 08° 00” N, 20° 53’ 30” W 28. Vill. 27 —
WS 37 54° 45’ 00” S, 35° 11’ 00” W 22. Xil. 26 318
SS 7 54° 19’ 20” S, 29° 32’ 40” W 20 kin 27 —
SS 9 54° 31’ 00” S, 29° 40’ 00” W 2. Xi. 27 —
SS 10 54 30 20” S, 29° 38’ 45” W 2x27 —
SS 14 54° 30’ 00” S, 30° 11’ 00” W ils 2a —
SS 15 54 22’ 00" S, 30° 1100” W II. Xil. 27 —
SS 22 55° 50’ 00” S, 25° 56’ 00” W 22X27 =
55 31 60° 59’ 00” S, 25° 55’ 30” W 18.1. 28 —
SS 34 60° 51’ 00” S, 26° 25’ 00” W 21.1. 28
SS 35 60° 49’ 00” S, 26° 32’ 00” W Piso Ge) —
SS 45 62° 17’ 45" S, 27° 15’ 45” W 3. il. 28 —
SS 52 62° 15’ 00" S, 21° 36’ 20” W 15. li. 28 —
SS 54 60° 59’ 20” S, 23° 21’ 50” W 20. i. 28 =
SS 58 61° 55’ 00” S, 23° 40’ 00” W 23. i. 28 —
LIST OF STATIONS
LIST OF SPECIES
271
A. South Georgia and the South Shetland Islands.
Eupteropoda (‘Thecosomata).
Cleodora sulcata (Pfeffer).
Limacina helicina (Phipps).
Limacina balea (Miller).
Pterota (Gymnosomata).
Chone antarctica, E. A. Smith.
Spongiobranchaea australis, d’Orbigny.
272 DISCOVERY REPORTS
B. South Atlantic.
Eupteropoda (Thecosomata). Limacina helicoides, Jeffreys.
Cavolinia longirostris (Lesueur). Limacina bulimoides, d’Orbigny.
Cavolinia gibbosa (Rang) in d’Orbigny. Peraclis diversa, Monterosato.
Cavolinia inflexa (Lesueur). Procymbulia valdiviae, Meisenheimer.
Cavolinia tridentata (Forskal). Cymbulia peront, Blainville.
Cavolinia uncinata (Rang) in d’Orbigny. Cymbuliopsis intermedia, Tesch.
Cleodora pyramidata (L..). Pterota (Gymnosomata).
Cleodora cuspidata (Bosc.). Pneumoderma atlanticum, Oken.
Cleodora balantium, Rang. Spongiobranchaea australis, d’Orbigny.
Cleodora falcata, Pfeffer. Spongiobranchaea intermedia, A. Pruvot-
Cleodora sulcata (Pfeffer). Fol.
Hyalocylix (Creseis) striata, Rang. Pneumodermopsis macrochira, Meisenheimer.
Styliola (Creseis) subula (Quoy and Schizobrachium polycotylum, Meisenheimer.
Gaimard). Cliopsis krohni, 'Troschel.
Cuvierina columnella (Rang). Clione antarctica, E. A. Smith.
Limacina helicina (Phipps). Thliptodon gegenbauri, Boas.
Limacina balea, Moller. Thliptodon diaphanus, Meisenheimer.
Limacina retroversa (Fleming).
EUPTEROPODA (THECOSOMATA)
The Eupteropods owe their name to the development of the anterior lateral portions
of the foot into wing-like fins. These are placed at the sides of the mouth, which is
always on the anterior portion of the ventral surface. The lips of the mouth are covered
with vibratile cilia. Nearer the dorsal surface are a pair of tentacles (rhinophores) which
are generally unequal in size, the left being often knob-like, while the right, five to
twenty times longer, is usually cylindrical, rounded at the end and capable of being
withdrawn into a sheath. In Peraclis and in the Cymbultidae, however, both tentacles
are rudimentary and similar in size. The penis is near the tentacles, towards the right.
The fins are separated dorsally, but are joined ventrally by a median lobe, which forms
the posterior part of the foot and is known as the apron. In the genera Cleodora, Creseis
and Cuvierina the fins are bilobed, while in Cavolinia, just near the junction of the fin
with the apron, there is a suggestion of another lobe. A large mantle covers the viscera,
and the pallial cavity is placed ventrally in the Cavoliniidae and dorsally in the Limacini-
dae and Cymbuliidae. Fol (1875) has shown that torsion takes place in the arrangement
of the viscera during the development of the Cavoliniidae before the formation of the
shell, so that the entire visceral mass, but not the head, the nervous ganglia and penis, is
turned from right to left. On account of this the penis and genital duct open on the right
in the Limacinidae and on the left in the Cavoliniidae, except the penis which remains
on the right side. Cavolinia has also long lateral posterior appendages to the mantle
which pass through slits in the shell.
All Cavoliniids have a ‘‘ balancer”’ at the left side of the mantle, and inside the mantle
margin, on the ventral side of the body, is a small membranous lobe which constitutes a
CAVOLINIIDAE 273
rudimentary gill. The gill is absent in Diacria, Cleodora, Cuvierina, Limacina, and
Cymbulia, but is well specialized in the genus Peraclis.
The shell in all Eupteropods is very fragile and more or less transparent. In the
Cavoliniidae it is symmetrical and not coiled. The upper side has fine longitudinal ribs:
the lower side is much swollen and striated transversely. The digestive apparatus
(throughout the group) consists of a long tube with buccal bulb and salivary glands, and
a swollen gizzard, containing four large corneous, hyaline plates and one small one.
These plates are so large and many-angled that their outline shows clearly through the
brown skin and the numerous transverse muscle bands. There are also a number of
small chitinous pieces. The intestine has a small caecum. The liver pancreas is not
attached to the stomach, as in the Gymnosomata. The genital gland adheres closely
to the posterior part of the liver pancreas. It varies in shape so as to fit the space
allotted to it by the shell, being conical in Creseis and round in Cavolinia. The
hermaphrodite genital duct is always very long. The jaws are always placed ventrally
and are not much developed. The radula is three-toothed, except in Peraclis, where
there is an extra, but very rudimentary, lateral tooth on each side of the series of three
[(1) 1-1 (1)].
The nervous system includes two cerebral ganglia united below the oesophagus by a
long commissure, two pedal ganglia and from one to five visceral centres. There are no
pleural ganglia. The otocysts are attached to the cerebral ganglia between these and the
visceral mass. ‘The olfactory organ (Osphradium, Spengel’s organ) is placed close to the
otocysts. Eyes are completely absent. Bonnevie (1913, p. 52), however, has suggested
that the curious white plates which are so conspicuous on the top of the tentacles in
Cleodora falcata, Pfeffer, and Limacina helicoides, Jeff., may be organs of light produc-
tion or light perception. Vayssiere (1915, p. 190) says: “J’ai pu confirmer l’absence
absolue des organes visuels chez tous ces mollusques, il n’y en a pas méme de trés rudi-
mentaires comme cela s’observe chez d’autres Tectibranchs tels que les Philinidés et
les Scaphander.”
The large pallial cavity contains the organ of Bojanus, or paired kidney, the heart,
and also the gills, where these are developed.
All Eupteropods are phosphorescent. The food is wafted to the mouth by the cilia
and consists chiefly of Diatoms, Radiolaria and Foraminifera and occasionally of the
larvae of Copepods and other small Crustacea or even very young Eupteropods.
Family CAVOLINITDAE
Genus Cavolinia, Gioeni, 1783
Cavolinia longirostris (Lesueur), 1821.
Hyalaea longirostris, Lesueur (after Blainville), 1521.
Hyalaea limbata, d’Orb., 1836.
Hyalaea angulata, Souleyet, 1852.
Hyalaea fissirostris, Benson, 1861.
274 DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 279. 4mm. mesh net at back of trawl: 6 shells.
St. 288. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 3 specimens; 1 m. tow-net, oblique, 73-0 m. : 1 specimen.
The specific name of this species is taken from the long upper lip of the dorsal side
of the shell. It is one of the very few species which a beginner might venture to name
from the written description of the shell, as it is the only species with a shell of a tri-
angular shape when fully developed. At this stage the posterior “thorn” is always
wanting and the lateral points of the ventral side project in triangular-shaped portions
beyond the slits on the upper side. Boas (1886, p. 102) mentions that the smallest shells
which came under his observation (from Chinese seas) measured 2-5 mm. and the largest
(from the Atlantic) measured 9 mm. The specimen from St. 288 measured 7 mm.
DisTRIBUTION. This species is known from 40° N (Schliemenz, 1906, p. 20), and
occurs in all seas between 40° N and 40° S. It is very abundant in Indian and Chinese
seas and off the Great Belt of Australia.
Cavolinia gibbosa (Rang), in d’Orb., 1836.
Hyalaea flava, A. @Orb., 1836.
Hyalaea gegenbauri, Pfeffer, 1880.
St. 87. Young-fish trawl, rooo (—o) m.: 3 shells.
29° 27’ 00” N, 15° 07’ 00” W. 2m. net, goo m.: 24 specimens.
The fins of this species are generally trilobed, the apron is well developed and the
lateral appendages to the mantle are very long. The shell is very globular and has a
rounded upper lip measuring about one-seventh of the length of the shell when viewed
from above. It curves down over the mouth. The lateral points are very short and the
distance between them is considerably less than the breadth of the shell in the middle.
The posterior ‘“‘thorn”’ is bent like a fish hook.
The twenty-four specimens recorded from off the Canary Islands were taken from
the stomach of Naucrates.
DISTRIBUTION. Cosmopolitan except at the poles. Although a warm-water species it
avoids the immediate neighbourhood of the equator.
Cavolinia inflexa (Lesueur), 1812.
Hyalaea inflexa, Lesueur, 1812—13.
Hyalaea depressa, d’Orb., 1836.
Hyalaea inflexa and labiata, Souleyet, 1852.
Hyalaea vaginellina, Cantraine, 1840; Gegenbaur, 1855.
St. 80. Young-fish trawl, 1000 m.: 1 specimen.
St. 87. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 2 specimens.
St. 89. 2m. net, horizontal, 180 (—o) m.: 8 specimens.
St. 268. 1m. net, oblique, 73-0 m.: ? 2 young specimens.
2° 20’ 00" S, 12° 45’ 00” W. 1m. net on trawl: 1 specimen.
This species has trilobed fins and neither apron nor lateral appendages are much
developed. The shell is easy to distinguish from that of the other species, as the longi-
CAVOLINIIDAE 275
tudinal ribs on the upper valve are almost effaced and the lateral points which form its
greatest width are placed towards the centre, whereas in the other species of Cavolinia
they are nearer the posterior end. The upper lip, when viewed from above, projects
forward about as much as that of C. longirostris, but curves slightly upwards instead of
over the lip. It is also rounder laterally and the edge is serrated. The posterior ‘‘thorn”’
curves upwards over the dorsal side. ‘The lower side is not nearly so globular as in other
members of the genus and the lip is developed rather strongly. The specimens from
stations 80 and 89 measured 6-7 mm. in length.
DisTRIBUTION. In all seas between about 40° N and about 40° S latitude. Excep-
tionally it wanders with a warm current as far as 50° N (Massy, 1909).
Cavolinia tridentata (Forskal), 1775.
Anomia tridentata, Forskal, 1775.
Hyalaea affinis, @Orb., 1826-33.
St. 78. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 85. 4:5 m. net, 2000 (—o) m.: I specimen.
St. 86. 4:5 m. net, 1000 (—0) m.: 13 specimens.
St. 89. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 244. 1m. net, horizontal, 55 m.: 4 specimens.
St. 288. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 289. Young-fish trawl, 125-225 (—o) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 294. 1m. net, horizontal, 55 m.: 4 specimens.
Six of the above hauls were made off the African coast from the Gulf of Guinea to
the Cape. The remaining two were west of Tristan da Cunha. This comparatively large
species occurs in all warm seas. The specimen from St. 85 had a shell measuring 15 mm.
in length and appeared to be a form between the type and var. truncata, Boas. This
variety ‘se montre dans la partie la plus méridionale de |’Atlantique et la partie occi-
dentale de l’Océan Indien” (Boas, 1886, p. 212). The same author (loc. cit., p. 211)
mentions that examples of this species in the Eastern Pacific are smaller (9-13 mm.).
The specimens from St. 294 possessed fins of a greenish hue.
Cavolinia uncinata (Rang), in d’Orb., 1836.
Hyalaea uncinata, Rang, 1836.
Hyalaea uncinatiformis, Pfeffer, 1880.
St. 273. Young-fish trawl, 200-230 (—o) m.: 3 specimens and 1 shell.
St. 276. Young-fish trawl, 150 (—o) m.: 5 specimens.
St. 279. 4mm. mesh net on trawl, 58-67 m.: 8 shells.
St. 288. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 11 specimens; 1 m. tow-net, oblique, 73-0 m. : 2 specimens.
The above, which measured 6-7 mm. in length, were all caught off the Gulf of
Guinea and the Congo river. The species is generally distributed in tropical and sub-
tropical waters. Boas (1886, p. 120) mentions having seen a specimen of 11 mm., but
states that the usual size is 7mm. The most closely allied species is C. tridentata
(Forsk.), from which it is easily distinguished by the lateral points of the shell being
DIIt 2
276 DISCOVERY REPORTS
longer, the upper lip more turned downwards, and the posterior “thorn”’ curved more
upwards. The lower side is also more deeply sculptured.
Diacria, Gray, 1842
Diacria trispinosa (Lesueur), 1821.
Hyalaea trispinosa, Lesueur (in Blainville, Dictionn. d@ Hist. Nat., Xxi1, p. 82), 1824.
Hyalaea muronata, Quoy and Gaimard, 1827.
St. 89. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 3 specimens.
St. 1or. 4:5 m. net, 350-400 (—o) m.: 5 specimens.
St. 268. 1m. net, oblique, 73-0 m.: 3 specimens.
St. 279. 4mm. mesh net on trawl, 58-67 m.: 1 shell.
St. 288. Young-fish trawl, 250 (-o) m.: 9 specimens; 1 m. net, oblique, 73-0 m.: 3 specimens.
The above hauls were all made off the African coast from Cape ‘Town to the Gulf of
Guinea. Some of the specimens had hydroids on the shells. The average length was 8mm.
This genus is distinguished by having bilobed fins, a very large apron and neither gill
nor lateral appendages. It resembles Cavolinia in the form of jaw, radula and gizzard
plates, and in the rest of the internal organization. ‘The posterior end of the shell is pro-
longed three or four times as much as in Cavolinia, and is almost straight instead of being
bent. It terminates in a little knob, similar to the embryo shell in this position in Cleodora.
The lateral points are also very long, are placed at about the centre of the shell and
constitute its greatest breadth. They occupy about two-fifths of this measurement. The
hinge is not nearly so well defined as in Cavolinia. The shell is chiefly transparent, but a
chocolate-brown tinge is usually distributed in the region of the lip. The lower side is
not much swollen.
DIsTRIBUTION. Universal except at the poles.
Genus Cleodora, Péron and Lesueur, 1810
Cleodora sulcata (Pfeffer), 1879.
Cleodora sulcata, Pelseneer, 1888; Eliot, 1907.
Over 2000 specimens were caught in hauls made at thirty-four stations at the South
Sandwich Islands at soundings of 0-250 m. A few occurred also at South Georgia
and between the Falkland Islands and South Georgia at soundings of o-500 m.
The specimens measured 2—30 mm. in length. The usual length of large individuals is
16-18mm. With fins fully extended the length may reach 25-30 mm. The fins and apron
are generally white, but in hauls made in January and February 1928, at the South Sand-
wich Islands (Sts. SS 34, 35, 52, 54 and 58) these portions of the body had a border of
chocolate-brown which sometimes spread all over the fins on both sides. The tint be-
came paler as the distance from the margin increased. Individuals in which the animal
was in a peculiar soft condition, appearing to show degeneration in the cells, occurred at
the South Sandwich Islands (Sts. SS 7, 9, 10, 14, 22 and 45).
CAVOLINIIDAE 277
The genus Cleodora has bilobed fins and a small cephalic lobe. The pallial lateral
appendages are rudimentary. The shell is rhomboid in shape when viewed from above.
The present species owes its name to the distinct transverse furrows on the shell, of
which there is scarcely a trace in the nearly allied C. pyramidata (L.). Other differences
are that the fins are shorter and their edges usually undulated. The apron is larger. The
teeth are not serrated, the median tooth is narrower and the lateral teeth have broader
bases. The dorsal side of the shell has five longitudinal ribs of which the median is the
strongest. It extends into a point posteriorly and terminates in an oyal swelling which
represents the embryo shell. The ventral side is not much swollen and a triangular-
shaped portion of the upper valve is visible above it. The anatomy of the Terra Nova
specimens has been described (Massy, 1920, figs. 3-6).
DistRIBUTION. Antarctic to about 50° S in the Indian Ocean and 46° 5S in the Pacific
(Meisenheimer, 1905). From 5° S of New Zealand to far within the Antarctic Circle
(Massy, 1920).
Cleodora pyramidata (L.), 1767.
Hyalaea lanceolata, Lesueur, 1913.
Cleodora exacuta, Gould, 1852.
Cleodora labiata, Sow. (in Reeve, Conch. Iconica), 1877.
Cleodora lamartinieri, Rang (in d’Orb., Mollusques de Cuba), 1841.
St. 81. 4:5 m. net, 650 (—o) m.: 18 specimens.
St. 87. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 21 specimens.
St. 88. 1m. net, horizontal, 3000-0 m.: ? 1 specimen.
St. 101. 4°5 m. net, 1310-1410 m.: 2 specimens.
St. 239. 4°5 m. net, 1050-1350 (—o) m.: ? 2 specimens.
St. 288. 1m. net, oblique, 73-0 m.: I specimen.
The above specimens measured 5~12 mm. in length. The shells were in very poor
condition, but the specimen from St. 288 appeared to belong to var. lata, Boas. This
author (1886, p. 72) thus defines the distribution of var. /ata: “ Atlanterhavet fra c.
40° N Br. til henved 30° S Br. (Middelhavet), Indiske Ocean (fra dettes Nordgraense
tilc. 24° S Br.), Kinesiske Hay, Vestlige Stille Hav’’. Three of the hauls were made west
of Cape Town, and the remaining three were made to the north of Ascension Island, to
the north of Tristan da Cunha and to the north-west of the Falkland Islands. ‘The species
is cosmopolitan in warm and temperate seas.
Cleodora cuspidata, Bosc, 1802.
Cleodora cuspidata, Quoy and Gaimard, 1833.
Cleodora Lessonii, Rang, 1830.
Cleodora cuspidata (Bosc), 1802.
St. 78. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 81. 4-5 m. net, 650 (-o) m.: 8 specimens; 1 m. net, go (—o) m.: 4 specimens.
St. 87. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 4 specimens.
278 DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 89. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 4 specimens.
St. 276. Young-fish trawl, 150 (—o) m.: 2 specimens.
St. 288. 1m. net, oblique, 73-0 m.: 1 specimen.
13° 25’ 00” N, 18° 22’ 00” W, 4:5 m. net, goo-o m.: I specimen.
The above hauls were made north of Tristan da Cunha and from Cape Verde to Cape
‘Town.
The animal of this species is very like that of C. pyramidata (L.).'The shell is extremely
fragile and transparent when fresh. It differs from all the other species by the extreme
length of the lateral points, which start from below the middle of the shell. ‘The dorsal
side has a strong median keel which projects forward in a point anteriorly. The posterior
end is curved over the back and terminates in the rounded embryo shell. There are two
longitudinal ribs on either side of the median keel and strong transverse furrows are
present on both sides of the shell.
DistriBuTion. Mediterranean (Boas, 1886, p. 83). Atlantic (exceptionally to 59° N)
and Indian Oceans: Antarctic (Meisenheimer, 1906). South-west Ireland (Massy,
1909).
Cleodora balantium, Rang, 1834.
Hyalaea balantium, @’Orb., 1826-33.
Balantium recurvum, Sow., 1877.
St. 276. Young-fish trawl, 150 (-o) m.: 2 specimens.
St. 286. Young-fish trawl, 125 (—o) m.: 4 specimens.
St. 287. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (—o) m.: 2 specimens.
St. 288. Young-fish trawl, 250 (—o) m.: 5 specimens; 1 m. net, oblique, 73-0 m.: 1 specimen.
St. 294. Young-fish trawl, 100-150 (—o) m.: 2 specimens.
St. 297. Young-fish trawl, 200-300 (—o) m.: 1 specimen.
All the specimens were caught between Cape Verde and the Congo river. They
measured 8-29 mm. Hydroids were present on the shells in four of the hauls.
Although widely distributed this appears to be a rare species everywhere. The shell
has no lateral points and the upper and lower lips project very slightly in the centre. The
upper surface has three strong longitudinal ribs and transverse furrows. The lower
side of the shell is swollen and prominent.
DistTRIBUTION. Atlantic (Boas, 1886). Indian Ocean (Boas, 1886). Pacific (d’Or-
bigny, 1847). North of New Guinea (Challenger Expedition).
Cleodora falcata, Pfeffer, 1880.
Cho polita, Pelseneer, 1888; Meisenheimer, 1905.
St. 71. Young-fish trawl, 2000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 85. 4:5 m. net, 2000 (—o) m.: ? 1 specimen.
St. 89. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: ? 1 specimen.
St. 239. 4:5 m. net, 1050-1350 (—0) m.: 2 specimens.
CAVOLINIIDAE 279
All these specimens were in very bad condition and showed no traces of shells. Three
were captured north-east of the Falkland Islands, and the two to which a query is at-
tached were taken west of Cape ‘Town. Vayssiere (1915, p. 83) regards Cleodora chaptali,
Souleyet, C. andreae, Boas, and C. falcata, Pfeffer, as synonymous with C. curvata,
Souleyet. The latter species was named from a single individual 2 mm. in length having
a perfectly smooth shell. The species recorded here is the same as that referred by
Meisenheimer (1905), Massy (1909) and Bonnevie (1913) to C. falcata, which is cha-
racterized by a dark purple body and a head which has the shape of a triangular lobe.
The fins have a continuous margin. The tentacles have ivory-coloured end-plates: the
right is the larger and is placed more anteriorly. The pallial cavity is placed ventrally,
but extends also to the right side. The tongue-shaped gill is also on the right side, and
the heart and kidney are placed ventrally. The shell is 2-5 times as long as broad. The
ventral side has four shallow longitudinal furrows which are entirely absent from the
dorsal side. On neither side is there a median projection of the lip of the shell. Lateral
keels are present, and the posterior end is bent dorsally and terminates in the round
embryonic shell usual in the genus. The type specimen measured 12:5 mm. in
length.
Cleodora andreae, Boas, has a shell in which the length is 1-5 times the breadth. The
dorsal side has five longitudinal ribs and the ventral side two. Very weak transverse
furrows are present. Length 20mm. A single individual was taken in the South
Atlantic at 33° 30’ S, 11° 0’ W.
C. chaptali, Souleyet, is described from a single example 19 mm. in length taken at
the Cape. The shell, according to Boas (1886, p. 81), is not so flat and is much broader
than that of C. andreae. It has five longitudinal ribs on the dorsal side and the transverse
furrows are more strongly marked than in C. andreae.
Of C. curvata, Souleyet, Boas (op. cit.) states that ‘‘It has the same general form as
C. chaptali but is quite smooth, the mouth is narrower and the posterior end is bent
upwards strongly. It is not the young of one of the foregoing species; if that were so its
shell would be similar to the most posterior 2 mm. length portion of the shell of the
species concerned, which is never the case. Souleyet took a single example in the
Atlantic Ocean”’.
DisTRIBUTION. 44° N, 32° W, one. “Atlantic Ocean”, one (Pfeffer, 1880). Davis
Strait to 37° N (Meisenheimer, 1905). West of Ireland, 50° to 54° N, 400-1200 fathoms,
four living (Massy, 1909). Empty shells, Azores, Canaries and South American coast
(Challenger Expedition). North Atlantic only “in the deeper layers of the ocean”’
(Bonnevie, 1913).
Subgenus Hyalocylix, Fol, 1875
Cleodora (Hyalocylix) striata (Rang), 1828.
Hyalaea striata, d’Orb., 1826-33.
Creseis fasciata, Delle Chiaje, 1841.
280 DISCOVERY REPORTS
St. 71. Young-fish trawl, 2000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen.
25° 47’ 00" S, 14° 48’ 00” W, hand-net: 2 specimens.
The specimen taken north-east of the Falkland Islands measures 12 mm. in length.
Boas mentions that the largest he had seen measured 8 mm.
The subgenus Hyalocylix is chiefly distinguished from Cleodora by having no
cephalic lobe. ‘The tentacles are very unequal, the left being almost absent. The shell is
hornshaped and fluted transversely and is slightly curved in the dorsal direction. The
embryo shell is thimble-shaped, and as the animal grows this portion is separated by a
partition and it breaks off eventually so that adult shells are always blunt posteriorly.
DistriBuTIon. Although never abundant in large shoals, this is widely distributed in
all tropical and sub-tropical seas.
Subgenus Styliola, Lesueur, 1825
Cleodora (Styliola) subula (Quoy and Gaimard), 1827.
Cleodora (Creseis) spinifera, Rang, 1828; Sow., 1877.
Hyalaea subula, d’Orb., 1836.
Cleodora subulata, Souleyet, 1852.
St. 80. 2m. net, 30-0 m.: I specimen.
St. 87. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 3 specimens.
St. 89. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 287. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (—o) m.: ? 2 specimens.
Three of these hauls were made off the African coast from the Gulf of Guinea to Cape
Town. A single specimen was taken north of Tristan da Cunha. The largest examples
were 10-12 mm. in length. This is a warm-water species, but it apparently avoids the
very warm water at the equator. In this subgenus the animal has a very distinct
cephalic lobe. The shell is horn-shaped and easily recognized by the longitudinal furrow
along the dorsal side, which is so deep as to form a ridge in the interior. It has transverse
striae and microscopic longitudinal striae, and it is not curved. The embryo shell is
persistent and not separated by a partition.
Genus Cuvierina, Boas, 1886
Cuvierina columnella (Rang), 1827.
Cleodora obtusa, Quoy and Gaimard, 1824.
Cuvieria urceolaris, Mérch, 1850.
Triptera columnella and cancellata, Pfeffer, 1879.
St. 80. 2m. net, 30-0 m.: I specimen.
St. 84. Tow-net on dredge, 2000-0 m.: 1 specimen.
St. 85. 4:5 m. net, 2000 (-o) m.: I specimen; 2 m. net, goo-o m.: I specimen.
29° 27’ 00” N, 15° 07’ 00” W, 2 m. tow-net, o-goo m.: 1 specimen from stomach of Naucrates
ductor.
LIMACINIDAE 281
The above were taken north of Tristan da Cunha and between that island and Cape
Town. They measured 7-11 mm. in length. This species is abundant in the warm waters
of the Atlantic, Indian and Pacific Oceans. Boas (1886, p. 131) explains why the name
Cuvieria, given by Rang, cannot be used. The genus is characterized by having a body
which is rounded posteriorly. The cephalic lobe is rudimentary. The right tentacle is
much longer than the left. The radula has a median tooth with an almost rectangular
base, with a breadth twice its length. The cusp, dentate only on the upper sides which
slope towards the anterior corners of the base, is much more powerful than in the two
species last mentioned. The lateral teeth are much smaller in proportion and have very
short cusps with denticles varying in number from about seven to seventeen. The apron
is broad, but so narrow as to show the mouth. The shell is at first cylindrical and termin-
ates in a point. The pointed portion is separated from the rest of the shell by a partition:
it is easily broken off, but, when perfect, forms one-third of the length of the shell. The
latter is transparent and finely striated both longitudinally and transversely. The widest
part is about at the centre of a complete shell, instead of being at the mouth as in Cleo-
dora. Just below the mouth the shell is slightly constricted and, as the under-side is
somewhat hollowed out anteriorly, it follows that the mouth is kidney-shaped rather
than circular.
C. urceolaris, Morch, is regarded by Boas and Vayssiere as a variety of C. columnella.
It is found in the Pacific and is characterized by having a smaller shell which is more
swollen posteriorly and less drawn out anteriorly, and the neck is scarcely indicated.
Vayssiere (1915, p. 107) mentions having examined specimens from New Caledonia
and found their organization to be similar to that of the typical variety of the Atlantic.
Family LIMACINIDAE
Genus Limacina, Cuvier, 1817
Limacina helicina (Phipps), 1773.
Argonauta arctica, O. Fabr., 1780.
Limacina arctica, Moller, 1841.
Limacina antarctica, Woodward, 1856; Pelseneer, 1887; Eliot, 1907.
Extremely numerous in the seas surrounding South Georgia and the South Sandwich Islands.
No fewer than 5706 specimens were collected at seventy-eight stations in this area.
All the specimens were taken during the Antarctic summer, two-thirds of the hauls
being made in December and January. The largest shoals were taken at South Georgia,
and at night. On one occasion (St. 136) 2074 specimens, measuring 3-5 mm., were caught.
In all cases the measurements are those of the diameter of the body coiled up, and not
with fins extended. The diameter varied from 1 to 6mm. Most of the specimens had
lost their shells, and opercula were usually present only in very young individuals. One
example of 3 mm. diameter was, however, observed with an operculum. This is oval,
with only one turn in the spire. A small gelatinous mass was taken in a December haul,
at the South Sandwich Islands (St. SS 31), which contained a number of vertical white
282 DISCOVERY REPORTS
lines each measuring ca. 1 mm. in length. Each line contained 1o—12 eggs touching one
another. At St. 136, also in December, a specimen of L. helicina with an injured gonad
showed similar eggs. Spawning specimens were taken in the month of January, in the
Terra Nova Expedition (Massy, 1920). Although the largest haul was made at night,
heavy catches occurred in the day also. Paulsen, in his plankton investigations in the
waters round Iceland, in 1904, has pointed out that the difference between day and night
is but slight in the Arctic summer, and he found that Pteropods at Iceland were able to
stand daylight and moreover lived on organisms which were dependent on the daylight.
About one hundred examples from St. 133 from hauls at 50 and too m. had pink
bodies. Usually the colour is dirty white, the liver and gonad being darker and more
variable, while the region about the mouth is very dark.
Most of the species of this family are very small and have a sinistral shell with a spire
more or less developed and a horny operculum, which may be circular or oval. L. heli-
cina was described by Phipps nearly 160 years ago under the name of Clio helicina.
Arctic specimens are thus described by Sars (1878, p. 399): “‘ Animal atro-purpureum
vel obscure violaceum, alis pallidioribus, pellucidis”. In the Terra Nova collection of
27,000 individuals from the Antarctic, the colour of the body of the animal was found to
be lemon-yellow in small specimens, fawn turning brown in larger, and dark brown in
all specimens above 2:5 mm. in diameter (Massy, 1920). The shell is very thin and has
a low spire of about five or six whorls, with a deep suture. The surface is closely fur-
rowed and the shell can reach 8 mm. in size (Meisenheimer, 1905, p. 410).
Sir C. Eliot (1907, p. 7) found six points of difference between specimens taken by
the ‘Discovery’ in Antarctic waters, which he regarded as L. antarctica, and a large
collection of L. helicina from Davis Strait and the North Pacific.
(1) Antarctic specimens were smaller and the fins were smaller in proportion to the
size of the shell. I have found Antarctic specimens, varying in size from Os mm. to
6-o mm. in diameter, and the fins seem to be very variable in size, some being much
longer and thinner than others. Probably the state of extension at the time they were
killed, and the degree of strength of the different kinds of preserving fluid, would also
affect the fins and cause contraction or make them appear long-drawn out and flabby.
(2) and (3) Striation and umbilical border of shell. Most of the present specimens
have lost their shells. In the Terra Nova examples shells with faint spiral striae but
with no umbilical border were observed in specimens up to a size of 2-5 mm. Meisen-
heimer (1905, p. 410) found that the umbilical border was well marked only in adult
specimens and was but feebly developed in specimens of about 3 mm. in diameter.
(4) Distribution of colour. As already noticed this would seem to vary with age from
lemon-yellow to fawn, pink and dark brown.
(5) Posterior lobe of foot more deeply and distinctly divided. ‘‘In the Terra Nova
specimens this is certainly the case compared with Boas (1886), fig. 70 of ‘Table 5, but
the figures of Vayssiére (1915, pl.-vii, figs. 135a and 136) of the examples of L. helicina
from Spitsbergen which he has studied, closely resemble many of the specimens in the
present (‘Terra Nova) collection”? (Massy, 1920).
LIMACINIDAE 283
(6) Variations in the teeth. Sir C. Eliot found the base of the median tooth in L. ant-
arctica to be straight, while in L. helicina it was almost horse-shoe shaped. I have found
that this character is dependent upon the position which the tooth happens to take when
being mounted. Even in the same specimen the median tooth can exhibit both these
forms.
DISTRIBUTION. Coasts of Norway (Sars, 1878). Spitsbergen (Vayssiére, 1915). Nova
Zembla, White Sea (Meisenheimer, 1905). Greenland, Iceland, Labrador; North
Pacific to California as L. pacifica, Dall (Boas, 1886, p. 42). In southern regions, where
Vayssiere (1915, p. 124) thinks it has been accidentally introduced by marine currents,
it has been observed as far north as 35° to 31° S (Meisenheimer, 1905).
Limacina balea, Moller, 1841.
Spirialis Gouldit, Stimpson, 1851.
Heterofusus balea, Mérch, 1857; Gould, 1870.
237 specimens identified with certainty, and 16 which appear to belong to this species, from
stations in the neighbourhood of South Georgia and the South Sandwich Islands.
This species was taken in practically the same area as L. helicina, namely, the water
enclosing South Georgia, and the South Sandwich Islands, roughly from 52° 5S to 62°'S
latitude, and from 20° W to 40° W longitude. Two very small specimens were taken a
few degrees further north (St. 11). The largest specimens have a spire of five or six
whorls. In all the spire is higher in proportion to the width of the last whorl than is the
case in L. retroversa (Fleming). Spiral striae were not observed on any of the shells. The
specimens were usually taken in small numbers, but in four hauls made at the end of
May 1927 off Cumberland Bay, South Georgia, catches of fifty to two hundred occurred.
The other hauls were made from November to March. Boas (1886, p. 44) states that his
largest specimen measured 5:5 mm. in length and the shell had ten whorls. It was finely
striated spirally and transversely. Boas (op. cit.) and Vayssiere (1915, p. 143) regard
L. retroversa (Fleming) as the same species as L. balea and consider that the various
differences noted in the shell are due to differences of age. In support of this view I may
mention that all the specimens I have seen of L. retroversa are smaller than L. balea. On
the other hand, both in the present collection and in that made by the ‘’'Terra Nova’, the
two forms were not taken together. The localities were indeed widely separated.
DIsTRIBUTION. Temperate zones between Arctic and Antarctic and circumtropical
zone (Bonnevie, 1913).
Limacina retroversa (Fleming), 1828.
Heterofusus retroversus, Fleming, 1828; Gould, 1870.
Atlanta trochiformis, d@’Orb., 1835-47.
Spirialis flemingii, Forbes and Hanley, 1850.
Two specimens were picked out from a haul north-east of the Falkland Islands (St. 68).
DistriBuTION. Atlantic and Pacific in warm and temperate seas (Bonnevie, 1913).
Mediterranean, British Isles, and occasionally off Norway (Sars, 1878).
DII 3
284 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Limacina helicoides, Jeffreys, 1877.
St. 8. 2m. net, 600-700 m.: I specimen.
St. 71. Young-fish trawl, 2000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 87. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 89. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 100 C. Young-fish trawl, 2500-2000 m.: 1 specimen.
Three of the above hauls were made west of Cape ‘Town; the other two were made
between Tristan da Cunha and the Falkland Islands. This is always a rare species and
appears to belong to a water layer with temperature below 10° C. The animal is purple-
black in colour and, as in L. helicina, the pigmented outer skin peels off very easily.
Vayssiére (1915, p. 136) thinks it probable that the body is reddish or violet when alive.
The fins are oval and have a continuous margin without any lobe. The apron is not very
large and carries a horny operculum with a spire of two turns, the last being 8-10 times
wider than the first. The right tentacle is much larger than the left, and, as in Cleodora
falcata, Pfeffer, both tentacles are surmounted by conspicuous ivory-coloured plates.
One of the four large plates in the gizzard is always larger than the rest. ‘The median and
lateral teeth are proportionately of the same size. The median tooth is triangular, but the
denticles are very irregular in shape and size. 'The genital gland is yellow, and the sac-
shaped copulatory organ has a very long caecal prolongation. ‘The shell is snail-shaped,
opaque and dull orange in colour. It is composed of 3-34 whorls and has very fine
transverse striae.
This is the largest species of the genus. Vayssiere (1915, p. 137) gives the transverse
dimensions of the animal across the fins as 10-11 mm.., and the size of the shell 4-9 mm.
in diameter and 3-6 mm. in height.
DISTRIBUTION. “Several stations in the Atlantic, from off the British Isles to the
Azores, always dead and at considerable depths” (Sykes, 1905). Atlantic, south of
equator, along African coast, alive (Meisenheimer, 1905). South-west Ireland, alive
(Massy, 1909). Western part of North Atlantic, 400-1500 m. (Bonnevie, 1913). North
Atlantic off the Azores, four alive (Vayssiere, 1915).
Limacina bulimoides (d’Orbigny), 1836.
Atlanta bulimoides, d’Orb., 1836.
Spiralis bulimoides, Eydoux and Souleyet, 1840.
St. 87. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 20 specimens.
This is a small species, individuals measuring only 2 mm. in length with fins extended.
The shell has a relatively high spire composed of five or six whorls, and measures
1~2 mm. in length. It is smooth and transparent, and generally of a dark horn colour.
The operculum is oblong with an eccentric spire.
The species occurs in the warmer portions of all seas. It does not appear to have been
taken farther north in the Atlantic than between Newfoundland and the Azores (Bon-
nevie, 1913). Mlle Bonnevie observed that most of the specimens had a bright red
PROCYMBULIIDAE 285
columnellar margin. Usually this is amber tinted (Vayssiére, 1915, p. 141). It has been
recorded from the eastern Pacific and from Chinese seas to 40° N and 170° W (Boas,
1886).
Genus Peraclis, Forbes (emend.), 1844
Peraclis diversa, Monterosato, 1884.
Spirialis diversa (Monterosato), 1884.
Peracle diversa, Locard, 1897.
Peraclis bispinosa, Pelseneer, 1888.
St. 295. Young-fish trawl, 2500-2700 (—0) m.: 1 specimen.
6° 55’ 00” N, 15° 54’ 00” W, 2m. net, 0-800 m.: 8 specimens.
The first of the above hauls was made off the Gulf of Guinea and the other to the
north-east of Ascension Island.
The principal differences between this genus and Limacina are that Peraclis is cha-
racterized by having a well-specialized gill and a radula with rudimentary lateral teeth
so that the formula is (1) 1-1-1 (1). A large cephalic lobe is developed, bearing rudi-
mentary tentacles of equal size. The fins, which are broad and plate-like, have a con-
tinuous margin without lobes. A caecum appears to be absent from the intestine.
The present species has a shell with three whorls, the last of which is very wide. The
suture has transverse folds. The surface of the shell is covered with a beautiful hexagonal
network except on the last quarter or third, which is smooth. The outer lip is generally
broken, but, if perfect, a third spine appears. The shell measures 8-9 mm. in length by
about 6 mm. in width at the mouth. The sub-circular operculum has a spire of six turns.
DistTRIBUTION. Mediterranean. Atlantic. Bonnevie (1913) observed that this species
was taken by the Michael Sars North Atlantic Expedition up to lat. 46° 58’ N, not
among surface plankton, but mainly from a depth of ca. 1000 m., and its distribution
was in conformity with the extension of a water layer with a temperature of ca. 6—-8° C.
and a salinity of 35-35°5 °/c0
Family PROCYMBULIIDAE
Genus Procymbulia, Meisenheimer, 1905
Procymbulia valdiviae, Meisenheimer, 1905.
St. 37. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, go (-o) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 62. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, go (—o) m.: 5 specimens.
St. 66. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, 45 (—o) m.: 2 specimens.
St. 71. Young-fish trawl, 2000 (—o) m.: 7 specimens.
St. 72. 4:5 m. tow-net, 2000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 78. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 85. 4:5 m. tow-net, 2000 (—0) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 110. 1 m. tow-net, horizontal, 178 m.: 1 specimen.
St. 114. 4°5 m. tow-net, 650~700 m.: I specimen.
St. 238. 1m. tow-net, horizontal, 148 m.: 2 specimens.
St. 239. 4°5 m. tow-net, 1050-1350 (-o) m.: 2 specimens.
St. WS 68. 70 cm. tow-net, vertical, 750-500 m.: ? 1 very young specimen.
286 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Meisenheimer (1905, pp. 13-14) defines the characters of the genus Procymbulia as
follows: “‘ Dieses neue, eigentiimliche Genus, welches als ein direkter Vorfahre der
Cymbuliiden aufgefasst werden muss, zeigt die Merkmale der Familie nur insofern, als
es eben noch eine aufgewundene Korperform besitzt, unterscheidet sich aber aufs
scharfste von Limacina und Peraclis dadurch, dass seine Mantelhéhle nicht mehr dorsal
gelegen ist, sondern bereits ventral verlagert erscheint. Von der Valdivia Expedition
nur in einem einzigen Exemplar erbeutet, dessen Schale aufgelést war.
““Schale unbekannt. Spirale des Kérpers niedrig, die letzte Windung machtig ange-
schwollen. Mantel. Mantelhéhle ventral gelegen, Mantelrand mit wohlentwickeltem
Fortsatz ‘balancer’.—Flossen zu einer einheitlichen, machtigen Scheibe verwachsen,
die am freien Rand einen unpaaren, medianen Fortsatz von stumpfer, lappenartiger
Gestalt tragt. Zu beiden Seiten des letzteren sind 2 kleine, tentakelartige Zipfel inseriert.
Rissel. Mundabschnitt unter Umbildung der eigentlichen Fussteile zu einem Rissel
umgewandelt, von ahnlicher Form, wie ihn Peraclis aufweist. 'Tentakel symmetrisch,
auf beiden Seiten gleich gross, ohne Scheide. Visceralganglien aus 2 eigentlichen
Visceralganglien und einem unpaaren Abdominalganglion bestehend. Darmtractus.
Mit spiralig aufgewundenem Enddarm und mit langem Aftersipho.
“Procymbulia valdiviae. Mit den Merkmalen des Genus. Die medianen Teile der
Flossenflache sowie die Mantelrander stark chokoladebraun pigmentiert. Oberkiefer
und Radulazahne (1: 1:1) machtig entwickelt. Masse: Hohe der Spirale 5 mm.,
Flossenbreite 10 mm. Fundort, Stat. 169 (34° 145, Br. 80° 31’ O. L.) etwas nordlich
von der Neu-Amsterdam-Insel. Vert-Zug 2000 m. Oberfl. Temp. 17,1°; leicht bewegte
See; 1 Exemplar.”
The Discovery specimens show that this species is widely distributed in the South
Atlantic from 55° S to 35° S and from off the Falklands to Bouvet Island and Cape
Town. ‘Twenty-five specimens occurred in the twelve hauls, seven of which were made
over soundings of 700-2000 m. The type measured 10 mm. across the fins. In the
present collection this measurement varies from 6 to 22 mm., but in the specimen to
which a query is affixed it is only 3 mm. As in the type they are without shells. Possibly
in this species the larval shell is retained in early life but does not persist. I make this
suggestion because in the older specimens the coiled nucleus is enclosed in a firm mem-
brane, and in the younger examples the nucleus is imperfect and more or less falling to
pieces as if in need of protection. In some of the specimens which are flattened and in
poor condition this coil is not distinguishable. Where distinct it is about in the position
of the figure indicated by Meisenheimer (1905, pl. i, fig. 7), ¢.e. almost in a line with the
lobe on the left fin; but occasionally, and particularly in young specimens, it appears to
be almost in a line with the lobe of the right fin, and as the animal grows the nucleus
shifts until it is under the middle of the mouth, and then almost under the lobe of the
left fin. With regard to these lobes, they are so well marked in some specimens that they
might easily be regarded as some kind of tactile organ. In a few specimens they are
absent or indicated by a dark line on the fin surface, but are not separated by a fold or
split from the flat surface of the fin. It does not appear to be a character dependent on
sana ia
| eo ~ op
CYMBULIIDAE 287
age, as specimens with a fin breadth of ro-22 mm. possessed the lobes. In the most
perfect specimens the outer edge of the fin takes a beautiful circular sweep and the white
surface is bordered with purple-brown. The specimens from Sts. 62 and 239 had minute
tubercles dotted all over the surface.
This little-known species was collected by the Valdivia Expedition in 34° 14’ 00” S,
80° 31’ 00” E, somewhat north of New Amsterdam Island.
Family CYMBULIIDAE
Genus Cymbulia, Péron and Lesueur, 1810
Cymbulia peroni, Blainville, 1818.
Cymbulia proboscidea, Gray, 1850.
St. 81. 4:5 m. tow-net, 650 (—o) m.: 3 specimens and 4 conchae.
St. 86. 4:5 m. tow-net, 1000 (—0) m.: 3 specimens with conchae.
St. 87. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (-o) m.: 1 specimen with concha.
St. 257. Young-fish trawl, 100-150 (—o) m.: 1 concha.
St. 268. Young-fish trawl, 100-150 (—o) m.: 13 specimens with 8 conchae; 1 m. tow-net, oblique,
73-0 m.: 17 specimens and 5 conchae; 1 m. net, horizontal, 73 m.: 4 conchae.
One of the above hauls was made north of ‘Tristan da Cunha and the remainder between
Elephant Bay, West Africa, and Cape Town. Some of the animals were still attached to
their transparent slipper-like shells. A large specimen measured 30 mm. across the fins.
The ventral lobe of the fin is transparent and strengthened by two muscle bands placed side
by side, which become fused together in a point distally. The filament at the extremity,
which is shown in Boas’ illustration (1886, Tab. 3, fig. 30), was missing in all the speci-
mens. The conchae measured 32~—55 mm. in length. An exceptionally large concha
(St. 257) measured 66 mm. in length by 28 mm. in diameter. Tesch (1904) has described
a species of Cymbulia as C. sibogae, the deutoconch of which is characterized by the
acute dorsal extremity, by the straight rows of denticles on the aboral surface, by its
smaller size and shallower sinus at the ventral end. A concha from St. 86 had a pointed
extremity but the sinus at the ventral end was V-shaped. When, however, the conchae
are in poor condition and obviously beginning to dissolve away, they have a very thin
acute dorsal extremity and no tubercles.
In this family, as in the last two genera, the tentacles are small and of equal size. ‘The
pallial cavity is situated dorsally and there is no gill. The fins are very large and are con-
nected anteriorly with the proboscis and posteriorly with the apron. They are rather
thick and opaque, except at the edges where the muscles can be seen. The mantle is thin
and very extensive, and covers the transparent slipper-shaped deutoconch of horny
substance, which protects the viscera. The deutoconch succeeds a calcareous spiral
operculate larval shell. The jaws are not much developed. The radula, where present,
has the formula 1-1-1. The gizzard contains four large and one small plate, as well as a
number of very small chitinous pieces. Vayssiére (1915, p. 173) says that the deutoconch
or protecting organ may be considered as a simple thickening of the mantle analogous
288 DISCOVERY REPORTS
to the internal shell of certain Gastropods (Pleurobranchs, Marsenia). The anatomy of
the present species has been very fully described by Vayssiére (op. cit., pp. 174-185).
DistriBuTION. Mediterranean. Off South-west Ireland (Massy, 1g0g). Off Gibral-
tar to Bay of Biscay (Bonnevie, 1913). Gulf of Guinea (Meisenheimer, 1905).
Genus Cymbuliopsis, Pelseneer, 1888
Cymbuliopsis intermedia, ‘Tesch, 1904.
St. 268. Young-fish trawl, 100-150 (—o) m.: 13 specimens and 2 conchae; 1 m. tow-net oblique,
73-0 m.: 3 specimens and 32 conchae; 1 m. net horizontal, 73-0 m.: 11 conchae.
St. 270. Young-fish trawl, 200 (—o) m.: 30 specimens and 11 conchae.
The genus Cymbuliopsis is distinguished from Cymbulia and Gleba “‘ by the presence
of a shell with a very large cavity and thin walls. The animal very closely resembles
Gleba, having a proboscis free throughout its length, a fin without ventral lobe, and
neither radula nor jaws. As far as I can judge, however, it differs from Gleba by the
three very distinct muscular systems in the fin, and in the absence of the indentations
on the fin margin. As only very few species of both these genera are known, it is very
probable that other forms, not yet discovered, will link together the two types” (‘Tesch,
1904, p. 57). This author (Joc. cit., p. 59) describes the type specimen as follows: “‘’The
shell exhibits the usual characters of Cymbuliopsis. ‘The aperture is always somewhat
longer than half the length of the shell. In the distribution of the tubercles I could not
observe any regularity; on the aboral surface are some which are smaller, more closely
grouped together; at the ventral margin there are none (figs. 102, 104). This character
of the shell agrees partly with what is found in Cymbuliopsis vitrea, Heath and Spaulding.
Aperture unarmed, thickened lateral sides; these thickenings disappear towards the
ventral margin. ‘Tubercles at the oral surface sometimes fused into mere uneven-
nesses, separated by shallow grooves. Animal as in other species of Cymbuliopsis; pro-
boscis short and broad, tentacle very short; fins with three distinct systems of muscles;
anterior border of the fins scarcely projecting beyond the ventral margin of the shell
(almost as in Cymbuliopsis calceola); pallial gland twisted to the left, with three trans-
parent bands. Dimensions: 39-23 mm. Shell of St. 144: 30 mm. Colour of the shell:
generally transparent, sometimes yellowish, or even dark brown (alcohol- and formol-
specimens)’.
The forty-six specimens with fifty-six conchae recorded above were captured off
Elephant Bay, West Africa. The animals measure 27-50 mm. across the fins and the
conchae are 14-42 mm. in length. Only one individual and seven shells were taken by
the Siboga Expedition.
The transparent fins are crossed and re-crossed by three sets of muscles, while the
soft viscera are protected by the glassy slipper-like concha studded with knobs glittering
like crystal. The specimens were preserved in formol and all the conchae were trans-
parent, none showing the yellowish or dark brown tints observed in some of the Siboga
conchae. With this exception the present specimens are in close agreement with the
figures given by Tesch (1904, pl. iv, figs. 100-104).
PNEUMODERMATIDAE 289
A living specimen of this species was found by the Siboga Expedition near Damar
Island, while conchae were taken at five stations lying between lat. 2° 3’ and 10° 35’ S,
long. 117° 4’ to 131° 26’ E.
PTEROTA (GYMNOSOMATA)
The naked Molluscs which form this group among the 'Tectibranchs are not nearly
related to the Pteropoda, but are allied to the Aplysioidea. Owing to their minute size
and to the frequently contracted state of their bodies they are not easy to study. Only
extended individuals of particular species measure more than an inch in length. The
average size is about that of a grain of wheat and many are much smaller. The buccal
appendages and gills vary in the different families and in contracted specimens can only
be determined by dissection. There is no pallial cavity and no gizzard with plates. The
liver-pancreas adheres to the stomach, and the cerebral ganglia are attached to one
another instead of being united by a commissure. The radula has usually a number of
lateral teeth. All the group are carnivorous and feed principally on the Thecosomata.
Although a pair of fins would seem to be a necessity to their active life, abnormal
specimens of Pneumodermopsis paucidens (Boas) have been observed (Massy, 1917,
p. 231) in which only the right fin was developed in nearly all the specimens of a haul.
Family PREUMODERMATIDAE
Genus Pneumoderma, Cuv., 1804
Pneumoderma atlanticum (Oken), 1816.
Pneumodermopsis atlantica, Oken, 1816.
Pneumodermon Peroni, Lamk., 1819 (nec Boas, Pels., Meis., Tesch).
Pneumoderma violaceum, d’Orb., 1840; Boas, 1886; Pels., 1888; Meis., 1898; ‘Tesch, 1913.
St. 276. Young-fish trawl, 150 (-o) m.: 2 specimens.
Both these specimens were captured off the Congo river.
They were retracted, and measured about 6:5mm. in length. The suckers and
radula were examined.
The family Pneumodermatidae possesses a dorsal glandular patch; a lateral gill;
sucker-bearing arms; a median jaw and hook sacs.
The genus Pneumoderma has two sucker-bearing arms, a posterior gill, long hook sacs,
radula n-o-n in the adult, n-l-n in the young. The present species has a radula of 4-0-4
and the suckers on the arms are numerous; the largest are near the mouth and they be-
come smaller distally. Mme Pruvot-Fol (1924, pl. xv, fig. 1) gives a fine illustration of a
fully extended specimen with about 33-40 suckers on each arm. The synonymy of this,
the oldest described species of the genus, is fully explained in the same paper.
DisTriBuTION. Atlantic, Pacific, Mediterranean.
290 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Genus Spongiobranchaea, d’Orb., 1840
Spongiobranchaea australis, d’Orb., 1840.
Cliodita caduceus, Quoy and Gaimard, 1825.
113 specimens from thirty-five stations off South Georgia and the South Sandwich Islands.
The specimens of this species, which was taken in comparatively small numbers, vary
in length from 0-75 mm. to 12 mm.: the Terra Nova specimens measured 2-5 to 16 mm.
The largest haul (twenty-five examples) occurred at night. Two specimens were taken in
hauls west of Cape ‘Town, and two more occurred north-west of Tristan da Cunha. Two
larvae of 1-5 mm. occurred at St. 12. They have the white body covered, as is usual in
adults, with a dense speckling of black chromatophores. One had a sucker expanded
and the other had the lateral gills developed. An example of 2 mm. from St. 138 has
brown spots in zones. The larva of 0-75 mm. occurred with two older specimens at the
South Sandwich Islands, in December (55 15). In an individual measuring 12 mm.
in length, taken off South Georgia (WS 37), the jaw and radula were of a bright
scarlet colour. ‘The animal had been preserved in 5 per cent. formalin. I have never
previously seen any Molluscan radula other than of an amber tint. The specimen has
been seen by Mme Pruvot-Fol, who also considers it to be very curious. In connection
with this it may be mentioned that the columellar margin of Limacina bulimoides
(d’Orb.) is usually amber, but specimens in which it was bright red were observed by
Mlle Bonnevie in North Atlantic collections.
The genus Spongiobranchaea is characterized by having two sucker-bearing arms; a
posterior gill consisting of a simple band without rays; a median tooth present in the
adult; shallow hook sacs and a median jaw with numerous spines. The present species
usually has about 7-10 suckers on each arm, of which those placed distally are much
larger than one or two next the mouth. Usually, but not always, the animal is densely
speckled with dark chromatophores.
DiIsTRIBUTION. Antarctic to about 50° S in the Pacific and in the Atlantic to about
36° S (Meisenheimer, 1905).
Spongiobranchaea intermedia, A. Pruvot-Fol, 1926 (Pl. XX XIX, figs. 1-5; Fig. 1).
St. 71. Young-fish trawl, 2000 (—o) m.: I specimen.
St. 72. 4:5 m. tow-net, 2000 (—o) m.: I specimen.
St. 239. 4:5 m. tow-net, 1050-1350 (—o) m.: I specimen.
Two of the above specimens have the sucker-bearing arms beautifully extended and
measure 9-15 mm. in length. The other is 20 mm. long, but is a contracted specimen
and probably measured much more when alive. As the type was a contracted specimen
and possessed an incomplete median tooth, I sent these to Mme Pruvot-Fol who has
most kindly examined them for me and thinks that they may be S. intermedia or a variety
of the same. As she observes: “There are some important differences but the hook sacs
are identical and the radula is the same or nearly so. ‘The median tooth shows a ‘ contre-
PNEUMODERMATIDAE 291
fort’ of an oval shape, two pointed denticles on each side, and a fold or suture without
cusp in the middle line. This fold indicates the place where the two median teeth of the
larva join to form one central tooth in the adult. It often breaks into two halves and I
even think that one half sometimes persists in some rows, while the other disappears,
this median tooth being inclined to disappear altogether as it does in the genus Pneumo-
derma. ‘This fact explains the asymmetry of the tooth in my Monaco specimen.”
Mme Pruvot-Fol has been so good as to send me drawings of the radula of the above
yy A, Ady)
< GI ay Wy
Fig. 1.
Spongiobranchaea intermedia, Pruvot-Fol. a, median tooth; 4, first lateral tooth (from original Monaco
specimen).
Spongiobranchaea intermedia var. c, median tooth on same scale as a; d, two median teeth (halves) ; e, lateral
teeth, } row; f, mandible; g, one median tooth; #, two median teeth (halves); /, the first lateral teeth of
two rows. (Figs. g, h, 7 more highly magnified than preceding figures.)
specimens and also of the Monaco example for comparison (Fig. 1). The most important
difference between the Discovery specimens and the type is that both Mme Pruvot-Fol
and myself counted nearly eighty suckers on an expanded arm, whereas in the type only
sixteen were counted ; owing, however, to the type specimen being contracted, and the
possibility that a few suckers had been lost during dissection, the number might have
been twenty or more. As Mme Pruvot-Fol points out, there is great variability in these
organs. It is a curious fact, too, that the suckers in the type (which measured 17 mm.
Dill 4
292 DISCOVERY REPORTS
and was estimated to have been 30 mm. or more when alive) were larger in proportion
to the rest of the body than those of the present specimens. The branchiae of the three
Discovery specimens are retracted and scarcely show in the illustrations, and they are as
different from one another as they are from the type. The example from St. 71 has a sort
of lateral gill which occupies the whole circle above the tail and seems to be longest in
front, i.e. ventrally, which is strange.
The aspect of these animals varies extraordinarily according to the manner in which
they have been prepared. When collectors preserve them without the use of anaesthetics,
one can frequently do little or nothing with them. Mme Pruvot-Fol (1924, pl. xvi,
figs. 1 and 2) has shown how different the appearance of Pneumodermopsis canephora,
Pruvot-Fol, is when drawn from specimens fixed with and without anaesthesia. The
ventral and dorsal aspect of the specimen from St. 72 and two enlarged suckers are
shown on Plate XXXIX, figs. 1 and 2, and the contracted specimen from St. 239 is
shown on the same plate in figs. 3 and 4.
DisTRIBUTION. 44° 19’ N, 11° 19’ W., o-4900 m. (Pruvot-Fol, 1926.)
Genus Schizobrachium, Meisenheimer, 1905
Schizobrachium polycotylum, Meisenheimer, 1905.
St. 71. Young-fish trawl, 2000 (—o) m.: I specimen.
St. 78. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: I specimen.
St. 89. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—o) m.: I specimen.
St. 107. 4:5 m. tow-net, 850-950 m.: 1 specimen.
The four specimens of this species were taken over a wide area in the South Atlantic
and Southern Ocean, from 33° S to 45° S, and from north of the Falklands to between
Bouvet Island and Cape Town. All have the branching sucker-bearing arms beautifully
extended! and their total length is from 17 to 30 mm. Meisenheimer (1905, p. 51) defines
the genus Schizobrachium as follows: “‘Kérper langgestreckt, in der Mitte bauchig
erweitert, am Hinterende zugespitzt. Auf der Riickenseite mit wohlentwickeltem
Drisenfeld. Fuss: Hinterlappen wohlentwickelt, abgestumpft. Seitenlappen miassig
stark, ohne gefaltelten Mittelhécker. Kiemen: Seitenkieme geschwunden, Endkieme auf
eine kleine Langsfalte an der Ventralseite des hinteren Kérperendes reduziert. Saugnapfe
in sehr grosser Zahl 2 machtigen, sich dichotomisch verastelnden Armen aufsitzend, an
Grésse von der Basis der Arme bis zu deren feinsten Verastelung stetig abnehmend.
Radula mit Mittelzahn. Hackensicke ausserlich von bedeutendem, walzenférmigem
Umfang, im Innern zum gréssten Teile aus einer soliden Muskelmasse bestehend, in
deren vorderem, nach der Mediane gewendeten Abschnitt die eigentliche Hackenscheide
mit einer grésseren Zahl von Hacken gelegen ist. After auf der rechten Seite gelegen,
ziemlich weit nach hinten verschoben. S. polycotylum. Mit der Merkmalen des Genus.
Radula 7-1~7. Mittelzahn klein, mit 2 scharfen Spitzen. Seitenzahne mit starker Basal-
platte und langem, spitzem Fortsatz, nach den Seiten an Grésse abnehmend. Masse:
Lange des Kérpers 32 mm., Breite 11 mm.”
1 These specimens were anaesthetized with cocaine.
CLIOPSIDAE 293
DIsTRIBUTION. Indian Ocean, north of New Amsterdam Island, 2000m.
(Valdivia Expedition).
Genus Pneumodermopsis, Keferstein
Pneumodermopsis macrochira, Meisenheimer, 1905.
St. 89. Young-fish trawl, 1000 (—0) m.: 1 specimen.
This specimen, measuring 5 mm. in length, was taken west of Cape Town. The
radula was examined.
The genus has a lateral but usually no posterior gill: the buccal appendages consist
of three groups of suckers, hook sacs and radula n—-1-n. P. macrochira has about forty
suckers of equal size and a much larger terminal one on each lateral arm. Five stalked
suckers take the place of the median arm. There is a very rudimentary posterior gill: the
radula is 6-1-6, and there are about twenty hooks.
DisTRIBUTION. Southern part of Atlantic and Indian Oceans (Meisenheimer, 1905).
Ten stations in the North Atlantic, extending from the latitude between Bermuda and
the west coast of Morocco to 48° 29’ N, 13° 25’ W (Bonnevie, 1913). Three stations on
the west of Ireland, from 50° N to 51° N by 11° 26’ W to 11° 38’ W, over soundings of
625-990 m. (Massy, 1917). ‘Two stations in the Atlantic from near the Canaries and
between the Azores and the West Indies (Pruvot-Fol, 1926).
Family CLIOPSIDAE
Genus Cliopsis, Troschel, 1854
Cliopsis krohni, ‘Troschel, 1854.
? Cliopsis modesta, Pelseneer, 1887.
St. 270. Young-fish trawl, 200 (-o) m.: 1 specimen.
St. 287. Young-fish trawl, 800-1000 (—o0) m.: 1 specimen.
The specimens recorded above, measuring g-12 mm. in length, were taken in hauls
off Africa between Elephant Bay and the Gulf of Guinea. Mme Pruvot-Fol (1924,
p- 363) thinks that C. modesta, Pels., should be placed in synonymy with C. krohnz, at
least until its radula is known.
The family Cliopsidae is distinguished by having no lateral gill and no median lobe
to the foot. A dorsal glandular pit is present and there is generally a posterior gill. The
skin is transparent and colourless or lightly tinted and opalescent. The head is small and
the body swollen. The proboscis is extremely long: a jaw and shallow hook sacs are
present: the radula has the formula 7-1-7.
In Cliopsis krohni the gill consists of a hexagonal crest with four short unfringed rays:
radula 6-1-6: hooks about sixty.
DistriBuTIon. Mediterranean, various authors. Western Mediterranean, especially
to the west of Corsica and between Minorca and the African coast (Pruvot-Fol, 1924)
4-2
294 DISCOVERY REPORTS
North Atlantic between the Azores and Bermudas, at o—3000 m. (Pruvot-Fol, 1926).
Yokohama to Honolulu, lat. 35° 13’ N, long. 154° 43’ W (Pelseneer, 1887, under
C. modesta).
Family CLIONIDAE
Genus Clione, Pallas, 1774
Clione antarctica, E. A. Smith, 1902; Eliot, 1907.
Clione limacina var. antarctica, Meisenheimer, 1906.
206 specimens from thirty-six stations. Nearly half the hauls from near South Georgia, the re-
mainder from an area between the South Sandwich Islands and Bouvet Island.
The specimens range in length from 1-5 to 18 mm. They vary greatly in shape and
colour, some of them being without the usual ruddy hue. The largest number in a haul
(forty-five) occurred at night at the surface (o—5 m.), over soundings of 1000 m. Larvae
of 3 mm. and less occurred in one October, three November, two December and two
February hauls. Most of the hauls in which C. antarctica occurred were made in No-
vember, December and January. The species was absent in a number of February and
March hauls made in the South Orkneys, South Shetlands and Palmer Archipelago in
1927, although the gear and the depth over which the nets were worked would seem to
be quite suitable. The species occurred, however, in an April haul made at the South
Shetlands in the same year.
This family is without a glandular dorsal pit and has no suckers. Buccal cones are
generally present. There is no lateral gill and rarely a posterior gill. In Clone a posterior
lobe is present in the foot. It is usually short and broad. There are no chromatophores.
The hook sacs contain numerous long hooks. Radula at least 6-1-6. The present species
is very closely allied to C. limacina, Phipps. Eliot (1907, p. 13) gives a list of differences
between the two species. As observed in Terra Nova specimens (Massy, 1920), there is
a distinct neck behind the fins, instead of between or above them, as in C. limacina. The
skin appears to be thicker and larval rings persist to a later age.
DISTRIBUTION. Antarctic seas.
Subfamily THLIPTODONTINAE
Genus Thliptodon, Boas, 1886
Thliptodon gegenbauri, Boas, 1886.
Thliptodon atlanticus, Massy, 1917.
St. 72. 4:5 m. tow-net, 2000 (—o) m.: 4 specimens.
In this subfamily proboscis, gill and jaw are absent. Teeth of three sorts—formula
3-1-1-1-3—and gullet bladders (vésicules buccales, Schlundblasen) are present.
Genus Thliptodon, Ggbr. No cones: hooks present: the lateral lobes of foot sometimes
separated from the posterior lobe ; pockets exist in the folds of the skin in which the lobes
can be withdrawn.
CLIONIDAE 295
T. gegenbauri is thus characterized by Mme Pruvot-Fol (1926, p. 29): “‘ Lobes du pied
réunis; partie céphalique beaucoup plus volumineuse que l’abdomen; crochets tres
longs, gréles; dent médiane rectangulaire, a tranchant onduleux, ne recouvrant pas
enti¢rement sur les cétés la plaque basale; intermédiaire 4 cuspide courte mais aigué;
marginales toutes semblables, courbes, aigués, non aplaties”’.
The above specimens were taken north-east of the Falkland Islands. ‘They measure
15-19 mm. in length. T'wo have lost their buccal parts. The radula of the other two is
like that of the type. They are more than twice the length of Irish specimens and the fins
are wider apart, and the viscera occasionally extend to the end of the body, which is
sometimes rounded. I agree with Mme Pruvot-Fol that the small specimens, measuring
3-7 mm., named by me (1917) 7. atlanticus, are referable to the above. As this author
remarks (1926, p. 28) it is always useful to give a figure of a rare species, as so often the
radula may take a slightly different direction on the slide which entirely changes the
aspect of the various teeth. Thus in the specimens recorded above, the median tooth is
much more like that figured by Mme Pruvot-Fol (loc. cit., pl. iii, fig. 74¢) than Boas’
illustration (1886, ‘Tab. 8, fig. 122).
DisTRIBUTION. Messina (Boas, 1886). South-west Ireland (Massy, 1909, and 1917 as
T. atlanticus). North Atlantic, off Portugal to the Azores, o-1500 m. (Pruvot-Fol,
1926).
Thliptodon diaphanus, Meisenheimer, 1905.
St. 297. Young-fish trawl, 200-300 (—o) m.: I specimen.
This specimen, measuring 7 mm. in length, was taken off the Cape Verde Islands.
The radula, especially the median tooth, agrees far more closely with the example
figured by Mme Pruvot-Fol (1926, PI. iii, figs. 79) than with Meisenheimer’s illustration
(1905, pl. xxvii, fig. 3). Mme Pruvot-Fol (/oc. cit., p. 28) thus characterizes this species:
“Lobes latéraux et lobe médian du pied séparés par un grand intervalle. Dent médiane
4 tranchant droit, intermédiaire 4 cuspide trés courte, marginales en lame de faux, apla-
ties. Organe copulateur pourvu d’un appareil annexe: deux glandes et une ventouse”’.
DistRIBUTION. Gulf of Guinea, St Thomas, Sumatra, Seychelles, Gulf of Aden
(Meisenheimer, 1905). Ascension I. (Schliemenz, 1906). 5S.W. Ireland (Massy, 1909
and 1917). Antarctic (Meisenheimer, 1906). Atlantic, between Madeira and the
African coast, o-4000 m. (Pruvot-Fol, 1926).
LIST OF REFERENCES
Boas, J. E. F., 1886. Spolia Atlantica. Dansk. Vid. Selsk. Skrift., Afd. 1v, Bd. 1. Kjobenhavn.
BoNNEVIE, Kr., 1913. Pteropoda. Rep. Sci. Results ‘Michael Sars’ North Atlantic Deep-Sea Exped., 11, Pt. 1,
Zoology.
Exot, Sir Cu., 1907. Pteropoda. Nat. Antarctic Exped., Nat. Hist., 11, vi. London.
For, Herm., 1875. Sur le développement des Ptéropodes. Arch. Zool. Exp., 'T. Iv.
Kwierniewskt, C., 1902. Alcune Osservazioni intorno agli Pteropodi Gimnosomi del Mare Mediterraneo.
Atti Soc. Veneto-Trentina Sci. Nat., Serie ii, Vol. 1v, Fasc. 2.
296 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Massy, A. L., 1909. The Pteropoda and Heteropoda of the coasts of Ireland. Fisheries, Ireland, Sci. Invest.,
1907, Il. -
—— 1917. The Gymnosomatous Pteropoda of the coasts of Ireland, Proc. Roy. Dublin Soc., Vol. xv (N.S.),
No. 22.
—— 1920. Mollusca, Part II]—Eupteropoda (Pteropoda Thecosomata) and Pterota (Pteropoda Gymnosomata).
British Antarctic (‘Terra Nova’) Exped.
MEISENHEIMER, J., 1905. Pteropoda. Wiss. Ergebn. deutsch. Tiefsee-Exped. ‘Valdivia’, 1898-9. Bd. 1x, Lief. 1,
Jena.
—— 1905a. Die arktischen Pteropoden. Fauna Arctica, Bd. tv, Lief. 2.
1906. Deutsche Siidpolar-Expedition, 1901-3, Bd. 1x, Heft 2, 1906. Berlin.
Orsicny, A. dD’, 1835-47. Voyage dans l Amérique méridionale exécuté dans les années 1826-33.
PELSENEER, P., 1887. Report on the Pteropoda collected by H.M.S. ‘Challenger’ during the years 1873-6. Pt. 1.
The Gymnosomata. Vol. XIx.
—— 1888. Report on the Pteropoda collected by H.M.S.‘Challenger’ during the years 1873-6. Pts. Lxv and
LXVI.
Prerrer, G., 1880. Die Pteropoden des Hamburger Museums. Abhand. naturwiss. Ver. Hamb., Bd. vu,
1879-80.
Pruvot-Fot, A., 1924. Etude de quelques Gymnosomes méditerranéens des péches de ‘?Orvet’ en 1921 et 1922.
Arch. Zool. Expér., T. Lxu, Fasc. 6.
—— 1926. Mollusques Ptéropodes gymnosomes provenant des campagnes du Prince Albert I’ de Monaco,
Fasc. 70.
Sars, G. O., 1878. Mollusca Regionis Arcticae Norvegiae. Christiania.
SCHLIEMENZ, P., 1906. Die Pteropoden der Plankton-Expedition. Ergebnisse der Plankton-Exped., Bd. x1, F, b.
Sykes, E. R., 1905. Mollusca procured during the ‘Porcupine’ Expeditions, 1869-70. Proc. Mal. Soc., Vol. v1,
Pt. 6.
Tescu, J. J., 1904. The Thecosomata and Gymnosomata of the ‘Siboga’ Expedition. Siboga Exp. Monogr. 52,
Leiden.
Vaysstkre, M. A., 1915. Sur les Euptéropodes recueillis pendant les campagnes scientifiques dirigées par S.A.S.
le Prince de Monaco. Comptes rendus, Acad. Sci. Paris, T. 161, p. 606.
PORTS, YOu. 3 PLATE “SOCNIX
(lhe 2 hE ey
Re ee yn
if ao AO
} Ol Oe e
“ #8, eS ...
m,, . 5 4 ¥ >.
KIXAX ATAIT
isttnov JoF-jovest ovbanratint oxntlona ele!
-bsorsins siodaue oa) atbanncshat
* .p x :Jooqes iserob wrhanriotin
-£ # ws09qen iniiinsy ae = botse1isio9 yavhonewing 2p .yit
OP PX rosqen Inexob sinee odT .y. iF
ld
PLATE XXXIX
Fig. 1. Spongiobranchaea intermedia, Pruvot-Fol, ventral aspect: x 4.
Fig. 1a. S. intermedia, two suckers enlarged.
Fig. 2. S. intermedia, dorsal aspect: x 4.
Fig. 3. S. intermedia, contracted specimen, ventral aspect: x 3.
Fig. 4. The same, dorsal aspect: x 3.
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. III. PLATE XXXIX.
(ele Tay
la.
JONN BALE SONS & DANIELSSON, L"® LONDON
SPONGIOBRANCHAEA INTERMEDIA.
£
ar
>! eee
ae
fe
i
& {
ne
: h
¢ ¢
v 3 o
: a
/ PRINTED.
IN GREAT BRITAIN ve
WALTER } LEWISMA -
4
f AT
> ; THE CAMBRIDGE
: UNIVERSITY
PRESS” ;
’
z Ae * i
; ° erent
Vo + a
< .
4
:
“DISCOVERY >
REPORTS
Vol. Il], pp. 297-344, plates XL-XLIV, charts 1-4
Issued by the Discovery Committee, Colonial Office, London
on behalf of the Government of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands
NARRATIVE OF HYDROGRAPHIC SURVEY
OPERATIONS IN SOUTH GEORGIA AND
HHE-SOUTH SHETLAND ASLANDS,
1926-1930
by
Lieut.-Commander J. M. Chaplin, R.N.
I ae api ee
Fe sal
2 <1
None ‘
ar, vse
(@) 3
Nat MUSE
CAMBRIDGE
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS
L932
Price ten shillings net
ee 3
Ooo
ise
ve
he
\ Mt. 3
Laine
wit
he
x
Discovery Reports, Vol. III, pp. 297-344, Plates XL—XLIV, Charts 1-4, Fune, 1932]
MiemweaAliIVE OF HYDROGRAPHIC SURVEY
OPERATIONS IN SOUTH GEORGIA AND
ie osOUlTH SHETLAND ISLANDS,
1926—1930
By
LIEUT.-COMMANDER J. M. CHAPLIN, R.N.
CONTENTS
Survey Operations in R.R.S. ‘Discovery’, 1926-7. . . . - - - page 299
Survey Operations, season 1928-9 : 303
Survey Work in M.V. ‘Alert’, October 15, was to February 4, pao: vel
March 19 to April 10, 1929 . 303
Survey Work in R.R.S. ‘William Scoresby’ ee 5 to March 18,1929 = 315
Winter in Grytviken, 1929 . 317
Survey Operations, season 1929-30 .« : . 318
Survey Work in M.V. ‘Alert’, September 27, 1929 to February 16, ee
and February 20 to April 13, 1930. 318
Survey Work in Whale-Catcher ‘Southern Pride’, Fea 17-19,1930 . 332
Survey Work in R.R.S. ‘William Scoresby’, April 14-19, 1930 334
Conclusion . 335
Appendix I. Personnel and Equipment 337
5 II. Magnetic Variation 341
5, III. Weather and Climate in South Georgia 342
33 IV. Note on Kelp . 343
WEGpMPDSOIDY 6 5 8 goo 6 90 © 9 « 9 6 «6 joiliiudamnne cul
(Givmsscy 8 6 8 o 6 @ oo 6 o 6 5 9 5 6 jo UAPOHIA Ci Ga!
NARRATIVE OF HYDROGRAPHIC SURVEY
OPERATIONS IN SOUTH GEORGIA AND
THE SOUTH SHETLAND ISLANDS, 1926-1930
By Lieut.-Commander J. M. Chaplin, r.n.
(Plates XL—XLIV; Charts 1-4; text-figs. 1-2)
SURVEY OPERATIONS IN RRS. ‘DISCOVERY’,
1926-7
I drawing up the plan of operations for the conduct of the investigations, the Discovery
Committee recognized that the coasts of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands
were for the most part very poorly charted, and that every effort should be made to
improve our knowledge in this direction. But it was realized that there would be
difficulties in carrying on this work in conjunction with the scientific investigation of
numerous problems connected with whaling. These difficulties were very apparent
during the commission of the R.R.S. ‘ Discovery’; but none the less every opportunity
has been taken to extend our knowledge of the coast-line, and comparison of the charts
issued with this report with those previously issued by the Admiralty will indicate the
measure of success which has been attained.
Our knowledge of the coast-line of South Georgia is still very deficient; and at the
time when work began the only harbours which had been properly surveyed were King
Edward Cove in West Cumberland Bay (Chart 1) and Royal Bay.
Since 1904, when whaling operations began, the Norwegians have succeeded in
obtaining a great deal of local knowledge regarding other harbours in the island, but
most of this work is unpublished. ‘The method of navigation which they employ in
uncharted waters is to send catchers in advance to find out the dangers—a system of
trial and error—and it is a remarkable tribute to their seamanship that so few serious
casualties have occurred in the course of these dangerous operations.
In commencing survey operations it was first of all necessary to decide where a start
should be made, and since the position of the island itself was not beyond suspicion two
harbours were selected at the extreme ends of the island, Undine Harbour in the north-
west and Larsen Harbour in the south-east. By this selection it was hoped that the two
extremities of the island could be fixed. Both harbours, though small, are extensively
used by vessels of the whaling fleet.
A pram and full camp equipment was taken, and at Undine Harbour (Plate XLII,
fiz. 3) where the survey party was at work from March 22 to March 29, 1926, and from
December 9 to December 17, 1927, fairly good camping ground was found; but the
weather throughout was bad, the proportion of cloudy to clear days being as 6 to 1.
None the less it was found possible to fix positions astronomically and the harbour was
sounded and full materials obtained for a plan (Chart 3). At Larsen Harbour (Plate XLIV,
fig. 1), which we visited from January 6 to January 13, 1927, the weather was throughout
I-2
300 DISCOVERY REPORTS
extremely favourable. A whole series of sights was taken and a complete survey made
of the rather complicated harbour (Chart 3). The distances were rather great for a small
pulling boat, and this resulted in very heavy work on the part of my assistants.
Both Undine and Larsen Harbours are guarded by most difficult approaches, and I
was anxious to attempt some sort of a survey. At the time, however, it was not possible
to obtain the use of a larger, mechanically driven, boat, and in consequence these
approaches still remain to be investigated. On completion of this work it was decided
to visit each of the whaling stations in turn, surveying the harbour itself and using any
opportunity which might offer to survey the approaches. In this way, during the period
from January 17 to January 31, 1927, Leith Harbour (Chart 3) was surveyed and a triangu-
lation of Stromness Bay (Chart 1) carried out, together with soundings in some of the
more important areas. I am greatly indebted to Mr Leganger Hansen, manager of the
whaling station, for the assistance he gave me throughout my visit to Leith Harbour. He
put everything I needed at my disposal with the exception of skilled assistance, which
naturally he did not have. This, however, was supplied, so far as was compatible with
his other duties, by Mr L. Harrison Matthews, of the scientific staff. After some prac-
tice he acquired great facility in the work and on many occasions his help proved indis-
pensable. Thanks to the kindness of Mr Hansen, two excursions were made from Leith
Harbour for the purpose of taking sun sights, one to Cape Buller and one to Cape
Saunders. On both occasions the sights were successfully taken. A motor boat which
was also lent to me at Leith Harbour proved invaluable, but the use of it could only be
obtained when it was not engaged on other duties.
A tide-pole was erected in Leith Harbour, and Mr Leganger Hansen very kindly
arranged to have systematic hourly readings taken over a period of two complete calendar
months. ‘These, together with two months similarly read by the staff of the Marine
Biological Station at Grytviken (King Edward Cove), give sufficient data for the
determination of the tidal information necessary in South Georgia, where the rise and
fall is small and the tidal streams negligible from a navigational point of view. Both
these tide-poles were connected by levelling to fixed marks ashore: at Grytviken to a
mark cut in the north-west corner of the Biological Station and at Leith Harbour to the
top of the inner end of the wharf. Both marks should be recoverable for a long time.
Work in South Georgia ended with additions to the chart of Cumberland Bay:
triangulation was effected from a number of points and the positions of Mount Paget
and Sugarloaf Peak were fixed (Plate XLII, fig. 1). Owing to the similarity of their
appearance on certain bearings these mountains had often been confused, so much so
that a wrong leading bearing was included in the sailing directions.
It had been intended, during our passage between South Georgia and the South
Orkneys, to search for two vigias (doubtful rocks) which had been reported recently in
those regions. The attempt had, however, to be abandoned owing to the adverse
weather conditions which prevailed when in the vicinity. The existence of both these
Some revision of the approaches to Undine Harbour was, however, made at a later date by the
‘Discovery II’, as shown in Chart 3.
SOUTH ORKNEYS: SOUTH SHETLANDS 301
rocks was doubtful, for they have never been sighted again and there are reasons for
thinking that the reports were based only on black icebergs. Plate XLIII, fig. 2, shows
how closely an iceberg with morainic deposit may resemble a rock or small island, and
in the rough or misty weather which prevails in these latitudes a mistake is easily made.
In other parts of the Dependencies of the Falkland Islands, in the South Orkneys,
South Shetlands and the Palmer Archipelago, the work was of necessity of a much rougher
nature (Chart 4). With the exception of a good set of sights taken at Borge Bay in the
South Orkneys no opportunity occurred here for astronomical sights from the shore ; in
consequence we were obliged to rely entirely on the sights obtained at sea, and these,
though in many cases quite satisfactory, cannot be compared with shore sights for
accuracy. The sights taken at the South Orkneys showed that the positions of these
islands differed considerably from those previously assigned to them, as they were
found to be 15 miles farther to the eastward than charted. At Borge Bay a sextant
triangulation was made, but our visit was too short for the completion of any satis-
factory survey work. The sights, however, were well worth a visit and will be useful
later. Borge Bay is a passable harbour much used by whalers. Ice drives in occasionally,
but it is usually soft and the whalers are able to steam through it to clearer water outside.
On the passage to Clarence Island from the South Orkneys an enormous iceberg was
found. Along the side that we measured it was 35 miles in length, but in the other
direction it was probably still longer, since no end to it could be seen even from the
mast-head. Very uneven and shoal soundings obtained just to the north of it indicated
that this huge berg was possibly aground.
The position of Clarence Island was provisionally determined from sun sights at sea
and simultaneous bearings of the island, and it is thought that the result is reasonably
accurate.
Work undertaken by the German exploration vessel ‘Meteor’ had shown that
O’Brien Island is situated farther to the westward than had hitherto appeared, and
we ourselves found that the position of Gibbs Island relatively to O’Brien Island was
as formerly plotted. It would appear, therefore, that the group which includes both
these islands is farther to the westward than had been charted previously; but at this
time only one sight of the sun was obtained in confirmation of their position.
The position of Simpson Rock north of King George Island was plotted on our
further passage to Deception Island. Deception Island itself had been well charted by
Charcot during the First French Antarctic Expedition. I and my assistant! obtained
good sights during our visit to the island and were able to confirm the position which
Charcot had assigned to it. The Austin Rocks were well fixed by simultaneous bearings
taken to them and to Deception Island, as also was Sail Rock.
Farther south the positions assigned to nearly all the islands are far from satisfactory,
and, although a certain amount of work was done by way of correction, the results cannot
be regarded as other than approximate until a further examination has been made.
1 Throughout the work during this commission, except at Leith Harbour, I was assisted by Midshipman
W. P. O’Connor and by Able Seaman Malcolm Smith.
302 DISCOVERY REPORTS
This applies to Hoseason Island, Smith Island, Low Island and Snow Island, all of which
we tried to fix in passing by sights taken at sea, and also to the Melchior Archipelago in
Schollaert Channel and Port Lockroy in Wiencke Island, at both of which places we were
able to land but unfortunately had no day when adequate sights could be obtained. On
the passage from Deception Island to Melchior Archipelago and passing Austin Rocks,
whose position could now be taken as correct, we obtained a series of six sun sights, three
before noon and three after ; at the same time, as well as at other times, cross-bearings were
taken to all tangents of islands and peaks in sight. At dusk a set of six practically simul-
taneous star sights was obtained. The sun sights, when worked out and plotted, agreed
together very well, as did the star sights, and the same is true of the results of the bearings
taken: but although the observations were checked repeatedly by myself and others, the
results obtained by the various methods all differed. In view of this discrepancy, for
which so far no explanation has been found, it would seem advisable to treat the results
of observations taken at sea with extreme caution.
A few soundings were obtained in Port Forster (Deception Island), at Melchior
Anchorage, and later in Admiralty Bay (North or Visca Anchorage), which should prove
useful.
On our passage from Melchior to Port Lockroy a running sketch survey was carried
out by means of the compass and log, the errors of both of which had been so long
observed as to be known very accurately.!
On one day whilst at Port Lockroy (Plate XLI, fig. 1) the ship went for a short cruise;
O’Connor, Smith and I stayed behind, and after carrying out a rough sextant triangula-
tion, sounded out the harbour, using the scale and meridian given by Charcot. A large
number of soundings were taken with the small Lucas machine from a pram. It is an
excellent harbour; but the surrounding glaciers, by calving, make it uncomfortable and
occasionally dangerous. The soundings under these glaciers were therefore reduced to a
very few, owing to pieces of ice frequently breaking off.
In addition to the surveying, a large number of soundings were obtained at sea with
careful astronomical positions. The Lucas machine, with 6000 fathoms of wire, driven
by a Brotherhood steam engine for heaving in, was always employed in making these
soundings. Depths up to just under 3000 fathoms were obtained, although it has to be
1 The method, although well known, may be described briefly. A departure from a fixed position having
been plotted, compass bearings are observed to all prominent objects in sight, such as capes, islets, points
and edges of glaciers. Care must be taken to write the objects down carefully and fully, so that no mistake can
occur when next they are observed, for all objects change their appearance greatly as the direction alters, and
should therefore be kept under observation continually. At the same time as the compass bearings (which,
owing to the change of position of the ship, should not include too many points) the time must be taken and
the patent log read, while the course should also be carefully recorded. ‘This procedure is continued at
intervals to the end of the passage, when the position reached, if not already known, should be fixed by
the best means available. In the present survey the latitude of Melchior Observation Spot was observed, and
the longitude accepted from previous observers. Port Lockroy was accepted entirely from the position
assigned to it by Charcot. The courses steered, after being carefully corrected, were plotted and the bearings
laid off, the result being squared in with the end positions, All appeared to give satisfactory results, the
current being negligible.
PREPARATIONS—SEASON 1928-9 393
remembered that the ‘Discovery’ was rather lively and also had to be allowed to lie
broadside to the wind when sounding. Thus the rolling often brought an unfair jerk on
the wire causing it to carry away, while the ship’s drift to leeward sometimes caused the
wire to lead well out to windward. On such occasions the tension on the hand-brake
springs was often so reduced as to compel us to ease them, and frequently the bottom was
not detected owing to the difference of tension on striking being so small. In such cases
the depth record was unreliable, and as the wire coiled on the bottom it invariably
kinked, and snapped on heaving in.
Two sorts of wire were tried. One was the usual 22-gauge single-strand piano wire.
This kinks very easily unless kept taut, but if properly cared for is very strong and
durable. The other wire, used as an alternative, does not kink nearly so readily. It is of
slightly greater diameter and six-stranded; it is in my opinion superior, although not
so easy to keep in good condition, and is liable to strand very easily. Sounding wire
should be kept well oiled, and we added a self-oiling arrangement, besides various other
improvements, to our machine.
Records of all deep-sea soundings made will be found in the Station List, Discovery
Reports, Vol. 1, pp. 6-74.
SURVEY OPERATIONS, SEASON 1928-9
SURVEY WORK IN M.V.‘ALERT’, OCTOBER 15, 1928 TO FEBRUARY 4, 1929,
AND MARCH 1g TO APRIL to, 1929
Preparations
On the ‘ Discovery’s’ return to England in October 1927, the work of drawing the
fair charts was taken in hand at the Hydrographic Department of the Admiralty, and
at this time the possibility of a separate surveying branch was discussed by the Dis-
covery Committee. It was decided finally in June 1928, to organize a separate survey,
to be equipped with a 25 ft. motor boat and a 14 ft. pram, and all the necessary instru-
ments, camping equipment and provisions. It was proposed that the expedition should
winter in South Georgia in 1929 so that the work should be as little interrupted as
possible. In pursuance of this scheme a motor boat and pram were ordered from
Messrs J. S. White, of Cowes.
Whilst the motor boat was being built, a crew consisting of an Assistant Surveyor, one
motorman and three able seamen was got together, the instruments, camping gear,
sounding gear, provisions and wireless telegraphy set were ordered, and by courtesy of
the Ténsberg Whaling Company, passages were obtained in the 5.8. ‘ Busen’ for the
assistant and seamen. They sailed from England on August 18, 1928, to South Georgia,
via ‘Ténsberg in Norway.
It was considered desirable that the motor boat should be taken out in the ship in
which I sailed, and that in order to look after her the motorman should go in the same
vessel. The limited accommodation of a whaling vessel, and the calls made upon it by
the numerous personnel requiring passage to the south, made this none too easy. By
304 DISCOVERY REPORTS
the courtesy of the T6nsberg Whaling Company, however, and of her Master, Captain
Séren Berntsen, the passages needed were secured in the S.S. ‘Orwell’ and, together
with our boats and stores, we sailed from Barry on September 15, 1928. After an
uneventful passage we arrived at Husvik on October 13, and were met by my assistant
with his men.
The active part of our work now commenced. Our main base was to be the Marine
Biological Station at Grytviken. By the courtesy of Mr Hjalmar Andersen, Manager at
Husvik, our stores were accordingly transferred there in one of his whale-catchers.
The motor boat, now christened ‘Alert’ (Plate XL, fig. 1), after some trials,
proceeded to Grytviken on October 15, and although light, behaved on the first
open-sea trip in a reassuring manner. This trip was undertaken partly as a trial and partly
to bring the crew to Grytviken, where they were required to stow the stores, unpack the
instruments and fit the wireless telegraphy receiving set, sounding machine and other
appliances into place.
When this work was finished we returned to Husvik on October 25, large masses of
loose ice in Grytviken Harbour having prevented an earlier passage. While proceeding
from place to place in the ‘Alert’ during the whole of the subsequent operations,
covering some 3000 miles, no assistance was ever asked or needed, except on one
occasion which will be mentioned in its place.
Husvik and Busen Fjord (Chart 2)
It was decided to survey this area on two different scales, one for Husvik harbour
proper and a smaller scale for Busen Fjord.
The work was carried out on normal lines, that is by erecting beacons (a supply of
poles had been brought, together with a quantity of calico flags to make them con-
spicuous) at suitable spots for main stations, and smaller beacons with pieces of calico as
sounding marks and to mark the coast-line.
Two theodolites were carried in the ‘ Alert’, leaving one spare at Grytviken; generally
they were used simultaneously, one by the assistant, the other by myself.
A difficulty in using theodolites—one which it was impossible to evade—was the
attentions of skua gulls, which are very numerous. Unfortunately these birds build
their nests on the ground at or near places usually very suitable for main stations.
During the whole time the angles were being taken, if a nest were anywhere near, both
parent birds would take turns at swooping to within inches of one’s head. We killed
many with broomsticks (which we carried for sounding marks), so close did they come.
As they are large fierce birds, they cannot be disregarded, and we could not spare an
extra hand to protect the observer. All we could do was partly to erect the beacon and
flag, and use the theodolite from under it. Terns are worse offenders, as they attack in
mass formation; but they generally build on rocky screes and cliffs where theodolites
are not likely to be set up.
After the plotting had been done coast-lining and sounding could be commenced.
Owing to the inexperience of the crew in sounding this was rather awkward at first, and
HUSVIK AND BUSEN FJORD 305
in fact several sounding lines had to be repeated entirely on account of various errors
that were made; but as practice gave more confidence the speed became satisfactory.
As occasion offered, true bearings were obtained from S to H (Fig. 1) and a round of
bearings with a 6-in. Dover compass was obtained for variation, from the same spot.
Owing to lack of men the tides could not be watched hourly, but a tide-pole was
erected at the pier, and readings obtained when necessary. The rise and fall being only
3 ft. at springs it was only in Husvik Harbour itself that the tide affected soundings
sufficiently to repay watching. During the sounding of the harbour an occasional visit
would be paid to the tide-pole and a reading taken. The tide-pole was of simple
construction, consisting of a wooden batten 7 ft. x 6 in. x }in., marked alternate black
and white for the feet and long and short lines for the inches (Plate XLI, fig. 2).
Sounding was carried out entirely by Lucas machine on account of the depth. One
of the difficulties experienced was the freezing of the lubricating oil in the dial and of
water on the reel, while the tallow for arming the lead for bottom samples also used to
freeze. When the dial froze up it had to be exchanged (we carried a spare one) and
thawed in the engine room; ice could nearly always be broken off the reel. The tallow
was kept soft by storing it on the engine exhaust until required.
The Lucas machine was fitted on the transom facing aft, and the leadsman sat on the
starboard towing bollard fitted with a pad. In this position the machine was found to be
too low, but a stand was made for it and it was then quite convenient for use. The
springs had to be watched carefully, as, if the boat was bumping at all in a sea it would
make the wire run and check (by taking the weight off the springs), and if the springs
were eased back too much there was a fair chance of the wire over-running and giving
half an hour’s work to clear it; this happened frequently at first. The best weight for the
lead was found to be ro Ib. It is to be remembered that the depth sometimes varied from
6 to 60 fathoms in the same line of soundings, and it was thus not possible to adapt the
machine to any expected depth.
Observations for position were not considered of primary importance, since the
former positions at Leith Harbour and Cape Saunders could be connected up with
those of the present operations. This was just as well, for the weather was singularly
bad and much time would have been wasted.
The coast-line was walked over only at Husvik, as it was considered that the
remainder was not sufficiently important to justify the time necessary. It was found in
practice that a good approximation could be sketched in at the ends of the lines of
sounding, by joining the small sounding marks which had been fixed already by
theodolite angles, and with additional tangents to other objects.
The positions of all the more important peaks were fixed and their heights computed,
and the contour lines were then sketched in roughly. ‘The country being so mountainous,
to do more would have entailed enormous and perhaps hazardous labour with no
commensurate result.
The survey presented no intrinsic difficulties, but was much hampered by bad
weather. Out of 30 days (Sundays also counted, as we could not afford to neglect any
DIU 2
306 DISCOVERY REPORTS
fine day) only on 12 could we work all day, and on 6 more for a part of the day, a total
of 18 days out of 30; the remaining 12 were useless for work owing to wind, snow or
fog.
The Harbour was triangulated by theodolite angles from all the main stations
(Fig. 1), and angles were also taken to the small beacons and all prominent objects.
The engine ran well at some times, but not at others, and unfortunately the motorman
did not seem able to secure any improvement in its action. Consequently there were
many unnecessary stoppages, which caused me considerable anxiety, as winds rise with
amazing swiftness to hurricane force, and shelter is very scarce. We spent much time
out of sight of the whaling station, and had we been blown out to sea, there would have
been the greatest difficulty in returning (see Appendix III).
The 3} in. theodolite was very useful, both because of the speed at which one can use
it and of its handiness in transport. It has a levelling bubble and screw of great delicacy
on the vertical arc, thus enabling one to keep the instrument accurately horizontal and
yet keep the telescope pointing at the object. It can thus be used for solar and stellar
observations. For position sights in cold weather it was found infinitely preferable to
use a theodolite rather than a sextant and artificial horizon, both because of the time
saved in setting up, of working when gloved, and the absence of the fogging, freezing,
and other drawbacks of the artificial horizon.
For the other sights also the theodolite was exclusively used. In taking true bearings
1 This, briefly, was the procedure:
The Officer in Charge, with two men (motorman and one seaman) erect D, then return to the pier, man
the ‘Alert’ and steam to the vicinity of B (see Fig. 1). The assistant and two other men would meanwhile
erect N, then A, then S, then B. The ‘Alert’ sends the pram (one seaman) ashore and all embark and
proceed to C. They erect C (‘Alert’ lies off), re-embark and proceed to G, land the assistant and one man
(with theodolite, etc.), who partly erects G. The Officer in Charge meanwhile proceeds to H in the‘ Alert’
and measures a round of angles from that point, twice or more, i.e. he ‘“‘makes”’ H, the assistant meanwhile
making G, when ready. In making G and H the beacon flags had to be partly erected, so that they could be
mutually observed. ‘‘ Making” at a station means setting up the theodolite and taking a round of angles two
or more times from that station. In each case the beacon has to be taken down or moved to allow the theo-
dolite to be erected exactly on the site of the beacon. Both at G and H the erection of beacons is then com-
pleted. The Officer in Charge returns to G, picks up the assistant, proceeds to C, drops the assistant,
anchors near D, and makes D, while the assistant makes C. He then picks up the assistant and proceeds to
B; the assistant makes B, the Officer in Charge makes N, then A. The assistant joins him and the base is
measured four times, usually twice each way, with a calibrated steel tape. N was in this case a telegraph pole
and therefore needed only a flag. The ‘ Alert’ was then boarded and steamed to the pier.
The above work occupied two days and fitted in remarkably well. The assistant being naturally somewhat
slower in theodolite work, usually gave the Officer in Charge sufficient time to sail to the next main
station and back, or nearly so. The sounding marks were put up while proceeding between main stations.
The triangulation consisted in closing and computing the appropriate sides in the following triangles:
NSA (NS 1500 ft. base), DAS and DSC, this giving side SC for the inner harbour scale.
BCS, BCH, GBH, giving GB, which is the long side used for the scale of the outer bay for Busen Fjord.
A check is obtained by working also through NSB, etc.
The triangles and points were then plotted. It was found that in no case did the error, i.e. the difference
of the sum of the internal angles from 180°, in any triangle exceed 13’. The base was measured four times
as usual and the range of difference was only 3 in., although the conditions were not good owing to strong
wind and snow; the surface, however, a sheet of fairly firm and flat snow, was excellent.
‘piof,y uasng ul UoNe[NSuer} Jo suayog “1 “Sy
308 DISCOVERY REPORTS
the horizontal and vertical arcs were read off simultaneously, and since the readings
were made through the same eyepiece, they occupied only a very short time. Usually
time to the nearest 0-5 sec. was taken also, and the results worked out independently by
both time and arc. The results were afterwards meaned according to their probable
relative value, assessed on the experience of the observer and the difficulties caused by
the conditions. A check was thus obtained where time for many sets was often lacking
owing to clouds, wind or drift snow. Drift snow was a constant nuisance. Even on fine
days, if any wind were blowing in the surrounding mountains, a great amount of loose
snow would blow off from them, and this, acting as it did exactly like light rain or
snow, Was quite sufficient in quantity to prevent work with optical instruments. Many
fine days were wasted in this way.
During the survey of Husvik and Busen Fjord we lived on board S.S. ‘Busen’, the
station transport vessel, and received very kindly treatment from Captain Hansen, of
the ‘Busen’, and Mr Andersen, the Manager of the whaling station, who never hesitated
to give me their assistance and advice.
Stromness and Leith Harbours (Charts 2, 3)
On completion of the survey of Husvik, Stromness, which lies just north of Husvik,
was visited. The procedure adopted here was identical with that carried out at Husvik,
the only difficulty in its execution being the connection of the two triangulations. A new
base was measured, and although the two scales when plotted did not quite agree, the
two sets of observations were co-ordinated later, the difference being due to the
plotting between Husvik and Stromness. As there was no inner harbour, one scale was
used for the whole survey. The survey occupied a much shorter period than that of
Husvik, both because there were few shoal patches and because everyone had acquired
more experience.
For reasons already given in reference to the Husvik survey, practically no sights were
taken. The coast being rather featureless, and of small value, no coast-lining was done
except by sketch.
It seemed as if a good position for a measured mile existed here. This would not be
suitable for big ships, but quite adequate for whale-catchers. A mile was therefore
measured and marked. Captain Sdérlle, Manager of the station, kindly put up permanent
beacons and leading marks in the indicated positions. Although ships are not built
there, yet their best trim for steaming and fuel consumption is often important during
hunting, and as economy becomes more urgent, it will increase in importance. The time
spent on this rather awkward job I therefore consider to be justified. The method
employed was, I believe, accurate to within a very few feet.
The requirements for a measured mile, which will enable ships to arrive at their true
speed, are (i) a sufficient run when approaching from either end to allow them to steady
on their course and accelerate to their maximum speed, (ii) sufficiently deep water to
avoid interference with their speed through drag of the bottom, (iii) a good view of and
sufficient distance between each pair of transit beacons marking the extremities of the
“SSOUWIONS Jv dT painsvatu ay} Jo UMOp Burd] ay} SuNeNsN] *z “SLT
310 DISCOVERY REPORTS
mile to give a sharp movement when they are in contact, and (iv) a sufficient distance
between and clear view of the leading beacons to ensure a steady course. These were
all present to a sufficient degree in this instance.
Owing to the configuration of the land, it was found that the usual methods were
impossible. The following method was therefore devised, and, although perhaps not
rigorously accurate, is sufficiently so to make its employment worth while.
Theodolite angles were taken, with more than usual repetition to ensure accuracy, at
C, D, E and F (see Fig. 2). The distance CD had been calculated direct from the
measured base DG, through two triangles, and agreed to within a foot or so of 1480 ft.
From the triangle CDE, the angles of which had been measured, DE was calculated, and
then DH (3414-1 ft.) by dropping a perpendicular from E to FD at H. From DE in the
triangle already found, FD was calculated to be 9435-1 ft.; by subtracting DH from DE
a distance of 6021-0 ft. was obtained for HF. So far everything had been straight-
forward. Unfortunately HF could not be the real measured mile, as / was on land and
also was backed at about 5 ft. from the sea by a perpendicular precipice giving no room
for a rear beacon, but it was the only spot from which all the other main stations neces-
sary could be seen.
A point N farther along the coast to the eastward of F was suitable, as it had a flat
rocky ledge behind it for 70 ft., which was sufficient for the distance between front and
rear beacons. A careful angle was taken to a mark placed here and the distance was
measured, this being the hypotenuse of the small triangle FNO. 'The distance FO was
the distance to be added to HF for the actual total between the two pairs of beacons.
Then the ‘ Alert’ was run out from N for a couple of hundred feet, and a point mentally
marked on the beach at Stromness (a red hut, quite conspicuous) near D for the real line,
this being as nearly as possible parallel to #D. On adding 99:3 ft. to the distance HF,
this being FO the resultant of the angle, etc. to the real marks at N, it was found that the
mile (or the beacons) from the selected positions, chosen as they were by rough measure-
ment, was 33 ft. too long. Then, as the outer beacon at N could not be shifted, the
inner beacon at E was moved a carefully measured distance of 33 ft. towards N. The
setting up of marks for the rear beacons in each case was fairly simple, as a sextant
was all that was required, with a man moving a small mark until it coincided with the
correct position with the sextant at go°. For the rear leading mark we simply carried a baulk
of timber up country as far as we could, and with the hut as the foresight, set 1t up so
that the approximate place off NV was in line. It was then planted and painted white (Y).
Although this method cannot be called rigorously accurate, I think it will be found
sufficiently near, and in the circumstances was the only one that appeared practicable.
FD 94351 ft.
DH — 2414-1 tt:
ee oi a 6021°0 ft.
FO 99°3 ft.
HO 6120°3 ft.
WEST CUMBERLAND BAY 311
33°3 ft. in excess of the nautical mile, which is 6087 ft. (approximately) in the latitude
of South Georgia.
HO= ZL + 33:3 ft. being parallel and between the same perpendiculars, therefore
ZL = 6087 ft. very nearly.
A considerable swell frequently comes into Stromness Harbour, notwithstanding the
protection afforded by Grass Island, and the Transport Ship ‘ Peder Bogen’ often rolls
very heavily alongside the jetty. During this time the sounding of Stromness Bay was
resumed where it had been left in 1927. No new dangers to navigation were discovered,
except some more kelp in the entrance, but a wreck was erased from the charts of Strom-
ness Bay, there being 80 fathoms of water where it appeared on the existing charts.
On completion of Stromness Harbour, Leith Harbour was visited and the sounding
of Stromness Bay completed from there, as well as some additional work in Leith
Harbour, with soundings and theodolite angles to new stations in Stromness Bay.
Captain Bjénnes Hansen, of the S.S. ‘Peder Bogen’, and Captain Sdrlle, the Manager
of the Stromness whaling station were as kind as possible in every way, as were also
Mr Leganger Hansen of Leith Harbour, an old and ever-helpful friend, and Captain
Ridland of the S.S. ‘Coronda’.
One ever-recurring trouble was the difficulty of keeping the beacons from being blown
down. This was due both to the violent winds and to no firm hold being obtainable in
the iron-hard frostbound snow or earth during the spring and autumn. The earth,
moreover, is very seldom more than a foot deep with rock beneath. Many hours were
spent in re-erecting beacons.
Having completed this part of our work, we returned to Grytviken for a few days to
spend Christmas.
Maiviken (Chart 2)
It had been decided that the harbours near Grytviken and those to the south-east
should be examined during the first season. In accordance with this plan, Maiviken, a
harbour much used by the whale-catchers for shelter, was first dealt with. The
Maiviken survey proved to be a fairly straightforward piece of work, although, as there
is very little flat land, it was difficult to find a base. This difficulty was met with very
frequently. A short base, but one sufficiently long for such a small harbour, was
eventually measured.
Whilst here a large beacon was placed on a knoll at the entrance, to enable a con-
nection to be made with other work in Cumberland Bay as opportunity should occur;
but this beacon, being much exposed to wind from West Cumberland Bay, blew down
repeatedly. Here also our anxieties about mooring commenced. Fortunately we had no
swell, otherwise there would have been many anxious moments.
Jason Harbour (Chart 2)
To complete the necessary harbours in Cumberland Bay it was decided to continue
with Jason Harbour. The choice would in fact have been forced on us, as in attempting
to go outside we were driven back by wind.
At Jason Harbour, although there was an apparently good little inner harbour pro-
312 DISCOVERY REPORTS
tected by a reef across half the entrance, the swell from a south-east gale was so heavy
as to carry away our stern mooring. Strangely enough there was no wind whatever in-
side, since the high mountains did not allow it to blow home. The swell became in fact
so big that we had to shift our camp well above high-water mark. Here everything
went very well except the theodolite observations at the north-east main station at
Tor point, where the ground was so springy with tussac that only with the 34 inch
theodolite could any good be done. This, of course, is because there is no need to walk
round it to take readings. he tussac is always bad for theodolite work, owing to the
springiness of the roots and because one has to climb over tufts as much as 2 ft. high,
and in so doing can easily displace the theodolite. This applies only in the late
summer: at other seasons everything is frozen hard and excellently firm, and the tussac
is not nearly so luxuriant.
A good base was measured here on the shore of an unexpected lagoon. The lagoon is
unfortunately no good for ships, as it is merely connected with the sea by a very narrow
cut which can only admit a small boat: even the ‘Alert’ could not negotiate it safely.
The sounding of this harbour was not concluded at this stage, because I intended
leaving it for the winter, to see if it were possible to work then, and also because it was
better to carry on with the more important and distant work. .
Godthul (Chart 2)
On the next fine day, January 21, after calling at Grytviken to complete with stores
(a matter of a few hours), we proceeded to Godthul. We had already made a voyage to
this place for a preliminary inspection. The harbour forms a good but deep anchorage
and was frequented by a Factory Ship, the ‘Thor I’, Captain Horndtved, during the
season. After examining it, it was decided that a small cove, which we named Pleasant
Cove (Chart 2), appeared to be a suitable camping ground (Plate XLI, fig. 2). We
made our camp there and found that for a small vessel or a camp it is one of the most
suitable spots on the island, being well sheltered both from wind and swell from all
directions, and very often clear when outside there is thick fog or rain. The sun also
shines in from sunrise, but unfortunately it sets behind the high peak to the north-west
at a very early hour. These advantages were not realized at the time, and I constantly
felt a quite unnecessary anxiety for the safety of the ‘ Alert’. Almost from the beginning
we placed one man on board during the night, in case of emergency, and occasionally
two, or even my assistant as well; but it was felt that the discomfort was so great as not
to justify having more than one unless the weather was very threatening.
Up to this time, although there had been a considerable amount of precipitation, it
was all or nearly all snow, though sometimes, it is true, snow in a very wet state, which
hardly lay at all during the day. The tents did not become very wet, as their flapping,
either by the wind or by deliberate shaking, shook off most of the snow before it had
time to melt during the day, and during the night it was seldom warm enough for snow
to melt. Consequently we escaped during this time what are probably the greatest
discomforts of a camp, wet tents and damp sleeping bags.
GODTHUL 313
We used three tents, two for sleeping and one for cooking, as it was found that the
moisture from the steam of cooking condensed inside and dripped, thereby annulling
the benefit of the warmth from the cookers. The waterproof sleeping-bag covers also
were not satisfactory, as there is no ventilation and the moisture condensed inside:
they are capable of improvement in this direction.
It was during this survey that we experienced our first open-sea work, for we com-
bined the survey of Godthul with a coastal survey from Cape George to Barff Point
(Plate XLII, fig. 4), a stretch of approximately 6 miles. This work entailed the exercise of
ingenuity in the measurement of a base and in scheming an adequate triangulation.
There was no flat ground whatsoever, and it was decided to stretch a spare piece of
sounding wire between two main stations and measure it by means of steel tape after-
wards. ‘The wire was wound on a reel and set up aft in the ‘ Alert’. One end was then
sent ashore attached to a Salter’s balance and secured to the first base; the ‘ Alert’ was
then steamed to the second base and passed close alongside it keeping the wire taut,
which was easy as the wire floated on the top of the kelp, and had small floats at intervals,
and therefore remained straight. When the second base was exactly abeam, the wire was
marked, the balance read and the wire rewound. The ends of the base were on rocky
points near water level. On return to camp the wire was measured in sections several
times by means of a steel tape, keeping the same strain on it. A base of 2500 ft. was
measured with a probable error of less than 1/500. It is doubtful if a portable range-
finder, even had we possessed one, could have given better results. In practice the strain
was taken off when measuring wire after the first measurement, as it was realized that any
contraction would tend to neutralize errors due to the wire sagging.
The triangulation difficulties were also of a practical nature and were due to the
precipitous coast and the constant swell rolling against it. The overcoming of the
difficulties was due largely to the courageous manner in which Mr O’Connor and one
or other of the seamen, Purvis, Briggs or Alsford, tackled the landings, carrying beacon
poles and flags, spun-yarn stays, stakes, theodolite and legs. All were necessarily heavily
dressed to be able to stand taking angles for hours in low temperature and exposed
situations, and were wearing sea-boots for landing. I have no hesitation in saying
that a slip on those slimy rocks—and they were all slimy with sea-weed—would have
meant immersion in icy cold water and almost certain death. Such landings were made
on numerous occasions, then and later. The pram was always used, and backed with her
square stern close to the rock; then, on top of the swell, here seldom less than ro ft.
high, the first person would jump, then take the gear piece by piece from the second,
until finally the second could jump. Naturally the boat had to be handled very carefully
meanwhile. Our usual boatman was Briggs, who became very good at the work. ‘This
was not the end of the adventure, since now would come the climb, heavily laden with
gear, up a rock sometimes almost vertical and from 30 to roo ft. in height. Occasionally
the rocks were so steep that the gear had to be hauled up by means of spun-yarn. ‘The
embarkation at the end of the business would be, if anything, even more hazardous,
entailing as it did climbing down (which is worse than climbing up), and jumping from
DiI 3
314 DISCOVERY REPORTS
a slippery surface into a small bobbing boat. I need scarcely say that I was more afraid
for their safety than they were for their own.
During these operations, the ‘ Alert’ could not be left unattended, and therefore either
lay off waiting, or proceeded to some more sheltered spot, if any useful work could be
found there. Generally she waited, because of the treacherous weather, which never
gave much warning of a change for the worse.
Even with the stations made as above, the triangulation had to depend to a certain
extent on calculated angles, to wit, those at O’Connor Peak. O’Connor Peak cannot easily
be climbed, but having a very well-defined sharp point it became an important position,
more especially since we depended upon it in connecting this triangulation with that of
Cumberland Bay.
There were a great many days when landing was definitely impossible, and - this
delayed the work considerably. During this time also the general weather conditions
were particularly vile, snow and fog alternating for days on end, with only the briefest
fine intervals.
Every opportunity was taken of working outside, leaving Godthul and Pleasant Cove
for windy days; but even so these were both completed some time before the coastal
strip. The importance of this part of the coast lies in the fact that it is near Grytviken,
the principal harbour of the island, yet is very foul, and that there is a good navigable
channel for small vessels inside the rocks, which is frequently used by whale-catchers.
The ‘ Norvegia’ came in during our stay, and went alongside Messrs Bryde and Dahl’s
Floating Factory, the ‘Thor I’, which had arrived some days previously. ‘The * Nor-
vegia’ had completed a voyage made in search of new whaling grounds and for
scientific research, and was going to lay up at Grytviken for the winter.
During the sounding between Barff Point and Cape George some data were obtained
for deducing the current. ‘The method used, on those occasions when a flat calm en-
sured that there would be no wind effect, was to plot the ‘ Alert’s’ position by sextant
angles at intervals to determine her drift. ‘The current seemed to vary between } and
1} knots in a west-north-west direction. These results, of course, are not conclusive,
having been obtained over a comparatively short period; but they should give an
indication of the general conditions to be expected.
In the time at our disposal the topography during this survey was not considered to
merit more than a sketch, and with the exception of some of the more outstanding
features, no more was attempted. Heights were obtained where possible by theodolite
elevated angles, and when any summits were climbed the aneroid was used and found to
agree well with the theodolite results up to about 500 ft. or a little more. The coast-line
was practically inaccessible except in a few places, and was therefore also sketched in.
One of our main stations at Godthul, at a height of 520 ft., became very useful, as on
going up one day when a very heavy swell prevailed outside, we managed with our
theodolite to obtain angles to all the breakers in sight. ‘These angles were very useful
afterwards, in combination with other angles, to fix these breakers. Angles of depression
were also obtained to all these. Although not realized at the time, one of these breakers
SURVEYS IN R.R.S. ‘WILLIAM SCORESBY’ 315
turned out to be the Fridtjof Nansen Bank and another a breaker very seldom seen off
Cape George. Unfortunately the latter was not observed again and is therefore still not
definitely fixed: the depth over it must be considerable, probably 4 or 5 fathoms.
The end of the season was approaching as we completed the survey, and having
regard to the shortening days and bad weather, it was not considered desirable to
commence other work before the winter. The snow was now beginning to lie thickly.
Moreover, we had to take over the Marine Biological Station from those then in charge
of it. The return to Grytviken, therefore, was decided on, and was eventually carried
out on April 10, 1929. We completed some work on the way.
It was on one of our periodical returns to Grytviken from Godthul for stores that
we had our worst passage. Although the outside portion of the passage is only 6 miles,
an hour’s run, between our departure from Pleasant Cove and our arrival at ‘ Alert’ Rock,
when about half way, the wind from a flat calm became north-west, right in our teeth,
and of force 6. Since the glass was falling and the breeze still freshening, I decided that
we should have to maintain full speed at all costs to get into comparative shelter as soon
as possible. It was not a very pleasant experience, as we took some green seas right
over and had to start pumping, but the boat behaved very well. By this time, in the
considerable sea running, we could not have turned back without great danger.
I mention this passage to show how quickly the weather may become impossible for
a small boat round these coasts. Of course, also, the danger of the engine developing
some trouble had always to be borne in mind. We had the sail to fall back upon, but
the ‘Alert’ was naturally not very weatherly, and the large sea-anchor we had made,
though useful to keep her head to the wind in case of temporary stoppage, would not
have kept her from going ashore. The 45-Ib. anchor would not give great security, as
until actually on the coast the depth of water is so great that no anchor could be expected
to get a grip in time.
SURVEY WORK IN RRS. ‘WILLIAM SCORESBY’, FEBRUARY 5 TO
MARCH 18, 1929
On one of our periodical returns to Grytviken for fuel, we were informed that the
‘William Scoresby’ was leaving very shortly for a month’s cruise in the South Shetlands.
This being an excellent opportunity of extending our knowledge there, I immediately
arranged to take passage in her with my assistant and one hand. We proceeded on
February 5 round the north-west of South Georgia and outside Willis Islands. Passing
a short distance off Willis Islands, O’Connor got some observations and bearings, con-
firming the fact that they are charted too far west and are actually some miles nearer
Bird Island (Chart 3). A report to this effect was made.
The ‘ William Scoresby’ was of course occupied on her ordinary work and could not
depart from her programme. This, however, included visits to various localities I
wished to revisit, including Elephant Island, Admiralty Bay, the north coast of Trinity
Peninsula, Deception Island, and all those islands to the south-west which have been
mentioned as being very doubtfully charted. Without going into the voyage in detail, it
2.2
3-2
316 DISCOVERY REPORTS
may be said at once that it was rather disappointing. From the time we left South
Georgia until we finally left the South Shetlands, we were in almost continual fog.
There were three notable exceptions. Just as we approached Elephant Island it cleared
splendidly, and remained so all day, an opportunity which was instantly seized, and
reliable positions were established by solar observations for Elephant Island and Gibbs
Island. The second exception was off Admiralty Bay, where some satisfactory stellar
observations were obtained, showing definitely that a south-westward counter-current
flows down the southern shores of Bransfield Strait.
The third and perhaps most important exception occurred on arrival at Deception,
where the day turned out perfect (we were there only twenty-four hours). Instantly it
was decided to climb Mount Pond, the highest point of the island, with O’Connor and
Alsford, and if possible take a round of angles with a theodolite and a true bearing by
sun. The ascent was safely accomplished with only one incident, when O’Connor,
owing to the sun blinding him, failed to observe the depression in the snow caused by a
narrow crevasse, put his foot through, and nearly followed. He was prevented from
doing so by the theodolite legs which he was carrying. On arrival at the top, 187oft.
by aneroid, a glorious view was obtained, and the weather being absolutely clear a
range of vision of over 100 miles was possible. It is believed that Mt Frangais in Anvers
Island, about 120 miles distant, was seen. The theodolite was set up and a very good round
of angles obtained, and then a couple of sets of observations for true bearing. ‘This,
although by itself insufficient to determine the positions of the various objects taken,
when combined with other bearings will enable us to plot them. As the position of
Deception is now in no doubt, those of the objects sighted will thus be determined. No
trouble was experienced in taking these observations, except that the metal-shod legs
of the theodolite, warmed by the sun, were inclined to sink in the ice, notwithstanding
the fact that they had been provided with flat wooden shoes.
The fog came down again next day, and although we saw the islands (Low, Snow,
Smith, etc.) occasionally and also managed to take some sun sights, nothing of sufficient
accuracy was obtained.
We returned to South Georgia after calling at Stanley, Falkland Islands, for a few
days. At Stanley we again checked the variation and got some theodolite angles from
Sappers Hill to fix the position of the wireless telegraphy masts and some new topo-
graphical features. We finally arrived back at Grytviken on March 18 after a voyage
which might have yielded exceptionally important results had circumstances been
somewhat more favourable.
We resumed the survey of Godthul where it was left off. The ‘ Alert’ had been slipped
before we sailed and during our absence the two who remained behind had given her
a thorough overhaul and painting.
WINTER IN GRYTVIKEN, 1929
On reaching Grytviken we immediately commenced taking over the Marine Biological
Station and making some preparations for the winter. hese consisted mainly in seeing
that the buildings were secure and as airtight as possible, in providing adequate moorings
for the ‘ Alert’, and in seeing to our fuel stocks. With a view to carrying out some work
during the winter, the ‘Alert’ was left afloat and moored inside the Magistrate’s Pier
with stout ropes. These are decidedly necessary, as the south-west wind blows on to the
pier with great violence.
The programme for the winter was easily arranged, as the charts of Husvik, Stromness,
Godthul, Pleasant Cove, Maiviken and Jason Harbour had to be drawn and their sailing
directions written up.
Work was arranged for forenoon and evening, leaving the afternoon for skiing or
other open-air sport. ‘This allowed the personnel to take as much advantage as possible
of the somewhat short daylight hours for recreation in the open.
Whilst my assistant and myself were drawing the fair sheets, the remainder were
employed in refitting the boats, and they had in addition to do the housework. Stock
was taken of the stores, and indents for replacements were made out. Any spare time
left over was devoted to cleaning and painting portions of the house.
Bearing in mind that it was not intended to camp during the winter, the opportunities
for field work were limited. There would have been many more but for the freezing over
of King Edward Cove on fine calm days. The ice never became very heavy, but was
sufficiently so to prevent a boat like the ‘Alert’, of fairly light construction and not
much power, from steaming. One or two attempts to proceed were made, but although
the copper sheathing protected the hull from the sharp splinters, it was torn off owing
to the unfortunate fact that it overlapped the wrong way, that is, fore and aft, instead of
vertically. It was replaced without difficulty and remained useful for very thin and loose
ice, though it would have been better had it been taken farther aft past the swell of the
bow.
In July our only winter visitor arrived, the S.S. ‘ Falkland’ from the Falkland Islands.
At the Master’s suggestion, I piloted her from Grytviken to Husvik and then to Leith,
thus getting an opportunity of having a practical test for my charts. It was at this time
that an extraordinary spell of warm weather occurred; the temperature rose to 50° F.
and rain fell almost continuously for three days, nearly all the snow disappearing near
sea-level.
Just before this, on June 27, a severe earthquake was felt, finishing at 12 hours
51 min. 30 sec. G.M.T. The shock lasted continuously for about three minutes. No
damage was done, as all the houses are of exceptionally strong and elastic construction,
mainly of wood on a concrete foundation. It was apparently the first earthquake
experienced since 1911. Another shock was reported on July 1 during the night, but this
was not observed by us.
318 DISCOVERY REPORTS
On August 3 and 4 the Winter Sports were held and all the party entered for the ski
race. Briggs, Able Seaman, won a cup, and all the remainder received medals.
On August 18, at about 8.30 a.m., an avalanche came down the scree slopes of Coronda
Peak at Leith Harbour and completed the destruction of the old part of the whaling
station. Owing to the time it occurred, most of the men had not come back to work
from the mess and only six were caught. Three of these were killed. two men were
buried several feet deep for nearly two hours, but when recovered were apparently none
the worse for their experience.
On August 31 we dry-docked the ‘Alert’ for three days to give her bottom a Soup:
of coats of paint, and to examine her propeller and shaft.
The charts were completed on September 25 and despatched via Monte Video on
October 1 in charge of Captain Williams of the transport ‘Southern King’, who kindly
arranged to send them on from that port in the personal charge of the Captain of
another ship which was homeward bound. ‘They comprised the following:
Plans: Husvik.
Pleasant Cove.
Maiviken.
Jason Harbour.
Charts: Stromness Harbour and Busen Fjord.
Barff Point to Cape George, including Godthul.
Tracings: Stromness Bay |
Cumberland Bay - showing additional soundings and details.
King Edward Cove |
Wilson Harbour, drawn from details supplied by Lt.-Cdr. Mercer, of the
‘William Scoresby’.
SURVEY OPERATIONS, SEASON 1929-30
SURVEY WORK IN MV. ‘ALERT’, SEPTEMBER 27, 1929 TO FEBRUARY 16, 1930,
AND FEBRUARY 20 TO APRIL 133, 1930
It now became necessary to prepare for the forthcoming season, and the ‘ Alert’ was
accordingly filled up with fuel, stores and all necessary equipment.
The whaling stations all opened about the third week in September, but actual whaling
did not commence until the end of the month, as the flensing plans had to be cleared of
snow and all plant prepared for work.
The zoological staff were to occupy the Marine Biological Station during the coming
season, and it was decided to await their arrival, as the fires had to be kept alight and the
water prevented from freezing. On September 15, however, I was informed that the
party would not arrive until the beginning of October, which was rather late. We
FORTUNA BAY 319
therefore turned the house over to the Magistrate’s care and prepared to leave
immediately.
The programme was to proceed north and survey the remaining harbour used as a
whaling station, Prince Olaf Harbour, and as many of the more generally used harbours
as time would permit. With this intention we proceeded to Stromness Bay on the first
fine day. Being informed that the Orwell’ had arrived at Husvik, bringing our season’s
stores, we called there and sorted and checked them. We then visited Stromness and
Leith, and the weather being unsuitable for work, stayed a few days. Here we met the
zoological staff, who arrived in the Factory Ship ‘ Antarctic’.
Fortuna Bay (Chart 3)
We proceeded on October 15, the weather although calm being foggy, and we were
lucky in finding Fortuna Bay, which was our goal, at the first attempt. We arrived
there in an unexpectedly short time, and this caused us to suspect an error in its charted
position. That we heard the steam whistle from Stromness or Leith, although separated
from us by high hills, also showed the proximity of these stations. The error in position
was confirmed later, as our sights then put the bay some distance farther to the south-
east than charted.
Fortuna Bay is a large open bay with some rocks, Fortuna Rocks, at the entrance,
which serve to protect it somewhat from the north. It is sheltered by high precipitous
mountains on all sides but the south. There is, however, a gap half-way down the
western side, a branch of the Fortuna Glacier, which is a conspicuous mark from seaward.
At this gap, where a glacier comes towards the bay, there is a small bay and anchorage.
Although owing to the gap there is more wind here, there is little swell, as compared
with the considerable swell usual in Fortuna Bay, and elsewhere the water is too deep
for anchoring. We called this Anchorage Bay.
A camp was made a little to the south of Anchorage Bay and moorings laid out for the
eAllert
At each new place we had difficulty in choosing the best camping site. We naturally
learnt by experience, but at first no one could say where the best place would, in fact,
turn out to be. The main consideration was shelter for the ‘Alert’, fairly near the
beach in shallow, but not too shallow, water. The kind of anchorage we found best was
in about 4 to 5 fathoms, within 50 yards of the beach, with good holding ground of mud
or fine sand and mud. It was essential that the camp should be in sight of the boat, and
of course above high-water mark. ‘Then an adequate water supply, not too far away, was
needed, and finally, a piece of fairly level dry ground, clear of elephant seals, and fairly
clear of penguins.
We always tried to avoid the immediate vicinity of elephant seals. The reason was
that they could become very great nuisances, especially at night and when the weather
was going to be bad—which was very frequently. ‘The air was then always filled with the
bellowing and the bleating of the mothers and calves. Further unpleasantness was
occasioned by their apparent liking for the side of the tent to lie against, as it appeared
320 DISCOVERY REPORTS
to fit the contours of their bodies. The tents being of the Antarctic type, with no ropes
but a deep valance which was weighted with snow (or anything else, like sand or
shingle), the result was a furrow with the tent wall on one side. ‘The weight of a seal is,
however, rather too much for a tent, and they had to be discouraged, although they are
normally very peaceful sleepers.
The requirements for a camp were not easy to fulfil. At Maiviken the boat was not
too well protected and we should have had to shift in the event of east wind. At
Pleasant Cove there was no dry ground except on large pebbles just on the high-water
line, and we should have had to move the camp with a spring tide or a more than usually
heavy swell (Plate XLI, fig. 2). At Jason Harbour we actually did have to move the
camp owing to the swell, and the boat did not lie very comfortably.
Here, at Fortuna Bay, the appearance of the beach suggested a quite heavy swell at
times. So far as the camp was concerned this did not matter, as the snow being still
fairly thick on the ground, and smooth and soft, we could camp anywhere in fairly dry
conditions. With the ‘ Alert’ the case was different, for to moor in water which was deep
enough not to break would entail going out too far, and the water then deepened very
steeply, giving rise to the danger of the anchors slipping off. We got over this difficulty
by making a long 30 fathom 34-in. hemp spring fast to a rock on shore. We had done this
before, but whereas up to now we had moored head and stern, here we allowed the
‘Alert’ to swing: this seemed to be the wisest course, as the wind here changed from
north to south and back often and quickly, owing to the hills behind.
Having camped, we commenced triangulation as usual. We were again favoured by a
flat snow surface, which permitted the measuring of a 2100 ft. base in full view of all the
four main stations we made. The triangulation was completed in three days, and some
inshore sounding carried out by the pram. The coast-line was also walked over, round
the south-west end.
At this point I was disturbed to find that our petrol consumption had become
excessive, and that we were now making only 1} miles to the gallon, instead of 25 miles.
Owing to the inexperience of Alsford, who was acting as motorman, the cause could not
be detected. It was laid down that a margin above the estimated requirements of at
least 10 gallons should always be kept for passages in the open sea. This reserve is not
quite as great as it seems, as owing to the shape of the tank, 2 or 3 gallons are always left
in its bottom. Having to reach Prince Olaf Harbour, our next stop, a distance of at least
20 miles, with possible delays, I could not afford to use any more petrol for sounding.
Accordingly we decided to leave completion of the sounding until our return after
finishing the surveys in the north-west.
We made ready for departure, therefore, and after having to wait two days for
favourable weather, left on October 25. The day turned out, however, worse than was
expected. When passing the end of Fortuna Glacier and across Antarctic Bay, with a
westerly wind of force 7, we had to tack across to prevent being swamped. It was impos-
sible to turn back, so we steamed to Cape Constance, where of course we were sheltered.
On venturing into Possession Bay, however, it was seen that the crossing would be
PRINCE OLAF HARBOUR 321
impossible, the wind being force 8 to 9 and the sea a white sheet of foam. We therefore
returned to the small harbour made by the two horns of Cape Constance. Owing to the
gusts which buffeted us all night we called this harbour Windy Cove.
Next morning we completed the voyage to Prince Olaf Harbour with a fresh easterly
breeze, to which we set all sail and bowled along at 8 or 9 knots. It was the most
unpleasant passage we had had so far. These fjords all have very bad reputations for
sudden and furious winds, but I believe that Possession Bay is the worst.
We were made very welcome by the Manager, Captain Abrahamsen, who did all he
could to help us and make us comfortable, both then and during all our time in the
north-western part of the island. ‘Thanks to his kindness the defect in the engine was
soon set right.
Prince Olaf Harbour (Chart 3)
Having laid our moorings for the ‘ Alert’ in the best anchorage we had found so far,
in 5 fathoms with a mud bottom and no swell, we proceeded with the usual triangulation.
There was here little or no flat ground (a very usual complaint), and the base had to be
measured across the reservoir. This reservoir, being covered with ice, made a good
though rather short base. Unfortunately, however, it was in a hollow surrounded
by rather steep hills, and it was a difficult problem to find a suitable point to which
to extend it. By taking very great care with the angles a good extension was made.
The ice on the lake, owing to the rise and fall of water, was rather rotten and we
therefore again used wire and measured it with steel tape afterwards. Owing to the flat
surface the wire could be kept quite straight without much tension, and the result was
very satisfactory.
The remainder of the triangulation presented no difficulty and embraced the
approaches as far as Cape Crewe and Black Head. This work involved making ten main
stations, including Sheep Point Light and Cape Crewe Light. At Black Head O’Connor
had an unusually bad landing and a difficult climb to the top. He here saw a sheep which
had escaped from the station and had become quite wild. It appeared to be thriving,
though it was supposed to have been there two or three years. Elsewhere the difficulties
of landing were slight.
The Inner Harbour had been reported foul the previous year, and the depth was
small. A great many more soundings were therefore taken than would have been the
case in deeper water, as the work of sounding had to be done very carefully. A small
area alongside the hulk had to be left, since it was occupied by the transport S.S.
‘Southern King’: this, however, was completed afterwards on one of our later visits.
The weather here during the first part of our stay was an agreeable change from what
we usually had, and the work progressed very favourably, giving rise to great hopes for
the season. Unfortunately this weather did not continue. Still, the work done com-
pared well in amount with that carried out during the same period in the previous year.
The job of anchoring, turning, and mooring ships which go alongside the hulk always
presented a ticklish problem in this harbour, owing to the very restricted space. ‘The
4oo-ft. ‘Southern King’ was particularly difficult to handle. It was suggested that
DIII 4
322 DISCOVERY REPORTS
leading and clearing beacons would simplify the business and make it less precarious.
Accordingly we selected sites for five beacons, making three pairs of leading marks
(including one chimney) for anchoring and turning the ship clear of danger. Sub-
stantial beacons were erected, fixed, and charted before we left.
Bay of Isles (Chart 3)
On completion of Prince Olaf Harbour it was decided to proceed to the more or less
detailed survey of the Bay of Isles, which though itself of no very immediate importance
navigationally, gives access to two moderately good anchorages, namely Rosita or
Allardyce Harbour and Elephant Beach Anchorage. The remaining bays are open to
much swell as well as being exposed to very strong wind.
A trip was accordingly made to the Bay of Isles for carrying out a preliminary exami-
nation, but a thick fog descended and spoilt the operation. On the first suitable day,
November 28, we proceeded with the work. On this particular day the weather was
gloriously exhilarating, with clear blue sky and delightful air—as an occasional day can
be in South Georgia. Leaving fairly early in the morning, we soon covered the short
distance to Cape Wilson and then made a complete coastal reconnaissance, following
the shore closely right round to Cape Buller and keeping a careful look-out for a likely
camping ground. We concluded that there were only three possible places, each with
several disadvantages. We deliberated for some time, and finally decided on a spot on
the south side of Camp Bay as being the least unpleasant; it had some shelter from most
winds and a jutting promontory gave protection, as I thought, from swell. ‘The beach
was stony and the anchorage for the ‘ Alert’ was in the middle of kelp, but about the
right depth, 4 to 5 fathoms, with a bottom of stones and sand. The tents were erected
on the stones on the beach, mitigated by as much moss and tussac as we could find.
The first four days proved quite fine, and notwithstanding the distances involved, a
great deal of the triangulation was carried out. The bay measures 9} by 8 miles and
contains nine islands, nearly all of similar height but in size varying from Albatross
Island, approximately 1 mile square, to little Dot Island, a mere large rock.
Then, on a rainy but calm day, it was decided to replenish fuel at Prince Olaf Har-
bour. This was always our main preoccupation, as we could carry a shorter supply of
that than of anything else. We obtained our fuel and accomplished the round journey in
less than five hours, bringing back another 50 gallons of petrol. The next day was
again fine and further work was carried out.
The weather during the following night, however, became worse: a breeze from the
east began to bring in a swell, which rapidly became fairly heavy. Until this time our
practice had been to haul the pram on the beach at night. The beach here, however,
was so stony that even the pram began to suffer, notwithstanding her extra bilge planks;
accordingly she was anchored a short distance off with a 30-lb. anchor. At about 4 a.m.,
December 2, we were awakened by the noise of her being thrown on the beach, whereupon
O’Connor and the men turned out and hauled her up, undamaged, but unfortunately
with one oar missing. This turned out to be a real misfortune, as with wind and swell still
BAY OF ISLES 323
increasing and the latter beginning to break with some violence, it became necessary to
think of the safety of the ‘Alert’.
The wind from the east was blowing right into Camp Bay, but the bluff kept it from
touching our small nook. The only danger therefore was the swell, which curled round the
end of the rocky point in which the bluff ended, and when as far in as the ‘Alert’,
became a ground swell of respectable proportions. Unfortunately, with the surf then
breaking, we could not hope to launch the pram with only one oar. As, however, the
swell did not break nearly as far out as the ‘Alert’ and she was riding easily, no im-
mediate danger was apprehended. We tried to shout a message to the ‘ Alert’, but the
noise of water was too strong for it to be heard.
All would have been well had the ‘Alert’ been swinging to her moorings, but un-
fortunately in order to prevent her swinging outside the protecting point, she had been
made fast by a fairly taut line from her stern to a rock on shore. At low water, about
2 p.m., a swell larger than usual came in. It broke out the weather anchor (she was
moored with three) and carried her in on its crest, casting her on the stony beach just
before the other anchors took the strain (Plate XL, fig. 2).
At the time, the motorman and one seaman were on board. They were, however,
completely helpless in the suddenness of the emergency. Immediate steps were taken
to land the instruments and more important books, and to bowse everything taut to
prevent bumping; at the first opportunity all gear was landed, and the ‘ Alert’ hauled
up above high-water mark. Unfortunately during these operations all hands became
wet and most of the instruments and books suffered to some extent. It was snowing
hard all the time.
For the men not much could be done, as the supply of dry clothing was very scanty,
but Captain Abrahamsen, at Prince Olaf Harbour, had made us a Christmas present of
rum, which was most welcome. ‘The temperature varied from 29 to 35° F., and we had to
contrive to dry the things by an extempore petrol-tin stove and a little damp driftwood.
Primus stoves are not well adapted for drying clothes.
For the books and instruments little could be done until the weather improved,
although as much as possible was attempted with the theodolite and chronometer.
Unfortunately the means as well as the skill was lacking, and the chronometer could not
be saved, neither could the small theodolite, being too complicated for us to take apart.
The other instruments were eventually made serviceable, although the cases of most of
them came to pieces, and one or two small instruments were lost altogether.
Although she was hauled up as far as possible, the big surf still bumped the ‘ Alert’
very considerably and the total damage, most of which was done when driving over the
rocks below low-water mark, was considerable. The rudder and rudder-post were both
carried away, a large hole was made in the bilge on both sides, and the keel was
“chewed up”’. The propeller did not touch, I think, and the shaft was only very slightly
bent through straining of the hull. The only damage to the engine was the spoiling of
the magneto by water. The most important loss was that of a small note-book con-
taining much work, some of which had not as yet been taken to a further stage. When
4-2
324 DISCOVERY REPORTS
the sea went down, a long search was made along all the surrounding beaches for any
gear washed up, but nothing of value was recovered.
It now became our task to patch the ‘ Alert’ as well as possible and get her back into
the water. The repair was executed at low water with waterproof sheets and sleeping-
bag covers, the whole secured with strips of copper from the sheathing and a large
supply of copper tacks provided for such an emergency. It was carried out extra-
ordinarily well, as results showed. This work was done under terrible conditions, lying
on one’s back with icy cold water swirling and splashing near, snow falling, and a
temperature seldom above freezing-point ; but throughout it was done with the utmost
cheerfulness. My assistant and his men showed the greatest resource and endurance,
working whenever there was light enough, and frequently getting wet.
When all was finished, our attention was taken up with the task of turning the ‘ Alert’
with bow to seaward and getting her as nearly afloat as possible. ‘This was accomplished
at considerable pains by means of two or three small planks (the only ones on the
beach) used as skids and levers, and our cables rigged as Spanish windlasses—the latter
mainly at the motorman’s suggestion. Finally, on December 10, she was pointing sea-
ward with all movable parts taken out, propeller off, tanks out—in fact a mere shell.
The anchors, of course, were still laid out (one on each bow), and the 40-fathom cable
right ahead: all bar taut, and with a chain on either quarter keeping her upright.
Meanwhile we had not neglected to make signals. On every clear night we had kept
a sharp look-out for passing whale-catchers, and whenever a light was seen a large
petrol fire was lighted on a prominent bluff. We sighted a catcher one night and four of
them two nights later. We were 10 miles from the entrance and no one saw us, but by
good chance one of our beacon poles on Skua Island, near the entrance, fell half-way,
and the flapping of the flag in this unnatural position attracted the attention of Gunner
Antonsen of the‘ Southern Shore’. He reported the matter, saying he had seen us waving
a flag from one of the islands. He did not come himself, as the spare whale-catcher from
Prince Olaf Harbour could make the passage in an hour, and he had whales in tow.
This news was doubted in Prince Olaf Harbour, as they did not think we were on an
island ; but finally it was decided that as we had been away fourteen days there would be
no harm in sending us our mail and looking us up, and a whale-catcher was sent in
search of us. It was naturally thought that we were probably marooned on the island
from which the signal came, and this occasioned some delay in finding us, but ultimately
we were discovered.
We attracted her attention by burning large fires, but being daylight they were not
readily seen. On reaching us she informed us that she could not wait, and since the tide
would not be up for three or four hours she promised to return next morning, if the
weather permitted our being moved.
Unfortunately, during the night it began to blow again from the east and it became
necessary to do something lest all our work should be undone. We were forced, there-
fore, after having waited until 1 a.m. in the hopes that the weather would not become
very bad, to load her with large stones to the limit of her capacity and safety to prevent
BAY OF ISLES 325
her bumping; but even so, such was the violence of the surf which was breaking right
over her, that she did bump somewhat. Apart, however, from shifting her back a little,
and tearing off some of the patches, this appears to have done no harm. As usual it
snowed heavily all the time. The whale-catcher did not arrive that day, for apart from
its being thick, and therefore dangerous for her to attempt to come near us in this
unknown bay, it would have been useless to try to tow us round in existing weather
conditions. The weather did not moderate for two more days, but then, much to my
relief, and doubtless that of the remainder of the party, we saw the whale-catcher heave
in sight. ‘This was on December 12.
The tide again was not high enough and also was now past springs. We employed
ourselves in getting the tow rope round the ‘ Alert’ and removing the stones, and with
four stout planks, borrowed from the whale-catcher and secured under the bilge, it was
thought she could be safely towed off at high water, even if not quite afloat. Eight empty
drums also were lashed inside to the engine to help keep her afloat. It was not con-
sidered necessary to take all hands in the ‘ Alert’, but three of us, O’Connor, Alsford and
myself, went in her to bail and pump. We towed the pram astern.
At about 2 p.m. I gave the signal, and with only a moderate amount of scraping noise
she slid into the water and was hauled alongside the whale-catcher. We waited some
time, and found that we could easily keep the water under with the pump. We then
proceeded at reduced speed. We had no rudder, but she kept dead straight.
After a few minutes the pump got choked and we had to bail with buckets and tins;
we were glad to find that by this means we could just manage to cope with the influx.
Meanwhile the whale-catcher, seeing that everything was going well, increased speed,
until by the time we reached Cape Wilson she was going full speed: we were still doing
well. There was a fairly heavy swell but little wind, and the ‘Alert’ began to tug and
pluck at the towrope. I was glad, therefore, that we had placed the rope right round
everything. After an uneventful journey of about two hours we arrived in Prince Olaf,
and since the ‘Alert’ would not float without pumping, she was hauled up on the slip
at once.
Repairs to the ‘ Alert’ were put in hand with the staff at the whaling station, and on
December 19 we took the opportunity to return to Grytviken in a whale-catcher to
spend Christmas and attend to our correspondence.
After a pleasant five days, we returned to Prince Olaf Harbour. Not being certain
how long it would be before we could proceed with our work, I provided myself with
drawing material and finding that time would suffice, drew the fair chart of Prince Olaf
Harbour. Shortly afterwards this chart was sent home in care of the Captain of the
‘Southern King’.
On January 11 hull repairs were completed, and the ‘Alert’, having previously had
some coats of paint, was launched. The remainder of the work, lockers and adjustments
of the engines, was then proceeded with, and with exhaustive trials and re-adjustments,
occupied us until January 21.
On January 23 we returned to the Bay of Isles, but decided to camp in a cove in
326 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Rosita Bay, which although exposed to wind was sheltered from heavy swell. There
was not much choice. During the repairs I had had the fuel tanks re-arranged and the
lockers widened; this enabled at least four of us to sleep on board, and this was now
always done, the only person to sleep ashore being the cook of the day. It was not the
height of luxury, but safer for the ‘ Alert’.
The work was resumed. A number of the beacons had blown down, and progress
was extremely slow. The weather was bad on the whole, and several days and nights
were spent standing by with the engine running, for fear the anchors should drag.
The depth of water over the whole bay, with the exception of some patches, is so great
that a great deal of time was occupied in sounding. This was reduced to a minimum
by spacing the soundings, and this could be done quite safely, as the kelp was always
a dependable guide to shoals. On rough days, when a big swell would come rolling in,
breakers were easy to detect and were always looked for from some high point on
shore.
At last, on February 9, the work was completed and we returned to Prince Olaf
Harbour, where as usual we were most kindly received by the Manager.
After our return to Prince Olaf Station, opportunity was taken for O’Connor to ascend
the Snow Pap of 2100 ft., situated behind Prince Olaf Harbour, from which all the main
stations, both at the Bay of Isles and Prince Olaf Harbour, could be seen on a clear
day. This was done with a view to connecting the Bay of Isles with Prince Olaf Harbour,
angles to the peak having already been taken in both. The climb, although not very
difficult, was arduous when carrying the theodolite, and the wind at the top was fresh.
A round of angles was successfully taken and a cairn was built to mark the spot. In
addition the gap in the soundings alongside the hulk, now vacant, was filled in, as well
as one or two lacunae in the soundings of Cook Bay and some details previously left
over.
It was decided to remain near Prince Olaf Harbour until a decision had been reached as
to the hire of a whale-catcher for certain purposes beyond the capacity of the ‘ Alert’.
During this time some details in the Bay of Isles were completed, and two additional
pairs of beacons were finished and fixed, to facilitate anchorage in South Bay, Prince
Olaf Harbour.
On February 19, the day after our return from a short cruise in the whale-catcher
‘Southern Pride’ (see p. 332), the Sports Meeting for the Governor’s Cup and other
prizes took place at Stromness, and all the party proceeded there excepting myself.
The sports went on until the following Sunday, January 21, but were spoilt by the terrible
weather, notwithstanding the keenness displayed by the rival stations. I proceeded there
on Sunday, saw the finals and returned the same evening in a south-west gale.
We had been unable to fix adequately a breaking rock off the Bay of Isles, and I
decided to do so on the next opportunity, besides taking a few more soundings in the
south-eastern part of the bay. The rock was fixed after some search and only 23 fathoms
found on it. It was called Rescue Rock, since had it not been there the ‘Southern Shore’
would probably have passed farther out and not seen our supposed signal.
POSSESSION BAY
Ww
N
~I
Blue Whale Harbour (Chart 3)
This was now the only useful harbour unsurveyed in the neighbourhood, and we
proceeded to it on February 26. It has not hitherto even been indicated on the charts;
in fact I had not heard about it except quite casually until we arrived at Prince Olaf
Station, from which, being across Possession Bay, it is not at a great distance.
In general appearance, size and shape Blue Whale Harbour much resembles
Maiviken and a harbour called Elsehul, afterwards surveyed. It is quite a good little
harbour, but the entrance and centre are much fouled by kelp. There is little wind or
swell.
Nothing of an unusual nature happened here, but owing to lack of sights, for the usual
reason—weather, we were compelled to erect a beacon in sight of Prince Olaf Harbour
Observation Spot. This part of the survey was completed on March 2.
It had been decided that any further open-sea survey work undertaken should be
carried out in the ‘ William Scoresby’. We proceeded accordingly to Grytviken, taking
advantage of the docking there of the whale-catcher ‘Southern Flower’, which was
expected to take about four days, thus giving plenty of margin for possible delay in the
‘William Scoresby’s’ arrival. She arrived in Grytviken, in fact, a few hours after us, on
March 3.
The details of our work in the ‘William Scoresby’ were soon satisfactorily settled
and approved by the Committee and Dr Kemp. The ‘Southern Flower’ did not leave
until March 8, but our time was fully occupied in clearing up our stores and charts.
On our return to Prince Olaf we completed the orientation of Blue Whale Harbour.
This necessitated the re-erection of a beacon there, and making the station, as no sights
had been, or could be, obtained. ‘The true meridian was calculated by means of reciprocal
theodolite angles from the above main station and the station at the Observation Spot at
Prince Olaf, which had, of course, to be visible from each other. ‘This appears to be a
very satisfactory method if care is exercised.
It was found that the engine in the ‘Alert’ did not develop full power during this
trip without knocking badly, and nearly two days were spent trying to find the cause
of the trouble. This was never quite decided, but probably the main reasons were an
overload through slight overtightening and the actual weight we were compelled to
carry. The knocking was never quite eliminated, but it was so much reduced that it was
not considered sufficient to warrant further delay.
Here it may be remarked that although the ‘Alert’ averaged a speed of nearly 7}
knots during full-speed trials, she could only make about 6 when fully loaded with fuel,
provisions, instruments and camp equipment, as well as towing the pram with extra
drums of fuel. Any reduction of speed was therefore rather serious in a long passage
such as the next one to Elsehul.
Elsehul (Chart 2)
The distance from Prince Olaf to Elsehul is a little under 35 nautical miles, and for
the greater part of the distance there is no refuge in the event of unfavourable weather
328 DISCOVERY REPORTS
during the passage, Right Whale Bay not being suitable. The Manager of Prince Olaf
Station very kindly offered to put the ‘Southern Pride’ at our disposal to tow or escort
us, and in preference to wasting time I accepted, although I was disappointed at being
compelled to accept assistance at the last stage of our work; it was the only assistance
we should have needed throughout. This help, however, was found to be unnecessary.
On March 12, just after the engine had been re-assembled and tested successfully, the
day broke calm, though dull and with a steady and low barometer. The prospect was
thus fair, as the dangerous winds are northerly and are accompanied by a falling
barometer, while a rising glass means a southerly, and therefore off-shore wind. We
made all speed to leave, and getting under weigh proceeded, watching the barometer
carefully. At Cape Buller, our last chance of sheltering, after two hours’ run, it was
decided to proceed, although the glass showed a tendency to fall and the sky to the north-
west was darkening. ‘The breeze began to freshen from the north-west, and sail was set.
This, as it turned out, made a considerable difference to our eventual success. The wind
was fortunately backing slightly, and remained fair. The going was excellent until The
Brothers, north of Elsehul, were reached, when, course having to be altered to the
southward, the following seas threatened to come over the stern; the wooden canopy,
however, which had been built over the cockpit and for 3 ft. forward saved nearly all of
it. ‘The pram also made many attempts to climb on board—as usual in a following
sea—and had to be kept off with a boathook. The wind by now was rather too fresh to
reduce sail. Nothing of any moment happened and we made the shelter of Elsehul
after almost exactly five hours’ passage, helped greatly, of course, on the last 20 miles
by the sail. ‘The petrol consumption was 15 gallons.
Elsehul, a charming little harbour (Plate XLII, fig. 2), is spoilt by the swell, which
almost continuously prevails except on the western beach (where landing is always
possible), and by the excessive precipitation. ‘This was my third visit to the neighbour-
hood, as I had spent two periods at Undine a few hundred yards away across Survey
Isthmus; and during twenty-six days altogether spent here there were only three really
fine days. ‘The harbour is much used by whale-catchers, both for shelter and for mooring
whales; it is, moreover, far less exposed to wind than Undine. Once during our present
stay no less than seven catchers were anchored in the inner and outer harbours quite
comfortably.
During the day of our arrival the wind rose to gale force, with heavy gusts, and no
work was possible. ‘The camping ground on the western shore was found to be quite
excellent, and the landing good on a sandy beach. These harbours, however, can often
spring unpleasant surprises when everything appears safe, as we know to our cost.
Behind the camp we subsequently found in a large brick oven, covered with tussac,
three large trying-out pots, similar to those found at other places in the island. ‘These
pots were brought by early sealers and had been undisturbed for probably almost a
century.
The base, a short one, was measured on this western beach. The survey here pre-
sented no special features, except that it was proposed to connect it with Undine. It
ELSEHUL: RIGHT WHALE BAY 329
was fortunate that this could be done; no opportunity offered of obtaining any sights
whatever for position or bearing during our stay, and these were therefore: taken
(calculated) from Undine. The outer harbour and approaches were difficult to deal with,
and although my assistant landed on Pillar Rock he could not take a theodolite and had
to use a sextant. It had been intended to make some sort of survey of Bird Sound
(Strait of Laroche) and the approaches, but the weather was so persistently unfavourable
that all these projects had to be abandoned in view of the lateness of the season and the
delays which were sure to occur on our return journey to Grytviken, observing that we
had to finish the work in the ‘ William Scoresby’ before we could complete our packing.
The eastern point of Bird Island and also Cape Alexandra were fixed, although not
rigorously. ‘The inner and outer harbours were sounded out, showing that the anchorage
is made up of two basins with sandy and muddy bottom and 4-6 and g-r1 fathoms
depth respectively. In the outer harbour there are some foul patches guarded by kelp,
but the approaches to Elsehul on a middle course are quite clean. The Observation
Spot in Undine Harbour and the original triangle were found again, and the former,
marked by a large rock with a cross cut in the top, can be regarded as permanent.
It had been decided that we should leave as soon after the 2oth as possible, in order
to allow sufficient time for probable delays on our way, and for completing several
pieces of work. The first opportunity occurred on March 24, on the heels of a wes-
terly gale which had begun to blow itself out. The coast from Elsehul to Right Whale
Bay, where it was proposed to attempt a short survey, contains no glaciers and is very
high: no heavy wind was therefore to be expected from the south-west, that is, off
shore. On leaving, although the swell was very heavy, other conditions were perfect
and Right Whale Bay was reached after a very good passage. Some of the fuel taken
there earlier in the season had to be left in a cleft at Elsehul, owing to lack of storage
space on board.
Right Whale Bay (Chart 2)
Owing to the entire lack of adequate shelter, it was imperative that the time spent in
Right Whale Bay should be as short as possible. It was accordingly intended to conduct
a running survey only; and the procedure followed, which is somewhat different in
detail from the usual method, may be of interest. It was as follows:
From the middle of the entrance a conspicuous object near the middle of the beach
at the head of the bay was brought in line with the edge of the glacier behind it; then
a previously prepared wooden mark was dropped and angles were taken all round to all
conspicuous objects; after steaming out a little to gather way, we proceeded at full speed
past the mark, carefully taking the time by stopwatch when abeam. After running a
certain time, corresponding to approximately 3000 ft., another mark was dropped, the
course being carefully kept in transit with the previously mentioned shore marks and
noted: here the engines were stopped. A return to the second mark was then made,
when another round of angles was taken to the same points as at the first mark. A third
mark on the line of course was now dropped, distances between succeeding marks being
made approximately the same, and angles taken from the third mark to the chosen
DIII 3
330 DISCOVERY REPORTS
objects. On this occasion it was found that there was insufficient room to run farther
than the second, so the third set was taken outside the first, still of course on the
transit, checking the first run on the way. The zero line in determining angles for the
outer and middle marks was that through beach mark and edge of glacier, and this line
being unsuitable for use at the inner mark, which was too close to the beach for the
purpose, the zero line was there taken as the line through the two outer points. On
plotting, the lines drawn to the objects chosen for observation were found to converge
satisfactorily.
The sounding then proceeded on the usual lines, the coast-line being sketched in
from the end of each line of soundings. As the bottom was found to be even at the
inner end (the anchorage), many soundings were not necessary; but the limits of the
various kelp patches at the entrace were roughly fixed. The error of the compass was
checked later, and the distance was checked by some runs on the measured mile at
Stromness. This is a sufficiently accurate survey for a little used harbour, although a
greater degree of precision could be attained by the careful use of a rangefinder.
On leaving Right Whale Bay, the swell being still very heavy, a good look out was
kept for breakers or other indication of shoal water which had been reported in this
region. None was seen, although anything with less than about 6 fathoms over it would,
I think, have certainly been detected. Differences in the steepness of the swell indicated,
however, that the bottom was very uneven. ‘The weather remained fine until near Cape
Crewe and we arrived in Prince Olaf Harbour soon after dark without further incident,
except to observe the antics of a 30 ft. Sei whale, which played round us when near the
Barlas Bank, Bay of Isles.
It was now desirable to proceed with all despatch on our way to Grytviken, as it was
intended to do a quick survey of Possession Bay and Antarctic Bay, if at all possible.
We had Blue Whale Bay to visit also, and the survey of Fortuna Bay to complete. As
delays were to be expected, an early start was indicated ; but before beginning this work
it was necessary to return our accumulated stores to Grytviken. This was commenced
next day, which incidentally turned out bad enough to compel the whale-catchers to
return to harbour. ‘The stores were placed on a whale-catcher going to Grytviken on -
March 27, the weather being still very bad. On the return of my assistant and his men
on the same day, we were all ready to proceed. O’Connor said that this was the worst
trip he had ever made in a whale-catcher.
Possession Bay (Chart 3)
On the afternoon of March 29 the weather improved, and we proceeded to the survey
of Possession Bay. ‘The method was the same as that used at Right Whale Bay; here,
however, the scale was provided by the triangulation of Prince Olaf Harbour, as was
also the true bearing through the main station at Black Head. The final result was in
consequence considerably improved. Not many soundings were taken, as the depths
were found to be great, and the bay clear of dangers except at the inner end. The bay,
moreover, is not important as a harbour; it is very windy and contains only one
FORTUNA BAY: STROMNESS BAY 331
possible but doubtful anchorage. Captain Cook’s landing is in this bay, but is not, I
believe, known. Here again the result of the survey was satisfactory. The scale by the
run was compared with the scale by the triangulation and the difference turned out to
be about 5 per cent.
The next day, March 30, we proceeded on the next stage of the voyage to Fortuna Bay.
Antarctic Bay is of little use for navigation. It had been intended to complete a running
survey of the bay on the way, but as the weather showed signs of becoming worse, it was
deemed inadvisable to risk being detained there. This would have been particularly
undesirable, as the bay was entirely unknown to me. It was on leaving Prince Olaf
Harbour that we, for the first time, hoisted our colours and paying-off pennant, these
and the ensign staff having been manufactured by the men. We called in at Blue Whale
Bay to fill in a small lacuna in our soundings and then proceeded to Fortuna Bay, arriving
there in time to avoid the weather, which was blowing up from the north-west.
Fortuna Bay (Chart 3)
The sounding of Fortuna Bay was immediately proceeded with and a good deal of it
finished before nightfall, notwithstanding the strong wind which had by now risen on
the east side of the bay. Next day the work was resumed, in the hope of being able to leave
for Stromness Bay on the following day. The sounding was completed; but departure
was delayed, as we could see without going out that there was a big sea running, with a
strong wind.
By the evening of April 1, however, the wind had veered sufficiently to give us a lee
down to Cape Saunders, and we proceeded with a heavy swell, in which we were
mistaken for a small growler by a whale-catcher which passed us on her way to Leith.
Although the wind was blowing with considerable strength out of Stromness Bay, we
were able to reach Leith Harbour at the cost of a good soaking; but this, as we were
not going to camp, did not worry us.
Stromness Bay (Chart 2)
Having now completed the major portion of our passage, it was decided to spend a
few days in Stromness Bay, running the measured mile, fixing a few further details (such
as a new light at Leith), and finally visiting the Managers of the whaling stations, who
had helped so much to make the commission successful. The decision to stay would have
been forced on us in any case, as from the next day a spell of foul weather set in, culmi-
nating on April 6, 7 and 8 in a terrific gale, commencing as usual in the north-west. In
this gale the stout moorings of the S.S. ‘Coronda’ were carried away, forcing her to
fill her ballast tanks and rest on the bottom. The wind also bent a chimney ashore.
Next day the gale, having veered to the west, blew down a hut and wireless telegraphy
mast, and blew off a roof at Stromness. Still veering, it blew with great violence at
Husvik, and prevented the factory ship entering or having any communication with
the shore. This was believed to have been the strongest gale of the season: certainly it
seemed to last longer than usual. As was usually the case, the gale was hardly felt at the
Meteorological Station at Grytviken.
ERY DISCOVERY REPORTS
During this time we took occasion to revisit all three harbours and our friends at
each, according as the wind permitted. Finally, on April 9, in beautiful weather, we
rehoisted our colours and pennant and left Stromness Bay for good.
The final stage of our voyage was uneventful, with little wind but colossal following
swell. We arrived at Grytviken about lunch time, having stopped outside for awhile to
clean ship. At my request, a photograph of the ‘Alert’ was taken by Mr Saunders of
the staff of the Marine Biological Station (Plate XL, fig. 1).
During every passage from harbour to harbour, whenever it was humanly possible,
a rough sketch survey of the coast-line was always made. Of almost all the coast from
Larsen Point to Farewell Point (Bird Island) two such sketches at least were made, one
while travelling in one direction, and one on the return passage. The terminal points
we connected in each case with the harbours between which they are situated. These
connecting pieces of coast seem to contain nothing of any navigational value which
cannot be shown in the sketches. The latter are considered sufficient for practical pur-
poses, especially as they were done in the ‘Alert’ at a very short distance off shore—
very much nearer, in fact, than any larger craft could approach with safety. In the
passage up the south-west coast in the ‘ William Scoresby’ (which was made later) the
coast as charted from Undine South Harbour to Cape Demidov was found to be grossly
in error, and an adjustment was attempted. This, although at best only a very rough
approximation, is considered to be much better than the existing charts. As this coast
is practically unvisited, however, this is of the less consequence.
As arranged I went out in the ‘ William Scoresby’, although only for a week, starting
on Monday morning, April 14,and leaving my assistant behind to superintend slipping the
boats, and listing and packing the gear. The slipping of the ‘ Alert’ was a delicate piece of
work; it entailed hauling her up on the Marine Biological Station slip, moving her to ft.
to one side, and finally hauling her up on a bed between two boatsheds. All this was
accomplished by O’Connor with no outside assistance, and with no power of any sort
except a small hand winch. The boat weighs 2} tons or more. Not a yarn was broken.
This piece of work reflects great credit on him and his three men Alsford, Briggs and
Purvis. The engine also had to be greased and everything made snug for the winter,
and this also was excellently carried out by the same hands.
SURVEY WORK IN WHALE-CATCHER ‘SOUTHERN PRIDE’, FEBRUARY 17-19, 1936
This work in the ‘Southern Pride’ occupied two days.
On Monday, February 17, the weather looked promising, and having put all necessary
instruments and the sounding machine on board the whale-catcher on the previous day,
we made a start from Prince Olaf Harbour at 6 a.m. In conversation with the gunners
of some of the whale-catchers who had been coming here for many years, information
had been obtained as to several rocks and shoals, of which previously we had not even
heard. These, with their approximate positions, had been transmitted to the Committee
for the information of the Hydrographic Office, but they had not hitherto been properly
fixed. It was our intention, therefore, to commence by fixing as many of them as possible.
RUNNING SURVEYS IN ‘SOUTHERN PRIDE’ 333
North and West Coast (Chart 1)
This day, although we reached Elsehul, we had thick fog and could do nothing: but
we prepared to leave whenever it should clear. Next morning, although wet at an
early hour, cleared up by 7 a.m. and we proceeded. First a line of soundings was run
through Bird Sound (Strait of Laroche), then, taking a departure from Pearson Point,
the west end of Bird Island, we completed a running sketch survey of the Willis Islands
and the rocks to the westward of them. These were found to be 3 miles east of their
charted position, as we had reported in 1929. A course was then shaped to pass over the
positions of two breakers reported north of Willis Islands, but although a sharp look out
was kept from the mast-head and there was sufficient swell to break in at least 3 or 4
fathoms, nothing was seen of either. A sounding was taken at each position, yielding in
each case about 50 fathoms.
Thence, running south through Stewart Strait, we fixed the position of a breaker west
of Bird Island. Here also some soundings were taken and solar observations were
obtained two or three times.
‘Our next work was fixing and sketching Annenkoy Island and a rock reported to the
southward. A departure from Cape Paryadin was taken and a distance run which
tallied with the charted position of Annenkov. Unfortunately, as was to be expected,
clouds, mist, occasional rain and a freshening westerly wind now commenced to hamper
us, So that we could not see any of the mainland, which would have helped us to fix the
island firmly. It is considered, however, that the approximation is fairly close.
The accuracy of position assigned to the rock to the southward, which we called
Theodor Rock, after the gunner, ‘Theodor Hansen, who told me of it, depends upon the
position of Annenkov.
Returning northward after our visit to Theodor Rock, I wished if possible to pass
east of Annenkov, and accordingly we steered for its south-east point. On getting fairly
close we found that there appeared to be an uninterrupted reef with some larger rocks
and islets extending nearly as far as Cape Darnley, and we were compelled reluctantly
to abandon the idea. A passage is reported between Cape Darnley and the easternmost
rocks.
Pickersgill Island was considered too far for examination, as the weather was becoming
rapidly worse, and it was now about 5 p.m. Course was shaped, therefore, for Holme-
strand, which I wished to inspect. Neither I nor the crew of the whale-catcher had ever
been there and its charting is, to say the least, imaginative. We spent some time in the
falling dusk looking for it. Having passed a particular spot, I happened to glance round
and saw a large roller break not 150 yards astern. We decided to return to Prince Olaf
Harbour and were obliged to heave to during the middle of the night when the squalls
were specially thick. We arrived in Prince Olaf Harbour at about 6 a.m. It was, I think,
a most successful trip, helped largely by the ready co-operation of the Master of the
whale-catcher, Captain Mathisen.
It had been noticed everywhere about South Georgia that most points, headlands, etc.,
presented a similar appearance, that is, an almost flat-topped rocky ledge at nearly water-
334 DISCOVERY REPORTS
level, and at the landward side of this a rocky somewhat flat-topped hummock or hum-
mocks, with vertical sides and covered by tussac. It occurred to me that all these
hummocks were almost the same height, that is, 80 or go ft. The weathering of the
stones is of course caused by the action of sea water and assisted by freezing and
thawing. The height of the hummocks is affected by the amount of tussac, and this
might account for the difference of 10 ft. or so that was observed. It is suggested that
these hummocks were at some period at water-level and were raised fairly suddenly,
thus accounting for the steep sides and nearly equal heights. I regret to say that I know
nothing of geology, so make this suggestion with great diffidence. ‘The photogtapy of
Cape George (Plate XLIII, fig. 3) illustrates the feature to which I refer.
SURVEY WORK IN RRS. ‘WILLIAM SCORESBY’, APRIL 14-19, 1930
We proceeded south from King Edward Cove on ‘Tuesday morning, April 15, going
inside all the rocks, through the channel we had surveyed the year before, and so testing
practically the work already carried out. We then entered Godthul and thereafter tried
to find the Nansen Bank. Owing to the serious inaccuracy of the chart, and the fact that
the sea was comparatively calm and thus did not break on the bank, we did not succeed.
We abandoned the attempt for the time being, as the conditions were so unfavourable,
and went on to the Clerke Rocks instead. There we were favoured by luck, for just as
we came near enough to see them at dusk that evening, the sky cleared and enabled me
to observe several stars. At the same time some bearings of the main rock with run
between were taken: this enabled us to fix the rocks effectively. We lay off for the night
and carried out a running survey next morning. This turned out satisfactorily. The
charted position of the rocks was appreciably incorrect, and their coast-line entirely
different.
On completion, we shaped course for Larsen Harbour (Plate XLIV, fig. 1), where the
night was spent. Next morning a sketch of the coast was made from Larsen Harbour to
Green Islands, and a run up the coast was carried out for the proposed checking of the
positions of Pickersgill and Annenkoy Islands. This was done by log distance from
Green Islands to Wilson Harbour and compass course and bearing, and showed them
to be charted very nearly correctly.
Wilson Harbour was reached after dark, and the night was spent there. Next day,
after a quick sketch to verify the previously made sketch survey, course was shaped to
pass through Stewart Strait, between Willis and Bird Islands. 'Two new patches of kelp
were fixed to the north of Bird Island (Milward Patches), and Elsehul was entered.
Course was then shaped to examine the area west of Welcome Rocks, but nothing was
observed, possibly owing to the small swell.
After one or two soundings and a tour round the Bay of Isles, it was decided that no
useful purpose would be served by staying out the night, and we therefore returned to
Grytviken.
Next day we resumed the search for the Nansen Bank. In this attempt we had the
kind assistance of Captain Esbensen, Manager of the Cia. Argentina de Pesca’s Station
CONCLUSION 335
at Grytviken. The bank was found and fixed, including the 18-ft. head, which was now
breaking. As already mentioned a theodolite angle from an Observation Station near
Godthul had been obtained during the previous survey, and this assisted in fixing the
bank.
A sketch survey of New Fortuna Bay (a good, though windy harbour) was made, and
many soundings taken, and the existence of Penguin Bank, except as a small fringe to
the coast, was disproved. We then returned to Grytviken.
CONCLUSION
At Grytviken we met for the first time the R.R.S. ‘Discovery II’ and made the
acquaintance of her officers, who received us with great hospitality; and we met again
with pleasure old friends of the R.R.S. ‘ Discovery’.
Homeward passages were kindly offered us in S.S.‘ Harpon’ of the Cia. Argentina de
Pesca and on May 10 we left Grytviken. We had a good passage to Norway, via Monte
Video, and thence home. On the way we managed to obtain a great deal of information
from Captain Johannessen, of the sealing vessel ‘ Diaz’, concerning the south-west coast
and two new harbours, Diaz or Sealer Cove, and Rocky Bay, which he had rediscovered
lately. A small very rough sketch of each and some other details were made with his
assistance. ‘The entrance to Diaz Cove had been fixed during the voyage in the
‘William Scoresby’. A great deal of information, some of which was afterwards verified,
was obtainable at all times from Managers, Captains and Gunners of whale-catchers,
to whom we are very deeply indebted for their very cordial co-operation. In some cases
it proved possible to pay a lasting tribute to our informants by naming coastal features
after them: and, when it occurred, this opportunity was gladly taken.
On arrival in London, the drawing of the fair sheets was at once proceeded with,
together with sailing directions and triangulation schemes for all the work. These
were completed on October 17, 1930.
The charts comprised the following surveys for the season:
Plans: Prince Olaf Harbour (drawn before).
Blue Whale Bay.
Elsehul.
Charts: Fortuna Bay, including Anchorage Bay.
Bay of Isles, including Rosita Bay.
Cook Bay, and approaches to Prince Olaf Harbour.
Right Whale Bay.
Possession Bay.
Sheets: One, containing sketches of eight stretches of coast line.
Two running surveys of various groups of islands and sketches of harbours.
Tracing of Cape Buller to Cape Constance.
Thirteen triangulation sheets.
336 DISCOVERY REPORTS
Figures of mileage and of time taken during survey operations are approximately as
follows:
Number of miles steamed in M.V. ‘Alert’ ... Bae a 3000 miles
Number of miles of coastline charted sist ats ae 357 miles
Number of square miles covered by survey ... oe See 101 square miles
Number of main stations made Bite ah ste : 112
Number of soundings (hand machine and hand lines) aa 13600
Total time on survey in all vessels”... ae es ee 370 days
Time lost through unsuitable weather ie si ten 100 days
APPENDIX -1I
PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
PERSONNEL. ‘The personnel was restricted by the size of the boat to six persons, that
is, the Officer in Charge of Survey, an assistant, three able seamen, and one motorman.
During nearly the whole of the second season we did not have a motorman, one of the
seamen acting in that capacity. This number was rather too small and we were often
obliged to impress the cook of the day. In every respect the personnel came up to my
highest expectations.
EQuipMENT. ‘The main item of equipment consisted of a motor boat 25 ft. in length
with 7 ft. 6 in. beam, decked, with open cockpit, a 3-cylinder petrol engine of 21 H.P.
giving about 6 knots speed when fully loaded. There was a fair amount of locker
accommodation, and extra fuel space enabling us to carry 65 gallons all told.
She was, within the limits of her size, a good sea-boat and remained thoroughly
tight, although the deck had to be recaulked occasionally. The engine gave little trouble,
but was inclined to soot up at very low speeds. When sounding, owing to cold, she gave a
little trouble in starting during the first season, but, later on using aviation petrol of
low flash point, she always started well. We carried the sail for emergency, and could
make good speed with a strong fair wind ; the sail was always used with the engine when
possible.
A bigger boat, if possible with twin screws, would have been an advantage for
passages: on the other hand for harbour work, sounding, and so on, she was an ideal
size, although owing to her high side rather unhandy in a strong wind. Some small
alterations were, however, found to be necessary, apart from fittings such as brackets
for the wireless telegraphy receiver. The principal change made was the addition of a
canvas dodger or screen supported by small brass stanchions (see Plate XL, fig. 1),
extending across the break of the deck and to the after-end of the cockpit on either side.
This was essential; for without it the cockpit became very wet in anything but a calm.
Later, a sloping wooden cover or canopy was built over the after-end of the cockpit to
prevent her being pooped.
The mast was originally made to ship in a hole through the deck and step in the fore-
cabin. It was found impossible to handle it in any sea—the very time when it was most
likely to be required. Accordingly it was cut down and made a fixture, but swivelled to
fold down towards the stern. It could then be rigged exceedingly quickly, especially as
we kept the backstays permanently set up and the sail secured with a slip knot: the time
taken to up mast and set sail was a few seconds, even in a rough sea. To counteract the
extra strain on the deck at the mast step, the step was placed farther forward and the
mast given a heavy rake aft: this gave it more lift and no undue strain was noticed on the
deck beams.
DIII 6
338 DISCOVERY REPORTS
The Lucas sounding machine was fitted aft on the starboard side (for the officer to
read the dial easily), and the starboard towing bollard was fitted with a flat padded top
for the leadsman to sit on. A light pedestal, about 2 ft. high, was made for the machine,
and the leadsman was thus not compelled to bend so much and could do spells of half an
hour or more of deep sounding without undue fatigue. Two machines, each of the
400 fathom size, were carried, and when fitted as described above, were found to work
perfectly, unless very carelessly handled. The best weight of lead was found to be about
10 lb., but varied somewhat with the depth, owing to the decreasing leverage as the wire
unwound from the drum. This was difficult to overcome, but if necessary a light touch
had to be kept on the jib head to help ease the hand brake. Care of course was necessary
when doing this, as, if the wire is allowed to overrun, a great deal of time is wasted in
clearing it, and some wire is almost certain to be sacrificed. Various schemes were thought
of to pick up bottom samples, but none were found to improve on the old-fashioned
tallow arming, either in time saving (which is important when the soundings have to be
kept equidistant) or in efficiency. The worst drawback was that the tallow froze iron
hard; but a spare tin of it was kept on the engine exhaust pipe and changed every now
and again. The tallow never failed to pick up bottom samples.
The pram, a 14 ft. boat, was always towed and was of course used for getting ashore.
It was useful also during passage to carry an extra supply of petrol in drums. She was
an excellent little boat, but floated like a saucer and was quite unmanageable in a
breeze, having no keel; otherwise she was a very handy type, easily handled by one man,
and light for hauling up on a beach. She was also used for shallow in-shore sounding,
but was naturally both uncomfortable and difficult to keep on the line.
Four fire extinguishers were fitted: one in the cockpit at the helmsman’s hand, one
at each end of the engine room, easily accessible to the motorman, and one in the fore-
cabin just by the engine room door. These precautions were fully justified, as during
the first season, owing it is supposed to backfires, the petrol in the save-all under the
carburettor caught fire on many occasions when starting, but was extinguished without
difficulty.
A sea anchor was made and rigged, although it was never used in emergency.
The scope of chain cable supplied with the boat (10 fathoms { in.) and a 30 Ib. anchor
were entirely inadequate, and would, in fact, be inadequate anywhere. Here 20 fathoms
of 2 in. is the least that should be used, and even that, I am inclined to believe, would
not suffice always. We invariably moored, except when the stop was temporary, with
two 60 lb. anchors and 20 fathoms each of 3 1in. cable to the most exposed quarter, and at
least one other anchor in the opposite direction. During the first season we carried five
30 lb. anchors weighted with about 30 lb. of lead near the crown, 2 lengths of 20
fathoms 2 in. galvanized iron cable, 2 lengths of 20 fathoms { in. cable, together with the
original 10 fathoms } in. cable. During the next season we had in addition one length
of 40 fathoms + in. cable, which was kept bent to the bower anchor. In the event of a
breakdown nothing less would have been of much value, owing to the depth of water
being often so great, quite close to the shore. Fortunately, we never had to use the
EQUIPMENT 339
40-fathom length in the open, although we were several times compelled to anchor with
it in sheltered water through some temporary breakdown.
The Marconi 4-valve R.P. 11 long-wave wireless telegraphy receiving set worked very
well and enabled us to receive time signals from Nauen or Rugby practically when
required. This set should be replaced nowadays by a short-wave set, because the
receiver with its low and high-tension batteries took up a lot of space and was also very
heavy for a small boat. The frame aerial also was rather too large for easy handling.
With the instruments numerous spares had to be taken, for we had no means of doing
any but the simplest repairs. Duplicate theodolites and other delicate instruments had
to be carried and kept in a safe place. Of the theodolites the most useful was one with
a 33 In. glass circle of the Tavistock type (see p. 306). The Admiralty theodolites were
found rather cumbrous, as so much climbing had to be done and landings made on
slippery rocks. ‘They stand hard wear very well, however, and one that lay water-logged
for some time and probably had many hard knocks when the ‘ Alert’ went ashore, was
cleaned and dried and found to be entirely undamaged. In these theodolites the leather
covers for protecting the bare skin from the metal screws in cold weather were not found
very useful, and wash-leather gloves are recommended to be worn instead. The leather is
inclined to turn on the screws and thus cause delay when the fingers are already numb:
the gloves both keep the cold off the fingers and protect them from the metal. For
eyepieces wash-leather gummed on will serve, but non-metal eyepieces would be
better.
Drawing boards of single wood were supplied. Although light and handy, they got
very dry and nearly all split.
Beacons. Hop poles about 15 ft. in length are generally quite large enough for beacons,
as they can be readily seen at a great distance if properly sited. Larger poles are heavy
to carry if the ground is at all steep; they are also too large for the boat. Red and white
flags were chiefly used, and of medium size, g ft. by 3 ft. approximately. Owing to the
high winds encountered, larger flags put too much strain on the spun-yarn guys. A small
amount of orange calico, which was taken to South Georgia for experiment, was very
visible and might be used instead of red. When the background is rocky and has snow
patches, white and red may blend with it, and a vivid orange is therefore best. Four-yarn
spun-yarn is necessary for the guys, and of these at least four to each beacon are essential,
with more on the strong wind side than the other. The anchor for the guys has to be
left to circumstances, but a round turn around tussac serves very well, when available,
as tussac is very tough. An iron bar with a point (a short crowbar) was always carried
to make holes for the stakes in the frozen ground or ice; occasionally a point of rock
could be used, but with this the yarn chafed if not protected. If possible, the heel of
the pole should be sunk.
Tents, of which four were taken, comprised two light Antarctic tents, one Willesden
canvas and one duck canvas. The best one for general use turned out to be the green
Willesden, being more watertight than the others. It was, however, very stiff to pack,
especially when wet, and very heavy; but as we packed the tent when wet in the pram,
6-2
340 DISCOVERY REPORTS
this did not so much matter. When snow but not rain was expected, as in the first half of
the season and near the end, the Antarctic tents were best and handiest. These tents are
of light material, silk mixed with cotton, and they are supported by four bamboo poles
connected at the top with raw hide. They have no guys and there is a deep valance on
which snow or shingle is heaped. The canvas duck tent was a very good compromise for
general use (Plate XLI, fig. 2).
The cooking was always done in a separate tent, as the heat raised was negligible and
the steam condensed on the inside of the tent and made it very wet.
Sleeping bags. These were double thickness Jaeger wool, with the usual flaps, and a
detachable waterproof outer cover. They were very comfortable, but hardly warm
enough. The waterproof cover was seldom used, because the condensation caused the
bags to become very wet inside. It is suggested that it would be better to have had it in
two pieces, the bottom and sides in one and an overlapping top secured by toggles like
the head flap.
Clothing. Nothing special need be said, except that coats should be short (pea-jackets),
because of the large amount of waist-high tussac that one almost invariably has to go
through. Even in fine weather the tussac is often wet, and a long coat becomes water-
logged and is a nuisance. It is not easy to dry anything, except on the rare sunny
days. Rubber sea-boots are in my opinion better than leather, though they are colder.
They should have leather soles, as otherwise they wear out quickly on the sharp rocks,
and they should be at least two sizes too large to allow for extra pairs of stockings. The
astrakhan caps supplied answered very well.
Gloves. An inner, fairly loose wash-leather glove, secured at the wrist to prevent it
slipping, should undoubtedly be worn; the touch is almost as good as with bare fingers,
and yet the hand is protected against both wind and metal. Such gloves are useful with
theodolite or level, and especially so with a sextant, when the hands have to be raised.
Gloves are a difficulty in sounding, because even with a Lucas machine the hands are
bound to get wet. An oilskin outer mitten with a leather pad held in the hands was
found fairly good, although arming the lead caused some difficulty.
Primus stoves. 'These had always to be used for cooking, the amount of driftwood to
be found on most beaches being negligible. If looked after and kept clean, they give
excellent service, and as we generally used two, it was possible for the cook to prepare a
meal for the five of us of soup, meat and vegetables, and coffee in not much over half
an hour. Fresh whale meat was greatly appreciated when it could be obtained.
AR PEND LX it
MAGNETIC VARIATION
Whenever an opportunity occurred, as at Stanley, Falkland Islands, the variation was
recalculated, and with some unavoidable exceptions this was also done as a matter of
course at all places where a regular survey was made.
The method was always the same. True bearings of a number of well-defined points
(usually six) at more or less equal distances round the compass were determined
from a solar observation and theodolite angles, or, as at Stanley, from a record of a
previous determination. A round of bearings by compass, in our case a 6 in. Dover
compass, was then taken and repeated left to right and in the opposite sense as often as
considered necessary. The difference between these and the true bearing is of course the
variation, and the mean of the differences tends to eliminate card and observational
errors. By taking the compass bearing both ways, the errors of friction of the pivot and
cap are cancelled. ‘The final result, if carefully taken with a good compass, should be
reliable, although of course the compass is only marked to degrees, and sometimes half
degrees, and the minutes have to be estimated. The vicinity of any iron structure
should, of course, be avoided and iron implements or knives, if carried, laid down at a
distance.
Variations were calculated in the Falkland Islands at Stanley (three times), and in
South Georgia at the following places: Undine, Larsen, Husvik, Leith and Prince Olaf.
No abnormal magnetic variation was detected at any place visited during the time
covered by this narrative.
Table of results
Place Date ETE
variation
Stanley, Falkland Islands May 1926 | g° 24’ E
Stanley, Falkland Islands May 1927 9° 23'E
Stanley, Falkland Islands March 1929 10° 03'E
Undine Harbour, South Georgia December 1926 | 4° 21’ W
Larsen Harbour, South Georgia January 1927 4° 16’ W
Leith Harbour, South Georgia January 1927 4° 15’ W
Husvik, South Georgia November 1928 4° 03’ W
Prince Olaf Harbour, South Georgia November 1929 4° 36’ W
APPENDIX III |
WEATHER AND CLIMATE IN SOUTH GEORGIA
During our commission in the ‘Discovery’ we had opportunities of studying the
meteorological conditions. The experience gained was useful later, when it became a
great deal more important, for in the ‘ Alert’ we were largely dependent upon weather.
The usual meteorological laws hold good, that is, the wind commences with a falling
barometer and blows from the northward (north-west or north-east, but usually north-
west) and increases ; then, when the glass ceases to fall, the wind gradually veers towards
the west or east, depending on whether it commences north-west or north-east, and
reaches its maximum force. Finally, the glass commences to rise and the wind con-
tinues to veer towards the southward, gradually dying down. Northerly winds bring
moisture, rain or snow, and southerly winds dry and fine weather—exactly the reverse to
conditions in the Northern Hemisphere. Following upon the above, the south-east end
of South Georgia is very much drier than the north-west, no doubt because the wet
north-westerly wind is deprived of much of its moisture in traversing the length of South
Georgia, which lies with its long axis west-north-west and east-south-east. A further
peculiarity of winds here is caused by the steep-sided glacier valleys which cut the island
in all directions. The valleys remain in almost complete shelter until the wind has
backed or veered to the direction in which they lie, and when this has occurred the full
force of the gale is suddenly felt without any previous warning. An anchorage at the
bottom of a valley lying north-west will thus feel the maximum effect of wind when the
glass begins to fall and the wind to blow from north-westward, while, owing to the high
mountains which bound the valleys, winds from other directions are kept off. A good
example of this effect is Stromness Bay, with Leith Harbour (lying north-west),
Stromness Harbour (lying west), and Husvik (lying west-south-west).
The temperature of South Georgia never falls very low, the least we experienced being.
just above o° F. On the other hand, it is seldom higher than 60° F., and the average
temperature is not much over freezing-point, summer and winter alike. Precipitation is
fairly heavy in the north-west, decreasing eastward ; the south-east probably has a much
lower rainfall.
Snow continues to fall until midsummer (the end of December) ; but on the other hand
rain has been known in mid-winter.
Gales are almost continuous, particularly in the spring and autumn. They are of
considerable violence, which is increased by the glacier valleys mentioned above. On
one occasion, in the ‘ Discovery’, we were literally blown out of Cumberland Bay by a
wind which reached hurricane violence, and when 10 miles out, the weather fell prac-
tically calm, although we could see the water smoke blowing out of all the fjords, stirred
up by the violence of the wind. The whalers corroborate this: frequently when it is
blowing hard in the whaling stations, the whale-catchers in their routine telephone
conversations report much less wind out at sea.
Fog is exceedingly prevalent when the weather is calm, but perhaps more so during
January than at any other time, and least in July. Frequently it does not penetrate into
the fjords, and very often it does not extend for more than 30 or 40 miles, or even less,
to seaward.
APPENDIX IV
NOTE ON KELP
The variety of kelp (Wacrocystis pyrifera) found upon the coast of South Georgia
seems to have one very marked feature, a feature noticed at Undine in the north-west,
at Larsen in the south-east, and at every intermediate point so far examined both in
sheltered and exposed situations. This is that in no case has it been found rooted at a
greater depth than 14 fathoms low water (chart datum). In this respect it seems to differ
from that found in Patagonia by H.M.S. ‘ Beagle’, of which Darwin writes.
In South Georgia, owing to the steepness of the bottom, it was often found that
although 20 or even 30 fathoms were obtained at the tips of the plant’s fronds, the roots
were invariably in 14 fathom or less. It appears that the kelp grows in as little as
1 fathom or less, but never very close to a shelving beach, owing no doubt to the con-
tinual wash of the surf. For the same reason the tops of breaking rocks have invariably
been found to be quite bare, although often surrounded by kelp in somewhat greater
depths where the water does not break. This is particularly so in more open water, where
' the waves break with greater violence.
The kelp only grows on a rocky or stony bottom and never on sand, mud, or even
shingle, unless the latter is of large stones; this is of course quite understandable since
it requires only a firm anchorage.
In fjords which contain a glacier, kelp is never found within a considerable distance of
the glacier—often a mile or more. This is caused mainly by the ice which is constantly
floating away from the glacier, but may be partly due to the freshness of the water.
It is reported, but not personally verified, that the kelp shows a considerable shrinkage
in some of the harbours of South Georgia and also to some extent along the coasts, and
I have formed the opinion that this is due almost entirely to the movements of vessels.
The rate of growth of kelp during the close season cannot be sufficient to make up for
the destruction caused during the remainder of the year, especially as it is not com-
pletely undisturbed even then. The rate of growth must nevertheless be considerable,
as it was seen that some of the channels, such as those at Husvik and in Merton passage
(Barff Point), had appreciably narrowed between May and September 1929.
King Edward Cove (Chart I), having a maximum depth of 11 fathoms with a gravel
bottom, was apparently completely covered by kelp when first visited, but has now only
a small fringe near the entrance. This disappearance must be due primarily to move-
ments of vessels and has been helped latterly by the fouling of the water and the bottom
by effluents from the whaling station. Although the depth was here not too great, the
gravel bottom in the centre would be unsuitable and the kelp must have grown out from
the sides. At Stromness Harbour kelp is reported to have extended over a considerable
part of the harbour, though only a narrow strip round the shore is shoal enough for it to
grow. We have evidence that the fronds grow to a great length, and though none were
actually measured, some that we saw must have exceeded roo ft. Ice undoubtedly
destroys a great deal of kelp, but this cannot account for the shrinkage which has
occurred during the past twenty-five years.
= Se eee
PLATES XL-XLIV
ee
‘
diyoe svoo't f Wife) dip 1016)
ray i RE RDS Moe ’
BIQMSCE GO G Sate IRIN TONE :
Ne ae h
‘
A 4 J 7 y
f I ) de. *
74), fr (t wy i
3 j
ip
(> , SI ‘
PLATE XL
i: Fig. 1. Motor vessel ‘Alert’ under weigh in King Edward Cove, South
ne? Georgia.
Fig. 2. Motor vessel ‘Alert’ ashore in the Bay of Isles, South Georgia.
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. Ill
MOTOR VESSEL ‘ALERT’
PAVE Xa
ee,
A, Saunders phot.
wh he
i
all
*
wer
PLATE XLI
Fig. 1. Port Lockroy, Wiencke Island, Palmer Archipelago. View
looking north, with Noble Peak in background.
Fig. 2. Survey camp at Pleasant Cove, near Godthul, South Georgia.
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. III
Fig. 2
SURVEY CAMP, BAY OF ISLES,
SOUTH GEORGIA
PLATE XLI
S. Kemp phot.
3. M. Chaplin phot.
*
M2 10 aoisia aniledW .sio7as
bas
PaBOrodosd at sane
ry
ES ar poe
SERRA Loner aur tia
aah ;
SIL 000 toys
towpt
OOMBING 10 GaN eNOS AY
gibsim ai baslel w>wyO foac) Hin? |. re
iin mt basiel tonn0"O osv) iyo ,1u0d 5
Jel co, bauor sd ot wobi :
PLATE XLII
Fig. 1. King Edward Cove, South Georgia. Whaling Station on right,
and King Edward Point with Government quarters and Marine
Biological Station in left foreground. Mountain range in background
with Sugarloaf Peak, 7500 ft., to right of centre, and Mt Paget, 9200 ft.,
to left.
Fig. 2. Elsehul, South Georgia. View of entrance.
Fig. 3. Undine Harbour, South Georgia. O’Connor Island in middle
distance; Cape Demidov in background on left.
PAGE Xi
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. III
“Joy d 42224 “Dh “£
“04 AISDAT *D ‘yf
VIOSYOaD HLAOS
“704d ]DYSAPTAT “HY
~—— = +) ae
—
at
i
5
. is ;
. My
%
fo Ct ae eee GW
As OS Ss Of
' dine wR ateiotiowS bron ep ala
EA nN ; i pe iia he ’
sows eels th)'Gi ul Nh
920lo & gamesd ,sF3 IESM 992 ,9790901 SIMISIOM,
-bnsiet as 03 sonsldorse91
~istsw sommo} bezogque gaivwode ,sigiosd divoe ,9y109D aqsO .¢ 2 ;
won isd? syodg .31 08 smroa Jove Wis :
sled W id $99 to fia! ot .sigros0) divoe .iniod Riedl
-brvoredosd ai ,.dto 4697 Ysolireene }
3 : s
i ‘ag
PLATE XLIII
Fig. 1. View at the head of Moraine Fjord, Cumberland Bay, South
Georgia, showing the two glaciers. The peak in the distance lies between
Sugarloaf Peak and Mt Paget.
Fig. 2. Morainic iceberg, seen near South Georgia, bearing a close
resemblance to an island.
Fig. 3. Cape George, South Georgia, showing supposed former water-
level some 80 ft. above that now existing.
Fig. 4. Barff Point, South Georgia, to left of centre, with Right Whale
Rocks. Sugarloaf Peak, 7500 ft., in background.
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. III
“ZE C. Hardy phot,
Fig. 4
SOUTH GEORGIA
PLATE XLIII
CE
——
E. HH.
Tarshall phot.
ee a a a
:
“»
3
2 “s ’
SotiRisss athtaoy7 (Mirth sete oe SO R
« t =~ .
JPUFGTS whi s
Po
,
te
PLATE XLIV
Fig. 1. Larsen Harbour, South Georgia, seen from the entrance.
Fig. 2. Coal Harbour, near Undine Harbour, South Georgia, to right
of centre, with Snow Peak, 2700 ft., in background. =
DISCOVERY REPORTS, VOL. Ill PLATE XLIV
A. C. Hardy phot.
E. H. Marshall phot.
Fig. 2
SOUTH GEORGIA
74mm CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936. 1347
Of the sums herein made available under the United States . Compensation of at-
Shipping Board Bureau, not to exceed an aggregate of $150,000 ‘"""*
shall be expended for compensation of regular attorneys employed
on a yearly salary basis, including their clerical and legal assistants.
This title may be cited as the Department of Commerce Appro- short title.
priation Act, 1937. a
TITLE V—DEPARTMENT OF LABOR epee of
f e of the Se
OF THE SECRETARY
Salaries: Secretary of Labor, Assistant Secretary, Se
ant Secretary, and othe rsonal services in th
Columbia, $330,000: That per
in number) now empl he-determination of wages pursuant jny "sonnel determin:
to the provisions of t : a
approved \Mareh 3, 1931, relating to the rate of wages for laborers se ee ee
buildings”, approved August 30, 1935, may be continued in such
employment and paid from the amount herein appropriated withov
regard to the provisions of the civil-service laws requiring com-—
petitive examinations: Provided further, That said personnel (except Nonassembled exami-
attorneys and referees) shall be required to take nonassembled °°" ™@""**
examinations.
Promotion of health, safety, employment, win 20 forth: For _ Promotion of health,
salaries and expenses.in connection with the prom ae ee
on of health, ete.
safety, employment stabilization, and amicable industrial relations
for labor and industry, $140,000, of which ,amount not to exceed
$83,580 may be expended for personal seryices in the District of
Columbia. |
Contingent expenses: For contingent and miscellaneous expenses Contingent expenses.
of the offices and bureaus of the Department, for which appropria-
tions for contingent and miscellaneous expenses are not specifically
made, including the purchase of stationery, furniture, and repairs
to the same, carpets, matting, oilcloths, file cases, towels, ice, brooms,
soap, sponges, laundry, street-car fares not exceeding $400; purchase,
exchange, maintenance, and repair of motorcycles and motor trucks;
maintenance, operation, and repair of a motor-propelled passenger-
carrying vehicle, to be used only for official purposes; freight and
express charges; newspaper clippings not to exceed $1,200, postage
to foreign countries, telegraph and telephone service, typewriters,
adding machines, and other labor-saving devices; purchase of law
books, books of reference, newspapers and periodicals, not exceeding
$4,500; contract stenographic services; all other necessary miscel-
laneous items and expenses not included in the foregoing; and not
to exceed $25,000 for purchase of certain supplies for the Immigra- ,,
tion and Naturalization Service; in all, $112,500: Provided, That Minor purchases.
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., 7338s, oy 1383, ©
title 41, sec. 5) shall not be construed to apply to any purchase or
service rendered for the Department of Labor when the aggregate
amount involved does not exceed the sum of $100. printine miapinaina:
Printing and binding: For printing and binding for the Depart-
ment of Labor, including all its bureaus, offices, institutions, and
services located in Washington, District of Columbia, and elsewhere,
250,000. aa
: Commissioners of conciliation: To enable the Secretary of Labor pacer aang
to exercise the authority vested in him by section 8 of the Act creat- Me er
ing the Department of Labor (U. S. C., title 5, sec. 611+) and to
1So in original.
43115°—36——_17
r.
cre-
thryé eK 4
fthisies| an
1348
International Labor
Organization, Geneva.
Liaison with; ex-
penses, etc.
Vol. 48, p. 1182.
Printing and bind-
ing, etc.
Vol. 46, p. 818; U.S.
C., p. 45.
Bureau of Labor Sta-
tistics.
Salaries and expenses.
Immigration and
Naturalization Service.
Salaries and expenses,
Deportation, etc., of
aliens.
Vehicles.
Witness fees, etc.
7414 CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
appoint commissioners of conciliation, traveling expenses, telegraph
and telephone service, and not to exceed $80,000 for personal services
in the District of Columbia, $408,000.
Liaison with the International Labor Organization, Geneva, Switz-
erland, salaries and expenses: For a United States Labor Commis-
sioner and other personal services in Geneva, Switzerland; com-
pensation of interpreters, translators, and porters; traveling expenses
of employees, including transportation of employees, their families,
and effects, in going to and returning from foreign posts; rent, heat,
light, and fuel; hire, maintenance, and operation of motor-propelled
passenger-carrying vehicles; purchase and exchange of foreign and
domestic books, periodicals, and newspapers; purchase of furniture,
stationery, and supplies; printing and binding; postage; telephone
and other similar expenses, for which payment may be made in
advance; necessary technical or special investigations in connection
with matters falling within the scope of the International Labor
Organization; allowances for living quarters, including heat, fuel,
and light, as authorized by the Act approved June 26, 1930 (U.S. C.,
title 5, sec. 118a), not to exceed $1,700 for any person, and contingent
and such other expenses in the United States and elsewhere as the
Secretary of Labor may deem necessary, fiscal year 1937, $28,000.
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS
Salaries and expenses: For personal services, including temporary
statistical clerks, stenographers, and typewriters in the District of
Columbia, and including also experts and temporary assistants for
field service outside of the District of Columbia; traveling expenses,
including expenses of attendance at meetings concerned with the
work of the Bureau of Labor Statistics when incurred on the writ-
ten authority of the Secretary of Labor; purchase of periodicals,
documents, envelopes, price quotations, and reports and materials for
reports and bulletins of said Bureau, $850,000, of which amount not
to exceed $628,500 may be expended for the salary of the Commis-
sioner and other personal services in the District of Columbia.
IMMIGRATION AND NATURALIZATION SERVICE
Salaries and expenses: For enforcement of the laws regulating
the immigration to, the residence in, and the exclusion and deporta-
tion from the United States of aliens and persons subject to the
Chinese exclusion laws; for enforcement of the laws authorizing
a uniform rule for the naturalization of aliens; salaries, transporta-
tion, traveling, and other expenses of officers, clerks, and other
employees appointed to enforce said laws; care, detention, mainte-
nance, transportation, and traveling expenses incident to the depor-
tation and exclusion of aliens and persons subject to the Chinese
exclusion laws, as authorized by law, in the United States and to,
through, or in foreign countries; purchase of supplies and equip-
ment, including alterations and repairs; purchase, exchange, opera-
tion, maintenance, and ropa of motor-propelled vehicles, including
passenger-carrying vehicles for official use in field work; arms,
ammunition and accessories; cost of reports of decisions of the Fed-
eral courts and digests thereof for official use; verifications of legal
papers; refunding of head tax, maintenance bills, and immigration
fines, upon presentation of evidence showing conclusively that col-
lection and deposit was made through error; mileage and fees to
witnesses subpenaed on behalf of the United States, and for all
other expenses necessary to enforce said laws; $9,740,000, all to be
expended under the direction of the Secretary of Labor, of which
74rux CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
amount not to exceed $545,000 may be expended for the salary of ,
the Commissioner of Immigration and Naturalization and other
personal services in the District of Columbia, including services of
persons authorized by law to be detailed there for duty: Provided,
That not to exceed $45,000 of the sum herein appropriated shall be
available for the purchase, including exchange, of motor-propelled
passenger-carrying vehicles: Provided further, That the Commis-
sioner of Immigration and Naturalization, with the approval of the
Secretary of Labor, may contract with officers and employees sta-
tioned outside of the District of Columbia, whose salaries are pay-
able from this appropriation, for the use, on official business outside
of the District of Columbia, of privately owned horses, and the
consideration agreed upon shall be payable from the funds herein
appropriated: Provided further, That not to exceed $36,000 of the
total amount herein appropriated shall be available for allowances
for living quarters, including heat, fuel, and light, as authorized by
the Act approved June 26, 1930 (U.S. C., title 5, sec. 118a), not
to exceed $1,700 for any person: Provided further, That $100,000
of the amount herein appropriated shall be available only for the
payment of extra compensation for overtime services of inspectors
and employees of the Immigration and Naturalization Service for
which the United States receives reimbursement in accordance with
the provisions of the Act of March 2, 1931 (U.S. C., title 8, sees.
109a and 109b): Provided further, That not to exceed $400 of the |
sum herein appropriated may be expended for attendance at meet-
ings concerned with the naturalization of aliens when incurred on
the written authority of the Secretary of Labor: Provided further,
That no part of this appropriation shall be available for the com-
pensation of assistants to clerks of United States courts: And pro-
vided further, That not to exceed $10,000 of the sum herein appro-
priated may be expended for payment of rewards, when specifically
authorized by the Secretary of Labor, for information leading to
the detection, arrest, or conviction of persons violating the immi-
gration or naturalization laws.
Immigration stations: For remodeling, repairing (including repairs
to the ferryboat, Ellis Island), renovating buildings, and purchase of
equipment, $110,000.
CHILDREN’S BUREAU
Salaries and expenses: For expenses of investigating and report-
ing upon matters pertaining to the welfare of children and child
life, and especially to investigate the questions of infant mortality;
personal services, including experts and temporary assistants;
traveling expenses, including not to exceed $3,000 for expenses of
attendance at meetings for the promotion of child welfare when
incurred on the written authority of the Secretary of Labor; pur-
chase of reports and material for the publications of the Children’s
Bureau and for reprints from State, city, and private publications
for distribution when said reprints can be procured more cheaply
than they can be printed by the Government, and other necessary
expenses, $400,000, of which amount not to exceed $313,500 may be
expended for personal services in the District of Columbia.
MATERNAL AND CHILD WELFARE
Salaries and expenses: For all authorized and necessary adminis-
trative expenses of the Children’s Bureau in performing the duties
imposed upon it by title V of the Social Security Act, approved
August 14, 1935, including personal services, rentals, repairs, and
1349
Services in the Dis-
ict.
Provisos.
Vehicles.
Privately owned
horses.
Allowances for living
quarters, etc.
Vol. 46, p. 818.
8. C., p. 45.
_ Overtime services of
inspectors, ete.
Vol. 46, p. 1467.
U.S. C., p. 184.
Attendance at meet-
ings.
Pay of assistants to
clerks of courts forbid-
den.
Payment of rewards.
Immigration stations.
Children’s Bureau.
Salaries and expenses.
Investigations.
Maternal and child
welfare.
Salaries and expenses.
Public Laws, Ist
sess., PD. 629.
U.S. C., Supp. I, p.
249,
1350
Social Security Act.
Payments under
State plans,
Maternal and child-
health services, grants
to States.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 629.
Ist
Provisos.
Basis of allotments,
1937.
Supplemental aid not
included.
Public Laws, Ist
sess., p. 630.
Services for crippled
children, grants to
States.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 631.
Provis
Basis
937.
Ist
0.
of allotments,
Child-welfare sery-
ices, grants to States.
Public Laws, 1st
sess., D. 633.
Proviso.
Basis of allotments,
1937.
Women’s Bureau.
Salaries and expenses,
Vol. 41, p. 987; U
S. C., p. 1320.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
alterations to buildings, in the District of Columbia and elsewhere;
printing and binding; supplies; services; equipment; newspapers,
books of reference, periodicals, and press clippings; travel expenses
including expenses of attendance at meetings and attendance o
cooperating officials and consultants at conferences when called by
the Children’s Bureau with the approval of the Secretary of Labor,
$299,000.
In the administration of title V of the Social Security Act for
the fiscal year 1937, payments to States for any quarter of the fiscal
year 1937 under parts 1 and 2 may be made with respect to any
State plan approved under such respective parts by the Chief of the
Children’s Bureau prior to or during such quarter, but no such
payment shall be made with respect to any plan for any period prior
to the quarter in which such plan was submitted to the Chief of the
Children’s Bureau for approval.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR MATERNAL AND CHILD-HEALTH SERVICES
Grants to States for maternal and child-health services, Chil-
dren’s Bureau: For grants to States for the purpose of enabling
each State to extend and improve services for promoting the health
of mothers and children, as authorized in title V, part 1, of the
Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49 Stat. 629-631),
$2,820,000: Provided, That in carrying out such part 1, the allot-
ments to States and expenditures thereunder for the fiscal year 1937
are authorized to be made on the basis of a total of $3,800,000 for
all States (as defined in such Act): Provided further, That any
allotment to a State pursuant to section 502 (b) shall not be included
in computing for the purposes of subsections (a) and (b) of section
504 an amount expended or estimated to be expended by the State.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR SERVICES FOR CRIPPLED CHILDREN
Grants to States for services for crippled children, Children’s
Bureau: For the purpose of enabling each State to extend and
improve services for crippled children, as authorized in title V,
part 2, of the Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49
Stat., 631-633), $2,150,000: Provided, That in carrying out such
part 2, the allotments to States (as defined in such Act) and expendi-
tures thereunder for the fiscal year 1937 are authorized to be made
on the basis of a total of $2,850,000 for all States.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR CHILD-WELFARE SERVICES
Grants to States for child-welfare services, Children’s Bureau:
For grants to States for the purpose of enabling the United States,
through the Children’s Bureau, to cooperate with State public-
welfare agencies in establishing, extending, and strengthening pub-
lic-welfare services for the care of homeless or neglected children,
or children in danger of becoming delinquent, as authorized in title
V, part 3, of the Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49
Stat. 633), $1,200,000: Provided, That in carrying out such part 3,
the allotments to States (as defined in such Act) and expenditures
thereunder for the fiscal year 1937 are authorized to be made on
the basis of a total of $1,500,000 for all States,
WOMEN’S BUREAU
Salaries and expenses: For carrying out the provisions of the Act
‘entitled “An Act to establish in the Department of Labor a bureau
to be known as the Women’s Bureau”, approved June 5, 1920
(4ta CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
(U.S. C., title 29, secs 11-16) , including personal services in the Dis-
trict of Columbia, not to exceed $134,500; purchase of material for
reports and educational exhibits, and traveling expenses, $153,200,
of which sum not to exceed $3,000 shall be available for expenses
of attendance at meetings concerned with the work of said bureau
when incurred on the written authority of the Secretary of Labor.
UNITED STATES EMPLOYMENT SERVICE
For carrying out the provisions of the Act entitled “An Act to
provide for the establishment of a national employment system
and for cooperation with the States in the promotion of such sys-
tem, and for other purposes”, approved June 6, 1933; personal
services and rent in the District of Columbia and elsewhere; travel-
ing expenses, including expenses of attendance at meetings con-
cerned with the work of the United States Employment Service when
specifically authorized by the Secretary of Labor; law books, books
of reference, newspapers and periodicals, printing and binding,
supplies and equipment, telegraph and telephone service, and mis-
cellaneous expenses, $2,785,000, of which amount not to exceed
$885,000 shall be available for the Veterans’ Placement Service, the
Farm Placement Service, District of Columbia Public Employment
Center, and all other purposes, including not to exceed $197,500 for
personal services in the Department in the District of Columbia, and
the remainder shall be available for payment to the several States
in accordance with the provisions of the said Act of June 6, 1933,
as amended: Provided, That apportionments for the fiscal year
1937 shall be on the basis of a total apportionment to all States of
$3,000,000, and in order to supply the Government’s apportionments
to States under such Act during the fiscal years 1936 and 1937,
which are not capable of being supplied under the foregoing appro-
priation, there is hereby appropriated so much as may be necessary
to supply such apportionments, but not more than $1,675,000.
UNITED STATES HOUSING CORPORATION
Salaries and expenses: For officers, clerks, and other employees,
and for contingent and miscellaneous expenses, in the District of
Columbia and elsewhere, including blank books, maps, stationery,
file cases, towels, ice, brooms, soap, freight and express charges, com-
munication service, travel expense, printing and binding not to exceed
$100, and all other miscellaneous items and expenses not included
in the foregoing and necessary to collect and account for the receipts
from the sale of properties and the receipts from the operation of
unsold properties of the United States Housing Corporation, the
Bureau of Industrial Housing and Transportation, property com-
mandeered by the United States through the Secretary of Labor,
and to collect the amounts advanced to transportation facilities and
others; for payment of special assessments and other utility, munici-
pal, State, and county charges or assessments unpaid by purchasers,
and which have been assessed against property in which the United
States Housing Corporation has an interest, and to defray expenses
incident to foreclosing mortgages, conducting sales under deeds of
trust, or reacquiring title or possession of real property under
default proceeding, including attorney fees, witness fees, court costs,
charges, and other miscellaneous expenses; for the maintenance and
repair of houses, buildings, and improvements which are unsold; in
all, $9,000: Provided, That no person shall be employed hereunder at
a rate of compensation exceeding $4,000 per annum, and only one
1351
Employment Service.
Providing for promo-
tion of employment.
Vol. 48, p. 113; U. S.
C., p. 1324.
Attendance at meet-
ings.
Printing and _ bind-
ing, etc.
Veterans’ Placement
Service, Farm Place-
ment Service, D. C.
Public Employment
Center.
Proviso.
Basis of apportion-
ments, 1937.
United States Hous-
ing Corporation.
Salaries and expenses.
Printing and binding.
Special assessments.
Provisos.
Salary limitation.
1352
Expenditures re-
stricted.
Bituminous Coal La-
bor Board.
Salaries and expenses.
Post, p. 1627.
Printing and binding.
Short title
Payment restriction,
persons failing to re-
ceive Senate confirma-
tion,
Payment to cotton
ginners.
Ante, p. 1116.
Cotton Control Act,
administrative ex-
penses.
Vol. 48, p. 598.
Proviso.
‘Time limitation.
Great Lakes Exposi-
tion.
Participation ex-
penses.
‘Ante, p. 1243.
May 15, 1936.
[S. J. Res. 231.]
[Pub. Res., No. 91.]
Landing of the
Swedes in Delaware.
Commemorative
coinage, authorized.
Number.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 405, 406. MAY 15, 1936.
person may be employed at that rate: Provided further, That no
part of the appropriations heretofore made and available for
expenditure by the United States Housing Corporation shall be
expended for the purposes for which appropriations are made herein.
BITUMINOUS COAL LABOR BOARD
Salaries and expenses: For three Board members and other per-
sonal services in the District of Columbia and elsewhere, and for all
other necessary expenditures of the Bituminous Coal Labor Board
in performing the duties imposed upon said Board by the Bitu-
minous Coal Conservation Act of 1935, including supplies, station-
ery, telephone service, telegrams, furniture, office equipment, travel
expenses, and contract stenographic reporting services, $79,300.
Printing and binding, Bituminous Coal Labor Board: For all
printing and binding for the Bituminous Coal Labor Board, $2,500.
This title may be cited as the Department of Labor Appropriation
Act, 1937.
Sec. 2. No part of the money appropriated under this Act shall be
paid to any person for the filling of any position for which he or she
has been nominated after the Senate has voted not to approve of the
nomination of said person.
Src. 3. That in passing upon applications made for compensation
under the provisions of the item for “Payment to cotton ginners”
contained in Title I of the Supplemental Appropriation Act, fiscal
year 1936 (Public Law Numbered 440, Seventy-fourth Congress),
and upon payments pursuant to such applications, the Secretary of
Agriculture and the Comptroller General of the United States are
authorized and directed, in the interest of saving as much adminis-
trative expense as possible and in order to avoid delay in passing
upon such applications, to assume that the additional expenses
incurred in connection with the administration of the Act of April
21, 1934 (491 Stat., 598-607), equaled 25 cents per bale, counting
round bales as half bales, during the period June 1, 1935, to February
10, 1936, inclusive: Provided, That no payment shall be made on any
application for such compensation unless the application is filed prior
to September 1, 1936.
Src. 4. Great Lakes Exposition: For the expenses of the participa-
tion of the Government of the United States in the Great Lakes
Exposition as provided for by Senate Joint Resolution Numbered
233, including the reimbursement of other appropriations from which
payments may have been made for any of the purposes therein
specified, to be immediately available, $275,000.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
[CHAPTER 406.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To authorize the coinage of 50-cent pieces in commemoration of the three-
hundredth anniversary of the landing of the Swedes in Delaware.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That in commemoration
of the three-hundredth anniversary of the landing of the Swedes in
Delaware there shall be coined at a mint of the United States to be
designated by the Director of the Mint not less than twenty-five
thousand silver 50-cent pieces of standard size, weight, and composi-
tion and of a special appropriate single design, containing some
1So in original.
“47a CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 406, 407. MAY 15, 1936.
recognized emblem of the State of Delaware, to be fixed by the Direc-
tor of the Mint, with the approval of the Secretary of the Treasury,
but the United States shall not be subject to the expense of making the
necessary dies and other preparations for this coinage. :
Sec. 2. The coins herein authorized shall bear the date 1936, irre-
spective of the year in which they are minted or issued, shall be legal
tender in any payment to the amount of their face value, and shall be
issued only upon the request of the president of the Delaware Swed-
ish Tercentenary Commission upon payment by him of the par value
of such coins, but not less than twenty-five thousand such coins shall
be issued to him at any one time and no such coins shall be issued
after the expiration of one year after the date of enactment of this
Act. Such coins may be disposed of at par or at a premium by such
commission, and the net proceeds shall be used by it in defraying the
expenses incidental and appropriate to the commemoration of such
event.
Src. 3. All laws now in force relating to the subsidiary silver coins
of the United States and the coining or striking of the same, regulat-
ing and guarding the process of coinage, providing for the purchase
of materral, and for the transportation, distribution, and redemption
of coins, for the prevention of debasement or counterfeiting, for the
security of the coins, or for any other purposes, whether such laws
are penal or otherwise, shall, so far as applicable, apply to the coinage
herein authorized.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
[CHAPTER 407.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To provide for participation by the United States in an Inter-American Confer-
ence to be held at Buenos Aires, Argentina, or at the capital of another American
republic, in 1936.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any money not other-
wise appropriated, the sum of $75,000 to be used for participation
by the United States in an Inter-American Conference, in pursuance
of and for the purposes set forth in a letter from the President of
the United States dated January 30, 1936, to be held at Buenos
Aires, Argentina, or at the capital of another American republic, in
1936, including personal services in the District of Columbia or
elsewhere without reference to the Classification Act of 1923, as
amended; stenographic reporting and other services by contract if
deemed necessary without regard to section 3709 of the Revised
Statutes (U.S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent; traveling expenses (and
by indirect routes and by airplane if specifically authorized by the
Secretary of State); hire, maintenance, and operation of motor-
propelled passenger-carrying vehicles; equipment, purchase of
necessary books, documents, newspapers, periodicals, and maps; sta-
tionery; official cards, entertainment; printing and binding; and
such other expenses as may be authorized by the Secretary of State,
including the reimbursement of other appropriations from which
payments may have been made for any of the purposes herein
specified, to be expended under the direction of the Secretary of
State, fiscal year 1936, to remain available until June 30, 1937.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
1353
No Federal expense
for dies, etc.
Date, issue, ete.
Disposal.
Coinage laws appli-
cable.
May 15, 1936.
[S. J. Res. 248.]
[Pub. Res., No. 92.]
Inter-American Con-
ference, 1936.
Appropriation au-
thorized for participa-
tion expenses.
Ante, p. 1319.
U.S.C., p. 85.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S., sec. 3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Vehicles.
Printing and binding.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
1554
May 18, 1936.
(H.-R. 10539.]
[Public, No. 600.]
Missouri River.
Bridge construction
at Niobrara, Nebr.
Textual changes.
Public Laws, 1st
sess., p. 1074.
Amendment.
May 18, 1936.
[H. R. 10847.]
[Public, No. 601.]
New York City,
NSE
Acquisition cf land
near, for cemeterial
purposes, authorized.
Appropriation au-
thorized.
Post, p. 1641.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 420, 421. MAY 18, 19386.
[CHAPTER 420.]
AN ACT
To amend section 32 of the Act entitled ‘‘An Act to authorize the construction
of certain bridges and to extend the times for commencing and/or completing
the construction of other bridges over the navigable waters of the United
States, and for other purposes’, approved August 30, 1935.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That subsection (a)
of section 32 of the Act entitled “An Act to authorize the construction
of certain bridges and to extend the times for commencing and/or
completing the construction of other bridges over the navigable waters
of the United States, and for other purposes”, approved August 30,
1935, is amended by striking out “the village board of the village
of Niobrara, county of Knox, State of Nebraska”, and inserting in
lieu thereof the following: “the county of Knox, State of Nebraska”,
Sec. 2. Subsection (b) of such section 32 is amended by striking
out “the Village Board of the Village of Niobrara, county of Knox,
State of Nebraska”, and inserting in lieu thereof the following: “the
county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
Sec. 3. (a) Subsection (c) of such section 32 is amended’ by strik-
ing out “The said Villiage Board of the Villiage of Niobrara, county
of Knox, State of Nebraska”, and inserting in lieu thereof the
following: “The said county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
(b) Subsection (c) of such section 32 is further amended by strik-
ing out “to fix the charge tolls for transit” and inserting in lieu
thereof the following: “to fix and charge tolls for transit”.
Sec. 4. Subsection (d) of such section 32 is amended by striking
out “After a sinking sufficient for amortization shall have been so
provided, said bridge” and inserting in lieu thereof the following:
“After a sinking fund sufficient for such amortization shall have been
so provided, said bridge”.
Sec. 5. The right to alter, amend, or repeal this Act is hereby
expressly reserved.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 421.]
AN ACT
To authorize the acquisition of land for cemeterial purposes in the vicinity of
New York City, New York.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of War be, and he is hereby, authorized to acquire by purchase, *
condemnation, or otherwise such suitable lands in the vicinity of New
York City as in his judgment are required for enlargement of exist-
ing national cemetery facilities, and the sum of $250,000, or so much
thereof as may be necessary, is hereby authorized to be appropriated
from any funds in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, which
sum shall remain available until expended.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
74rn CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 422, 423. MAY 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 422.]
AN ACT
To amend section 5 of the Act of March 2, 1919, generally known as the ‘‘War
Minerals Relief Statutes.”’
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in any claim
that has heretofore been filed within the time and in the manner
provided by the Act approved March 2, 1919 (40 Stat. 1272), as
amended, generally referred to as the “War Minerals Relief Statutes”,
in which the Supreme Court of the District of Columbia under the
authority conferred upon said court by the Act approved February
13, 1929 (45 Stat. 1166), has adjudged or decreed interest payments
or obligations to be losses reimbursable within the meaning of the
Act of March 2, 1919 (40 Stat. 1272), as amended, the Secretary of
the Interior shall open or reopen such claim and include in his
adjustments and payments of losses, interest which has been paid or
has accrued to the date of approval of this Act: Provided, however,
That such losses shall be shown to the satisfaction of the Secretary
of the Interior as a matter of fact to be the result of a legal obliga-
tion incurred within the statutory period as provided in said Act of
March 2, 1919: And provided further, That the sum paid in satisfy-
ing said claims shall not exceed in total $1,250,000. It is also
provided that all settlements under this Act and pursuant to its
provisions shall constitute full and complete discharge of all obliga-
tions of the United States accruing under the War Minerals Act
and Acts amendatory thereof.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 423.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To provide for participation by the United States in the Ninth International
Congress of Military Medicine and Pharmacy in Rumania, in 1937; and to
authorize and request the President of the United States to invite the Inter-
national Congress of Military Medicine and Pharmacy to hold its tenth
congress in the United States in 1939, and to invite foreign countries to par-
ticipate in that congress.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That there is hereby
authorized to be appropriated, out of any money in the Treasury not
otherwise appropriated, the sum of $11,500, or so much thereof as
may be necessary, for the expenses of participation by the United
States in the Ninth International Congress of Military Medicine and
Pharmacy to be held in Rumania in 1937, including personal services
in the District of Columbia or elsewhere without reference to the
Classification Act of 1923, as amended; stenographic reporting and
other services by contract if deemed necessary without regard to
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes (U.S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent;
traveling expenses; purchase of necessary books, documents, news-
papers, periodicals, and maps; stationery; official cards; entertain-
ment; printing and binding, including the payment of not to exceed
$500 to the Association of Military Surgeons of the United States
toward the cost of printing the report of the American Delegation
to the Ninth Congress; and such other expenses as may be authorized
by the Secretary of State, including the reimbursement of other
appropriations from which payments may have been made for any
of the purposes herein specified, to be expended under the direction
of the Secretary of State.
1355
May 18, 1936.
[S.1432.]
~ [Public, No. 602] __
“War Minerals Re-
lief Statutes’, amend-
ment.
Vol. 40, p. 1272; Vol.
42, p. 322; Vol. 45, p.
1166.
Post, p. 1619.
Interest payments on
certain claims under.
Provisos.
Condition.
Limitation on total
amount.
Settlements; dis-
charge of liability.
May 18, 1936.
[H. J. Res. 538.]
[Pub. Res., No. 93.]
Ninth International
Congress of Military
Medicine and Phar-
macy, Rumania, 1937.
Sum authorized for
participation expenses.
Post, p. 1634.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S.,sec.3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Printing and bind-
ing; report of Ameri-
can Delegation.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
Invitation. to hold
10th congress in United
States; foreign govern-
ments to participate.
May 18, 1936.
{H. J. Res. 547.]
[Pub. Res., No. 94.]
Great Lakes Exposi-
tion, Cleveland, Ohio.
Dutiable articles, im-
ported for exhibition
purposes, etc., ad-
mitted free, under regu-
lations.
Ante, pp. 1243, 1352.
Sales permitted.
Provisos.
Duty on articles
withdrawn.
Deterioration allow-
ance.
Marking require-
ments.
Articles abandoned.
Transfer privileges.
Exposition deemed
sole consignee of mer-
chandise.
Incurred Federal ex-
penses reimbursable.
747ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 423, 424. MAY 18, 1936.
Src, 2. That the President be, and he is hereby, authorized and
requested to extend to the International Congress of Military Medi-
cine and Pharmacy an invitation to hold its tenth congress in the
United States in 1939, and to invite foreign governments to partici-
pate in that congress.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 424.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
Providing for the importation of articles free from tariff or customs duty for the
purpose of exhibition at Great Lakes Exposition to be held at Cleveland,
Ohio, beginning in June 1936, and for other purposes.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That all articles which
shall be imported from foreign countries for the purpose of exhibi-
tion at the international exposition to be held at Cleveland, Ohio,
beginning in June 1936, by Great Lakes Exposition, or for use in
constructing, installing, or maintaining foreign buildings, or exhibits
at the said exhibition, upon which articles there shall be a tariff or
customs duty shall be admitted without payment of such tariff, cus-
toms duty, fees, or charges under such regulations as the Secretary of
the Treasury shall prescribe; but it shall be lawful at any time during
or within three months after the close of the said exposition to sell
within the area of the exposition any articles provided for herein,
subject to such regulations for the security of the revenue and for the
collection of import duties as the Secretary of the Treasury shall pre-
scribe: Provided, That all such articles, when withdrawn for con-
sumption or use in the United States, shall be subject to the duties,
if any, imposed upon such articles by the revenue laws in force at the
date of their withdrawal; and on such articles which shall have
suffered diminution or deterioration from incidental handling or
exposure the duties, if payable, shall be assessed according to the
appraised value at the time of withdrawal from entry hereunder for
consumption or entry under the general tariff law: Provided further,
That imported articles provided for herein shall not be subject to an
marking requirements of the general tariff laws, except when sade
articles are withdrawn for consumption or use in the United States,
in which case they shall not be released from customs custody until
properly marked, but no additional duty shall be assessed because
such articles were not sufficiently marked when imported into the
United States: Provided further, That at any time during or within
three months after the close of the exposition any article entered
hereunder may be abandoned to the Government or destroyed under
customs supervision, whereupon any duties on such article shall be
remitted: Provided further, That articles which have been admitted
without payment of duty for exhibition under any tariff law and
which have remained in continuous customs custody or under a cus-
toms exhibition bond and imported articles in bonded warehouses
under the general tariff law may be accorded the privilege of trans-
fer to and entry for exhibition at the said exposition under such
regulations as the Secretary of the Treasury shall prescribe: And
provided further, That Great Lakes Exposition shall be deemed, for
customs purposes only, to be the sole consignee of all merchandise
imported under the provisions of this Act, and that the actual and
necessary customs charges for labor, services, and other expenses in
connection with the entry, examination, appraisement, release, or
custody, together with the necessary charges for salaries of customs
officers and employees in connection with the supervision, custody of,
74ru CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 424, 425, 497. MAY 18, 19, 1936.
and accounting for articles imported under the provisions of this Act,
shall be reimbursed by Great Lakes Exposition to the Government.
of the United States under regulations to be prescribed by the Secre-
tary of the Treasury, and that receipts from such reimbursements
shall be deposited as refunds to the appropriation from which paid,
in the manner provided for in section 524, Tariff Act of 1930.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 425.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To authorize an appropriation for the expenses of participation by the United
States in a conference at Brussels to revise the Convention for the Protection
of Literary and Artistic Works concluded at Bern, September 9, 1886, and
revised at Rome, June 2, 1928.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any money in the
Treasury not otherwise appropriated, the sum of $6,500, or so much
thereof as may be necessary, for the expenses of participation by
the United States in the conference to convene at Brussels, Belgium,
for the purpose of revising the Convention for the Protection of
Literary and Artistic Works, concluded at Bern, September 9, 1886,
and revised at Rome, June 2, 1928, including personal services in
the District of Columbia and elsewhere without reference to the
Classification Act of 1923, as amended; stenographic, reporting, and
other services by contract, if deemed necessary, without regard to
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes (U.S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent;
traveling expenses; purchases of necessary books, documents, news-
papers, periodicals, and maps; stationery; official cards; entertain-
ment; printing and binding; and such other expenses as may be
authorized by the Secretary of State, including the reimbursement
of other appropriations from which payments may have been made
for any of the purposes herein specified, to be expended under the
direction of the Secretary of State.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 427.]
AN ACT
To authorize certain officers of the United States Navy, officers and enlisted men
of the Marine Corps, and officers and enlisted men of the United States Army
to accept such medals, orders, diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have
been tendered them by foreign governments in appreciation of services rendered.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the following-
named officers of the United States Navy, and officers and enlisted
men of the Marine Corps, are hereby authorized to accept such
medals, orders, diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have been
tendered them by foreign governments in appreciation of services
rendered :
United States Navy: Admiral William H. Standley; Rear Admiral
David F. Sellers; Rear Admiral Wat T. Cluverius; Rear Admiral
Hayne Ellis; Rear Admiral Ernest J. King; Rear Admiral Louis
M. Nulton, retired; Rear Admiral Yates Stirling, Junior; Rear
Admiral John R. Y. Blakely, retired; Rear Admiral Edward H.
Campbell; Rear Admiral Walter N. Vernou; Rear Admiral Harley
H. Christy; Rear Admiral Henry V. Butler; Rear Admiral Walter
S. Crosley ; Rear Admiral Frank B. Upham; Rear Admiral Edward
1357
Deposit of, as re-
funds.
Vol. 46, p. 741.
U.S. C., p. 894.
May 18, 1936.
[H. J. Res. 569.]
~ [Pub. Res., No. 95.]
Convention for the
Protection of Literary
and Artistic Works,
conics for revision
of.
Sum authorized for
participation expenses.
Post, p. 1633.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S., see.3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
May 19, 1936.
Js: 1975.]
~ [Public, No. 603.]
Navy, Marine Corps,
and Army.
Acceptance of certain
decorations, etc., ten-
dered by foreign gov-
ernments to designated
officers, etc., authorized.
Navy.
1358
Navy—Continued.
747TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
B. Fenner; Rear Admiral George T. Pettengill; Rear Admiral Clark
N. Woodward; Rear Admiral William H. Allen; Captain Reuben
B. Coffey; Captain Vaughn K. Coman; Captain Gordon W. Haines;
Captain Alfred G. Howe; Captain Victor A. Kimberly; Captain
David M. Le Breton; Captain William R. Sayles; Captain Halsey
Powell; Captain Willis W. Bradley, Junior; Captain Frank H.
Roberts; Captain Arthur B. Cook; Captain Benyaurd B. Wygent;
Captain Rufus F. Zogbaum, Junior; Captain Frank Jack Fletcher;
Captain Matthias E. Manly; Captain Alfred W. Brown; Captain
Augustine T. Beauregard; Captain Harold M. Bemis; Captain Her-
bert H. Michael; Captain MacGillivray Milne; Captain Milo F.
Draemel; Captain Edward A. Evers, Naval Reserve; Captain
Edward T. Hooper, Supply Corps; Captain Holden C. Richardson,
Construction Corps, retired; Captain Kent C. Melhorn, Medical
Corps; Captain Lucius W. Johnson, Medical Corps; Commander
Ernest L. Gunther; Commander Hamilton V. Bryan; Commander
John D. Price; Commander Harold C. Train; Commander Ward W.
Waddell; Commander William W. Smith; Commander Calvin N.
Cobb; Commander Patrick N. L. Bellinger; Commander Harry G.
Patrick; Commander Earl W. Spencer; Commander William H.
Pashley; Commander Aaron 8. Merrill; Commander Douglas W.
Fuller; Commander Ralph F. Wood; Commander Joel T. Boone,
Medical Corps; Commander Joseph A. J. McMullin, Medical Corps;
Commander Gordon D. Hale, Medical Corps; Commander Walter
C. Espech, Medical Corps; Commander Maurice M. Witherspoon,
Chaplain Corps; Commander Bernhard H. Bieri; Lieutenant Com-
mander Albert S. Marley; Lieutenant Commander Charles G.
Moore, Junior; Lieutenant Commander John J. Carrick, Naval
Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Emil J. Carroll, Naval Reserve;
Lieutenant Commander Francis G. Donebrink; Lieutenant Com-
mander Victor C. Barringer, Junior; Lieutenant Commander Ralph
A. Ofstie; Lieutenant Commander Lucien B. Green, Second, retired;
Lieutenant Commander Dallas D. Dupre; Lieutenant Commander
Harold B. Crow, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Edward
O. McDonnell, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Schuyler F.
Cumings, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Charles W. Steven-
son, Supply Corps; Lieutenant Commander Charles R. O'Leary,
Supply Corps; Lieutenant Commander Hardy V. Hughens, Medical
Corps; Lieutenant Commander Thomas L. Morrow, Medical Corps;
Lieutenant Commander Louis E. Mueller, Medical Corps; Lieu-
tenant Commander Victor B. Riden, Medical Corps; Lieutenant
Commander William M. H. Turville, Medical Corps; Lieutenant
Commander Horace R. Boone, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Com-
mander Warwick T. Brown, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander
Vincent Hernandez, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Harry
S. Harding, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Robert W. Wim-
berly, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Hillard L. Weer,
Medical Corps; Lieutenant Robert F. Hickey; Lieutenant Harvey
R. Bowes; Lieutenant Buell F. Brandt; Lieutenant George H.
De Baun; Lieutenant John M. Brewster; Lieutenant Curry E.
Eason; Lieutenant Maxwell B. Saben; Lieutenant John F. Gillon;
Lieutenant Colonel H. Mansfield, Chaplain Corps; Lieutenant
Joseph O. Saurette; Lieutenant Robert H. Smith; Lieutenant Don-
ald R. Tallman; Lieutenant John Davis, retired; Lieutenant Walter
L. Bach, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Walter G. Kilbury, Medical
Corps; Lieutenant Hugh E. Mouldin, Dental Corps; Lieutenant
(Junior Grade) James H. Taylor; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Frank E. Latauzo, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Robert C. Douthat, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
74tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
Freeman C. Harris, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Warren G. Wieand, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
George H. Mills, Dental Corps; Ensign Howard F. Hozey, Naval
Reserve Force; Chief Boatswain William C. Baker; Chief Pharma-
cist Roy Aikman; Chief Pharmacist Leon H. French.
United States Marine Corps: Major General James C. Breckin-
ridge; Brigadier General George Richards; Brigadier General Rufus
M. Lane, retired; Brigadier General Hugh Matthews; Brigadier
General Randolph C. Barkeley; Brigadier General Frederick L.
Bradman; Brigadier General Louis McCarty Little; Brigadier Gen-
eral Douglas C. McDougal; Brigadier General Richard T. Williams;
Colonel Richard M. Cutts; Colonel Presley M. Rixey, Junior; Colonel
Seth Williams; Colonel James J. Meade; Colonel Clayton S. Vogel;
Colonel Calvin B. Matthews; Lieutenant Colonel Lauren 8. Willis,
retired; Lieutenant Colonel Jeter R. Horton; Lieutenant Colonel
Franklin B. Garrett; Lieutenant Colonel Calhoun Ancrum; Lieu-
tenant Colonel William S. Wise; Lieutenant Colonel William B.
Smith; Lieutenant Colonel Charles F. M. Price; Lieutenant Colonel
Ross E. Rosell; Lieutenant Colonel John Marston; Lieutenant
Colonel Julian C. Smith; Lieutenant Colonel Roy E. Geiger; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Harry Schmidt; Lieutenant Colonel De Witt Peck;
Lieutenant Colonel William B. Sullivan; Lieutenant Colonel Henry
L. Larsen; Lieutenant Colonel Arnold W. Jacobsen; Major Thomas
S. Clarke; Major Joseph C. Fegan; Major Frederick R. Hoyt;
Major Marion B. Humphrey; Major Allen H. Turnage; Major
Louis M. Bourne; Major Matthew S. Kingman; Major John F. 8.
Norris; Major Anderson C. Deering; Major Ralph J. Mitchell;
Major Samuel L. Howard; Major Oscar R. Cauldwell; Major
Thomas E. Watson; Major Walter C. Sheard; Major Roger W.
Peard; Major Lloyd L. Leach; Major Raphael Griffin; Major
Thomas P. Cheatham; Major Louis W. Whaley; Major Leroy P.
Hunt; Major Leo D. Merale; Major Lemuel C. Shepherd, Junior;
Major James E. Davis; Major Alphonse De Carre; Major James T.
Moore; Major Alfred N. Noble; Major Franklin A. Hart; Major
William N. Beat; Major Herbert Hardy; Major Ralph E. West;
Captain Graves B. Erskine; Captain Robert Yowell; Captain
Francis P. Mulcahy; Captain Maurice C. Holmes; Captain Eugene
F. C. Collier; Captain Otto Salzman; Captain Carl 8. Schmidt;
Captain Harry W. Gamble; Captain Roscoe Arnett; Captain
Maurice S. Gregory; Captain James P. Smith; Captain Edward G.
Kuefe; Captain Max Cox; Captain Oliver P. Smith; Captain Joseph
O. Ward; Captain Edward L. Durvall, Junior; Captain John C.
Wood; Captain Jacob Lienhard; Captain Victor F. Bleasdale; Cap-
tain Leonard H. Rea; Captain James P. Schwerin; Captain John
H. Parker; Captain Walter 8. Casper; Captain Willett Elmore;
Captain Benjamin W. Gally; Captain James A. Nixson, Captain
Frederick M. Howard; Captain Lee W. Brown; Captain Harold G.
Major; Captain Bernard Dubel; Captain Hamilton M. H. Fleming;
Captain Claude A. Phillips; Captain Harold W. Whitney; Captain
Harry Paul; Captain Frank N. Costtge; Captain Byron F, Johnson ;
Captain William J. Livingston; Captain George E. Monson; Captain
Amor L. Sims; Captain George R. Rowen; Captain Brady L. Vogt;
Captain Clinton W. McLeod; Captain Roy C. Swick; Captain
Reuben B. Price; Captain William J. Whaling; Captain Frank N.
Gilman; Captain Monitor Watchman; Captain George L. Maynard;
Captain Benjamin W. Atkinson; Captain William L. Bales; Cap-
tain Frederick C. Diebush; Captain Terrell J. Crawford; Captain
John T. Walker; Captain William P. T. Hill; Captain Jesse A.
Nelson; Captain Henry A. Carr; Captain Wilham C. Hall;
1359
Navy—Continued.
Marine Corps.
1360 74rH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY.19, 1936.
ti Matine Corps—Con- Captain Edwin J. Farrell; Captain Louis E. Woods; Captain
Augustus H. Fricke; C Captain William S. Fellers; Captain Herbert
Ss. Keimling; Captain Walter W. Wensinger; Captain Ernest E.
Lincort; First Lieutenant William L. McKittrick; First Lieutenant
Max D. Smith; First Lieutenant David A. Stafford; First Lieu-
tenant Roy W. Conkey; First Lieutenant Harold N. Rosecrans;
First Lieutenant Horace D. Palmer; First Lieutenant Hayne D.
Royden; First Lieutenant Christian F. Schilt; First Lieutenant
James H. Strother; First Lieutenant Ivan W. Miller; First Lieu-
tenant John C. McQueen; First Lieutenant William W. Davies;
First Lieutenant James W. Smith; First Lieutenant Lewis A. Hohn;
First Lieutenant Lucian C. Whitaker; First Lieutenant Ralph E.
Forsyth; First Lieutenant Pierson E. Conradt; First Lieutenant
Cregon A. Williams; First Lieutenant Evans ¥. Carlson; First
Lieutenant John W. Lakes; First Lieutenant George F. Good,
Junior; First Lieutenant William R. Hughes; First Lieutenant Max-
well H. Mizell; First Lieutenant Charles W. Kail: First Lieutenant
Lewis D. Fuller; First Lieutenant Joe N. Smith; First Lieutenant
Herbert F. Becker; First Lieutenant Alexander W. Kreiser; First
Lieutenant Edward J. Trumble; First Lieutenant James C. Brauer;
First Lieutenant Francis J. Cunningham; First Lieutenant Paul A.
Putnam; First Lieutenant John 8. E. Young; First Lieutenant Wil-
liam D. Saunders; First Lieutenant Lofton R. Henderson; First
Lieutenant John N. Coffman; First Lieutenant Peter P. Schrider;
First Lieutenant Robert L. Griffin; First Lieutenant James P.
Risely; First Lieutenant Samuel 8. Jack; First Lieutenant Frank
M. June; First Lieutenant Miles S. Newton; First Lieutenant Ira
L. Kimes; First Lieutenant Reginald H. Ridgely ; First Lieutenant
Nols H. Nelson ; First Lieutenant Frank C. Dailey; First Lieutenant
Frank H. Wirsig; Second Lieutenant Robert L. Peterson; Second
Lieutenant Kenneth H. Weir; Second Lieutenant Arthur F. Binney;
Second Lieutenant Clovis C. Coffman; Second Lieutenant Perry O.
Parmelee; Second Lieutenant Lester S. Hamel; Second Lieutenant
Ernest E. Pollock; Second Lieutenant Frank C. Croft; Second Lieu-
tenant Newin O. Hammond; Second Lieutenant Frank H. Schwable;
Second Lieutenant Joseph H. Berry; Second Lieutenant James P.
Berkeley; Second Lieutenant Peter A. McDonald; Second Lieu-
tenant Michael M. Mahoney; Second Lieutenant Fred D. Beans;
Second Lieutenant Edgar O. Price; Second Lieutenant Lebulon C.
Hopkins; Second Lieutenant William A. Willis; Second Lieutenant
John M. Davis; Chief Marine Gunner John F. Evans; Chief Marine
Gunner Otho Wiggs; Chief Marine Gunner Jesse W. Stamper;
Chief Marine Gunner Frank F. Putcarmer; Chief Marine Gunner
Frank O. Lundt; Chief Marine Gunner Michael Wederczyk; Chief
Marine Gunner Harold Ogden; Chief Quartermaster Clerk August
F. Schonefeld; Chief Quartermaster Clerk William A. Warrell,
retired; Chief Quartermaster Clerk Albert O. Woodrow; Chief
Quartermaster Clerk Elmer W. Darde; Chief Pay Clerk Benjamin
H. Wolever; Chief Pay Clerk Clinton A. Phillips; Chief Pay Clerk
Timothy E. Murphy; Marine Gunner Kennard KF, Bubier; Marine
Gunner Albert S. Nunach; Marine Gunner Harry R. Baley : Marine
Gunner Thomas Whitezel, Marine Gunner Walter N. Hendersen;
Marine Gunner Robert S. McCook; Sergeant Major James M.
Barmead; Sergeant Major Carl Svenson; Sergeant Major Charles
A. White; Quartermaster Sergeant Frederick J. Widman; Quarter-
master Sergeant Rupert F. Stone; Master Technical Sergeant Mil-
lard T. Shepard; Paymaster Sergeant Fred Parquette; First Ser-
geant Edwin C. Clarke; First Ser geant Cecil N. Bietz; First Ser-
geant Charles H. Gray; First Sergeant William O'Grady; First
74mm CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936. 1361
Sergeant Alfred Sylvester; First Sergeant Harry Watkins; First ,, Marine Corps—Con-
Sergeant Nicholas M. Griece; First Sergeant Frederick Dalton; paste
First Sergeant Louis N. Bertol; First Sergeant Russell O. Beard;
First Sergeant Otto Poland; First Sergeant Richard Shaker; First
Sergeant Charles E. Stuart; First Sergeant Frank Verdier; First
Sergeant Curtis O. Whitney; Gunnery Sergeant Joseph A. Saunders;
Gunnery Sergeant Bernard J. Durr; Gunnery Sergeant John J.
Rogers; Sergeant Olin L. Beall; Sergeant George Washington;
Sergeant Joseph L. Bonville; Sergeant Joseph Konepka; Sergeant
Charles L. McIndoc; Sergeant Frank J. Murphy; Sergeant Douglas
S. Catchis; Sergeant Daniel J. Donahoe; Sergeant Charles Sorenson;
Private John David.
United States Navy: Admiral William B. Caperton, retired; Rear Navy.
Admiral Charles 8. Freeman; Captain William D. Puleston; Captain
Walter S. Anderson; Captain Stephen B. McKinney; Captain Wil-
liam O. Spears; Captain Augustin T. Beauregard; Commander Leo
H. Thebaud; Commander Clarence Gulbranson; Captain Charles
St. J. Butler, Medical Corps; Captain William S. Bainbridge, Medi-
cal Corps, Naval Reserve, retired; Commander Morton D. Willcutts,
Medical Corps; Commander William Henry P. Blandy; Commander
Edwin C. Ebert, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Roscoe H.
Hillenkoetter ; Lieutenant Commander Joel J. White, Medical Corps;
Lieutenant Albert L. King, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant (Junior
Grade) Walter C. Ford; Captain Herbert S. Howard, Construction
Corps; Lieutenant Commander Leshe C. Stevens; Lieutenant Com-
mander William K. Vanderbilt, United States Naval Reserve.
United States Marine Corps: Colonel Robert L. Denig; Colonel Marine Corps.
Henry L. Roosevelt, Marine Corps Reserve, deceased; Colonel Wil-
liam C. Harllee, retired; Colonel Julius §. Turrill, retired; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Harry L. Smith; Lieutenant Colonel William M.
Small, retired; Major Andrew E. Creesy; Major Donald J. Kendall;
Major Chester L. Fordney, Marine Corps Reserve; Captain Louis
Cukela; First Sergeant George Nelson.
That the following-named officers and enlisted men of the United
States Army are hereby authorized to accept such medals, orders,
diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have been tendered them
by foreign governments in appreciation of services rendered:
General Douglas MacArthur; Major General Dennis E. Nolan; my.
Major General Malin Craig; Major General Paul B. Malone; Major
General Frank Parker; Major General Frank R. McCoy; Major
General Albert J. Bowley; Major General Benjamin D. Foulois;
Brigadier General Frank C. Bolles; Brigadier General Casper H.
Conrad, Junior; Brigadier General Andrew Moses; Brigadier Gen-
eral Thomas W. Darrah; Brigadier General Francis LeJ. Parker;
Brigadier General Guy V. Henry; Brigadier General John W.
Gulick; Brigadier General Robert C. Foy; Colonel Joseph A. Baer;
Colonel Charles Burnett; Colonel W. Goff Caples; Colonel Edward
Davis; Colonel Charles W. Exton; Colonel James Malcolm Graham;
Colonel W. Lee Hart; Colonel Jacob C. Johnson; Colonel Roy C.
Kirtland; Colonel Osmun Latrobe; Colonel E. R. Warner McCabe;
Colonel Charles H. Patterson; Colonel Russell P. Reeder; Colonel
Francis A. Ruggles; Colonel Frederick W. Van Duyne; Colonel
Richard H. Williams; Lieutenant Colonel Frank M. Andrews; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Lester D. Baker; Lieutenant Colonel Reginald B.
Cocroft; Lieutenant Colonel John F. Curry; Lieutenant Colonel
Ernest J. Dawley; Lieutenant Colonel Robert H. Fletcher, Junior;
Lieutenant Colonel William W. Hicks; Lieutenant Colonel Donald
C. McDonald; Lieutenant Colonel Frederick W. Manley; Lieutenant
1362
Army—Continued.
May 19, 1936.
[H. R. 12162.]
[Public, No. 604.]
United States courts.
Vol. 36, p. 1116; U.
S. C., p. 1247.
Mississippi judicial
districts.
Northern district.
Eastern division.
Western division.
Delta division.
Terms of court.
Eastern division.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 427, 428. MAY 19, 1936.
Colonel Maxwell Murray; Lieutenant Colonel Henry C. Pratt; Lieu-
tenant Colonel John W. N. Schulz; Lieutenant Colonel Martin C.
Shallenberger; Lieutenant Colonel Daniel I. Sultan; Lieutenant
Colonel Edwin M. Watson; Lieutenant Colonel Barton K. Yount;
Major George E. Arneman; Major Rosenham Beam; Major Enrique
M. Benitez; Major Peter C. Bullard; Major Henry B. Cheadle;
Major Joseph O. Daly; Major Herbert A. Dargue; Major James A.
Dorst; Major Asa N. Duncan; Major Charles R. Finley; Major
Abraham Garfinckel; Major James A. Gillespie; Major Paul R.
Hawley; Major Charles B. Hazeltine; Major Edgar Erskine Hume;
Major George E. Lovell, Junior; Major Davenport Johnson; Major
Raymond E. McQuillin; Major Joseph J. O'Hare; Major James B.
Ord; Major Alvan C. Sandeford; Major Martin F. Scanlon; Major
James C. R. Schwenck; Chaplain (Major) Aristeo V. Simoni; Major
Julia C. Stimson; Major Robert H. Van Volkenburgh; Major Robert
LeG. Walsh; Major Charles A. Willoughby; Major Walter F. Win-
ton; Captain John R. D. Cleland; Captain Carl W. Connell; Captain
Virgil N. Cordero; Captain Robert E. Cummings; Captain Thomas
J. Davis; Captain Vernon C. DeVotie; Captain Fernand G. Dumont;
Captain Ira C. Eaker; Captain Richard E. Elvins; Captain Muir
S. Fairchild; Captain James M. Gillespie; Captain Leslie R. Groves,
Junior; Captain Albert F. Hegenberger; Captain Eugene J. Heller;
Captain Jack C. Hodgson; Captain Arthur B. McDaniel; Captain
William J. McIGernan, Junior; Captain Eugene A. Regnier; Cap-
tain Charles McK. Robinson ; Captain Timothy Sapia-Bosch ; Captain
Kinsley W. Slauson; Captain Bernard S. Thompson; Captain Leon-
ard D. Weddington; Captain Ennis C. Whitehead; Captain Royden
Williamson; Captain Ralph H. Wooten; First Lieutenant Joseph
M. Glasgow; First Lieutenant John L. Hines, Junior; First Lieu-
tenant Kenneth C. Nichols; First Lieutenant Benjamin B. Talley;
First Lieutenant Hugh B. Waddell; Staff Sergeant Edward F.
Springer; Sergeant Leslie B. Hopkins.
Approved, May 19, 1936.
[CHAPTER 428.]
AN ACT
To create an additional division of the United States District Court for the
Southern District of Mississippi to be known as the Hattiesburg division.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 90
of the Judicial Code, as amended (U.S. C., 1934 edition, title 28,
sec. 170), is amended to read as follows:
“Src. 90. The State of Mississippi is divided into two judicial
districts to be known as the northern and southern districts of
Mississippi. The northern district shall include the territory em-
braced on the 1st day of December 1923 in the counties of Alcorn,
Attala, Chickasaw, Choctaw, Clay, Itawamba, Lee, Lowndes, Monroe,
Oktibbeha, Pontotoc, Prentiss, Tishomingo, and Winston, which shall
constitute the eastern division of said district; also the territory
embraced on the date last mentioned in the counties of Benton,
Calhoun, Carroll, De Soto, Grenada, Lafayette, Marshall, Mont-
gomery, Panola, Tate, Tippah, Union, Webster, and Yalabusha,
which shall constitute the western division of said district; also
the territory embraced on the date last mentioned in the counties
of Bolivar, Coahoma, Leflore, Quitman, Sunflower, Tallahatchie,
and ‘Tunica, which shall constitute the Delta division of said district.
The terms of the district court for the eastern division shall be held
at Aberdeen on the first Mondays in April and October; for the
74m CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 428, 482. MAY 19, 20, 1936.
western division, at Oxford on the third Monday in April and the
first Monday in December; and for the Delta division, at Clarksdale
on the fourth Monday in January and the third Monday in October.
The southern district shall include the territory embraced on the 1st
day of December 1923 in the counties of Amite, Copiah, Franklin,
Hinds, Holmes, Leake, Lincoln, Madison, Pike, Rankin, Simpson,
Smith, Scott, Wilkinson, and Yazoo, which shall constitute the
Jackson division; also the territory embraced on the date last men-
tioned in the counties of Adams, Claiborne, Humphreys, Issaquena,
Jefferson, Sharkey, Warren, and Washington, which shall constitute
the western division; also the territory embraced on the date last
mentioned in the counties of Clarke, Jasper, Kemper, Lauderdale,
Neshoba, Newton, Noxubee, and Wayne, which shall constitute the
eastern division; also the territory embraced on the date last men-
tioned in the counties of George, Hancock, Harrison, Jackson, Pearl
River, and Stone, which shall constitute the southern division of said
district; also the territory embraced on the date last mentioned in
the counties of Covington, Forrest, Greene, Jefferson Davis, Jones,
Lamar, Lawrence, Marion, Perry, and Walthall, which shall con-
stitute the Hattiesburg division. Terms of the district court for the
Jackson division shall be held at Jackson on the first Mondays
in May and November; for the western division, at Vicksburg on
the third Mondays in May and November; for the eastern division,
at Meridian on the third Mondays in March and September; for
the southern division, at Biloxi on the third Monday in February
and the first Monday in June; and for the Hattiesburg division, at
Hattiesburg on the second Mondays in April and October. The
clerk of the court for each district shall maintain an office in charge
of himself or a deputy at each place in his district at which court
is now required to be held, at which he shall not himself reside,
which shall be kept open at all times for the transaction of the
business of the court. The marshal for each of said districts shall
maintain an office in charge of himself or a deputy at each place of
holding court in his district.”
Approved, May 19, 1936.
[CHAPTER 432.]
AN ACT
To provide for rural electrification, and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby created and established an agency of the United States to
be known as the “Rural Electrification Administration”, all of the
powers of which shall be exercised by an Administrator, who shall be
appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of
the Senate, for a term of ten years, and who shall receive a salary
of $10,000 per year. This Act may be cited as the “Rural Electrifi-
cation Act of 1936”.
Sec. 2. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to make
loans in the several States and Territories of the United States for
rural electrification and the furnishing of electric energy to persons
in rural areas who are not receiving central station service, as here-
inafter provided; to make, or cause to be made, studies, investiga-
tions, and reports concerning the condition and progress of the elec-
trification of rural areas in the several States and Territories; and
to publish and disseminate information with respect thereto.
43115°—36——18
1363
Western division.
Delta division.
Southern district.
Jackson division.
Western division.
Eastern division.
Southern division.
Hattiesburg division.
Terms of court.
Jackson division.
Western division.
Eastern division.
Southern division.
Hattiesburg division.
Clerks and marshals;
offices.
May 20, 1936.
[S. 3483.]
[Public, No. 605.]
Rural Electrification
Act of 1936.
Rural Electrification
Administration creat-
ed.
Administrator; pow-
ers, appointment, etc.
Citation of title.
Loans in States and
Territories authorized.
Studies and reports
concerning rural areas;
publication, ete.
1564
Reconstruction
nance Corporation.
Loans to Administra-
tor by, authorized.
Maximum, 1937.
Interest.
Fi-
Provisos.
Proportion to secu-
rity.
Amortization of ob-
ligations.
Maturity provisions.
Assignment of obli-*
gations to Reconstruc-
tion Finance Corpora-
tion.
Appropriations
thorized.
au-
Allotments of por-
tion of annual sums for
loans; basis of.
Unallotted portion;
basis of loans.
Post, p. 1365,
Proviso.
Limitation.
Availability of unex-
pended balances dur-
ing ensuing year.
Provisos.
Limitation.
Loans to Adminis-
trator to cease June 30,
1937.
_ Payments covered
in; exception.
74tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 482. MAY 20, 1936.
Src. 3. (a) The Reconstruction Finance Corporation is hereby
authorized and directed to make loans to the Administrator, upon his
request approved by the President, not exceeding in aggregate
amount $50,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1937, with
interest at 3 per centum per annum upon the security of the obliga-
tions of borrowers from the Administrator appointed pursuant to
the provisions of this Act or from the Administrator of the Rural
Electrification Administration established by Executive Order Num-
bered 7037: Provided, That no such loan shall be in an amount
exceeding 85 per centum of the principal amount outstanding of
the obligations constituting the security therefor: And provided
further, That such obligations incurred for the purpose of financing
the construction and operation of generating plants, electric transmis-
sion and distribution lines, or systems shall be fully amortized over
a period not to exceed twenty-five years, and that the maturity of
such obligations incurred for the purpose of financing the wiring of
premises and the acquisition and installation of electrical and plumb-
ing appliances and equipment shall not exceed two-thirds of the
assured life thereof and not more than five years. The Administrator
is hereby authorized to make all such endorsements, to execute all
such instruments, and to do all such acts and things as shall be
necessary to effect the valid transfer and assignment to the Recon-
struction Finance Corporation of all such obligations.
(b) There is hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any
money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, for the fiscal year
ending June 30, 1938, and for each of the eight years thereafter,
the sum of $40,000,000 for the purposes of this Act as hereinafter
provided.
(c) Fifty per centum of the annual sums herein made available or
appropriated for the purposes of this Act shall be allotted yearly by
the Administrator for loans in the several States in the proportion
which the number of their farms not then receiving central station
electric service bears to the total number of farms of the United
States not then receiving such service. The Administrator shall,
within ninety days after the beginning of each fiscal year, determine
for each State and for the United States the number of farms not
then receiving such service.
(d) The remaining 50 per centum of such annual sums shall be
available for loans in the several States and in the Territories, with-
out allotment as hereinabove provided, in such amounts for each
State and Territory as, in the opinion of the Administrator, may be
effectively employed for the purposes of this Act, and to carry out
the provisions of section 7: Provided, however, That not more than
10 per centum of said unallotted annual sums may be employed in
any one State, or in all of the Territories.
(e) If any part of the annual sums made available for the purposes
of this Act shall not be loaned or obligated during the fiscal year for
which such sums are made available, such unexpended or unobligated
sums shall be available for loans by the Administrator in the follow- .
ing year or years without allotment: Provided, however, That not
more than 10 per centum of said sums may be employed in any one
State or in all of the Territories: And provided further, That no
loans shall be made by the Reconstruction Finance Corporation to
the Administrator after June 30, 1937.
(f) All moneys representing payments of principal and interest
on loans made by the Administrator under this Act shall be covered
into the Treasury as miscellaneous receipts, except that any such
moneys representing payments of principal and interest on obliga-
tions constituting the security for loans made by the Reconstruction
747m CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 432. MAY 20, 1936.
Finance Corporation to the Administrator shall be paid to the
Reconstruction Finance Corporation in payment of such loans.
Sec, 4. The Administrator is authorized and empowered, from the
sums hereinbefore authorized, to make loans to persons, corporations,
States, Territories, and subdivisions and agencies thereof, municipali-
ties, peoples utility districts and cooperative nonprofit, or limited-
dividend associations organized under the laws of any State or Ter-
ritory of the United States, for the purpose of financing the con-
struction and operation of generating plants, electric transmission
and distribution lines or systems for the furnishing of electric energy
to persons in rural areas who are not receiving central station serv-
ice: Provided, however, That the Administrator, in making such
loans, shall give preference to States, Territories, and subdivisions
and agencies thereof, municipalities, peoples utility districts, and
cooperative, nonprofit, or limited dividend associations, the projects
of which comply with the requirements of this Act. Such loans
shall be on such terms and conditions relating to the expenditure of
the moneys loaned and the security therefor as the Administrator
shall determine and may be made payable in whole or in part out
of income: Provided, however, That all such loans shall be self-
liquidating within a period of not to exceed twenty-five years, and
shall bear interest at a rate equal to the average rate of interest pay-
able by the United States of America on its obligations, having a
maturity of ten or more years after the dates thereof, issued during
the last preceding fiscal year in which any such obligations were
issued: Provided further, That no loan for the construction, operation,
or enlargement of any generating plant shall be made unless the
consent of the State authority having jurisdiction in the premises is
first obtained. Loans under this section and section 5 shall not be
made unless the Administrator finds and certifies that in his judg-
ment the security therefor is reasonably adequate and such loan will
be repaid within the time agreed.
Src. 5. The Administrator is authorized and empowered, from the
sums hereinbefore authorized, to make loans for the purpose of finan-
cing the wiring of the premises of persons in rural areas and the
acquisition and installation of electrical and plumbing appliances
and equipment. Such loans may be made to any of the borrowers
of funds loaned under the provisions of section 4, or to any person,
firm, or corporation supplying or installing the said wiring, appli-
ances, or equipment. Such loans shall be for such terms, subject
to such conditions, and so secured as reasonably to assure repayment
thereof, and shall be at a rate of interest equal to the average rate of
interest payable by the United States of America on its obligations,
having a maturity of ten or more years after the dates thereof, issued
during the last preceding fiscal year in which any such obligations
were issued.
Sec. 6. For the purpose of administering this Act and for the
purpose of making the studies, investigations, publications, and
reports herein provided for, there is hereby authorized to be appro-
priated, out of any money in the Treasury not otherwise appro-
priated, such sums as shall be necessary. }
Src. 7. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to bid for
and purchase at any foreclosure or other sale, or otherwise to acquire,
property pledged or mortgaged to secure any loan made pursuant to
this Act; to pay the purchase price and any costs and expenses
incurred in connection therewith from the sums authorized in section
3 of this Act; to accept title to any property so purchased or acquired
in the name of the United States of America; to operate or lease
such property for such period as may be deemed necessary or
1365
Loans for financing
generating plants, dis-
tribution lines, etc.
Provisos. _
Preferential loans.
Loans to be self-
liquidating.
Interest.
Consent of State au-
thority.
Security; repayment.
Wiring premises, in-
stalling appliances, ete.
Loans for; terms, se-
curity, ete.
Interest.
Appropriations
authorized for adminis-
trative, etc., expenses.
Post, p. 1604.
Acquisition of mort-
gaged, etc., property
by Administrator, au-
thorized.
Operation, ete., of
acquired property,
1366
Sale.
Disposal of encum-
bered property, etc.,
by borrower.
Prior loans and con-
tracts; administration
may be vested in Ad-
ministrator.
Transfer of records,
property, and person-
nel.
Nonpartisan admin-
istration of Act.
Merit system of ap-
pointments, etc.
Removal of officials,
etc., for violation.
Annual to
reports
Congress.
Utilization of volun-
tary, ete., services.
Attorneys, engineers,
and experts; appoint-
ment, compensation,
ete.
Expenditures author-
ized.
Ante, p. 1365.
Time extension on
payments, authorized.
Provisos.
_Loans on plants,
lines, etc.
747TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 432. MAY 20, 1936.
advisable to protect the investment therein, but not to exceed five
years after the acquisition thereof; and to sell such property so
purchased or acquired, upon such terms and for such consideration
as the Administrator shall determine to be reasonable.
No borrower of funds under section 4 shall, without the approval
of the Administrator, sell or dispose of its property, rights, or
franchises, acquired under the provisions of this Act, until any loan
obtained from the Rural Electrification Administration, including
all interest and charges, shall have been repaid.
Sec. 8. The administration of loans and contracts entered into by
the Rural Electrification Administration established by Executive
Order Numbered 7037, dated May 11, 1935, may be vested by the
President in the Administrator authorized to be appointed by this
Act; and in such event the provisions of this Act shall apply to said
loans and contracts to the extent that said provisions are not incon-
sistent therewith. The President may transfer to the Rural Elec-
trification Administration created by this Act the jurisdiction and
control of the records, property (including office equipment), and
personnel used or employed in the exercise and performance of the
functions of the Rural Electrification Administration established
by such Executive order.
Sec. 9. This Act shall be administered entirely on a nonpartisan
basis, and in the appointment of officials, the selection of employees,
and in the promotion of any such officials or employees, no political
test or qualification shall be permitted or given consideration, but
all such appointments and promotions shall be given and made on
the basis of merit and efficiency. If the Administrator herein pro-
vided for is found by the President of the United States to be guilty
of a violation of this section, he shall be removed from office by the
President, and any appointee or selection of officials or employees
made by the Administrator who is found guilty of a violation of this
Act shall be removed by the Administrator.
Src. 10. The Administrator shall present annually to the Congress
not later than the 20th day of January in each year a full report of
his activities under this Act.
Sec. 11. In order to carry out the provisions of this Act the
Administrator may accept and utilize such voluntary and uncom-
pensated services of Federal, State, and local officers and employees
as are available, and he may without regard to the provisions of civil-
service laws applicable to officers and employees of the United States
appoint and fix the compensation of attorneys, engineers, and experts,
and he may, subject to the civil-service laws, appoint such other
officers and employees as he may find necessary and prescribe their
duties. The Administrator is authorized, from sums appropriated
pursuant to section 6, to make such expenditures (including expendi-
tures for personal services; supplies and equipment; lawbooks and
books of reference; directories and periodicals; travel expenses;
rental at the seat of government and elsewhere; the purchase, opera-
tion, or maintenance of passenger-carrying vehicles; and printing
and binding) as are appropriate and necessary to carry out the
provisions of this Act.
Sec. 12. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to extend
the time of payment of interest or principal of any loans made by the
Administrator pursuant to this Act: Provided, however, That with
respect to any loan made under section 4, the payment of interest or
principal shall not be extended more than five years after such pay-
ment shall have become due, and with respect to any loan made
under section 5, the payment of principal or interest shall not be
extended more than two years after such payment shall have become
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 482-434. MAY 20, 1936.
due: And provided further, That the provisions of this section shall
not apply to any obligations or the security therefor which may be
held by the Reconstruction Finance Corporation under the provisions
of section 3.
Sxc. 13. As used in this Act the term “rural area” shall be deemed
to mean any area of the United States not included within the
boundaries of any city, village, or borough having a population in
excess of fifteen hundred inhabitants, and such term shall be deemed
to include both the farm and nonfarm population thereof; the term
“farm” shall be deemed to mean a farm as defined in the publications
of the Bureau of the Census; the term “person” shall be deemed to
mean any natural person, firm, corporation, or association; the term
“Territory” shall be deemed to include any insular possession of the
United States.
Sec. 14. If any provision of this Act, or the application thereof to
any person or circumstances, is held invalid, the remainder of the
Act and the application of such provision to other persons or circum-
stances shall not be affected thereby.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 433.]
AN ACT
To amend article 3 of the ‘‘Rules Concerning Lights, and so forth’, contained
in the Act entitled ‘“‘An Act to adopt regulations for preventing collisions upon
certain harbors, rivers, and inland waters of the United States”, approved
June 7, 1897.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the first sen-
tence of article 3 of the “Rules Concerning Lights, and so forth”,
contained in the Act entitled “An Act to adopt regulations for pre-
venting collisions upon certain harbors, rivers, and inland waters of
the United States”, approved June 7, 1897, is amended to read as
follows:
“Arr. 38. A steam vessel when towing another vessel or vessels
alongside shall, in addition to her side lights, carry two bright white
lights in a vertical line, one over the other, not less than three feet
apart, and when towing one or more vessels astern, regardless of the
length of the tow, shall carry an additional bright white light three
feet above or below such lights: Provided, That on the Red River of
the North and the rivers emptying into the Gulf of Mexico and their
tributaries, this article shall not affect the signal hghts used on towing
vessels which propel the tow by pushing at the rear of the tow.”
Approved, May 20, 1936.
(CHAPTER 434.]
AN ACT
To amend section 4321, Revised Statutes (U. S! C., title 46, sec. 263), and for
other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 4321,
Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sec. 263), be,
and is hereby, amended to read as follows:
“The form of a license for carrying on the coasting trade or fish-
eries shall be as follows:
“License for carrying on the (here insert ‘coasting trade’, ‘whale
fishery’, ‘mackerel fishery’, or ‘cod fishery’, as the case may be).
1567
Loans excluded.
Ante, p. 1364.
Definitions.
“Rural area.’”
“Farm.”
“Person.”’
“Territory.”
Separability _provi-
sion.
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 10308.]
[Public, No. 606.]
Navigation.
“Rules Concerning
Lights, etc.’’
Vol. 30, p. 97.
U.S.C., p. 1455.
Lights of steam ves-
sel towing another ves-
sel alongside.
When towing astern.
Proviso.
Exceptions.
May 20, 1936.
(H.-R. 11036.]
~ [Public, No. 607.]
Vessels in domestic
commerce.
R.S., sec. 4321, p. 835.
U.S. C., p. 2005.
License for coasting
trade or fisheries.
Form prescribed.
1368
Provisos.
Licensing for the
“coasting trade and
mackerel fishery.’’
Touching at foreign
ports.
R. S8., sees. 4364, 4365,
p. 844; U.S.C., p. 2010.
Enrolled and licensed
vessels, Great Lakes
and connecting waters.
R. S., sec. 4318; U. 8.
C., p. 2004.
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 11302.]
{Public, No. 608.]
United Confederate
Veterans, Reunion
Committee.
Loan of Army equip-
ment for encampment
at Shreveport, La., au-
thorized.
74mH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 484, 485. MAY 20, 1936.
“In pursuance of title L (Revised Statutes 4811-4390), ‘Regula-
tion of Vessels in Domestic Commerce’, of the Revised Statutes of
the United States (inserting here the name of the husband or man-
aging owner, with his occupation and place of abode, and the name
of the master, with the place of his abode), having sworn that the
(insert here the description of the vessel, whether ship, brigantine,
snow, schooner, sloop, or whatever else she may be), called the (insert
here the vessel’s name), whereof the said (naming the master) is
master, burden (insert here the number of tons, in words) tons, as
appears by her enrollment, dated at (naming the district, day, month,
and year, in words at length, but if she be less than twenty tons,
insert, instead thereof, ‘proof being had of her admeasurement’),
shall not be employed in any trade, while this license shall continue
in force, whereby the revenue of the United States shall be defrauded,
and having also sworn (or affirmed) that this license shall not be
used for any other vessel, or for any other employment, than is
herein specified, license is hereby granted for the said (inserting here
the description of the vessel) called the (inserting here the vessel’s
name), to be employed in carrying on the (inserting here ‘coasting
trade’, ‘whale fishery’, ‘mackerel fishery’, or ‘cod fishery’, as the case
may be), for one year from the date hereof, and no longer. Given
under my hand and seal, at (naming the said district), this (insert-
ing the particular day) day of (naming the month), in the year
(specifying the number of the year in words at length) ;”: Prowded,
That vessels of five net tons and over entitled under the laws of the
United States to be enrolled and licensed or licensed for the coasting
trade may be licensed for the “coasting trade and mackerel fishery”,
and shall be deemed to have sufficient license for engaging in the
coasting trade and the taking of fish of every description, including
shellfish: Provided further, That the provisions of sections 4364 and
4365, Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, secs.
310 and 311), shall be, and are hereby, made applicable to vessels so
licensed: And provided further, That vessels operating on the Great
Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters under enrollment
and license issued in conformity with the provisions of section 4318,
Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sec. 258),
shall be deemed to have sufficient license for engaging in the taking
of fish of every description within such waters without change in the
form of enrollment and license prescribed under the authority of
that section.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 435.]
AN ACT
To authorize the Secretary of War to lend to the Reunion Committee of the
United Confederate Veterans three thousand blankets, olive drab, numbered
4, one thousand five hundred canvas cots, to be used at their annual encamp-
ment to be held at Shreveport, Louisiana, in June 1986.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of War be, and he is hereby, authorized to lend, at his discretion
to the Reunion Committee of the United Confederate Veterans,
for use at the United Confederate Veterans’ Encampment, to
be held at Shreveport, Louisiana, June 9, 10, 11, and 12, 1936, two
hospital ward tents, with all pegs, poles, and equipment necessary
for their erection; one storage tent complete with all equipment; one
large wall tent complete with all equipment; six small wall tents
74ru CONGRESS. SESS.II. CHS. 435,440,444. MAY 20,21, 22,1936. 1369
complete with all equipment; ten pyramidal tents complete with all
equipment; fifty 14-quart G. I. buckets; three thousand blankets,
olive drab, wool; one thousand five hundred canvas folding cots; one
thousand five hundred comforters; one thousand five hundred cotton-
felted pillows complete with cotton pillow cases; three thousand
cotton bedsheets: Provided, That no expense shall be caused the
United States Government by the delivery and return of said prop-
erty; the same to be delivered from the nearest quartermaster depot
at such time prior to the holding of said encampment as may be
agreed upon by the Secretary of War and the Confederate Reunion
Committee: Provided further, That the Secretary of War, before
delivery of such property, shall take from said Reunion Committee
of the United Confederate Veterans a good and sufficient bond for
the safe return of said property in good order and condition, and
the whole without expense to the United States.
Approved, May 20, 19386.
[CHAPTER 440.]
AN ACT
To convey certain lands to Clackamas County, Oregon, for public-park purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of the Interior is authorized and directed to issue a patent to Clack-
amas County, Oregon, on behalf of the United States, for the south
half southwest quarter and the west half northeast quarter southwest
quarter section 11, township 3 south, range 4 east, Willamette merid-
ian, in the State of Oregon, containing one hundred acres, more or
less, on condition that such county shall accept and use such lands
solely for public-park purposes; but if such county shall at any time
cease to use such lands for public-park purposes, or shall permit the
use of such lands for any other purpose, or shall alienate or attempt
to alienate them, they shall revert to the United States: Provided,
That there shall be reserved to the United States, its patentees, or
their transferees, the right to cut and remove therefrom the merchant-
able timber, reserving to Clackamas County, Oregon, when such sale
is made under the provisions of the Act of June 9, 1916 (39 Stat. 218),
a preference right to purchase the timber at the highest price bid.
Src. 2. The Secretary of the Interior shall prescribe all necessary
regulations to carry into effect the foregoing provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 21, 1936.
[CHAPTER 444.]
AN ACT
To supplement the Act of June 25, 1929 (ch. 41, 46 Stat. L. 41), which authorized
and directed the Attorney General to institute suit against the Northern
Pacific Railway Company and others.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in the suit
entitled United States of America, plaintiff, against Northern Pacific
Railway Company and others, defendants, numbered E4389, insti-
tuted and pending in the District Court of the United States for
the Eastern District of Washington, under the authority and direc-
tion of the Act of June 25, 1929 (ch. 41, 46 Stat. L. 41), now on
reference to a special master for hearing under an order of said
court entered in said suit on April 21, 1936, a direct review by the
Provisos.
No Federal expense.
Bond.
May 21, 1936.
[H. R. 5058. ]
[Public, No. 609.]
Clackamas County,
Teg.
Conveyance of land
for public-park pur-
poses, authorized.
_Reversionary provi-
sion.
Proviso.
‘Timber reservation.
Vol. 39, p. 218.
Regulations to be
prescribed.
May 22, 1936.
(S. 4594.]
~[Public, No. 610.]
Northern Pacific
Railway Companyand
others.
Review by appeal to
U. S. Supreme Court
of certain questions in
pending suit, author-
ized.
Vol. 46, p. 41.
1370
Time limitation.
Right of review of
final judgment not
fected.
May 22, 1936.
(H. R. 1398.]
af-
[Public, No. 611.]
Crescent City, Calif.
Establishment
of
Coast Guard station
at, authorized.
May 22, 1936.
(H. R. 8370.]
[Public, No. 612.]
Port Washington,
1s.
Establishment of
Coast Guard station
at, authorized.
May 22, 1936.
[H. R. 10321.)
(Public, No. 613.]
Rio Grande, use of
waters, etc.
Correction in Act
lating to.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 661.
Te-
Ist
741TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 444447. MAY 22, 1936.
Supreme Court of the United States by appeal may be had by any
party to said suit of any order or decree of said district court entered
upon a review of the report of the master to be made pursuant to
said order of April 21, 1936, and also of the order or decree of said
district court entered in said suit on October 3, 1935, as amended by
an order of January 29, 1936. Such direct review by the Supreme
Court of either or both of the said orders or decrees may be had by
appeal taken within sixty days from the date of the order or decree
of the district court entered upon a review of the report of the
master to be made pursuant to the said order of April 21, 1936. The
right of review of any final judgment, authorized by said Act of
June 25, 1929, shall continue in force and effect.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 445.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of a Coast Guard station at or near Crescent
City, California.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized to establish a
Coast Guard station on the Pacific coast at or in the vicinity of
Crescent City, California, in such locality as the Commandant of
the Coast Guard may recommend.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 446.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of a Coast Guard station at Port Washington,
Wisconsin.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of
the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the
Secretary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized to estab-
lish a Coast Guard station on Lake Michigan at Port Washington,
Wisconsin, at such point as the Commandant of the Coast Guard
may recommend.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 447.]
AN ACT
To amend section 4 of Public Act Numbered 286, Seventy-fourth Congress,
approved August 19, 1935, as amended.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 4 of
Public Act Numbered 286, Seventy-fourth Congress, approved
August 19, 1935, is amended by striking out the words “section 3
hereof” and inserting in lieu thereof the words “section 2, para-
graph 2, and section 3 of this Act”.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
74tu CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 448, 449. MAY 22, 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 448.]
AN ACT
Authorizing the erection of a memorial to those who met their death in the
wreck of the dirigible Shenandoah.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of the ‘Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed to
erect near Ava, Ohio, on the spot where the Shenandoah fell, a
suitable tablet or marker to commemorate the heroic services ren-
dered by Commander Landsdowne and other members of the crew
who died when the Navy dirigible Shenandoah was destroyed.
Sxc. 2. There is hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any
money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, the sum of
$2,500 to carry out the provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 449.]
AN ACT
To authorize the Secretary of War to grant to the city of Buffalo, New York, the
right and privilege to occupy and use for sewage-disposal facilities part of the
lands forming the pier and dikes of the Black Rock Harbor improvement at
Buffalo, New York.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in addition
to the grant made by the Secretary of War to the city of Buffalo
pursuant to the Act of Congress entitled “An Act making appropri-
ations for the construction, repair, and preservation of certain public
works on rivers and harbors and for other purposes”, approved
February 27, 1911, for the purpose of establishing a public park and
landing facilities on that part of the structure known as Bird Island
Pier on Niagara River lying north of Albany Street extended, in
the city of Buffalo, New York, and forming a part of Black Rock
Harbor improvement and the lands of the United States under
water on both sides of said pier to the established harbor lines, sub-
ject to the terms, conditions, and stipulations in said grant specified,
the Secretary of War is authorized to grant to the city of Buffalo,
New York, also the right and privilege of occupying said lands and
lands under water, and also the lands owned by the United States
on the west side of Black Rock Canal, described as follows: Begin-
ning at a point where the northerly line of property formerly owned
by William H. Slade, or that line extended, intersects the United
States Government property line (formerly New York State Blue
Line) ; thence easterly parallel to the line forming the northeasterly
boundary of lands heretofore granted to the city of Buffalo by the
United States and known as Bird Island Pier until a point is reached
in direct prolongation of the easterly boundary line of said last
mentioned lands; thence southwesterly in direct line with said
easterly boundary of said lands to the northeasterly corner of said
lands heretofore conveyed to the city of Buffalo by the United
States; thence westerly along the northeasterly boundary of said
Bird Island Pier lands to said United States Government property
line; thence northeasterly along said last mentioned line to the place
of beginning, or so much thereof as may be necessary, for use either
by the city of Buffalo or by the Buffalo Sewer Authority (created
by chapter 349 of the Laws of the State of New York of 1935) for
sewage-disposal facilities, on such terms, conditions, and stipulations
as he may deem expedient and equitable and necessary for the pro-
tection of all the interests of the United States in and to said
1371
May 22, 1936.
(H.R. 10544.]
[Public, No. 614.]
Dirigible ‘‘Shenan-
oah.’’
Erection of memorial
to dead in wreck of,
authorized.
Location.
Appropriation au-
thorized.
May 26, 1936.
[S. 4317.]
[Publie, No. 615.]
Buffalo, N. Y.
Right to use certain
land for public pur-
poses, granted to.
Vol. 36, p. 935.
Description.
1372
Proviso.
State sanetion.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 8287.]
[Public, No. 616.]
Virgin Islands.
Establishment of
assessed valuation real
property tax.
Based on actual
value.
Uniform rate in each
tunicipality.
Provisional rate.
President to pre-
scribe regulations if no
municipal levy, etc.
Deposit of collections.
Virgin Islands Com-
any. ;
Payments by, in Jieu
of taxes.
Other property
owned by the United
States.
74rnx CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 449, 450. MAY 26, 1936.
premises: Provided, however, That the city of Buffalo shall have
secured the sanction and consent of the State of New York through
its constituted agencies.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 450.]
AN ACT
To establish an assessed valuation real property tax in the Virgin Islands of the
United States.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That it is the policy
of Congress to equalize and more equitably to distribute existing
taxes on real property in the Virgin Islands of the United States and
to reduce the burden of taxation now imposed on land in productive
use in such islands.
Suc. 2. For the calendar year 1936 and for all succeeding years
all taxes on real property in the Virgin Islands shall be computed
on the basis of the actual value of such property and the rate in each
municipality of such islands shall be the same for all real property
subject to taxation in such municipality whether or not such prop-
erty is in cultivation and regardless of the use to which such
property is put.
Sec. 3. Until local tax laws conforming to the requirements of this
Act are in effect in a municipality the tax on real property in such
municipality for any such calendar year shall be at the rate of
1.25 per centum of the assessed value. If the legislative authority
of a municipality shall fail to enact laws for the levy, assessment,
collection, or enforcement of any tax imposed under authority of
this Act within three months after the date of its enactment, the
President shall then prescribe regulations for the levy, assessment,
collection, and enforcement of such tax, which shall be in effect
until the legislative authority of such municipality shall make
regulations for such purposes.
Src. 4. All taxes so levied and collected shall be deposited in the
municipal treasury of the municipality in which such taxes are
collected.
Sec. 5. The Virgin Islands Company shall pay annually into the
municipal treasuries of the Virgin Islands in lieu of taxes an amount
equal to the amount of taxes which would be payable on the real
property in the Virgin Islands owned by the United States and in
the possession of the Virgin Islands Company, if such real property
were in private ownership and taxable, but the valuation placed upon
such property for taxation purposes by the local taxing authorities
shall be reduced to a reasonable amount by the Secretary of the
Interior if, after investigation, he finds that such valuation is
excessive and unreasonable. The Virgin Islands Company shall also
pay into the municipal treasuries of the Virgin Islands amounts
equal to the amounts of any taxes of general application which a
private corporation similarly situated would be required to pay into
the said treasuries. Similar payments shall be made with respect
to any property owned by the United States in the Virgin Islands
which is used for ordinary business or commercial purposes, and the
income derived from any property so used shall be available for
making such payments.
74mm CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 450, 451. MAY 26, 1936.
Sec. 6. Nothing in this Act shall be construed as altering, amend-
ing, or repealing the existing exemptions from taxation of property
used for educational, charitable, or religious purposes. Subject to
the provisions of this Act, the legislative authority of the respective
municipalities is hereby empowered to alter, amend, or repeal, sub-
ject to the approval of the Governor, any law now imposing taxes
on real and personal property.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
(CHAPTER 451.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of the Fort Frederica National Monument, at
Saint Simon Island, Georgia, and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That when title
to the site of Fort Frederica, on Saint Simon Island, Georgia, and
such other related sites located thereon, as may be designated by
the Secretary of the Interior, in the exercise of his discretion, as
necessary or desirable for national-monument purposes, shall have
been vested in the United States, said area not to exceed eighty acres
shall be, and is hereby, set apart as a national monument for the
benefit and inspiration of the people, and shall be called the “Fort
Frederica National Monument”.
Src. 2. That the Secretary of the Interior be, and he is hereby,
authorized to accept donations of land, interests in land, buildings,
structures, and other property within the boundaries of the said
national monument as determined and fixed hereunder, and dona-
tions of funds for the purchase and maintenance thereof, the title
and evidence of title to lands acquired to be satisfactory to the Secre-
tary of the Interior: Provided, That he may acquire on behalf of
the United States out of any donated funds, either by purchase at
prices deemed by him reasonable, or by condemnation under the pro-
visions of the Act of August 1, 1888, such tracts of land within the
said national monument as may be necessary for the completion
thereof.
Src. 3. (a) The Secretary of the Interior is authorized, in his
discretion, to maintain in some suitable structure within the national
monument a museum for relics and records pertaining to Fort
Frederica, and for other articles of national and patriotic interest,
and in his discretion to accept, on behalf of the United States, for
installation in such museum, articles which may be offered as addi-
tions to the museum.
(b) Any State or political subdivision thereof, organization, or
individual may, with the approval of the Secretary of the Interior,
erect monuments or place tablets commemorating historic events or
persons connected with the history of the area, within the bound-
aries of the Fort Frederica National Monument.
Sec. 4. The administration, protection, and development of the
aforesaid national monument shall be exercised under the direction
of the Secretary of the Interior by the National Park Service, sub-
ject to the provisions of the Act of August 25, 1916, entitled “An
Act to establish a National Park Service, and for other purposes”,
as amended.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
1375
Property used for
educational, religious,
etc., purposes.
Amendment or re-
peal of existing laws.
May 26, 1936.
(H. R. 8431.]
[Public, No. 617.]
Fort Frederica Na-
tional Monument, Saint
Simon Island, Ga.
Establishment of.
Acceptance of dona-
tions, etc.
Proviso.
Purchase of land from
donated funds.
Vol. 25, p. 357.
U.S. C., p. 1785.
Maintenance of mu-
seum.
Erection of monu-
ments or placing of tab-
lets.
Administration.
Vol. 39, p. 535; U. 8.
C., p. 591.
1374
May 26, 1936.
(H. R. 8784.)
[Public, No. 618.]
Executive branch of
the Government.
Withholding of com-
pensation where pay-
ments have been made
illegally, authorized.
Proviso.
Existing laws not
affected.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 10267.)
[Public, No. 619.]
Railway Mail Serv-
ice.
Adjustment of com-
pensation.
Vol. 43, p. 1061.
LO SCH jo afay
U.S. C., p. 85.
Appropriations made
available.
May 26, 1936.
{H. R. 10934.]
[Public, No. 620.]
Salem, Mass.
Transfer of custom-
house to Department
of Interior, authorized.
7414 CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 452454. MAY 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 452.]
AN ACT
To authorize withholding compensation due Government personnel.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That hereafter,
whenever upon the statement of the account of any disbursing officer
of the United States in the General Accounting Office credit shall
have been disallowed for any payment to any person in the executive
branch of the Government, otherwise entitled to compensation from
the United States or from any agency or instrumentality thereof,
such compensation of the payee may be withheld until full reim-
bursement has been accomplished under such regulations as may be
prescribed by the head of the department, branch, or independent
establishment (including corporations) under which such payee is
entitled to receive compensation: Provided, That nothing contained
in this Act shall be construed to repeal or in any way modify exist-
ing laws relating to the collection of the indebtedness of accountable
or disbursing officers.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 453.]
AN ACT
To provide for adjusting the compensation of division superintendents, assistant
division superintendents, assistant superintendents at large, assistant super-
intendent in charge of car construction, chief clerks, assistant chief clerks,
and clerks in charge of sections in offices of division superintendents in the
Railway Mail Service, to correspond to the rates established by the Classifi-
eation Act of 1923, as amended.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Post-
master General is authorized and directed to adjust the compensa-
tion of division superintendents, assistant division superintendents,
assistant superintendents at large, assistant superintendent in charge
of car construction, chief clerks, assistant chief clerks, and clerks
in charge of sections in offices of division superintendents, Railway
Mail Service, to correspond, so far as may be practicable, to the rates
established by the Classification Act of 1923, as amended, for posi-
tions in the departmental service in the District of Columbia. An
appropriation now or hereafter available for the payment of the
compensation of employees in the Railway Mail Service shall be
available for payment of compensation in accordance with the rates
adjusted in accordance with the provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
(CHAPTER 454.]
AN ACT
To authorize the transfer of the customhouse at Salem, Massachusetts, from the
jurisdiction of the Treasury Department to the Department of the Interior.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed
to transfer to the control and jurisdiction of the Secretary of the
Interior the customhouse at Salem, Massachusetts, and such ad-
joining property, both real and personal, as may now be under the
Jurisdiction of the Secretary of the Treasury.
74m CONGRESS. SESS. IL. CHS. 454,462. MAY 26,27, 1936.
Sec. 2. That the Secretary of the Interior be, and he is hereby,
authorized to acquire the above property for the purpose of estab-
lishing same as an historic site or otherwise preserving the buildings
and grounds in connection therewith: Provided, That the Secretary
of the Treasury may retain sufficient space in the building for the
necessary operation of the Bureau of Customs.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 462.]
AN ACT
To provide for the continuation of trading in unlisted securities upon national
securities exchanges, for the registration of over-the-counter brokers and
dealers, for the filing of current information and periodic reports by issuers,
and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That subsection (f)
of section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is amended to
read as follows:
“(f) Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this section, any
national securities exchange, upon application to and approval of
such application by the Commission and subject to the terms and
conditions hereinafter set forth, (1) may continue unlisted trading
privileges to which a security had been admitted on such exchange
prior to March 1, 1934; or (2) may extend unlisted trading privileges
to any security duly listed and registered on any other national
securities exchange, but such unlisted trading privileges shall con-
tinue in effect only so long as such security shall remain listed and
registered on any other national securities exchange; or (3) may
extend unlisted trading privileges to any security in respect of which
there is available from a registration statement and periodic reports
or other data filed pursuant to rules or regulations prescribed by the
Commission under this title or the Securities Act of 1933, as amended,
information substantially equivalent to that available pursuant to
rules or regulations of the Commission in respect of a security duly
listed and registered on a national securities exchange, but such
unlisted trading privileges shall continue in effect only so long as
such a registration statement remains effective and such periodic
reports or other data continue to be so filed.
“No application pursuant to this subsection shall be approved
unless the Commission finds that the continuation or extension 0
unlisted trading privileges pursuant to such application is neces-
sary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of
investors. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to
any security pursuant to clause (2) or (3) of this subsection shall
be approved except after appropriate notice and opportunity for
hearing. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to any
security pursuant to clause (2) or (3) of this subsection shall be
approved unless the applicant exchange shall establish to the satis-
faction of the Commission that there exists in the vicinity of such
exchange sufficiently widespread public distribution of such security
and sufficient public trading activity therein to render the extension
of unlisted trading privileges on such exchange thereto necessary
or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of
investors. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to
any security pursuant to clause (3) of this subsection shall be
approved except upon such terms and conditions as will subject the
issuer thereof, the officers and directors of such issuer, and every
beneficial owner of more than 10 per centum of such security to
1375
Preservation of, as
an historic site.
Proviso.
Space for Customs
Bureau.
May 27, 1936.
[S. 4023.]
[Public, No. 621.]
Securities Exchange
Act of 1934, amend-
ments.
Vol. 48, p. 894; U.S.
C., p. 536.
Trading in unlisted
securities upon na-
tional exchanges.
Continuance of cer-
tain categories.
Security admitted
before March 1, 1934.
Listed and registered
on another exchange.
Equivalent registra-
tion statement avail-
able.
Conditional contin-
uance of privileges.
Notice and hearing.
Establishment to be
in public interest.
Obligations imposed.
1376
Exceptions.
Publication of trans-
actions or quotations;
differentiation between
listed and unlisted se-
curities.
Other than by ticker.
Suspension of privi-
leges when in public
interest, etc.
Termination of privi-
leges; notice and hear-
ing.
Withdrawal of secur-
ity by issuer; exception.
Inadequate distribu-
tion, trading activity,
ete.
Notice, hearing, ete.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 97, 1936.
duties substantially equivalent to the duties which would arise pur-
suant to this title 1f such security were duly listed and registered on
a national securities exchange; except that such terms and conditions
need not be imposed in any case or class of cases in which it shall
appear to the Commission that the public interest and the protection
of investors would nevertheless best be served by such extension of
unlisted trading privileges. In the publication or making available
for publication by any national securities exchange, or by any person
directly or indirectly controlled by such exchange, of quotations or
transactions in securities made or effected upon such exchange, such
exchange or controlled person shall clearly differentiate between
quotations or transactions in listed securities, and quotations or
transactions in securities for which unlisted trading privileges on
such exchange have been continued or extended pursuant to this sub-
section. In the publication or making available for publication of
such quotations or transactions otherwise than by ticker, such
exchange or controlled person shall group under separate headings
(A) quotations or transactions in listed securities, and (B) quota-
tions or transactions in securities for which unlisted trading priv-
ileges on such exchange has been continued or extended pursuant to
this subsection.
“The Commission shall by rules and regulations suspend unlisted
trading privileges in whole or in part for any or all classes of
securities for a period not exceeding twelve months, if it deems such
suspension necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for
the protection of investors or to prevent evasion of the purposes
of this title.
“Unlisted trading privileges continued for any security pursuant
to clause (1) of this subsection shall be terminated by order, after
appropriate notice and opportunity for hearing, if it appears at
any time that such security has been withdrawn from listing on
any exchange by the issuer thereof, unless it shall be established to
the satisfaction of the Commission that such delisting was not
designed to evade the purposes of this title or unless it shall appear
to the Commission that, notwithstanding any such purpose of evasion,
the continuation of such unlisted trading privileges is nevertheless
necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection
of investors. On the application of the issuer of any security for
which unlisted trading privileges on any exchange have been con-
tinued or extended pursuant to this subsection, or of any broker or
dealer who makes or creates a market for such security, or of any
other person having a bona-fide interest in the question of termina-
tion or suspension of such unlisted trading privileges, or on its own
motion, the Commission shall by order terminate, or suspend for a
period not exceeding twelve months, such unlisted trading privileges
for such security if the Commission finds, after appropriate notice
and opportunity for hearing, that by reason of inadequate public
distribution of such security in the vicinity of said exchange, or by
reason of inadequate public trading activity or of the character
of trading therein on said exchange, such termination or suspension
is necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection
of investors.
“In any proceeding under this subsection in which appropriate
notice and opportunity for hearing are required, notice of not less
than ten days to the applicant in such proceeding, to the issuer of
the security involved, to the exchange which is seeking to continue
or extend or has continued or extended unlisted trading privileges for
such security, and to the exchange, if any, on which such security
is listed and registered, shall be deemed adequate notice, and any
broker or dealer who makes or creates a market for such security,
74ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 97, 1936.
and any other Peron having a bona-fide interest in such proceeding,
shall upon application be entitled to be heard.
“Any security for which unlisted trading privileges are continued
or extended pursuant to this subsection shall be deemed to be reg-
istered on a national securities exchange within the meaning of this
title. The powers and duties of the Commission under subsection
(b) of section 19 of this title shall be applicable to the rules of an
exchange in respect of any such security. The Commission may, by
such rules and regulations as it deems necessary or appropriate in
the public interest or for the protection of investors, either uncondi-
tionally or upon specified terms and conditions, or for stated periods,
exempt such securities from the operation of any provision of section
13, 14, or 16 of this title.”
Src. 2. Any application to continue unlisted trading privileges
for any security heretofore filed by any exchange and approved by
the Commission pursuant to clause (1) of subsection (f) of section
12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and rules and regulations
thereunder shall be deemed to have been filed and approved pursuant
to clause (1) of said subsection (f) as amended by section 1 of this
Act.
Src. 3. Section 15 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is
amended to read as follows:
“Src. 15. (a) No broker or dealer (other than one whose business
is exclusively intrastate) shall make use of the mails or of any means
or instrumentality of interstate commerce to effect any transaction in,
or to induce the purchase or sale of, any security (other than an
exempted security or commercial paper, bankers’ acceptances, or
commercial bills) otherwise than on a national securities exchange,
unless such broker or dealer is registered in accordance with sub-
section (b) of this section.
“(b) A broker or dealer may be registered for the purposes of
this section by filing with the Commission an application for regis-
tration, which shall contain such information in such detail as to
such broker or dealer and any person directly or indirectly con-
trolling or controlled by, or under direct or indirect common control
with, such broker or dealer, as the Commission may by rules and
regulations require as necessary or appropriate in the public interest
or for the protection of investors. Except as hereinafter provided,
such registration shall become effective thirty days after the receipt
of such application by the Commission or within such shorter period
of time as the Commission may determine.
“An application for registration of a broker or dealer to be formed
or organized may be made by a broker or dealer to which the broker
or dealer to be formed or organized is to be the successor. Such
application shall contain such information in such detail as to the
applicant and as to the successor and any person directly or indirectly
controlling or controlled by, or under direct or indirect common
control with, the applicant or the successor, as the Commission may
by rules and regulations require as necessary or appropriate in the
public interest or for the protection of investors. Except as herein-
after provided, such registration shall become effective thirty days
after the receipt of such application by the Commission or within
such shorter period of time as the Commission may determine. Such
registration shall terminate on the forty-fifth day after the effective
date thereof, unless prior thereto the successor shall, in accordance
with such rules and regulations as the Commission may prescribe,
adopt such application as its own.
“Tf any amendment to any application for registration pursuant
to this subsection is filed prior to the effective date thereof, such
amendment shall be deemed to have been filed simultaneously with
1377
Securities hereunder
deemed registered.
Commission’s powers
extended.
Vol. 48, p. 898.
U.S. C., p. 538.
Exemptions permit-
ted.
Vol. 48, pp. 894, 895,
896.
Applications to con-
tinue trading privileges
for security heretofore
approved.
Vol. 48, p. 894.
Over-the-counter
markets.
Vol. 48, p. 895; U. 8.
C., p. 536.
Use of the mails,
etc., by unregistered
brokers, etc.
Applications for rezis-
tration; contents.
Effective date.
Application by brok-
er or dealer to be
formed or organized;
contents, etc.
Effective date.
Adoption of applica-
tion by successor.
Amendments to ap-
plications.
1578
Postponement of ef-
fective date by Com-
mission.
Registration; denial
or revocation for speci-
fied causes.
Misleading, etc.,
statements in applica-
tion.
Previous conviction.
Subject to court in-
junction, ete.
Willful violations of
law, ete.
Postponement of ef-
fective date of registra-
tion.
Suspension of regis-
tration.
Withdrawal from reg-
istration by brokers,
ete.
Cancelation of regis-
tration or application
by Commission.
Use of mails, etc., to
induce purchase or sale
by fraudulent, ete., de-
vice.
Definition by Com-
Mission.
74ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 97, 1936.
and as part of such application; except that the Commission may, if
it appears necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the
protection of investors, defer the effective date of any such registra-
tion as thus amended until the thirtieth day after the filing of such
amendment,
“The Commission shall, after appropriate notice and opportunity
for hearing, by order deny registration to or revoke the registration
of any broker or dealer if it finds that such denial or revocation is
in the public interest and that (1) such broker or dealer whether
prior or subsequent to becoming such, or (2) any partner, officer,
director, or branch manager of such broker or dealer (or any person
occupying a similar status or performing similar functions), or any
person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by such broker
or dealer, whether prior or subsequent to becoming such, (A) has
willfully made or caused to be made in any application for regis-
tration pursuant to this subsection or in any document supplemental
thereto or in any proceeding before the Commission with respect
to registration pursuant to this subsection any statement which was
at the time and in the light of the circumstances under which it was
made false or misleading with respect to any material fact; or (B)
has been convicted within ten years preceding the filing of any such
application or at any time thereafter of any felony or misdemeanor
involving the purchase or sale of any security or arising out of the
conduct of the business of a broker or dealer; or (C) is permanently
or temporarily enjoined by order, judgment, or decree of any court
of competent jurisdiction from engaging in or continuing any con-
duct or practice in connection with the purchase or sale of any
security; or (D) has willfully violated any provision of the Securities
Act of 1933, as amended, or of this title, or of any rule or regulation
thereunder. Pending final determination whether any such regis-
tration shall be denied, the Commission may by order postpone the
effective date of such registration for a period not to exceed fifteen
days, but if, after appropriate notice and opportunity for hearing, it
shall appear to the Commission to be necessary or appropriate in
the public interest or for the protection of investors to postpone the
effective date of such registration until final determination, the Com-
mission shall so order. Pending final determination whether any
such registration shall be revoked, the Commission shall by order
suspend such registration if, after appropriate notice and oppor-
tunity for hearing, such suspension shall appear to the Commission
to be necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the pro-
tection of investors. Any registered broker or dealer may, upon
such terms and conditions as the Commission may deem necessary
in the public interest or for the protection of investors, withdraw
from registration by filing a written notice of withdrawal with the
Commission. If the Commission finds that any registered broker or
dealer, or any broker or dealer for whom an application for regis-
tration is pending, is no longer in existence or has ceased to do
business as a broker or dealer, the Commission shall by order cancel
the registration or application of such broker or dealer.
“(c) No broker or dealer shall make use of the mails or of any
means or instrumentality of interstate commerce to effect any trans-
action in, or to induce the purchase or sale of, any security (other
than commercial paper, banker’s acceptances, or commercial bills)
otherwise than on a national securities exchange, by means of any
manipulative, deceptive, or other fraudulent device or contrivance.
The Commission shall, for the purposes of this subsection, by rules
and regulations define such devices or contrivances as are manipu-
lative, deceptive, or otherwise fraudulent.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
Of the sums herein made available under the United States
Shipping Board Bureau, not to exceed an aggregate of $150,000
shall be expended for compensation of regular attorneys employed
on a yearly salary basis, including their clerical and legal assistants.
This title may be cited as the Department of Commerce Appro-
priation Act, 1937.
TITLE IV—DEPARTMENT OF LABOR
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY
Salaries: Secretary of Labor, Assistant Secretary, Second Assist-
ant Secretary, and other personal services in the District of
Columbia, $330,000: Provided, That persons (not exceeding ten
in number) now employed in the determination of wages pursuant
to the provisions of the Act entitled “An Act to amend the Act
approved March 3, 1931, relating to the rate of wages for laborers
and mechanics employed by contractors and subcontractors on public
buildings”, approved August 30, 1935, may be continued in such
employment and paid from the amount herein appropriated without
regard to the provisions of the civil-service laws requiring com-
petitive examinations: Provided further, That said personnel (except
attorneys and referees) shall be required to take nonassembled
examinations.
Promotion of health, safety, employment, and so forth: For
salaries and expenses in connection with the promotion of health,
safety, employment stabilization, and amicable industrial relations
for labor and industry, $140,000, of which amount not to exceed
$83,580 may be expended for personal services in the District of
Columbia.
Contingent expenses: For contingent and miscellaneous expenses
of the offices and bureaus of the Department, for which appropria-
tions for contingent and miscellaneous expenses are not specifically
made, including the purchase of stationery, furniture, and repairs
to the same, carpets, matting, oilcloths, file cases, towels, ice, brooms,
soap, sponges, laundry, street-car fares not exceeding $400; purchase,
exchange, maintenance, and repair of motorcycles and motor trucks;
maintenance, operation, and repair of a motor-propelled passenger-
carrying vehicle, to be used only for official purposes; freight and
express charges; newspaper clippings not to exceed $1,200, postage
to foreign countries, telegraph and telephone service, typewriters,
adding machines, and other labor-saving devices; ee of law
books, books of reference, newspapers and periodicals, not exceeding
$4,500; contract stenographic services; all other necessary miscel-
laneous items and expenses not included in the foregoing; and not
to exceed $25,000 for purchase of certain supplies for the Immigra-
tion and Naturalization Service; in all, $112,500: Provided, That
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C.,
title 41, sec. 5) shall not be construed to apply to any purchase or
service rendered for the Department of Labor when the aggregate
amount involved does not exceed the sum of $100.
Printing and binding: For printing and binding for the Depart-
ment of Labor, including all its bureaus, offices, institutions, and
services located in Washington, District of Columbia, and elsewhere,
$250,000.
Commissioners of conciliation: To enable the Secretary of Labor
to exercise the authority vested in him by section 8 of the Act creat-
ing the Department of Labor (U. S. C., title 5, sec. 611+) and to
1So in original.
43115°—236——17
1347
Compensation of at-
torneys.
Short title.
Department of
Labor.
Office of the Secre-
tary.
Salaries.
Provisos.
Personnel determin-
ing wage rates, re-
tained.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 1011.
Ist
Nonassembled exami-
nations required.
Promotion of health,
safety, employment,
etc.
Contingent expenses,
Proviso.
Minor purchases.
R. S., sec. 3709, p.
733; U.S. C., p. 1803.
Printing and binding.
Commissioners
of conciliation.
Vol. 37, p. 738.
U.S. C., p. 81.
1548
International Labor
Organization, Geneva.
Liaison with; ex-
penses, etc.
Vol. 48, p. 1182.
Printing and bind-
ing, etc.
Vol. 46, p. 818; U.S.
C., p. 45.
Bureau of Labor Sta-
tistics.
Salaries and expenses.
Immigration and
Naturalization Service.
Salaries and expenses;
Deportation, etc., of
aliens.
Vehicles.
Witness fees, etc.
747 CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
appoint commissioners of conciliation, traveling expenses, telegraph
and telephone service, and not to exceed $80,000 for personal services
in the District of Columbia, $408,000.
Liaison with the International Labor Organization, Geneva, Switz-
erland, salaries and expenses: For a United States Labor Commis-
sioner and other personal services in Geneva, Switzerland; com-
pensation of interpreters, translators, and porters; traveling expenses
of employees, including transportation of employees, their families,
and effects, in going to and returning from foreign posts; rent, heat,
light, and fuel; hire, maintenance, and operation of motor-propelled
passenger-carrying vehicles; purchase and exchange of foreign and
domestic books, periodicals, and newspapers; purchase of furniture,
stationery, and supplies; printing and binding; postage; telephone
and other similar expenses, for which payment may be made in
advance; necessary technical or special investigations in connection
with matters falling within the scope of the International Labor
Organization; allowances for living quarters, including heat, fuel,
and light, as authorized by the Act approved June 26, 1930 (U.S. C.,
title 5, sec. 1182), not to exceed $1,700 for any person, and contingent
and such other expenses in the United States and elsewhere as the
Secretary of Labor may deem necessary, fiscal year 1937, $28,000.
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS
Salaries and expenses: For personal services, including temporary
statistical clerks, stenographers, and typewriters in the District of
Columbia, and including also experts and temporary assistants for
field service outside of the District of Columbia; traveling expenses,
including expenses of attendance at meetings concerned with the
work of the Bureau of Labor Statistics when incurred on the writ-
ten authority of the Secretary of Labor; purchase of periodicals,
documents, envelopes, price quotations, and reports and materials for
reports and bulletins of said Bureau, $850,000, of which amount not
to exceed $628,500 may be expended for the salary of the Commis-
sioner and other personal services in the District of Columbia.
IMMIGRATION AND NATURALIZATION SERVICE
Salaries and expenses: For enforcement of the laws regulating
the immigration to, the residence in, and the exclusion and deporta-
tion from the United States of aliens and persons subject to the
Chinese exclusion laws; for enforcement of the laws authorizing
a uniform rule for the naturalization of aliens; salaries, transporta-
tion, traveling, and other expenses of officers, clerks, and other
employees appointed to enforce said laws; care, detention, mainte-
nance, transportation, and traveling expenses incident to the depor-
tation and exclusion of aliens and persons subject to the Chinese
exclusion laws, as authorized by law, in the United States and to,
through, or in foreign countries; purchase of supplies and equip-
ment, including alterations and repairs; purchase, exchange, opera-
tion, maintenance, and repair of motor-propelled vehicles, including
passenger-carrying vehicles for official use in field work; arms,
ammunition and accessories; cost of reports of decisions of the Fed-
eral courts and digests thereof for official use; verifications of legal
papers; refunding of head tax, maintenance bills, and immigration
fines, upon presentation of evidence showing conclusively that col-
lection and deposit was made through error; mileage and fees to
witnesses subpenaed on behalf of the United States, and for all
other expenses necessary to enforce said laws; $9,740,000, all to be
expended under the direction of the Secretary of Labor, of which
——
74tm CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
amount not to exceed $545,000 may be expended for the salary of ,}
the Commissioner of Immigration and Naturalization and_ other
personal services in the District of Columbia, including services of
1349
Services in the Dis-
ict.
persons authorized by law to be detailed there for duty: Provided, {rovisos.
That not to exceed $45,000 of the sum herein appropriated shall be
available for the purchase, including exchange, of motor-propelled
passenger-carrying vehicles: Provided further, That the Commis- , Privately owned
sioner of Immigration and Naturalization, with the approval of the
Secretary of Labor, may contract with officers and employees sta-
tioned outside of the District of Columbia, whose salaries are pay-
able from this appropriation, for the use, on official business outside
of the District of Columbia, of privately owned horses, and the
consideration agreed upon shall be payable from the funds herein
appropriated: Provided further, That not to exceed $36,000 of the
total amount herein appropriated shall be available for allowances
for living quarters, including heat, fuel, and light, as authorized by
the Act approved June 26, 1930 (U.S. C., title 5, sec. 118a), not
to exceed $1,700 for any person: Provided further, That $100,000
of the amount herein appropriated shall be available only for the
payment of extra compensation for overtime services of inspectors
and employees of the Immigration and Naturalization Service for
which the United States receives reimbursement in accordance with
the provisions of the Act of March 2, 1931 (U.S. C., title 8, secs.
109a and 109b): Provided further, That not to exceed $400 of the
sum herein appropriated may be expended for attendance at meet-
ings concerned with the naturalization of aliens when incurred on
the written authority of the Secretary of Labor: Provided further,
Allowances for living
quarters, etc.
Vol. 46, p. 818.
U.8. C., p. 45.
Overtime services of
inspectors, etc.
Vol. 46, p. 1467.
U.S. C., p. 184.
Attendance at meet-
ings.
Pay of assistants to
That no part of this appropriation shall be available for the com- G&Xs % courts forbid-
pensation of assistants to clerks of United States courts: And pro-
vided further, That not to exceed $10,000 of the sum herein appro-
priated may be expended for payment of rewards, when specifically
authorized by the Secretary of Labor, for information leading to
the detection, arrest, or conviction of persons violating the immi-
gration or naturalization laws.
Immigration stations: For remodeling, repairing (including repairs
to the ferryboat, Ellis Island), renovating buildings, and purchase of
equipment, $110,000.
CHILDREN’S BUREAU
Salaries and expenses: For expenses of investigating and report-
ing upon matters pertaining to the welfare of children and child
life, and especially to investigate the questions of infant mortality;
personal services, including experts and temporary assistants;
traveling expenses, including not to exceed $3,000 for expenses of
attendance at meetings for the promotion of child welfare when
incurred on the written authority of the Secretary of Labor; pur-
chase of reports and material for the publications of the Children’s
Bureau and for reprints from State, city, and private publications
for distribution when said reprints can be procured more cheaply
than they can be printed by the Government, and other necessary
expenses, $400,000, of which amount not to exceed $313,500 may be
expended for personal services in the District of Columbia.
MATERNAL AND CHILD WELFARE
Payment of rewards.
Immigration stations.
Children’s Bureau.
Salaries and expenses.
Investigations.
Maternal and child
welfare.
Salaries and expenses: For all authorized and necessary adminis-
trative expenses of the Children’s Bureau in performing the duties s
Salaries and expenses.
Public Laws, Ist
eSS., P. 629.
imposed upon it by title V of the Social Security Act, approved 9,\)°: C+ Supp. 1, P-
August 14, 1935, including personal services, rentals, repairs, and
1350
Social Security Act.
Payments under
State plans,
Maternal and child-
health services, grants
to States.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 629.
Ist
Provisos.
Basis of allotments,
937.
Supplemental aid not
included.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 630.
Ist
Services for crippled
children, grants to
States.
Public Laws, Ist
sess., p. 631.
Proviso.
Basis of allotments,
1937.
Child-welfare sery-
ices, grants to States.
Public Laws, 1st
sess., D. 633.
Proviso.
Basis of allotments,
1937.
Women’s Bureau.
Salaries and expenses,
Vol. 41, p. 987; U.
S. C., p. 1320.
74tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
alterations to buildings, in the District of Columbia and elsewhere;
printing and binding; supplies; services; equipment; newspapers,
books of reference, periodicals, and press clippings; travel expenses
including expenses of attendance at meetings and attendance o
cooperating officials and consultants at conferences when called by
the Children’s Bureau with the approval of the Secretary of Labor,
$299,000.
In the administration of title V of the Social Security Act for
the fiscal year 1937, payments to States for any quarter of the fiscal
year 1937 under parts 1 and 2 may be made with respect to any
State plan approved under such respective parts by the Chief of the
Children’s Bureau prior to or during such quarter, but no such
payment shall be made with respect to any plan for any period prior
to the quarter in which such plan was submitted to the Chief of the
Children’s Bureau for approval.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR MATERNAL AND CHILD-HEALTH SERVICES
Grants to States for maternal and child-health services, Chil-
dren’s Bureau: For grants to States for the purpose of enabling
each State to extend and improve services for promoting the health
of mothers and children, as authorized in title V, part 1, of the
Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49 Stat. 629-631),
$2,820,000: Provided, That in carrying out such part 1, the allot-
ments to States and expenditures thereunder for the fiscal year 1937
are authorized to be made on the basis of a total of $3,800,000 for
all States (as defined in such Act): Provided further, That any
allotment to a State pursuant to section 502 (b) shall not be included
in computing for the purposes of subsections (a) and (b) of section
504 an amount expended or estimated to be expended by the State.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR SERVICES FOR CRIPPLED CHILDREN
Grants to States for services for crippled children, Children’s
Bureau: For the purpose of enabling each State to extend and
improve services for crippled children, as authorized in title V,
part 2, of the Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49
Stat., 631-633), $2,150,000: Provided, That in carrying out such
part 2, the allotments to States (as defined in such Act) and expendi-
tures thereunder for the fiscal year 1937 are authorized to be made
on the basis of a total of $2,850,000 for all States.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR CHILD-WELFARE SERVICES
Grants to States for child-welfare services, Children’s Bureau:
For grants to States for the purpose of enabling the United States,
through the Children’s Bureau, to cooperate with State public-
welfare agencies in establishing, extending, and strengthening pub-
lic-welfare services for the care of homeless or neglected children,
or children in danger of becoming delinquent, as authorized in title
V, part 3, of the Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49
Stat. 633), $1,200,000: Provided, That in carrying out such part 3,
the allotments to States (as defined in such Act) and expenditures
thereunder for the fiscal year 1937 are authorized to be made on
the basis of a total of $1,500,000 for all States,
WOMEN’S BUREAU
Salaries and expenses: For carrying out the provisions of the Act
entitled “An Act to establish in the Department of Labor a bureau
to be known as the Women’s Bureau”, approved June 5, 1920
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
(U.S. C., title 29, secs 11-16), including personal services in the Dis-
trict of Columbia, not to exceed $134,500; purchase of material for
reports and educational exhibits, and traveling expenses, $153,200,
of which sum not to exceed $3,000 shall be available for expenses
of attendance at meetings concerned with the work of said bureau
when incurred on the written authority of the Secretary of Labor.
UNITED STATES EMPLOYMENT SERVICE
For carrying out the provisions of the Act entitled “An Act to
provide for the establishment of a national employment system
and for cooperation with the States in the promotion of such sys-
tem, and for other purposes”, approved June 6, 1933; personal
services and rent in the District of Columbia and elsewhere; travel-
ing expenses, including expenses of attendance at meetings con-
cerned with the work of the United States Employment Service when
specifically authorized by the Secretary of Labor; law books, books
of reference, newspapers and periodicals, printing and binding,
supplies and equipment, telegraph and telephone service, and mis-
cellaneous expenses, $2,785,000, of which amount not to exceed
$885,000 shall be available for the Veterans’ Placement Service, the
Farm Placement Service, District of Columbia Public Employment
Center, and all other purposes, including not to exceed $197,500 for
personal services in the Department in the District of Columbia, and
the remainder shall be available for payment to the several States
in accordance with the provisions of the said Act of June 6, 1933,
as amended: Provided, That apportionments for the fiscal year
1937 shall be on the basis of a total apportionment to all States of
$3,000,000, and in order to supply the Government’s apportionments
to States under such Act during the fiscal years 1936 and 1937,
which are not capable of being supplied under the foregoing appro-
priation, there is hereby appropriated so much as may be necessary
to supply such apportionments, but not more than $1,675,000,
UNITED STATES HOUSING CORPORATION
Salaries and expenses: For officers, clerks, and other employees,
and for contingent and miscellaneous expenses, in the District of
Columbia and elsewhere, including blank books, maps, stationery,
file cases, towels, ice, brooms, soap, freight and express charges, com-
munication service, travel expense, printing and binding not to exceed
$100, and all other miscellaneous items and expenses not included
in the foregoing and necessary to collect and account for the receipts
from the sale of properties and the receipts from the operation of
unsold properties of the United States Housing Corporation, the
Bureau of Industrial Housing and Transportation, property com-
mandeered by the United States through the Secretary of Labor,
and to collect the amounts advanced to transportation facilities and
others; for payment of special assessments and other utility, munici-
pal, State, and county charges or assessments unpaid by purchasers,
and which have been assessed against property in which the United
States Housing Corporation has an interest, and to defray expenses
incident to foreclosing mortgages, conducting sales under deeds of
trust, or reacquiring title or possession of real property under
default proceeding, including attorney fees, witness fees, court costs,
charges, and other miscellaneous expenses; for the maintenance and
repair of houses, buildings, and improvements which are unsold; in
all, $9,000: Provided, That no person shall be employed hereunder at
a rate of compensation exceeding $4,000 per annum, and only one
Employment Service.
Providing for promo-
tion of employment.
Vol. 48, p. 113; U. 8.
C., p. 1324.
Attendance at meet-
ings.
Printing and _ bind-
ing, ete.
Veterans’ Placement
Service, Farm Place-
ment Service, D. C.
Public Employment
Center.
Proviso.
Basis of apportion-
ments, 1937.
United States Hous-
ing Corporation.
Salaries and expenses.
Printing and binding.
Special assessments.
Provisos.
Salary limitation.
1352
Expenditures re-
stricted. 5
Bituminous Coal La-
bor Board.
Salaries and expenses.
Post, p. 1627.
Printing and binding.
Short title
Payment restriction,
persons failing to re-
ceive Senate confirma-
tion.
Payment to cotton
ginners.
Ante, p. 1116.
Cotton Control Act,
administrative ex-
penses.
Vol. 48, p. 598.
Proviso.
Time limitation.
Great Lakes Exposi-
tion.
Participation ex-
penses.
Ante, p. 1243.
May 15, 1936.
[S. J. Res. 231.]
[Pub. Res., No. 91.]
Landing of the
Swedes in Delaware.
Commemorative
coinage, authorized.
Number.
74rm CONGRESS. SESS. I. CHS. 405, 406. MAY 15, 1936.
person may be employed at that rate: Provided further, That no
part of the appropriations heretofore made and available for
expenditure by the United States Housing Corporation shall be
expended for the purposes for which appropriations are made herein.
BITUMINOUS COAL LABOR BOARD
Salaries and expenses: For three Board members and other per-
sonal services in the District of Columbia and elsewhere, and for all
other necessary expenditures of the Bituminous Coal Labor Board
in performing the duties imposed upon said Board by the Bitu-
minous Coal ‘Conservation Act of 1935, including supplies, station-
ery, telephone service, telegrams, furniture, office equipment, travel
expenses, and contract stenographic reporting services, $79,300.
Printing and binding Bituminous Coal Labor Board: For ate
printing and binding for the Bituminous Coal Labor Board, $2,5
This title may be cited as the Department of Labor Appropr en
Act, 19387.
Src. 2. No part of the money appropriated under this Act shall be
paid to any person for the filling of any position for which he or she
has been nominated after the Senate has voted not to 4 approve of the
nomination of said person.
Sec. 3. That in passing upon applications made for compensation
under the provisions of the item for “Payment to cotton ginners”
contained in Title I of the Supplemental Appropriation Act, fiscal
year 1936 (Public Law Numbered 440, Seventy-fourth Congress),
and upon payments pursuant to such applications, the Secretary of
Agriculture and the Comptroller General of the United States are
authorized and directed, in the interest of saving as much adminis-
trative expense as possible and in order to avoid delay in passing
upon such applications, to assume that the additional expenses
incurred in connection with the administration of the Act of April
21, 1934 (491 Stat., 598-607), equaled 25 cents per bale, counting
round bales as half bales, during the period June 1, 1935, to February
10, 1936, inclusive: Provided, That no payment shall be made on any
application for such compensation unless the application is filed prior
to September 1, 1936.
Src. 4. Great Lakes Exposition : For the expenses of the participa-
tion of the Government of the United States in the Great Lakes
Exposition as provided for by Senate Joint Resolution Numbered
233, including the reimbursement of other appropriations from which
payments may have been made for any of the purposes therein
specified, to be immediately available, $275,000.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
[CHAPTER 406.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To authorize the coinage of 50-cent pieces in commemoration of the three-
hundredth anniversary of the landing of the Swedes in Delaware.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That in commemoration
of the three-hundredth anniversary of the landing of the Swedes in
Delaware there shall be coined at a mint of the United States to be
designated by the Director of the Mint not less than twenty-five
thousand aie 50-cent pieces of standard size, weight, and composi-
tion and of a special appropriate single design, containing some
1So in original.
74tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 406, 407. MAY 15, 1936.
recognized emblem of the State of Delaware, to be fixed by the Direc-
tor of the Mint, with the approval of the Secretary of the Treasury,
but the United States shall not be subject to the expense of making the
necessary dies and other preparations for this coinage.
Sec. 2. The coins herein authorized shall bear the date 1936, irre-
spective of the year in which they are minted or issued, shall be legal
tender in any payment to the amount of their face value, and shall be
issued only upon the request of the president of the Delaware Swed-
ish Tercentenary Commission upon payment by him of the par value
of such coins, but not less than twenty-five thousand such coins shall
be issued to him at any one time and no such coins shall be issued
after the expiration of one year after the date of enactment of this
Act. Such coins may be disposed of at par or at a premium by such
commission, and the net proceeds shall be used by it in defraying the
expenses incidental and appropriate to the commemoration of such
event.
Src. 3. All laws now in force relating to the subsidiary silver coins
of the United States and the coining or striking of the same, regulat-
ing and guarding the process of coinage, providing for the purchase
of material, and for the transportation, distribution, and redemption
of coins, for the prevention of debasement or counterfeiting, for the
security of the coins, or for any other purposes, whether such laws
are penal or otherwise, shall, so far as applicable, apply to the coinage
herein authorized.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
[CHAPTER 407.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To provide for participation by the United States in an Inter-American Confer-
ence to be held at Buenos Aires, Argentina, or at the capital of another American
republic, in 1936.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any money not other-
wise appropriated, the sum of $75,000 to be used for participation
by the United States in an Inter-American Conference, in pursuance
of and for the purposes set forth in a letter from the President of
the United States dated January 30, 1936, to be held at Buenos
Aires, Argentina, or at the capital of another American republic, in
1936, including personal services in the District of Columbia or
elsewhere without reference to the Classification Act of 1923, as
amended; stenographic reporting and other services by contract if
deemed necessary without regard to section 3709 of the Revised
Statutes (U. S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent; traveling expenses (and
by indirect routes and by airplane if specifically authorized by the
Secretary of State); hire, maintenance, and operation of motor-
propelled passenger-carrying vehicles; equipment, purchase of
necessary books, documents, newspapers, periodicals, and maps; sta-
tionery; official cards, entertainment; printing and binding; and
such other expenses as may be authorized by the Secretary of State,
including the reimbursement of other appropriations from which
payments may have been made for any of the purposes herein
specified, to be expended under the direction of the Secretary of
State, fiscal year 1936, to remain available until June 30, 1937.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
1355
No Federal expense
for dies, etc.
Date, issue, etc.
Disposal.
Coinage laws appli-
cable.
May 15, 1936.
[S. J. Res. 248.]
[Pub. Res., No. 92.]
Inter-American Con-
ference, 1936.
Appropriation au-
thorized for participa-
tion expenses.
Ante, p. 1319.
U.S. C., p. 85.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S., sec. 3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Vehicles.
Printing and binding.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
1354
May 18, 1936.
[H.'R. 10589.]
[Publie, No. 600.]
Missouri River.
Bridge construction
at Niobrara, Nebr.
Textual changes.
Public Laws,
Sess., p. 1074.
Amendment.
May 18, 1936.
[H. R. 10847.]
ist
[Public, No. 601.]
New York Ci
Naw
ty,
Acquisition cf land
near, for cemeterial
purposes, authorized.
Appropriation
thorized.
Post, p. 1641.
au-
74tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 420, 421. MAY 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 420.]
AN ACT
To amend section 32 of the Act entitled ““An Act to authorize the construction
of certain bridges and to extend the times for commencing and/or completing
the construction of other bridges over the navigable waters of the United
States, and for other purposes’’, approved August 30, 1935.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That subsection (a)
of section 32 of the Act entitled “An Act to authorize the construction
of certain bridges and to extend the times for commencing and/or
completing the construction of other bridges over the navigable waters
of the United States, and for other purposes”, approved August 30,
1935, is amended by striking out “the village board of the village
of Niobrara, county of Knox, State of Nebraska”, and inserting in
lieu thereof the following: “the county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
Sec. 2. Subsection (b) of such section 32 is amended by striking
out “the Village Board of the Village of Niobrara, county of Knox,
State of Nebraska”, and inserting in lieu thereof the following: “the
county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
Sec. 3. (a) Subsection (c) of such section 32 is amended by strik-
ing out “The said Villiage Board of the Villiage of Niobrara, county
of Knox, State of Nebraska”, and inserting in lieu thereof the
following: “The said county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
(b) Subsection (c) of such section 32 is further amended by strik-
ing out “to fix the charge tolls for transit” and inserting in lieu
thereof the following: “to fix and charge tolls for transit”.
Sec. 4. Subsection (d) of such section 32 is amended by striking
out “After a sinking sufficient for amortization shall have been so
provided, said bridge” and inserting in lieu thereof the following:
“After a sinking fund sufficient for such amortization shall have been
so provided, said bridge”.
Sec. 5. The right to alter, amend, or repeal this Act is hereby
expressly reserved.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 421.]
AN ACT
To authorize the acquisition of land for cemeterial purposes in the vicinity of
New York City, New York.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of War be, and he is hereby, authorized to acquire by purchase,
condemnation, or otherwise such suitable lands in the vicinity of New
York City as in his judgment are required for enlargement of exist-
ing national cemetery facilities, and the sum of $250,000, or so much
thereof as may be necessary, is hereby authorized to be appropriated
from any funds in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, which
sum shall remain available until expended.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
74m CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 422, 423. MAY 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 422.]
AN ACT
To amend section 5 of the Act of March 2, 1919, generally known as the “War
Minerals Relief Statutes.”
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in any claim
that has heretofore been filed within the time and in the manner
provided by the Act approved March 2, 1919 (40 Stat. 1272), as
amended, generally referred to asthe “War Minerals Relief Statutes”,
in which the Supreme Court of the District of Columbia under the
authority conferred upon said court by the Act approved February
13, 1929 (45 Stat. 1166), has adjudged or decreed interest payments
or obligations to be losses reimbursable within the meaning of the
Act of March 2, 1919 (40 Stat. 1272), as amended, the Secretary of
the Interior shall open or reopen such claim and include in his
adjustments and payments of losses, interest which has been paid or
has accrued to the date of approval of this Act: Provided, however,
That such losses shall be shown to the satisfaction of the Secretary
of the Interior as a matter of fact to be the result of a legal obliga-
tion incurred within the statutory period as provided in said Act of
March 2, 1919: And provided further, That the sum paid in satisfy-
ing said claims shall not exceed in total $1,250,000. It is also
provided that all settlements under this Act and pursuant to its
provisions shall constitute full and complete discharge of all obliga-
tions of the United States accruing under the War Minerals Act
and Acts amendatory thereof.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 423.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To provide for participation by the United States in the Ninth International
Congress of Military Medicine and Pharmacy in Rumania, in 1937; and to
authorize and request the President of the United States to invite the Inter-
national Congress of Military Medicine and Pharmacy to hold its tenth
congress in the United States in 1939, and to invite foreign countries to par-
ticipate in that congress.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That there is hereby
authorized to be appropriated, out of any money in the Treasury not
otherwise appropriated, the sum of $11,500, or so much thereof as
may be necessary, for the expenses of participation by the United
States in the Ninth International Congress of Military Medicine and
Pharmacy to be held in Rumania in 1937, including personal services
in the District of Columbia or elsewhere without reference to the
Classification Act of 1923, as amended; stenographic reporting and
other services by contract if deemed necessary without regard to
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes (U.S. C., title 41, sec. 5) ; rent;
traveling expenses; purchase of necessary books, documents, news-
papers, periodicals, and maps; stationery; official cards; entertain-
ment; printing and binding, including the payment of not to exceed
$500 to the Association of Military Surgeons of the United States
toward the cost of printing the report of the American Delegation
to the Ninth Congress; and such other expenses as may be authorized
by the Secretary of State, including the reimbursement of other
appropriations from which payments may have been made for any
of the purposes herein specified, to be expended under the direction
of the Secretary of State.
May 18, 1936.
[S . 1432.]
[Public, No. 602.]
“War Minerals Re-
lief Statutes”, amend-
mInent.
Vol. 40, p. 1272; Vol.
42, p. 322; Vol. 45, p.
1166.
Post, p. 1619.
Interest payments on
certain claims under.
Provisos.
Condition.
Limitation on total
amount.
Settlements; dis-
charge of liability.
May 18, 1936.
[H. J. Res. 538.]
[Pub. Res., No. 93.]
Ninth International
Congress of Military
Medicine and Phar-
macy, Rumania, 1937.
Sum authorized for
participation expenses.
Post, p. 1634.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S.,sec.3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Printing and bind-
ing; report of Ameri-
can Delegation.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
1556
Invitation to hold
10th congress in United
States; foreign govern-
ments to participate.
May 18, 1936.
[H. J. Res. 547.]
[Pub. Res., No. 94.]
Great Lakes Exposi-
tion, Cleveland, Ohio.
Dutiable articles, im-
ported for exhibition
purposes, etc., ad-
mitted free, under regu-
lations.
Ante, pp. 1243, 1352.
Sales permitted.
Provisos.
Duty on articles
withdrawn.
Deterioration allow-
ance.
Marking require-
ments.
Articles abandoned.
‘Transfer privileges.
Exposition deemed
sole consignee of mer-
chandise.
Incurred Federal ex-
penses reimbursable.
747Ta CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS, 423, 424. MAY 18, 1936.
Sec. 2. That the President be, and he is hereby, authorized and
requested to extend to the International Congress of Military Medi-
cine and Pharmacy an invitation to hold its tenth congress in the
United States in 1939, and to invite foreign governments to partici-
pate in that congress.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 424.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
Providing for the importation of articles free from tariff or customs duty for the
purpose of exhibition at Great Lakes Exposition to be held at Cleveland,
Ohio, beginning in June 1936, and for other purposes.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That all articles which
shall be imported from foreign countries for the purpose of exhibi-
tion at the international exposition to be held at Cleveland, Ohio,
beginning in June 1936, by Great Lakes Exposition, or for use in
constructing, installing, or maintaining foreign buildings, or exhibits
at the said exhibition, upon which articles there shall be a tariff or
customs duty shall be admitted without payment of such tariff, cus-
toms duty, fees, or charges under such regulations as the Secretary of
the Treasury shall prescribe; but it shall be lawful at any time during
or within three months after the close of the said exposition to sell
within the area of the exposition any articles provided for herein,
subject to such regulations for the security of the revenue and for the
collection of import duties as the Secretary of the Treasury shall pre-
scribe: Provided, That all such articles, when withdrawn for con-
sumption or use in the United States, shall be subject to the duties,
if any, imposed upon such articles by the revenue laws in force at the
date of their withdrawal; and on such articles which shall have
suffered diminution or deterioration from incidental handling or
exposure the duties, 1f payable, shall be assessed according to the
appraised value at the time of withdrawal from entry hereunder for
consumption or entry under the general tariff law: Provided further,
That imported articles provided for herein shall not be subject to any
marking requirements of the general tariff laws, except when aia
articles are withdrawn for consumption or use in the United States,
in which case they shall not be released from customs custody until
properly marked, but no additional duty shall be assessed because
such articles were not sufficiently marked when imported into the
United States: Provided further, That at any time during or within
three months after the close of the exposition any article entered
hereunder may be abandoned to the Government or destroyed under
customs supervision, whereupon any duties on such article shall be
remitted: Provided further, That articles which have been admitted
without payment of duty for exhibition under any tariff law and
which have remained in continuous customs custody or under a cus-
toms exhibition bond and imported articles in bonded warehouses
under the general tariff law may be accorded the privilege of trans-
fer to and entry for exhibition at the said exposition under such
regulations as the Secretary of the Treasury shall prescribe: And
provided further, That Great Lakes Exposition shall be deemed, for
customs purposes only, to be the sole consignee of all merchandise
imported under the provisions of this Act, and that the actual and
necessary customs charges for labor, services, and other expenses in
connection with the entry, examination, appraisement, release, or
custody, together with the necessary charges for salaries of customs
officers and employees in connection with the supervision, custody of,
7414 CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 424, 425, 497.
and accounting for articles imported under the provisions of this Act,
shall be reimbursed by Great Lakes Exposition to the Government.
of the United States under regulations to be prescribed by the Secre-
tary of the Treasury, and that receipts from such reimbursements
shall be deposited as refunds to the appropriation from which paid,
in the manner provided for in section 524, Tariff Act of 1930,
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 425.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To authorize an appropriation for the expenses of participation by the United
States in a conference at Brussels to revise the Convention for the Protection
of Literary and Artistic Works concluded at Bern, September 9, 1886, and
revised at Rome, June 2, 1928.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any money in the
Treasury not otherwise appropriated, the sum of $6,500, or so much
thereof as may be necessary, for the expenses of participation by
the United States in the conference to convene at Brussels, Belgium,
for the purpose of revising the Convention for the Protection of
Literary and Artistic Works, concluded at Bern, September 9, 1886,
and revised at Rome, June 2, 1928, including personal services in
the District of Columbia and elsewhere without reference to the
Classification Act of 1923, as amended; stenographic, reporting, and
other services by contract, if deemed necessary, without regard to
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes (U.S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent;
traveling expenses; purchases of necessary books, documents, news-
papers, periodicals, and maps; stationery; official cards; entertain-
ment; printing and binding; and such other expenses as may be
authorized by the Secretary of State, including the reimbursement
of other appropriations from which payments may have been made
for any of the purposes herein specified, to be expended under the
direction of the Secretary of State.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 427.]
AN ACT
To authorize certain officers of the United States Navy, officers and enlisted men
of the Marine Corps, and officers and enlisted men of the United States Army
to accept such medals, orders, diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have
been tendered them by foreign governments in appreciation of services rendered.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the following-
named officers of the United States Navy, and officers and enlisted
men of the Marine Corps, are hereby authorized to accept such
medals, orders, diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have been
tendered them by foreign governments in appreciation of services
rendered :
United States Navy: Admiral William H. Standley; Rear Admiral
David F. Sellers; Rear Admiral Wat T. Cluverius; Rear Admiral
Hayne Ellis; Rear Admiral Ernest J. King; Rear Admiral Louis
M. Nulton, retired; Rear’ Admiral Yates Stirling, Junior; Rear
Admiral John R. Y. Blakely, retired; Rear Admiral Edward H.
Campbell; Rear Admiral Walter N. Vernou; Rear Admiral Harley
H. Christy; Rear Admiral Henry V. Butler; Rear Admiral Walter
S. Crosley; Rear Admiral Frank B. Upham; Rear Admiral Edward
MAY 18, 19, 1938.
1357
Deposit of, as re-
funds.
Vol. 46, p. 741.
U.S. C., p. 894.
May 18, 1936.
__ [H. J. Res. 569.]
[Pub. Res., No. 95.]
Convention for the
Protection of Literary
and Artistic Works,
conlerenee for revision
oO
Sum authorized for
participation expenses.
Post, p. 1633.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S., sec. 3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
May 19, 1936.
___[S..1975.]
[Public, No. 603.]
Navy, Marine Corps,
and Army.
Acceptance of certain
decorations, etc., ten-
dered by foreign gov-
ernments to designated
officers, ete., authorized.
Navy.
1358
Navy—Continued.
74ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
ee Fenner; Rear Admiral George T. Pettengill; Rear Admiral Clark
. Woodward; Rear Admiral William H. Allen; Captain Reuben
3 Coffey; Captain Vaughn K. Coman; Captain Gordon W. Haines;
Captain Alfred G. Howe; Captain Victor A. Kimberly; Captain
David M. Le Breton; Captain William R. Sayles; Captain Halsey
Powell; Captain Willis W. Bradley, Junior; Captain Frank H.
Roberts; Captain Arthur B. Cook; Captain Benyaurd B. Wygent;
Captain "Rufus F. Zogbaum, Junior; Captain Frank Jack Fletcher;
Captain Matthias E. “Manly ; Captain Alfred W. Brown; Captain
Augustine T. Beauregard; Captain Harold M. Bemis; Captain Her-
bert H. Michael ; Captain MacGillivray Milne; Captain Milo F.
Draemel ; Captain Edward A. Evers, Naval Reserve; Captain
Edward TT. Hooper, Supply Corps; Captain Holden C. Richardson,
Construction Corps, retired ; Captain Kent C. Melhorn, Medical
Corps; Captain Lucius W. Johnson, Medical Corps; Commander
Ernest L. Gunther; Commander Hamilton V. Bryan; Commander
John D. Price; Commander Harold C. Train; Commander Ward W.
Waddell ; Commander William W. Smith; Commander Calvin N.
Cobb; Commander Patrick N. L. Bellinger; Commander Harry G.
Patr ick; Commander Earl W. Spencer; Commander William H.
Pashley ; Commander Aaron S. Merrill; Commander Douglas W.
Fuller; Commander Ralph F. Wood; Commander Joel T. Boone,
Medical Corps; Commander Joseph Mgt MeMullin, Medical Corps;
Commander Gordon D. Hale, Medical Corps; Commander Walter
C. Espech, Medical Corps; Commander Maurice M. Witherspoon,
Chaplain Corps; Commander Bernhard H. Bieri; Lieutenant Com-
mander Albert S. Marley; Lieutenant Commander Charles G.
Moore, Junior; Lieutenant Commander John J. Carrick, Naval
Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Emil J. Carroll, Naval Reserve;
Lieutenant Commander Francis G. Donebrink; Lieutenant Com-
mander Victor C. Barringer, Junior; Lieutenant Commander Ralph
A. Ofstie; Lieutenant Commander Lucien B. Green, Second, retired ;
Lieutenant Commander Dallas D. Dupre; Lieutenant Commander
Harold B. Crow, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Edward
O. McDonnell, Naval Reserve ; Lieutenant Commander Schuyler F.
Cumings, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Charles W. Steven-
son, Supply Corps; Lieutenant Commander Charles R. O’Leary,
Supply Corps; Lieutenant Commander Hardy V. Hughens, Medical
Corps; Lieutenant Commander Thomas L. Morrow, Medical Corps;
Lieutenant Commander Louis EF. Mueller, Medical Corps; Lieu.
tenant Commander Victor B. Riden, Medical Corps; Lieutenant
Commander William M. H. Turville, Medical Corps; Lieutenant
Commander Horace R. Boone, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Com-
mander Warwick T. Brown, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander
Vincent Hernandez, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Harry
S. Harding, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Robert W. Wim-
berly, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Hillard L. Weer,
Medical Corps; Lieutenant Robert F. Hickey; Lieutenant Harvey
R. Bowes; Lieutenant Buell F. Brandt; Lieutenant George H.
De Baun; Lieutenant John M. Brewster ; Lieutenant Curry E.
Eason; Lieutenant Maxwell B. Saben; Lieutenant John F, Gillon;
Lieutenant Colonel H. Mansfield, Chaplain Corps; Lieutenant
Joseph O. Saurette; Lieutenant Robert H. Smith; Lieutenant Don-
ald R. Tallman; Lieutenant John Davis, retired; Lieutenant Walter
L. Bach, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Walter G. Kilbury, Medical
Corps; Lieutenant Hugh E. Mouldin, Dental Corps; Lieutenant
(Junior Grade) James H. Taylor; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Frank E. Latauzo, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Robert C. Douthat, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
74ru CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
Freeman C. Harris, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Warren G. Wieand, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
George H. Mills, Dental Corps; Ensign Howard F. Hozey, Naval
Reserve Force; Chief Boatswain William C. Baker; Chief Pharma-
cist Roy Aikman; Chief Pharmacist Leon H. French.
United States Marine Corps: Major General James C. Breckin-
ridge; Brigadier General George Richards; Brigadier General Rufus
M. Lane, retired; Brigadier General Hugh Matthews; Brigadier
General Randolph C. Barkeley; Brigadier General Frederick L.
Bradman; Brigadier General Louis McCarty Little; Brigadier Gen-
eral Douglas C. McDougal; Brigadier General Richard T, Williams;
Colonel Richard M. Cutts; Colonel Presley M. Rixey, Junior; Colonel
Seth Williams; Colonel James J. Meade; Colonel Clayton S. Vogel;
Colonel Calvin B. Matthews; Lieutenant Colonel Lauren S. Willis,
retired; Lieutenant Colonel Jeter R. Horton; Lieutenant Colonel
Franklin B. Garrett; Lieutenant Colonel Calhoun Ancrum; Lieu-
tenant Colonel William S. Wise; Lieutenant Colonel William B.
Smith; Lieutenant Colonel Charles F. M. Price; Lieutenant Colonel
Ross E. Rosell; Lieutenant Colonel John Marston; Lieutenant
Colonel Julian C. Smith; Lieutenant Colonel Roy E. Geiger; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Harry Schmidt; Lieutenant Colonel De Witt Peck;
Lieutenant Colonel William B. Sullivan; Lieutenant Colonel Henry
L. Larsen; Lieutenant Colonel Arnold W. Jacobsen; Major Thomas
S. Clarke; Major Joseph C. Fegan; Major Frederick R. Hoyt;
Major Marion B. Humphrey; Major Allen H. Turnage; Major
Louis M. Bourne; Major Matthew 8. Kingman; Major John F. S.
Norris; Major Anderson C. Deering; Major Ralph J. Mitchell;
Major Samuel L. Howard; Major Oscar R. Cauldwell; Major
Thomas E. Watson; Major Walter C. Sheard; Major Roger W.
Peard; Major Lloyd L. Leach; Major Raphael Griffin; Major
Thomas P. Cheatham; Major Louis W. Whaley; Major Leroy P.
Hunt; Major Leo D. Merale; Major Lemuel C. Shepherd, Junior;
Major James E. Davis; Major Alphonse De Carre; Major James T.
Moore; Major Alfred N. Noble; Major Franklin A. Hart; Major
William N. Beat; Major Herbert Hardy; Major Ralph E. West;
Captain Graves B. Erskine; Captain Robert Yowell; Captain
Francis P. Mulcahy; Captain Maurice C. Holmes; Captain Eugene
F. C. Collier; Captain Otto Salzman; Captain Carl S. Schmidt;
Captain Harry W. Gamble; Captain Roscoe Arnett; Captain
Maurice S. Gregory; Captain James P. Smith; Captain Edward G.
Kuefe; Captain Max Cox; Captain Oliver P. Smith; Captain Joseph
O. Ward; Captain Edward L. Durvall, Junior; Captain John C.
Wood; Captain Jacob Lienhard; Captain Victor F. Bleasdale; Cap-
tain Leonard H. Rea; Captain James P. Schwerin; Captain John
H. Parker; Captain Walter S. Casper; Captain Willett Elmore;
Captain Benjamin W. Gally; Captain James A. Nixson, Captain
Frederick M. Howard; Captain Lee W. Brown; Captain Harold G.
Major; Captain Bernard Dubel; Captain Hamilton M. H. Fleming;
Captain Claude A. Phillips; Captain Harold W. Whitney; Captain
Harry Paul; Captain Frank N. Costtge; Captain Byron F. Johnson ;
Captain William J. Livingston; Captain George E. Monson; Captain
Amor L. Sims; Captain George R. Rowen; Captain Brady L. Vogt;
Captain Clinton W. McLeod; Captain Roy C. Swick; Captain
Reuben B. Price; Captain William J. Whaling; Captain Frank N.
Gilman; Captain Monitor Watchman; Captain George L. Maynard;
Captain Benjamin W. Atkinson; Captain William L. Bales; Cap-
tain Frederick C. Diebush; Captain Terrell J. Crawford; Captain
John T. Walker; Captain William P. T. Hill; Captain Jesse A.
Nelson; Captain Henry A. Carr; Captain Wilham C. Hall;
1359
Navy—Continued,
Marine Corps.
1360
7474 CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 19286.
Marine Corps—Con- Captain Edwin J. Farrell; Captain Louis E. Woods; Captain
tinued.
Augustus H. Fricke; Captain William S. Fellers; Captain Herbert
S. Keimling; Captain Walter W. Wensinger; Captain Ernest E.
Lincort; First Lieutenant William L. McKoattrick; First Lieutenant
Max D. Smith; First Lieutenant David A. Stafford; First Lieu-
tenant Roy W. Conkey; First Lieutenant Harold N. Rosecrans;
First Lieutenant Horace D. Palmer; First Lieutenant Hayne D.
Royden; First Lieutenant Christian F. Schilt; First Lieutenant
James H. Strother; First Lieutenant Ivan W. Miller; First Lieu-
tenant John C. McQueen; First Lieutenant William W. Davies;
First Lieutenant James W. Smith; First Lieutenant Lewis A. Hohn;
First Lieutenant Lucian C. Whitaker; First Lieutenant Ralph E.
Forsyth; First Lieutenant Pierson E. Conradt; First Lieutenant
Cregon A. Williams; First Lieutenant Evans F. Carlson; First
Lieutenant John W. Lakes; First Lieutenant George F. Good,
Junior; First Lieutenant William R. Hughes; First Lieutenant Max-
well H. Mizell; First Lieutenant Charles W. Kail; First Lieutenant
Lewis D. Fuller; First Lieutenant Joe N. Smith; First Lieutenant
Herbert F. Becker; First Lieutenant Alexander W. Kreiser; First
Lieutenant Edward J. Trumble; First Lieutenant James C. Brauer;
First Lieutenant Francis J. Cunningham; First Lieutenant Paul A.
Putnam; First Lieutenant John S. E. Young; First Lieutenant Wil-
liam D. Saunders; First Lieutenant Lofton R. Henderson; First
Lieutenant John N. Coffman; First Lieutenant Peter P. Schrider;
First Lieutenant Robert L. Griffin; First Lieutenant James P.
Risely; First Lieutenant Samuel S. Jack; First Lieutenant Frank
M. June; First Lieutenant Miles S. Newton; First Lieutenant Ira
L. Kimes; First Lieutenant Reginald H. Ridgely; First Lieutenant
Nols H. Nelson; First Lieutenant Frank C. Dailey; First Lieutenant
Frank H. Wirsig; Second Lieutenant Robert L. Peterson; Second
Lieutenant Kenneth H. Weir; Second Lieutenant Arthur F. Binney;
Second Lieutenant Clovis C. Coffman; Second Lieutenant Perry O.
Parmelee; Second Lieutenant Lester S. Hamel; Second Lieutenant
Ernest E. Pollock; Second Lieutenant Frank C. Croft; Second Lieu-
tenant Newin O. Hammond; Second Lieutenant Frank H. Schwable;
Second Lieutenant Joseph H. Berry; Second Lieutenant James P.
Berkeley; Second Lieutenant Peter A. McDonald; Second Lieu-
tenant Michael M. Mahoney; Second Lieutenant Fred D. Beans;
Second Lieutenant Edgar O. Price; Second Lieutenant Lebulon C.
Hopkins; Second Lieutenant William A. Willis; Second Lieutenant
John M. Davis; Chief Marine Gunner John F. Evans; Chief Marine
Gunner Otho Wiggs; Chief Marine Gunner Jesse W. Stamper;
Chief Marine Gunner Frank F. Putcarmer; Chief Marine Gunner
Frank O. Lundt; Chief Marine Gunner Michael Wederezyk; Chief
Marine Gunner Harold Ogden; Chief Quartermaster Clerk August
F. Schonefeld; Chief Quartermaster Clerk William A. Warrell,
retired; Chief Quartermaster Clerk Albert O. Woodrow; Chief
Quartermaster Clerk Elmer W. Darde; Chief Pay Clerk Benjamin
H. Wolever; Chief Pay Clerk Clinton A. Phillips; Chief Pay Clerk
Timothy E. Murphy; Marine Gunner Kennard F. Bubier; Marine
Gunner Albert 8S. Nunach; Marine Gunner Harry R. Baley; Marine
Gunner Thomas Whitezel, Marine Gunner Walter N. Hendersen;
Marine Gunner Robert S. McCook; Sergeant Major James M.
Barmead; Sergeant Major Carl Svenson; Sergeant Major Charles
A. White; Quartermaster Sergeant Frederick J. Widman; Quarter-
master Sergeant Rupert F. Stone; Master Technical Sergeant Mil-
lard T. Shepard; Paymaster Sergeant Fred Parquette; First Ser-
geant Edwin ©. Clarke; First Sergeant Cecil N. Bietz; First _Ser-
geant Charles H. Gray; First Sergeant William O’Grady; First
(4ta CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
Sergeant Alfred Sylvester; First Sergeant Harry Watkins; First
Sergeant Nicholas M. Griece; First Sergeant Frederick Dalton; |
First Sergeant Louis N. Bertol; First Sergeant Russell O. Beard;
First Sergeant Otto Poland; First Sergeant Richard Shaker; First
Sergeant Charles E. Stuart; First Sergeant Frank Verdier; First
Sergeant Curtis O. Whitney; Gunnery Sergeant Joseph A. Saunders;
Gunnery Sergeant Bernard J. Durr; Gunnery Sergeant John J.
Rogers; Sergeant Olin L. Beall; Sergeant George Washington;
Sergeant Joseph L. Bonville; Sergeant Joseph Konepka; Sergeant
Charles L. McIndoc; Sergeant Frank J. Murphy; Sergeant Douglas
S. Catchis; Sergeant Daniel J. Donahoe; Sergeant Charles Sorenson;
Private John David.
United States Navy: Admiral William B. Caperton, retired; Rear
Admiral Charles S. Freeman; Captain William D. Puleston; Captain.
Walter S. Anderson; Captain Stephen B. McKinney; Captain Wil-
lam O. Spears; Captain Augustin T. Beauregard; Commander Leo
H. Thebaud; Commander Clarence Gulbranson; Captain Charles
St. J. Butler, Medical Corps; Captain William S. Bainbridge, Medi-
cal Corps, Naval Reserve, retired; Commander Morton D. Willcutts,
Medical Corps; Commander William Henry P. Blandy; Commander
Edwin C. Ebert, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Roscoe H.
Hillenkoetter ; Lieutenant Commander Joel J. White, Medical Corps;
Lieutenant Albert L. King, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant (Junior
Grade) Walter C. Ford; Captain Herbert S. Howard, Construction
Corps; Lieutenant Commander Leslie C. Stevens; Lieutenant Com-
mander William K. Vanderbilt, United States Naval Reserve.
United States Marine Corps: Colonel Robert L. Denig; Colonel
Henry L. Roosevelt, Marine Corps Reserve, deceased; Colonel Wil-
lam C. Harllee, retired; Colonel Julius S. Turrill, retired; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Harry L. Smith; Lieutenant Colonel William M.
Small, retired; Major Andrew E. Creesy; Major Donald J. Kendall;
Major Chester L. Fordney, Marine Corps Reserve; Captain Louis
Cukela; First Sergeant George Nelson.
That the following-named officers and enlisted men of the United
States Army are hereby authorized to accept such medals, orders,
diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have been tendered them
by foreign governments in appreciation of services rendered:
General Douglas MacArthur; Major General Dennis E. Nolan;
Major General Malin Craig; Major General Paul B. Malone; Major
General Frank Parker; Major General Frank R. McCoy; Major
General Albert J. Bowley; Major General Benjamin D. Foulois;
Brigadier General Frank C. Bolles; Brigadier General Casper H.
Conrad, Junior; Brigadier General Andrew Moses; Brigadier Gen-
eral Thomas W. Darrah; Brigadier General Francis LeJ. Parker;
Brigadier General Guy V. Henry; Brigadier General John W.
Gulick; Brigadier General Robert C. Foy; Colonel Joseph A. Baer;
_ Colonel Charles Burnett; Colonel W. Goff Caples; Colonel Edward
Davis; Colonel Charles W. Exton; Colonel James Malcolm Graham;
Colonel W. Lee Hart; Colonel Jacob C. Johnson; Colonel Roy C.
Kirtland; Colonel Osmun Latrobe; Colonel EK. R. Warner McCabe;
Colonel Charles H. Patterson; Colonel Russell P. Reeder; Colonel
Francis A. Ruggles; Colonel Frederick W. Van Duyne; Colonel
Richard H. Williams; Lieutenant Colonel Frank M. Andrews; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Lester D. Baker; Lieutenant Colonel Reginald B.
Cocroft; Lieutenant Colonel John F. Curry; Lieutenant Colonel
Ernest J. Dawley; Lieutenant Colonel Robert H. Fletcher, Junior;
Lieutenant Colonel William W. Hicks; Lieutenant Colonel Donald
C. McDonald; Lieutenant Colonel Frederick W. Manley; Lieutenant
1361
_ Marine Corps—Con-
inued.
Navy.
Marine Corps.
Army.
1362
Army—Continued.
May 19, 1936.
[H. R. 12162.]
[Publiec, No. 604.]
United States courts.
Vol. 36, p. 1116; U.
S. C., p. 1247.
Mississippi judicial
districts.
Northern district.
Eastern division.
Western division.
Delta division.
Terms of court.
Eastern division.
74ru CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 427, 498. MAY 19, 1936.
Colonel Maxwell Murray; Lieutenant Colonel Henry C. Pratt; Lieu-
tenant Colonel John W. N. Schulz; Lieutenant Colonel Martin C.
Shallenberger; Lieutenant Colonel Daniel I. Sultan; Lieutenant
Colonel Edwin M. Watson; Lieutenant Colonel Barton K. Yount;
Major George E. Arneman; "Major Rosenham Beam; Major Enrique
M. Benitez; Major Peter . Bullard; Major Henry B. Cheadle;
Major Joseph O. Daly; Major Herbert A. Dar gue; Major James A.
Dorst; Major Asa N. Duncan; Major Charles R. Finley; Major
Abraham Garfinckel; Major James A. Gillespie; Major Paul R.
Hawley; Major Charles B. Hazeltine; Major Edgar Erskine Hume;
Major George E. Lovell, Junior; Major Dav enport Johnson ; Major
Raymond E. McQuillin; Major Joseph J. O'Hare; Major James B.
Ord; Major Alvan C. Sandeford ; Major Martin F. Scanlon; Major
James C. R. Schwenck; Chaplain ’(Major) Aristeo V. Simoni: Major
Julia C. Stimson ; Major Robert H. Van Volkenburgh ; Major "Robert
LeG. Walsh; Major Charles A. Willoughby; Major Walter F. Win-
ton; Captain John R. D. Cleland; Captain Carl W. Connell; Captain
Virgil N. Cordero; Captain Robert E. Cummings; Captain Thomas
J. Davi is; Captain Vernon C. DeVotie; ; Captain Fernand G. Dumont;
Captain Ira C. Eaker; Captain Richard E. Elvi ins; Captain Muir
S. Fairchild; Captain James M. Gillespie; Captain Leslie R. Groves,
Junior ; Captain Albert F. Hegenberger ; Captain Eugene J. Heller;
Captain Jack C. Hodgson; Captain “Arthur B. McDaniel; Captain
William J. McKiernan, Junior; Captain Eugene A. Reonier; Cap-
tain Charles McK. Robinson ; Captain Timothy Sapla- Bosch ; Captain
Kinsley W. Slauson ; Captain Bernard S. Thompson ; Captain Leon-
ard D. Weddington; Captain Ennis C. Whitehead ; Captain Royden
Williamson; Captain Ralph H. Wooten; First Lieutenant Joseph
M. Glasgow; First Lieutenant John L. Hines, Junior; First Lieu-
tenant Kenneth C, Nichols; First Lieutenant Benjamin B. Talley;
First Lieutenant Hugh B. Waddell; Staff Sergeant Edward F.
Springer; Sergeant Leslie B. Hopkins.
Approved, May 19, 1936.
[CHAPTER 428.]
AN ACT
To create an additional division of the United States District Court for the
Southern District of Mississippi to be known as the Hattiesburg division.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 90
of the Judicial Code, as amended (U.S. C., 1934 edition, title 28,
sec. 170), is amended to read as follows:
“Src. 90. The State of Mississippi is divided into two judicial
districts to be known as the northern and southern districts of
Mississippi. The northern district shall include the territory em-
braced on the 1st day of December 1923 in the counties of Alcorn,
Attala, Chickasaw, Choctaw, Clay, Itawamba, Lee, Lowndes, Monroe,
Oktibbeha, Pontotoc, Prentiss, Tishomingo, and Winston, which shall
constitute "the eastern division of said district; also the territory
embraced on the date last mentioned in the counties of Benton,
Calhoun, Carroll, De Soto, Grenada, Lafayette, Marshall, Mont-
gomery, Panola, Tate, Tippah, Union, Webster, and Yalabusha,
which’ shall constitute the western division of said district; also
the territory embraced on the date last mentioned in the counties
of Bolivar, Coahoma, Leflore, Quitman, Sunflower, Tallahatchie,
and Tunica, which shall constitute the Delta division of said district.
The terms of the district court for the eastern division shall be held
at Aberdeen on the first Mondays in April and October; for the
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 428, 432. MAY 19, 20, 1936.
western division, at Oxford on the third Monday in April and the
first Monday in December; and for the Delta division, at Clarksdale
on the fourth Monday in January and the third Monday in October.
The southern district shall include the territory embraced on the Ist
day of December 1923 in the counties of Amite, Copiah, Franklin,
Hinds, Holmes, Leake, Lincoln, Madison, Pike, Rankin, Simpson,
Smith, Scott, Wilkinson, and Yazoo, which shall constitute the
Jackson division; also the territory embraced on the date last men-
tioned in the counties of Adams, Claiborne, Humphreys, Issaquena,
Jefferson, Sharkey, Warren, and Washington, which shall constitute
the western division; also the territory embraced on the date last
mentioned in the counties of Clarke, Jasper, Kemper, Lauderdale,
Neshoba, Newton, Noxubee, and Wayne, which shall constitute the
eastern division; also the territory embraced on the date last men-
tioned in the counties of George, Hancock, Harrison, Jackson, Pearl
River, and Stone, which shall constitute the southern division of said
district; also the territory embraced on the date last mentioned in
the counties of Covington, Forrest, Greene, Jefferson Davis, Jones,
Lamar, Lawrence, Marion, Perry, and Walthall, which shall con-
stitute the Hattiesburg division. Terms of the district court for the
Jackson division shall be held at Jackson on the first Mondays
in May and November; for the western division, at Vicksburg on
the third Mondays in May and November; for the eastern division,
at Meridian on the third Mondays in March and September; for
the southern division, at Biloxi on the third Monday in February
and the first Monday in June; and for the Hattiesburg division, at
Hattiesburg on the second Mondays in April and October. The
clerk of the court for each district shall maintain an office in charge
of himself or a deputy at each place in his district at which court
is now required to be held, at which he shall not himself reside,
which shall be kept open at all times for the transaction of the
business of the court. The marshal for each of said districts shall
maintain an office in charge of himself or a deputy at each place of
holding court in his district.”
Approved, May 19, 1936.
[CHAPTER 432.]
AN ACT
To provide for rural electrification, and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby created and established an agency of the United States to
be known as the “Rural Electrification Administration”, all of the
powers of which shall be exercised by an Administrator, who shall be
appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of
the Senate, for a term of ten years, and who shall receive a salary
of $10,000 per year. This Act may be cited as the “Rural Electrifi-
cation Act of 1936”.
Src. 2. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to make
loans in the several States and Territories of the United States for
rural electrification and the furnishing of electric energy to persons
in rural areas who are not receiving central station service, as here-
inafter provided; to make, or cause to be made, studies, investiga-
tions, and reports concerning the condition and progress of the elec-
trification of rural areas in the several States and Territories; and
to publish and disseminate information with respect thereto.
43115°—36 —18
1363
Western division.
Delta division.
Southern district.
Jackson division.
Western division.
Eastern division.
Southern division.
Hattiesburg division.
Terms of court.
Jackson division.
Western division.
Eastern division.
Southern division.
Hattiesburg division.
Clerks and marshals;
offices.
May 20, 1936.
[S. 3483.]
{Public, No. 605.)
Rural Electrification
Act of 1936.
Rural Electrification
Administration creat-
ed.
Administrator; pow-
ers, appointment, etc.
Citation of title.
Loans in States and
‘Territories authorized.
Studies and reports
concerning rural areas;
publication, ete.
1364
Reconstruction Fi-
nance Corporation.
Loans to Administra-
tor by, authorized.
Maximum, 1937.
Interest.
Provisos.
_Proportion to secu-
rity.
Amortization of ob-
ligations.
Maturity provisions.
Assignment of obli-
gations to Reconstruc-
tion Finance Corpora-
tion.
Appropriations au-
thorized.
Allotments of por-
tion of annual sums for
loans; basis of.
Unallotted portion;
basis of loans.
Post, p. 1365.
Proviso.
Limitation.
Availability of unex-
pended balances dur-
ing ensuing year.
Provisos.
Limitation.
Loans to Adminis-
trator to cease June 30,
1937.
_ Payments covered
in; exception,
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 432. MAY 20, 1936.
Sec. 8. (a) The Reconstruction Finance Corporation is hereby
authorized and directed to make loans to the Administrator, upon his
request approved by the President, not exceeding in aggregate
amount $50,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1937, with
interest at 3 per centum per annum upon the security of the obliga-
tions of borrowers from the Administrator appointed pursuant to
the provisions of this Act or from the Administrator of the Rural
Electrification Administration established by Executive Order Num-
bered 7037: Provided, That no such loan shall be in an amount
exceeding 85 per centum of the principal amount outstanding of
the obligations constituting the security therefor: And provided
further, That such obligations incurred for the purpose of financing
the construction and operation of generating plants, electric transmis-
sion and distribution lines, or systems shall be fully amortized over
a period not to exceed twenty-five years, and that the maturity of
such obligations incurred for the purpose of financing the wiring of
premises and the acquisition and installation of electrical and plumb-
ing appliances and equipment shall not exceed two-thirds of the
assured life thereof and not more than five years. The Administrator
is hereby authorized to make all such endorsements, to execute all
such instruments, and to do all such acts and things as shall be
necessary to effect the valid transfer and assignment to the Recon-
struction Finance Corporation of all such obligations.
(b) There is hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any
money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, for the fiscal year
ending June 30, 1938, and for each of the eight years thereafter,
the sum of $40,000,000 for the purposes of this Act as hereinafter
provided.
(c) Fifty per centum of the annual sums herein made available or
appropriated for the purposes of this Act shall be allotted yearly by
the Administrator for loans in the several States in the proportion
which the number of their farms not then receiving central station
electric service bears to the total number of farms of the United
States not then receiving such service. The Administrator shall,
within ninety days after the beginning of each fiscal year, determine
for each State and for the United States the number of farms not
then receiving such service.
(d) The remaining 50 per centum of such annual sums shall be
available for loans in the several States and in the Territories, with-
out allotment as hereinabove provided, in such amounts for each
State and Territory as, in the opinion of the Administrator, may be
effectively employed for the purposes of this Act, and to carry out
the provisions of section 7: Provided, however, That not more than
10 per centum of said unallotted annual sums may be employed in
any one State, or in all of the Territories.
(e) If any part of the annual sums made available for the purposes
of this Act shall not be loaned or obligated during the fiscal year for
which such sums are made available, such unexpended or unobligated
sums shall be available for loans by the Administrator in the follow-
ing year or years without allotment: Provided, however, That not
more than 10 per centum of said sums may be employed in any one
State or in all of the Territories: And provided further, That no
loans shall be made by the Reconstruction Finance Corporation to
the Administrator after June 30, 1937.
(f) All moneys representing payments of principal and interest
on loans made by the Administrator under this Act shall be covered
into the Treasury as miscellaneous receipts, except that any such
moneys representing payments of principal and interest on obliga-
tions constituting the security for loans made by the Reconstruction
747ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 432. MAY 20, 1936.
Finance Corporation to the Administrator shall be paid to the
Reconstruction Finance Corporation in payment of such loans.
Sec, 4. The Administrator is authorized and empowered, from the
sums hereinbefore authorized, to make loans to persons, corporations,
States, Territories, and subdivisions and agencies thereof, municipali-
ties, peoples utility districts and cooperative nonprofit, or lmited-
dividend associations organized under the laws of any State or Ter-
ritory of the United States, for the purpose of financing the con-
struction and operation of generating plants, electric transmission
and distribution lines or systems for the furnishing of electric energy
to persons in rural areas who are not receiving central station serv-
ice: Provided, however, That the Administrator, in making such
loans, shall give preference to States, Territories, and subdivisions
and agencies thereof, municipalities, peoples utility districts, and
cooperative, nonprofit, or limited dividend associations, the projects
of which comply with the requirements of this Act. Such loans
shall be on such terms and conditions relating to the expenditure of
the moneys loaned and the security therefor as the Administrator
shall determine and may be made payable in whole or in part out
of income: Provided, however, That all such loans shall be self-
liquidating within a period of not to exceed twenty-five years, and
shall bear interest at a rate equal to the average rate of interest pay-
able by the United States of America on its obligations, having a
mnaturity of ten or more years after the dates thereof, issued during
the last preceding fiscal year in which any such obligations were
issued: Provided further, That no loan for the construction, operation,
or enlargement of any generating plant shall be made unless the
consent of the State authority having jurisdiction in the premises is
first obtained. Loans under this section and section 5 shall not be
made unless the Administrator finds and certifies that in his judg-
ment the security therefor is reasonably adequate and such loan will
be repaid within the time agreed.
Src. 5. The Administrator is authorized and empowered, from the
sums hereinbefore authorized, to make loans for the purpose of finan-
cing the wiring of the premises of persons in rural areas and the
acquisition and installation of electrical and plumbing appliances
and equipment. Such loans may be made to any of the borrowers
of funds loaned under the provisions of section 4, or to any person,
firm, or corporation supplying or installing the said wiring, appli-
ances, or equipment. Such loans shall be for such terms, subject
to such conditions, and so secured as reasonably to assure repayment
thereof, and shall be at a rate of interest equal to the average rate of
interest payable by the United States of America on its obligations,
having a maturity of ten or more years after the dates thereof, issued
during the last preceding fiscal year in which any such obligations
were issued.
Src. 6. For the purpose of administering this Act and for the
purpose of making the studies, investigations, publications, and
reports herein provided for, there is hereby authorized to be appro-
priated, out of any mohey in the Treasury not otherwise appro-
priated, such sums as shall be necessary. ;
Src. 7. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to bid for
and purchase at any foreclosure or other sale, or otherwise to acquire,
property pledged or mortgaged to secure any loan made pursuant to
this Act; to pay the purchase price and any costs and expenses
incurred in connection therewith from the sums authorized in section
3 of this Act; to accept title to any property so purchased or acquired
in the name of the United States of America; to operate or lease
such property for such period as may be deemed necessary or
1365
Loans for financing
generating plants, dis-
tribution lines, etc.
Provisos.
Preferential loans.
Loans to be self-
liquidating.
Interest.
Consent of State au-
thority.
Security; repayment.
Wiring premises, in-
stalling appliances, etc.
Loans for; terms, se-
curity, etc.
Interest.
Appropriations
authorized for adminis-
trative, etc., expenses.
Post, p. 1604.
Acquisition of mort-
gaged, etc., property
by Administrator, au-
thorized.
Operation, ete., of
acquired property,
1366
Sale.
Disposal of encum-
bered property, etc.,
by borrower.
Prior loans and con-
tracts; administration
may be vested in Ad-
ministrator.
Transfer of records,
REOPSCLY: and person-
nel.
Nonpartisan admin-
istration of Act.
Merit system of ap-
pointments, ete.
Removal of officials,
etc., for violation.
Annual
Congress.
reports to
Utilization of volun-
tary, etc., services.
Attorneys, engineers,
and experts; appoint-
ment, compensation,
ete.
Expenditures author-
ized.
Ante, p. 1365.
Time extension on
payments, authorized.
Provisos.
_Loans on plants,
lines, ete.
747H CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 432. MAY 20, 1936.
advisable to protect the investment therein, but not to exceed five
years after the acquisition thereof; and to sell such property so
purchased or acquired, upon such terms and for such consideration
as the Administrator shall determine to be reasonable.
No borrower of funds under section 4 shall, without the approval
of the Administrator, sell or dispose of its property, rights, or
franchises, acquired under the provisions of this Act, until any loan
obtained from the Rural Electrification Administration, including
all interest and charges, shall have been repaid.
Src. 8. The administration of loans and contracts entered into by
the Rural Electrification Administration established by Executive
Order Numbered 7037, dated May 11, 1935, may be vested by the
President in the Administrator authorized to be appointed by- this
Act; and in such event the provisions of this Act shall apply to said
loans and contracts to the extent that said provisions are not incon-
sistent therewith. The President may transfer to the Rural Elec-
trification Administration created by this Act the jurisdiction and
control of the records, property (including office equipment), and
personnel used or employed in the exercise and performance of the
functions of the Rural Electrification Administration established
by such Executive order.
Src. 9. This Act shall be administered entirely on a nonpartisan
basis, and in the appointment of officials, the selection of employees,
and in the promotion of any such officials or employees, no political
test or qualification shall be permitted or given consideration, but
all such appointments and promotions shall be given and made on
the basis of merit and efficiency. If the Administrator herein pro-
vided for is found by the President of the United States to be guilty
of a violation of this section, he shall be removed from office by the
President, and any appointee or selection of officials or employees
made by the Administrator who is found guilty of a violation of this
Act shall be removed by the Administrator.
Src. 10. The Administrator shall present annually to the Congress
not later than the 20th day of January in each year a full report of
his activities under this Act.
Src. 11. In order to carry out the provisions of this Act the
Administrator may accept and utilize such voluntary and uncom-
pensated services of Federal, State, and local officers and employees
as are available, and he may without regard to the provisions of civil-
service laws applicable to officers and employees of the United States
appoint and fix the compensation of attorneys, engineers, and experts,
and he may, subject to the civil-service laws, appoint such other
officers and employees as he may find necessary and prescribe their
duties. The Administrator is authorized, from sums appropriated
pursuant to section 6, to make such expenditures (including expendi-
tures for personal services; supplies and equipment; lawbooks and
books of reference; directories and periodicals; travel expenses;
rental at the seat of government and elsewhere; the purchase, opera-
tion, or maintenance of passenger-carrying vehicles; and printing
and binding) as are appropriate and necessary to carry out the
provisions of this Act.
Src. 12. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to extend
the time of payment of interest or principal of any loans made by the
Administrator pursuant to this Act: Provided, however, That with
respect to any loan made under section 4, the payment of interest or
principal shall not be extended more than five years after such pay-
ment shall have become due, and with respect to any loan made
under section 5, the payment of principal or interest shall not be
extended more than two years after such payment shall have become
sy
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 432-434. MAY 20, 1936.
due: And provided further, That the provisions of this section shall
not apply to any obligations or the security therefor which may be
held by the Reconstruction Finance Corporation under the provisions
of section 3.
Suc. 13. As used in this Act the term “rural area” shall be deemed
to mean any area of the United States not included within the
boundaries of any city, village, or borough having a population in
excess of fifteen hundred inhabitants, and such term shall be deemed
to include both the farm and nonfarm population thereof; the term
“farm” shall be deemed to mean a farm as defined in the publications
of the Bureau of the Census; the term “person” shall be deemed to
mean any natural person, firm, corporation, or association; the term
“Territory” shall be deemed to include any insular possession of the
United States.
Sec. 14. If any provision of this Act, or the application thereof to
any person or circumstances, is held invalid, the remainder of the
Act and the application of such provision to other persons or circum-
stances shall not be affected thereby.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 433.]
AN ACT
To amend article 3 of the ““Rules Concerning Lights, and so forth’’, contained
in the Act entitled “‘An Act to adopt regulations for preventing collisions upon
certain harbors, rivers, and inland waters of the United States’, approved
June 7, 1897.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the first sen-
tence of article 3 of the “Rules Concerning Lights, and so forth”,
contained in the Act entitled “An Act to adopt regulations for pre-
venting collisions upon certain harbors, rivers, and inland waters of
the United States”, approved June 7, 1897, is amended to read as
follows:
“Arr. 8. A steam vessel when towing another vessel or vessels
alongside shall, in addition to her side lights, carry two bright white
lights in a vertical line, one over the other, not less than three feet
apart, and when towing one or more vessels astern, regardless of the
length of the tow, shall carry an additional bright white light three
feet above or below such lights: Provided, That on the Red River of
the North and the rivers emptying into the Gulf of Mexico and their
tributaries, this article shall not affect the signal lights used on towing
vessels which propel the tow by pushing at the rear of the tow.”
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 434.]
AN ACT
To amend section 4321, Revised Statutes (U. S. C., title 46, sec. 263), and for
other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 4321,
Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sec. 263), be,
and is hereby, amended to read as follows:
“The form of a license for carrying on the coasting trade or fish-
eries shall be as follows:
“License for carrying on the (here insert ‘coasting trade’, ‘whale
fishery’, ‘mackerel fishery’, or ‘cod fishery’, as the case may be).
1567
Loans excluded.
Ante, p. 1364.
Definitions.
“Rural area.’””
“Farm.”
“Person.’”
“Territory.”
Separability _ provi-
sion.
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 10308.]
[Public, No. 606.]
Navigation.
“Rules Concerning
Lights, ete.’’
Vol. 30, p. 97.
U.S.C., B. 1455.
Lights of steam ves-
sel towing another ves-
sel alongside.
When towing astern.
Proviso.
Exceptions.
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 11036.)
[Public, No. 607.]
Vessels in domestic
commerce.
R.S., sec. 4321, p. 835.
U.S. C., p. 2005.
License for coasting
trade or fisheries.
Form prescribed.
1368
Provisos.
Licensing for the
“coasting trade and
mackerel fishery.”
Touching at foreign
ports.
R. S., secs. 4364, 4365,
p. 844; U.S.C., p. 2010.
Enrolled and licensed
vessels, Great Lakes
and connecting waters.
R.S., sec, 4318; U. 8.
C., p. 2004.
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 11302.)
[Public, No. 608.]
United Confederate
Veterans, Reunion
Committee.
Loan of Army equip-
ment for encampment
at Shreveport, La., au-
thorized.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 434, 435. MAY 20, 1936.
“In pursuance of title L (Revised Statutes 4311-4390), ‘Regula-
tion of Vessels in Domestic Commerce’, of the Revised Statutes of
the United States (inserting here the name of the husband or man-
aging owner, with his occupation and place of abode, and the name
of the master, with the place of his abode), having sworn that the
(insert here the description of the vessel, whether ship, brigantine,
snow, schooner, sloop, or whatever else she may be), called the (insert
here the vessel’s name), whereof the said (naming the master) is
master, burden (insert here the number of tons, in words) tons, as
appears by her enrollment, dated at (naming the district, day, month,
and year, in words at length, but if she be less than twenty tons,
insert, instead thereof, ‘proof being had of her admeasurement’),
shall not be employed in any trade, while this license shall continue
in force, whereby the revenue of the United States shall be defrauded,
and having also sworn (or aflirmed) that this license shall not be
used for any other vessel, or for any other employment, than is
herein specified, license is hereby granted for the said (inserting here
the description of the vessel) called the (inserting here the vessel’s
name), to be employed in carrying on the (inserting here ‘coasting
trade’, ‘whale fishery’, ‘mackerel fishery’, or ‘cod fishery’, as the case
may be), for one year from the date hereof, and no longer. Given
under my hand and seal, at (naming the said district), this (insert-
ing the particular day) day of (naming the month), in the year
(specifying the number of the year in words at length) ;”: Provided,
That vessels of five net tons and over entitled under the laws of the
United States to be enrolled and licensed or licensed for the coasting
trade may be licensed for the “coasting trade and mackerel fishery”,
and shall be deemed to have sufficient license for engaging in the
coasting trade and the taking of fish of every description, including
shellfish : Provided further, That the provisions of sections 4364 and
4365, Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sees.
310 and 311), shall be, and are hereby, made applicable to vessels so
licensed: And provided further, That vessels operating on the Great
Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters under enrollment
and license issued in conformity with the provisions of section 4318,
Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sec. 258),
shall be deemed to have sufficient license for engaging in the taking
of fish of every description within such waters without change in the
form of enrollment and license prescribed under the authority of
that section.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 435.]
AN ACT
To authorize the Secretary of War to lend to the Reunion Committee of the
United Confederate Veterans three thousand blankets, olive drab, numbered
4, one thousand five hundred canvas cots, to be used at their annual encamp-
ment to be held at Shreveport, Louisiana, in June 1936.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of War be, and he is hereby, authorized to lend, at his discretion
to the Reunion Committee of the United Confederate Veterans,
for use at the United Confederate Veterans’ Encampment, to
be held at Shreveport, Louisiana, June 9, 10, 11, and 12, 1936, two
hospital ward tents, with all pegs, poles, and equipment necessary
for their erection; one storage tent complete with all equipment; one
Jarge wall tent complete with all equipment; six small wall tents
74tx CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 435,440, 444. MAY 20,21,22,1936. 1369
complete with all equipment; ten pyramidal tents complete with all
equipment; fifty 14-quart G. I. buckets; three thousand blankets,
olive drab, wool; one thousand five hundred canvas folding cots; one
thousand five hundred comforters; one thousand five hundred cotton-
felted pillows complete with cotton pillow cases; three thousand
cotton bedsheets: Provided, That no expense shall be caused the
United States Government by the delivery and return of said prop-
erty; the same to be delivered from the nearest quartermaster depot
at such time prior to the holding of said encampment as may be
agreed upon by the Secretary of War and the Confederate Reunion
Committee: Provided further, That the Secretary of War, before
delivery of such property, shall take from said Reunion Committee
of the United Confederate Veterans a good and sufficient bond for
the safe return of said property in good order and condition, and
the whole without expense to the United States.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 440.]
AN ACT
To convey certain lands to Clackamas County, Oregon, for public-park purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of the Interior is authorized and directed to issue a patent to Clack-
amas County, Oregon, on behalf of the United States, for the south
half southwest quarter and the west half northeast quarter southwest
quarter section 11, township 3 south, range 4 east, Willamette merid-
ian, in the State of Oregon, containing one hundred acres, more or
less, on condition that such county shall accept and use such lands
solely for public-park purposes; but if such county shall at any time
cease to use such lands for public-park purposes, or shall permit the
use of such lands for any other purpose, or shall alienate or attempt
to alienate them, they shall revert to the United States: Provided,
That there shall be reserved to the United States, its patentees, or
their transferees, the right to cut and remove therefrom the merchant-
able timber, reserving to Clackamas County, Oregon, when such sale
is made under the provisions of the Act of June 9, 1916 (39 Stat. 218),
a preference right to purchase the timber at the highest price bid.
Src. 2. The Secretary of the Interior shall prescribe all necessary
regulations to carry into effect the foregoing provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 21, 1936.
[CHAPTER 444.]
AN ACT
To supplement the Act of June 25, 1929 (ch. 41, 46 Stat. L. 41), which authorized
and directed the Attorney General to institute suit against the Northern
Pacific Railway Company and others.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in the suit
entitled United States of America, plaintiff, against Northern Pacific
Railway Company and others, defendants, numbered E4389, insti-
tuted and pending in the District Court of the United States for
the Eastern District of Washington, under the authority and direc-
tion of the Act of June 25, 1929 (ch. 41, 46 Stat. L. 41), now on
reference to a special master for hearing under an order of said
court entered in said suit on April 21, 1936, a direct review by the
Provisos.
No Federal expense-
Bond.
May 21, 1936.
[H. R. 5058. ]
[Public, No. 609.]
Clackamas County,
Oreg.
Conveyance of land
for public-park pur-
poses, authorized.
_Reversionary provi-
sion.
Proviso.
Timber reservation.
Vol. 39, p. 218.
Regulations to be
prescribed.
May 22, 1936.
[S. 4594.]
[Public, No. 610.]
Northern Pacific
Railway Companyand
others.
Review by appeal to
U. 8. Supreme Court
of certain questions in
pending suit, author-
ized.
Vol. 46, p. 41.
1370
Time limitation.
Right of review
final judgment not
fected.
May 22, 1936.
(H. R. 1398.]
of
af-
[Publie, No. 611.]
Crescent City, Calif.
Establishment
of
Coast Guard station
at, authorized.
May 22, 1936.
[H. R. 8370.]
[Public, No. 612.]
Port Washington,
1s.
Establishment of
Coast Guard station
at, authorized.
May 22, 1936.
(H.R. 10321.]
{Public, No. 613.]
Rio Grande, use
waters, etc.
Correction in Act
lating to.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 661.
of
Te-
Ist
74tx CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 444-447. MAY 22, 1936.
Supreme Court of the United States by appeal may be had by any
party to said suit of any order or decree of said district court entered
upon a review of the report of the master to be made pursuant to
said order of April 21, 1936, and also of the order or decree of said
district court entered in said suit on October 3, 1935, as amended by
an order of January 29, 1936. Such direct review by the Supreme
Court of either or both of the said orders or decrees may be had by
appeal taken within sixty days from the date of the order or decree
of the district court entered upon a review of the report of the
master to be made pursuant to the said order of April 21, 1936. The
right of review of any final judgment, authorized by said Act of
June 25, 1929, shall continue in force and effect.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 445.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of a Coast Guard station at or near Crescent
City, California.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized to establish a
Coast Guard station on the Pacific coast at or in the vicinity of
Crescent City, California, in such locality as the Commandant of
the Coast Guard may recommend.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 446.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of a Coast Guard station at Port Washington,
Wisconsin.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of
the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the
Secretary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized to estab-
lish a Coast Guard station on Lake Michigan at Port Washington,
Wisconsin, at such point as the Commandant of the Coast Guard
may recommend.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 447.]
AN ACT
To amend section 4 of Public Act Numbered 286, Seventy-fourth Congress,
approved August 19, 1935, as amended.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 4 of
Public Act Numbered 286, Seventy-fourth Congress, approved
August 19, 1935, is amended by striking out the words “section 3
hereof” and inserting in lieu thereof the words “section 2, para-
graph 2, and section 3 of this Act”.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
74m CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 448, 449. MAY 22,26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 448.]
AN ACT
Authorizing the erection of a memorial to those who met their death in the
wreck of the dirigible Shenandoah.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed to
erect near Ava, Ohio, on the spot where the Shenandoah fell, a
suitable tablet or marker to commemorate the heroic services ren-
dered by Commander Landsdowne and other members of the crew
who died when the Navy dirigible Shenandoah was destroyed.
Sec. 2. There is hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any
money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, the sum of
$2,500 to carry out the provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 449.]
AN ACT
To authorize the Secretary of War to grant to the city of Buffalo, New York, the
right and privilege to occupy and use for sewage-disposal facilities part of the
lands forming the pier and dikes of the Black Rock Harbor improvement at
Buffalo, New York.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in addition
to the grant made by the Secretary of War to the city of Buffalo
pursuant to the Act of Congress entitled “An Act making appropri-
ations for the construction, repair, and preservation of certain public
works on rivers and harbors and for other purposes”, approved
February 27, 1911, for the purpose of establishing a public park and
landing facilities on that part of the structure known as Bird Island
Pier on Niagara River lying north of Albany Street extended, in
the city of Buffalo, New York, and forming a part of Black Rock
Harbor improvement and the lands of the United States under
water on both sides of said pier to the established harbor lines, sub-
ject to the terms, conditions, and stipulations in said grant specified,
the Secretary of War is authorized to grant to the city of Buffalo,
New York, also the right and privilege of occupying said lands and
lands under water, and also the lands owned by the United States
on the west side of Black Rock Canal, described as follows: Begin-
ning at a point where the northerly line of property formerly owned
by William H. Slade, or that line extended, intersects the United
States Government property line (formerly New York State Blue
Line) ; thence easterly parallel to the line forming the northeasterly
boundary of lands heretofore granted to the city of Buffalo by the
United States and known as Bird Island Pier until a point is reached
in direct prolongation of the easterly boundary line of said last
mentioned lands; thence southwesterly in direct line with said
easterly boundary of said lands to the northeasterly corner of said
lands heretofore conveyed to the city of Buffalo by the United
States; thence westerly along the northeasterly boundary of said
Bird Island Pier lands to said United States Government property
line; thence northeasterly along said last mentioned line to the place
of beginning, or so much thereof as may be necessary, for use either
by the city of Buffalo or by the Buffalo Sewer Authority (created
by chapter 349 of the Laws of the State of New York of 1935) for
sewage-disposal facilities, on such terms, conditions, and stipulations
as he may deem expedient and equitable and necessary for the pro-
tection of all the interests of the United States in and to said
1371
May 22, 1936.
[H. R. 10544.)
[Public, No. 614.]
Dirigible ‘‘Shenan-
oah.”’
Erection of memorial
to dead in wreck of,
authorized.
Location.
Appropriation au-
thorized.
May 26, 1936.
(S. 4317.]
[Public, No. 615.]
Buffalo, N. Y.
Right to use certain
land for public pur-
poses, granted to.
Vol. 36, p. 935.
Description.
1372
Proviso. d
State sanction.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 8287.]
[Public, No. 616.]
Virgin Islands.
Establishment of
assessed valuation real
property tax.
Based on actual
value.
Uniform rate in each
municipality.
Provisional rate.
President to pre-
scribe regulations if no
municipal levy, etc.
Deposit of collections.
Virgin Islands Com-
pany.
Payments by, in lieu
of taxes.
Other property
owned by the United
States,
74m CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 449, 450. MAY 26, 1936.
premises: Provided, however, That the city of Buffalo shall have
secured the sanction and consent of the State of New York through
its constituted agencies.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 450.]
AN ACT
To establish an assessed valuation real property tax in the Virgin Islands of the
United States.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That it is the policy
of Congress to equalize and more equitably to distribute existing
taxes on real property in the Virgin Islands of the United States and
to reduce the burden of taxation now imposed on land in productive
use in such islands.
Src. 2. For the calendar year 1936 and for all succeeding years
all taxes on real property in the Virgin Islands shall be computed
on the basis of the actual value of such property and the rate in each
municipality of such islands shall be the same for all real property
subject to taxation in such municipality whether or not such prop-
erty is in cultivation and regardless of the use to which such
property is put.
Src. 3. Until local tax laws conforming to the requirements of this
Act are in effect in a municipality the tax on real property in such
municipality for any such calendar year shall be at the rate of
1.25 per centum of the assessed value. If the legislative authority
of a municipality shall fail to enact laws for the levy, assessment,
collection, or enforcement of any tax imposed under authority of
this Act within three months after the date of its enactment, the
President shall then prescribe regulations for the levy, assessment,
collection, and enforcement of such tax, which shall be in effect
until the legislative authority of such municipality shall make
regulations for such purposes.
Sec. 4. All taxes so levied and collected shall be deposited in the
municipal treasury of the municipality in which such taxes are
collected.
Src. 5. The Virgin Islands Company shall pay annually into the
municipal treasuries of the Virgin Islands in leu of taxes an amount
equal to the amount of taxes which would be payable on the real
property in the Virgin Islands owned by the United States and in
the possession of the Virgin Islands Company, if such real property
were in private ownership and taxable, but the valuation placed upon
such property for taxation purposes by the local taxing authorities
shall be reduced to a reasonable amount by the Secretary of the
Interior if, after investigation, he finds that such valuation is
excessive and unreasonable. The Virgin Islands Company shall also
pay into the municipal treasuries of the Virgin Islands amounts
equal to the amounts of any taxes of general application which a
private corporation similarly situated would be required to pay into
the said treasuries. Similar payments shall be made with respect
to any property owned by the United States in the Virgin Islands
which is used for ordinary business or commercial purposes, and the
income derived from any property so used shall be available for
making such payments.
74mm CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 450, 451. MAY 26, 1936.
Src. 6. Nothing in this Act shall be construed as altering, amend-
ing, or repealing the existing exemptions from taxation of property
used for educational, charitable, or religious purposes. Subject to
the provisions of this Act, the legislative authority of the respective
municipalities is hereby empowered to alter, amend, or repeal, sub-
ject to the approval of the Governor, any law now imposing taxes
on real and personal property.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 451.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of the Fort Frederica National Monument, at
Saint Simon Island, Georgia, and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That when title
to the site of Fort Frederica, on Saint Simon Island, Georgia, and
such other related sites located thereon, as may be designated by
the Secretary of the Interior, in the exercise of his discretion, as
necessary or desirable for national-monument purposes, shall have
been vested in the United States, said area not to exceed eighty acres
shall be, and is hereby, set apart as a national monument for the
benefit and inspiration of the people, and shall be called the “Fort
Frederica National Monument”.
Sec. 2. That the Secretary of the Interior be, and he is hereby,
authorized to accept donations of land, interests in land, buildings,
structures, and other property within the boundaries of the said
national monument as determined and fixed hereunder, and dona-
tions of funds for the purchase and maintenance thereof, the title
and evidence of title to lands acquired to be satisfactory to the Secre-
tary of the Interior: Provided, That he may acquire on behalf of
the United States out of any donated funds, either by purchase at
prices deemed by him reasonable, or by condemnation under the pro-
visions of the Act of August 1, 1888, such tracts of land within the
said national monument as may be necessary for the completion
thereof.
Sec. 3. (a) The Secretary of the Interior is authorized, in his
discretion, to maintain in some suitable structure within the national
monument a museum for relics and records pertaining to Fort
Frederica, and for other articles of national and patriotic interest,
and in his discretion to accept, on behalf of the United States, for
installation in such museum, articles which may be offered as addi-
tions to the museum.
(b) Any State or political subdivision thereof, organization, or
individual may, with the approval of the Secretary of the Interior,
erect monuments or place tablets commemorating historic events or
persons connected with the history of the area, within the bound-
aries of the Fort Frederica National Monument.
Sec. 4. The administration, protection, and development of the
aforesaid national monument shall be exercised under the direction
of the Secretary of the Interior by the National Park Service, sub-
ject to the provisions of the Act of August 25, 1916, entitled “An
Act to establish a National Park Service, and for other purposes”,
as amended.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
1378
Property used for
educational, religious,
etc., purposes.
Amendment or re-
peal of existing laws.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 8431.)
[Public, No. 617.]
Fort Frederica Na-
tional Monument, Saint
Simon Island, Ga.
Establishment of.
Acceptance of dona:
tions, ete.
Proviso,
Purchase of land from
donated funds.
Vol. 25, p. 357.
U.S. C., p. 1785.
Maintenance of mu-
seum.
Erection of monu-
ments or placing of tab-
lets.
Administration.
Vol. 39, p. 535; U. 8.
Cc 591.
”
1574
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 8784.]
[Public, No. 618.]
Executive branch of
the Government.
Withholding of com-
pensation where pay-
ments have been made
illegally, authorized.
Proviso.
Existing laws not
affected.
May 26, 1936.
(H. R. 10267.)
[Public, No. 619.]
Railway Mail Sery-
ice.
Adjustment of com-
pensation.
Vol. 43, p. 1061.
WS Crpenuroks
U.S. C., p. 85.
Appropriations made
available.
May 26, 1936.
(H. R. 10934.]
[Public, No. 620.]
Salem, Mass.
Transfer of custom-
house to Department
of Interior, authorized.
74raH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 452-454. MAY 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 452.]
AN ACT
To authorize withholding compensation due Government personnel.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That hereafter,
whenever upon the statement of the account of any disbursing officer
of the United States in the General Accounting Office credit shall
have been disallowed for any payment to any person in the executive
branch of the Government, otherwise entitled to compensation from
the United States or from any agency or instrumentality thereof,
such compensation of the payee may be withheld until full reim-
bursement has been accomplished under such regulations as may be
prescribed by the head of the department, branch, or independent
establishment (including corporations) under which such payee is
entitled to receive compensation: Provided, That nothing contained
in this Act shall be construed to repeal or in any way modify exist-
ing laws relating to the collection of the indebtedness of accountable
or disbursing officers.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 453.]
AN ACT
To provide for adjusting the compensation of division superintendents, assistant
division superintendents, assistant superintendents at large, assistant super-
intendent in charge of car construction, chief clerks, assistant chief clerks,
and clerks in charge of sections in offices of division superintendents in the
Railway Mail Service, to correspond to the rates established by the Classifi-
eation Act of 1923, as amended.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Post-
master General is authorized and directed to adjust the compensa-
tion of division superintendents, assistant division superintendents,
assistant superintendents at large, assistant superintendent in charge
of car construction, chief clerks, assistant chief clerks, and clerks
in charge of sections in offices of division superintendents, Railway
Mail Service, to correspond, so far as may be practicable, to the rates
established by the Classification Act of 1923, as amended, for posi-
tions in the departmental service in the District of Columbia. Any
appropriation now or hereafter available for the payment of the
compensation of employees in the Railway Mail Service shall be
available for payment of compensation in accordance with the rates
adjusted in accordance with the provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 454.]
AN ACT
To authorize the transfer of the customhouse at Salem, Massachusetts, from the
jurisdiction of the Treasury Department to the Department of the Interior.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed
to transfer to the control and jurisdiction of the Secretary of the
Interior the customhouse at Salem, Massachusetts, and such ad-
joining property, both real and personal, as may now be under the
Jurisdiction of the Secretary of the Treasury.
“41” CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 454,462. MAY 26, 27, 1936.
Sec. 2. That the Secretary of the Interior be, and he is hereby,
authorized to acquire the above property for the purpose of estab-
lishing same as an historic site or otherwise preserving the buildings
and grounds in connection therewith: Provided, That the Secretary
of the Treasury may retain sufficient space in the building for the
necessary operation of the Bureau of Customs.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 462.]
AN ACT
To provide for the continuation of trading in unlisted securities upon national
securities exchanges, for the registration of over-the-counter brokers and
dealers, for the filing of current information and periodic reports by issuers,
and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That subsection (f)
of section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is amended to
read as follows:
“(f) Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this section, any
national securities exchange, upon application to and approval of
such application by the Commission and subject to the terms and
conditions hereinafter set forth, (1) may continue unlisted trading
privileges to which a security had been admitted on such exchange
prior to March 1, 1934; or (2) may extend unlisted trading privileges
to any security duly listed and registered on any other national
securities exchange, but such unlisted trading privileges shall con-
tinue in effect only so long as such security shall remain listed and
registered on any other national securities exchange; or (3) may
extend unlisted trading privileges to any security in respect of which
there is available from a registration statement and periodic reports
or other data filed pursuant to rules or regulations prescribed by the
Commission under this title or the Securities Act of 1983, as amended,
information substantially equivalent to that available pursuant to
rules or regulations of the Commission in respect of a security duly
listed and registered on a national securities exchange, but such
unlisted trading privileges shall continue in effect only so long as
such a registration statement remains effective and such periodic
reports or other data continue to be so filed.
“No application pursuant to this subsection shall be approved
unless the Commission finds that the continuation or extension of
unlisted trading privileges pursuant to such application is neces-
sary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of
investors. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to
any security pursuant to clause (2) or (3) of this subsection shall
be approved except after appropriate notice and opportunity for
hearing. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to any
security pursuant to clause (2) or (3) of this subsection shall be
approved unless the applicant exchange shall establish to the satis-
faction of the Commission that there exists in the vicinity of such
exchange sufficiently widespread public distribution of such security
and sufficient public trading activity therein to render the extension
of unlisted trading privileges on such exchange thereto necessary
or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of
investors. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to
any security pursuant to clause (3) of this subsection shall be
approved except upon such terms and conditions as will subject the
issuer thereof, the officers and directors of such issuer, and every
beneficial owner of more than 10 per centum of such security to
1375
Preservation of, as
an historic site.
Proviso.
Space for Customs
Bureau.
May 27, 1936.
[S. 4023.]
[Public, No. 621.]
Securities Exchange
Act of 1934, amend-
ments.
Vol. 48, p. 894; U.S.
C., p. 536.
Trading in unlisted
securities upon na-
tional exchanges.
Continuance of cer-
tain categories.
Security admitted
before March 1, 1934.
Listed and registered
on another exchange.
Equivalent registra-
tion statement avail-
able.
Conditional contin-
uance of privileges.
Notice and hearing.
Establishment to be
in public interest.
Obligations imposed.
1376
Exceptions.
Publication of trans-
actions or quotations;
differentiation between
listed and unlisted se-
curities.
Other than by ticker.
Suspension of privi-
leges when in public
interest, etc.
Termination of privi-
leges; notice and hear-
ing.
Withdrawal of secur-
ity by issuer; exception.
Inadequate distribu-
tion, trading activity,
ete.
Notice, hearing, ete.
74mH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 27, 1936.
duties substantially equivalent to the duties which would arise pur-
suant to this title 1f such security were duly listed and registered on
a national securities exchange; except that such terms and conditions
need not be imposed in any case or class of cases in which it shall
appear to the Commission that the public interest and the protection
of investors would nevertheless best be served by such extension of
unlisted trading privileges. In the publication or making available
for publication by any national securities exchange, or by any person
directly or indirectly controlled by such exchange, of quotations or
transactions in securities made or effected upon such exchange, such
exchange or controlled person shall clearly differentiate between
quotations or transactions in listed securities, and quotations or
transactions in securities for which unlisted trading privileges on
such exchange have been continued or extended pursuant to this sub-
section. In the publication or making available for publication of
such quotations or transactions otherwise than by ticker, such
exchange or controlled person shall group under separate headings
(A) quotations or transactions in listed securities, and (B) quota-
tions or transactions in securities for which unlisted trading priv-
ileges on such exchange has been continued or extended pursuant to
this subsection.
“The Commission shall by rules and regulations suspend unlisted
trading privileges in whole or in part for any or all classes of
securities for a period not exceeding twelve months, if it deems such
suspension necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for
the protection of investors or to prevent evasion of the purposes
of this title.
“Unlisted trading privileges continued for any security pursuant
to clause (1) of this subsection shall be terminated by order, after
appropriate notice and opportunity for hearing, if it appears at
any time that such security has been withdrawn from listing on
any exchange by the issuer thereof, unless it shall be established to
the satisfaction of the Commission that such delisting was not
designed to evade the purposes of this title or unless it shall appear
to the Commission that, notwithstanding any such purpose of evasion,
the continuation of such unlisted trading privileges is nevertheless
necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection
of investors. On the application of the issuer of any security for
which unlisted trading privileges on any exchange have been con-
tinued or extended pursuant to this subsection, or of any broker or
dealer who makes or creates a market for such security, or of any
other person having a bona-fide interest in the question of termina-
tion or suspension of such unlisted trading privileges, or on its own
motion, the Commission shall by order terminate, or suspend for a
period not exceeding twelve months, such unlisted trading privileges
for such security if the Commission finds, after appropriate notice
and opportunity for hearing, that by reason of inadequate public
distribution of such security in the vicinity of said exchange, or by
reason of inadequate public trading activity or of the character
of trading therein on said exchange, such termination or suspension
1s necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection
of investors.
“In any proceeding under this subsection in which appropriate
notice and opportunity for hearing are required, notice of not less
than ten days to the applicant in such proceeding, to the issuer of
the security involved, to the exchange which is seeking to continue
or extend or has continued or extended unlisted trading privileges for
such security, and to the exchange, if any, on which such security
is listed and registered, shall be deemed adequate notice, and any
broker or dealer who makes or creates a market for such security,
v4ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 27, 1936. 1377
and any other person having a bona-fide interest in such proceeding,
shall upon application be entitled to be heard.
“Any security for which unlisted trading privileges are continued REE
or extended pursuant to this subsection shall be deemed to be reg- 7
istered on a national securities exchange within the meaning of this
title. The powers and duties of the Commission under subsection __Commission’s powers
(b) of section 19 of this title shall be applicable to the rules of an Vol, 48, D- 898,
exchange in respect of any such security. The Commission may, by Lied Paras
such rules and regulations as it deems necessary or appropriate in ‘4.
the public interest or for the protection of investors, either uncondi-
tionally or upon specified terms and conditions, or for stated periods,
exempt such securities from the operation of any provision off section _Vol 48, pp. 804 805,
13, 14, or 16 of this title.” ;
Sec. 2. Any application to continue unlisted trading privileges ee anions tos com
for any security heretofore filed by any exchange and approved by ‘or security heretofore
the Commission pursuant to clause (1) of subsection (f) of section *°PtI'§ p. sos,
12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and rules and regulations
thereunder shall be deemed to have been filed and approved pursuant
to clause (1) of said subsection (f) as amended by section 1 of this
Act.
Sec. 3. Section 15 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is ,,Over-the-counter
amended to read as follows: Vol. 48, p. 895; U. S.
“Src. 15. (a) No broker or dealer (other than one whose business “is “ot the mails,
is exclusively intrastate) shall make use of the mails or of any means (ty by unregistered
or instrumentality of interstate commerce to effect any transaction in, a
or to induce the purchase or sale of, any security (other than an
exempted security or commercial paper, bankers’ acceptances, or
commercial bills) otherwise than on a national securities exchange,
unless such broker or dealer is registered in accordance with sub-
section (b) of this section, baths
“(b) A broker or dealer may be registered for the purposes of atthe Gmtonte
this section by filing with the Commission an application for regis-
tration, which shall contain such information in such detail as to
such broker or dealer and any person directly or indirectly con-
trolling or controlled by, or under direct or indirect common control
with, such broker or dealer, as the Commission may by rules and
regulations require as necessary or appropriate in the public interest
or for the protection of investors. Except as hereinafter provided,
such registration shall become effective thirty days after the receipt
of such application by the Commission or within such shorter period
of time as the Commission may determine. te
“An application for registration of a broker or dealer to be formed ,,“PPUcation by, brok-
or organized may be made by a broker or dealer to which the broker formed or organized;
or dealer to be formed or organized is to be the successor, Such °°”
application shall contain such information in such detail as to the
applicant and as to the successor and any person directly or indirectly
controlling or controlled by, or under direct or indirect common
control with, the applicant or the successor, as the Commission may
by rules and regulations require as necessary or appropriate in the
public interest or for the protection of investors. Except as herein- iective date.
after provided, such registration shall become effective thirty days
after the receipt of such application by the Commission or within
such shorter period of time as the Commission may determine. Such ,, Adoption of applica-
registration shall terminate on the forty-fifth day after the effective a
date thereof, unless prior thereto the successor shall, in accordance
with such rules and regulations as the Commission may prescribe,
adopt such application as its own.
“Tf any amendment to any application for registration pursuant |,Ameniments to ap:
to this subsection is filed prior to the effective date thereof, such
amendment shall be deemed to have been filed simultaneously with
Effective date.
Postponement of ef-
fective date by Com-
mission.
Registration; denial
or revocation for speci-
fied causes.
Misleading, etc.,
statements in applica-
tion.
Previous conviction.
Subject to court in-
junction, etc.
Willful violations of
law, ete.
Postponement of ef-
fective date of registra-
tion.
Suspension of regis-
tration.
Withdrawal from reg-
istration by brokers,
ete.
Cancelation of regis-
tration or application
by Commission.
Use of mails, etc., to
induce purchase or sale
by fraudulent, ete., de-
vice.
Definition by Com-
mission.
747TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 97, 1936.
and as part of such application; except that the Commission may, if
it appears necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the
protection of investors, defer the effective date of any such registra-
tion as thus amended until the thirtieth day after the filing of such
amendment,
“The Commission shall, after appropriate notice and opportunity
for hearing, by order deny registration to or revoke the registration
of any broker or dealer if it finds that such denial or revocation is
in the public interest and that (1) such broker or dealer whether
prior or subsequent to becoming such, or (2) any partner, officer,
director, or branch manager of such broker or dealer (or any person
occupying a similar status or performing similar functions), or any
person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by such broker
or dealer, whether prior or subsequent to becoming such, (A) has
willfully made or caused to be made in any application for regis-
tration pursuant to this subsection or in any document supplemental
thereto or in any proceeding before the Commission with respect
to registration pursuant to this subsection any statement which was
at the time and in the light of the circumstances under which it was
made false or misleading with respect to any material fact; or (B)
has been convicted within ten years preceding the filing of any such
application or at any time thereafter of any felony or misdemeanor
involving the purchase or sale of any security or arising out of the
conduct of the business of a broker or dealer; or (C) is permanently
or temporarily enjoined by order, judgment, or decree of any court
of competent jurisdiction from engaging in or continuing any con-
duct or practice in connection with the purchase or sale of any
security; or (D) has willfully violated any provision of the Securities
Act of 1933, as amended, or of this title, or of any rule or regulation
thereunder. Pending final determination whether any such regis-
tration shall be denied, the Commission may by order postpone the
effective date of such registration for a period not to exceed fifteen
days, but if, after appropriate notice and opportunity for hearing, it
shall appear to the Commission to be necessary or appropriate in
the public interest or for the protection of investors to postpone the
effective date of such registration until final determination, the Com-
mission shall so order. Pending final determination whether any
such registration shall be revoked, the Commission shall by order
suspend such registration if, after appropriate notice and oppor-
tunity for hearing, such suspension shall appear to the Commission
to be necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the pro-
tection of investors. Any registered broker or dealer may, upon
such terms and conditions as the Commission may deem necessary
in the public interest or for the protection of investors, withdraw
from registration by filing a written notice of withdrawal with the
Commission. If the Commission finds that any registered broker or
dealer, or any broker or dealer for whom an application for regis-
tration is pending, is no longer in existence or has ceased to do
business as a broker or dealer, the Commission shall by order cancel
the registration or application of such broker or dealer.
“(c) No broker or dealer shall make use of the mails or of any
means or instrumentality of interstate commerce to effect any trans-
action in, or to induce the purchase or sale of, any security (other
than commercial paper, banker’s acceptances, or commercial bills)
otherwise than on a national securities exchange, by means of any
manipulative, deceptive, or other fraudulent device or contrivance.
The Commission shall, for the purposes of this subsection, by rules
and regulations define such devices or contrivances as are manipu-
lative, deceptive, or otherwise fraudulent.
74m” CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
Of the sums herein made available under the United States
Shipping Board Bureau, not to exceed an aggregate of $150,000
shall be expended for compensation of regular attorneys employed
on a yearly salary basis, including their clerical and legal assistants.
This title may be cited as the Department of Commerce Appro-
priation Act, 1937.
TITLE IV—DEPARTMENT OF LABOR
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY
Salaries: Secretary of Labor, Assistant Secretary, Second Assist-
ant Secretary, and other personal services in the District of
Columbia, $330,000: Provided, That persons (not exceeding ten
in number) now employed in the determination of wages pursuant
to the provisions of the Act entitled “An Act to amend the Act
approved March 3, 1931, relating to the rate of wages for laborers
and mechanics employed by contractors and subcontractors on public
buildings”, approved August 30, 1935, may be continued in such
employment and paid from the amount herein appropriated without
regard to the provisions of the civil-service laws requiring com-
petitive examinations: Provided further, That said personnel (except
attorneys and referees) shall be required to take nonassembled
examinations.
Promotion of health, safety, employment, and so forth: For
salaries and expenses in connection with the promotion of health,
safety, employment stabilization, and amicable industrial relations
for labor and industry, $140,000, of which amount not to exceed
$83,580 may be expended for personal services in the District of
Columbia.
Contingent expenses: For contingent and miscellaneous expenses
of the offices and bureaus of the Department, for which appropria-
tions for contingent and miscellaneous expenses are not specifically
made, including the purchase of stationery, furniture, and repairs
to the same, carpets, matting, oilcloths, file cases, towels, ice, brooms,
soap, sponges, laundry, street-car fares not exceeding $400; purchase,
exchange, maintenance, and repair of motorcycles and motor trucks;
maintenance, operation, and repair of a motor-propelled passenger-
carrying vehicle, to be used only for official purposes; freight and
express charges; newspaper clippings not to exceed $1,200, postage
to foreign countries, telegraph and telephone service, typewriters,
adding machines, and other labor-saving devices; purchase of law
books, books of reference, newspapers and periodicals, not exceeding
$4,500; contract stenographic services; all other necessary miscel-
laneous items and expenses not included in the foregoing; and not
to exceed $25,000 for purchase of certain supplies for the Immigra-
tion and Naturalization Service; in all, $112,500: Provided, That
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C.,
title 41, sec. 5) shall not be construed to apply to any purchase or
service rendered for the Department of Labor when the aggregate
amount involved does not exceed the sum of $100.
Printing and binding: For printing and binding for the Depart-
ment of Labor, including all its bureaus, offices, institutions, and
services located in Washington, District of Columbia, and elsewhere,
$250,000.
Commissioners of conciliation: To enable the Secretary of Labor
to exercise the authority vested in him by section 8 of the Act creat-
ing the Department of Labor (U. S. C., title 5, sec. 6111) and to
1So in original.
43115°—36——17
1547
Compensation of at-
torneys.
Short title.
Department of
Labor.
Office of the Secre-
tary.
Salaries.
Provisos.
_ Personnel determin-
ing wage rates, re-
tained.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 1011.
Ist
Nonassembled exami-
nations required.
Promotion of health,
safety, employment,
ete,
Contingent expenses,
Proviso.
Minor purchases.
R. 8., sec. 3709, p.
733; U.S. C., p. 1803.
Printing and binding.
Commissioners
of conciliation.
Vol. 37, p. 738.
U.S. C., p. 81.
1548
International Labor
Organization, Geneva.
Liaison with; ex-
penses, etc.
Vol. 48, p. 1182.
Printing and bind-
ing, etc.
Vol. 46, p. 818; U.S.
C., p. 45.
Bureau of Labor Sta-
tistics.
Salaries and expenses.
Immigration and
Naturalization Service.
Salaries and expenses:
Deportation, etc., of
aliens.
Vehicles.
Witness fees, etc.
74ta CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
appoint commissioners of conciliation, traveling expenses, telegraph
and telephone service, and not to exceed $80,000 for personal services
in the District of Columbia, $408,000.
Liaison with the International Labor Organization, Geneva, Switz-
erland, salaries and expenses: For a United States Labor Commis-
sioner and other personal services in Geneva, Switzerland; com-
pensation of interpreters, translators, and porters; traveling expenses
of employees, including transportation of employees, their families,
and effects, in going to and returning from foreign posts; rent, heat,
light, and fuel; hire, maintenance, and operation of motor-propelled
passenger-carrying vehicles; purchase and exchange of foreign and
domestic books, periodicals, and newspapers; purchase of furniture,
stationery, and supplies; printing and binding; postage; telephone
and other similar expenses, for which payment may be made in
advance; necessary technical or special investigations in connection
with matters falling within the scope of the International Labor
Organization; allowances for living quarters, including heat, fuel,
and light, as authorized by the Act approved June 26, 1930 (U.S. C.,
title 5, sec. 1182), not to exceed $1,700 for any person, and contingent
and such other expenses in the United States and elsewhere as the
Secretary of Labor may deem necessary, fiscal year 1937, $28,000.
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS
Salaries and expenses: For personal services, including temporary
statistical clerks, stenographers, and typewriters in the District of
Columbia, and including also experts and temporary assistants for
field service outside of the District of Columbia; traveling expenses,
including expenses of attendance at meetings concerned with the
work of the Bureau of Labor Statistics when incurred on the writ-
ten authority of the Secretary of Labor; purchase of periodicals,
documents, envelopes, price quotations, and reports and materials for
reports and bulletins of said Bureau, $850,000, of which amount not
to exceed $628,500 may be expended for the salary of the Commis-
sioner and other personal services in the District of Columbia.
IMMIGRATION AND NATURALIZATION SERVICE
Salaries and expenses: For enforcement of the laws regulating
the immigration to, the residence in, and the exclusion and deporta-
tion from the United States of aliens and persons subject to the
Chinese exclusion laws; for enforcement of the laws authorizing
a uniform rule for the naturalization of aliens; salaries, transporta-
tion, traveling, and other expenses of officers, clerks, and other
employees appointed to enforce said laws; care, detention, mainte-
nance, transportation, and traveling expenses incident to the depor-
tation and exclusion of aliens and persons subject to the Chinese
exclusion laws, as authorized by law, in the United States and to,
through, or in foreign countries; purchase of supplies and equip-
ment, including alterations and repairs; purchase, exchange, opera-
tion, maintenance, and pepalt of motor-propelled vehicles, including
passenger-carrying vehicles for official use in field work; arms,
ammunition and accessories; cost of reports of decisions of the Fed-
eral courts and digests thereof for official use; verifications of legal
papers; refunding of head tax, maintenance bills, and immigration
fines, upon presentation of evidence showing conclusively that col-
lection and deposit was made through error; mileage and fees to
witnesses subpenaed on behalf of the United States, and for all
other expenses necessary to enforce said laws; $9,740,000, all to be
expended under the direction of the Secretary of Labor, of which
74rn CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
amount not to exceed $545,000 may be expended for the salary of ,
the Commissioner of Immigration and Naturalization and_ other
personal services in the District of Columbia, including services of
1349
Services in the Dis-
rict.
persons authorized by law to be detailed there for duty: Provided, {rovisos-
That not to exceed $45,000 of the sum herein appropriated shall be
available for the purchase, including exchange, of motor-propelled
passenger-carrying vehicles: Provided further, That the Commis- , Privately owned
sioner of Immigration and Naturalization, with the approval of the
Secretary of Labor, may contract with officers and employees sta-
tioned outside of the District of Columbia, whose salaries are pay-
able from this appropriation, for the use, on official business outside
of the District of Columbia, of privately owned horses, and the
consideration agreed upon shall be payable from the funds herein
appropriated: Provided further, That not to exceed $36,000 of the
total amount herein appropriated shall be available for allowances
for living quarters, including heat, fuel, and light, as authorized by
the Act approved June 26, 1930 (U.S. C., title 5, sec. 118a), not
to exceed $1,700 for any person: Provided further, That $100,000
of the amount herein appropriated shall be available only for the
payment of extra compensation for overtime services of inspectors
and employees of the Immigration and Naturalization Service for
which the United States receives reimbursement in accordance with
the provisions of the Act of March 2, 1931 (U.S. C., title 8, sees.
109a and 109b): Provided further, That not to exceed $400 of the
Allowances for living
quarters, ete.
Vol. 46, p. 818.
U.8.C., p. 45.
Overtime services of
inspectors, ete.
Vol. 46, p. 1467.
U.S. C., p. 184.
_ Attendance at meet-
sum herein appropriated may be expended for attendance at meet-
ings concerned with the naturalization of aliens when incurred on
the written authority of the Secretary of Labor: Provided further,
That no part of this appropriation shall be available for the com-
pensation of assistants to clerks of United States courts: And pro-
vided further, That not to exceed $10,000 of the sum herein appro-
priated may be expended for payment of rewards, when specifically
authorized by the Secretary of Labor, for information leading to
the detection, arrest, or conviction of persons violating the immi-
gration or naturalization laws.
Immigration stations: For remodeling, repairing (including repairs
to the ferryboat, Ellis Island), renovating buildings, and purchase of
equipment, $110,000.
CHILDREN’S BUREAU
Salaries and expenses: For expenses of investigating and report-
ing upon matters pertaining to the welfare of children and child
life, and especially to investigate the questions of infant mortality ;
personal services, including experts and temporary assistants;
traveling expenses, including not to exceed $3,000 for expenses of
attendance at meetings for the promotion of child welfare when
incurred on the written authority of the Secretary of Labor; pur-
chase of reports and material for the publications of the Children’s
Bureau and for reprints from State, city, and private publications
for distribution when said reprints can be procured more cheaply
than they can be printed by the Government, and other necessary
expenses, $400,000, of which amount not to exceed $313,500 may be
expended for personal services in the District of Columbia.
MATERNAL AND CHILD WELFARE
Pay of assistants to
clerks of courts forbid-
den.
Payment of rewards.
Immigration stations.
Children’s Bureau.
Salaries and expenses.
Investigations.
Maternal and child
welfare.
Salaries and expenses: For all authorized and necessary adminis-
trative expenses of the Children’s Bureau in performing the duties s
Salaries and expenses.
Public Laws, Ist
eSS., DP. 629,
imposed upon it by title V of the Social Security Act, approved 445) °C» Supp. 1p.
August 14, 1935, including personal services, rentals, repairs, and
Social Security Act.
Payments under
State plans.
Maternal and child-
health services, grants
to States.
Public Ist
Laws,
sess., D. 629.
Provisos.
Basis of allotments,
1937.
Supplemental aid not
included.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 630.
ist
Services for crippled
children, grants to
States.
Public Laws, 1st
SeSs., D. 631.
Proviso.
Basis of allotments,
37.
Child-welfare serv-
ices, grants to States.
Public Laws, 1st
sess., D. 633.
Proviso.
Basis of allotments,
1937.
Women’s Bureau.
Salaries and expenses.
Vol. 41, p. 987; U
S. C., p. 1320.
747” CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
alterations to buildings, in the District of Columbia and elsewhere;
printing and binding; supples; services; equipment; newspapers,
books of reference, periodicals, and press clippings; travel expenses
including expenses of attendance at meetings and attendance o
cooperating officials and consultants at conferences when called by
re Children’s Bureau with the approval of the Secretary of Labor,
299,000.
In the administration of title V of the Social Security Act for
the fiscal year 1937, payments to States for any quarter of the fiscal
year 1937 under parts 1 and 2 may be made with respect to any
State plan approved under such respective parts by the Chief of the
Children’s Bureau prior to or during such quarter, but no such
payment shall be made with respect to any plan for any period prior
to the quarter in which such plan was submitted to the Chief of the
Children’s Bureau for approval.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR MATERNAL AND CHILD-HEALTH SERVICES
Grants to States for maternal and child-health services, Chil-
dren’s Bureau: For grants to States for the purpose of enabling
each State to extend and improve services for promoting the health
of mothers and children, as authorized in title V, part 1, of the
Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49 Stat. 629-631),
$2,820,000: Provided, That in carrying out such part 1, the allot-
ments to States and expenditures thereunder for the fiscal year 1937
are authorized to be made on the basis of a total of $3,800,000 for
all States (as defined in such Act): Provided further, That any
allotment to a State pursuant to section 502 (b) shall not be included
in computing for the purposes of subsections (a) and (b) of section
504 an amount expended or estimated to be expended by the State.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR SERVICES FOR CRIPPLED CHILDREN
Grants to States for services for crippled children, Children’s
Bureau: For the purpose of enabling each State to extend and
improve services for crippled children, as authorized in title V,
part 2, of the Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49
Stat., 631-633), $2,150,000: Provided, That in carrying out such
part 2, the allotments to States (as defined in such Act) and expendi-
tures thereunder for the fiscal year 1937 are authorized to be made
on the basis of a total of $2,850,000 for all States.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR CHILD-WELFARE SERVICES
Grants to States for child-welfare services, Children’s Bureau:
For grants to States for the purpose of enabling the United States,
through the Children’s Bureau, to cooperate with State public-
welfare agencies in establishing, extending, and strengthening pub-
lic-welfare services for the care of homeless or neglected children,
or children in danger of becoming delinquent, as authorized in title
V, part 3, of the Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49
Stat. 633), $1,200,000: Provided, That in carrying out such part 3,
the allotments to States (as defined in such Act) and expenditures
thereunder for the fiscal year 1937 are authorized to be made on
the basis of a total of $1,500,000 for all States,
WOMEN’S BUREAU
Salaries and expenses: For carrying out the provisions of the Act
“ entitled “An Act to establish in the Department of Labor a bureau
to be known as the Women’s Bureau”, approved June 5, 1920
741” CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
(U.S. C., title 29, sees 11-16) , including personal services in the Dis-
trict of Columbia, not to exceed $184,500; purchase of material for
reports and educational exhibits, and traveling expenses, $153,200,
of which sum not to exceed $3,000 shall be available for expenses
of attendance at meetings concerned with the work of said bureau
when incurred on the written authority of the Secretary of Labor.
UNITED STATES EMPLOYMENT SERVICE
For carrying out the provisions of the Act entitled “An Act to
provide for the establishment of a national employment system
and for cooperation with the States in the promotion of such sys-
tem, and for other purposes”, approved June 6, 1933; personal
services and rent in the District of Columbia and elsewhere; travel-
ing expenses, including expenses of attendance at meetings con-
cerned with the work of the United States Employment Service when
specifically authorized by the Secretary of Labor; law books, books
of reference, newspapers and periodicals, printing and binding,
supplies and equipment, telegraph and telephone service, and mis-
cellaneous expenses, $2,785,000, of which amount not to exceed
$885,000 shall be available for the Veterans’ Placement Service, the
Farm Placement Service, District of Columbia Public Employment
Center, and all other purposes, including not to exceed $197,500 for
personal services in the Department in the District of Columbia, and
the remainder shall be available for payment to the several States
in accordance with the provisions of the said Act of June 6, 1933,
as amended: Provided, That apportionments for the fiscal year
1937 shall be on the basis of a total apportionment to all States of
$3,000,000, and in order to supply the Government’s apportionments
to States under such Act during the fiscal years 1936 and 1937,
which are not capable of being supplied under the foregoing appro-
priation, there is hereby appropriated so much as may be necessary
to supply such apportionments, but not more than $1,675,000.
UNITED STATES HOUSING CORPORATION
Salaries and expenses: For officers, clerks, and other employees,
and for contingent and miscellaneous expenses, in the District of
Columbia and elsewhere, including blank books, maps, stationery,
file cases, towels, ice, brooms, soap, freight and express charges, com-
munication service, travel expense, printing and binding not to exceed
$100, and all other miscellaneous items and expenses not included
in the foregoing and necessary to collect and account for the receipts
from the sale of properties and the receipts from the operation of
unsold properties of the United States Housing Corporation, the
Bureau of Industrial Housing and Transportation, property com-
mandeered by the United States through the Secretary of Labor,
and to collect the amounts advanced to transportation facilities and
others; for payment of special assessments and other utility, munici-
pal, State, and county charges or assessments unpaid by purchasers,
and which have been assessed against property in which the United
States Housing Corporation has an interest, and to defray expenses
incident to foreclosing mortgages, conducting sales under deeds of
trust, or reacquiring title or possession of real property under
default proceeding, including attorney fees, witness fees, court costs,
charges, and other miscellaneous expenses; for the maintenance and
repair of houses, buildings, and improvements which are unsold; in
all, $9,000: Provided, That no person shall be employed hereunder at
a rate of compensation exceeding $4,000 per annum, and only one
1351
Employment Service.
Providing for promo-
tion of employment.
Vol. 48, p. 113; U.S.
C., p. 1324.
Attendance at meet-
ings.
Printing and bind-
ing, ete.
Veterans’ Placement
Service, Farm Place-
ment Service, D. C.
Public Employment
Center.
Proviso.
Basis of apportion-
ments, 1937.
United States Hous-
ing Corporation.
Salaries and expenses.
Printing and binding.
Special assessments.
Provisos.
Salary limitation.
1352
Expenditures re-
stricted. -
Bituminous Coal La-
bor Board.
Salaries and expenses.
Post, p. 1627.
Printing and binding.
Short title
Payment restriction,
persons failing to re-
ceive Senate confirma-
tion,
Payment to cotton
ginners.
Ante, p. 1116.
Cotton Control Act,
administrative ex-
penses.
Vol. 48, p. 598.
Proviso.
Time limitation.
Great Lakes Exposi-
tion.
Participation ex-
penses.
Ante, p. 1243.
May 15, 1936.
[S. J. Res. 231.]
[Pub. Res., No. 91.]
Landing of the
Swedes in Delaware.
Commemorative
coinage, authorized.
Number,
74rH CONGRESS. SESS. I. CHS. 405, 406. MAY 15, 1936.
person may be employed at that rate: Provided further, That no
part of the appropriations heretofore made and available for
expenditure by the United States Housing Corporation shall be
expended for the purposes for which appropriations are made herein.
BITUMINOUS COAL LABOR BOARD
Salaries and expenses: For three Board members and other per-
sonal services in the District of Columbia and elsewhere, and for all
other necessary expenditures of the Bituminous Coal Labor Board
in performing the duties imposed upon said Board by the Bitu-
minous Coal Conservation Act of 1935, including supplies, station-
ery, telephone service, telegrams, furniture, office equipment, travel
expenses, and contract stenographic reporting services, $79,300.
Printing and binding, Bituminous Coal Labor Board: For all
printing and binding for the Bituminous Coal Labor Board, $2,500.
This title may be cited as the Department of Labor Appropriation
Act, 1937.
Src. 2. No part of the money appropriated under this Act shall be
paid to any person for the filling of any position for which he or she
has been nominated after the Senate has voted not to approve of the
nomination of said person.
Sec. 3. That in passing upon applications made for compensation
under the provisions of the item for “Payment to cotton ginners”
contained in Title I of the Supplemental Appropriation Act, fiscal
year 1936 (Public Law Numbered 440, Seventy-fourth Congress),
and upon payments pursuant to such applications, the Secretary of
Agriculture and the Comptroller General of the United States are
authorized and directed, in the interest of saving as much adminis-
trative expense as possible and in order to avoid delay in passing
upon such applications, to assume that the additional expenses
incurred in connection with the administration of the Act of April
21, 1934 (491 Stat., 598-607), equaled 25 cents per bale, counting
round bales as half bales, during the period June 1, 1935, to February
10, 1936, inclusive: Provided, That no payment shall be made on any
application for such compensation unless the application is filed prior
to September 1, 1936.
Sec. 4. Great Lakes Exposition: For the expenses of the participa-
tion of the Government of the United States in the Great Lakes
Exposition as provided for by Senate Joint Resolution Numbered
233, including the reimbursement of other appropriations from which
payments may have been made for any of the purposes therein
specified, to be immediately available, $275,000.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
[CHAPTER 406.] x
JOINT RESOLUTION
To authorize the coinage of 50-cent pieces in commemoration of the three-
hundredth anniversary of the landing of the Swedes in Delaware.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That in commemoration
of the three-hundredth anniversary of the landing of the Swedes in
Delaware there shall be coined at a mint of the United States to be
designated by the Director of the Mint not less than twenty-five
thousand silver 50-cent pieces of standard size, weight, and composi-
tion and of a special appropriate single design, containing some
1So in original.
74tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 406, 407. MAY 15, 1936.
recognized emblem of the State of Delaware, to be fixed by the Direc-
tor of the Mint, with the approval of the Secretary of the Treasury,
but the United States shall not be subject to the expense of making the
necessary dies and other preparations for this coinage.
Sec. 2. The coins herein authorized shall bear the date 1936, irre-
spective of the year in which they are minted or issued, shall be legal
tender in any payment to the amount of their face value, and shall be
issued only upon the request of the president of the Delaware Swed-
ish Tercentenary Commission upon payment by him of the par value
of such coins, but not less than twenty-five thousand such coins shall
be issued to him at any one time and no such coins shall be issued
after the expiration of one year after the date of enactment of this
Act. Such coins may be disposed of at par or at a premium by such
commission, and the net proceeds shall be used by it in defraying the
expenses incidental and appropriate to the commemoration of such
event.
Src. 3. All laws now in force relating to the subsidiary silver coins
of the United States and the coining or striking of the same, regulat-
ing and guarding the process of coinage, providing for the purchase
of material, and for the transportation, distribution, and redemption
of coins, for the prevention of debasement or counterfeiting, for the
security of the coins, or for any other purposes, whether such laws
are penal or otherwise, shall, so far as applicable, apply to the coinage
herein authorized.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
[CHAPTER 407.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To provide for participation by the United States in an Inter-American Confer-
ence to be held at Buenos Aires, Argentina, or at the capital of another American
republic, in 1936.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any money not other-
wise appropriated, the sum of $75,000 to be used for participation
by the United States in an Inter-American Conference, in pursuance
of and for the purposes set forth in a letter from the President of
the United States dated January 30, 1936, to be held at Buenos
Aires, Argentina, or at the capital of another American republic, in
1936, including personal services in the District of Columbia or
elsewhere without reference to the Classification Act of 1923, as
amended; stenographic reporting and other services by contract if
deemed necessary without regard to section 3709 of the Revised
Statutes (U. S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent; traveling expenses (and
by indirect routes and by airplane if specifically authorized by the
Secretary of State); hire, maintenance, and operation of motor-
propelled passenger-carrying vehicles; equipment, purchase of
necessary books, documents, newspapers, periodicals, and maps; sta-
tionery; official cards, entertainment; printing and binding; and
such other expenses as may be authorized by the Secretary of State,
including the reimbursement of other appropriations from which
payments may have been made for any of the purposes herein
specified, to be expended under the direction of the Secretary of
State, fiscal year 1936, to remain available until June 30, 1937.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
1355
No Federal expense
for dies, etc.
Date, issue, ete.
Disposal.
Coinage laws appli-
cable.
May 15, 1936.
[S. J. Res. 248.]
[Pub. Res., No. 92.]
Inter-American Con-
ference, 1936.
Appropriation au-
thorized for participa-
tion expenses.
Ante, p. 1319.
U.S. C., p. 85.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S., sec. 3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Vehicles.
Printing and binding.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
1554
May 18, 1936.
[H.'R. 10589.]
[Public, No. 600.]
Missouri River.
Bridge construction
at Niobrara, Nebr.
Textual changes.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 1074.
Amendment.
May 18, 1936.
(H.R. 10847.]
Ist
[Public, No. 601.]
New York Ci
N. Y
ty,
Acquisition cf land
near, for cemeterial
purposes, authorized.
Appropriation
thorized.
Post, p. 1641.
au-
741” CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 420, 421. MAY 18, 19386.
(CHAPTER 420.]
AN ACT
To amend section 32 of the Act entitled ‘‘An Act to authorize the construction
of certain bridges and to extend the times for commencing and/or completing
the construction of other bridges over the navigable waters of the United
States, and for other purposes’’, approved August 30, 1935.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That subsection (a)
of section 32 of the Act entitled “An Act to authorize the construction
of certain bridges and to extend the times for commencing and/or
completing the construction of other bridges over the navigable waters
of the United States, and for other purposes”, approved August 30,
1935, is amended by striking out “the village board of the village
of Niobrara, county of Knox, State of Nebraska”, and inserting in
lieu thereof the following: “the county of Knox, State of Nebraska”,
Sec. 2. Subsection (b) of such section 32 is amended by striking
out “the Village Board of the Village of Niobrara, county of Knox,
State of Nebraska”, and inserting in lieu thereof the following: “the
county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
Sxc. 3. (a) Subsection (c) of such section 82 is amended by strik-
ing out “The said Villiage Board of the Villiage of Niobrara, county
of Knox, State of Nebraska”, and inserting in lieu thereof the
following: “The said county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
(b) Subsection (c) of such section 32 is further amended by strik-
ing out “to fix the charge tolls for transit” and inserting in lieu
thereof the following: “to fix and charge tolls for transit”.
Sec. 4. Subsection (d) of such section 32 is amended by striking
out “After a sinking sufficient for amortization shall have been so
provided, said bridge” and inserting in lieu thereof the following:
“After a sinking fund sufficient for such amortization shall have been
so provided, said bridge”.
Sec. 5. The right to alter, amend, or repeal this Act is hereby
expressly reserved.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 421.]
AN ACT
To authorize the acquisition of land for cemeterial purposes in the vicinity of
New York City, New York.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of War be, and he is hereby, authorized to acquire by purchase,
condemnation, or otherwise such suitable lands in the vicinity of New
York City as in his judgment are required for enlargement of exist-
ing national cemetery facilities, and the sum of $250,000, or so much
thereof as may be necessary, is hereby authorized to be appropriated
from any funds in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, which
sum shall remain available until expended.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
74ra CONGRESS. SESS. IT. CHS. 422, 423. MAY 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 422.]
AN ACT
To amend section 5 of the Act of March 2, 1919, generally known as the ‘‘War
Minerals Relief Statutes.”
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in any claim
that has heretofore been filed within the time and in the manner
provided by the Act approved March 2, 1919 (40 Stat. 1272), as
amended, generally referred to as the “War Minerals Relief Statutes”,
in which the Supreme Court of the District of Columbia under the
authority conferred upon said court by the Act approved February
13, 1929 (45 Stat. 1166), has adjudged or decreed interest payments
or obligations to be losses reimbursable within the meaning of the
Act of March 2, 1919 (40 Stat. 1272), as amended, the Secretary of
the Interior shall open or reopen such claim and include in his
adjustments and payments of losses, interest which has been paid or
has accrued to the date of approval of this Act: Provided, however,
That such losses shall be shown to the satisfaction of the Secretary
of the Interior as a matter of fact to be the result of a legal obliga-
tion incurred within the statutory period as provided in said Act of
March 2, 1919: And provided further, That the sum paid in satisfy-
ing said claims shall not exceed in total $1,250,000. It is also
provided that all settlements under this Act and pursuant to its
provisions shall constitute full and complete discharge of all obliga-
tions of the United States accruing under the War Minerals Act
and Acts amendatory thereof.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 423.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To provide for participation by the United States in the Ninth International
Congress of Military Medicine and Pharmacy in Rumania, in 1937; and to
authorize and request the President of the United States to invite the Inter-
national Congress of Military Medicine and Pharmacy to hold its tenth
congress in the United States in 1939, and to invite foreign countries to par-
ticipate in that congress.
Resolwed by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That there is hereby
authorized to be appropriated, out of any money in the Treasury not
otherwise appropriated, the sum of $11,500, or so much thereof as
may be necessary, for the expenses of participation by the United
States in the Ninth International Congress of Military Medicine and
Pharmacy to be held in Rumania in 1937, including personal services
in the District of Columbia or elsewhere without reference to the
Classification Act of 1923, as amended; stenographic reporting and
other services by contract if deemed necessary without regard to
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes (U.S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent;
traveling expenses; purchase of necessary books, documents, news-
papers, periodicals, and maps; stationery; official cards; entertain-
ment; printing and binding, including the payment of not to exceed
$500 to the Association of Military Surgeons of the United States
toward the cost of printing the report of the American Delegation
to the Ninth Congress; and such other expenses as may be authorized
by the Secretary of State, including the reimbursement of other
appropriations from which payments may have been made for any
of the purposes herein specified, to be expended under the direction
of the Secretary of State.
1355
May 18, 1936.
__[8.1432.]
[Public, No. 602.]
“War Minerals Re-
lief Statutes’, amend-
ment.
Vol. 40, p. 1272; Vol.
42, p. 322; Vol. 45, p.
1166.
Post, p. 1619.
Interest payments on
certain claims under.
Provisos.
Condition.
Limitation on total
amount.
Settlements; dis-
charge of liability.
May 18, 1936.
[H. J. Res. 538.]
[Pub. Res., No. 93.]
Ninth International
Congress of Military
Medicine and Phar-
macy, Rumania, 1937.
Sum authorized for
participation expenses.
Post, p. 1634.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S., see.3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Printing and bind-
ing; report of Ameri-
can Delegation.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
1356
Invitation to hold
10th congress in United
States; foreign govern-
ments to participate.
May 18, 1936.
(H. J. Res. 547.]
~[Pub. Res., No. 94.]
Great Lakes Exposi-
tion, Cleveland, Ohio.
Dutiable articles, im-
ported for exhibition
purposes, etc., ad-
_ mitted free, ‘under regu-
lations.
Ante, pp. 1243, 1352.
Sales permitted.
Provisos. 4
Duty on articles
withdrawn.
Deterioration allow-
ance.
Marking require-
ments.
Articles abandoned.
Transfer privileges.
Exposition deemed
sole consignee of mer-
chandise.
Incurred Federal ex-
penses reimbursable.
747ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS, 423, 424. MAY 18, 1936.
Src. 2. That the President be, and he is hereby, authorized and
requested to extend to the International Congress of Military Medi-
cine and Pharmacy an invitation to hold its tenth congress in the
United States in 1939, and to invite foreign governments to partici-
pate in that congress.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 424.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
Providing for the importation of articles free from tariff or customs duty for the
purpose of exhibition at Great Lakes Exposition to be held at Cleveland,
Ohio, beginning in June 1936, and for other purposes.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That all articles which
shall be imported from foreign countries for the purpose of exhibi-
tion at the international exposition to be held at Cleveland, Ohio,
beginning in June 1936, by Great Lakes Exposition, or for use in
constructing, installing, or maintaining foreign buildings, or exhibits
at the said ‘exhibition, upon which articles there shall be a tariff or
customs duty shall be admitted without payment of such tariff, cus-
toms duty, fees, or charges under such regulations as the Secretary of
the Treasury shall prescribe ; but it shall be lawful at any time during
or within three months after the close of the said exposition to sell
within the area of the exposition any articles provided for herein,
subject to such regulations for the security of the revenue and for the
collection of import duties as the Secretary of the Treasury shall pre-
scribe: Provided, That all such articles, when withdrawn for con-
sumption or use in the United States, shall be subject to the duties,
if any, imposed upon such articles by the revenue laws in force at the
date of their withdrawal; and on such articles which shall have
suffered diminution or deterioration from incidental handling or
exposure the duties, if payable, shall be assessed according to the
appraised value at the time of withdrawal from entry hereunder for
consumption or entry under the general tariff law: Provided further,
That imported articles provided for herein shall not be subject to an
marking requirements of the general tariff laws, except when atk
articles are withdrawn for consumption or use in the United States,
in which case they shall not be released from customs custody until
properly marked, but no additional duty shall be assessed because
such articles were not sufficiently marked when imported into the
United States: Provided further, That at any time during or within
three months after the close of the exposition any article entered
hereunder may be abandoned to the Government or destroyed under
customs supervision, whereupon any duties on such article shall be
remitted : Provided further, That articles which have been admitted
without payment of duty for exhibition under any tariff law and
which have remained in continuous customs custody or under a cus-
toms exhibition bond and imported articles in bonded warehouses
under the general tariff law may be accorded the privilege of trans-
fer to ond entry for exhibition at the said exposition under such
regulations as the Secretary of the Treasury shall prescribe: And
provided further, That Great Lakes Exposition shall be deemed, for
customs purposes only, to be the sole consignee of all merchandise
imported under the provisions of this Act, and that the actual and
necessary customs charges for labor, services, and other expenses in
connection with the entry, examination, appraisement, release, or
custody, together with the necessary charges for salaries of customs
officers and « employees in connection with the supervision, custody of,
v4ta CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 424, 425, 497. MAY 18, 19, 1936.
and accounting for articles imported under the provisions of this Act,
shall be reimbursed by Great Lakes Exposition to the Government
of the United States under regulations to be prescribed by the Secre-
tary of the Treasury, and that receipts from such reimbursements
shall be deposited as refunds to the appropriation from which paid,
in the manner provided for in section 524, Tariff Act of 1930,
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 425.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To authorize an appropriation for the expenses of participation by the United
States in a conference at Brussels to revise the Convention for the Protection
of Literary and Artistic Works concluded at Bern, September 9, 1886, and
revised at Rome, June 2, 1928.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any money in the
Treasury not otherwise appropriated, the sum of $6,500, or so much
thereof as may be necessary, for the expenses of participation by
the United States in the conference to convene at Brussels, Belgium,
for the purpose of revising the Convention for the Protection of
Literary and Artistic Works, concluded at Bern, September 9, 1886,
and revised at Rome, June 2, 1928, including personal services in
the District of Columbia and elsewhere without reference to the
Classification Act of 1923, as amended; stenographic, reporting, and
other services by contract, if deemed necessary, without regard to
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes (U.S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent;
traveling expenses; purchases of necessary books, documents, news-
papers, periodicals, and maps; stationery; official cards; entertain-
ment; printing and binding; and such other expenses as may be
authorized by the Secretary of State, including the reimbursement
of other appropriations from which payments may have been made
for any of the purposes herein specified, to be expended under the
direction of the Secretary of State.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 427.]
AN ACT
To authorize certain officers of the United States Navy, officers and enlisted men
of the Marine Corps, and officers and enlisted men of the United States Army
to accept such medals, orders, diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have
been tendered them by foreign governments in appreciation of services rendered.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the following-
named officers of the United States Navy, and officers and enlisted
men of the Marine Corps, are hereby authorized to accept such
medals, orders, diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have been
tendered them by foreign governments in appreciation of services
rendered :
United States Navy: Admiral William H. Standley; Rear Admiral
David F. Sellers; Rear Admiral Wat T. Cluverius; Rear Admiral
Hayne Ellis; Rear Admiral Ernest J. King; Rear Admiral Louis
M. Nulton, retired; Rear Admiral Yates Stirling, Junior; Rear
Admiral John R. Y. Blakely, retired; Rear Admiral Edward H.
Campbell; Rear Admiral Walter N. Vernou; Rear Admiral Harley
H. Christy; Rear Admiral Henry V. Butler; Rear Admiral Walter
S. Crosley; Rear Admiral Frank B. Upham; Rear Admiral Edward
1357
Deposit of, as re-
funds.
Vol. 46, p. 741.
U.S. C., p. 894.
May 18, 1936.
[H. J. Res. 569.]
[Pub. Res., No. 95.]
Convention for the
Protection of Literary
and Artistic Works,
eenerence for revision
of.
Sum authorized for
participation expenses.
Post, p. 1633.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S., sec.3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
May 19, 1936.
[S. 1975.]
|Public, No. 603.]
Navy, Marine Corps,
and Army.
Acceptance of certain
decorations, etc., ten-
dered by foreign gov-
ernments to designated
oflicers, etc., authorized.
Navy.
1358
Navy—Continued.
74ma CONGRESS. SESS.II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
B. Fenner; Rear Admiral George T. Pettengill; Rear Admiral Clark
N. Woodward; Rear Admiral William H. Allen; Captain Reuben
B. Coffey; Captain Vaughn K. Coman; Captain Gordon W. Haines;
Captain Alfred G. Howe; Captain Victor A. Kimberly; Captain
David M. Le Breton; Captain William R. Sayles; Captain Halsey
Powell; Captain Willis W. Bradley, Junior; Captain Frank H.
Roberts; Captain Arthur B. Cook; Captain Benyaurd B. Wygent;
Captain Rufus F. Zogbaum, Junior; Captain Frank Jack Fletcher;
Captain Matthias E. Manly; Captain Alfred W. Brown; Captain
Augustine T. Beauregard; Captain Harold M. Bemis; Captain Her-
bert H. Michael; Captain MacGillivray Milne; Captain Milo F.
Draemel; Captain Edward A. Evers, Naval Reserve; Captain
Edward T. Hooper, Supply Corps; Captain Holden C. Richardson,
Construction Corps, retired; Captain Kent C. Melhorn, Medical
Corps; Captain Lucius W. Johnson, Medical Corps; Commander
Ernest L. Gunther; Commander Hamilton V. Bryan; Commander
John D. Price; Commander Harold C. Train; Commander Ward W.
Waddell; Commander William W. Smith; Commander Calvin N.
Cobb; Commander Patrick N. L. Bellinger; Commander Harry G.
Patrick; Commander Earl W. Spencer; Commander William H.
Pashley; Commander Aaron S. Merrill; Commander Douglas W.
Fuller; Commander Ralph F. Wood; Commander Joel T. Boone,
Medical Corps; Commander Joseph A. J. McMullin, Medical Corps;
Commander Gordon D. Hale, Medical Corps; Commander Walter
C. Espech, Medical Corps; Commander Maurice M. Witherspoon,
Chaplain Corps; Commander Bernhard H. Bieri; Lieutenant Com-
mander Albert S. Marley; Lieutenant Commander Charles G,
Moore, Junior; Lieutenant Commander John J. Carrick, Naval
Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Emil J. Carroll, Naval Reserve;
Lieutenant Commander Francis G. Donebrink; Lieutenant Com-
mander Victor C. Barringer, Junior; Lieutenant Commander Ralph
A. Ofstie; Lieutenant Commander Lucien B. Green, Second, retired;
Lieutenant Commander Dallas D. Dupre; Lieutenant Commander
Harold B. Crow, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Edward
O. McDonnell, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Schuyler F.
Cumings, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Charles W. Steven-
son, Supply Corps; Lieutenant Commander Charles R. O'Leary,
Supply Corps; Lieutenant Commander Hardy V. Hughens, Medical
Corps; Lieutenant Commander Thomas L. Morrow, Medical Corps;
Lieutenant Commander Louis E. Mueller, Medical Corps; Lieu-
tenant Commander Victor B. Riden, Medical Corps; Lieutenant
Commander William M. H. Turville, Medical Corps; Lieutenant
Commander Horace R. Boone, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Com-
mander Warwick T. Brown, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander
Vincent Hernandez, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Harry
S. Harding, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Robert W. Wim-
berly, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Hillard L. Weer,
Medical Corps; Lieutenant Robert F. Hickey; Lieutenant Harvey
R. Bowes; Lieutenant Buell F. Brandt; Lieutenant George H.
De Baun; Lieutenant John M. Brewster; Lieutenant Curry E.
Eason; Lieutenant Maxwell B. Saben; Lieutenant John F. Gillon;
Lieutenant Colonel H. Mansfield, Chaplain Corps; Lieutenant
Joseph O. Saurette; Lieutenant Robert H. Smith; Lieutenant Don-
ald R. Tallman; Lieutenant John Davis, retired; Lieutenant Walter
L. Bach, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Walter G. Kilbury, Medical
Corps; Lieutenant Hugh E. Mouldin, Dental Corps; Lieutenant
(Junior Grade) James H. Taylor; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Frank E. Latauzo, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Robert C. Douthat, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 497. MAY 19, 1936.
Freeman C. Harris, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Warren G. Wieand, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
George H. Mills, Dental Corps; Ensign Howard F. Hozey, Naval
Reserve Force; Chief Boatswain William C. Baker; Chief Pharma-
cist Roy Aikman; Chief Pharmacist Leon H. French.
United States Marine Corps: Major General James C. Breckin-
ridge; Brigadier General George Richards; Brigadier General Rufus
M. Lane, retired; Brigadier General Hugh Matthews; Brigadier
General Randolph C. Barkeley; Brigadier General Frederick L.
Bradman; Brigadier General Louis McCarty Little; Brigadier Gen-
eral Douglas C. McDougal; Brigadier General Richard T. Williams;
Colonel Richard M. Cutts; Colonel Presley M. Rixey, Junior; Colonel
Seth Williams; Colonel James J. Meade; Colonel Clayton S. Vogel;
Colonel Calvin B. Matthews; Lieutenant Colonel Lauren S. Willis,
retired; Lieutenant Colonel Jeter R. Horton; Lieutenant Colonel
Franklin B. Garrett; Lieutenant Colonel Calhoun Ancrum; Lieu-
tenant Colonel William S. Wise; Lieutenant Colonel William B.
Smith; Lieutenant Colonel Charles F. M. Price; Lieutenant Colonel
Ross E. Rosell; Lieutenant Colonel John Marston; Lieutenant
Colonel Julian C. Smith; Lieutenant Colonel Roy E. Geiger; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Harry Schmidt; Lieutenant Colonel De Witt Peck;
Lieutenant Colonel William B. Sullivan; Lieutenant Colonel Henry
L. Larsen; Lieutenant Colonel Arnold W. Jacobsen; Major Thomas
S. Clarke; Major Joseph C. Fegan; Major Frederick R. Hoyt;
Major Marion B. Humphrey; Major Allen H. Turnage; Major
Louis M. Bourne; Major Matthew 8. Kingman; Major John F. S.
Norris; Major Anderson C. Deering; Major Ralph J. Mitchell;
Major Samuel L. Howard; Major Oscar R. Cauldwell; Major
Thomas E. Watson; Major Walter C. Sheard; Major Roger W.
Peard; Major Lloyd L. Leach; Major Raphael Griffin; Major
Thomas P. Cheatham; Major Louis W. Whaley; Major Leroy P.
Hunt; Major Leo D. Merale; Major Lemuel C. Shepherd, Junior;
Major James E. Davis; Major Alphonse De Carre; Major James T.
Moore; Major Alfred N. Noble; Major Franklin A. Hart; Major
William N. Beat; Major Herbert Hardy; Major Ralph E. West;
Captain Graves B. Erskine; Captain Robert Yowell; Captain
Francis P. Mulcahy; Captain Maurice C. Holmes; Captain Eugene
F. C. Collier; Captain Otto Salzman; Captain Carl S. Schmidt;
Captain Harry W. Gamble; Captain Roscoe Arnett; Captain
Maurice S. Gregory; Captain James P. Smith; Captain Edward G.
Kuefe; Captain Max Cox; Captain Oliver P. Smith; Captain Joseph
O. Ward; Captain Edward L. Durvall, Junior; Captain John C.
Wood; Captain Jacob Lienhard; Captain Victor F. Bleasdale; Cap-
tain Leonard H. Rea; Captain James P. Schwerin; Captain John
H. Parker; Captain Walter S. Casper; Captain Willett Elmore;
Captain Benjamin W. Gally; Captain James A. Nixson, Captain
Frederick M. Howard; Captain Lee W. Brown; Captain Harold G.
Major; Captain Bernard Dubel; Captain Hamilton M. H. Fleming;
Captain Claude A. Phillips; Captain Harold W. Whitney; Captain
Harry Paul; Captain Frank N. Costtge; Captain Byron F’. Johnson;
Captain William J. Livingston ; Captain George E, Monson; Captain
Amor L. Sims; Captain George R. Rowen; Captain Brady L. Vogt;
Captain Clinton W. McLeod; Captain Roy C. Swick; Captain
Reuben B. Price; Captain William J. Whaling; Captain Frank N.
Gilman; Captain Monitor Watchman; Captain George L. Maynard ;
Captain Benjamin W. Atkinson; Captain William L. Bales; Cap-
tain Frederick C. Diebush; Captain Terrell J. Crawford; Captain
John T. Walker; Captain William P. T. Hill; Captain Jesse A.
Nelson; Captain Henry A. Carr; Captain Wilham C. Hall;
1359
Navy—Continued.
Marine Corps.
1360
747tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
Marine Corps—Con- Captain Edwin J. Farrell; Captain Louis E. Woods; Captain
tinued.
Augustus H. Fricke; Captain William 8. Fellers; Captain Herbert
S. Keimling; Captain Walter W. Wensinger; Captain Ernest E.
Lincort; First Lieutenant William L. McKittrick; First Lieutenant
Max D. Smith; First Lieutenant David A. Stafford; First Lieu-
tenant Roy W. Conkey; First Lieutenant Harold N. Rosecrans;
First Lieutenant Horace D. Palmer; First Lieutenant Hayne D.
Royden; First Lieutenant Christian F. Schilt; First Lieutenant
James H. Strother; First Lieutenant Ivan W. Miller; First Lieu-
tenant John C. McQueen; First Lieutenant William W. Davies;
First Lieutenant James W. Smith; First Lieutenant Lewis A. Hohn;
First Lieutenant Lucian C. Whitaker; First Lieutenant Ralph E.
Forsyth; First Lieutenant Pierson E. Conradt; First Lieutenant
Cregon A. Williams; First Lieutenant Evans F. Carlson; First
Lieutenant John W. Lakes; First Lieutenant George F. Good,
Junior; First Lieutenant William R. Hughes; First Lieutenant Max-
well H. Mizell; First Lieutenant Charles W. Kail; First Lieutenant
Lewis D. Fuller; First Lieutenant Joe N. Smith; First Lieutenant
Herbert F. Becker; First Lieutenant Alexander W. Kreiser; First
Lieutenant Edward J. Trumble; First Lieutenant James C. Brauer;
First Lieutenant Francis J. Cunningham; First Lieutenant Paul A.
Putnam; First Lieutenant John S. E. Young; First Lieutenant Wil-
liam D. Saunders; First Lieutenant Lofton R. Henderson; First
Lieutenant John N. Coffman; First Lieutenant Peter P. Schrider;
First Lieutenant Robert L. Griffin; First Lieutenant James P.
Risely; First Lieutenant Samuel S. Jack; First Lieutenant Frank
M. June; First Lieutenant Miles S. Newton; First Lieutenant Ira
L. Kimes; First Lieutenant Reginald H. Ridgely; First Lieutenant
Nols H. Nelson; First Lieutenant Frank C. Dailey; First Lieutenant
Frank H. Wirsig; Second Lieutenant Robert L. Peterson; Second
Lieutenant Kenneth H. Weir; Second Lieutenant Arthur F. Binney;
Second Lieutenant Clovis C. Coffman; Second Lieutenant Perry O.
Parmelee; Second Lieutenant Lester S. Hamel; Second Lieutenant
Ernest E. Pollock; Second Lieutenant Frank C. Croft; Second Lieu-
tenant Newin O. Hammond; Second Lieutenant Frank H. Schwable;
Second Lieutenant Joseph H. Berry; Second Lieutenant James P.
Berkeley; Second Lieutenant Peter A. McDonald; Second Lieu-
tenant Michael M. Mahoney; Second Lieutenant Fred D. Beans;
Second Lieutenant Edgar O. Price; Second Lieutenant Lebulon C.
Hopkins; Second Lieutenant William A. Willis; Second Lieutenant
John M. Davis; Chief Marine Gunner John F. Evans; Chief Marine
Gunner Otho Wiggs; Chief Marine Gunner Jesse W. Stamper;
Chief Marine Gunner Frank F. Putcarmer; Chief Marine Gunner
Frank O. Lundt; Chief Marine Gunner Michael Wederezyk; Chief
Marine Gunner Harold Ogden; Chief Quartermaster Clerk August
F. Schonefeld; Chief Quartermaster Clerk William A. Warrell,
retired; Chief Quartermaster Clerk Albert O. Woodrow; Chief
Quartermaster Clerk Elmer W. Darde; Chief Pay Clerk Benjamin
H. Wolever; Chief Pay Clerk Clinton A. Phillips; Chief Pay Clerk
Timothy E. Murphy; Marine Gunner Kennard F. Bubier; Marine
Gunner Albert S. Nunach; Marine Gunner Harry R. Baley; Marine
Gunner Thomas Whitezel, Marine Gunner Walter N. Hendersen;
Marine Gunner Robert S. McCook; Sergeant Major James M.
Barmead; Sergeant Major Carl Svenson; Sergeant Major Charles
A. White; Quartermaster Sergeant Frederick J. Widman; Quarter-
master Sergeant Rupert F. Stone; Master Technical Sergeant Mil-
lard T. Shepard; Paymaster Sergeant Fred Parquette; First Ser-
geant Edwin C. Clarke; First Sergeant Cecil N. Bietz; First Ser-
geant Charles H. Gray; First Sergeant William O’Grady; First
741m CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
Sergeant Alfred Sylvester; First Sergeant Harry Watkins; First
Sergeant Nicholas M. Griece; First Sergeant Frederick Dalton; *
First Sergeant Louis N. Bertol; First Sergeant Russell O. Beard;
First Sergeant Otto Poland; First Sergeant Richard Shaker; First
Sergeant Charles E. Stuart; First Sergeant Frank Verdier; First
Sergeant Curtis O. Whitney; Gunnery Sergeant Joseph A. Saunders;
Gunnery Sergeant Bernard J. Durr; Gunnery Sergeant John J.
Rogers; Sergeant Olin L. Beall; Sergeant George Washington;
Sergeant Joseph L. Bonville; Sergeant Joseph Konepka; Sergeant
Charles L. McIndoc; Sergeant Frank J. Murphy; Sergeant Douglas
S. Catchis; Sergeant Daniel J. Donahoe; Sergeant Charles Sorenson;
Private John David.
United States Navy: Admiral William B. Caperton, retired; Rear
Admiral Charles 8. Freeman; Captain William D. Puleston; Captain
Walter S. Anderson; Captain Stephen B. McKinney; Captain Wil-
liam O. Spears; Captain Augustin T. Beauregard; Commander Leo
H. Thebaud; Commander Clarence Gulbranson; Captain Charles
St. J. Butler, Medical Corps; Captain William S. Bainbridge, Medi-
cal Corps, Naval Reserve, retired; Commander Morton D. Willcutts,
Medical Corps; Commander William Henry P. Blandy; Commander
Edwin C. Ebert, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Roscoe H.
Hillenkoetter ; Lieutenant Commander Joel J. White, Medical Corps;
Lieutenant Albert L. King, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant (Junior
Grade) Walter C. Ford; Captain Herbert S. Howard, Construction
Corps; Lieutenant Commander Leslie C. Stevens; Lieutenant Com-
mander William K. Vanderbilt, United States Naval Reserve.
United States Marine Corps: Colonel Robert L. Denig; Colonel
Henry L. Roosevelt, Marine Corps Reserve, deceased; Colonel Wil-
liam C. Harllee, retired; Colonel Julius S. Turrill, retired; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Harry L. Smith; Lieutenant Colonel William M.
Small, retired; Major Andrew E. Creesy; Major Donald J. Kendall;
Major Chester L. Fordney, Marine Corps Reserve; Captain Louis
Cukela; First Sergeant George Nelson.
That the following-named officers and enlisted men of the United
States Army are hereby authorized to accept such medals, orders,
diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have been tendered them
by foreign governments in appreciation of services rendered :
General Douglas MacArthur; Major General Dennis E. Nolan;
Major General Malin Craig; Major General Paul B. Malone; Major
General Frank Parker; Major General Frank R. McCoy; Major
General Albert J. Bowley; Major General Benjamin D. Foulois;
Brigadier General Frank C. Bolles; Brigadier General Casper H.
Conrad, Junior; Brigadier General Andrew Moses; Brigadier Gen-
eral Thomas W. Darrah; Brigadier General Francis LeJ. Parker;
Brigadier General Guy V. Henry; Brigadier General John W.
Gulick; Brigadier General Robert C. Foy; Colonel Joseph A. Baer;
Colonel Charles Burnett; Colonel W. Goff Caples; Colonel Edward
Davis; Colonel Charles W. Exton; Colonel James Malcolm Graham;
Colonel W. Lee Hart; Colonel Jacob C. Johnson; Colonel Roy C.
Kirtland; Colonel Osmun Latrobe; Colonel E. R. Warner McCabe;
Colonel Charles H. Patterson; Colonel Russell P. Reeder; Colonel
Francis A. Ruggles; Colonel Frederick W. Van Duyne; Colonel
Richard H. Williams; Lieutenant Colonel Frank M. Andrews; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Lester D. Baker; Lieutenant Colonel Reginald B.
Cocroft; Lieutenant Colonel John F. Curry; Lieutenant Colonel
Ernest J. Dawley; Lieutenant Colonel Robert H. Fletcher, Junior;
Lieutenant Colonel William W. Hicks; Lieutenant Colonel Donald
C. McDonald; Lieutenant Colonel Frederick W. Manley; Lieutenant
1361
_ Marine Corps—Con-
inued.
Navy.
Marine Corps.
Army.
1362
Army—Continued.
May 19, 1936.
(H.R. 12162.]
[Public, No. 604.]
United States courts.
Vol. a8 Be 1116; U
S. C.,
Miser judicial
districts.
Northern district.
Eastern division.
Western division.
Delta division.
Terms of court.
Eastern division.
747u CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 427, 428. MAY 19, 1936.
Colonel Maxwell Murray; Lieutenant Colonel Henry C. Pratt; Lieu-
tenant Colonel John W. N. Schulz; Lieutenant Colonel Martin C.
Shallenberger; Lieutenant Colonel Daniel I. Sultan; Lieutenant
Colonel Edwin M. Watson; Lieutenant Colonel Barton K. Yount;
Major George E. Arneman; "Major Rosenham Beam; Major Enrique
M. Benitez; Major Peter C. Bullard; Major Henry B. Cheadle;
Major Joseph O. Daly; Major Herbert A. Dargue; Major James A.
Dorst; Major Asa N. Duncan; Major Charles R. Finley; Major
Abraham Garfinckel; Major James A. Gillespie; Major Paul R.
Hawley; Major Charles B. Hazeltine; Major Edgar Erskine Hume;
Major George E. Lovell, Junior ; Major Dav enport Johnson; Major
Raymond E. MeQuillin; Major Joseph J. O'Hare; Major James B.
Ord; Major Alvan C. Sandeford ; Major Martin KF, Scanlon; Major
James C. R. Schwenck: ; Chaplain ’(Major) Aristeo V. Simoni; Major
Julia C. Stimson ; Major Robert H. Van Volkenburgh; Major “Robert
LeG. Walsh; Major Charles A. Willoughby; Major Walter F. Win-
ton; Captain John R. D. Cleland; Captain Carl W. Connell; Captain
Virgil N. Cordero; Captain Robert E. Cummings; Captain Thomas
J. Davis; ; Captain Vernon C. DeV otie ; Captain Fernand G. Dumont ;
Captain Tra C. Eaker; Captain Richard E. Elvins; Captain Muir
S. Fairchild; Captain James M. Gillespie; Captain Leslie R. Groves,
Junior ; Captain Albert F. Hegenberger ; Captain Eugene J. Heller;
Captain Jack C. Hodgson ; Captain “Arthur B. McDaniel; Captain
William J. McKiernan, Junior; Captain Eugene A. Regnier; Cap-
tain Charles McK. Robinson ; Captain Timothy Sapia- Bosch ; Captain
Kinsley W. Slauson; Captain Bernard 8S. Thompson ; Captain Leon-
ard D. Weddington; Captain Ennis C. Whitehead ; Captain Royden
Williamson; Captain Ralph H. Wooten; First Lieutenant Joseph
M. Glasgow; First Lieutenant John L. Hines, Junior; First Lieu-
tenant Kenneth C, Nichols; First Lieutenant Benjamin B. Talley;
First Lieutenant Hugh B. Waddell; Staff Sergeant Edward F.
Springer; Sergeant Leslie B. Hopkins,
Approved, May 19, 1936.
[CHAPTER 428.]
AN ACT
To create an additional division of the United States District Court for the
Southern District of Mississippi to be known as the Hattiesburg division.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 90
“of the Judicial Code, as amended (U.S. C., 1934 edition, title 28,
sec. 170), is amended to read as follows:
“Src. 90. The State of Mississippi is divided into two judicial
districts to be known as the northern and southern districts of
Mississippi. The northern district shall include the territory em-
braced on the 1st day of December 1923 in the counties of Alcorn,
Attala, Chickasaw, Choctaw, Clay, Itawamba, Lee, Lowndes, Monroe,
Oktibbeha, Pontotoc, Prentiss, Tishomingo, and W inston, which shall
constitute the eastern division of said district; also the territory
embraced on the date last mentioned in the counties of Benton,
Calhoun, Carroll, De Soto, Grenada, Lafayette, Marshall, Mont-
gomery, ” Panola, Tate, Tippah, Union, Webster, and Yalabusha,
which’ shall constitute the western division of said district; also
the territory embraced on the date last mentioned in the counties
of Bolivar, Coahoma, Leflore, Quitman, Sunflower, Tallahatchie,
and Tunica, which shall constitute the Delta division of said district.
The terms of the district court for the eastern division shall be held
at Aberdeen on the first Mondays in April and October; for the
747m CONGRESS. SESS. IT.
western division, at Oxford on the third Monday in April and the
first Monday in December; and for the Delta division, at Clarksdale
on the fourth Monday in January and the third Monday in October.
The southern district shall include the territory embraced on the 1st
day of December 1923 in the counties of Amite, Copiah, Franklin,
Hinds, Holmes, Leake, Lincoln, Madison, Pike, Rankin, Simpson,
Smith, Scott, Wilkinson, and Yazoo, which shall constitute the
Jackson division; also the territory embraced on the date last men-
tioned in the counties of Adams, Claiborne, Humphreys, Issaquena,
Jefferson, Sharkey, Warren, and Washington, which shall constitute
the western division; also the territory embraced on the date last
mentioned in the counties of Clarke, Jasper, Kemper, Lauderdale,
Neshoba, Newton, Noxubee, and Wayne, which shall constitute the
eastern division; also the territory embraced on the date last men-
tioned in the counties of George, Hancock, Harrison, Jackson, Pearl
River, and Stone, which shall constitute the southern division of said
district; also the territory embraced on the date last mentioned in
the counties of Covington, Forrest, Greene, Jefferson Davis, Jones,
Lamar, Lawrence, Marion, Perry, and Walthall, which shall con-
stitute the Hattiesburg division. Terms of the district court for the
Jackson division shall be held at Jackson on the first Mondays
in May and November; for the western division, at Vicksburg on
the third Mondays in May and November; for the eastern division,
at Meridian on the third Mondays in March and September; for
the southern division, at Biloxi on the third Monday in February
and the first Monday in June; and for the Hattiesburg division, at
Hattiesburg on the second Mondays in April and October. The
clerk of the court for each district shall maintain an office in charge
of himself or a deputy at each place in his district at which court
is now required to be held, at which he shall not himself reside,
which shall be kept open at all times for the transaction of the
business of the court. The marshal for each of said districts shall
maintain an office in charge of himself or a deputy at each place of
holding court in his district.”
Approved, May 19, 1936.
[CHAPTER 432.]
AN ACT
To provide for rural electrification, and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby created and established an agency of the United States to
be known as the “Rural Electrification Administration”, all of the
powers of which shall be exercised by an Administrator, who shall be
appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of
the Senate, for a term of ten years, and who shall receive a salary
of $10,000 per year. This Act may be cited as the “Rural Electrifi-
cation Act of 1936”.
Src. 2. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to make
loans in the several States and Territories of the United States for
rural electrification and the furnishing of electric energy to persons
in rural areas who are not receiving central station service, as here-
inafter provided; to make, or cause to be made, studies, investiga-
tions, and reports concerning the condition and progress of the elec-
trification of rural areas in the several States and Territories; and
to publish and disseminate information with respect thereto.
43115°—36——_18
CHS. 428, 432. MAY 19, 20, 1936.
1363
Western division.
Delta division.
Southern district.
Jackson division.
Western division.
Eastern division.
Southern division.
Hattiesburg division.
Terms of court.
Jackson division.
Western division.
Eastern division.
Southern division.
Hattiesburg division.
Clerks and marshals;
offices.
May 20, 1936.
[S. 3483.]
[Public, No. 605.]
Rural Electrification
Act of 1936.
Rural Electrification
Administration creat-
ed.
Administrator; pow-
ers, appointment, etc.
Citation of title.
Loans in States and
Territories authorized.
Studies and reports
concerning rural areas;
publication, ete.
1564
Reconstruction
nance Corporation.
Loans to Administra-
tor by, authorized.
Maximum, 1937,
Interest.
Fi-
Provisos.
_Proportion to secu-
rity.
_Amortization of ob-
ligations.
Maturity provisions.
Assignment of obli-
gations to Reconstruc-
tion Finance Corpora-
tion.
Appropriations
thorized.
au-
Allotments of por-
tion of annual sums for
loans; basis of.
Unallotted portion;
basis of loans.
Post, p. 1365.
Proviso.
Limitation.
Availability of unex-
pended balances dur-
Ing ensuing year,
Provisos.
Limitation.
Loans to Adminis-
trator to cease June 30,
1937.
_ Payments covered
in; exception.
74tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 432. MAY 20, 1936.
Suc. 3. (a) The Reconstruction Finance Corporation is hereby
authorized and directed to make loans to the Administrator, upon his
request approved by the President, not exceeding in aggregate
amount $50,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1937, with
interest at 3 per centum per annum upon the security of the obliga-
tions of borrowers from the Administrator appointed pursuant to
the provisions of this Act or from the Administrator of the Rural
Electrification Administration established by Executive Order Num-
bered 7037: Provided, That no such loan shall be in an amount
exceeding 85 per centum of the principal amount outstanding of
the obligations constituting the security therefor: And provided
further, That such obligations incurred for the purpose of financing
the construction and operation of generating plants, electric transmis-
sion and distribution lines, or systems shall be fully amortized over
a period not to exceed twenty-five years, and that the maturity of
such obligations incurred for the purpose of financing the wiring of
premises and the acquisition and installation of electrical and plumb-
ing appliances and equipment shall not exceed two-thirds of the
assured life thereof and not more than five years. The Administrator
is hereby authorized to make all such endorsements, to execute all
such instruments, and to do all such acts and things as shall be
necessary to effect the valid transfer and assignment to the Recon-
struction Finance Corporation of all such obligations.
(b) There is hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any
money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, for the fiscal year
ending June 30, 1938, and for each of the eight years thereafter,
the sum of $40,000,000 for the purposes of this Act as hereinafter
provided.
(c) Fifty per centum of the annual sums herein made available or
appropriated for the purposes of this Act shall be allotted yearly by
the Administrator for loans in the several States in the proportion
which the number of their farms not then receiving central station
electric service bears to the total number of farms of the United
States not then receiving such service. The Administrator shall,
within ninety days after the beginning of each fiscal year, determine
for each State and for the United States the number of farms not
then receiving such service.
(d) The remaining 50 per centum of such annual sums shall be
available for loans in the several States and in the Territories, with-
out allotment as hereinabove provided, in such amounts for each
State and Territory as, in the opinion of the Administrator, may be
effectively employed for the purposes of this Act, and to carry out
the provisions of section 7: Provided, however, That not more than
10 per centum of said unallotted annual sums may be employed in
any one State, or in all of the Territories.
(e) If any part of the annual sums made available for the purposes
of this Act shall not be loaned or obligated during the fiscal year for
which such sums are made available, such unexpended or unobligated
sums shall be available for loans by the Administrator in the follow-
ing year or years without allotment: Provided, however, That not
more than 10 per centum of said sums may be employed in any one
State or in all of the Territories: And provided further, That no
loans shall be made by the Reconstruction Finance Corporation to
the Administrator after June 30, 1937.
(f) All moneys representing payments of principal and interest
on loans made by the Administrator under this Act shall be covered
into the Treasury as miscellaneous receipts, except that any such
moneys representing payments of principal and interest on obliga-
tions constituting the security for loans made by the Reconstruction
747a CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 482. MAY 20, 1936.
Finance Corporation to the Administrator shall be paid to the
Reconstruction Finance Corporation in payment of such loans.
Sec. 4. The Administrator is authorized and empowered, from the
sums hereinbefore authorized, to make loans to persons, corporations,
States, Territories, and subdivisions and agencies thereof, municipali-
ties, peoples utility districts and cooperative nonprofit, or lmited-
dividend associations organized under the laws of any State or Ter-
ritory of the United States, for the purpose of financing the con-
struction and operation of generating plants, electric transmission
and distribution lines or systems for the furnishing of electric energy
to persons in rural areas who are not receiving central station serv-
ice: Provided, however, That the Administrator, in making such
loans, shall give preference to States, Territories, and subdivisions
and agencies thereof, municipalities, peoples utility districts, and
cooperative, nonprofit, or limited dividend associations, the projects
of which comply with the requirements of this Act. Such loans
shall be on such terms and conditions relating to the expenditure of
the moneys loaned and the security therefor as the Administrator
shall determine and may be made payable, in whole or in part out
of income: Provided, however, That all such loans shall be self-
liquidating within a period of not to exceed twenty-five years, and
shall bear interest at a rate equal to the average rate of interest pay-
able by the United States of America on its obligations, having a
maturity of ten or more years after the dates thereof, issued during
the last preceding fiscal year in which any such obligations were
issued: Provided further, That no loan for the construction, operation,
or enlargement of any generating plant shall be made unless the
consent of the State authority having jurisdiction in the premises is
first obtained. Loans under this section and section 5 shall not be
made unless the Administrator finds and certifies that in his judg-
ment the security therefor is reasonably adequate and such loan will
be repaid within the time agreed.
Sec. 5. The Administrator is authorized and empowered, from the
sums hereinbefore authorized, to make loans for the purpose of finan-
cing the wiring of the premises of persons in rural areas and the
acquisition and installation of electrical and plumbing appliances
and equipment. Such loans may be made to any of the borrowers
of funds loaned under the provisions of section 4, or to any person,
firm, or corporation supplying or installing the said wiring, appli-
ances, or equipment. Such loans shall be for such terms, subject
to such conditions, and so secured as reasonably to assure repayment
thereof, and shall be at a rate of interest equal to the average rate of
interest payable by the United States of America on its obligations,
having a maturity of ten or more years after the dates thereof, issued
during the last preceding fiscal year in which any such obligations
were issued.
Sec. 6. For the purpose of administering this Act and for the
purpose of making the studies, investigations, publications, and
reports herein provided for, there is hereby authorized to be appro-
priated, out of any money in the Treasury not otherwise appro-
priated, such sums as shall be necessary. :
Src. 7. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to bid for
and purchase at any foreclosure or other sale, or otherwise to acquire,
property pledged or mortgaged to secure any loan made pursuant to
this Act; to pay the purchase price and any costs and expenses
incurred in connection therewith from the sums authorized in section
3 of this Act; to accept title to any property so purchased or acquired
in the name of the United States of America; to operate or lease
such property for such period as may be deemed necessary or
1365
Loans for financing
generating plants, dis-
tribution lines, etc.
Provisos. _
Preferential loans.
Loans to be Self-
liquidating.
Interest.
Consent of State au-
thority.
Security; repayment.
Wiring premises, in-
stalling appliances, ete.
Loans for; terms, se-
curity, etc.
Interest.
Appropriations
authorized for adminis-
trative, etc., expenses.
Post, p. 1604.
Acquisition of mort-
gaged, etc., property
by Administrator, au-
thorized,
Operation, ete., of
acquired property,
Disposal of encum-
bered property, etc.,
by borrower.
Prior loans and con-
tracts; administration
may be vested in Ad-
ministrator.
Transfer of records,
property, and person-
nel.
Nonpartisan admin-
istration of Act.
Merit system of ap-
poimtments, etc.
Removal of officials,
etc., for violation.
Annual
Congress.
reports to
Utilization of volun-
tary, etc., services.
Attorneys, engineers,
and experts; appoint-
ment, compensation,
etc.
Expenditures author-
ized.
Ante, p. 1365.
Time extension on
payments, authorized.
Provisos.
_Loans on plants,
lines, ete.
747” CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 482. MAY 20, 1936.
advisable to protect the investment therein, but not to exceed five
years after the acquisition thereof; and to sell such property so
purchased or acquired, upon such terms and for such consideration
as the Administrator shall determine to be reasonable.
No borrower of funds under section 4 shall, without the approval
of the Administrator, sell or dispose of its property, rights, or
franchises, acquired under the provisions of this Act, until any loan
obtained from the Rural Electrification Administration, including
all interest and charges, shall have been repaid.
Sec. 8. The administration of loans and contracts entered into by
the Rural Electrification Administration established by Executive
Order Numbered 7037, dated May 11, 1935, may be vested by the
President in the Administrator authorized to be appointed by this
Act; and in such event the provisions of this Act shall apply to said
loans and contracts to the extent that said provisions are not incon-
sistent therewith. The President may transfer to the Rural Elec-
trification Administration created by this Act the jurisdiction and
control of the records, property (including office equipment), and
personnel used or employed in the exercise and performance of the
functions of the Rural Electrification Administration established
by such Executive order.
Src. 9. This Act shall be administered entirely on a nonpartisan
basis, and in the appointment of officials, the selection of employees,
and in the promotion of any such officials or employees, no political
test or qualification shall be permitted or given consideration, but
all such appointments and promotions shall be given and made on
the basis of merit and efficiency. If the Administrator herein pro-
vided for is found by the President of the United States to be guilty
of a violation of this section, he shall be removed from office by the
President, and any appointee or selection of officials or employees
made by the Administrator who is found guilty of a violation of this
Act shall be removed by the Administrator.
Src. 10. The Administrator shall present annually to the Congress
not later than the 20th day of January in each year a full report of
his activities under this Act.
Src. 11. In order to carry out the provisions of this Act the
Administrator may accept and utilize such voluntary and uncom-
pensated services of Federal, State, and local officers and employees
as are available, and he may without regard to the provisions of civil-
service laws applicable to officers and employees of the United States
appoint and fix the compensation of attorneys, engineers, and experts,
and he may, subject to the civil-service laws, appoint such other
officers and employees as he may find necessary and prescribe their
duties. The Administrator is authorized, from sums appropriated
pursuant to section 6, to make such expenditures (including expendi-
tures for personal services; supplies and equipment; lawbooks and
books of reference; directories and periodicals; travel expenses;
rental at the seat of government and elsewhere; the purchase, opera-
tion, or maintenance of passenger-carrying vehicles; and printing
and binding) as are appropriate and necessary to carry out the
provisions of this Act.
Sec. 12. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to extend
the time of payment of interest or principal of any loans made by the
Administrator pursuant to this Act: Provided, however, That with
respect to any loan made under section 4, the payment of interest or
principal shall not be extended more than five years after such pay-
ment shall have become due, and with respect to any loan made
under section 5, the payment of principal or interest shall not be
extended more than two years after such payment shall have become
741ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 432-434. MAY 20, 1936.
due: And provided further, That the provisions of this section shall
not apply to any obligations or the security therefor which may be
held by the Reconstruction Finance Corporation under the provisions
of section 3.
Sxc. 13. As used in this Act the term “rural area” shall be deemed
to mean any area of the United States not included within the
boundaries of any city, village, or borough having a population in
excess of fifteen hundred inhabitants, and such term shall be deemed
to include both the farm and nonfarm population thereof; the term
“farm” shall be deemed to mean a farm as defined in the publications
of the Bureau of the Census; the term “person” shall be deemed to
mean any natural person, firm, corporation, or association; the term
“Territory” shall be deemed to include any insular possession of the
United States.
Src. 14. If any provision of this Act, or the application thereof to
any person or circumstances, is held invalid, the remainder of the
Act and the application of such provision to other persons or circum-
stances shall not be affected thereby.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
(CHAPTER 433.]
AN ACT
To amend article 3 of the ‘“Rules Concerning Lights, and so forth’, contained
in the Act entitled ““An Act to adopt regulations for preventing collisions upon
certain harbors, rivers, and inland waters of the United States’, approved
June 7, 1897.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the first sen-
tence of article 3 of the “Rules Concerning Lights, and so forth”,
contained in the Act entitled “An Act to adopt regulations for pre-
venting collisions upon certain harbors, rivers, and inland waters of
the United States”, approved June 7, 1897, is amended to read as
follows:
“Arr. 3. A steam vessel when towing another vessel or vessels
alongside shall, in addition to her side lights, carry two bright white
lights in a vertical line, one over the other, not less than three feet
apart, and when towing one or more vessels astern, regardless of the
length of the tow, shall carry an additional bright white light three
feet above or below such lights: Provided, That on the Red River of
the North and the rivers emptying into the Gulf of Mexico and their
tributaries, this article shall not affect the signal hghts used on towin
vessels which propel the tow by pushing at the rear of the tow.”
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 434.]
AN ACT
To amend section 4321, Revised Statutes (U. S. C., title 46, sec. 263), and for
other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 4321,
Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sec. 263), be,
and is hereby, amended to read as follows:
“The form of a license for carrying on the coasting trade or fish-
eries shall be as follows:
“License for carrying on the (here insert ‘coasting trade’, ‘whale
fishery’, ‘mackerel fishery’, or ‘cod fishery’, as the case may be).
1367
Loans excluded.
Ante, p. 1364.
Definitions.
“Rural area.””
“Farm.”
“Person.’”
“Territory.”
Separability provi-
sion.
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 10308.]
[Public, No. 606.]
Navigation.
“Rules Concerning
Lights, ete.’’
Vol. 30, p. 97.
U.S.C., p. 1455.
Lights of steam ves-
sel towing another ves-
sel alongside.
When towing astern.
Proviso.
Exceptions.
May 20, 1936.
(H.R. 11036.]
[Public, No. 607.]
Vessels in domestic
commerce.
R.S., sec. 4321, p. 835.
U.S. C., p. 2005.
License for coasting
trade or fisheries.
Form prescribed.
1568
Provisos.
Licensing for the
“coasting trade and
mackerel fishery.’’
Touching at foreign
ports.
R.S., sees. 4364, 4365,
p. 844; U.S.C., p. 2010.
Enrolled and licensed
vessels, Great Lakes
and connecting waters.
R. S., sec. 4318; U.S.
C., p. 2004.
May 20, 1936.
{H. R. 11302.]
~ [Public, No. 608.]
United Confederate
Veterans, Reunion
Committee.
Loan of Army equip-
ment for encampment
at Shreveport, La., au-
thorized.
74ta4 CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 434, 435. MAY 20, 1936.
“In pursuance of title L (Revised Statutes 4311-4390), ‘Regula-
tion of Vessels in Domestic Commerce’, of the Revised Statutes of
the United States (inserting here the name of the husband or man-
aging owner, with his occupation and place of abode, and the name
of the master, with the place of his abode), having sworn that the
(insert here the description of the vessel, whether ship, brigantine,
snow, schooner, sloop, or whatever else she may be), called the (insert
here the vessel’s name), whereof the said (naming the master) is
master, burden (insert here the number of tons, in words) tons, as
appears by her enrollment, dated at (naming the district, day, month,
and year, in words at length, but if she be less than twenty tons,
insert, instead thereof, ‘proof being had of her admeasurement’),
shall not be employed in any trade, while this license shall continue
in force, whereby the revenue of the United States shall be defrauded,
and having also sworn (or affirmed) that this license shall not be
used for any other vessel, or for any other employment, than is
herein specified, license is hereby granted for the said (inserting here
the description of the vessel) called the (inserting here the vessel’s
name), to be employed in carrying on the (inserting here ‘coasting
trade’, ‘whale fishery’, ‘mackerel fishery’, or ‘cod fishery’, as the case
may be), for one year from the date hereof, and no longer. Given
under my hand and seal, at (naming the said district), this (insert-
ing the particular day) day of (naming the month), in the year
(specifying the number of the year in words at length) ;”: Provided,
That vessels of five net tons and over entitled under the laws of the
United States to be enrolled and licensed or licensed for the coasting
trade may be licensed for the “coasting trade and mackerel fishery”,
and shall be deemed to have sufficient license for engaging in the
coasting trade and the taking of fish of every description, including
shellfish : Provided further, That the provisions of sections 4364 and
4365, Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sees.
310 and 311), shall be, and are hereby, made applicable to vessels so
licensed: And provided further, That vessels operating on the Great
Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters under enrollment
and license issued in conformity with the provisions of section 4318,
Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sec. 258),
shall be deemed to have sufficient license for engaging in the taking
of fish of every description within such waters without change in the
form of enrollment and license prescribed under the authority of
that section.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 435.]
AN ACT
To authorize the Seeretary of War to lend to the Reunion Committee of the
United Confederate Veterans three thousand blankets, olive drab, numbered
4, one thousand five hundred canvas cots, to be used at their annual encamp-
ment to be held at Shreveport, Louisiana, in June 1936.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of War be, and he is hereby, authorized to lend, at his discretion
to the Reunion Committee of the United Confederate Veterans,
for use at the United Confederate Veterans’ Encampment, to
be held at Shreveport, Louisiana, June 9, 10, 11, and 12, 1936, two
hospital ward tents, with all pegs, poles, and equipment necessary
for their erection; one storage tent complete with all equipment; one
large wall tent complete with all equipment; six small wall tents
74tH CONGRESS.
complete with all equipment; ten pyramidal tents complete with all
equipment; fifty 14-quart G. I. buckets; three thousand blankets,
olive drab, wool; one thousand five hundred canvas folding cots; one
thousand five hundred comforters; one thousand five hundred cotton-
felted pillows complete with cotton pillow cases; three thousand
cotton bedsheets: Provided, That no expense shall be caused the
United States Government by the delivery and return of said prop-
erty; the same to be delivered from the nearest quartermaster depot
at such time prior to the holding of said encampment as may be
agreed upon by the Secretary of War and the Confederate Reunion
Committee: Provided further, That the Secretary of War, before
delivery of such property, shall take from said Reunion Committee
of the United Confederate Veterans a good and sufficient bond for
the safe return of said property in good order and condition, and
the whole without expense to the United States.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 440.]
AN ACT
To convey certain lands to Clackamas County, Oregon, for public-park purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of the Interior is authorized and directed to issue a patent to Clack-
amas County, Oregon, on behalf of the United States, for the south
half southwest quarter and the west half northeast quarter southwest
quarter section 11, township 3 south, range 4 east, Willamette merid-
ian, in the State of Oregon, containing one hundred acres, more or
less, on condition that such county shall accept and use such lands
solely for public-park purposes; but if such county shall at any time
cease to use such lands for public-park purposes, or shall permit the
use of such lands for any other purpose, or shall alienate or attempt
to alienate them, they shall revert to the United States: Provided,
That there shall be reserved to the United States, its patentees, or
their transferees, the right to cut and remove therefrom the merchant-
able timber, reserving to Clackamas County, Oregon, when such sale
is made under the provisions of the Act of June 9, 1916 (39 Stat. 218),
a preference right to purchase the timber at the highest price bid.
Src. 2. The Secretary of the Interior shall prescribe all necessary
regulations to carry into effect the foregoing provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 21, 1936.
[CHAPTER 444.]
AN ACT
To supplement the Act of June 25, 1929 (ch. 41, 46 Stat. L. 41), which authorized
and directed the Attorney General to institute suit against the Northern
Pacific Railway Company and others.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in the suit
entitled United States of America, plaintiff, against Northern Pacific
Railway Company and others, defendants, numbered E4389, insti-
tuted and pending in the District Court of the United States for
the Eastern District of Washington, under the authority and direc-
tion of the Act of June 25, 1929 (ch. 41, 46 Stat. L. 41), now on
reference to a special master for hearing under an order of said
court entered in said suit on April 21, 1936, a direct review by the
SESS. I. CHS. 435,440,444. MAY 20, 21, 22, 1936.
1369
Provisos.
No Federal expense.
Bond.
May 21, 1936.
[Public, No. 609.]
Clackamas County,
reg.
Conveyance of land
for public-park pur-
poses, authorized.
_Reversionary provi-
sion.
Proviso.
‘Timber reservation.
Vol. 39, p. 218.
Regulations to be
prescribed.
May 22, 1936.
8.4594.)
{Public, No. 610.]
Northern Pacifie
Railway Companyand
others.
Review by appeal to
U. S. Supreme Court
of certain questions in
pending suit, author-
ized.
Vol. 46, p. 41.
1370
Time limitation.
Right of review
final judgment not
fected.
May 22, 1936.
(H. R. 1398.]
of
af-
[Public, No. 611.]
Crescent City, Calif.
Establishment
of
Coast Guard station
at, authorized.
May 22, 1936.
(H. R. 8370.]
[Public, No. 612.]
Port Washington,
1s.
Establishment of
Coast Quard station
at, authorized.
May 22, 1936.
[H. R. 10321.]
[Public, No. 613.]
Rio Grande, use of
waters, etc.
Correction in Act
lating to.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 661.
re-
Ist
74taH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 444-447. MAY. 22, 1936.
Supreme Court of the United States by appeal may be had by any
party to said suit of any order or decree of said district court entered
upon a review of the report of the master to be made pursuant to
said order of April 21, 1936, and also of the order or decree of said
district court entered in said suit on October 3, 1935, as amended by
an order of January 29, 1936. Such direct review by the Supreme
Court of either or both of the said orders or decrees may be had by
appeal taken within sixty days from the date of the order or decree
of the district court entered upon a review of the report of the
master to be made pursuant to the said order of April 21, 1936. The
right of review of any final judgment, authorized by said Act of
June 25, 1929, shall continue in force and effect.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 445.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of a Coast Guard station at or near Crescent
City, California.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized to establish a
Coast Guard station on the Pacific coast at or in the vicinity of
Crescent City, California, in such locality as the Commandant of
the Coast Guard may recommend.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 446.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of a Coast Guard station at Port Washington,
Wisconsin.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of
the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the
Secretary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized to estab-
lish a Coast Guard station on Lake Michigan at Port Washington,
Wisconsin, at such point as the Commandant of the Coast Guard
may recommend.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 447.]
AN ACT
To amend section 4 of Public Act Numbered 286, Seventy-fourth Congress,
approved August 19, 1935, as amended.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 4 of
Public Act Numbered 286, Seventy-fourth Congress, approved
August 19, 1935, is amended by striking out the words “section 3
hereof” and inserting in leu thereof the words “section 2, para-
graph 2, and section 3 of this Act”.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
74ru CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 448, 449. MAY 22,26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 448.]
AN ACT
Authorizing the erection of a memorial to those who met their death in the
wreck of the dirigible Shenandoah.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed to
erect near Ava, Ohio, on the spot where the Shenandoah fell, a
suitable tablet or marker to commemorate the heroic services ren-
dered by Commander Landsdowne and other members of the crew
who died when the Navy dirigible Shenandoah was destroyed.
Src. 2. There is hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any
money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, the sum of
$2,500 to carry out the provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 449.]
AN ACT
To authorize the Secretary of War to grant to the city of Buffalo, New York, the
right and privilege to occupy and use for sewage-disposal facilities part of the
lands forming the pier and dikes of the Black Rock Harbor improvement at
Buffalo, New York. ;
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in addition
to the grant made by the Secretary of War to the city of Buffalo
pursuant to the Act of Congress entitled “An Act making appropri-
ations for the construction, repair, and preservation of certain public
works on rivers and harbors and for other purposes”, approved
February 27, 1911, for the purpose of establishing a public park and
landing facilities on that part of the structure known as Bird Island
Pier on Niagara River lying north of Albany Street extended, in
the city of Buffalo, New York, and forming a part of Black Rock
Harbor improvement and the lands of the United States under
water on both sides of said pier to the established harbor lines, sub-
ject to the terms, conditions, and stipulations in said grant specified,
the Secretary of War is authorized to grant to the city of Buffalo,
New York, also the right and privilege of occupying said lands and
lands under water, and also the lands owned by the United States
on the west side of Black Rock Canal, described as follows: Begin-
ning at a point where the northerly line of property formerly owned
by William H. Slade, or that line extended, intersects the United
States Government property line (formerly New York State Blue
Line) ; thence easterly parallel to the line forming the northeasterly
boundary of lands heretofore granted to the city of Buffalo by the
United States and known as Bird Island Pier until a point is reached
in direct prolongation of the easterly boundary line of said last
mentioned lands; thence southwesterly in direct line with said
easterly boundary of said lands to the northeasterly corner of said
lands heretofore conveyed to the city of Buffalo by the United
States; thence westerly along the northeasterly boundary of said
Bird Island Pier lands to said United States Government property
line; thence northeasterly along said last mentioned line to the place
of beginning, or so much thereof as may be necessary, for use either
by the city of Buffalo or by the Buffalo Sewer Authority (created
by chapter 349 of the Laws of the State of New York of 1935) for
sewage-disposal facilities, on such terms, conditions, and stipulations
as he may deem expedient and equitable and necessary for the pro-
tection of all the interests of the United States in and to said
1371
May 22, 1936.
[H. R. 10544.]
[Public, No. 614.]
Dirigible ‘‘Shenan-
oah.’”
Erection of memorial
to dead in wreck of,
authorized.
Location.
Appropriation au-
thorized.
May 26, 1936.
{S. 4317.]
[Public, No. 615.]
Buffalo, N. Y.
Right to use certain
land for public pur-
poses, granted to.
Vol. 36, p. 935.
Description.
1372
Proviso.
State sanction.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 8287.]
[Public, No. 616.]
Virgin Islands.
Establishment of
assessed valuation real
property tax.
Based on actual
value.
Uniform rate in each
municipality.
Provisional rate.
President to pre-
scribe regulations if no
municipal levy, etc.
Deposit of collections.
Virgin Islands Com-
pany.
Payments by, in lieu
of taxes.
Other property
owned by the United
States.
74mx CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 449, 450. MAY 26, 1986.
premises: Provided, however, That the city of Buffalo shall have
secured the sanction and consent of the State of New York through
its constituted agencies.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 450.]
AN ACT
To establish an assessed valuation real property tax in the Virgin Islands of the
United States.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That it is the policy
of Congress to equalize and more equitably to distribute existing
taxes on real property in the Virgin Islands of the United States and
to reduce the burden of taxation now imposed on land in productive
use in such islands.
Sec. 2. For the calendar year 1936 and for all succeeding years
all taxes on real property in the Virgin Islands shall be computed
on the basis of the actual value of such property and the rate in each
municipality of such islands shall be the same for all real property
subject to taxation in such municipality whether or not such prop-
erty is in cultivation and regardless of the use to which such
property is put.
Src. 3. Until local tax laws conforming to the requirements of this
Act are in effect in a municipality the tax on real property in such
municipality for any such calendar year shall be at the rate of
1.25 per centum of the assessed value. If the legislative authority
of a municipality shall fail to enact laws for the levy, assessment,
collection, or enforcement of any tax imposed under authority of
this Act within three months after the date of its enactment, the
President shall then prescribe regulations for the levy, assessment,
collection, and enforcement of such tax, which shall be in effect
until the legislative authority of such municipality shall make
regulations for such purposes.
Sec. 4. All taxes so levied and collected shall be deposited in the
municipal treasury of the municipality in which such taxes are
collected.
Sec. 5. The Virgin Islands Company shall pay annually into the
niunicipal treasuries of the Virgin Islands in lieu of taxes an amount
equal to the amount of taxes which would be payable on the real
property in the Virgin Islands owned by the United States and in
the possession of the Virgin Islands Company, if such real property
were in private ownership and taxable, but the valuation placed upon
such property for taxation purposes by the local taxing authorities
shall be reduced to a reasonable amount by the Secretary of the
Interior if, after investigation, he finds that such valuation is
excessive and unreasonable. The Virgin Islands Company shall also
pay into the municipal treasuries of the Virgin Islands amounts
equal to the amounts of any taxes of general application which a
private corporation similarly situated would be required to pay into
the said treasuries. Similar payments shall be made with respect
to any property owned by the United States in the Virgin Islands
which is used for ordinary business or commercial purposes, and the
income derived from any property so used shall be available for
making such payments.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 450, 451. MAY 26, 1936.
Src. 6. Nothing in this Act shall be construed as altering, amend-
ing, or repealing the existing exemptions from taxation of property
used for educational, charitable, or religious purposes. Subject to
the provisions of this Act, the legislative authority of the respective
municipalities is hereby empowered to alter, amend, or repeal, sub-
ject to the approval of the Governor, any law now imposing taxes
on real and personal property.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 451.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of the Fort Frederica National Monument, at
Saint Simon Island, Georgia, and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That when title
to the site of Fort Frederica, on Saint Simon Island, Georgia, and
such other related sites located thereon, as may be designated by
the Secretary of the Interior, in the exercise of his discretion, as
necessary or desirable for national-monument purposes, shall have
been vested in the United States, said area not to exceed eighty acres
shall be, and is hereby, set apart as a national monument for the
benefit and inspiration of the people, and shall be called the “Fort
Frederica National Monument”.
Sec. 2. That the Secretary of the Interior be, and he is hereby,
authorized to accept donations of land, interests in land, buildings,
structures, and other property within the boundaries of the said
national monument as determined and fixed hereunder, and dona-
tions of funds for the purchase and maintenance thereof, the title
and evidence of title to lands acquired to be satisfactory to the Secre-
tary of the Interior: Provided, That he may acquire on behalf of
the United States out of any donated funds, either by purchase at
prices deemed by him reasonable, or by condemnation under the pro-
visions of the Act of August 1, 1888, such tracts of land within the
said national monument as may be necessary for the completion
thereof.
Sec. 8. (a) The Secretary of the Interior is authorized, in his
discretion, to maintain in some suitable structure within the national
monument a museum for relics and records pertaining to Fort
Frederica, and for other articles of national and patriotic interest,
and in his discretion to accept, on behalf of the United States, for
installation in such museum, articles which may be offered as addi-
tions to the museum.
(b) Any State or political subdivision thereof, organization, or
individual may, with the approval of the Secretary of the Interior,
erect monuments or place tablets commemorating historic events or
persons connected with the history of the area, within the bound-
aries of the Fort Frederica National Monument.
Sec. 4. The administration, protection, and development of the
aforesaid national monument shall be exercised under the direction
of the Secretary of the Interior by the National Park Service, sub-
ject to the provisions of the Act of August 25, 1916, entitled “An
Act to establish a National Park Service, and for other purposes”,
as amended.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
1375
Property used for
educational, religious,
etc., purposes.
Amendment or re-
peal of existing laws.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 8431.]
{Public, No. 617.]
Fort Frederica Na-
tional Monument, Saint
Simon Island, Ga.
Establishment of.
Acceptance of dona-
tions, etc.
Proviso.
Purchase of land from
donated funds.
Vol. 25, p. 357.
U.S. C., p. 1785.
Maintenance of mu-
seum.
Erection of monu-
ments or placing of tab-
lets.
Administration.
Vol. 39, p. 535; U. S.
C., p. 591.
1574
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 8784.]
[Public, No. 618.]
Executive branch of
the Government.
Withholding of com-
pensation where pay-
ments have been made
illegally, authorized.
Proviso.
Existing laws not
affected.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 10267.)
[Public, No. 619.]
Railway Mail Serv-
ice.
Adjustment of com-
pensation.
Vol. 43, p. 1061.
UW SaCxipalrble
U.S. C., p. 85.
Appropriations made
available.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 10934.]
[Public, No. 620.]
Salem, Mass.
Transfer of custom-
house to Department
of Interior, authorized.
7474 CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 452-454. MAY 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 452.]
AN ACT
To authorize withholding compensation due Government personnel.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That hereafter,
whenever upon the statement of the account of any disbursing officer
of the United States in the General Accounting Office credit shall
have been disallowed for any payment to any person in the executive
branch of the Government, otherwise entitled to compensation from
the United States or from any agency or instrumentality thereof,
such compensation of the payee may be withheld until full reim-
bursement has been accomplished under such regulations as may be
prescribed by the head of the department, branch, or independent
establishment (including corporations) under which such payee is
entitled to receive compensation: Provided, That nothing contained
in this Act shall be construed to repeal or in any way modify exist-
ing laws relating to the collection of the indebtedness of accountable
or disbursing officers.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 453.]
AN ACT
To provide for adjusting the compensation of division superintendents, assistant
division superintendents, assistant superintendents at large, assistant super-
intendent in charge of car construction, chief clerks, assistant chief clerks,
and clerks in charge of sections in offices of division superintendents in the
Railway Mail Service, to correspond to the rates established by the Classifi-
cation Act of 1923, as amended.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Post-
master General is authorized and directed to adjust the compensa-
tion of division superintendents, assistant division superintendents,
assistant superintendents at large, assistant superintendent in charge’
of car construction, chief clerks, assistant chief clerks, and clerks
in charge of sections in offices of division superintendents, Railway
Mail Service, to correspond, so far as may be practicable, to the rates
established by the Classification Act of 1923, as amended, for posi-
tions in the departmental service in the District of Columbia. An
appropriation now or hereafter available for the payment of the
compensation of employees in the Railway Mail Service shall be
available for payment of compensation in accordance with the rates
adjusted in accordance with the provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 454.]
AN ACT
To authorize the transfer of the customhouse at Salem, Massachusetts, from the
jurisdiction of the Treasury Department to the Department of the Interior.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed
to transfer to the control and jurisdiction of the Secretary of the
Interior the customhouse at Salem, Massachusetts, and such ad-
joining property, both real and personal, as may now be under the
Jurisdiction of the Secretary of the Treasury.
741m CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 454,462. MAY 26, 27, 1936.
Sec. 2. That the Secretary of the Interior be, and he is hereby,
authorized to acquire the above property for the purpose of estab-
lishing same as an historic site or otherwise preserving the buildings
and grounds in connection therewith: Provided, That the Secretary
of the Treasury may retain sufficient space in the building for the
necessary operation of the Bureau of Customs.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 462.]
AN ACT
To provide for the continuation of trading in unlisted securities upon national
securities exchanges, for the registration of over-the-counter brokers and
dealers, for the filing of current information and periodic reports by issuers,
and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That subsection (f)
of section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is amended to
read as follows:
“(f) Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this section, any
national securities exchange, upon application to and approval of
such application by the Commission and subject to the terms and
conditions hereinafter set forth, (1) may continue unlisted trading
privileges to which a security had been admitted on such exchange
prior to March 1, 1934; or (2) may extend unlisted trading privileges
to any security duly listed and registered on any other national
securities exchange, but such unlisted trading privileges shall con-
tinue in effect only so long as such security shall remain listed and
registered on any other national securities exchange; or (3) may
extend unlisted trading privileges to any security in respect of which
there is available from a registration statement and periodic reports
or other data filed pursuant to rules or regulations prescribed by the
Commission under this title or the Securities Act of 1933, as amended,
information substantially equivalent to that available pursuant to
rules or regulations of the Commission in respect of a security duly
listed and registered on a national securities exchange, but such
unlisted trading privileges shall continue in effect only so long as
such a registration statement remains effective and such periodic
reports or other data continue to be so filed.
“No application pursuant to this subsection shall be approved
unless the Commission finds that the continuation or extension of
unlisted trading privileges pursuant to such application is neces-
sary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of
investors. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to
any security pursuant to clause (2) or (3) of this subsection shall
be approved except after appropriate notice and opportunity for
hearing. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to any
security pursuant to clause (2) or (3) of this subsection shall be
approved unless the applicant exchange shall establish to the satis-
faction of the Commission that there exists in the vicinity of such
exchange sufficiently widespread public distribution of such security
and sufficient public trading activity therein to render the extension
of unlisted trading privileges on such exchange thereto necessary
or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of
investors. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to
any security pursuant to clause (3) of this subsection shall be
approved except upon such terms and conditions as will subject the
issuer thereof, the officers and directors of such issuer, and every
beneficial owner of more than 10 per centum of such security to
1375
Preservation of, as
an historic site.
Proviso.
Space for Customs
Bureau.
May 27, 1936.
[S. 4023.]
[Public, No. 621.]
Securities Exchange
Act of 1934, amend-
ments.
Vol. 48, p. 894; U. S.
C., p. 536.
Trading in unlisted
securities upon na-
tional exchanges.
Continuance of cer-
tain categories.
Security admitted
before March 1, 1934.
Listed and registered
on another exchange.
Equivalent registra-
tion statement avail-
able.
Conditional contin-
uance of privileges.
Notice and hearing.
Establishment to be
in public interest.
Obligations imposed.
1376
Exceptions.
Publication of trans-
actions or quotations;
differentiation between
listed and unlisted se-
curities.
Other than by ticker.
Suspension of privi-
leges when in public
interest, etc.
Termination of privi-
leges; notice and hear-
ing.
Withdrawal of secur-
ity by issuer; exception.
Inadequate distribu-
tion, trading activity,
ete.
Notice, hearing, ete.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 27,1936.
duties substantially equivalent to the duties which would arise pur-
suant to this title 1f such security were duly listed and registered on
a national securities exchange; except that such terms and conditions
need not be imposed in any case or class of cases in which it shall
appear to the Commission that the public interest and the protection
of investors would nevertheless best be served by such extension of
unlisted trading privileges. In the publication or making available
for publication by any national securities exchange, or by any person
directly or indirectly controlled by such exchange, of quotations or
transactions in securities made or effected upon such exchange, such
exchange or controlled person shall clearly differentiate between
quotations or transactions in listed securities, and quotations or
transactions in securities for which unlisted trading privileges. on
such exchange have been continued or extended pursuant to this sub-
section. In the publication or making available for publication of
such quotations or transactions otherwise than by ticker, such
exchange or controlled person shall group under separate headings
(A) quotations or transactions in listed securities, and (B) quota-
tions or transactions in securities for which unlisted trading priy-
ileges on such exchange has been continued or extended pursuant to
this subsection.
“The Commission shall by rules and regulations suspend unlisted
trading privileges in whole or in part for any or all classes of
securities for a period not exceeding twelve months, if it deems such
suspension necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for
the protection of investors or to prevent evasion of the purposes
of this title.
“Unlisted trading privileges continued for any security pursuant
to clause (1) of this subsection shall be terminated by order, after
appropriate notice and opportunity for hearing, if it appears at
any time that such security has been withdrawn from listing on
any exchange by the issuer thereof, unless it shall be established to
the satisfaction of the Commission that such delisting was not
designed to evade the purposes of this title or unless it shall appear
to the Commission that, notwithstanding any such purpose of evasion,
the continuation of such unlisted trading privileges is nevertheless
necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection
of investors. On the application of the issuer of any security for
which unlisted trading privileges on any exchange have been con-
tinued or extended pursuant to this subsection, or of any broker or
dealer who makes or creates a market for such security, or of any
other person having a bona-fide interest in the question of termina-
tion or suspension of such unlisted trading privileges, or on its own
motion, the Commission shall by order terminate, or suspend for a
period not exceeding twelve months, such unlisted trading privileges
for such security if the Commission finds, after appropriate notice
and opportunity for hearing, that by reason of inadequate public
distribution of such security in the vicinity of said exchange, or by
reason of inadequate public trading activity or of the character
of trading therein on said exchange, such termination or suspension
is necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection
of investors.
“In any proceeding under this subsection in which appropriate
notice and opportunity for hearing are required, notice of not less
than ten days to the applicant in such proceeding, to the issuer of
the security involved, to the exchange which is seeking to continue
or extend or has continued or extended unlisted trading privileges for
such security, and to the exchange, if any, on which such security
is listed and registered, shall be deemed adequate notice, and any
broker or dealer who makes or creates a market for such security,
74m CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 97, 1936.
and any other person having a bona-fide interest in such proceeding,
shall upon application be entitled to be heard.
“Any security for which unlisted trading privileges are continued
or extended pursuant to this subsection shall be deemed to be reg-
istered on a national securities exchange within the meaning of this
title. The powers and duties of the Commission under subsection
(b) of section 19 of this title shall be applicable to the rules of an
exchange in respect of any such security. The Commission may, by
such rules and regulations as it deems necessary or appropriate in
the public interest or for the protection of investors, either uncondi-
tionally or upon specified terms and conditions, or for stated periods,
exempt such securities from the operation of any provision of section
18, 14, or 16 of this title.”
Src. 2. Any application to continue unlisted trading privileges
for any security heretofore filed by any exchange and approved by
the Commission pursuant to clause (1) of subsection (f£) of section
12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and rules and regulations
thereunder shall be deemed to have been filed and approved pursuant
to clause (1) of said subsection (f) as amended by section 1 of this
Act.
Src. 8. Section 15 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is
amended to read as follows:
“Src. 15. (a) No broker or dealer (other than one whose business
is exclusively intrastate) shall make use of the mails or of any means
or instrumentality of interstate commerce to effect any transaction in,
or to induce the purchase or sale of, any security (other than an
exempted security or commercial paper, bankers’ acceptances, or
commercial bills) otherwise than on a national securities exchange,
unless such broker or dealer is registered in accordance with sub-
section (b) of this section.
“(b) A broker or dealer may be registered for the purposes of
this section by filing with the Commission an application for regis-
tration, which shall contain such information in such detail as to
such broker or dealer and any person directly or indirectly con-
trolling or controlled by, or under direct or indirect common control
with, such broker or dealer, as the Commission may by rules and
regulations require as necessary or appropriate in the public interest
or for the protection of investors. Except as hereinafter provided,
such registration shall become effective thirty days after the receipt
of such application by the Commission or within such shorter period
of time as the Commission may determine.
“An application for registration of a broker or dealer to be formed
or organized may be made by a broker or dealer to which the broker
or dealer to be formed or organized is to be the successor. Such
application shall contain such information in such detail as to the
applicant and as to the successor and any person directly or indirectly
controlling or controlled by, or under direct or indirect common
control with, the applicant or the successor, as the Commission may
by rules and regulations require as necessary or appropriate in the
public interest or for the protection of investors. Except as herein-
after provided, such registration shall become effective thirty days
after the receipt of such application by the Commission or within
such shorter period of time as the Commission may determine. Such
registration shall terminate on the forty-fifth day after the effective
date thereof, unless prior thereto the successor shall, in accordance
with such rules and regulations as the Commission may prescribe,
adopt such application as its own.
“Tf any amendment to any application for registration pursuant
to this subsection is filed prior to the effective date thereof, such
amendment shall be deemed to have been filed simultaneously with
1377
Securities hereunder
deemed registered.
Commission’s powers
extended.
Vol. 48, p. 898.
U. 8. C., p. 538.
pzenrunons permit-
a
2!
Vol. 48, pp. 894, 895,
896.
Applications to con-
tinue trading privileges
for security heretofore
approved.
Vol, 48, p. 894.
Over-the-counter
markets.
Vol. 48, p. 895; U. S.
C., p. 536.
Use of the mails,
ete., by unregistered
brokers, ete.
Applications for rezis-
tration; contents.
Effective date.
Application by brok-
er or dealer to be
formed or organized;
contents, etc.
Effective date.
Adoption of applica-
tion by successor.
Amendments to ap-
plications.
Postponement of ef-
fective date by Com-
mission.
Registration; denial
or revocation for speci-
fied causes.
Misleading, etc.,
statements in applica-
tion.
Previous conviction.
Subject to court in-
junction, ete.
Willful violations of
law, etc.
Postponement of ef-
fective date of registra-
tion.
Suspension of regis-
tration.
Withdrawal from reg-
istration by brokers,
etc.
Cancelation of regis-
tration or application
by Commission.
Use of mails, etc., to
induce purchase or sale
by fraudulent, etc., de-
vice.
'
Definition by Com-
Inission.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 97, 1936.
and as part of such application; except that the Commission may, if
it appears necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the
protection of investors, defer the effective date of any such registra-
tion as thus amended until the thirtieth day after the filing of such
amendment.
“The Commission shall, after appropriate notice and opportunity
for hearing, by order deny registration to or revoke the registration
of any broker or dealer if it finds that such denial or revocation is
in the public interest and that (1) such broker or dealer whether
prior or subsequent to becoming such, or (2) any partner, officer,
director, or branch manager of such broker or dealer (or any person
occupying a similar status or performing similar functions), or any
person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by such broker
or dealer, whether prior or subsequent to becoming such, (A) has
willfully made or caused to be made in any application for regis-
tration pursuant to this subsection or in any document supplemental
thereto or in any proceeding before the Commission with respect
to registration pursuant to this subsection any statement which was
at the time and in the light of the circumstances under which it was
made false or misleading with respect to any material fact; or (B)
has been convicted within ten years preceding the filing of any such
application or at any time thereafter of any felony or misdemeanor
involving the purchase or sale of any security or arising out of the
conduct of the business of a broker or dealer; or (C) is permanently
or temporarily enjoined by order, judgment, or decree of any court
of competent jurisdiction from engaging in or continuing any con-
duct or practice in connection with the purchase or sale of any
security; or (D) has willfully violated any provision of the Securities
Act of 1933, as amended, or of this title, or of any rule or regulation
thereunder. Pending final determination whether any such regis-
tration shall be denied, the Commission may by order postpone the
effective date of such registration for a period not to exceed fifteen
days, but if, after appropriate notice and opportunity for hearing, it
shall appear to the Commission to be necessary or appropriate in
the public interest or for the protection of investors to postpone the
effective date of such registration until final determination, the Com-
mission shall so order. Pending final determination whether any
such registration shall be revoked, the Commission shall by order
suspend such registration if, after appropriate notice and oppor-
tunity for hearing, such suspension shall appear to the Commission
to be necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the pro-
tection of investors. Any registered broker or dealer may, upon
such terms and conditions as the Commission may deem necessary
in the public interest or for the protection of investors, withdraw
from registration by filing a written notice of withdrawal with the
Commission. If the Commission finds that any registered broker or
dealer, or any broker or dealer for whom an application for regis-
tration is pending, is no longer in existence or has ceased to do
business as a broker or dealer, the Commission shall by order cancel
the registration or application of such broker or dealer.
“(c) No broker or dealer shall make use of the mails or of any
means or instrumentality of interstate commerce to effect any trans-
action in, or to induce the purchase or sale of, any security (other
than commercial paper, banker’s acceptances, or commercial bills)
otherwise than on a national securities exchange, by means of any
manipulative, deceptive, or other fraudulent device or contrivance.
The Commission shall, for the purposes of this subsection, by rules
and regulations define such devices or contrivances as are manipu-
lative, deceptive, or otherwise fraudulent.
(4tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
Of the sums herein made available under the United States
Shipping Board Bureau, not to exceed an aggregate of $150,000
shall be expended for compensation of regular attorneys employed
on a yearly salary basis, including their clerical and legal assistants.
This title may be cited as the Department of Commerce Appro-
priation Act, 1937.
TITLE IV—DEPARTMENT OF LABOR
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY
Salaries: Secretary of Labor, Assistant Secretary, Second Assist-
ant Secretary, and other personal services in the District of
Columbia, $330,000: Provided, That persons (not exceeding ten
in number) now employed in the determination of wages pursuant
to the provisions of the Act entitled “An Act to amend the Act
approved March 3, 1931, relating to the rate of wages for laborers
and mechanics employed by contractors and subcontractors on public
buildings”, approved August 30, 1935, may be continued in such
employment and paid from the amount herein appropriated without
regard to the provisions of the civil-service laws requiring com-
petitive examinations: Provided further, That said personnel (except
attorneys and referees) shall be required to take nonassembled
examinations.
Promotion of health, safety, employment, and so forth: For
salaries and expenses in connection with the promotion of health,
safety, employment stabilization, and amicable industrial relations
for labor and industry, $140,000, of which amount not to exceed
$83,580 may be expended for personal services in the District of
Columbia.
Contingent expenses: For contingent and miscellaneous expenses
of the offices and bureaus of the Department, for which appropria-
tions for contingent and miscellaneous expenses are not specifically
made, including the purchase of stationery, furniture, and repairs
to the same, carpets, matting, oilcloths, file cases, towels, ice, brooms,
soap, sponges, laundry, street-car fares not exceeding $400; purchase,
exchange, maintenance, and repair of motorcycles and motor trucks;
maintenance, operation, and repair of a motor-propelled passenger-
carrying vehicle, to be used only for official purposes; freight and
express charges; newspaper clippings not to exceed $1,200, postage
to foreign countries, telegraph and telephone service, typewriters,
adding machines, and other labor-saving devices; poe of law
books, books of reference, newspapers and periodicals, not exceeding
$4,500; contract stenographic services; all other necessary miscel-
laneous items and expenses not included in the foregoing; and not
to exceed $25,000 for purchase of certain supplies for the Immigra-
tion and Naturalization Service; in all, $112,500: Provided, That
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes of the United States (U. 8. C.,
title 41, sec. 5) shall not be construed to apply to any purchase or
service rendered for the Department of Labor when the aggregate
amount involved does not exceed the sum of $100.
Printing and binding: For printing and binding for the Depart-
ment of Labor, including all its bureaus, offices, institutions, and
services located in Washington, District of Columbia, and elsewhere,
$250,000.
Commissioners of conciliation: To enable the Secretary of Labor
to exercise the authority vested in him by section 8 of the Act creat-
ing the Department of Labor (U. S. C., title 5, sec. 611+) and to
1 So in original.
43115°—36——_17
1347
Compensation of at-
torneys.
Short title.
Department of
Labor.
Office of the Secre-
tary.
Salaries.
Provisos.
Personnel determin-
ing wage rates, re-
tained.
Publie Laws,
Sess., p. 1011.
Ist
Nonassembled exami-
nations required.
Promotion of health,
safety, employment,
etc.
Contingent expenses,
Proviso.
Minor purchases.
R. S., sec. 3709, p.
733; U.S. C., p. 1803.
Printing and binding.
Commissioners
of conciliation.
Vol. 37, p. 738.
U.S. C., p. 81.
1548
International Labor
Organization, Geneva.
Liaison with; ex-
penses, etc.
Vol. 48, p. 1182.
Printing and bind-
ing, ete.
Vol. 46, p. 818; U.S.
C., p. 45.
Bureau of Labor Sta-
tistics.
Salaries and expenses.
Immigration and
Naturalization Service.
Salaries and expenses:
Deportation, ete., of
aliens.
Vehicles.
Witness fees, etc.
74m” CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
appoint commissioners of conciliation, traveling expenses, telegraph
and telephone service, and not to exceed $80,000 for personal services
in the District of Columbia, $408,000.
Liaison with the International Labor Organization, Geneva, Switz-
erland, salaries and expenses: For a United States Labor Commis-
sioner and other personal services in Geneva, Switzerland; com-
pensation of interpreters, translators, and porters; traveling expenses
of employees, including transportation of employees, their families,
and effects, in going to and returning from foreign posts; rent, heat,
light, and fuel; hire, maintenance, and operation of motor-propelled
passenger-carrying vehicles; purchase and exchange of foreign and
domestic books, periodicals, and newspapers; purchase of furniture,
stationery, and supplies; printing and binding; postage; telephone
and other similar expenses, for which payment may be made in
advance; necessary technical or special investigations in connection
with matters falling within the scope of the International Labor
Organization; allowances for living quarters, including heat, fuel,
and light, as authorized by the Act approved June 26, 1930 (U.S. C.,
title 5, sec. 1182), not to exceed $1,700 for any person, and contingent
and such other expenses in the United States and elsewhere as the
Secretary of Labor may deem necessary, fiscal year 1937, $28,000.
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS
Salaries and expenses: For personal services, including temporary
statistical clerks, stenographers, and typewriters in the District of
Columbia, and including also experts and temporary assistants for
field service outside of the District of Columbia; traveling expenses,
including expenses of attendance at meetings concerned with the
work of the Bureau of Labor Statistics when incurred on the writ-
ten authority of the Secretary of Labor; purchase of periodicals,
documents, envelopes, price quotations, and reports and materials for
reports and bulletins of said Bureau, $850,000, of which amount not
to exceed $628,500 may be expended for the salary of the Commis-
sioner and other personal services in the District of Columbia.
IMMIGRATION AND NATURALIZATION SERVICE
Salaries and expenses: For enforcement of the laws regulating
the immigration to, the residence in, and the exclusion and deporta-
tion from the United States of aliens and persons subject to the
Chinese exclusion laws; for enforcement of the laws authorizing
a uniform rule for the naturalization of aliens; salaries, transporta-
tion, traveling, and other expenses of officers, clerks, and other
employees appointed to enforce said laws; care, detention, mainte-
nance, transportation, and inayeling expenses incident to the depor-
tation and exclusion of aliens and persons subject to the Chinese
exclusion laws, as authorized by law, in the United States and to,
through, or in foreign countries; purchase of supplies and equip-
ment, including alterations and repairs; purchase, exchange, opera-
tion, maintenance, and repair of motor-propelled vehicles, including
passenger-carrying vehicles for official use in field work; arms,
ammunition and accessories; cost of reports of decisions of the Fed-
eral courts and digests thereof for official use; verifications of legal
papers; refunding of head tax, maintenance bills, and immigration
fines, upon presentation of evidence showing conclusively that col-
lection and deposit was made through error; mileage and fees to
witnesses subpenaed on behalf of the United States, and for all
other expenses necessary to enforce said laws; $9,740,000, all to be
expended under the direction of the Secretary of Labor, of which
7415 CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
amount not to exceed $545,000 may be expended for the salary of
the Commissioner of Immigration and Naturalization and other
personal services in the District of Columbia, including services of
persons authorized by law to be detailed there for duty: Provided,
That not to exceed $45,000 of the sum herein appropriated shall be
available for the purchase, including exchange, of motor-propelled
passenger-carrying vehicles: Provided further, That the Commis- ,
sioner of Immigration and Naturalization, with the approval of the
Secretary of Labor, may contract with officers and employees sta-
tioned outside of the District of Columbia, whose salaries are pay-
able from this appropriation, for the use, on official business outside
of the District of Columbia, of privately owned horses, and the
consideration agreed upon shall be payable from the funds herein
appropriated: Provided further, That not to exceed $36,000 of the
total amount herein appropriated shall be available for allowances
for living quarters, including heat, fuel, and light, as authorized by
the Act approved June 26, 1930 (U.S. C., title 5, sec. 118a), not
to exceed $1,700 for any person: Provided further, That $100,000
of the amount herein appropriated shall be available only for the
payment of extra compensation for overtime services of inspectors
and employees of the Immigration and Naturalization Service for
which the United States receives reimbursement in accordance with
the provisions of the Act of March 2, 1931 (U.S. C., title 8, secs.
109a and 109b): Provided further, That not to exceed $400 of the
sum herein appropriated may be expended for attendance at meet-
ings concerned with the naturalization of aliens when incurred on
the written authority of the Secretary of Labor: Provided further,
That no part of this appropriation shall be available for the com-
pensation of assistants to clerks of United States courts: And pro-
vided further, That not to exceed $10,000 of the sum herein appro-
priated may be expended for payment of rewards, when specifically
authorized by the Secretary of Labor, for information leading to
the detection, arrest, or conviction of persons violating the immi-
gration or naturalization laws.
Immigration stations: For remodeling, repairing (including repairs
to the ferryboat, Ellis Island), renovating buildings, and purchase of
equipment, $110,000.
CHILDREN’S BUREAU
Salaries and expenses: For expenses of investigating and report-
ing upon matters pertaining to the welfare of children and child
life, and especially to investigate the questions of infant mortality;
personal services, including experts and temporary assistants;
traveling expenses, including not to exceed $3,000 for expenses of
attendance at meetings for the promotion of child welfare when
incurred on the written authority of the Secretary of Labor; pur-
chase of reports and material for the publications of the Children’s
Bureau and for reprints from State, city, and private publications
for distribution when said reprints can be procured more cheaply
than they can be printed by the Government, and other necessar
expenses, $400,000, of which amount not to exceed $313,500 may be
expended for personal services in the District of Columbia.
MATERNAL AND CHILD WELFARE
Salaries and expenses: For all authorized and necessary adminis-
trative expenses of the Children’s Bureau in performing the duties
imposed upon it by title V of the Social Security Act, approved
August 14, 1935, including personal services, rentals, repairs, and
‘
1349
Services in the Dis-
trict.
Provisos.
Vehicles.
Privately owned
orses.
Allowances for living
quarters, etc.
Vol. 46, p. 818.
U.S. C., p. 45.
_ Overtime services of
inspectors, etc.
Vol. 46, p. 1467.
U.S. C., p. 184.
* Attendance at meet-
ings.
Pay of assistants to
clerks of courts forbid-
den.
Payment of rewards.
Immigration stations.
Children’s Bureau.
Salaries and expenses.
Investigations.
Maternal and child
welfare.
Salaries and expenses.
Public Laws, Ist
sess., D. 629.
U.S. C., Supp. I, p.
249,
1350
Social Security Act.
Payments under
State plans,
Maternal and child-
health services, grants
to States.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 629.
Ist
Provisos.
Basis of allotments,
1937.
Supplemental aid not
included.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 630.
Ist
Services for crippled
children, grants to
States.
Public Laws, Ist
sess., p. 631.
Proviso.
Basis of allotments,
1937.
Child-welfare serv-
ices, grants to States.
Public Laws, Ist
Sess., P. 633.
Proviso.
Basis of allotments,
1937.
Women’s Bureau.
Salaries and expenses.
Vol. 41, p. 987; U.
S. C., p. 1320.
74ta CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
alterations to buildings, in the District of Columbia and elsewhere;
printing and binding; supplies; services; equipment; newspapers,
books of reference, periodicals, and press clippings; travel expenses
including expenses of attendance at meetings and attendance of
cooperating officials and consultants at conferences when called by
the Children’s Bureau with the approval of the Secretary of Labor,
$299,000.
In the administration of title V of the Social Security Act for
the fiscal year 1937, payments to States for any quarter of the fiscal
year 1937 under parts 1 and 2 may be made with respect to any
State plan approved under such respective parts by the Chief of the
Children’s Bureau prior to or during such quarter, but no such
payment shall be made with respect to any plan for any period prior
to the quarter in which such plan was submitted to the Chief of the
Children’s Bureau for approval.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR MATERNAL AND CHILD-HEALTH SERVICES
Grants to States for maternal and child-health services, Chil-
dren’s Bureau: For grants to States for the purpose of enabling
each State to extend and improve services for promoting the health
of mothers and children, as authorized in title V, part 1, of the
Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49 Stat. 629-631),
$2,820,000: Provided, 'That in carrying out such part 1, the allot-
ments to States and expenditures thereunder for the fiscal year 1937
are authorized to be made on the basis of a total of $3,800,000 for
all States (as defined in such Act): Provided further, That any
allotment to a State pursuant to section 502 (b) shall not be included
in computing for the purposes of subsections (a) and (b) of section
504 an amount expended or estimated to be expended by the State.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR SERVICES FOR CRIPPLED CHILDREN
Grants to States for services for crippled children, Children’s
Bureau: For the purpose of enabling each State to extend and
improve services for crippled children, as authorized in title V,
part 2, of the Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49
Stat., 631-633), $2,150,000: Provided, That in carrying out such
part 2, the allotments to States (as defined in such Act) and expendi-
tures thereunder for the fiscal year 1937 are authorized to be made
on the basis of a total of $2,850,000 for all States.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR CHILD-WELFARE SERVICES
Grants to States for child-welfare services, Children’s Bureau:
For grants to States for the purpose of enabling the United States,
through the Children’s Bureau, to cooperate with State public-
welfare agencies in establishing, extending, and strengthening pub-
lic-welfare services for the care of homeless or neglected children,
or children in danger of becoming delinquent, as authorized in title
V, part 3, of the Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1985 (49
Stat. 633), $1,200,000: Provided, That in carrying out such part 3,
the allotments to States (as defined in such Act) and expenditures
thereunder for the fiscal year 1937 are authorized to be made on
the basis of a total of $1,500,000 for all States,
WOMEN’S BUREAU
Salaries and expenses: For carrying out the provisions of the Act
entitled “An Act to establish in the Department of Labor a bureau
to be known as the Women’s Bureau”, approved June 5, 1920
747TH” CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
(U.S. C., title 29, sees 11-16), including personal services in the Dis-
trict of Columbia, not to exceed $134,500; purchase of material for
reports and educational exhibits, and traveling expenses, $153,200,
of which sum not to exceed $3,000 shall be available for expenses
of attendance at meetings concerned with the work of said bureau
when incurred on the written authority of the Secretary of Labor.
UNITED STATES EMPLOYMENT SERVICE
For carrying out the provisions of the Act entitled “An Act to
provide for the establishment of a national employment system
and for cooperation with the States in the promotion of such sys-
tem, and for other purposes”, approved June 6, 1933; personal
services and rent in the District of Columbia and elsewhere; travel-
ing expenses, including expenses of attendance at meetings con-
cerned with the work of the United States Employment Service when
specifically authorized by the Secretary of Labor; law books, books
of reference, newspapers and periodicals, printing and binding,
supplies and equipment, telegraph and telephone service, and mis-
cellaneous expenses, $2,785,000, of which amount not to exceed
$885,000 shall be available for the Veterans’ Placement Service, the
Farm Placement Service, District of Columbia Public Employment
Center, and all other purposes, including not to exceed $197,500 for
personal services in the Department in the District of Columbia, and
the remainder shall be available for payment to the several States
in accordance with the provisions of the said Act of June 6, 1933,
as amended: Provided, That apportionments for the fiscal year
1937 shall be on the basis of a total apportionment to all States of
$3,000,000, and in order to supply the Government’s apportionments
to States under such Act during the fiscal years 1936 and 1937,
which are not capable of being supplied under the foregoing appro-
priation, there is hereby appropriated so much as may be necessary
to supply such apportionments, but not more than $1,675,000.
UNITED STATES HOUSING CORPORATION
Salaries and expenses: For officers, clerks, and other employees,
and for contingent and miscellaneous expenses, in the District of
Columbia and elsewhere, including blank books, maps, stationery,
file cases, towels, ice, brooms, soap, freight and express charges, com-
munication service, travel expense, printing and binding not to exceed
$100, and all other miscellaneous items and expenses not included
in the foregoing and necessary to collect and account for the receipts
from the sale of properties and the receipts from the operation of
unsold properties of the United States Housing Corporation, the
Bureau of Industrial Housing and Transportation, property com-
mandeered by the United States through the Secretary of Labor,
and to collect the amounts advanced to transportation facilities and
others; for payment of special assessments and other utility, munici-
pal, State, and county charges or assessments unpaid by purchasers,
and which have been assessed against property in which the United
States Housing Corporation has an interest, and to defray expenses
incident to foreclosing mortgages, conducting sales under deeds of
trust, or reacquiring title or possession of real property under
default proceeding, including attorney fees, witness fees, court costs,
charges, and other miscellaneous expenses; for the maintenance and
repair of houses, buildings, and improvements which are unsold; in
all, $9,000: Provided, That no person shall be employed hereunder at
a rate of compensation exceeding $4,000 per annum, and only one
1351
Employment Service.
Providing for promo-
tion of employment.
Vol. 48, p. 113; U. 8.
C., p. 1324.
Attendance at meet-
ings.
Printing and bind-
ing, ete.
Veterans’ Placement
Service, Farm Place-
ment Service, D. C.
Public Employmen
Center.
Proviso.
Basis of apportion-
ments, 1937.
United States Hous-
ing Corporation.
Salaries and expenses.
Printing and binding.
Special assessments.
Provisos.
Salary limitation.
1352
Expenditures re-
stricted. 5
Bituminous Coal La-
bor Board.
Salaries and expenses.
Post, p. 1627.
Printing and binding.
Short title
Payment restriction,
persons failing to re-
ceive Senate confirma-
tion.
Payment to cotton
ginners.
Ante, p. 1116.
Cotton Control Act,
administrative ex-
penses.
Vol. 48, p. 598.
Proviso.
Time limitation.
Great Lakes Exposi-
tion.
Participation ex-
penses.
Ante, p. 1243.
May 15, 1936.
[S. J. Res. 231.]
{Pub. Res., No. 91.]
Landing of the
Swedes in Delaware.
Commemorative
coinage, authorized.
Number.
74ra CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 405, 406. MAY 15, 1936.
person may be employed at that rate: Provided further, That no
part of the appropriations heretofore made and available for
expenditure by the United States Housing Corporation shall be
expended for the purposes for which appropriations are made herein.
BITUMINOUS COAL LABOR BOARD
Salaries and expenses: For three Board members and other per-
sonal services in the District of Columbia and elsewhere, and for all
other necessary expenditures of the Bituminous Coal Labor Board
in performing the duties imposed upon said Board by the Bitu-
minous Coal Conservation Act of 1935, including supplies, station-
ery, telephone service, telegrams, furniture, office equipment, travel
expenses, and contract stenographic reporting services, $79,300.
Printing and binding, Bituminous Coal Labor Board: For all
printing and binding for the Bituminous Coal Labor Board, $2,500,
This title may be cited as the Department of Labor Appropriation
Act, 1937.
Sec. 2. No part of the money appropriated under this Act shall be
paid to any person for the filling of any position for which he or she
ee been nominated after the Senate has voted not to approve of the
nomination of said person.
Src. 3. That in passing upon applications made for compensation
under the provisions of the item for “Payment to cotton ginners”
contained in Title I of the Supplemental Appropriation Act, fiscal
year 1936 (Public Law Numbered 440, Seventy-fourth Congress),
and upon payments pursuant to such applications, the Secretary of
Agriculture and the Comptroller General of the United States are
authorized and directed, in the interest of saving as much adminis-
trative expense as possible and in order to avoid delay in passing
upon such applications, to assume that the additional expenses
incurred in connection with the administration of the Act of April
21, 1934 (491 Stat., 598-607), equaled 25 cents per bale, counting
round bales as half bales, during the period June 1, 1935, to February
10, 1936, inclusive: Provided, That no payment shall be made on any
application for such compensation unless the application is filed prior
to September 1, 1936.
Sec. 4. Great Lakes Exposition: For the expenses of the participa-
tion of the Government of the United States in the Great Lakes
Exposition as provided for by Senate Joint Resolution Numbered
233, including the reimbursement of other appropriations from which
payments may have been made for any of the purposes therein
specified, to be immediately available, $275,000.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
[CHAPTER 406.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To authorize the coinage of 50-cent pieces in commemoration of the three-
hundredth anniversary of the landing of the Swedes in Delaware.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That in commemoration
of the three-hundredth anniversary of the landing of the Swedes in
Delaware there shall be coined at a mint of the United States to be
designated by the Director of the Mint not less than twenty-five
thousand silver 50-cent pieces of standard size, weight, and composi-
tion and of a special appropriate single design, containing some
1So in original.
74ta CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 406, 407. MAY 15, 1936.
recognized emblem of the State of Delaware, to be fixed by the Direc-
tor of the Mint, with the approval of the Secretary of the Treasury,
but the United States shall not be subject to the expense of making the
necessary dies and other preparations for this coinage.
Sec. 2. The coins herein authorized shall bear the date 1936, irre-
spective of the year in which they are minted or issued, shall be legal
tender in any payment to the amount of their face value, and shall be
issued only upon the request of the president of the Delaware Swed-
ish Tercentenary Commission upon payment by him of the par value
of such coins, but not less than twenty-five thousand such coins shall
be issued to him at any one time and no such coins shall be issued
after the expiration of one year after the date of enactment of this
Act. Such coins may be disposed of at par or at a premium by such
commission, and the net proceeds shall be used by it in defraying the
expenses incidental and appropriate to the commemoration of such
event.
Sec. 3. All laws now in force relating to the subsidiary silver coins
of the United States and the coining or striking of the same, regulat-
ing and guarding the process of coinage, providing for the purchase
of material, and for the transportation, distribution, and redemption
of coins, for the prevention of debasement or counterfeiting, for the
security of the coins, or for any other purposes, whether such laws
are penal or otherwise, shall, so far as applicable, apply to the coinage
herein authorized.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
[CHAPTER 407.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To provide for participation by the United States in an Inter-American Confer-
ence to be held at Buenos Aires, Argentina, or at the capital of another American
republic, in 1936.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any money not other-
wise appropriated, the sum of $75,000 to be used for participation
by the United States in an Inter-American Conference, in pursuance
of and for the purposes set forth in a letter from the President of
the United States dated January 30, 1936, to be held at Buenos
Aires, Argentina, or at the capital of another American republic, in
1936, including personal services in the District of Columbia or
elsewhere without reference to the Classification Act of 1923, as
amended; stenographic reporting and other services by contract if
deemed necessary without regard to section 3709 of the Revised
Statutes (U. S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent; traveling expenses (and
by indirect routes and by airplane if specifically authorized by the
Secretary of State); hire, maintenance, and operation of motor-
propelled passenger-carrying vehicles; equipment, purchase of
necessary books, documents, newspapers, periodicals, and maps; sta-
tionery; official cards, entertainment; printing and binding; and
such other expenses as may be authorized by the Secretary of State,
including the reimbursement of other appropriations from which
payments may have been made for any of the purposes herein
specified, to be expended under the direction of the Secretary of
State, fiscal year 1936, to remain available until June 30, 1937.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
1355
No Federal expense
for dies, ete.
Date, issue, etc.
Disposal.
Coinage laws appli-
cable.
May 15, 1936.
[S. J. Res. 248.]
[Pub. Res., No. 92.]
Inter-American Con-
ference, 1936.
Appropriation au-
thorized for participa-
tion expenses.
Ante, p. 1319.
U.S. C., p. 85.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S., sec. 3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Vehicles.
Printing and binding.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
1554
May 18, 1936.
[H. R. 10589.]
[Public, No. 600.)
Missouri River.
Bridge construction
at Niobrara, Nebr.
Textual changes.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 1074.
Amendment.
May 18, 1936.
{H. R. 10847.]
Ist
[Public, No. 601.]
New York Ci
N.Y
ty,
‘Acquisition cf land
near, for cemeterial
purposes, authorized.
Appropriation
thorized.
Post, p. 1641.
au-
74ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 420, 421. MAY 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 420.]
AN ACT
To amend section 82 of the Act entitled “‘An Act to authorize the construction
of certain bridges and to extend the times for commencing and/or completing
the construction of other bridges over the navigable waters of the United
States, and for other purposes’’, approved August 30, 1935.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That subsection (a)
of section 32 of the Act entitled “An Act to authorize the construction
of certain bridges and to extend the times for commencing and/or
completing the construction of other bridges over the navigable waters
of the United States, and for other purposes”, approved August 30,
1935, is amended by striking out “the village board of the village
of Niobrara; county of Knox, State of Nebraska”, and inserting in
lieu thereof the following: “the county of Knox, State of Nebraska”,
Sec. 2. Subsection (b) of such section 82 is amended by striking
out “the Village Board of the Village of Niobrara, county of Knox,
State of Nebraska”, and inserting in lieu thereof the following: “the
county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
Sec. 3. (a) Subsection (c) of such section 82 is amended by strik-
ing out “The said Villiage Board of the Villiage of Niobrara, county
of Knox, State of Nebraska”, and inserting in lieu thereof the
following: “The said county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
(b) Subsection (c) of such section 32 is further amended by strik-
ing out “to fix the charge tolls for transit” and inserting in lieu
thereof the following: “to fix and charge tolls for transit”.
Src. 4. Subsection (d) of such section 32 is amended by striking
out “After a sinking sufficient for amortization shall have been so
provided, said bridge” and inserting in lieu thereof the following:
“After a sinking fund sufficient for such amortization shall have been
so provided, said bridge”.
Sec. 5. The right to alter, amend, or repeal this Act is hereby
expressly reserved.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 421.]
AN ACT
To authorize the acquisition of land for cemeterial purposes in the vicinity of
New York City, New York.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of War be, and he is hereby, authorized to acquire by purchase,
condemnation, or otherwise such suitable lands in the vicinity of New
York City as in his judgment are required for enlargement of exist-
ing national cemetery facilities, and the sum of $250,000, or so much
thereof as may be necessary, is hereby authorized to be appropriated
from any funds in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, which
sum shall remain available until expended.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
74ru CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 422, 423. MAY 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 422.]
; AN ACT
To amend section 5 of the Act of March 2, 1919, generally known as the “War
Minerals Relief Statutes.”
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in any claim
that has heretofore been filed within the time and in the manner
provided by the Act approved March 2, 1919 (40 Stat. 1272), as
amended, generally referred to as the “War Minerals Relief Statutes”
in which the Supreme Court of the District of Columbia under the
authority conferred upon said court by the Act approved February
13, 1929 (45 Stat. 1166), has adjudged or decreed interest payments
or obligations to be losses reimbursable within the meaning of the
Act of March 2, 1919 (40 Stat. 1272), as amended, the Secretary of
the Interior shall open or reopen such claim and include in his
adjustments and payments of losses, interest which has been paid or
has accrued to the date of approval of this Act: Provided, however,
That such losses shall be shown to the satisfaction of the Secretary
of the Interior as a matter of fact to be the result of a legal obliga-
tion incurred within the statutory period as provided in said Act of
March 2, 1919: And provided further, That the sum paid in satisfy-
ing said claims shall not exceed in total $1,250,000. It is also
provided that all settlements under this Act and pursuant to its
provisions shall constitute full and complete discharge of all obliga-
tions of the United States accruing under the War Minerals Act
and Acts amendatory thereof.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 423.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To provide for participation by the United States in the Ninth International
Congress of Military Medicine and Pharmacy in Rumania, in 1937; and to
authorize and request the President of the United States to invite the Inter-
national Congress of Military Medicine and Pharmacy to hold its tenth
congress in the United States in 1939, and to invite foreign countries to par-
ticipate in that congress.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That there is hereby
authorized to be appropriated, out of any money in the Treasury not
otherwise appropriated, the sum of $11,500, or so much thereof as
may be necessary, for the expenses of participation by the United
States in the Ninth International Congress of Military Medicine and
Pharmacy to be held in Rumania in 1937, including personal services
in the District of Columbia or elsewhere without reference to the
Classification Act of 1923, as amended; stenographic reporting and
other services by contract if deemed necessary without regard to
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes (U.S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent;
traveling expenses; purchase of necessary books, documents, news-
papers, periodicals, and maps; stationery; official cards; entertain-
ment; printing and binding, including the payment of not to exceed
$500 to the Association of Military Surgeons of the United States
toward the cost of printing the report of the American Delegation
to the Ninth Congress; and such other expenses as may be authorized
by the Secretary of State, including the reimbursement of other
appropriations from which payments may have been made for any
of the purposes herein specified, to be expended under the direction
of the Secretary of State.
1355
May 18, 1936.
(S.1432.]
[Public, No. 602.]
“War Minerals Re-
lief Statutes’, amend-
ment.
Vol. 40, p. 1272; Vol.
42, p. 322; Vol. 45, p.
1166.
Post, p. 1619,
Interest payments on
certain claims under.
Provisos.
Condition.
Limitation on total
amount.
Settlements; dis-
charge of liability.
May 18, 1936.
[H. J. Res. 538.]
[Pub. Res., No. 93.]
Ninth International
Congress of Military
Medicine and Phar-
macy, Rumania, 1937.
Sum authorized for
participation expenses.
Post, p. 1634.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S.,sec.3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Printing and bind-
ing; report of Ameri-
can Delegation.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
1356
Invitation to hold
10th congress in United
States; foreign govern-
ments to participate.
May 18, 1936.
(H. J. Res. 547.]
[Pub. Res., No. 94.]
Great Lakes Exposi-
tion, Cleveland, Ohio.
Dutiable articles, im-
ported for exhibition
purposes, etc., ad-
mitted free, under regu-
lations.
Ante, pp. 1243, 1352.
Sales permitted.
Provisos.
Duty on articles
withdrawn.
Deterioration allow-
ance.
Marking require-
ments.
Articles abandoned.
Transfer privileges.
Exposition deemed
sole consignee of mer-
chandise.
Incurred Federal ex-
penses reimbursable.
74rm CONGRESS. SESS. IL. CHS, 423, 424. MAY 18, 1936.
Sec. 2. That the President be, and he is hereby, authorized and
requested to extend to the International Congress of Military Medi-
cine and Pharmacy an invitation to hold its tenth congress in the
United States in 1939, and to invite foreign governments to partici-
pate in that congress.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 424]
JOINT RESOLUTION
Providing for the importation of articles free from tariff or customs duty for the
purpose of exhibition at Great Lakes Exposition to be held at Cleveland,
Ohio, beginning in June 1936, and for other purposes.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That all articles which
shall be imported from foreign countries for the purpose of exhibi-
tion at the international exposition to be held at Cleveland, Ohio,
beginning in June 1936, by Great Lakes Exposition, or for use in
constructing, installing, or maintaining foreign buildings, or exhibits
at the said exhibition, upon which articles there shall be a tariff or
customs duty shall be admitted without payment of such tariff, cus-
toms duty, fees, or charges under such regulations as the Secretary of
the Treasury shall prescribe; but it shall be lawful at any time during
or within three months after the close of the said exposition to sell
within the area of the exposition any articles provided for herein,
subject to such regulations for the security of the revenue and for the
collection of import duties as the Secretary of the Treasury shall pre-
scribe: Provided, That all such articles, when withdrawn for con-
sumption or use In the United States, shall be subject to the duties,
if any, imposed upon such articles by the revenue laws in force at the
date of their withdrawal; and on such articles which shall have
suffered diminution or deterioration from incidental handling or
exposure the duties, if payable, shall be assessed according to the
appraised value at the time of withdrawal from entry hereunder for
consumption or entry under the general tariff law: Provided further,
That imported articles provided for herein shall not be subject to an
marking requirements of the general tariff laws, except when sich
articles are withdrawn for consumption or use in the United States,
in which case they shall not be released from customs custody until
properly marked, but no additional duty shall be assessed because
such articles were not sufficiently marked when imported into the
United States: Provided further, That at any time during or within
three months after the close of the exposition any article entered
hereunder may be abandoned to the Government or destroyed under
customs supervision, whereupon any duties on such article shall be
remitted: Provided further, That articles which have been admitted
without payment of duty for exhibition under any tariff law and
which have remained in continuous customs custody or under a cus-
toms exhibition bond and imported articles in bonded warehouses
under the general tariff law may be accorded the privilege of trans-
fer to and entry for exhibition at the said exposition under such
regulations as the Secretary of the Treasury shall prescribe: And
provided further, That Great Lakes Exposition shall be deemed, for
customs purposes only, to be the sole consignee of all merchandise
imported under the provisions of this Act, and that the actual and
necessary customs charges for labor, services, and other expenses in
connection with the entry, examination, appraisement, release, or
custody, together with the necessary charges for salaries of customs
officers and employees in connection with the supervision, custody of,
v4ruH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 424, 495, 497. MAY 18, 19, 1936.
and accounting for articles imported under the provisions of this Act,
shall be reimbursed by Great Lakes Exposition to the Government
of the United States under regulations to be prescribed by the Secre-
tary of the Treasury, and that receipts from such reimbursements
shall be deposited as refunds to the appropriation from which paid,
in the manner provided for in section 524, Tariff Act of 1930,
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 425.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To authorize an appropriation for the expenses of participation by the United
States in a conference at Brussels to revise the Convention for the Protection
of Literary and Artistic Works concluded at Bern, September 9, 1886, and
revised at Rome, June 2, 1928.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any money in the
Treasury not otherwise appropriated, the sum of $6,500, or so much
thereof as may be necessary, for the expenses of participation by
the United States in the conference to convene at Brussels, Belgium,
for the purpose of revising the Convention for the Protection of
Literary and Artistic Works, concluded at Bern, September 9, 1886,
and revised at Rome, June 2, 1928, including personal services in
the District of Columbia and elsewhere without reference to the
Classification Act of 1923, as amended; stenographic, reporting, and
other services by contract, if deemed necessary, without regard to
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes (U.S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent;
traveling expenses; purchases of necessary books, documents, news-
papers, periodicals, and maps; stationery; official cards; entertain-
ment; printing and binding; and such other expenses as may be
authorized by the Secretary of State, including the reimbursement
of other appropriations from which payments may have been made
for any of the purposes herein specified, to be expended under the
direction of the Secretary of State.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 427.]
AN ACT
To authorize certain officers of the United States Navy, officers and enlisted men
of the Marine Corps, and officers and enlisted men of the United States Army
to accept such medals, orders, diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have
been tendered them by foreign governments in appreciation of services rendered.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the following-
named officers of the United States Navy, and officers and enlisted
men of the Marine Corps, are hereby authorized to accept such
medals, orders, diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have been
tendered them by foreign governments in appreciation of services
rendered :
United States Navy: Admiral William H. Standley; Rear Admiral
David F, Sellers; Rear Admiral Wat T. Cluverius; Rear Admiral
Hayne Ellis; Rear Admiral Ernest J. King; Rear Admiral Louis
M. Nulton, retired; Rear Admiral Yates Stirling, Junior; Rear
Admiral John R. Y. Blakely, retired; Rear Admiral Edward H.
Campbell; Rear Admiral Walter N. Vernou; Rear Admiral Harley
H. Christy; Rear Admiral Henry V. Butler; Rear Admiral Walter
S. Crosley; Rear Admiral Frank B. Upham; Rear Admiral Edward
1357
Deposit of, as re-
funds.
Vol. 46, p. 741.
U.S. C., p. 894.
May 18, 1936.
[H. J. Res. 569.]
~[Pub. Res., No. 95.)
Convention for the
Protection of Literary
and Artistic Works,
couierenes for revision
of.
Sum authorized for
participation expenses.
Post, p. 1633.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S., sec.3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
May 19, 1936.
_-__[8..1975.]
[Publie, No. 603.]
Navy, Marine Corps,
and Army.
Acceptance of certain
decorations, etc., ten-
dered by foreign gov-
ernments to designated
officers, etc., authorized.
Navy.
1358
Navy—Continued.
74ma CONGRESS. SESS. IL. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
B. Fenner; Rear Admiral George T. Pettengill; Rear Admiral Clark
N. Woodward; Rear Admiral William H. Allen; Captain Reuben
B. Coffey; Captain Vaughn K. Coman; Captain Gordon W, Haines;
Captain Alfred G. Howe; Captain Victor A. Kimberly; Captain
David M. Le Breton; Captain William R. Sayles; Captain Halsey
Powell; Captain Willis W. Bradley, Junior; Captain Frank H.
Roberts; Captain Arthur B. Cook; Captain Benyaurd B. Wygent;
Captain Rufus F. Zogbaum, Junior; Captain Frank Jack Fletcher;
Captain Matthias EK. Manly; Captain Alfred W. Brown; Captain
Augustine T. Beauregard; Captain Harold M. Bemis; Captain Her-
bert H. Michael; Captain MacGillivray Milne; Captain Milo F.
Draemel; Captain Edward A. Evers, Naval Reserve; Captain
Edward T. Hooper, Supply Corps; Captain Holden C. Richardson,
Construction Corps, retired; Captain Kent C. Melhorn, Medical
Corps; Captain Lucius W. Johnson, Medical Corps; Commander
Ernest L. Gunther; Commander Hamilton V. Bryan; Commander
John D. Price; Commander Harold C. Train; Commander Ward W.
Waddell; Commander William W. Smith; Commander Calvin N.
Cobb; Commander Patrick N. L. Bellinger; Commander Harry G.
Patrick; Commander Earl W. Spencer; Commander William H.
Pashley; Commander Aaron S. Merrill; Commander Douglas W.
Fuller; Commander Ralph F. Wood; Commander Joel T. Boone,
Medical Corps; Commander Joseph A. J. MeMullin, Medical Corps;
Commander Gordon D. Hale, Medical Corps; Commander Walter
C. Espech, Medical Corps; Commander Maurice M. Witherspoon,
Chaplain Corps; Commander Bernhard H. Bieri; Lieutenant Com-
mander Albert S. Marley; Lieutenant Commander Charles G.
Moore, Junior; Lieutenant Commander John J. Carrick, Naval
Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Emil J. Carroll, Naval Reserve;
Lieutenant Commander Francis G. Donebrink; Lieutenant Com-
mander Victor C. Barringer, Junior; Lieutenant Commander Ralph
A. Ofstie; Lieutenant Commander Lucien B. Green, Second, retired ;
Lieutenant Commander Dallas D. Dupre; Lieutenant Commander
Harold B. Crow, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Edward
O. McDonnell, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Schuyler F.
Cumings, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Charles W. Steven-
son, Supply Corps; Lieutenant Commander Charles R. O’Leary,
Supply Corps; Lieutenant Commander Hardy V. Hughens, Medical
Corps; Lieutenant Commander Thomas L. Morrow, Medical Corps;
Lieutenant Commander Louis E. Mueller, Medical Corps; Lieu-
tenant Commander Victor B. Riden, Medical Corps; Lieutenant
Commander William M. H. Turville, Medical Corps; Lieutenant
Commander Horace R. Boone, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Com-
mander Warwick T. Brown, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander
Vincent Hernandez, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Harry
S. Harding, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Robert W. Wim-
berly, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Hillard L. Weer,
Medical Corps; Lieutenant Robert F. Hickey; Lieutenant Harvey
R. Bowes; Lieutenant Buell F. Brandt; Lieutenant George H.
De Baun; Lieutenant John M. Brewster; Lieutenant Curry E.
Eason; Lieutenant Maxwell B. Saben; Lieutenant John F. Gillon;
Lieutenant Colonel H. Mansfield, Chaplain Corps; Lieutenant
Joseph O. Saurette; Lieutenant Robert H. Smith; Lieutenant Don-
ald R. Tallman; Lieutenant John Davis, retired; Lieutenant Walter
L. Bach, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Walter G. Kalbury, Medical
Corps; Lieutenant Hugh E. Mouldin, Dental Corps; Lieutenant
(Junior Grade) James H. Taylor; Lieutenant (sunier Grade)
Frank E. Latauzo, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Robert C. Douthat, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
74mm CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
Freeman C. Harris, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Warren G. Wieand, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
George H. Mills, Dental Corps; Ensign Howard F. Hozey, Naval
Reserve Force; Chief Boatswain William C. Baker; Chief Pharma-
cist Roy Aikman; Chief Pharmacist Leon H. French.
United States Marine Corps: Major General James C. Breckin-
ridge; Brigadier General George Richards; Brigadier General Rufus
M. Lane, retired; Brigadier General Hugh Matthews; Brigadier
General Randolph C. Barkeley; Brigadier General Frederick L.
Bradman; Brigadier General Louis McCarty Little; Brigadier Gen-
eral Douglas C. McDougal; Brigadier General Richard T. Williams;
Colonel Richard M. Cutts; Colonel Presley M. Rixey, Junior; Colonel
Seth Williams; Colonel James J. Meade; Colonel Clayton S. Vogel;
Colonel Calvin B. Matthews; Lieutenant Colonel Lauren S. Willis,
retired; Lieutenant Colonel Jeter R. Horton; Lieutenant Colonel
Franklin B. Garrett; Lieutenant Colonel Calhoun Ancrum; Lieu-
tenant Colonel William S. Wise; Lieutenant Colonel William B.
Smith; Lieutenant Colonel Charles F. M. Price; Lieutenant Colonel
Ross E. Rosell; Lieutenant Colonel John Marston; Lieutenant
Colonel Julian C. Smith; Lieutenant Colonel Roy E. Geiger; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Harry Schmidt; Lieutenant Colonel De Witt Peck;
Lieutenant Colonel William B. Sullivan; Lieutenant Colonel Henry
L. Larsen; Lieutenant Colonel Arnold W. Jacobsen; Major Thomas
S. Clarke; Major Joseph C. Fegan; Major Frederick R. Hoyt;
Major Marion B. Humphrey; Major Allen H. Turnage; Major
Louis M. Bourne; Major Matthew S. Kingman; Major John F. S.
Norris; Major Anderson C. Deering; Major Ralph J. Mitchell;
Major Samuel L. Howard; Major Oscar R. Cauldwell; Major
Thomas E. Watson; Major Walter C. Sheard; Major Roger W.
Peard; Major Lloyd L. Leach; Major Raphael Griffin; Major
Thomas P. Cheatham; Major Louis W. Whaley; Major Leroy P.
Hunt; Major Leo D. Merale; Major Lemuel C. Shepherd, Junior;
Major James E. Davis; Major Alphonse De Carre; Major James T.
Moore; Major Alfred N. Noble; Major Franklin A. Hart; Major
William N. Beat; Major Herbert Hardy; Major Ralph E. West;
Captain Graves B. Erskine; Captain Robert Yowell; Captain
Francis P. Mulcahy; Captain Maurice C. Holmes; Captain Eugene
F. C. Collier; Captain Otto Salzman; Captain Carl S. Schmidt;
Captain Harry W. Gamble; Captain Roscoe Arnett; Captain
Maurice S. Gregory; Captain James P. Smith; Captain Edward G.
Kuefe; Captain Max Cox; Captain Oliver P. Smith; Captain Joseph
O. Ward; Captain Edward L. Durvall, Junior; Captain John C.
Wood; Captain Jacob Lienhard; Captain Victor F. Bleasdale; Cap-
tain Leonard H. Rea; Captain James P. Schwerin; Captain John
H. Parker; Captain Walter S. Casper; Captain Willett Elmore;
Captain Benjamin W. Gally; Captain James A. Nixson, Captain
Frederick M. Howard; Captain Lee W. Brown; Captain Harold G.
Major; Captain Bernard Dubel; Captain Hamilton M. H. Fleming;
Captain Claude A. Phillips; Captain Harold W. Whitney; Captain
Harry Paul; Captain Frank N. Costtge; Captain Byron F’. Johnson;
Captain William J. Livingston; Captain George E. Monson; Captain
Amor L. Sims; Captain George R. Rowen; Captain Brady L. Vogt;
Captain Clinton W. McLeod; Captain Roy C. Swick; Captain
Reuben B. Price; Captain William J. Whaling; Captain Frank N.
Gilman; Captain Monitor Watchman; Captain George L. Maynard;
Captain Benjamin W. Atkinson; Captain William L. Bales; Cap-
tain Frederick C. Diebush; Captain Terrell J. Crawford; Captain
John T. Walker; Captain William P. T. Hill; Captain Jesse A.
Nelson; Captain Henry A. Carr; Captain William C. Hall;
1359
Navy—Continued.
Marine Corps.
1560
tinued.
Marine Corps—Con-
d
74tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
Captain Edwin J. Farrell; Captain Louis E. Woods; Captain
Augustus H. Fricke; Captain William S. Fellers; Captain Herbert
S. Keimling; Captain Walter W. Wensinger; Captain Ernest E.
Lincort; First Lieutenant William L. McKittrick; First Lieutenant
Max D. Smith; First Lieutenant David A. Stafford; First Lieu-
tenant Roy W. Conkey; First Lieutenant Harold N. Rosecrans;
First Lieutenant Horace D. Palmer; First Lieutenant Hayne D.
Royden; First Lieutenant Christian F. Schilt; First Lieutenant
James H. Strother; First Lieutenant Ivan W. Miller; First Lieu-
tenant John C. McQueen; First Lieutenant William W. Davies;
First Lieutenant James W. Smith; First Lieutenant Lewis A. Hohn;
First Lieutenant Lucian C. Whitaker; First Lieutenant Ralph E.
Forsyth; First Lieutenant Pierson E. Conradt; First Lieutenant
Cregon A. Williams; First Lieutenant Evans F. Carlson; First
Lieutenant John W. Lakes; First Lieutenant George F. Good,
Junior; First Lieutenant William R. Hughes; First Lieutenant Max-
well H. Mizell; First Lieutenant Charles W. Kail; First Lieutenant
Lewis D. Fuller; First Lieutenant Joe N. Smith; First Lieutenant
Herbert F. Becker; First Lieutenant Alexander W. Kreiser; First
Lieutenant Edward J. Trumble; First Lieutenant James C. Brauer;
First Lieutenant Francis J. Cunningham; First Lieutenant Paul A.
Putnam; First Lieutenant John S. E. Young; First Lieutenant Wil-
liam D. Saunders; First Lieutenant Lofton R. Henderson; First
Lieutenant John N. Coffman; First Lieutenant Peter P. Schrider;
First Lieutenant Robert L. Griffin; First Lieutenant James P.
Risely; First Lieutenant Samuel S. Jack; First Lieutenant Frank
M. June; First Lieutenant Miles 8. Newton; First Lieutenant Ira
L. Kimes; First Lieutenant Reginald H. Ridgely; First Lieutenant
Nols H. Nelson; First Lieutenant Frank C. Dailey; First Lieutenant
Frank H. Wirsig; Second Lieutenant Robert L. Peterson; Second
Lieutenant Kenneth H. Weir; Second Lieutenant Arthur F. Binney;
Second Lieutenant Clovis C. Coffman; Second Lieutenant Perry O.
Parmelee; Second Lieutenant Lester S. Hamel; Second Lieutenant
Ernest E. Pollock; Second Lieutenant Frank C. Croft; Second Lieu-
tenant Newin O. Hammond; Second Lieutenant Frank H. Schwable;
Second Lieutenant Joseph H. Berry; Second Lieutenant James P.
Berkeley; Second Lieutenant Peter A. McDonald; Second Lieu-
tenant Michael M. Mahoney; Second Lieutenant Fred D. Beans;
Second Lieutenant Edgar O. Price; Second Lieutenant Lebulon C.
Hopkins; Second Lieutenant William A. Willis; Second Lieutenant
John M. Davis; Chief Marine Gunner John F. Evans; Chief Marine
Gunner Otho Wiggs; Chief Marine Gunner Jesse W. Stamper;
Chief Marine Gunner Frank F. Putcarmer; Chief Marine Gunner
Frank O. Lundt; Chief Marine Gunner Michael Wederezyk; Chief
Marine Gunner Harold Ogden; Chief Quartermaster Clerk August
F. Schonefeld; Chief Quartermaster Clerk William A. Warrell,
retired; Chief Quartermaster Clerk Albert O. Woodrow; Chief
Quartermaster Clerk Elmer W. Darde; Chief Pay Clerk Benjamin
H. Wolever; Chief Pay Clerk Clinton A. Phillips; Chief Pay Clerk
Timothy E. Murphy; Marine Gunner Kennard F. Bubier; Marine
Gunner Albert S. Nunach; Marine Gunner Harry R. Baley; Marine
Gunner Thomas Whitezel, Marine Gunner Walter N. Hendersen;
Marine Gunner Robert S. McCook; Sergeant Major James M.
Barmead; Sergeant Major Carl Svenson; Sergeant Major Charles
A. White; Quartermaster Sergeant Frederick J. Widman; Quarter-
master Sergeant Rupert F. Stone; Master Technical Sergeant Mil-
lard T. Shepard; Paymaster Sergeant Fred Parquette; First Ser-
geant Edwin C. Clarke; First Sergeant Cecil N. Bietz; First_Ser-
geant Charles H. Gray; First Sergeant William O’Grady; First
(47a CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
Sergeant Alfred Sylvester; First Sergeant Harry Watkins; First ,
Sergeant Nicholas M. Griece; First Sergeant Frederick Dalton;
First Sergeant Louis N. Bertol; First Sergeant Russell O. Beard;
First Sergeant Otto Poland; First Sergeant Richard Shaker ; First
Sergeant Charles E. Stuart; First Sergeant Frank Verdier; First
Sergeant Curtis O. Whitney; Gunnery Sergeant Joseph A. Saunders;
Gunnery Sergeant Bernard J. Durr; Gunnery Sergeant John J.
Rogers; Sergeant Olin L. Beall; Sergeant George Washington;
Sergeant Joseph L. Bonville; Sergeant Joseph Konepka; Sergeant
Charles L. McIndoc; Sergeant Frank J. Murphy; Sergeant Douglas
S. Catchis; Sergeant Daniel J. Donahoe; Sergeant Charles Sorenson ;
Private John David. x
United States Navy: Admiral William B. Caperton, retired; Rear
Admiral Charles 8. Freeman; Captain William D. Puleston; Captain.
Walter S. Anderson; Captain Stephen B. McKinney; Captain Wil-
liam O. Spears; Captain Augustin T. Beauregard; Commander Leo
H. Thebaud; Commander Clarence Gulbranson; Captain Charles
St. J. Butler, Medical Corps; Captain William S. Bainbridge, Medi-
cal Corps, Naval Reserve, retired; Commander Morton D. Willcutts,
Medical Corps; Commander William Henry P. Blandy; Commander
Edwin C. Ebert, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Roscoe H.
Hillenkoetter ; Lieutenant Commander Joel J. White, Medical Corps;
Lieutenant Albert L. King, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant (Junior
Grade) Walter C. Ford; Captain Herbert S. Howard, Construction
Corps; Lieutenant Commander Leslie C. Stevens; Lieutenant Com-
mander William K. Vanderbilt, United States Naval Reserve.
United States Marine Corps: Colonel Robert L. Denig; Colonel
Henry L. Roosevelt, Marine Corps Reserve, deceased; Colonel Wil-
liam C. Harllee, retired; Colonel Julius S. Turrill, retired; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Harry L. Smith; Lieutenant Colonel William M.
Small, retired; Major Andrew E. Creesy; Major Donald J. Kendall;
Major Chester L. Fordney, Marine Corps Reserve; Captain Louis
Cukela; First Sergeant George Nelson.
That the following-named officers and enlisted men of the United
States Army are hereby authorized to accept such medals, orders,
diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have been tendered them
by foreign governments in appreciation of services rendered :
General Douglas MacArthur; Major General Dennis E. Nolan;
Major General Malin Craig; Major General Paul B. Malone; Major
General Frank Parker; Major General Frank R. McCoy; Major
General Albert J. Bowley; Major General Benjamin D. Foulois;
Brigadier General Frank C. Bolles; Brigadier General Casper H.
Conrad, Junior; Brigadier General Andrew Moses; Brigadier Gen-
eral Thomas W. Darrah; Brigadier General Francis LeJ. Parker;
Brigadier General Guy V. Henry; Brigadier General John W.
Gulick; Brigadier General Robert C. Foy; Colonel Joseph A. Baer;
Colonel Charles Burnett; Colonel W. Goff Caples; Colonel Edward
Davis; Colonel Charles W. Exton; Colonel James Malcolm Graham;
Colonel W. Lee Hart; Colonel Jacob C. Johnson; Colonel Roy C.
Kirtland; Colonel Osmun Latrobe; Colonel E. R. Warner McCabe;
Colonel Charles H. Patterson; Colonel Russell P. Reeder; Colonel
Francis A. Ruggles; Colonel Frederick W. Van Duyne; Colonel
Richard H. Williams; Lieutenant Colonel Frank M. Andrews; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Lester D. Baker; Lieutenant Colonel Reginald B.
Cocroft; Lieutenant Colonel John F. Curry; Lieutenant Colonel
Ernest J. Dawley; Lieutenant Colonel Robert H. Fletcher, Junior;
Lieutenant Colonel William W. Hicks; Lieutenant Colonel Donald
C. McDonald; Lieutenant Colonel Frederick W. Manley; Lieutenant
M
inued.
1361
arine Corps—Con-
Navy.
Marine Corps.
Army.
1362
Army—Continued.
May 19, 1936.
[H. R. 12162.]
{Public, No. 604.]
United States courts.
Vol. 36, p. 1116; U
S. C., p. 1247.
Mississippi judicial
districts.
Northern district.
Eastern division,
Western division.
Delta division.
Terms of court.
Eastern division.
741a CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 427, 428. MAY 19, 1936.
Colonel Maxwell Murray; Lieutenant Colonel Henry C. Pratt; Lieu-
tenant Colonel John W. N. Schulz; Lieutenant Colonel Martin C.
Shallenberger; Lieutenant Colonel Daniel I. Sultan; Lieutenant
Colonel Edwin M. Watson; Lieutenant Colonel Barton K. Yount;
Major George E. Arneman; Major Rosenham Beam; Major Enrique
M. Benitez; Major Peter C. Bullard; Major Henry B. Cheadle;
Major Joseph O. Daly; Major Herbert A. Dargue; Major James A.
Dorst; Major Asa N. Duncan; Major Charles R. Finley; Major
Abraham Garfinckel; Major James A. Gillespie; Major Paul R.
Hawley; Major Charles B. Hazeltine; Major Edgar Erskine Hume;
Major George E. Lovell, Junior; Major Davenport Johnson; Major
Raymond E. McQuillin; Major Joseph J. O’Hare; Major James B.
Ord; Major Alvan C. Sandeford; Major Martin F. Scanlon; Major
James C. R. Schwenck; Chaplain (Major) Aristeo V. Simoni; Major
Julia C. Stimson; Major Robert H. Van Volkenburgh; Major Robert
LeG. Walsh; Major Charles A. Willoughby; Major Walter F. Win-
ton; Captain John R. D. Cleland; Captain Carl W. Connell; Captain
Virgil N. Cordero; Captain Robert EK. Cummings; Captain Thomas
J. Davis; Captain Vernon C. DeVotie; Captain Fernand G. Dumont;
Captain Ira C. Eaker; Captain Richard E. Elvins; Captain Muir
S. Fairchild; Captain James M. Gillespie; Captain Leslie R. Groves,
Junior; Captain Albert F. Hegenberger; Captain Eugene J. Heller;
Captain Jack C. Hodgson; Captain Arthur B. McDaniel; Captain
William J. McKiernan, Junior; Captain Eugene A. Regnier; Cap-
tain Charles McK. Robinson; Captain Timothy Sapia-Bosch; Captain
Kinsley W. Slauson; Captain Bernard S. Thompson; Captain Leon-
ard D. Weddington; Captain Ennis C. Whitehead; Captain Royden
Williamson; Captain Ralph H. Wooten; First Lieutenant Joseph
M. Glasgow; First Lieutenant John L. Hines, Junior; First Lieu-
tenant Kenneth C. Nichols; First Lieutenant Benjamin B. Talley;
First Lieutenant Hugh B. Waddell; Staff Sergeant Edward F.
Springer; Sergeant Leslie B. Hopkins.
Approved, May 19, 1936.
[CHAPTER 428.]
AN ACT
To create an additional division of the United States District Court for the
Southern District of Mississippi to be known as the Hattiesburg division.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 90
‘of the Judicial Code, as amended (U.S. C., 1934 edition, title 28,
sec. 170), is amended to read as follows:
“Src. 90. The State of Mississippi is divided into two judicial
districts to be known as the northern and southern districts of
Mississippi. The northern district shall include the territory em-
braced on the 1st day of December 1923 in the counties of Alcorn,
Attala, Chickasaw, Choctaw, Clay, Itawamba, Lee, Lowndes, Monroe,
Oktibbeha, Pontotoc, Prentiss, Tishomingo, and Winston, which shall
constitute the eastern division of said district; also the territory
embraced on the date last mentioned in the counties of Benton,
Calhoun, Carroll, De Soto, Grenada, Lafayette, Marshall, Mont-
gomery, Panola, Tate, Tippah, Union, Webster, and Yalabusha,
which shall constitute the western division of said district; also
the territory embraced on the date last mentioned in the counties
of Bolivar, Coahoma, Leflore, Quitman, Sunflower, Tallahatchie,
and Tunica, which shall constitute the Delta division of said district.
The terms of the district court for the eastern division shall be held
at Aberdeen on the first Mondays in April and October; for the
74m CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 428, 432. MAY 19, 20, 1936.
western division, at Oxford on the third Monday in April and the
first Monday in December; and for the Delta division, at Clarksdale
on the fourth Monday in January and the third Monday in October.
The southern district shall include the territory embraced on the 1st
day of December 1923 in the counties of Amite, Copiah, Franklin,
Hinds, Holmes, Leake, Lincoln, Madison, Pike, Rankin, Simpson,
Smith, Scott, Wilkinson, and Yazoo, which shall constitute the
Jackson division; also the territory embraced on the date last men-
tioned in the counties of Adams, Claiborne, Humphreys, Issaquena,
Jefferson, Sharkey, Warren, and Washington, which shall constitute
the western division; also the territory embraced on the date last
mentioned in the counties of Clarke, Jasper, Kemper, Lauderdale,
Neshoba, Newton, Noxubee, and Wayne, which shall constitute the
eastern division; also the territory embraced on the date last men-
tioned in the counties of George, Hancock, Harrison, Jackson, Pearl
River, and Stone, which shall constitute the southern division of said
district; also the territory embraced on the date last mentioned in
the counties of Covington, Forrest, Greene, Jefferson Davis, Jones,
Lamar, Lawrence, Marion, Perry, and Walthall, which shall con-
stitute the Hattiesburg division. Terms of the district court for the
Jackson division shall be held at Jackson on the first Mondays
in May and November; for the western division, at Vicksburg on
the third Mondays in May and November; for the eastern division,
at Meridian on the third Mondays in March and September; for
the southern division, at Biloxi on the third Monday in February
and the first Monday in June; and for the Hattiesburg division, at
Hattiesburg on the second Mondays in April and October. The
clerk of the court for each district shall maintain an office in charge
of himself or a deputy at each place in his district at which court
is now required to be held, at which he shall not himself reside,
which shall be kept open at all times for the transaction of the
business of the court. The marshal for each of said districts shall
maintain an office in charge of himself or a deputy at each place of
holding court in his district.”
Approved, May 19, 1936.
[CHAPTER 432.]
AN ACT
To provide for rural electrification, and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby created and established an agency of the United States to
be known as the “Rural Electrification Administration”, all of the
powers of which shall be exercised by an Administrator, who shall be
appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of
the Senate, for a term of ten years, and who shall receive a salary
of $10,000 per year. This Act may be cited as the “Rural Electrifi-
cation Act of 1936”.
Src. 2. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to make
loans in the several States and Territories of the United States for
rural electrification and the furnishing of electric energy to persons
in rural areas who are not receiving central station service, as here-
inafter provided; to make, or cause to be made, studies, investiga-
tions, and reports concerning the condition and progress of the elec-
trification of rural areas in the several States and Territories; and
to publish and disseminate information with respect thereto.
43115°—36——_18
1363
Western division.
Delta division.
Southern district.
Jackson division.
Western division.
Eastern division.
Southern division.
Hattiesburg division.
Terms of court.
Jackson division.
Western division.
Eastern division.
Southern division.
Hattiesburg division.
Clerks and marshals;
offices.
May 20, 1936.
[S. 3483.]
[Public, No. 605.]
Rural Electrification
Act of 1936.
Rural Electrification
Administration creat-
Administrator; pow-
ers, appointment, etc.
Citation of title.
Loans in States and
Territories authorized,
Studies and reports
concerning rural areas;
publication, ete.
1564
Reconstruction Fi-
nance Corporation.
Loans to Administra-
tor by, authorized.
Maximum, 1937.
Interest.
Provisos.
_Proportion to secu-
rity.
_Amortization of ob-
ligations.
Maturity provisions.
Assignment of obli-
gations to Reconstruc-
tion Finance Corpora-
tion.
Appropriations
thorized.
au-
_Allotments of por-
tion of annual sums for
loans; basis of.
Unallotted portion;
basis of loans.
Post, p. 1365.
Proviso.
Limitation.
Availability of unex-
pended balances dur-
ing ensuing year.
Provisos.
Limitation.
Loans to Adminis-
trator to cease June 30,
1937.
_ Payments covered
in; exception,
74mg CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 432. MAY 20, 1936.
Sec. 38. (a) The Reconstruction Finance Corporation is hereby
authorized and directed to make loans to the Administrator, upon his
request approved by the President, not exceeding in aggregate
amount $50,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1937, with
interest at 3 per centum per annum upon the security of the obliga-
tions of borrowers from the Administrator appointed pursuant to
the provisions of this Act or from the Administrator of the Rural
Electrification Administration established by Executive Order Num-
bered 7037: Provided, That no such loan shall be in an amount
exceeding 85 per centum of the principal amount outstanding of
the obligations constituting the security therefor: And provided
further, That such obligations incurred for the purpose of financing
the construction and operation of generating plants, electric transmis-
sion and distribution lines, or systems shall be fully amortized over
a period not to exceed twenty-five years, and that the maturity of
such obligations incurred for the purpose of financing the wiring of
premises and the acquisition and installation of electrical and plumb-
ing appliances and equipment shall not exceed two-thirds of the
assured life thereof and not more than five years. The Administrator
is hereby authorized to make all such endorsements, to execute all
such instruments, and to do all such acts and things as shall be
necessary to effect the valid transfer and assignment to the Recon-
struction Finance Corporation of all such obligations.
(b) There is hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any
money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, for the fiscal year
ending June 30, 1938, and for each of the eight years thereafter,
the sum of $40,000,000 for the purposes of this Act as hereinafter
provided.
(c) Fifty per centum of the annual sums herein made available or
appropriated for the purposes of this Act shall be allotted yearly by
the Administrator for loans in the several States in the proportion
which the number of their farms not then receiving central station
electric service bears to the total number of farms of the United
States not then receiving such service. The Administrator shall,
within ninety days after the beginning of each fiscal year, determine
for each State and for the United States the number of farms not
then receiving such service.
(d) The remaining 50 per centum of such annual sums shall be
available for loans in the several States and in the Territories, with-
out allotment as hereinabove provided, in such amounts for each
State and Territory as, in the opinion of the Administrator, may be
effectively employed for the purposes of this Act, and to carry out
the provisions of section 7: Provided, however, That not more than
10 per centum of said unallotted annual sums may be employed in
any one State, or in all of the Territories.
(e) If any part of the annual sums made available for the purposes
of this Act shall not be loaned or obligated during the fiscal year for
which such sums are made available, such unexpended or unobligated
sums shall be available for loans by the Administrator in the follow-
ing year or years without allotment: Provided, however, That not
more than 10 per centum of said sums may be employed in any one
State or in all of the Territories: And provided further, That no
loans shall be made by the Reconstruction Finance Corporation to
the Administrator after June 30, 1937.
(f) All moneys representing payments of principal and interest
on loans made by the Administrator under this Act shall be covered
into the Treasury as miscellaneous receipts, except that any such
moneys representing payments of principal and interest on obliga-
tions constituting the security for loans made by the Reconstruction
74mg CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 482. MAY 20, 1936.
Finance Corporation to the Administrator shall be paid to the
Reconstruction Finance Corporation in payment of such loans.
Sexo, 4. The Administrator is authorized and empowered, from the
sums hereinbefore authorized, to make loans to persons, corporations,
States, Territories, and subdivisions and agencies thereof, municipali-
ties, peoples utility districts and cooperative nonprofit, or limited-
dividend associations organized under the laws of any State or Ter-
ritory of the United States, for the purpose of financing the con-
struction and operation of generating plants, electric transmission
and distribution lines or systems for the furnishing of electric energy
to persons in rural areas who are not receiving central station serv-
ice: Provided, however, That the Administrator, in making such
loans, shall give preference to States, Territories, and subdivisions
and agencies thereof, municipalities, peoples utility districts, and
cooperative, nonprofit, or limited dividend associations, the projects
of which comply with the requirements of this Act. Such loans
shall be on such terms and conditions relating to the expenditure of
the moneys loaned and the security therefor as the Administrator
shall determine and may be made payable in whole or in part out
of income: Provided, however, That all such loans shall be self-
liquidating within a period of not to exceed twenty-five years, and
shall bear interest at a rate equal to the average rate of interest pay-
able by the United States of America on its obligations, having a
maturity of ten or more years after the dates thereof, issued during
the last preceding fiscal year in which any such obligations were
issued: Provided further, That no loan for the construction, operation,
or enlargement of any generating plant shall be made unless the
consent of the State authority having jurisdiction in the premises is
first obtained. Loans under this section and section 5 shall not be
made unless the Administrator finds and certifies that in his judg-
ment the security therefor is reasonably adequate and such loan will
be repaid within the time agreed.
Src. 5. The Administrator is authorized and empowered, from the
sums hereinbefore authorized, to make loans for the purpose of finan-
cing the wiring of the premises of persons in rural areas and the
acquisition and installation of electrical and plumbing appliances
and equipment. Such loans may be made to any of the borrowers
of funds loaned under the provisions of section 4, or to any person,
firm, or corporation supplying or installing the said wiring, appli-
ances, or equipment. Such loans shall be for such terms, subject
to such conditions, and so secured as reasonably to assure repayment
thereof, and shall be at a rate of interest equal to the average rate of
interest payable by the United States of America on its obligations,
having a maturity of ten or more years after the dates thereof, issued
during the last preceding fiscal year in which any such obligations
were issued.
Src. 6. For the purpose of administering this Act and for the
purpose of making the studies, investigations, publications, and
reports herein provided for, there is hereby authorized to be appro-
priated, out of any money in the Treasury not otherwise appro-
priated, such sums as shall be necessary. ;
Src. 7. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to bid for
and purchase at any foreclosure or other sale, or otherwise to acquire,
property pledged or mortgaged to secure any loan made pursuant to
this Act; to pay the purchase price and any costs and expenses
incurred in connection therewith from the sums authorized in section
3 of this Act; to accept title to any property so purchased or acquired
in the name of the United States of America; to operate or lease
such property for such period as may be deemed necessary or
1365
Loans for financing
generating plants, dis-
tribution lines, ete.
Provisos.
Preferential loans.
Loans to be self-
liquidating.
Interest.
Consent of State au-
thority.
Security; repayment.
Wiring premises, in-
Stalling appliances, etc.
Loans for; terms, se-
curity, etc.
Interest.
Appropriations
authorized for adminis-
trative, etc., expenses.
Post, p. 1604.
Acquisition of mort-
gaged, etc., property
by Administrator, au-
thorized.
Operation, ete, of
acquired property,
1366
Sale.
Disposal of encum-
bered property, etc.,
by borrower.
Prior loans and con-
tracts; administration
may be vested in Ad-
ministrator.
Transfer of records,
Se and person-
nel.
Nonpartisan admin-
istration of Act.
Merit system of ap-
pointments, etc.
Removal of officials,
ete., for violation.
Annual to
reports
Congress.
Utilization of volun-
tary, etc., services.
Attorneys, engineers,
and experts; appoint-
ment, compensation,
etc.
_ Expenditures author-
ized.
Ante, p. 1365.
Time extension on
payments, authorized.
Provisos.
_Loans on plants,
lines, ete.
747rH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 482. MAY 20, 1936.
advisable to protect the investment therein, but not to exceed five
years after the acquisition thereof; and to sell such property so
purchased or acquired, upon such terms and for such consideration
as the Administrator shall determine to be reasonable.
No borrower of funds under section 4 shall, without the approval
of the Administrator, sell or dispose of its property, rights, or
franchises, acquired under the provisions of this Act, until any loan
obtained from the Rural Electrification Administration, including
all interest and charges, shall have been repaid.
Sxc. 8. The administration of loans and contracts entered into by
the Rural Electrification Administration established by Executive
Order Numbered 7037, dated May 11, 1935, may be vested by the
President in the Administrator authorized to be appointed by this
Act; and in such event the provisions of this Act shall apply to said
loans and contracts to the extent that said provisions are not incon-
sistent therewith. The President may transfer to the Rural Elec-
trification Administration created by this Act the jurisdiction and
control of the records, property (including office equipment), and
personnel used or employed in the exercise and performance of the
functions of the Rural Electrification Administration established
by such Executive order.
Src. 9. This Act shall be administered entirely on a nonpartisan
basis, and in the appointment of officials, the selection of employees,
and in the promotion of any such officials or employees, no political
test or qualification shall be permitted or given consideration, but
all such appointments and promotions shall be given and made on
the basis of merit and efficiency. If the Administrator herein pro-
vided for is found by the President of the United States to be guilty
of a violation of this section, he shall be removed from office by the
President, and any appointee or selection of officials or employees
made by the Administrator who is found guilty of a violation of this
Act shall be removed by the Administrator.
Src. 10. The Administrator shall present annually to the Congress
not later than the 20th day of January in each year a full report of
his activities under this Act.
Src. 11. In order to carry out the provisions of this Act the
Administrator may accept and utilize such voluntary and uncom-
pensated services of Federal, State, and local officers and employees
as are available, and he may without regard to the provisions of civil-
service laws applicable to officers and employees of the United States
appoint and fix the compensation of attorneys, engineers, and experts,
and he may, subject to the civil-service laws, appoint such other
officers and employees as he may find necessary and prescribe their
duties. The Administrator is authorized, from sums appropriated
pursuant to section 6, to make such expenditures (including expendi-
tures for personal services; supplies and equipment; lawbooks and
books of reference; directories and periodicals; travel expenses;
rental at the seat of government and elsewhere; the purchase, opera-
tion, or maintenance of passenger-carrying vehicles; and printing
and binding) as are appropriate and necessary to carry out the
provisions of this Act.
Src. 12. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to extend
the time of payment of interest or principal of any loans made by the
Administrator pursuant to this Act: Provided, however, That with
respect to any loan made under section 4, the payment of interest or
principal shall not be extended more than five years after such pay-
ment shall have become due, and with respect to any loan made
under section 5, the payment of principal or interest shall not be
extended more than two years after such payment shall have become
74ta CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 432-434. MAY 20, 1936.
due: And provided further, That the provisions of this section shall
not apply to any obligations or the security therefor which may be
held by the Reconstruction Finance Corporation under the provisions
of section 3.
Src. 13. As used in this Act the term “rural area” shall be deemed
to mean any area of the United States not included within the
boundaries of any city, village, or borough having a population in
excess of fifteen hundred inhabitants, and such term shall be deemed
to include both the farm and nonfarm population thereof; the term
“farm” shall be deemed to mean a farm as defined in the publications
of the Bureau of the Census; the term “person” shall be deemed to
mean any natural person, firm, corporation, or association; the term
“Territory” shall be deemed to include any insular possession of the
United States.
Sec. 14. If any provision of this Act, or the application thereof to
any person or circumstances, is held invalid, the remainder of the
Act and the application of such provision to other persons or circum-
stances shall not be affected thereby.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
(CHAPTER 433.]
AN ACT
To amend article 3 of the “Rules Concerning Lights, and so forth’’, contained
in the Act entitled “‘An Act to adopt regulations for preventing collisions upon
certain harbors, rivers, and inland waters of the United States’, approved
June 7, 1897.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the first sen-
tence of article 3 of the “Rules.Concerning Lights, and so forth”,
contained in the Act entitled “An Act to adopt regulations for pre-
venting collisions upon certain harbors, rivers, and inland waters of
the United States”, approved June 7, 1897, is amended to read as
follows:
“Arr. 3. A steam vessel when towing another vessel or vessels
alongside shall, in addition to her side lights, carry two bright white
lights in a vertical line, one over the other, not less than three feet
apart, and when towing one or more vessels astern, regardless of the
length of the tow, shall carry an additional bright white light three
feet above or below such lights: Provided, That on the Red River of
the North and the rivers emptying into the Gulf of Mexico and their
tributaries, this article shall not affect the signal lights used on towing
vessels which propel the tow by pushing at the rear of the tow.”
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 434.]
AN ACT
To amend section 4321, Revised Statutes (U. S. C., title 46, sec. 263), and for
other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 4321,
Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sec. 263), be,
and is hereby, amended to read as follows:
“The form of a license for carrying on the coasting trade or fish-
eries shall be as follows:
“License for carrying on the (here insert ‘coasting trade’, ‘whale
fishery’, ‘mackerel fishery’, or ‘cod fishery’, as the case may be).
1367
Loans excluded.
Ante, p. 1364.
Definitions.
“Rural area.”
“Farm.”
“Person.”
“Territory.”
_Separability provi-
sion.
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 10308.]
[Public, No. 606.]
Navigation.
“Rules Concerning
Lights, etc.’’
Vol. 30, p. 97.
U.S.C., p. 1455.
Lights of steam ves-
sel towing another ves-
sel alongside.
When towing astern.
Proviso.
Exceptions.
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 11036.]
(Public, No. 607.] _
Vessels in domestic
commerce.
R.S., sec. 4321, p. 835.
U.S. C., p. 2005.
License for coasting
trade or fisheries.
Form prescribed.
1568
Provisos.
Licensing for the
“coasting trade and
mackerel fishery.’’
Touching at foreign
ports.
R.S., secs. 4364, 4365,
p. 844; U.S. C., p. 2010.
Enrolled and licensed
vessels, Great Lakes
and connecting waters.
R. S., sec. 4318; U.S.
C., p. 2004.
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 11302.]
[Public, No. 608.]
United Confederate
Veterans, Reunion
Committee.
Loan of Army equip-
ment for encampment
at Shreveport, La., au-
thorized.
74raH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 4384, 485. MAY 20, 1936.
“In pursuance of title L (Revised Statutes 4311-4390), ‘Regula-
tion of Vessels in Domestic Commerce’, of the Revised Statutes of
the United States (inserting here the name of the husband or man-
aging owner, with his occupation and place of abode, and the name
of the master, with the place of his abode), having sworn that the
(insert here the description of the vessel, whether ship, brigantine,
snow, schooner, sloop, or whatever else she may be), called the (insert
here the vessel’s name), whereof the said (naming the master) is
master, burden (insert here the number of tons, in words) tons, as
appears by her enrollment, dated at (naming the district, day, month,
and year, in words at length, but if she be less than twenty tons,
insert, instead thereof, ‘proof being had of her admeasurement’),
shall not be employed in any trade, while this license shall continue
in force, whereby the revenue of the United States shall be defrauded,
and having also sworn (or affirmed) that this license shall not be
used for any other vessel, or for any other employment, than is
herein specified, license is hereby granted for the said (inserting here
the description of the vessel) called the (inserting here the vessel’s
name), to be employed in carrying on the (inserting here ‘coasting
trade’, ‘whale fishery’, ‘mackerel fishery’, or ‘cod fishery’, as the case
may be), for one year from the date hereof, and no longer. Given
under my hand and seal, at (naming the said district), this (insert-
ing the particular day) day of (naming the month), in the year
(specifying the number of the year in words at length) ;”: Provided,
That vessels of five net tons and over entitled under the laws of the
United States to be enrolled and licensed or licensed for the coasting
trade may be licensed for the “coasting trade and mackerel fishery”,
and shall be deemed to have sufficient license for engaging in the
coasting trade and the taking of fish of every description, including
shellfish: Provided further, That the provisions of sections 4364 and
4365, Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sees.
310 and 311), shall be, and are hereby, made applicable to vessels so
licensed: And provided further, That vessels operating on the Great
Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters under enrollment
and license issued in conformity with the provisions of section 4318,
Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sec. 258),
shall be deemed to have sufficient license for engaging in the taking
of fish of every description within such waters without change in the
form of enrollment and license prescribed under the authority of
that section.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
(CHAPTER 435.]
AN ACT
To authorize the Secretary of War to lend to the Reunion Committee of the
United Confederate Veterans three thousand blankets, olive drab, numbered
4, one thousand five hundred canvas cots, to be used at their annual encamp-
ment to be held at Shreveport, Louisiana, in June 1936.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of War be, and he is hereby, authorized to lend, at his discretion
to the Reunion Committee of the United Confederate Veterans,
for use at the United Confederate Veterans’ Encampment, to
be held at Shreveport, Louisiana, June 9, 10, 11, and 12, 1936, two
hospital ward tents, with all pegs, poles, and equipment necessary
for their erection; one storage tent complete with all equipment; one
large wall tent complete with all equipment; six small wall tents
74ta CONGRESS. SESS. IT.
complete with all equipment; ten pyramidal tents complete with all
equipment; fifty 14-quart G. I. buckets; three thousand blankets,
olive drab, wool; one thousand five hundred canvas folding cots; one
thousand five hundred comforters; one thousand five hundred cotton-
felted pillows complete with cotton pillow cases; three thousand
cotton bedsheets: Provided, That no expense shall be caused the
United States Government by the delivery and return of said prop-
erty; the same to be delivered from the nearest quartermaster depot
at such time prior to the holding of said encampment as may be
agreed upon by the Secretary of War and the Confederate Reunion
Committee: Provided further, That the Secretary of War, before
delivery of such property, shall take from said Reunion Committee
of the United Confederate Veterans a good and sufficient bond for
the safe return of said property in good order and condition, and
the whole without expense to the United States.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 440.]
AN ACT
To convey certain lands to Clackamas County, Oregon, for public-park purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of the Interior is authorized and directed to issue a patent to Clack-
amas County, Oregon, on behalf of the United States, for the south
half southwest quarter and the west half northeast quarter southwest
quarter section 11, township 3 south, range 4 east, Willamette merid-
jan, in the State of Oregon, containing one hundred acres, more or
less, on condition that such county shall accept and use such lands
solely for public-park purposes; but if such county shall at any time
cease to use such lands for public-park purposes, or shall permit the
use of such lands for any other purpose, or shall alienate or attempt
to alienate them, they shall revert to the United States: Provided,
That there shall be reserved to the United States, its patentees, or
their transferees, the right to cut and remove therefrom the merchant-
able timber, reserving to Clackamas County, Oregon, when such sale
is made under the provisions of the Act of June 9, 1916 (39 Stat. 218),
a preference right to purchase the timber at the highest price bid.
Sec. 2. The Secretary of the Interior shall prescribe all necessary
regulations to carry into effect the foregoing provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 21, 1936.
(CHAPTER 444.]
AN ACT
To supplement the Act of June 25, 1929 (ch. 41, 46 Stat. L. 41), which authorized
and directed the Attorney General to institute suit against the Northern
Pacific Railway Company and others.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in the suit
entitled United States of America, plaintiff, against Northern Pacific
Railway Company and others, defendants, numbered E4389, insti-
tuted and pending in the District Court of the United States for
the Eastern District of Washington, under the authority and direc-
tion of the Act of June 25, 1929 (ch. 41, 46 Stat. L. 41), now on
reference to a special master for hearing under an order of said
court entered in said suit on April 21, 1936, a direct review by the
CHS. 435, 440,444. MAY 20, 21, 22, 1936.
1369
Provisos.
No Federal expense.
Bond.
May 21, 1936.
[H. R. 5058. ]
[Public, No. 609.]
Clackamas County,
Oreg.
Conveyance of land
for public-park pur-
poses, authorized.
_Reversionary provi-
sion.
Proviso.
‘Timber reservation.
Vol. 39, p. 218.
Regulations
prescribed.
to be
May 22, 1936.
[S. 4594.]
[Public, No. 610.]
Northern Pacific
Railway Companyand
others.
Review by appeal to
U. S. Supreme Court
of certain questions in
pending suit, author-
ized.
Vol. 46, p. 41.
1370
Time limitation.
Right of review of
final judgment not af-
fected.
May 22, 1936.
(H. R. 1398.]
[Public, No. 611.]
Crescent City, Calif.
Establishment of
Coast Guard station
at, authorized.
May 22, 1936.
{H. R. 8370.]
[Public, No. 612.]
Port Washington,
1s.
Establishment of
Coast Guard station
at, authorized.
May 22, 1936.
{H. R. 10321.)
{Public, No. 613.]
Rio Grande, use of
waters, etc. _
Correction in Act re-
lating to.
Public
sess., Pp.
Laws,
661.
Ist
74muH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 444447. MAY 22, 1936.
Supreme Court of the United States by appeal may be had by any
party to said suit of any order or decree of said district court entered
upon a review of the report of the master to be made pursuant to
said order of April 21, 1936, and also of the order or decree of said
district court entered in said suit on October 3, 1935, as amended by
an order of January 29, 1936. Such direct review by the Supreme
Court of either or both of the said orders or decrees may be had by
appeal taken within sixty days from the date of the order or decree
of the district court entered upon a review of the report of the
master to be made pursuant to the said order of April 21, 1936. The
right of review of any final judgment, authorized by said Act of
June 25, 1929, shall continue in force and effect.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 445.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of a Coast Guard station at or near Crescent
City, California.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized to establish a
Coast Guard station on the Pacific coast at or in the vicinity of
Crescent City, California, in such locality as the Commandant of
the Coast Guard may recommend.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 446.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of a Coast Guard station at Port Washington,
Wisconsin.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of
the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the
Secretary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized to estab-
lish a Coast Guard station on Lake Michigan at Port Washington,
Wisconsin, at such point as the Commandant of the Coast Guard
may recommend.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 447.]
AN ACT
To amend section 4 of Public Act Numbered 286, Seventy-fourth Congress,
approved August 19, 1935, as amended.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 4 of
Public Act Numbered 286, Seventy-fourth Congress, approved
August 19, 1935, is amended by striking out the words “section 3
hereof” and inserting in lieu thereof the words “section 2, para-
graph 2, and section 3 of this Act”.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
j4mH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 448, 449. MAY 22,96, 1936.
[CHAPTER 448.]
AN ACT
Authorizing the erection of a memorial to those who met their death in the
wreck of the dirigible Shenandoah.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed to
erect near Ava, Ohio, on the spot where the Shenandoah fell, a
suitable tablet or marker to commemorate the heroic services ren-
dered by Commander Landsdowne and other members of the crew
who died when the Navy dirigible Shenandoah was destroyed.
Src. 2. There is hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any
money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, the sum of
$2,500 to carry out the provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 449.]
AN ACT
To authorize the Secretary of War to grant to the city of Buffalo, New York, the
right and privilege to occupy and use for sewage-disposal facilities part of the
lands forming the pier and dikes of the Black Rock Harbor improvement at
Buffalo, New York.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in addition
to the grant made by the Secretary of War to the city of Buffalo
pursuant to the Act of Congress entitled “An Act making appropri-
ations for the construction, repair, and preservation of certain public
works on rivers and harbors and for other purposes”, approved
February 27, 1911, for the purpose of establishing a public park and
landing facilities on that part of the structure known as Bird Island
Pier on Niagara River lying north of Albany Street extended, in
the city of Buffalo, New York, and forming a part of Black Rock
Harbor improvement and the lands of the United States under
water on both sides of said pier to the established harbor lines, sub-
ject to the terms, conditions, and stipulations in said grant specified,
the Secretary of War is authorized to grant to the city of Buffalo,
New York, also the right and privilege of occupying said lands and
lands under water, and also the lands owned by the United States
on the west side of Black Rock Canal, described as follows: Begin-
ning at a point where the northerly line of property formerly owned
by William H. Slade, or that line extended, intersects the United
States Government property line (formerly New York State Blue
Line) ; thence easterly parallel to the line forming the northeasterly
boundary of lands heretofore granted to the city of Buffalo by the
United States and known as Bird Island Pier until a point is reached
in direct prolongation of the easterly boundary line of said last
mentioned lands; thence southwesterly in direct line with said
easterly boundary of said lands to the northeasterly corner of said
lands heretofore conveyed to the city of Buffalo by the United
States; thence westerly along the northeasterly boundary of said
Bird Island Pier lands to said United States Government property
line; thence northeasterly along said last mentioned line to the place
of beginning, or so much thereof as may be necessary, for use either
by the city of Buffalo or by the Buffalo Sewer Authority (created
by chapter 349 of the Laws of the State of New York of 1935) for
sewage-disposal facilities, on such terms, conditions, and stipulations
as he may deem expedient and equitable and necessary for the pro-
tection of all the interests of the United States in and to said
1371
May 22, 1936.
[H. R. 10544.)
~ [Publie, No. 614] __
Dirigible ‘‘Shenan-
doah.””
Erection of memorial
to dead in wreck of,
authorized.
Location.
Appropriation au-
thorized.
May 26, 1936.
[S. 4317.]
[Public, No. 615.]
Buffalo, N. Y.
Right to use certain
land for public pur-
poses, granted to.
Vol. 36, p. 935.
Description.
1372
Proviso. c
State sanction.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 8287.]
[Public, No. 616.]
Virgin Islands.
Establishment of
assessed valuation real
property tax.
Based on actual
value.
Uniform rate in each
municipality.
Provisional rate.
President to pre-
scribe regulations if no
municipal levy, etc.
Deposit of collections.
Virgin Islands Com-
any. hyo
Payments by, in lieu
of taxes.
Other property
owned by the United
States.
74ra CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 449, 450. MAY 26, 1936.
premises: Provided, however, That the city of Buffalo shall have
secured the sanction and consent of the State of New York through
its constituted agencies.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 450.]
AN ACT
To establish an assessed valuation real property tax in the Virgin Islands of the
United States.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That it is the policy
of Congress to equalize and more equitably to distribute existing
taxes on real property in the Virgin Islands of the United States and
to reduce the burden of taxation now imposed on land in productive
use in such islands.
Src. 2. For the calendar year 1936 and for all succeeding years
all taxes on real property in the Virgin Islands shall be computed
on the basis of the actual value of such property and the rate in each
municipality of such islands shall be the same for all real property
subject to taxation in such municipality whether or not such prop-
erty is in cultivation and regardless of the use to which such
property is put.
Sec. 3. Until local tax laws conforming to the requirements of this
Act are in effect in a municipality the tax on real property in such
municipality for any such calendar year shall be at the rate of
1.25 per centum of the assessed value. If the legislative authority
of a municipality shall fail to enact laws for the levy, assessment,
collection, or enforcement of any tax imposed under authority of
this Act within three months after the date of its enactment, the
President shall then prescribe regulations for the levy, assessment,
collection, and enforcement of such tax, which shall be in effect
until the legislative authority of such municipality shall make
regulations for such purposes.
Sec. 4. All taxes so levied and collected shall be deposited in the
municipal treasury of the municipality in which such taxes are
collected.
Sec. 5. The Virgin Islands Company shall pay annually into the
raunicipal treasuries of the Virgin Islands in leu of taxes an amount
equal to the amount of taxes which would be payable on the real
property in the Virgin Islands owned by the United States and in
the possession of the Virgin Islands Company, if such real property
were in private ownership and taxable, but the valuation placed upon
such property for taxation purposes by the local taxing authorities
shall be reduced to a reasonable amount by the Secretary of the
Interior if, after investigation, he finds that such valuation is
excessive and unreasonable. The Virgin Islands Company shall also
pay into the municipal treasuries of the Virgin Islands amounts
equal to the amounts of any taxes of general application which a
private corporation similarly situated would be required to pay into
the said treasuries. Similar payments shall be made with respect
to any property owned by the United States in the Virgin Islands
which is used for ordinary business or commercial purposes, and the
income derived from any property so used shall be available for
making such payments.
74tu CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 450, 451. MAY 26, 1936.
_ Sec. 6. Nothing in this Act shall be construed as altering, amend-
ing, or repealing the existing exemptions from taxation of property
used for educational, charitable, or religious purposes. Subject to
the provisions of this Act, the legislative authority of the respective
municipalities is hereby empowered to alter, amend, or repeal, sub-
ject to the approval of the Governor, any law now imposing taxes
on real and personal property.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 451.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of the Fort Frederica National Monument, at
Saint Simon Island, Georgia, and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That when title
to the site of Fort Frederica, on Saint Simon Island, Georgia, and
such other related sites located thereon, as may be designated by
the Secretary of the Interior, in the exercise of his discretion, as
necessary or desirable for national-monument purposes, shall have
been vested in the United States, said area not to exceed eighty acres
shall be, and is hereby, set apart as a national monument for the
benefit and inspiration of the people, and shall be called the “Fort
Frederica National Monument”.
Sec. 2. That the Secretary of the Interior be, and he is hereby,
authorized to accept donations of land, interests in land, buildings,
structures, and other property within the boundaries of the said
national monument as determined and fixed hereunder, and dona-
tions of funds for the purchase and maintenance thereof, the title
and evidence of title to lands acquired to be satisfactory to the Secre-
tary of the Interior: Provided, That he may acquire on behalf of
the United States out of any donated funds, either by purchase at
prices deemed by him reasonable, or by condemnation under the pro-
visions of the Act of August 1, 1888, such tracts of land within the
said national monument as may be necessary for the completion
thereof.
Sec. 3. (a) The Secretary of the Interior is authorized, in his
discretion, to maintain in some suitable structure within the national
monument a museum for relics and records pertaining to Fort
Frederica, and for other articles of national and patriotic interest,
and in his discretion to accept, on behalf of the United States, for
installation in such museum, articles which may be offered as addi-
tions to the museum.
(b) Any State or political subdivision thereof, organization, or
individual may, with the approval of the Secretary of the Interior,
erect monuments or place tablets commemorating historic events or
persons connected with the history of the area, within the bound-
aries of the Fort Frederica National Monument.
Sec. 4. The administration, protection, and development of the
aforesaid national monument shall be exercised under the direction
of the Secretary of the Interior by the National Park Service, sub-
ject to the provisions of the Act of August 25, 1916, entitled “An
Act to establish a National Park Service, and for other purposes”,
as amended.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
1378
Property used for
educational, religious,
etc., purposes.
Amendment or re-
peal of existing laws.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 8431.]
[Publie, No. 617.]
Fort Frederica Na-
tional Monument, Saint
Simon Island, Ga.
Establishment of.
Acceptance of dona-
tions, etc.
Proviso.
Purchase of land from
donated funds.
Vol. 25, p. 357.
U.S. C., p. 1785.
Maintenance of mu-
seum.
Erection of monu-
ments or placing of tab-
lets.
Administration.
Vol. 39, p. 535; U. S.
C., p. 591.
1374
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 8784.]
[Public, No. 618.]
Executive branch of
the Government.
Withholding of com-
pensation where pay-
ments have been made
illegally, authorized.
Proviso.
Existing laws not
affected.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 10267.]
[Public, No. 619.]
_ Railway Mail Serv-
e.
Adjustment of com-
pensation.
Vol. 43, p. 1061.
Ua SiG rips:
U.S. C., p. 85.
Appropriations made
available.
May 26, 1936.
({H. R. 10934.]
{Public, No. 620.]
Salem, Mass.
Transfer of custom-
house to Department
of Interior, authorized.
74tH CONGRESS. SESS. Il. CHS. 452-454. MAY 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 452.]
AN ACT
To authorize withholding compensation due Government personnel.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That hereafter,
whenever upon the statement of the account of any disbursing officer
of the United States in the General Accounting Office credit shall
have been disallowed for any payment to any person in the executive
branch of the Government, otherwise entitled to compensation from
the United States or from any agency or instrumentality thereof,
such compensation of the payee may be withheld until full reim-
bursement has been accomplished under such regulations as may be
prescribed by the head of the department, branch, or independent
establishment (including corporations) under which such payee is
entitled to receive compensation: Provided, That nothing contained
in this Act shall be construed to repeal or in any way modify exist-
ing laws relating to the collection of the indebtedness of accountable
or disbursing officers.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 453.]
AN ACT
To provide for adjusting the compensation of division superintendents, assistant
division superintendents, assistant superintendents at large, assistant super-
intendent in charge of car construction, chief clerks, assistant chief clerks,
and clerks in charge of sections in offices of division superintendents in the
Railway Mail Service, to correspond to the rates established by the Classifi-
cation Act of 1923, as amended.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Post-
master General is authorized and directed to adjust the compensa-
tion of division superintendents, assistant division superintendents,
assistant superintendents at large, assistant superintendent in charge
of car construction, chief clerks, assistant chief clerks, and clerks
in charge of sections in offices of division superintendents, Railway
Mail Service, to correspond, so far as may be practicable, to the rates
established by the Classification Act of 1923, as amended, for posi-
tions in the departmental service in the District of Columbia. Any
appropriation now or hereafter available for the payment of the
compensation of employees in the Railway Mail Service shall be
available for payment of compensation in accordance with the rates
adjusted in accordance with the provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 454.]
AN ACT
To authorize the transfer of the customhouse at Salem, Massachusetts, from the
jurisdiction of the Treasury Department to the Department of the Interior.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed
to transfer to the control and jurisdiction of the Secretary of the
Interior the customhouse at Salem, Massachusetts, and such ad-
joining property, both real and personal, as may now be under the
Jurisdiction of the Secretary of the Treasury.
(47H CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 454,462. MAY 26, 27, 1936.
Src. 2. That the Secretary of the Interior be, and he is hereby,
authorized to acquire the above property for the purpose of estab-
lishing same as an historic site or otherwise preserving the buildings
and grounds in connection therewith: Provided, That the Secretary
of the Treasury may retain suflicient space in the building for the
necessary operation of the Bureau of Customs.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 462.]
AN ACT
To provide for the continuation of trading in unlisted securities upon national
securities exchanges, for the registration of over-the-counter brokers and
dealers, for the filing of current information and periodic reports by issuers,
and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That subsection (f)
of section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is amended to
read as follows:
“(£) Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this section, any
national securities exchange, upon application to and approval of
such application by the Commission and subject to the terms and
conditions hereinafter set forth, (1) may continue unlisted trading
privileges to which a security had been admitted on such exchange
prior to March 1, 1934; or (2) may extend unlisted trading privileges
to any security duly listed and registered on any other national
securities exchange, but such unlisted trading privileges shall con-
tinue in effect only so long as such security shall remain listed and
registered on any other national securities exchange; or (3) may
extend unlisted trading privileges to any security in respect of which
there is available from a registration statement and periodic reports
or other data filed pursuant to rules or regulations prescribed by the
Commission under this title or the Securities Act of 1933, as amended,
information substantially equivalent to that available pursuant to
rules or regulations of the Commission in respect of a security duly
listed and registered on a national securities exchange, but such
unlisted trading privileges shall continue in effect only so long as
such a registration statement remains effective and such periodic
reports or other data continue to be so filed.
“No application pursuant to this subsection shall be approved
unless the Commission finds that the continuation or extension of
unlisted trading privileges pursuant to such application is neces-
sary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of
investors. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to
any security pursuant to clause (2) or (8) of this subsection shall
be approved except after appropriate notice and opportunity for
hearing. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to any
security pursuant to clause (2) or (3) of this subsection shall be
approved unless the applicant exchange shall establish to the satis-
faction of the Commission that there exists in the vicinity of such
exchange sufliciently widespread public distribution of such security
and eaten public trading activity therein to render the extension
of unlisted trading privileges on such exchange thereto necessary
or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of
investors. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to
any security pursuant to clause (3) of this subsection shall be
approved except upon such terms and conditions as will subject the
issuer thereof, the officers and directors of such issuer, and every
beneficial owner of more than 10 per centum of such security to
1375
Preservation of, as
an historic site.
Proviso.
Space for Customs
Bureau.
May 27, 1936.
{S. 4023.]
{Public, No. 621.]
Securities Exchange
Act of 1934, amend-
ments.
Vol. 48, p. 894; U. S.
C., p. 536.
Trading in unlisted
securities upon na-
tional exchanges.
Continuance of cer-
tain categories.
Security admitted
before March 1, 1934.
Listed and registered
on another exchange.
Equivalent registra-
tion statement avail-
able.
Conditional contin-
uance of privileges.
Notice and hearing.
Establishment to be
in public interest.
Obligations imposed.
1376
Exceptions.
Publication of trans-
actions or quotations;
differentiation between
listed and unlisted se-
curities.
Other than by ticker.
Suspension of privi-
leges when in public
interest, etc.
Termination of privi-
leges; notice and hear-
ing.
Withdrawal of secur-
ity by issuer; exception.
Inadequate distribu-
tion, trading activity,
ete.
Notice, hearing, etc.
747 CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 27, 1936.
duties substantially equivalent to the duties which would arise pur-
suant to this title if such security were duly listed and registered on
a national securities exchange; except that such terms and conditions
need not be imposed in any case or class of cases in which it shall
appear to the Commission that the public interest and the protection
of investors would nevertheless best be served by such extension of
unlisted trading privileges. In the publication or making available
for publication by any national securities exchange, or by any person
directly or indirectly controlled by such exchange, of quotations or
transactions in securities made or effected upon such exchange, such
exchange or controlled person shall clearly differentiate between
quotations or transactions in listed securities, and quotations or
transactions in securities for which unlisted trading privileges on
such exchange have been continued or extended pursuant to this sub-
section. In the publication or making available for publication of
such quotations or transactions otherwise than by ticker, such
exchange or controlled person shall group under separate headings
(A) quotations or transactions in listed securities, and (B) quota-
tions or transactions in securities for which unlisted trading priv-
ileges on such exchange has been continued or extended pursuant to
this subsection.
“The Commission shall by rules and regulations suspend unlisted
trading privileges in whole or in part for any or all classes of
securities for a period not exceeding twelve months, if it deems such
suspension necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for
the protection of investors or to prevent evasion of the purposes
of this title.
“Unlisted trading privileges continued for any security pursuant
to clause (1) of this subsection shall be terminated by order, after
appropriate notice and opportunity for hearing, if it appears at
any time that such security has been withdrawn from listing on
any exchange by the issuer thereof, unless it shall be established to
the satisfaction of the Commission that such delisting was not
designed to evade the purposes of this title or unless it shall appear
to the Commission that, notwithstanding any such purpose of evasion,
the continuation of such unlisted trading privileges is nevertheless
necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection
of investors. On the application of the issuer of any security for
which unlisted trading privileges on any exchange have been con-
tinued or extended pursuant to this subsection, or of any broker or
dealer who makes or creates a market for such security, or of any
other person having a bona-fide interest in the question of termina-
tion or suspension of such unlisted trading privileges, or on its own
motion, the Commission shall by order terminate, or suspend for a
period not exceeding twelve months, such unlisted trading privileges
for such security if the Commission finds, after appropriate notice
and opportunity for hearing, that by reason of inadequate public
distribution of such security in the vicinity of said exchange, or by
reason of inadequate public trading activity or of the character
of trading therein on said exchange, such termination or suspension
is necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection
of investors.
“In any proceeding under this subsection in which appropriate
notice and opportunity for hearing are required, notice of not less
than ten days to the applicant in such proceeding, to the issuer of
the security involved, to the exchange which is seeking to continue
or extend or has continued or extended unlisted trading privileges for
such security, and to the exchange, if any, on which such security
is listed and registered, shall be deemed adequate notice, and any
broker or dealer who makes or creates a market for such security,
74ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 27, 1936.
and any other person having a bona-fide interest in such proceeding,
shall upon application be entitled to be heard.
“Any security for which unlisted trading privileges are continued
or extended pursuant to this subsection shall be deemed to be reg-
istered on a national securities exchange within the meaning of this
title. The powers and duties of the Commission under subsection
(b) of section 19 of this title shall be applicable to the rules of an
exchange in respect of any such security. The Commission may, by
such rules and regulations as it deems necessary or appropriate in
the public interest or for the protection of investors, either uncondi-
tionally or upon specified terms and conditions, or for stated periods,
exempt such securities from the operation of any provision of section
18, 14, or 16 of this title.”
Sec. 2. Any application to continue unlisted trading privileges
for any security heretofore filed by any exchange and approved by
the Commission pursuant to clause (1) of subsection (f) of section
12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and rules and regulations
thereunder shall be deemed to have been filed and approved pursuant
- clause (1) of said subsection (f) as amended by section 1 of this
ct.
Sec. 3. Section 15 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is
amended to read as follows:
“Sec. 15. (a) No broker or dealer (other than one whose business
is exclusively intrastate) shall make use of the mails or of any means
or instrumentality of interstate commerce to effect any transaction in,
or to induce the purchase or sale of, any security (other than an
exempted security or commercial paper, bankers’ acceptances, or
commercial bills) otherwise than on a national securities exchange,
unless such broker or dealer is registered in accordance with sub-
section (b) of this section,
“(b) A broker or dealer may be registered for the purposes of
this section by filing with the Commission an application for regis-
tration, which shall contain such information in such detail as to
such broker or dealer and any person directly or indirectly con-
trolling or controlled by, or under direct or indirect common control
with, such broker or dealer, as the Commission may by rules and
regulations require as necessary or appropriate in the public interest
or for the protection of investors. Except as hereinafter provided,
such registration shall become effective thirty days after the receipt
of such application by the Commission or within such shorter period
of time as the Commission may determine.
“An application for registration of a broker or dealer to be formed
or organized may be made by a broker or dealer to which the broker
or dealér to be formed or organized is to be the successor. Such
application shall contain such information in such detail as to the
applicant and as to the successor and any person directly or indirectly
controlling or controlled by, or under direct or indirect common
control with, the applicant or the successor, as the Commission may
by rules and regulations require as necessary or appropriate in the
public interest or for the protection of investors. Except as herein-
after provided, such registration shall become effective thirty days
after the receipt of such application by the Commission or within
such shorter period of time as the Commission may determine. Such
registration shall terminate on the forty-fifth day after the effective
date thereof, unless prior thereto the successor shall, in accordance
with such rules and regulations as the Commission may prescribe,
adopt such application as its own.
“Tf any amendment to any application for registration pursuant
to this subsection is filed prior to the effective date thereof, such
amendment shall be deemed to have been filed simultaneously with
1377
Securities hereunder
deemed registered.
Commission’s powers
erreur
Jol, 48, p. 898.
U.S. G., p. 538.
Exemptions permit-
ted.
Vol. 48, pp. 894, 895,
896.
_Applications to_con-
tinue trading privileges
for security heretofore
approved.
Vol. 48, p. 894.
Over-the-counter
markets.
Vol. 48, p. 895; U. S.
C., p. 536.
Use of the mails,
etc., by unregistered
brokers, ete.
Applications for regis-
tration; contents.
Effective date.
Application by brok-
er or dealer to be
formed or organized;
contents, etc.
Effective date.
Adoption of applica-
tion by successor.
Amendments to ap-
plications.
Postponement of ef-
fective date by -Com-
mission.
Registration; denial
or revocation for speci-
fied causes.
Misleading, etc.,
statements in applica-
tion.
Previous conviction.
Subject to court in-
junction, etc.
Willful violations of
law, ete.
Postponement of ef-
fective date of registra-
tion.
Suspension of regis-
tration.
Withdrawal from reg-
istration by brokers,
ete.
Cancelation of regis-
tration or application
by Commission.
Use of mails, etc., to
induce purchase or sale
by fraudulent, ete., de-
vice.
Definition by Com-
Inission.
74ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 97,:1936.
and as part of such application; except that the Commission may, if
it appears necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the
protection of investors, defer the effective date of any such registra-
tion as thus amended until the thirtieth day after the filing of such
amendment.
“The Commission shall, after appropriate notice and opportunity
for hearing, by order deny registration to or revoke the registration
of any broker or dealer if it finds that such denial or revocation is
in the public interest and that (1) such broker or dealer whether
prior or subsequent to becoming such, or (2) any partner, officer,
director, or branch manager of such broker or dealer (or any person
occupying a similar status or performing similar functions), or any
person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by such broker
or dealer, whether prior or subsequent to becoming such, (A) has
willfully made or caused to be made in any application for regis-
tration pursuant to this subsection or in any document supplemental
thereto or in any proceeding before the Commission with respect
to registration pursuant to this subsection any statement which was
at the time and in the light of the circumstances under which it was
made false or misleading with respect to any material fact; or (B)
has been convicted within ten years preceding the filing of any such
application or at any time thereafter of any felony or misdemeanor
involving the purchase or sale of any security or arising out of the
conduct of the business of a broker or dealer; or (C) is permanently
or temporarily enjoined by order, judgment, or decree of any court
of competent jurisdiction from engaging in or continuing any con-
duct or practice in connection with the purchase or sale of any
security; or (D) has willfully violated any provision of the Securities
Act of 1933, as amended, or of this title, or of any rule or regulation
thereunder. Pending final determination whether any such regis-
tration shall be denied, the Commission may by order postpone the
effective date of such registration for a period not to exceed fifteen
days, but if, after appropriate notice and opportunity for hearing, it
shall appear to the Commission to be necessary or appropriate in
the public interest or for the protection of investors to postpone the
effective date of such registration until final determination, the Com-
mission shall so order. Pending final determination whether any
such registration shall be revoked, the Commission shall by order
suspend such registration if, after appropriate notice and oppor-
tunity for hearing, such suspension shall appear to the Commission
to be necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the pro-
tection of investors. Any registered broker or dealer may, upon
such terms and conditions as the Commission may deem necessary
in the public interest or for the protection of investors, withdraw
from registration by filing a written notice of withdrawal with the
Commission. If the Commission finds that any registered broker or
dealer, or any broker or dealer for whom an application for regis-
tration is pending, is no longer in existence or has ceased to do
business as a broker or dealer, the Commission shall by order cancel
the registration or application of such broker or dealer.
“(c) No broker or dealer shall make use of the mails or of any
means or instrumentality of interstate commerce to effect any trans-
action in, or to induce the purchase or sale of, any security (other
than commercial paper, banker’s acceptances, or commercial bills)
otherwise than on a national securities exchange, by means of any
manipulative, deceptive, or other fraudulent device or contrivance.
The Commission shall, for the purposes of this subsection, by rules
and regulations define such devices or contrivances as are manipu-
lative, deceptive, or otherwise fraudulent.
ee
(4ta CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
Of the sums herein made available underethe United States
Shipping Board Bureau, not to exceed an aggregate of $150,000
shall be expended for compensation of regular attorneys employed
on a yearly salary basis, including their clerical and legal assistants.
This title may be cited as the Department of Commerce Appro-
priation Act, 1937.
TITLE IV—DEPARTMENT OF LABOR
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY
Salaries: Secretary of Labor, Assistant Secretary, Second Assist-
ant Secretary, and other personal services in the District of
Columbia, $330,000: Provided, That persons (not exceeding ten
in number) now employed in the determination of wages pursuant
to the provisions of the Act entitled “An Act to amend the Act
approved March 3, 1931, relating to the rate of wages for laborers
and mechanics employed by contractors and subcontractors on public
buildings”, approved August 30, 1935, may be continued in such
employment and paid from the amount herein appropriated without
regard to the provisions of the civil-service laws requiring com-
petitive examinations: Provided further, That said personnel (except
attorneys and referees) shall be required to take nonassembled
examinations.
Promotion of health, safety, employment, and so forth: For
salaries and expenses in connection with the promotion of health,
safety, employment stabilization, and amicable industrial relations
for labor and industry, $140,000, of which amount not to exceed
$83,580 may be expended for personal services in the District of
Columbia.
Contingent expenses: For contingent and miscellaneous expenses
of the offices and bureaus of the Department, for which appropria-
tions for contingent and miscellaneous expenses are not specifically
made, including the purchase of stationery, furniture, and repairs
to the same, carpets, matting, oilcloths, file cases, towels, ice, brooms,
soap, sponges, laundry, street-car fares not exceeding $400; purchase,
exchange, maintenance, and repair of motorcycles and motor trucks;
maintenance, operation, and repair of a motor-propelled passenger-
carrying vehicle, to be used only for official purposes; freight and
express charges; newspaper clippings not to exceed $1,200, postage
to foreign countries, telegraph and telephone service, typewriters,
adding machines, and other labor-saving devices; purchase of law
books, books of reference, newspapers and pega not exceeding
$4,500; contract stenographic services; all other necessary miscel-
laneous items and expenses not included in the foregoing; and not
to exceed $25,000 for purchase of certain supplies for the Immigra-
tion and Naturalization Service; in all, $112,500: Provided, That
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C.,
title 41, sec. 5) shall not be construed to apply to any purchase or
service rendered for the Department of Labor when the aggregate
amount involved does not exceed the sum of $100.
Printing and binding: For printing and binding for the Depart-
ment of Labor, including all its bureaus, offices, institutions, and
services located in Washington, District of Columbia, and elsewhere,
$250,000.
Commissioners of conciliation: To enable the Secretary of Labor
to exercise the authority vested in him by section 8 of the Act creat-
ing the Department of Labor (U. S. C., title 5, sec. 6117) and to
1So in original.
43115°—36——_17
1347
Compensation of at-
torneys.
Short title.
Department of
Labor.
Office of the Secre-
tary.
Salaries.
Provisos.
_ Personnel determin-
ing wage rates, re-
tained.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 1011.
Ist
Nonassembled exami-
nations required.
Promotion of health,
safety, employment,
ete.
Contingent expenses,
Proviso.
Minor purchases.
R. 8., sec. 3709, p.
733; U.S. C., p. 1803.
Printing and binding.
Commissioners
of conciliation.
Vol. 37, p. 738.
U.S. C., p. 81.
1548
International Labor
Organization, Geneva.
Liaison with; ex-
penses, ete.
Vol. 48, p. 1182.
Printing and bind-
ing, etc.
Vol. 46, p. 818; U.S.
C., p. 45.
Bureau of Labor Sta-
tistics.
Salaries and expenses.
Immigration and
Naturalization Service.
Salaries and expenses:
Deportation, etc., of
aliens.
Vehicles.
Witness fees, etc.
74ru CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
appoint commissioners of conciliation, traveling expenses, telegraph
and telephone service, and not to exceed $80,000 for personal services
in the District of Columbia, $408,000.
Liaison with the International Labor Organization, Geneva, Switz-
erland, salaries and expenses: For a United States Labor Commis-
sioner and other personal services in Geneva, Switzerland; com-
pensation of interpreters, translators, and porters; traveling expenses
of employees, including transportation of employees, their families,
and effects, in going to and returning from foreign posts; rent, heat,
light, and fuel; hire, maintenance, and operation of motor-propelled
passenger-carrying vehicles; purchase and exchange of foreign and
domestic books, periodicals, and newspapers; purchase of furniture,
stationery, and supplies; printing and binding; postage; telephone
and other similar expenses, for which payment may be made in
advance; necessary technical or special investigations in connection
with matters fallmg within the scope of the International Labor
Organization; allowances for living quarters, including heat, fuel,
and light, as authorized by the Act approved June 26, 1930 (U.S. C.,
title 5, sec. 1182), not to exceed $1,700 for any person, and contingent
and such other expenses in the United States and elsewhere as the
Secretary of Labor may deem necessary, fiscal year 1937, $28,000.
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS
Salaries and expenses: For personal services, including temporary
statistical clerks, stenographers, and typewriters in the District of
Columbia, and including also experts and temporary assistants for
field service outside of the District of Columbia; traveling expenses,
including expenses of attendance at meetings concerned with the
work of the Bureau of Labor Statistics when incurred on the writ-
ten authority of the Secretary of Labor; purchase of periodicals,
documents, envelopes, price quotations, and reports and materials for
reports and bulletins of said Bureau, $850,000, of which amount not
to exceed $628,500 may be expended for the salary of the Commis-
sioner and other personal services in the District of Columbia.
IMMIGRATION AND NATURALIZATION SERVICE
Salaries and expenses: For enforcement of the laws regulating
the immigration to, the residence in, and the exclusion and deporta-
tion from the United States of aliens and persons subject to the
Chinese exclusion laws; for enforcement of the laws authorizing
a uniform rule for the naturalization of aliens; salaries, transporta-
tion, traveling, and other expenses of officers, clerks, and other
employees appointed to enforce said laws; care, detention, mainte-
nance, transportation, and traveling expenses incident to the depor-
tation and exclusion of aliens and persons subject to the Chinese
exclusion laws, as authorized by law, in the United States and to,
through, or in foreign countries; purchase of supplies and equip-
ment, including alterations and repairs; purchase, exchange, opera-
tion, maintenance, and Topas of motor-propelled vehicles, including
passenger-carrying vehicles for official use in field work; arms,
ammunition and accessories; cost of reports of decisions of the Fed-
eral courts and digests thereof for official use; verifications of legal
papers; refunding of head tax, maintenance bills, and immigration
fines, upon presentation of evidence showing conclusively that col-
lection and deposit was made through error; mileage and fees to
witnesses subpenaed on behalf of the United States, and for all
other expenses necessary to enforce said laws; $9,740,000, all to be
expended under the direction of the Secretary of Labor, of which
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
»
1349
amount not to exceed $545,000 may be expended for the salary of , Services in the Dis:
the Commissioner of Lnmigration and Naturalization and other
personal services in the District of Columbia, including services of
persons authorized by law to be detailed there for duty: Provided,
That not to exceed $45,000 of the sum herein appropriated shall be
available for the purchase, including exchange, of motor-propelled
passenger-carrying vehicles: Provided further, That the Commis-
sioner of Immigration and Naturalization, with the approval of the
Secretary of Labor, may contract with officers and employees sta-
tioned outside of the District of Columbia, whose salaries are pay-
able from this appropriation, for the use, on official business outside
of the District of Columbia, of privately owned horses, and the
consideration agreed upon shall be payable from the funds herein
appropriated: Provided further, That not to exceed $36,000 of the
total amount herein appropriated shall be available for allowances
for living quarters, including heat, fuel, and light, as authorized by
the Act approved June 26, 1930 (U. S. C., title 5, sec. 118a), not
to exceed $1,700 for any person: Provided further, That $100,000
of the amount herein appropriated shall be available only for the
payment of extra compensation for overtime services of inspectors
and employees of the Immigration and Naturalization Service for
which the United States receives reimbursement in accordance with
the provisions of the Act of March 2, 1931 (U.S. C., title 8, secs.
109a and 109b): Provided further, That not to exceed $400 of the |
sum herein appropriated may be expended for attendance at meet- *
ings concerned with the naturalization of aliens when incurred on
the written authority of the Secretary of Labor: Provided further,
rict.
Provisos.
Vehicles.
Privately owned
horses.
Allowances for living
quarters, etc.
Vol. 46, p. 818.
U.S. C., p. 45.
Overtime services of
inspectors, ete.
Vol. 46, p. 1467.
U.S. C., p. 184.
Attendance at meet-
ngs.
Pay of assistants to
That no part of this appropriation shall be available for the com- Gots % cours ferbid-
pensation of assistants to clerks of United States courts: And pro-
vided further, That not to exceed $10,000 of the sum herein appro-
priated may be expended for payment of rewards, when specifically
authorized by the Secretary of Labor, for information leading to
the detection, arrest, or conviction of persons violating the immi-
gration or naturalization laws.
Immigration stations: For remodeling, repairing (including repairs
to the ferryboat, Ellis Island), renovating buildings, and purchase of
equipment, $110,000.
CHILDREN’S BUREAU
Salaries and expenses: For expenses of investigating and report-
ing upon matters pertaining to the welfare of children and child
life, and especially to investigate the questions of infant mortality;
personal services, including experts and temporary assistants;
traveling expenses, including not to exceed $3,000 for expenses of
attendance at meetings for the promotion of child welfare when
incurred on the written authority of the Secretary of Labor; pur-
chase of reports and material for the publications of the Children’s
Bureau and for reprints from State, city, and private publications
for distribution when said reprints can be procured more cheaply
than they can be printed by the Government, and other necessary
expenses, $400,000, of which amount not to exceed $313,500 may be
expended for personal services in the District of Columbia.
MATERNAL AND CHILD WELFARE
en.
Payment of rewards.
Immigration stations.
Children’s Bureau.
Salariesand expenses.
Investigations.
Maternal and child
welfare.
Salaries and expenses: For all authorized and necessary adminis-
trative expenses of the Children’s Bureau in performing the duties s
Salaries and expenses.
Public Laws, Ist
ess., P. 629.
imposed upon it by title V of the Social Security Act, approved 4,\) 5: C+ Supp. 1 p-
August 14, 1935, including personal services, rentals, repairs, and
1350
Social Security Act.
Payments under
State plans.
Maternal and child-
health services, grants
to States.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 629.
Provisos.
Basis of allotments,
1937.
Ist
Supplemental aid not
included.
Public Laws, 1st
sess., p. 630.
Services for crippled
children, grants to
States.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 631.
Proviso.
Basis of allotments,
937.
Ist
Child-welfare serv-
ices, grants to States.
Public Laws, 1st
sess., P. 633.
Proviso.
Basis of allotments,
1937.
Women’s Bureau.
Salaries andexpenses.
Vol. 41, p. 987; U
S. C., p. 1820.
7414 CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
alterations to buildings, in the District of Columbia and elsewhere;
printing and binding; supplies; services; equipment; newspapers,
books of reference, periodicals, and press clippings; travel expenses
including expenses of attendance at meetings and attendance of
cooperating officials and consultants at conferences when called by
the Children’s Bureau with the approval of the Secretary of Labor,
$299,000.
In the administration of title V of the Social Security Act for
the fiscal year 1937, payments to States for any quarter of the fiscal
year 1937 under parts 1 and 2 may be made with respect to any
State plan approved under such respective parts by the Chief of the
Children’s Bureau prior to or during such quarter, but no such
payment shall be made with respect to any plan for any period prior
to the quarter in which such plan was submitted to the Chief of the
Children’s Bureau for approval.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR MATERNAL AND CHILD-HEALTH SERVICES
Grants to States for maternal and child-health services, Chil-
dren’s Bureau: For grants to States for the purpose of enabling
each State to extend and improve services for promoting the health
of mothers and children, as authorized in title V, part 1, of the
Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49 Stat. 629-631),
$2,820,000: Provided, That in carrying out such part 1, the allot-
ments to States and expenditures thereunder for the fiscal year 1937
are authorized to be made on the basis of a total of $3,800,000 for
all States (as defined in such Act): Provided further, That any
allotment to a State pursuant to section 502 (b) shall not be included
in computing for the purposes of subsections (a) and (b) of section
504 an amount expended or estimated to be expended by the State.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR SERVICES FOR CRIPPLED CHILDREN
Grants to States for services for crippled children, Children’s
Bureau: For the purpose of enabling each State to extend and
improve services for crippled children, as authorized in title V,
part 2, of the Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49
Stat., 631-633), $2,150,000: Provided, That in carrying out such
part 2, the allotments to States (as defined in such Act) and expendi-
tures thereunder for the fiscal year 1937 are authorized to be made
on the basis of a total of $2,850,000 for all States.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR CHILD-WELFARE SERVICES
Grants to States for child-welfare services, Children’s Bureau:
For grants to States for the purpose of enabling the United States,
through the Children’s Bureau, to cooperate with State public-
welfare agencies in establishing, extending, and strengthening pub-
lic-welfare services for the care of homeless or neglected children,
or children in danger of becoming delinquent, as authorized in title
V, part 3, of the Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49
Stat. 633), $1,200,000: Provided, That in carrying out such part 3,
the allotments to States (as defined in such Act) and expenditures
thereunder for the fiscal year 1987 are authorized to be made on
the basis of a total of $1,500,000 for all States,
WOMEN’S BUREAU
Salaries and expenses: For carrying out the provisions of the Act
‘entitled “An Act to establish in the Department of Labor a bureau
to be known as the Women’s Bureau”, approved June 5, 1920
(4TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
(U.S. C., title 29, sees 11-16), including personal services in the Dis-
trict of Columbia, not to exceed $134,500; purchase of material for
reports and educational exhibits, and traveling expenses, $153,200,
of which sum not to exceed $3,000 shall be available for expenses
of attendance at meetings concerned with the work of said bureau
when incurred on the written authority of the Secretary of Labor.
UNITED STATES EMPLOYMENT SERVICE
For carrying out the provisions of the Act entitled “An Act to
provide for the establishment of a national employment system
and for cooperation with the States in the promotion of such sys-
tem, and for other purposes”, approved June 6, 1933; personal
services and rent in the District of Columbia and elsewhere; travel-
ing expenses, including expenses of attendance at meetings con-
cerned with the work of the United States Employment Service when
specifically authorized by the Secretary of Labor; law books, books
of reference, newspapers and periodicals, printing and binding,
supplies and equipment, telegraph and telephone service, and mis-
cellaneous expenses, $2,785,000, of which amount not to exceed
$885,000 shall be available for the Veterans’ Placement Service, the
Farm Placement Service, District of Columbia Public Employment
Center, and all other purposes, including not to exceed $197,500 for
personal services in the Department in the District of Columbia, and
the remainder shall be available for payment to the several States
in accordance with the provisions of the said Act of June 6, 1933,
as amended: Provided, That apportionments for the fiscal year
1937 shall be on the basis of a total apportionment to all States of
$3,000,000, and in order to supply the Government’s apportionments
to States under such Act during the fiscal years 1936 and 1937,
which are not capable of being supplied under the foregoing appro-
priation, there is hereby appropriated so much as may be necessary
to supply such apportionments, but not more than $1,675,000,
UNITED STATES HOUSING CORPORATION
Salaries and expenses: For officers, clerks, and other employees,
and for contingent and miscellaneous expenses, in the District of
Columbia and elsewhere, including blank books, maps, stationery,
file cases, towels, ice, brooms, soap, freight and express charges, com-
munication service, travel expense, printing and binding not to exceed
$100, and all other miscellaneous items and expenses not included
in the foregoing and necessary to collect and account for the receipts
from the sale of properties and the receipts from the operation of
unsold properties of the United States Housing Corporation, the
Bureau of Industrial Housing and Transportation, property com-
mandeered by the United States through the Secretary of Labor,
and to collect the amounts advanced to transportation facilities and
others; for payment of special assessments and other utility, munici-
pal, State, and county charges or assessments unpaid by purchasers,
and which have been assessed against property in which the United
States Housing Corporation has an interest, and to defray expenses
incident to foreclosing mortgages, conducting sales under deeds of
trust, or reacquiring title or possession of real property under
default proceeding, including attorney fees, witness fees, court costs,
charges, and other miscellaneous expenses; for the maintenance and
repair of houses, buildings, and improvements which are unsold; in
all, $9,000: Provided, That no person shall be employed hereunder at
a rate of compensation exceeding $4,000 per annum, and only one
1351
Employment Service.
Providing for promo-
tion of employment.
Vol. 48, p. 113; U. S.
C., p. 1324.
Attendance at meet-
ings.
Printing and _ bind-
ing, etc.
Veterans’ Placement
Service, Farm Place-
ment Service, D. C.
Public Employment
Center.
Proviso.
Basis of apportion-
ments, 1937.
United States Hous-
ing Corporation.
Salaries and expenses.
Printing and binding.
Special assessments.
Provisos.
Salary limitation.
1352
Expenditures re-
stricted. :
Bituminous Coal La-
bor Board.
Salaries and expenses.
Post, p. 1627.
Printing and binding.
Short title
Payment restriction,
persons failing to re-
ceive Senate confirma-
tion.
Payment to cotton
ginners.
Ante, p. 1116.
Cotton Control Act,
administrative ex-
penses.
Vol. 48, p. 598.
Proviso.
‘Time limitation.
Great Lakes Exposi-
tion.
Participation ex-
penses.
Ante, p. 1243.
May 15, 1936.
[S. J. Res. 231.]
[Pub. Res., No. 91.]
Landing of the
Swedes in Delaware.
Commemorative
coinage, authorized.
Number.
74m CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 405, 406. MAY 15, 1936.
person may be employed at that rate: Provided further, That no
part of the appropriations heretofore made and available for
expenditure by the United States Housing Corporation shall be
expended for the purposes for which appropriations are made herein.
BITUMINOUS COAL LABOR BOARD
Salaries and expenses: For three Board members and other per-
sonal services in the District of Columbia and elsewhere, and for all
other necessary expenditures of the Bituminous Coal Labor Board
in performing the duties imposed upon said Board by the Bitu-
minous Coal Conservation Act of 1935, including supplies, station-
ery, telephone service, telegrams, furniture, office equipment, travel
expenses, and contract stenographic reporting services, $79,300.
Printing and binding, Bituminous Coal Labor Board: For all
printing and binding for the Bituminous Coal Labor Board, $2,500.
This title may be cited as the Department of Labor Appropriation
Act, 1987.
Src. 2. No part of the money appropriated under this Act shall be
paid to any person for the filling of any position for which he or she
has been nominated after the Senate has voted not to approve of the
nomination of said person.
Sec. 3. That in passing upon applications made for compensation
under the provisions of the item for “Payment to cotton ginners”
contained in Title I of the Supplemental Appropriation Act, fiscal
year 1936 (Public Law Numbered 440, Seventy-fourth Congress),
and upon payments pursuant to such applications, the Secretary of
Agriculture and the Comptroller General of the United States are
authorized and directed, in the interest of saving as much adminis-
trative expense as possible and in order to avoid delay in passing
upon such applications, to assume that the additional expenses
incurred in connection with the administration of the Act of April
21, 1934 (49+ Stat., 598-607), equaled 25 cents per bale, counting
round bales as half bales, during the period June 1, 1935, to February
10, 1936, inclusive: Provided, That no payment shall be made on any
application for such compensation unless the application is filed prior
to September 1, 1936.
Src. 4. Great Lakes Exposition: For the expenses of the participa-
tion of the Government of the United States in the Great Lakes
Exposition as provided for by Senate Joint Resolution Numbered
233, including the reimbursement of other appropriations from which
payments may have been made for any of the purposes therein
specified, to be immediately available, $275,000.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
[CHAPTER 406.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To authorize the coinage of 50-cent pieces in commemoration of the three-
hundredth anniversary of the landing of the Swedes in Delaware.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That in commemoration
of the three-hundredth anniversary of the landing of the Swedes in
Delaware there shall be coined at a mint of the United States to be
designated by the Director of the Mint not less than twenty-five
thousand silver 50-cent pieces of standard size, weight, and composi-
tion and of a special appropriate single design, containing some
1So in original.
(47H CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 406, 407. MAY 15, 1936.
recognized emblem of the State of Delaware, to be fixed by the Direc-
tor of the Mint, with the approval of the Secretary of the Treasury,
but the United States shall not be subject to the expense of making the
necessary dies and other preparations for this coinage.
Sec. 2. The coins herein authorized shall bear the date 1936, irre-
spective of the year in which they are minted or issued, shall be legal
tender in any payment to the amount of their face value, and shall be
issued only upon the request of the president of the Delaware Swed-
ish Tercentenary Commission upon payment by him of the par value
of such coins, but not less than twenty-five thousand such coins shall
be issued to him at any one time and no such coins shall be issued
after the expiration of one year after the date of enactment of this
Act. Such coins may be disposed of at par or at a premium by such
commission, and the net proceeds shall be used by it in defraying the
expenses incidental and appropriate to the commemoration of such
event.
Sec. 3. All laws now in force relating to the subsidiary silver coins
of the United States and the coining or striking of the same, regulat-
ing and guarding the process of coinage, providing for the purchase
of material, and for the transportation, distribution, and redemption
of coins, for the prevention of debasement or counterfeiting, for the
security of the coins, or for any other purposes, whether such laws
are penal or otherwise, shall, so far as applicable, apply to the coinage
herein authorized.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
[CHAPTER 407.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To provide for participation by the United States in an Inter-American Confer-
ence to be held at Buenos Aires, Argentina, or at the capital of another American
republic, in 1936.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
Onited States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any money not other-
wise appropriated, the sum of $75,000 to be used for participation
by the United States in an Inter-American Conference, in pursuance
of and for the purposes set forth in a letter from the President of
the United States dated January 30, 1936, to be held at Buenos
Aires, Argentina, or at the capital of another American republic, in
1936, including personal services in the District of Columbia or
elsewhere without reference to the Classification Act of 1928, as
amended; stenographic reporting and other services by contract if
deemed necessary without regard to section 3709 of the Revised
Statutes (U. S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent; traveling expenses (and
by indirect routes and by airplane if specifically authorized by the
Secretary of State); hire, maintenance, and operation of motor-
propelled passenger-carrying vehicles; equipment, purchase of
necessary books, documents, newspapers, periodicals, and maps; sta-
tionery; official cards, entertainment; printing and binding; and
such other expenses as may be authorized by the Secretary of State,
including the reimbursement of other appropriations from which
payments may have been made for any of the purposes herein
specified, to be expended under the direction of the Secretary of
State, fiscal year 1936, to remain available until June 30, 1937.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
No Federal expense
for dies, ete,
Date, issue, etc.
Disposal.
Coinage laws appli-
eable.
May 15, 1936.
[S. J. Res. 248.]
[Pub. Res., No. 92.]
Inter-American Con-
ference, 1936.
Appropriation au-
thorized for participa-
tion expenses.
Ante, p. 1319.
U.S. C., p. 85.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S., sec. 3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Vehicles.
Printing and binding.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
1554
May 18, 1936.
[H. R. 10589.]
[Public, No. 600.]
Missouri River.
Bridge construction
at Niobrara, Nebr.
Textual changes.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 1074.
Amendment,
May 18, 1936.
(H. R. 10847.)
Ist
[Public, No. 601.]
New York Ci
New
ty,
‘Acquisition cf land
near, for cemeterial
purposes, authorized.
Appropriation
thorized.
Post, p. 1641.
au-
74mx CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 420, 421. MAY 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 420.]
AN ACT
To amend section 32 of the Act entitled ““An Act to authorize the construction
of certain bridges and to extend the times for commencing and/or completing
the construction of other bridges over the navigable waters of the United
States, and for other purposes’, approved August 30, 1935.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That subsection (a)
of section 32 of the Act entitled “An Act to authorize the construction
of certain bridges and to extend the times for commencing and/or
completing the construction of other bridges over the navigable waters
of the United States, and for other purposes”, approved August 30,
1935, is amended by striking out “the village board of the village
of Niobrara, county of Knox, State of Nebraska”, and inserting in
lieu thereof the following: “the county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
Src. 2. Subsection (b) of such section 32 is amended by striking
out “the Village Board of the Village of Niobrara, county of Knox,
State of Nebraska”, and inserting in lieu thereof the following: “the
county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
Src. 3. (a) Subsection (c) of such section 32 is amended by strik-
ing out “The said Villiage Board of the Villiage of Niobrara, county
of Knox, State of Nebraska”, and inserting in leu thereof the
following: “The said county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
(b) Subsection (c) of such section 32 is further amended by strik-
ing out “to fix the charge tolls for transit” and inserting in lieu
thereof the following: “to fix and charge tolls for transit”.
Src. 4. Subsection (d) of such section 32 is amended by striking
out “After a sinking sufficient for amortization shall have been so
provided, said bridge” and inserting in lieu thereof the following:
“After a sinking fund sufficient for such amortization shall have been
so provided, said bridge”.
Sec. 5. The right to alter, amend, or repeal this Act is hereby
expressly reserved.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 421.]
AN ACT
To authorize the acquisition of land for cemeterial purposes in the vicinity of
New York City, New York.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of War be, and he is hereby, authorized to acquire by purchase,
condemnation, or otherwise such suitable lands in the vicinity of New
York City as in his judgment are required for enlargement of exist-
ing national cemetery facilities, and the sum of $250,000, or so much
thereof as may be necessary, is hereby authorized to be appropriated
from any funds in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, which
sum shall remain available until expended.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 422, 428. MAY 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 422.]
AN ACT
To amend section 5 of the Act of March 2, 1919, generally known as the ‘‘War
Minerals Relief Statutes.”’
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in any claim
that has heretofore been filed within the time and in the manner
provided by the Act approved March 2, 1919 (40 Stat. 1272), as
amended, generally referred to as the “War Minerals Relief Statutes”,
in which the Supreme Court of the District of Columbia under the
authority conferred upon said court by the Act approved February
13, 1929 (45 Stat. 1166), has adjudged or decreed interest payments
or obligations to be losses reimbursable within the meaning of the
Act of March 2, 1919 (40 Stat. 1272), as amended, the Secretary of
the Interior shall open or reopen such claim and include in his
adjustments and payments of losses, interest which has been paid or
has accrued to the date of approval of this Act: Provided, however,
That such losses shall be shown to the satisfaction of the Secretary
of the Interior as a matter of fact to be the result of a legal obliga-
tion incurred within the statutory period as provided in said Act of
March 2, 1919: And provided further, That the sum paid in satisfy-
ing said claims shall not exceed in total $1,250,000. It is also
provided that all settlements under this Act and pursuant to its
provisions shall constitute full and complete discharge of all obliga-
tions of the United States accruing under the War Minerals Act
and Acts amendatory thereof.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 423.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To provide for participation by the United States in the Ninth International
Congress of Military Medicine and Pharmacy in Rumania, in 1937; and to
authorize and request the President of the United States to invite the Inter-
national Congress of Military Medicine and Pharmacy to hold its tenth
congress in the United States in 1939, and to invite foreign countries to par-
ticipate in that congress.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That there is hereby
authorized to be appropriated, out of any money in the Treasury not
otherwise appropriated, the sum of $11,500, or so much thereof as
may be necessary, for the expenses of participation by the United
States in the Ninth International Congress of Military Medicine and
Pharmacy to be held in Rumania in 1937, including personal services
in the District of Columbia or elsewhere without reference to the
Classification Act of 1923, as amended; stenographic reporting and
other services by contract if deemed necessary without regard to
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes (U.S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent;
traveling expenses; purchase of necessary books, documents, news-
papers, periodicals, and maps; stationery; official cards; entertain-
ment; printing and binding, including the payment of not to exceed
$500 to the Association of Military Surgeons of the United States
toward the cost of printing the report of the American Delegation
to the Ninth Congress; and such other expenses as may be authorized
by the Secretary of State, including the reimbursement of other
appropriations from which payments may have been made for any
of the purposes herein specified, to be expended under the direction
of the Secretary of State.
May 18, 1936.
{S.1432.]
[Public, No. 602.]
“War Minerals Re-
lief Statutes”, amend-
ment.
Vol. 40, p. 1272; Vol.
42, p. 322; Vol. 45, p.
1166.
Post, p. 1619.
Interest payments on
certain claims under.
Provisos.
Condition.
Limitation on total
amount.
Settlements; dis-
charge of liability.
May 18, 1936.
[H. J. Res. 538.]
[Pub. Res., No. 93.]
Ninth International
Congress of Military
Medicine and Phar-
macy, Rumania, 1937.
Sum authorized for
participation expenses.
Post, p. 1634.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S., sec.3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Printing and bind-
ing; report of Ameri-
can Delegation.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
Invitation to hold
10th congress in United
States; foreign govern-
ments to participate.
May 18, 1936.
[H. J. Res. 547.]
[Pub. Res., No. 94.]
Great Lakes Exposi-
tion, Cleveland, Ohio.
Dutiable articles, im-
ported for exhibition
purposes, etc., ad-
mitted free, under regu-
lations.
Ante, pp. 1243, 1352.
Sales permitted.
Provisos.
Duty on articles
withdrawn,
Deterioration allow-
ance.
Marking require-
ments.
Articles abandoned.
Transfer privileges.
Exposition deemed
sole consignee of mer-
chandise.
Incurred Federal ex-
penses reimbursable.
74ta CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS, 423, 424. MAY 18, 1936.
Sec, 2. That the President be, and he is hereby, authorized and
requested to extend to the International Congress of Military Medi-
cine and Pharmacy an invitation to hold its tenth congress in the
United States in 1939, and to invite foreign governments to partici-
pate in that congress.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 424.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
Providing for the importation of articles free from tariff or customs duty for the
purpose of exhibition at Great Lakes Exposition to be held at Cleveland,
Ohio, beginning in June 1936, and for other purposes.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That all articles which
shall be imported from foreign countries for the purpose of exhibi-
tion at the international exposition to be held at Cleveland, Ohio,
beginning in June 1936, by Great Lakes Exposition, or for use in
constructing, installing, or maintaining foreign buildings, or exhibits
at the said exhibition, upon which articles there shall be a tariff or
customs duty shall be admitted without payment of such tariff, cus-
toms duty, fees, or charges under such regulations as the Secretary of
the Treasury shall prescribe; but it shall be lawful at any time during
or within three months after the close of the said exposition to sell
within the area of the exposition any articles provided for herein,
subject to such regulations for the security of the revenue and for the
collection of import duties as the Secretary of the Treasury shall pre-
seribe: Provided, That all such articles, when withdrawn for con-
sumption or use in the United States, shall be subject to the duties,
if any, imposed upon such articles by the revenue laws in force at the
date of their withdrawal; and on such articles which shall have
suffered diminution or deterioration from incidental handling or
exposure the duties, if payable, shall be assessed according to the
appraised value at the time of withdrawal from entry hereunder for
consumption or entry under the general tariff law: Provided further,
That imported articles provided for herein shall not be subject to ny
marking requirements of the general tariff laws, except when suc
articles are withdrawn for consumption or use in the United States,
in which case they shall not be released from customs custody until
properly marked, but no additional duty shall be assessed because
such articles were not sufficiently marked when imported into the
United States: Provided further, That at any time during or within
three months after the close of the exposition any article entered
hereunder may be abandoned to the Government or destroyed under
customs supervision, whereupon any duties on such article shall be
remitted: Provided further, That articles which have been admitted
without payment of duty for exhibition under any tariff law and
which have remained in continuous customs custody or under a cus-
toms exhibition bond and imported articles in bonded warehouses
under the general tariff law may be accorded the privilege of trans-
fer to and entry for exhibition at the said exposition under such
regulations as the Secretary of the Treasury shall prescribe: And
provided further, That Great Lakes Exposition shall be deemed, for
customs purposes only, to be the sole consignee of all merchandise
imported under the provisions of this Act, and that the actual and
necessary customs charges for labor, services, and other expenses in
connection with the entry, examination, appraisement, release, or
custody, together with the necessary charges for salaries of customs
officers and employees in connection with the supervision, custody of,
74ra CONGRESS. SESS. II.
and accounting for articles imported under the provisions of this Act,
shall be reimbursed by Great Lakes Exposition to the Government
of the United States under regulations to be prescribed by the Secre-
tary of the Treasury, and that receipts from such reimbursements
shall be deposited as refunds to the appropriation from which paid,
in the manner provided for in section 524, Tariff Act of 1930,
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 425.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To authorize an appropriation for the expenses of participation by the United
States in a conference at Brussels to revise the Convention for the Protection
of Literary and Artistic Works concluded at Bern, September 9, 1886, and
revised at Rome, June 2, 1928.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any money in the
Treasury not otherwise appropriated, the sum of $6,500, or so much
thereof as may be necessary, for the expenses of participation by
the United States in the conference to convene at Brussels, Belgium,
for the purpose of revising the Convention for the Protection of
Literary and Artistic Works, concluded at Bern, September 9, 1886,
and revised at Rome, June 2, 1928, including personal services in
the District of Columbia and elsewhere without reference to the
Classification Act of 1923, as amended; stenographic, reporting, and
other services by contract, if deemed necessary, without regard to
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes (U.S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent;
traveling expenses; purchases of necessary books, documents, news-
papers, periodicals, and maps; stationery; official cards; entertain-
ment; printing and binding; and such other expenses as may be
authorized by the Secretary of State, including the reimbursement
of other appropriations from which payments may have been made
for any of the purposes herein specified, to be expended under the
direction of the Secretary of State.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 427.]
AN ACT
To authorize certain officers of the United States Navy, officers and enlisted men
of the Marine Corps, and officers and enlisted men of the United States Army
to accept such medals, orders, diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have
been tendered them by foreign governments in appreciation of services rendered.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the following-
named officers of the United States Navy, and officers and enlisted
men of the Marine Corps, are hereby authorized to accept such
medals, orders, diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have been
tendered them by foreign governments in appreciation of services
rendered :
United States Navy: Admiral William H. Standley; Rear Admiral
David F. Sellers; Rear Admiral Wat T. Cluverius; Rear Admiral
Hayne Ellis; Rear Admiral Ernest J. King; Rear Admiral Louis
M. Nulton, retired; Rear Admiral Yates Stirling, Junior; Rear
Admiral John R. Y. Blakely, retired; Rear Admiral Edward H.
Campbell; Rear Admiral Walter N. Vernou; Rear Admiral Harley
H. Christy; Rear Admiral Henry V. Butler; Rear Admiral Walter
S. Crosley; Rear Admiral Frank B. Upham; Rear Admiral Edward
CHS. 424, 4295, 497. MAY 18, 19, 1936.
1357
Deposit of, as re-
funds.
Vol. 46, p. 741.
U.S. C., p. 894.
May 18, 1936.
[H. J. Res. 569.]
~ [Pub. Res., No. 95.]
Convention for the
Protection of Literary
and Artistic Works,
senlerence for revision
of.
Sum authorized for
participation expenses.
Post, p. 1633.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S., sec.3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
May 19, 1936.
[S.1975.]
[Public, No. 603.]
Navy, Marine Corps,
and Army.
Acceptance of certain
decorations, ete., ten-
dered by foreign gov-
ernments to designated
officers, etc., authorized,
Navy.
1358
Navy—Continued.
74ta CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
B. Fenner; Rear Admiral George T. Pettengill; Rear Admiral Clark
N. Woodward; Rear Admiral William H. Allen; Captain Reuben
B. Coffey; Captain Vaughn K. Coman; Captain Gordon W. Haines;
Captain Alfred G. Howe; Captain Victor A. Kimberly; Captain
David M. Le Breton; Captain William R. Sayles; Captain Halsey
Powell; Captain Willis W. Bradley, Junior; Captain Frank H.
Roberts; Captain Arthur B. Cook; Captain Benyaurd B. Wygent;
Captain Rufus F. Zogbaum, Junior; Captain Frank Jack Fletcher;
Captain Matthias E. Manly; Captain Alfred W. Brown; Captain
Augustine T. Beauregard; Captain Harold M. Bemis; Captain Her-
bert H. Michael; Captain MacGillivray Milne; Captain Milo F.
Draemel; Captain Edward A. Evers, Naval Reserve; Captain
Edward T. Hooper, Supply Corps; Captain Holden C. Richardson,
Construction Corps, retired; Captain Kent C. Melhorn, Medical
Corps; Captain Lucius W. Johnson, Medical Corps; Commander
Ernest L. Gunther; Commander Hamilton V. Bryan; Commander
John D. Price; Commander Harold C. Train; Commander Ward W.
Waddell; Commander William W. Smith; Commander Calvin N.
Cobb; Commander Patrick N. L. Bellinger; Commander Harry G.
Patrick; Commander Earl W. Spencer; Commander William H.
Pashley; Commander Aaron S. Merrill; Commander Douglas W.
Fuller; Commander Ralph F. Wood; Commander Joel T. Boone,
Medical Corps; Commander Joseph A. J. McMullin, Medical Corps;
Commander Gordon D. Hale, Medical Corps; Commander Walter
C. Espech, Medical Corps; Commander Maurice M. Witherspoon,
Chaplain Corps; Commander Bernhard H. Bieri; Lieutenant Com-
mander Albert S. Marley; Lieutenant Commander Charles G.
Moore, Junior; Lieutenant Commander John J. Carrick, Naval
Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Emil J. Carroll, Naval Reserve;
Lieutenant Commander Francis G. Donebrink; Lieutenant Com-
mander Victor C. Barringer, Junior; Lieutenant Commander Ralph
A. Ofstie; Lieutenant Commander Lucien B. Green, Second, retired;
Lieutenant Commander Dallas D. Dupre; Lieutenant Commander
Harold B. Crow, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Edward
O. McDonnell, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Schuyler F.
Cumings, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Charles W. Steven-
son, Supply Corps; Lieutenant Commander Charles R. O'Leary,
Supply Corps; Lieutenant Commander Hardy V. Hughens, Medical
Corps; Lieutenant Commander Thomas L. Morrow, Medical Corps;
Lieutenant Commander Louis E. Mueller, Medical Corps; Lieu-
tenant Commander Victor B. Riden, Medical Corps; Lieutenant
Commander William M. H. Turville, Medical Corps; Lieutenant
Commander Horace R. Boone, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Com-
mander Warwick T. Brown, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander
Vincent Hernandez, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Harry
S. Harding, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Robert W. Wim-
berly, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Hillard L. Weer,
Medical Corps; Lieutenant Robert F. Hickey; Lieutenant Harvey
R. Bowes; Lieutenant Buell F. Brandt; Lieutenant George H.
De Baun; Lieutenant John M. Brewster; Lieutenant Curry E.
Eason; Lieutenant Maxwell B. Saben; Lieutenant John F. Gillon;
Lieutenant Colonel H. Mansfield, Chaplain Corps; Lieutenant
Joseph O. Saurette; Lieutenant Robert H. Smith; Lieutenant Don-
ald R. Tallman; Lieutenant John Davis, retired; Lieutenant Walter
L. Bach, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Walter G. Kilbury, Medical
Corps; Lieutenant Hugh E. Mouldin, Dental Corps; Lieutenant
(Junior Grade) James H. Taylor; Lieutenant ees Grade)
Frank E. Latauzo, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Robert C. Douthat, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
74m CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
Freeman C. Harris, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Warren G. Wieand, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
George H. Mills, Dental Corps; Ensign Howard F. Hozey, Naval
Reserve Force; Chief Boatswain William C. Baker; Chief Pharma-
cist Roy Aikman; Chief Pharmacist Leon H. French.
United States Marine Corps: Major General James C. Breckin-
ridge; Brigadier General George Richards; Brigadier General Rufus
M. Lane, retired; Brigadier General Hugh Matthews; Brigadier
General Randolph C. Barkeley; Brigadier General Frederick L.
Bradman; Brigadier General Louis McCarty Little; Brigadier Gen-
eral Douglas C. McDougal; Brigadier General Richard T. Williams;
Colonel Richard M. Cutts; Colonel Presley M. Rixey, Junior; Colonel
Seth Williams; Colonel James J. Meade; Colonel Clayton S. Vogel;
Colonel Calvin B. Matthews; Lieutenant Colonel Lauren S. Willis,
retired; Lieutenant Colonel Jeter R. Horton; Lieutenant Colonel
Franklin B. Garrett; Lieutenant Colonel Calhoun Ancrum; Lieu-
tenant Colonel William 8. Wise; Lieutenant Colonel William B.
Smith; Lieutenant Colonel Charles F. M. Price; Lieutenant Colonel
Ross E. Rosell; Lieutenant Colonel John Marston; Lieutenant
Colonel Julian C. Smith; Lieutenant Colonel Roy E. Geiger; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Harry Schmidt; Lieutenant Colonel De Witt Peck;
Lieutenant Colonel William B. Sullivan; Lieutenant Colonel Henry
L. Larsen; Lieutenant Colonel Arnold W. Jacobsen; Major Thomas
S. Clarke; Major Joseph C. Fegan; Major Frederick R. Hoyt;
Major Marion B. Humphrey; Major Allen H. Turnage; Major
Louis M. Bourne; Major Matthew 8. Kingman; Major John F. 8.
Norris; Major Anderson C. Deering; Major Ralph J. Mitchell;
Major Samuel L. Howard; Major Oscar R. Cauldwell; Major
Thomas E. Watson; Major Walter C. Sheard; Major Roger W.
Peard; Major Lloyd L. Leach; Major Raphael Griffin; Major
Thomas P. Cheatham; Major Louis W. Whaley; Major Leroy P.
Hunt; Major Leo D. Merale; Major Lemuel C. Shepherd, Junior;
Major James E. Davis; Major Alphonse De Carre; Major James T.
Moore; Major Alfred N. Noble; Major Franklin A. Hart; Major
William N. Beat; Major Herbert Hardy; Major Ralph E. West;
Captain Graves B. Erskine; Captain Robert Yowell; Captain
Francis P. Mulcahy; Captain Maurice C. Holmes; Captain Eugene
F. C. Collier; Captain Otto Salzman; Captain Carl S. Schmidt;
Captain Harry W. Gamble; Captain Roscoe Arnett; Captain
Maurice S. Gregory; Captain James P. Smith; Captain Edward G.
Kuefe; Captain Max Cox; Captain Oliver P. Smith; Captain Joseph
O. Ward; Captain Edward L. Durvall, Junior; Captain John C.
Wood; Captain Jacob Lienhard; Captain Victor F. Bleasdale; Cap-
tain Leonard H. Rea; Captain James P. Schwerin; Captain John
H. Parker; Captain Walter S. Casper; Captain Willett Elmore;
Captain Benjamin W. Gally; Captain James A. Nixson, Captain
Frederick M. Howard; Captain Lee W. Brown; Captain Harold G.
Major; Captain Bernard Dubel; Captain Hamilton M. H. Fleming;
Captain Claude A. Phillips; Captain Harold W. Whitney; Captain
Harry Paul; Captain Frank N. Costtge; Captain Byron F. Johnson;
Captain William J. Livingston; Captain George E. Monson; Captain
Amor L. Sims; Captain George R. Rowen; Captain Brady L. Vogt;
Captain Clinton W. McLeod; Captain Roy C. Swick; Captain
Reuben B. Price; Captain William J. Whaling; Captain Frank N.
Gilman; Captain Monitor Watchman; Captain George L. Maynard;
Captain Benjamin W. Atkinson; Captain William L. Bales; Cap-
tain Frederick C. Diebush; Captain Terrell J. Crawford; Captain
John T. Walker; Captain William P. T. Hill; Captain Jesse A.
Nelson; Captain Henry A. Carr; Captain Wilham C. Hall;
1359
Navy—Continued.
Marine Corps.
1560 747m CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1986.
tpNtarine Corps—Con- Captain Edwin J. Farrell; Captain Louis E. Woods; Captain
Augustus H. Fricke; Captain William §S. Fellers; Captain Herbert
S. Keimling; Captain Walter W. Wensinger; Captain Ernest E.
Lincort; First Lieutenant William L. McKittrick; First Lieutenant
Max D. Smith; First Lieutenant David A. Stafford; First Lieu-
tenant Roy W. Conkey; First Lieutenant Harold N. Rosecrans ;
First Lieutenant Horace D. Palmer; First Lieutenant Hayne D.
Royden; First Lieutenant Christian’ F. Schilt; First Lieutenant
James H. Strother; First Lieutenant Ivan W. Miller: First Lieu-
tenant John C. McQueen; First Lieutenant William W. Davies;
First Lieutenant James W. Smith; First Lieutenant Lewis A. Hohn;
First Lieutenant Lucian C. Whitaker; ; First Lieutenant Ralph E.
Forsyth; First Lieutenant Pierson E. Conradt; First Lieutenant
Cregon A. Williams; First Lieutenant Evans F. Carlson; First
Lieutenant John W. Lakes; First Lieutenant George F. ” Good,
Junior; First Lieutenant William R. Hughes; First Lieutenant Max.
well H. Mizell; First Lieutenant Charles W. Kail; First Lieutenant
Lewis D. Fuller; First Lieutenant Joe N. Smith: First Lieutenant
Herbert F. Becker; First Lieutenant Alexander W. Kreiser; First
Lieutenant Edward J. Trumble; First Lieutenant James C. Brauer;
First Lieutenant Francis J. Cunningham; First Lieutenant Paul A.
Putnam; First Lieutenant John §. E. Young; First Lieutenant Wil-
‘ham D. ” Saunders; First Lieutenant Lofton R. Henderson; First
Lieutenant John N. Coffman; First Lieutenant Peter P. Schrider ;
First Lieutenant Robert L. Griffin; First Lieutenant James P.
Risely; First Lieutenant Samuel 8S. Jack; First Lieutenant Frank
M. June; First Lieutenant Miles S. Newton; First Lieutenant Iva
L. Kimes; First Lieutenant Reginald H. Ridgely ; First Lieutenant
Nols H. Nelson ; First Lieutenant Frank C. Dailey; First Lieutenant
Frank H. Wirsig; Second Lieutenant Robert L. Peterson; Second
Lieutenant Kenneth H. Weir; Second Lieutenant Arthur F. Binney;
Second Lieutenant Clovis C. Coffman; Second Lieutenant Perry O.
Parmelee; Second Lieutenant Lester S. Hamel; Second Lieutenant
Ernest E. Pollock; Second Lieutenant Frank C. Croft; Second Lieu-
tenant Newin O. Hammond; Second Lieutenant Frank H. Schwable;
Second Lieutenant Joseph H. Berry; Second Lieutenant James P.
Berkeley; Second Lieutenant Peter A. McDonald; Second Lieu-
tenant Michael M. Mahoney; Second Lieutenant Fred D. Beans;
Second Lieutenant Edgar O. Price; Second Lieutenant Lebulon C.
Hopkins; Second Lieutenant William A. Willis; Second Lieutenant
John M. Davis; Chief Marine Gunner John F. Evans; Chief Marine
Gunner Otho Wiggs; Chief Marine Gunner Jesse W. Stamper ;
Chief Marine Gunner Frank F. Putcarmer; Chief Marine Gunner
Frank O. Lundt; Chief Marine Gunner Michael Wederezyk; Chief
Marine Gunner Harold Ogden; Chief Quartermaster Clerk August
F. Schonefeld; Chief Quartermaster Clerk William A. Warrell,
retired; Chief Quartermaster Clerk Albert O. Woodrow; Chief
Quartermaster Clerk Elmer W. Darde; Chief Pay Clerk Benjamin
H. Wolever; Chief Pay Clerk Clinton A. Phillips) Chief Pay Clerk
Timothy E. Murphy; Marine Gunner Kennard F. Bubier; Marine
Gunner Albert S. Nunach; Marine Gunner Harry R. Baley; Marine
Gunner Thomas Whitezel, Marine Gunner Walter N. Hendersen;
Marine Gunner Robert S. McCook; Sergeant Major James M.
Barmead; Sergeant Major Carl Svenson; Sergeant Major Charles
A. White; Quartermaster Sergeant Frederick J. Widman; Quarter-
master Sergeant Rupert F. Stone; Master Technical Sergeant Mil-
lard T. Shepard; Paymaster Sergeant Fred Parquette; First Ser-
geant Edwin C. Clarke; First Sergeant Cecil N. Bietz; First Ser-
geant Charles H. Gray; First Sergeant William O’Grady; First
(47H CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
Sergeant Alfred Sylvester; First Sergeant Harry Watkins; First
Sergeant Nicholas M. Griece; First Sergeant Frederick Dalton:
First Sergeant Louis N. Bertol; First Sergeant Russell O. Beard;
First Sergeant Otto Poland; First Sergeant Richard Shaker; First
Sergeant Charles E. Stuart; First Sergeant Frank Verdier; First
Sergeant Curtis O. Whitney; Gunnery Sergeant Joseph A. Saunders;
Gunnery Sergeant Bernard J. Durr; Gunnery Sergeant John J.
Rogers; Sergeant Olin L. Beall; Sergeant George Washington;
Sergeant Joseph L. Bonville; Sergeant Joseph Konepka; Sergeant
Charles L. McIndoc; Sergeant Frank J. Murphy; Sergeant Douglas
S. Catchis; Sergeant Daniel J. Donahoe; Sergeant Charles Sorenson;
Private John David.
United States Navy: Admiral William B. Caperton, retired; Rear
Admiral Charles 8. Freeman; Captain William D. Puleston; Captain
Walter S. Anderson; Captain Stephen B. McKinney; Captain Wil-
liam O. Spears; Captain Augustin T. Beauregard; Commander Leo
H. Thebaud; Commander Clarence Gulbranson; Captain Charles
St. J. Butler, Medical Corps; Captain William S. Bainbridge, Medi-
cal Corps, Naval Reserve, retired; Commander Morton D. Willcutts,
Medical Corps; Commander William Henry P. Blandy ; Commander
Edwin C. Ebert, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Roscoe H.
Hillenkoetter ; Lieutenant Commander Joel J. White, Medical Corps;
Lieutenant Albert L. King, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant (Junior
Grade) Walter C. Ford; Captain Herbert S. Howard, Construction
Corps; Lieutenant Commander Leslie C. Stevens; Lieutenant Com-
mander William K. Vanderbilt, United States Naval Reserve.
United States Marine Corps: Colonel Robert L. Denig; Colonel
Henry L. Roosevelt, Marine Corps Reserve, deceased; Colonel Wil-
liam C. Harllee, retired; Colonel Julius S. Turrill, retired; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Harry L. Smith; Lieutenant Colonel William M.
Small, retired; Major Andrew E. Creesy; Major Donald J. Kendall;
Major Chester L. Fordney, Marine Corps Reserve; Captain Louis
Cukela; First Sergeant George Nelson.
That the following-named officers and enlisted men of the United
States Army are hereby authorized to accept such medals, orders,
diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have been tendered them
by foreign governments in appreciation of services rendered :
General Douglas MacArthur; Major General Dennis E. Nolan;
Major General Malin Craig; Major General Paul B. Malone; Major
General Frank Parker; Major General Frank R. McCoy; Major
General Albert J. Bowley; Major General Benjamin D. Foulois;
Brigadier General Frank C. Bolles; Brigadier General Casper H.
Conrad, Junior; Brigadier General Andrew Moses; Brigadier Gen-
eral Thomas W. Darrah; Brigadier General Francis LeJ. Parker;
Brigadier General Guy V. Henry; Brigadier General John W.
Gulick; Brigadier General Robert C. Foy; Colonel Joseph A. Baer;
Colonel Charles Burnett; Colonel W. Goff Caples; Colonel Edward
Davis; Colonel Charles W. Exton; Colonel James Malcolm Graham;
Colonel W. Lee Hart; Colonel Jacob C. Johnson; Colonel Roy C.
Kirtland; Colonel Osmun Latrobe; Colonel E. R. Warner McCabe;
Colonel Charles H. Patterson; Colonel Russell P. Reeder; Colonel
Francis A. Ruggles; Colonel Frederick W. Van Duyne; Colonel
Richard H. Williams; Lieutenant Colonel Frank M. Andrews; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Lester D. Baker; Lieutenant Colonel Reginald B.
Cocroft; Lieutenant Colonel John F. Curry; Lieutenant Colonel
Ernest J. Dawley; Lieutenant Colonel Robert H. Fletcher, Junior;
Lieutenant Colonel William W. Hicks; Lieutenant Colonel Donald
C. McDonald; Lieutenant Colonel Frederick W. Manley; Lieutenant
1561
_ Marine Corps—Con-
tinued.
Navy.
Marine Corps.
Army.
1362
Army—Continued.
May 19, 1936.
[H. R. 12162.]
[Public, No. 604.]
United States courts.
ol? 36) py W116; 1Us
S. C., p. 1247.
Mississippi judicial
districts.
Northern district.
Eastern division.
Western division.
Delta division.
Terms of court.
Eastern division.
74ru CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 427, 428. MAY 19, 1936.
Colonel Maxwell Murray; Lieutenant Colonel Henry C. Pratt; Lieu-
tenant Colonel John W. N. Schulz; Lieutenant Colonel Martin C.
Shallenberger; Lieutenant Colonel Daniel I. Sultan; Lieutenant
Colonel Edwin M. Watson; Lieutenant Colonel Barton K. Yount;
Major George E. Arneman; Major Rosenham Beam; Major Enrique
M. Benitez; Major Peter C. Bullard; Major Henry B. Cheadle;
Major Joseph O. Daly; Major Herbert A. Dargue; Major James A.
Dorst; Major Asa N. Duncan; Major Charles R. Finley; Major
Abraham Garfinckel; Major James A. Gillespie; Major Paul R.
Hawley; Major Charles B. Hazeltine; Major Edgar Erskine Hume;
Major George E. Lovell, Junior; Major Davenport Johnson; Major
Raymond E. McQuillin; Major Joseph J. O'Hare; Major James B.
Ord; Major Alvan C. Sandeford; Major Martin F. Scanlon; Major
James C. R. Schwenck; Chaplain (Major) Aristeo V. Simoni; Major
Julia C. Stimson; Major Robert H. Van Volkenburgh; Major Robert
LeG. Walsh; Major Charles A. Willoughby; Major Walter F. Win-
ton; Captain John R. D. Cleland; Captain Carl W. Connell; Captain
Virgil N. Cordero; Captain Robert E. Cummings; Captain Thomas
J. Davis; Captain Vernon C. DeVotie; Captain Fernand G. Dumont;
Captain Ira C. Eaker; Captain Richard E. Elvins; Captain Muir
S. Fairchild; Captain James M. Gillespie; Captain Leslie R. Groves,
Junior; Captain Albert F. Hegenberger; Captain Eugene J. Heller;
Captain Jack C. Hodgson; Captain Arthur B. McDaniel; Captain
William J. McKiernan, Junior; Captain Eugene A. Regnier; Cap-
tain Charles McK. Robinson ; Captain Timothy Sapia-Bosch ; Captain
Kinsley W. Slauson; Captain Bernard 8. Thompson; Captain Leon-
ard D. Weddington; Captain Ennis C. Whitehead; Captain Royden
Williamson; Captain Ralph H. Wooten; First Lieutenant Joseph
M. Glasgow; First Lieutenant John L. Hines, Junior; First Lieu-
tenant Kenneth C. Nichols; First Lieutenant Benjamin B. Talley;
First Lieutenant Hugh B. Waddell; Staff Sergeant Edward F.
Springer; Sergeant Leshe B. Hopkins.
Approved, May 19, 1936.
[CHAPTER 428.]
AN ACT
To create an additional division of the United States District Court for the
Southern District of Mississippi to be known as the Hattiesburg division.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 90
of the Judicial Code, as amended (U.S. C., 1934 edition, title 28,
sec. 170), is amended to read as follows:
“Src. 90. The State of Mississippi is divided into two judicial
districts to be known as the northern and southern districts of
Mississippi. The northern district shall include the territory em-
braced on the 1st day of December 1923 in the counties of Alcorn,
Attala, Chickasaw, Choctaw, Clay, Itawamba, Lee, Lowndes, Monroe,
Oktibbeha, Pontotoc, Prentiss, Tishomingo, and Winston, which shall
constitute the eastern division of said district; also the territory
embraced on the date last mentioned in the counties of Benton,
Calhoun, Carroll, De Soto, Grenada, Lafayette, Marshall, Mont-
gomery, Panola, Tate, Tippah, Union, Webster, and Yalabusha,
which shall constitute the western division of said district; also
the territory embraced on the date last mentioned in the counties
of Bolivar, Coahoma, Leflore, Quitman, Sunflower, Tallahatchie,
and Tunica, which shall constitute the Delta division of said district.
The terms of the district court for the eastern division shall be held
at Aberdeen on the first Mondays in April and October; for the
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 428, 432. MAY 19, 20, 1936.
western division, at Oxford on the third Monday in April and the
first Monday in December; and for the Delta division, at Clarksdale
on the fourth Monday in January and the third Monday in October.
The southern district shall include the territory embraced on the 1st
day of December 1923 in the counties of Amite, Copiah, Franklin,
Hinds, Holmes, Leake, Lincoln, Madison, Pike, Rankin, Simpson,
Smith, Scott, Wilkinson, and Yazoo, which shall constitute the
Jackson division; also the territory embraced on the date last men-
tioned in the counties of Adams, Claiborne, Humphreys, Issaquena,
Jefferson, Sharkey, Warren, and Washington, which shall constitute
the western division; also the territory embraced on the date last
mentioned in the counties of Clarke, Jasper, Kemper, Lauderdale,
Neshoba, Newton, Noxubee, and Wayne, which shall constitute the
eastern division; also the territory embraced on the date last men-
tioned in the counties of George, Hancock, Harrison, Jackson, Pearl
River, and Stone, which shall constitute the southern division of said
district; also the territory embraced on the date last mentioned in
the counties of Covington, Forrest, Greene, Jefferson Davis, Jones,
Lamar, Lawrence, Marion, Perry, and Walthall, which shall con-
stitute the Hattiesburg division. Terms of the district court for the
Jackson division shall be held at Jackson on the first Mondays
in May and November; for the western division, at Vicksburg on
the third Mondays in May and November; for the eastern division,
at Meridian on the third Mondays in March and September; for
the southern division, at Biloxi on the third Monday in February
and the first Monday in June; and for the Hattiesburg division, at
Hattiesburg on the second Mondays in April and October. The
clerk of the court for each district shall maintain an office in charge
of himself or a deputy at each place in his district at which court
is now required to be held, at which he shall not himself reside,
which shall be kept open at all times for the transaction of the
business of the court. The marshal for each of said districts shall
maintain an office in charge of himself or a deputy at each place of
holding court in his district.”
Approved, May 19, 1936.
[CHAPTER 432.]
AN ACT
To provide for rural electrification, and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby created and established an agency of the United States to
be known as the “Rural Electrification Administration”, all of the
powers of which shall be exercised by an Administrator, who shall be
appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of
the Senate, for a term of ten years, and who shall receive a salary
of $10,000 per year. This Act may be cited as the “Rural Electrifi-
cation Act of 1936”.
Src. 2. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to make
loans in the several States and Territories of the United States for
rural electrification and the furnishing of electric energy to persons
in rural areas who are not receiving central station service, as here-
inafter provided; to make, or cause to be made, studies, investiga-
tions, and reports concerning the condition and progress of the elec-
trification of rural areas in the several States and Territories; and
to publish and disseminate information with respect thereto.
43115°—36——_18
1363
Western division.
Delta division.
Southern district.
Jackson division.
Western division.
Eastern division.
Southern division.
Hattiesburg division.
Terms of court.
Jackson division.
Western division.
Eastern division.
Southern division.
Hattiesburg division.
Clerks and marshals;
offices.
May 20, 1936.
[S. 3483.]
{Publie, No. 605.)
Rural Electrification
Act of 1936.
Rural Electrification
Administration creat-
ed.
Administrator; pow-
ers, appointment, etc.
Citation of title.
Loans in States and
Territories authorized.
Studies and reports
concerning rural areas;
publication, ete.
1564
Reconstruction
nance Corporation.
Loans to Administra-
tor by, authorized.
Maximum, 1937.
Interest.
Fi-
Provisos.
Proportion to secu-
rity.
Amortization of ob-
ligations.
Maturity provisions.
Assignment of obli-
gations to Reconstruc-
tion Finance Corpora-
tion.
Appropriations
thorized.
au-
Allotments of por-
tion of annual sums for
loans; basis of.
Unallotted portion;
basis of loans.
Post, p. 1365.
Proviso.
Limitation.
Availability of unex-
pended balances dur-
ing ensuing year.
Provisos.
Limitation.
Loans to Adminis-
trator to cease June 30,
1937
_ Payments covered
in; exception.
74rH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 432. MAY 20, 1936.
Sec. 3. (a) The Reconstruction Finance Corporation is hereby
authorized and directed to make loans to the Administrator, upon his
request approved by the President, not exceeding in aggregate
amount $50,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1937, with
interest at 3 per centum per annum upon the security of the obliga-
tions of borrowers from the Administrator appointed pursuant to
the provisions of this Act or from the Administrator of the Rural
Electrification Administration established by Executive Order Num-
bered 7037: Provided, That no such loan shall be in an amount
exceeding 85 per centum of the principal amount outstanding of
the obligations constituting the security therefor: And provided
further, That such obligations incurred for the purpose of financing
the construction and operation of generating plants, electric transmis-
sion and distribution lines, or systems shall be fully amortized over
a period not to exceed twenty-five years, and that the maturity of
such obligations incurred for the purpose of financing the wiring of
premises and the acquisition and installation of electrical and plumb-
ing appliances and equipment shall not exceed two-thirds of the
assured life thereof and not more than five years. The Administrator
is hereby authorized to make all such endorsements, to execute all
such instruments, and to do all such acts and things as shall be
necessary to effect the valid transfer and assignment to the Recon-
struction Finance Corporation of all such obligations.
(b) There is hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any
money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, for the fiscal year
ending June 30, 1938, and for each of the eight years thereafter,
the sum of $40,000,000 for the purposes of this Act as hereinafter
provided.
(c) Fifty per centum of the annual sums herein made available or
appropriated for the purposes of this Act shall be allotted yearly by
the Administrator for loans in the several States in the proportion
which the number of their farms not then receiving central station
electric service bears to the total number of farms of the United
States not then receiving such service. The Administrator shall,
within ninety days after the beginning of each fiscal year, determine
for each State and for the United States the number of farms not
then receiving such service.
(d) The remaining 50 per centum of such annual sums shall be
available for loans in the several States and in the Territories, with-
out allotment as hereinabove provided, in such amounts for each
State and Territory as, in the opinion of the Administrator, may be
effectively employed for the purposes of this Act, and to carry out
the provisions of section 7: Provided, however, That not more than
10 per centum of said unallotted annual sums may be employed in
any one State, or in all of the Territories.
(e) If any part of the annual sums made available for the purposes
of this Act shall not be loaned or obligated during the fiscal year for
which such sums are made available, such unexpended or unobligated
sums shall be available for loans by the Administrator in the follow-
ing year or years without allotment: Provided, however, That not
more than 10 per centum of said sums may be employed in any one
State or in all of the Territories: And provided further, That no
loans shall be made by the Reconstruction Finance Corporation to
the Administrator after June 30, 1987.
(f) All moneys representing payments of principal and interest
on loans made by the Administrator under this Act shall be covered
into the Treasury as miscellaneous receipts, except that any such
moneys representing payments of principal and interest on obliga-
tions constituting the security for loans made by the Reconstruction
74mm CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 432. MAY 20, 1936.
Finance Corporation to the Administrator shall be paid to the
Reconstruction Finance Corporation in payment of such loans.
Sec, 4. The Administrator is authorized and empowered, from the
sums hereinbefore authorized, to make loans to persons, corporations,
States, Territories, and subdivisions and agencies thereof, municipali-
ties, peoples utility districts and cooperative nonprofit, or limited-
dividend associations organized under the laws of any State or Ter-
ritory of the United States, for the purpose of financing the con-
struction and operation of generating plants, electric transmission
and distribution lines or systems for the furnishing of electric energy
to persons in rural areas who are not receiving central station serv-
ice: Provided, however, That the Administrator, in making such
loans, shall give preference to States, Territories, and subdivisions
and agencies thereof, municipalities, peoples utility districts, and
cooperative, nonprofit, or limited dividend associations, the projects
of which comply with the requirements of this Act. Such loans
shall be on such terms and conditions relating to the expenditure of
the moneys loaned and the security therefor as the Administrator
shall determine and may be made payable in whole or in part out
of income: Provided, however, That all such loans shall be self-
liquidating within a period of not to exceed twenty-five years, and
shall bear interest at a rate equal to the average rate of interest pay-
able by the United States of America on its obligations, having a
maturity of ten or more years after the dates thereof, issued during
the last preceding fiscal year in which any such obligations were
issued: Provided further, That no loan for the construction, operation,
or enlargement of any generating plant shall be made unless the
consent of the State authority having jurisdiction in the premises is
first obtained. Loans under this section and section 5 shall not be
made unless the Administrator finds and certifies that in his judg-
ment the security therefor is reasonably adequate and such loan will
be repaid within the time agreed.
Src. 5. The Administrator is authorized and empowered, from the
sums hereinbefore authorized, to make loans for the purpose of finan-
cing the wiring of the premises of persons in rural areas and the
acquisition and installation of electrical and plumbing appliances
and equipment. Such loans may be made to any of the borrowers
of funds loaned under the provisions of section 4, or to any person,
firm, or corporation supplying or installing the said wiring, appli-
ances, or equipment. Such loans shall be for such terms, subject
to such conditions, and so secured as reasonably to assure repayment
thereof, and shall be at a rate of interest equal to the average rate of
interest payable by the United States of America on its obligations,
having a maturity of ten or more years after the dates thereof, issued
during the last preceding fiscal year in which any such obligations
were issued.
Src. 6. For the purpose of administering this Act and for the
purpose of making the studies, investigations, publications, and
reports herein provided for, there is hereby authorized to be appro-
priated, out of any money in the Treasury not otherwise appro-
priated, such sums as shall be necessary. :
Src. 7. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to bid for
and purchase at any foreclosure or other sale, or otherwise to acquire,
property pledged or mortgaged to secure any loan made pursuant to
this Act; to pay the purchase price and any costs and expenses
incurred in connection therewith from the sums authorized in section
3 of this Act; to accept title to any property so purchased or acquired
in the name of the United States of America; to operate or lease
such property for such period as may be deemed necessary or
1365
Loans for financing
generating plants, dis-
tribution lines, ete.
Provisos.
Preferential loans.
Loans to be self-
liquidating.
Interest.
Consent of State au-
thority.
Security; repayment.
Wiring premises, in-
stalling appliances, etc.
Loans for; terms, se-
curity, etc.
Interest.
Appropriations
authorized for adminis-
trative, etc., expenses.
Post, p. 1604.
Acquisition of mort-
gaged, etc., property
by Administrator, au-
thorized,
Operation, etc, of
acquired property,
1366
Sale.
Disposal of encum-
bered property, etc.,
by borrower.
Prior loans and con-
tracts; administration
may be vested in Ad-
ministrator.
Transfer of records,
property, and person-
nel.
Nonpartisan admin-
istration of Act.
Merit system of ap-
pointments, ete.
Removal of officials,
etc., for violation.
Annual to
Congress.
reports
Utilization of volun-
tary, etc., services.
Attorneys, engineers,
and experts; appoint-
ment, compensation,
etc.
E Expenditures author-
ized.
Ante, p. 1365.
Time extension on
payments, authorized.
Provisos.
_Loans on plants,
lines, ete.
74ta CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 482. MAY 20, 1936.
advisable to protect the investment therein, but not to exceed five
years after the acquisition thereof; and to sell such property so
purchased or acquired, upon such terms and for such consideration
as the Administrator shall determine to be reasonable.
No borrower of funds under section 4 shall, without the approval
of the Administrator, sell or dispose of its property, rights, or
franchises, acquired under the provisions of this Act, until any loan
obtained from the Rural Electrification Administration, including
all interest and charges, shall have been repaid.
Sec. 8. The administration of loans and contracts entered into by
the Rural Electrification Administration established by Executive
Order Numbered 7037, dated May 11, 1935, may be vested by the
President in the Administrator authorized to be appointed by this
Act; and in such event the provisions of this Act shall apply to said
loans and contracts to the extent that said provisions are not incon-
sistent therewith. The President may transfer to the Rural Elec-
trification Administration created by this Act the jurisdiction and
control of the records, property (including office equipment), and
personnel used or employed in the exercise and performance of the
functions of the Rural Electrification Administration established
by such Executive order.
Sec. 9. This Act shall be administered entirely on a nonpartisan
basis, and in the appointment of officials, the selection of employees,
and in the promotion of any such officials or employees, no political
test or qualification shall be permitted or given consideration, but
all such appointments and promotions shall be given and made on
the basis of merit and efficiency. If the Administrator herein pro-
vided for is found by the President of the United States to be guilty
of a violation of this section, he shall be removed from office by the
President, and any appointee or selection of officials or employees
made by the Administrator who is found guilty of a violation of this
Act shall be removed by the Administrator.
Sec. 10. The Administrator shall present annually to the Congress
not later than the 20th day of January in each year a full report of
his activities under this Act.
Src. 11. In order to carry out the provisions of this Act the
Administrator may accept and utilize such voluntary and uncom-
pensated services of Federal, State, and local officers and employees
as are available, and he may without regard to the provisions of civil-
service laws applicable to officers and employees of the United States
appoint and fix the compensation of attorneys, engineers, and experts,
and he may, subject to the civil-service laws, appoint such other
officers and employees as he may find necessary and prescribe their
duties. The Administrator is authorized, from sums appropriated
pursuant to section 6, to make such expenditures (including expendi-
tures for personal services; supplies and equipment; lawbooks and
books of reference; directories and periodicals; travel expenses;
rental at the seat of government and elsewhere; the purchase, opera-
tion, or maintenance of passenger-carrying vehicles; and printing
and binding) as are appropriate and necessary to carry out the
provisions of this Act.
Sec. 12. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to extend
the time of payment of interest or principal of any loans made by the
Administrator pursuant to this Act: Provided, however, That with
respect to any loan made under section 4, the payment of interest or
principal shall not be extended more than five years after such pay-
ment shall have become due, and with respect to any loan made
under section 5, the payment of principal or interest shall not be
extended more than two years after such payment shall have become
74tma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 432-434. MAY 20, 1936.
due: And provided further, That the provisions of this section shall
not apply to any obligations or the security therefor which may be
held by the Reconstruction Finance Corporation under the provisions
of section 3.
Src. 13. As used in this Act the term “rural area” shall be deemed
to mean any area of the United States not included within the
boundaries of any city, village, or borough having a population in
excess of fifteen hundred inhabitants, and such term shall be deemed
to include both the farm and nonfarm population thereof; the term
“farm” shall be deemed to mean a farm as defined in the publications
of the Bureau of the Census; the term “person” shall be deemed to
mean any natural person, firm, corporation, or association; the term
“Territory” shall be deemed to include any insular possession of the
United States.
Sec. 14. If any provision of this Act, or the application thereof to
any person or circumstances, is held invalid, the remainder of the
Act and the application of such provision to other persons or circum-
stances shall not be affected thereby.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
(CHAPTER 433.]
AN ACT
To amend article 3 of the “Rules Concerning Lights, and so forth’’, contained
in the Act entitled ‘‘An Act to adopt regulations for preventing collisions upon
certain harbors, rivers, and inland waters of the United States’, approved
June 7, 1897.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the first sen-
tence of article 3 of the “Rules Concerning Lights, and so forth”,
contained in the Act entitled “An Act to adopt regulations for pre-
venting collisions upon certain harbors, rivers, and inland waters of
the United States”, approved June 7, 1897, is amended to read as
follows:
“Arr. 3. A steam vessel when towing another vessel or vessels
alongside shall, in addition to her side lights, carry two bright white
lights in a vertical line, one over the other, not less than three feet
apart, and when towing one or more vessels astern, regardless of the
length of the tow, shall carry an additional bright white light three
feet above or below such lights: Provided, That on the Red River of
the North and the rivers emptying into the Gulf of Mexico and their
tributaries, this article shall not affect the signal lights used on towing
vessels which propel the tow by pushing at the rear of the tow.”
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 434.]
AN ACT
To amend section 4321, Revised Statutes (U. S. C., title 46, see. 263), and for
other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 4321,
Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sec. 263), be,
and is hereby, amended to read as follows:
“The form of a license for carrying on the coasting trade or fish-
eries shall be as follows:
“License for carrying on the (here insert ‘coasting trade’, ‘whale
fishery’, ‘mackerel fishery’, or ‘cod fishery’, as the case may be).
1567
Loans excluded.
Ante, p. 1364.
Definitions.
“Rural area.””
“Farm.”
“Person.”’
“Territory.”
Separability provi-
sion.
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 10308.]
[Public, No. 606.]
Navigation.
“Rules Concerning
Lights, ete.’’
Vol. 30, p. 97.
U.S.C., p. 1455.
Lights of steam ves-
sel towing another ves-
sel alongside.
When towing astern.
Proviso.
Exceptions.
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 11036.]
[Public, No. 607.]
Vessels in domestic
commerce.
R. S., sec. 4321, p. 835.
U.S. C., p. 2005.
License for coasting
trade or fisheries.
Form prescribed.
1568
Provisos.
Licensing for the
“coasting trade and
mackerel fishery.”
Touching at foreign
ports.
R. S., sees. 4364, 4365,
p. 844; U.S. C., p. 2010.
Enrolled and licensed
vessels, Great Lakes
and connecting waters.
R. S., sec. 4318; U.S.
C., p. 2004.
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 11302.]
[Public, No. 608.]
United Confederate
Veterans, Reunion
Committee.
Loan of Army equip-
ment for encampment
at Shreveport, La., au-
thorized.
74ru CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 434, 435. MAY 20, 1936.
“In pursuance of title L (Revised Statutes 4311-4390), ‘Regula-
tion of Vessels in Domestic Commerce’, of the Revised Statutes of
the United States (inserting here the name of the husband or man-
aging owner, with his occupation and place of abode, and the name
of the master, with the place of his abode), having sworn that the
(insert here the description of the vessel, whether ship, brigantine,
snow, schooner, sloop, or whatever else she may be), called the (insert
here the vessel’s name), whereof the said (naming the master) is
master, burden (insert here the number of tons, in words) tons, as
appears by her enrollment, dated at (naming the district, day, month,
and year, in words at length, but if she be less than twenty tons,
insert, instead thereof, ‘proof being had of her admeasurement’),
shall not be employed in any trade, while this license shall continue
in force, whereby the revenue of the United States shall be defrauded,
and having also sworn (or aflirmed) that this license shall not be
used for any other vessel, or for any other employment, than is
herein specified, license is hereby granted for the said (inserting here
the description of the vessel) called the (inserting here the vessel’s
name), to be employed in carrying on the (inserting here ‘coasting
trade’, ‘whale fishery’, ‘mackerel fishery’, or ‘cod fishery’, as the case
may be), for one year from the date hereof, and no longer. Given
under my hand and seal, at (naming the said district), this (insert-
ing the particular day) day of (naming the month), in the year
(specifying the number of the year in words at length) ;”: Provided,
That vessels of five net tons and over entitled under the laws of the
United States to be enrolled and licensed or licensed for the coasting
trade may be licensed for the “coasting trade and mackerel fishery”,
and shall be deemed to have sufficient license for engaging in the
coasting trade and the taking of fish of every description, including
shellfish: Provided further, That the provisions of sections 4364 and
4365, Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sees.
310 and 311), shall be, and are hereby, made applicable to vessels so
licensed: And provided further, That vessels operating on the Great
Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters under enrollment
and license issued in conformity with the provisions of section 4318,
Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sec. 258),
shall be deemed to have sufficient license for engaging in the taking
of fish of every description within such waters without change in the
form of enrollment and license prescribed under the authority of
that section.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 485.]
AN ACT
To authorize the Secretary of War to lend to the Reunion Committee of the
United Confederate Veterans three thousand blankets, olive drab, numbered
4, one thousand five hundred canvas cots, to be used at their annual encamp-
ment to be held at Shreveport, Louisiana, in June 1936.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of War be, and he is hereby, authorized to lend, at his discretion
to the Reunion Committee of the United Confederate Veterans,
for use at the United Confederate Veterans’ Encampment, to
be held at Shreveport, Louisiana, June 9, 10, 11, and 12, 1936, two
hospital ward tents, with all pegs, poles, and equipment necessary
for their erection; one storage tent complete with all equipment; one
large wall tent complete with all equipment; six small wall tents
74rH CONGRESS. SESS.II. CHS. 435,440,444. MAY 20,21,22,1936. 1369
complete with all equipment; ten pyramidal tents complete with all
equipment; fifty 14-quart G. I. buckets; three thousand blankets,
olive drab, wool; one thousand five hundred canvas folding cots; one
thousand five hundred comforters; one thousand five hundred cotton-
felted pillows complete with cotton pillow cases; three thousand
cotton bedsheets: Provided, That no expense shall be caused the
United States Government by the delivery and return of said prop-
erty; the same to be delivered from the nearest quartermaster depot
at such time prior to the holding of said encampment as may be
agreed upon by the Secretary of War and the Confederate Reunion
Committee: Provided further, That the Secretary of War, before
delivery of such property, shall take from said Reunion Committee
of the United Confederate Veterans a good and sufficient bond for
the safe return of said property in good order and condition, and
the whole without expense to the United States.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 440.]
AN ACT
To convey certain lands to Clackamas County, Oregon, for public-park purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of the Interior is authorized and directed to issue a patent to Clack-
amas County, Oregon, on behalf of the United States, for the south
half southwest quarter and the west half northeast quarter southwest
quarter section 11, township 3 south, range 4 east, Willamette merid-
ian, in the State of Oregon, containing one hundred acres, more or
less, on condition that such county shall accept and use such lands
solely for public-park purposes; but if such county shall at any time
cease to use such lands for public-park purposes, or shall permit the
use of such lands for any other purpose, or shall alienate or attempt
to alienate them, they shall revert to the United States: Provided,
That there shall be reserved to the United States, its patentees, or
their transferees, the right to cut and remove therefrom the merchant-
able timber, reserving to Clackamas County, Oregon, when such sale
is made under the provisions of the Act of June 9, 1916 (39 Stat. 218),
a preference right to purchase the timber at the highest price bid.
Src. 2. The Secretary of the Interior shall prescribe all necessary
regulations to carry into effect the foregoing provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 21, 1936.
[CHAPTER 444.]
AN ACT
To supplement the Act of June 25, 1929 (ch. 41, 46 Stat. L. 41), which authorized
and directed the Attorney General to institute suit against the Northern
Pacific Railway Company and others.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in the suit
entitled United States of America, plaintiff, against Northern Pacific
Railway Company and others, defendants, numbered E4389, insti-
tuted and pending in the District Court of the United States for
the Eastern District of Washington, under the authority and direc-
tion of the Act of June 25, 1929 (ch. 41, 46 Stat. L. 41), now on
reference to a special master for hearing under an order of said
court entered in said suit on April 21, 1936, a direct review by the
Provisos.
No Federal expense.
Bond.
* May 21, 1936.
[H. R. 5058. }
[Public, No. 609.]
Clackamas County,
Oreg.
Conveyance of land
for public-park pur-
poses, authorized.
_Reversionary provi-
sion.
Proviso.
‘Timber reservation.
Vol. 39, p. 218.
Regulations to be
prescribed.
May 22, 1936.
(S. 4594.]
[Public, No. 610.]
Northern Pacific
Railway Companyand
others.
Review by appeal to
U. S. Supreme Court
of certain questions in
pending suit, author-
ized.
Vol. 46, p. 41.
1370
Time limitation.
Right of review of
final judgment not
fected.
May 22, 1936.
[H. R. 1398.]
af-
[Public, No. 611.]
Crescent City, Calif.
Establishment
of
Coast Guard station
at, authorized.
May 22, 1936.
(H. R. 8370.]
[Public, No. 612.]
Port Washington,
1S.
Establishment of
Coast Quard station
at, authorized.
May 22, 1936.
(H.R. 10321.]
{Publie, No. 613.]
Rio Grande, use of
waters, etc.
Correction in Act
lating to.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 661.
Te-
Ist
74m” CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 444447. MAY 22, 1936.
Supreme Court of the United States by appeal may be had by any
party to said suit of any order or decree of said district court entered
upon a review of the report of the master to be made pursuant to
said order of April 21, 1936, and also of the order or decree of said
district court entered in said suit on October 3, 1935, as amended by
an order of January 29, 1936. Such direct review by the Supreme
Court of either or both of the said orders or decrees may be had by
appeal taken within sixty days from the date of the order or decree
of the district court entered upon a review of the report of the
master to be made pursuant to the said order of April 21, 1936. The
right of review of any final judgment, authorized by said Act of
June 25, 1929, shall continue in force and effect.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 445.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of a Coast Guard station at or near Crescent
City, California.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized to establish a
Coast Guard station on the Pacific coast at or in the vicinity of
Crescent City, California, in such locality as the Commandant of
the Coast Guard may recommend.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 446.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of a Coast Guard station at Port Washington,
Wisconsin.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of
the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the
Secretary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized to estab-
lish a Coast Guard station on Lake Michigan at Port Washington,
Wisconsin, at such point as the Commandant of the Coast Guard
may recommend.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 447.]
AN ACT
To amend section 4 of Public Act Numbered 286, Seventy-fourth Congress,
approved August 19, 1935, as amended.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 4 of
Public Act Numbered 286, Seventy-fourth Congress, approved
August 19, 1935, is amended by striking out the words “section 3
hereof” and inserting in lieu thereof the words “section 2, para-
graph 2, and section 3 of this Act”.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
74tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 448, 449. MAY 22, 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 448.]
AN ACT
Authorizing the erection of a memorial to those who met their death in the
wreck of the dirigible Shenandoah.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed to
erect near Ava, Ohio, on the spot where the Shenandoah fell, a
suitable tablet or marker to commemorate the heroic services ren-
dered by Commander Landsdowne and other members of the crew
who died when the Navy dirigible Shenandoah was destroyed.
Sec. 2. There is hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any
money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, the sum of
$2,500 to carry out the provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 449.]
AN ACT
To authorize the Secretary of War to grant to the city of Buffalo, New York, the
right and privilege to occupy and use for sewage-disposal facilities part of the
lands forming the pier and dikes of the Black Rock Harbor improvement at
Buffalo, New York.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in addition
to the grant made by the Secretary of War to the city of Buffalo
pursuant to the Act of Congress entitled “An Act making appropri-
ations for the construction, repair, and preservation of certain public
works on rivers and harbors and for other purposes”, approved
February 27, 1911, for the purpose of establishing a public park and
landing facilities on that part of the structure known as Bird Island
Pier on Niagara River lying north of Albany Street extended, in
the city of Buffalo, New York, and forming a part of Black Rock
Harbor improvement and the lands of the United States under
water on both sides of said pier to the established harbor lines, sub-
ject to the terms, conditions, and stipulations in said grant specified,
the Secretary of War is authorized to grant to the city of Buffalo,
New York, also the right and privilege of occupying said lands and
lands under water, and also the lands owned by the United States
on the west side of Black Rock Canal, described as follows: Begin-
ning at a point where the northerly line of property formerly owned
by William H. Slade, or that line extended, intersects the United
States Government property line (formerly New York State Blue
Line) ; thence easterly parallel to the line forming the northeasterly
boundary of lands heretofore granted to the city of Buffalo by the
United States and known as Bird Island Pier until a point is reached
in direct prolongation of the easterly boundary line of said last
mentioned lands; thence southwesterly in direct line with said
easterly boundary of said lands to the northeasterly corner of said.
lands heretofore conveyed to the city of Buffalo by the United
States; thence westerly along the northeasterly boundary of said
Bird Island Pier lands to said United States Government property
line; thence northeasterly along said last mentioned line to the place
of beginning, or so much thereof as may be necessary, for use either
by the city of Buffalo or by the Buffalo Sewer Authority (created
by chapter 349 of the Laws of the State of New York of 1935) for
sewage-disposal facilities, on such terms, conditions, and stipulations
as he may deem expedient and equitable and necessary for the pro-
tection of all the interests of the United States in and to said
1371
May 22, 1936.
(H.R. 10544.]
[Public, No. 614.]
Dirigible ‘‘Shenan-
doah.”’
Erection of memorial
to dead in wreck of,
authorized.
Location.
Appropriation au-
thorized.
May 26, 1936.
[S. 4317.]
[Public, No. 615.]
Buffalo, N. Y.
Right to use certain
land for public pur-
poses, granted to.
Vol. 36, p. 935.
Description.
1372
Proviso. {
State sanction.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 8287.]
[Public, No. 616.]
Virgin Islands.
Establishment of
assessed valuation real
property tax.
Based on actual
value.
Uniform rate in each
municipality.
Provisional rate.
President to pre-
scribe regulations if no
municipal levy, etc.
Deposit of collections.
Virgin Islands Com-
any. oer
Payments by, in lieu
of taxes.
Other property
owned by the United
States.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 449, 450. MAY 26, 1936.
premises: Provided, however, That the city of Buffalo shall have
secured the sanction and consent of the State of New York through
its constituted agencies.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 450.]
AN ACT
To establish an assessed valuation real property tax in the Virgin Islands of the
United States.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That it is the policy
of Congress to equalize and more equitably to distribute existing
taxes on real property in the Virgin Islands of the United States and
to reduce the burden of taxation now imposed on land in productive
use in such islands.
Suc. 2. For the calendar year 1936 and for all succeeding years
all taxes on real property in the Virgin Islands shall be computed
on the basis of the actual value of such property and the rate in each
municipality of such islands shall be the same for all real property
subject to taxation in such municipality whether or not such prop-
erty is in cultivation and regardless of the use to which such
property is put.
Sec. 3. Until local tax laws conforming to the requirements of this
Act are in effect in a municipality the tax on real property in such
municipality for any such calendar year shall be at the rate of
1.25 per centum of the assessed value. If the legislative authority
of a municipality shall fail to enact laws for the levy, assessment,
collection, or enforcement of any tax imposed under authority of
this Act within three months after the date of its enactment, the
President shall then prescribe regulations for the levy, assessment,
collection, and enforcement of such tax, which shall be in effect
until the legislative authority of such municipality shall make
regulations for such purposes.
Sec. 4. All taxes so levied and collected shall be deposited in the
municipal treasury of the municipality in which such taxes are
collected.
Sec. 5. The Virgin Islands Company shall pay annually into the
municipal treasuries of the Virgin Islands in lieu of taxes an amount
equal to the amount of taxes which would be payable on the real
property in the Virgin Islands owned by the United States and in
the possession of the Virgin Islands Company, if such real property
were in private ownership and taxable, but the valuation placed upon
such property for taxation purposes by the local taxing authorities
shall be reduced to a reasonable amount by the Secretary of the
Interior if, after investigation, he finds that such valuation is
excessive and unreasonable. The Virgin Islands Company shall also
pay into the municipal treasuries of the Virgin Islands amounts
equal to the amounts of any taxes of general application which a
private corporation similarly situated would be required to pay into
the said treasuries. Similar payments shall be made with respect
to any property owned by the United States in the Virgin Islands
which is used for ordinary business or commercial purposes, and the
income derived from any property so used shall be available for
making such payments.
7471 CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 450, 451. MAY 26, 1936.
_ Sec. 6. Nothing in this Act shall be construed as altering, amend-
ing, or repealing the existing exemptions from taxation of property
used for educational, charitable, or religious purposes. Subject to
the provisions of this Act, the legislative authority of the respective
municipalities is hereby empowered to alter, amend, or repeal, sub-
ject to the approval of the Governor, any law now imposing taxes
on real and personal property.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 451.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of the Fort Frederica National Monument, at
Saint Simon Island, Georgia, and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That when title
to the site of Fort Frederica, on Saint Simon Island, Georgia, and
such other related sites located thereon, as may be designated by
the Secretary of the Interior, in the exercise of his discretion, as
necessary or desirable for national-monument purposes, shall have
been vested in the United States, said area not to exceed eighty acres
shall be, and is hereby, set apart as a national monument for the
benefit and inspiration of the people, and shall be called the “Fort
Frederica National Monument”.
Sec. 2. That the Secretary of the Interior be, and he is hereby,
authorized to accept donations of land, interests in land, buildings,
structures, and other property within the boundaries of the said
national monument as determined and fixed hereunder, and dona-
tions of funds for the purchase and maintenance thereof, the title
and evidence of title to lands acquired to be satisfactory to the Secre-
tary of the Interior: Provided, That he may acquire on behalf of
the United States out of any donated funds, either by purchase at
prices deemed by him reasonable, or by condemnation under the pro-
visions of the Act of August 1, 1888, such tracts of land within the
said national monument as may be necessary for the completion
thereof.
Src. 3. (a) The Secretary of the Interior is authorized, in his
discretion, to maintain in some suitable structure within the national
monument a museum for relics and records pertaining to Fort
Frederica, and for other articles of national and patriotic interest,
and in his discretion to accept, on behalf of the United States, for
installation in such museum, articles which may be offered as addi-
tions to the museum.
(b) Any State or political subdivision thereof, organization, or
individual may, with the approval of the Secretary of the Interior,
erect monuments or place tablets commemorating historic events or
persons connected with the history of the area, within the bound-
aries of the Fort Frederica National Monument.
Src. 4. The administration, protection, and development of the
aforesaid national monument shall be exercised under the direction
of the Secretary of the Interior by the National Park Service, sub-
ject to the provisions of the Act of August 25, 1916, entitled “An
‘Act to establish a National Park Service, and for other purposes”,
as amended.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
1575
Property used for
educational, religious,
etc., purposes.
Amendment or re-
peal of existing laws.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 8431.]
{Public, No. 617.]
Fort Frederica Na-
tional Monument, Saint
Simon Island, Ga.
Establishment of.
Acceptance of dona-
tions, ete.
Proviso.
Purchase of land from
donated funds.
Vol. 25, p. 357.
U.S. C., p. 1785.
Maintenance of mu-
seum.
Erection of monu-
ments or placing of tab-
lets.
Administration.
Vol. 39, p. 535; U. S.
C., p. 591.
1574
May 26, 1936.
({H. R. 8784.]
{Public, No. 618.]
Executive branch of
the Government.
Withholding of com-
pensation where pay-
ments have been made
illegally, authorized.
Proviso.
Existing laws not
affected.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 10267.]
[Public, No. 619.]
Railway Mail Sery-
ice.
Adjustment of com-
pensation.
Vol. 43, p. 1061.
U.S. G., p. 1751.
U.S. C., p. 85.
Appropriations made
available.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 10934.]
[Publie, No. 620.]
Salem, Mass.
Transfer of custom-
house to Department
of Interior, authorized.
74ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 452-454. MAY 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 452.]
AN ACT
To authorize withholding compensation due Government personnel.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That hereafter,
whenever upon the statement of the account of any disbursing officer
of the United States in the General Accounting Office credit shall
have been disallowed for any payment to any person in the executive
branch of the Government, otherwise entitled to compensation from
the United States or from any agency or instrumentality thereof,
such compensation of the payee may be withheld until full reim-
bursement has been accomplished under such regulations as may be
prescribed by the head of the department, branch, or independent
establishment (including corporations) under which such payee is
entitled to receive compensation: Provided, That nothing contained
in this Act shall be construed to repeal or in any way modify exist-
ing laws relating to the collection of the indebtedness of accountable
or disbursing officers.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 453.]
AN ACT
To provide for adjusting the compensation of division superintendents, assistant
division superintendents, assistant superintendents at large, assistant super-
intendent in charge of car construction, chief clerks, assistant chief clerks,
and clerks in charge of sections in offices of division superintendents in the
Railway Mail Service, to correspond to the rates established by the Classifi-
cation Act of 1923, as amended.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Post-
master General is authorized and directed to adjust the compensa-
tion of division superintendents, assistant division superintendents,
assistant superintendents at large, assistant superintendent in charge
of car construction, chief clerks, assistant chief clerks, and clerks
in charge of sections in offices of division superintendents, Railway
Mail Service, to correspond, so far as may be practicable, to the rates
established by the Classification Act of 1923, as amended, for posi-
tions in the departmental service in the District of Columbia. Any
appropriation now or hereafter available for the payment of the
compensation of employees in the Railway Mail Service shall be
available for payment of compensation in accordance with the rates
adjusted in accordance with the provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 454.]
AN ACT
To authorize the transfer of the customhouse at Salem, Massachusetts, from the
jurisdiction of the Treasury Department to the Department of the Interior.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed
to transfer to the control and jurisdiction of the Secretary of the
Interior the customhouse at Salem, Massachusetts, and such ad-
joining property, both real and personal, as may now be under the
jurisdiction of the Secretary of the Treasury.
(4tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 454,462. MAY 96, 27, 1936.
Sec. 2. That the Secretary of the Interior be, and he is hereby,
authorized to acquire the above property for the purpose of estab-
lishing same as an historic site or otherwise preserving the buildings
and grounds in connection therewith: Provided, That the Secretary
of the Treasury may retain suflicient space in the building for the
necessary operation of the Bureau of Customs.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 462.]
AN ACT
To provide for the continuation of trading in unlisted securities upon national
securities exchanges, for the registration of over-the-counter brokers and
dealers, for the filing of current information and periodic reports by issuers,
and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That subsection (f)
of section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is amended to
read as follows:
“(£) Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this section, any
national securities exchange, upon application to and approval of
such application by the Commission and subject to the terms and
conditions hereinafter set forth, (1) may continue unlisted trading
privileges to which a security had been admitted on such exchange
prior to March 1, 1934; or (2) may extend unlisted trading privileges
to any security duly listed and registered on any other national
securities exchange, but such unlisted trading privileges shall con-
tinue in effect only so long as such security shall remain listed and
registered on any other national securities exchange; or (3) may
extend unlisted trading privileges to any security in respect of which
there is available from a registration statement and periodic reports
or other data filed pursuant to rules or regulations prescribed by the
Commission under this title or the Securities Act of 1933, as amended,
information substantially equivalent to that available pursuant to
rules or regulations of the Commission in respect of a security duly
listed and registered on a national securities exchange, but such
unlisted trading privileges shall continue in effect only so long as
such a registration statement remains effective and such periodic
reports or other data continue to be so filed.
“No application pursuant to this subsection shall be approved
unless the Commission finds that the continuation or extension o
unlisted trading privileges pursuant to such application is neces-
sary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of
investors. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to
any security pursuant to clause (2) or (3) of this subsection shall
be approved except after appropriate notice and opportunity for
hearing. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to any
security pursuant to clause (2) or (3) of this subsection shall be
approved unless the applicant exchange shall establish to the satis-
faction of the Commission that there exists in the vicinity of such
exchange sufficiently widespread public distribution of such security
and sufficient public trading activity therein to render the extension
of unlisted trading privileges on such exchange thereto necessary
or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of
investors. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to
any security pursuant to clause (8) of this subsection shall be
approved except upon such terms and conditions as will subject the
issuer thereof, the officers and directors of such issuer, and every
beneficial owner of more than 10 per centum of such security to
1375
Preservation of,
an historic site.
as
Proviso.
Space for Customs
Bureau.
May 27, 1936.
[S. 4023.]
[Public, No. 621.]
Securities Exchange
Act of 1934, amend-
ments.
Vol. 48, p. 894; U. S.
C., p. 536.
Trading in unlisted
securities upon na-
tional exchanges.
Continuance of cer-
tain categories.
Security admitted
before March 1, 1934.
Listed and registered
on another exchange.
Equivalent registra-
tion statement avail-
able.
Conditional contin-
uance of privileges.
Notice and hearing.
Establishment to be
in public interest.
Obligations imposed.
1576
Exceptions.
Publication of trans-
actions or quotations;
differentiation between
listed and unlisted se-
curities.
Other than by ticker.
Suspension of privi-
leges when in public
interest, etc.
Termination of privi-
leges; notice and hear-
ing.
Withdrawal of secur-
ity by issuer; exception.
Inadequate distribu-
tion, trading activity,
ete.
Notice, hearing, ete.
74ru CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 97, 1936.
duties substantially equivalent to the duties which would arise pur-
suant to this title 1f such security were duly listed and registered on
a national securities exchange; except that such terms and conditions
need not be imposed in any case or class of cases in which it shall
appear to the Commission that the public interest and the protection
of investors would nevertheless best be served by such extension of
unlisted trading privileges. In the publication or making available
for publication by any national securities exchange, or by any person
directly or indirectly controlled by such exchange, of quotations or
transactions in securities made or effected upon such exchange, such
exchange or controlled person shall clearly differentiate between
quotations or transactions in listed securities, and quotations or
transactions in securities for which unlisted trading privileges on
such exchange have been continued or extended pursuant to this sub-
section. In the publication or making available for publication of
such quotations or transactions otherwise than by ticker, such
exchange or controlled person shall group under separate headings
(A) quotations or transactions in listed securities, and (B) quota-
tions or transactions in securities for which unlisted trading priv-
ileges on such exchange has been continued or extended pursuant to
this subsection.
“The Commission shall by rules and regulations suspend unlisted
trading privileges in whole or in part for any or all classes of
securities for a period not exceeding twelve months, if it deems such
suspension necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for
the protection of investors or to prevent evasion of the purposes
of this title.
“Unlisted trading privileges continued for any security pursuant
to clause (1) of this subsection shall be terminated by order, after
appropriate notice and opportunity for hearing, if it appears at
any time that such security has been withdrawn from listing on
any exchange by the issuer thereof, unless it shall be established to
the satisfaction of the Commission that such delisting was not
designed to evade the purposes of this title or unless it shall appear
to the Commission that, notwithstanding any such purpose of evasion,
the continuation of such unlisted trading privileges is nevertheless
necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection
of investors. On the application of the issuer of any security for
which unlisted trading privileges on any exchange have been con-
tinued or extended pursuant to this subsection, or of any broker or
dealer who makes or creates a market for such security, or of any
other person having a bona-fide interest in the question of termina-
tion or suspension of such unlisted trading privileges, or on its own
motion, the Commission shall by order terminate, or suspend for a
period not exceeding twelve months, such unlisted trading privileges
for such security if the Commission finds, after appropriate notice
and opportunity for hearing, that by reason of inadequate public
distribution of such security in the vicinity of said exchange, or by
reason of inadequate public trading activity or of the character
of trading therein on said exchange, such termination or suspension
is necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection
of investors.
“In any proceeding under this subsection in which appropriate
notice and opportunity for hearing are required, notice of not less
than ten days to the applicant in such proceeding, to the issuer of
the security involved, to the exchange which is seeking to continue
or extend or has continued or extended unlisted trading privileges for
such security, and to the exchange, if any, on which such security
is listed and registered, shall be deemed adequate notice, and any
broker or dealer who makes or creates a market for such security,
(4ta CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 27, 1936.
and any other person having a bona-fide interest in such proceeding,
shall upon application be entitled to be heard.
“Any security for which unlisted trading privileges are continued
or extended pursuant to this subsection shall be deemed to be reg-
istered on a national securities exchange within the meaning of this
title. The powers and duties of the Commission under subsection
(b) of section 19 of this title shall be applicable to the rules of an
exchange in respect of any such security. The Commission may, by
such rules and regulations as it deems necessary or appropriate in
the public interest or for the protection of investors, either uncondi-
tionally or upon specified terms and conditions, or for stated periods,
exempt such securities from the operation of any provision of section
13, 14, or 16 of this title.”
Sec. 2. Any application to continue unlisted trading privileges
for any security heretofore filed by any exchange and approved by
the Commission pursuant to clause (1) of subsection (f) of section
12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and rules and regulations
thereunder shall be deemed to have been filed and approved pursuant
to clause (1) of said subsection (f) as amended by section 1 of this
Act.
Sec. 3. Section 15 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is
amended to read as follows:
“Sec. 15. (a) No broker or dealer (other than one whose business
is exclusively intrastate) shall make use of the mails or of any means
or instrumentality of interstate commerce to effect any transaction in,
or to induce the purchase or sale of, any security (other than an
exempted security or commercial paper, bankers’ acceptances, or
commercial bills) otherwise than on a national securities exchange,
unless such broker or dealer is registered in’ accordance with sub-
section (b) of this section.
“(b) A broker or dealer may be registered for the purposes of
this section by filing with the Commission an application for regis-
tration, which shall contain such information in such detail as to
such broker or dealer and any person directly or indirectly con-
trolling or controlled by, or under direct or indirect common control
with, such broker or dealer, as the Commission may by rules and
regulations require as necessary or appropriate in the public interest
or for the protection of investors. Except as hereinafter provided,
such registration shall become effective thirty days after the receipt
of such application by the Commission or within such shorter period
of time as the Commission may determine.
“An application for registration of a broker or dealer to be formed
or organized may be made by a broker or dealer to which the broker
or dealer to be formed or organized is to be the successor. Such
application shall contain such information in such detail as to the
applicant and as to the successor and any person directly or indirectly
controlling or controlled by, or under direct or indirect common
control with, the applicant or the successor, as the Commission may
by rules and regulations require as necessary or appropriate in the
public interest or for the protection of investors. Except as herein-
after provided, such registration shall become effective thirty days
after the receipt of such application by the Commission or within
such shorter period of time as the Commission may determine. Such
registration shall terminate on the forty-fifth day after the effective
date thereof, unless prior thereto the successor shall, in accordance
with such rules and regulations as the Commission may prescribe,
adopt such application as its own.
“Tf any amendment to any application for registration pursuant
to this subsection is filed prior to the effective date thereof, such
amendment shall be deemed to have been filed simultaneously with
1377
Securities hereunder
deemed registered.
Commission’s powers
extended.
Vol. 48, p. 898.
U.S. C., p. 538.
ssc nein permit-
o
2!
Vol. 48, pp. 894, 895,
896.
Applications to con-
tinue trading privileges
for security heretofore
approved.
Vol, 48, p. 894.
Over-the-counter
markets.
Vol. 48, p. 895; U. S.
C., p. 536.
Use of the mails,
ete., by unregistered
brokers, etc.
Applications for rezis-
tration; contents.
Effective date.
Application by brok-
er or dealer to be
formed or organized;
contents, ete.
Effective date.
Adoption of applica-
tion by successor.
Amendments to ap-
plications.
1378
Postponement of ef-
fective date by Com-
mission.
Registration; denial
or revocation for speci-
fied causes.
Misleading, etc.,
statements in applica-
tion.
Previous conviction.
Subject to court in-
junction, etc.
Willful violations of
law, ete.
Postponement of ef-
fective date of registra-
tion.
Suspension of regis-
tration,
Withdrawal from reg-
istration by brokers,
etc.
Cancelation of regis-
tration or application
by Commission.
Use of mails, etc., to
induce purchase or sale
by fraudulent, etc., de-
vice.
Definition by Com-
Inission.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 97, 1936.
and as part of such application; except that the Commission may, if
it appears necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the
protection of investors, defer the effective date of any such registra-
tion as thus amended until the thirtieth day after the filing of such
amendment.
“The Commission shall, after appropriate notice and opportunity
for hearing, by order deny registration to or revoke the registration
of any broker or dealer if it finds that such denial or revocation is
in the public interest and that (1) such broker or dealer whether
prior or subsequent to becoming such, or (2) any partner, officer,
director, or branch manager of such broker or dealer (or any person
occupying a similar status or performing similar functions), or any
person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by such broker
or dealer, whether prior or subsequent to becoming such, (A) has
willfully made or caused to be made in any application for regis-
tration pursuant to this subsection or in any document supplemental
thereto or in any proceeding before the Commission with respect
to registration pursuant to this subsection any statement which was
at the time and in the light of the circumstances under which it was
made false or misleading with respect to any material fact; or (B)
has been convicted within ten years preceding the filing of any such
application or at any time thereafter of any felony or misdemeanor
involving the purchase or sale of any security or arising out of the
conduct of the business of a broker or dealer; or (C) is permanently
or temporarily enjoined by order, judgment, or decree of any court
of competent jurisdiction from engaging in or continuing any con-
duct or practice in connection with the purchase or sale of any
security; or (D) has willfully violated any provision of the Securities
Act of 1933, as amended, or of this title, or of any rule or regulation
thereunder. Pending final determination whether any such regis-
tration shall be denied, the Commission may by order postpone the
effective date of such registration for a period not to exceed fifteen
days, but if, after appropriate notice and opportunity for hearing, it
shall appear to the Commission to be necessary or appropriate in
the public interest or for the protection of investors to postpone the
effective date of such registration until final determination, the Com-
mission shall so order. Pending final determination whether any
such registration shall be revoked, the Commission shall by order
suspend such registration if, after appropriate notice and oppor-
tunity for hearing, such suspension shall appear to the Commission
to be necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the pro-
tection of investors. Any registered broker or dealer may, upon
such terms and conditions as the Commission may deem necessary
in the public interest or for the protection of investors, withdraw
from registration by filing a written notice of withdrawal with the
Commission. If the Commission finds that any registered broker or
dealer, or any broker or dealer for whom an application for regis-
tration is pending, is no longer in existence or has ceased to do
business as a broker or dealer, the Commission shall by order cancel
the registration or application of such broker or dealer.
“(c) No broker or dealer shall make use of the mails or of any
means or instrumentality of interstate commerce to effect any trans-
action in, or to induce the purchase or sale of, any security (other
than commercial paper, banker’s acceptances, or commercial bills)
otherwise than on a national securities exchange, by means of any
manipulative, deceptive, or other fraudulent device or contrivance.
The Commission shall, for the purposes of this subsection, by rules
and regulations define such devices or contrivances as are manipu-
lative, deceptive, or otherwise fraudulent.
(4ta CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
Of the sums herein made available under the United States
Shipping Board Bureau, not to exceed an aggregate of $150,000
shall be expended for compensation of regular attorneys employed
on a yearly salary basis, including their clerical and legal assistants.
This title may be cited as the Department of Commerce Appro-
priation Act, 1937.
TITLE IV—DEPARTMENT OF LABOR
OFFICE OF THE SECRETARY
Salaries: Secretary of Labor, Assistant Secretary, Second Assist-
ant Secretary, and other personal services in the District of
Columbia, $330,000: Provided, That persons (not exceeding ten
in number) now employed in the determination of wages pursuant
to the provisions of the Act entitled “An Act to amend the Act
approved March 3, 1931, relating to the rate of wages for laborers
and mechanics employed by contractors and subcontractors on public
buildings”, approved August 30, 1935, may be continued in such
employment and paid from the amount herein appropriated without
regard to the provisions of the civil-service laws requiring com-
petitive examinations: Provided further, That said personnel (except
attorneys and referees) shall be required to take nonassembled
examinations.
Promotion of health, safety, employment, and so forth: For
salaries and expenses in connection with the promotion of health,
safety, employment stabilization, and amicable industrial relations
for labor and industry, $140,000, of which amount not to exceed
$83,580 may be expended for personal services in the District of
Columbia.
Contingent expenses: For contingent and miscellaneous expenses
of the offices and bureaus of the Department, for which appropria-
tions for contingent and miscellaneous expenses are not specifically
made, including the purchase of stationery, furniture, and repairs
to the same, carpets, matting, oilcloths, file cases, towels, ice, brooms,
soap, sponges, laundry, street-car fares not exceeding $400; purchase,
exchange, maintenance, and repair of motorcycles and motor trucks;
maintenance, operation, -and repair of a motor-propelled passenger-
carrying vehicle, to be used only for official purposes; freight and
express charges; newspaper clippings not to exceed $1,200, postage
to foreign countries, telegraph and telephone service, typewriters,
adding machines, and other labor-saving devices; purchase of law
books, books of reference, newspapers and periodicals, not exceeding
$4,500; contract stenographic services; all other necessary miscel-
laneous items and expenses not included in the foregoing; and not
to exceed $25,000 for purchase of certain supplies for the Immigra-
tion and Naturalization Service; in all, $112,500: Provided, That
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C.,
title 41, sec. 5) shall not be construed to apply to any purchase or
service rendered for the Department of Labor when the aggregate
amount involved does not exceed the sum of $100.
Printing and binding: For printing and binding for the Depart-
ment of Labor, including all its bureaus, offices, institutions, and
services located in Washington, District of Columbia, and elsewhere,
$250,000.
Commissioners of conciliation: To enable the Secretary of Labor
to exercise the authority vested in him by section 8 of the Act creat-
ing the Department of Labor (U. 8. C., title 5, sec. 611") and to
1So in original.
43115°—36——17
Compensation of at-
torneys.
Short title.
Department of
Labor.
Office of the Secre-
tary.
Salaries.
Provisos.
_ Personnel determin-
ing wage rates, re-
tained.
Public Laws, Ist
Sess., p. 1011.
Nonassembled exami-
nations required.
Promotion of health,
safety, employment,
etc.
Contingent expenses,
Proviso.
Minor purchases.
R. S., sec. 3709, p.
733; U.S. C., p. 1803.
Printing and binding.
Commissioners
of conciliation.
Vol. 37, p. 738.
U.S. C.,p. 81.
1348
International Labor
Organization, Geneva.
Liaison with; ex-
penses, etc.
Vol. 48, p. 1182.
Printing and bind-
ing, ete.
Vol. 46, p. 818; U.S.
C., p. 45.
Bureau of Labor Sta-
tistics.
Salaries and expenses.
Immigration and
Naturalization Service.
Salaries and expenses,
Deportation, etc., of
aliens,
Vehicles.
Witness fees, etc.
747H CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
appoint commissioners of conciliation, traveling expenses, telegraph
and telephone service, and not to exceed $80,000 for personal services
in the District of Columbia, $408,000.
Liaison with the International Labor Organization, Geneva, Switz-
erland, salaries and expenses: For a United States Labor Commis-
sioner and other personal services in Geneva, Switzerland; com-
pensation of interpreters, translators, and porters; traveling expenses
of employees, including transportation of employees, their families,
and effects, in going to and returning from foreign posts; rent, heat,
light, and fuel; hire, maintenance, and operation of motor-propelled
passenger-carrying vehicles; purchase and exchange of foreign and
domestic books, periodicals, and newspapers; purchase of furniture,
stationery, and supplies; printing and binding; postage; telephone
and other similar expenses, for which payment may be made in
advance; necessary technical or special investigations in connection
with matters falling within the scope of the International Labor
Organization; allowances for living quarters, including heat, fuel,
and light, as authorized by the Act approved June 26, 1930 (U.S. C.,
title 5, sec. 1182), not to exceed $1,700 for any person, and contingent
and such other expenses in the United States and elsewhere as the
Secretary of Labor may deem necessary, fiscal year 1937, $28,000.
BUREAU OF LABOR STATISTICS
Salaries and expenses: For personal services, including temporary
statistical clerks, stenographers, and typewriters in the District of
Columbia, and including also experts and temporary assistants for
field service outside of the District of Columbia; traveling expenses,
including expenses of attendance at meetings concerned with the
work of the Bureau of Labor Statistics when incurred on the writ-
ten authority of the Secretary of Labor; purchase of periodicals,
documents, envelopes, price quotations, and reports and materials for
reports and bulletins of said Bureau, $850,000, of which amount not
to exceed $628,500 may be expended for the salary of the Commis-
sioner and other personal services in the District of Columbia.
IMMIGRATION AND NATURALIZATION SERVICE
Salaries and expenses: For enforcement of the laws regulating
the immigration to, the residence in, and the exclusion and deporta-
tion from the United States of aliens and persons subject to the
Chinese exclusion laws; for enforcement of the laws authorizing
a uniform rule for the naturalization of aliens; salaries, transporta-
tion, traveling, and other expenses of officers, clerks, and other
employees appointed to enforce said laws; care, detention, mainte-
nance, transportation, and traveling expenses incident to the depor-
tation and exclusion of aliens and persons subject to the Chinese
exclusion laws, as authorized by law, in the United States and to,
through, or in foreign countries; purchase of supplies and equip-
ment, including alterations and repairs; purchase, exchange, opera-
tion, maintenance, and repair of motor-propelled vehicles, including
passenger-carrying vehicles for official use in field work; arms,
ammunition and accessories; cost of reports of decisions of the Fed-
eral courts and digests thereof for official use; verifications of legal
papers; refunding of head tax, maintenance bills, and immigration
fines, upon presentation of evidence showing conclusively that col-
lection and deposit was made through error; mileage and fees to
witnesses subpenaed on behalf of the United States, and for all
other expenses necessary to enforce said laws; $9,740,000, all to be
expended under the direction of the Secretary of Labor, of which
74tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
amount not to exceed $545,000 may be expended for the salary of ,
the Commissioner of Immigration and Naturalization and other
personal services in the District of Columbia, including services of
1349
Services in the Dis-
rict.
persons authorized by law to be detailed there for duty: Provided, trovisos.
That not to exceed $45,000 of the sum herein appropriated shall be
available for the purchase, including exchange, of motor-propelled
passenger-carrying vehicles: Provided further, That the Commis- , Privately owned
sioner of Immigration and Naturalization, with the approval of the
Secretary of Labor, may contract with officers and employees sta-
tioned outside of the District of Columbia, whose salaries are pay-
able from this appropriation, for the use, on official business outside
of the District of Columbia, of privately owned horses, and the
consideration agreed upon shall be payable from the funds herein
appropriated: Provided further, That not to exceed $36,000 of the
total amount herein appropriated shall be available for allowances
for living quarters, including heat, fuel, and light, as authorized by
the Act approved June 26, 1930 (U.S. C., title 5, sec. 118a), not
to exceed $1,700 for any person: Provided further, That $100,000
of the amount herein appropriated shall be available only for the
payment of extra compensation for overtime services of inspectors
and employees of the Immigration and Naturalization Service for
which the United States receives reimbursement in accordance with
the provisions of the Act of March 2, 1931 (U.S. C., title 8, secs.
109a and 109b): Provided further, That not to exceed $400 of the |
sum herein appropriated may be expended for attendance at meet-
ings concerned with the naturalization of aliens when incurred on
the written authority of the Secretary of Labor: Provided further,
pensation of assistants to clerks of United States courts: And pro-
vided further, That not to exceed $10,000 of the sum herein appro-
priated may be expended for payment of rewards, when specifically
authorized by the Secretary of Labor, for information leading to
the detection, arrest, or conviction of persons violating the immi-
gration or naturalization laws.
Immigration stations: For remodeling, repairing (including repairs
to the ferryboat, Ellis Island), renovating buildings, and purchase of
equipment, $110,000.
CHILDREN’S BUREAU
Salaries and expenses: For expenses of investigating and report-
ing upon matters pertaining to the welfare of children and child
life, and especially to investigate the questions of infant mortality ;
personal services, including experts and temporary assistants;
traveling expenses, including not to exceed $3,000 for expenses of
attendance at meetings for the promotion of child welfare when
incurred on the written authority of the Secretary of Labor; pur-
chase of reports and material for the publications of the Children’s
Bureau and for reprints from State, city, and private publications
for distribution when said reprints can be procured more cheaply
than they can be printed by the Government, and other necessary
expenses, $400,000, of which amount not to exceed $313,500 may be
expended for personal services in the District of Columbia.
MATERNAL AND CHILD WELFARE
Allowances for living
quarters, ete.
Vol. 46, p. 818.
U.S. C., p. 45.
Overtime services of
inspectors, etc.
Vol. 46, p. 1467.
U.S. C., p. 184.
Attendance at meet-
ings.
Pay of assistants to
That no part of this appropriation shall be available for the com- (ts °f courts forbid-
en.
Payment of rewards.
Immigration stations.
Children’s Bureau.
Salaries and expenses.
Investigations.
Maternal and child
welfare.
Salaries and expenses: For all authorized and necessary adminis-
trative expenses of the Children’s Bureau in performing the duties s
Salaries and expenses.
Public Laws, Ist
ess., D. 629.
imposed upon it by title V of the Social Security Act, approved ,,V°5: C» Supp. 1p.
August 14, 1935, including personal services, rentals, repairs, and
1350
Social Security Act.
Payments under
State plans.
Maternal and child-
health services, grants
to States.
Public Laws, 1st
sess., p. 629.
Provisos.
Basis of allotments,
1937.
Supplemental aid not
included.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 630.
ist
Services for crippled
children, grants to
States.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 631.
1st
Proviso.
Basis of allotments,
937.
sess., Pp. 633.
Proviso.
Basis of allotments,
1937.
Women’s Bureau.
Salaries andexpenses.
Vol. 41, p. 987; U
S. C., p. 1320,
74mm CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
alterations to buildings, in the District of Columbia and elsewhere;
printing and binding; supplies; services; equipment; newspapers,
books of reference, periodicals, and press clippings; travel expenses
including expenses of attendance at meetings and attendance o
cooperating officials and consultants at conferences when called by
the Children’s Bureau with the approval of the Secretary of Labor,
$299,000.
In the administration of title V of the Social Security Act for
the fiscal year 1937, payments to States for any quarter of the fiscal
year 1937 under parts 1 and 2 may be made with respect to any
State plan approved under such respective parts by the Chief of the
Children’s Bureau prior to or during such quarter, but no such
payment shall be made with respect to any plan for any period prior
to the quarter in which such plan was submitted to the Chief of the
Children’s Bureau for approval.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR MATERNAL AND CHILD-HEALTH SERVICES
Grants to States for maternal and child-health services, Chil-
dren’s Bureau: For grants to States for the purpose of enabling
each State to extend and improve services for promoting the health
of mothers and children, as authorized in title V, part 1, of the
Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49 Stat. 629-631),
$2,820,000: Provided, That in carrying out such part 1, the allot-
ments to States and expenditures thereunder for the fiscal year 1937
are authorized to be made on the basis of a total of $3,800,000 for
all States (as defined in such Act): Provided further, That any
allotment to a State pursuant to section 502 (b) shall not be included
in computing for the purposes of subsections (a) and (b) of section
504 an amount expended or estimated to be expended by the State.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR SERVICES FOR CRIPPLED CHILDREN
Grants to States for services for crippled children, Children’s
Bureau: For the purpose of enabling each State to extend and
improve services for crippled children, as authorized in title V,
part 2, of the Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49
Stat., 631-633), $2,150,000: Provided, That in carrying out such
part 2, the allotments to States (as defined in such Act) and expendi-
tures thereunder for the fiscal year 1937 are authorized to be made
on the basis of a total of $2,850,000 for all States.
GRANTS TO STATES FOR CHILD-WELFARE SERVICES
Grants to States for child-welfare services, Children’s Bureau:
For grants to States for the purpose of enabling the United States,
through the Children’s Bureau, to cooperate with State public-
welfare agencies in establishing, extending, and strengthening pub-
lic-welfare services for the care of homeless or neglected children,
or children in danger of becoming delinquent, as authorized in title
V, part 3, of the Social Security Act, approved August 14, 1935 (49
Stat. 633), $1,200,000: Provided, That in carrying out such part 3,
the allotments to States (as defined in such Act) and expenditures
thereunder for the fiscal year 1937 are authorized to be made on
the basis of a total of $1,500,000 for all States,
WOMEN’S BUREAU
Salaries and expenses: For carrying out the provisions of the Act
‘entitled “An Act to establish in the Department of Labor a bureau
to be known as the Women’s Bureau”, approved June 5, 1920
74tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 405. MAY 15, 1936.
(U.S. C., title 29, sees 11-16) , including personal services in the Dis-
trict of Columbia, not to exceed $134,500; purchase of material for
reports and educational exhibits, and traveling expenses, $153,200,
of which sum not to exceed $3,000 shall be available for expenses
of attendance at meetings concerned with the work of said bureau
when incurred on the written authority of the Secretary of Labor.
UNITED STATES EMPLOYMENT SERVICE
For carrying out the provisions of the Act entitled “An Act to
provide for the establishment of a national employment system
and for cooperation with the States in the promotion of such sys-
tem, and for other purposes”, approved June 6, 1933; personal
services and rent in the District of Columbia and elsewhere; travel-
ing expenses, including expenses of attendance at meetings con-
cerned with the work of the United States Employment Service when
specifically authorized by the Secretary of Labor; law books, books
of reference, newspapers and periodicals, printing and binding,
supplies and equipment, telegraph and telephone service, and mis-
cellaneous expenses, $2,785,000, of which amount not to exceed
$885,000 shall be available for the Veterans’ Placement Service, the
Farm Placement Service, District of Columbia Public Employment
Center, and all other purposes, including not to exceed $197,500 for
personal services in the Department in the District of Columbia, and
the remainder shall be available for payment to the several States
in accordance with the provisions of the said Act of June 6, 1933,
as amended: Provided, That apportionments for the fiscal year
1937 shall be on the basis of a total apportionment to all States of
$3,000,000, and in order to supply the Government’s apportionments
to States under such Act during the fiscal years 1936 and 1937,
which are not capable of being supplied under the foregoing appro-
priation, there is hereby appropriated so much as may be necessary
to supply such apportionments, but not more than $1,675,000,
UNITED STATES HOUSING CORPORATION
Salaries and expenses: For officers, clerks, and other employees,
and for contingent and miscellaneous expenses, in the District of
Columbia and elsewhere, including blank books, maps, stationery,
file cases, towels, ice, brooms, soap, freight and express charges, com-
munication service, travel expense, printing and binding not to exceed
$100, and all other miscellaneous items and expenses not included
in the foregoing and necessary to collect and account for the receipts
from the sale of properties and the receipts from the operation of
unsold properties of the United States Housing Corporation, the
Bureau of Industrial Housing and Transportation, property com-
mandeered by the United States through the Secretary of Labor,
and to collect the amounts advanced to transportation facilities and
others; for payment of special assessments and other utility, munici-
pal, State, and county charges or assessments unpaid by purchasers,
and which have been assessed against property in which the United
States Housing Corporation has an interest, and to defray expenses
incident to foreclosing mortgages, conducting sales under deeds of
trust, or reacquiring title or possession of real property under
default proceeding, including attorney fees, witness fees, court costs,
charges, and other miscellaneous expenses; for the maintenance and
repair of houses, buildings, and improvements which are unsold; in
all, $9,000: Provided, That no person shall be employed hereunder at
a rate of compensation exceeding $4,000 per annum, and only one
1351
Employment Service. *
Providing for promo-
tion of employment.
Vol. 48, p. 113; U. S.
C., p. 1324.
Attendance at meet-
ings.
Printing and bind-
ing, ete.
Veterans’ Placement
Service, Farm Place-
ment Service, D. C.
Public Employment
Center.
Proviso.
Basis of apportion-
ments, 1937.
United States Hous-
ing Corporation.
Salaries and expenses.
Printing and binding.
Special assessments.
Provisos.
Salary limitation.
1352
Expenditures re-
stricted. :
Bituminous Coal La-
bor Board.
Salaries and expenses.
Post, p. 1627.
Printing and binding.
Short title
Payment restriction,
persons failing to re-
ceive Senate confirma-
tion.
Payment to cotton
ginners.
Ante, p. 1116.
Cotton Control Act,
administrative ex-
penses.
Vol. 48, p. 598.
Proviso.
Time limitation.
Great Lakes Exposi-
tion.
Participation ex-
penses.
Ante, p. 1243.
May 15, 1936.
[S. J. Res. 231.]
[Pub. Res., No. 91.]_
Landing of the
Swedes in Delaware.
Commemorative
coinage, authorized.
Number.
74ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 405, 406. MAY 15, 1936.
person may be employed at that rate: Provided further, That no
part of the appropriations heretofore made and available for
expenditure by the United States Housing Corporation shall be
expended for the purposes for which appropriations are made herein.
BITUMINOUS COAL LABOR BOARD
Salaries and expenses: For three Board members and other per-
sonal services in the District of Columbia and elsewhere, and for all
other necessary expenditures of the Bituminous Coal Labor Board
in performing the duties imposed upon said Board by the Bitu-
minous Coal Conservation Act of 1935, including supplies, station-
ery, telephone service, telegrams, furniture, office equipment, travel
expenses, and contract stenographic reporting services, $79,300. -
Printing and binding, Bituminous Coal Labor Board: For all
printing and binding for the Bituminous Coal Labor Board, $2,500.
This title may be cited as the Department of Labor Appropriation
Act, 1937.
Sec. 2. No part of the money appropriated under this Act shall be
paid to any person for the filling of any position for which he or she
has been nominated after the Senate has voted not to approve of the
nomination of said person.
Src. 3. That in passing upon applications made for compensation
under the provisions of the item for “Payment to cotton ginners”
contained in Title I of the Supplemental Appropriation Act, fiscal
year 1936 (Public Law Numbered 440, Seventy-fourth Congress),
and upon payments pursuant to such applications, the Secretary of
Agriculture and the Comptroller General of the United States are
authorized and directed, in the interest of saving as much adminis-
trative expense as possible and in order to avoid delay in passing
upon such applications, to assume that the additional expenses
incurred in connection with the administration of the Act of April
21, 1934 (491 Stat., 598-607), equaled 25 cents per bale, counting
round bales as half bales, during the period June 1, 1935, to February
10, 1936, inclusive: Provided, That no payment shall be made on any
application for such compensation unless the application is filed prior
to September 1, 1936.
Src. 4. Great Lakes Exposition: For the expenses of the participa-
tion of the Government of the United States in the Great Lakes
Exposition as provided for by Senate Joint Resolution Numbered
233, including the reimbursement of other appropriations from which
payments may have been made for any of the purposes therein
specified, to be immediately available, $275,000,
Approved, May 15, 1936.
[CHAPTER 406.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To authorize the coinage of 50-cent pieces in commemoration of the three-
hundredth anniversary of the landing of the Swedes in Delaware.
Resolwed by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That in commemoration
of the three-hundredth anniversary of the landing of the Swedes in
Delaware there shall be coined at a mint of the United States to be
designated by the Director of the Mint not less than twenty-five
thousand silver 50-cent pieces of standard size, weight, and composi-
tion and of a special appropriate single design, containing some
1 So in original.
747 CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 406, 407. MAY 15, 1936.
“recognized emblem of the State of Delaware, to be fixed by the Direc-
tor of the Mint, with the approval of the Secretary of the Treasury,
but the United States shall not be subject to the expense of making the
necessary dies and other preparations for this coinage.
Sec. 2. The coins herein authorized shall bear the date 1936, irre-
spective of the year in which they are minted or issued, shall be legal
tender in any payment to the amount of their face value, and shall be
issued only upon the request of the president of the Delaware Swed-
ish Tercentenary Commission upon payment by him of the par value
of such coins, but not less than twenty-five thousand such coins shall
be issued to him at any one time and no such coins shall be issued
after the expiration of one year after the date of enactment of this
Act. Such coins may be disposed of at par or at a premium by such
commission, and the net proceeds shall be used by it in defraying the
expenses incidental and appropriate to the commemoration of such
event.
Sec. 3. All laws now in force relating to the subsidiary silver coins
of the United States and the coining or striking of the same, regulat-
ing and guarding the process of coinage, providing for the purchase
of material, and for the transportation, distribution, and redemption
of coins, for the prevention of debasement or counterfeiting, for the
security of the coins, or for any other purposes, whether such laws
are penal or otherwise, shall, so far as applicable, apply to the coinage
herein authorized.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
[CHAPTER 407.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To provide for participation by the United States in an Inter-American Confer-
ence to be held at Buenos Aires, Argentina, or at the capital of another American
republic, in 1936.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any money not other-
wise appropriated, the sum of $75,000 to be used for participation
by the United States in an Inter-American Conference, in pursuance
of and for the purposes set forth in a letter from the President of
the United States dated January 30, 1936, to be held at Buenos
Aires, Argentina, or at the capital of another American republic, in
1936, including personal services in the District of Columbia or
elsewhere without reference to the Classification Act of 1923, as
amended; stenographic reporting and other services by contract if
deemed necessary without regard to section 3709 of the Revised
Statutes (U. S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent; traveling expenses (and
by indirect routes and by airplane if specifically authorized by the
Secretary of State); hire, maintenance, and operation of motor-
propelled passenger-carrying vehicles; equipment, purchase of
necessary books, documents, newspapers, periodicals, and maps; sta-
tionery; official cards, entertainment; printing and binding; and
such other expenses as may be authorized by the Secretary of State,
including the reimbursement of other appropriations from which
payments may have been made for any of the purposes herein
specified, to be expended under the direction of the Secretary of
State, fiscal year 1936, to remain available until June 30, 1937.
Approved, May 15, 1936.
1553
No Federal expense
for dies, etc.
Date, issue, ete.
Disposal.
Coinage laws appli-
cable.
May 15, 1936.
[S. J. Res. 248.]
[Pub. Res., No. 92.]
Inter-American Con-
ference, 1936.
Appropriation au-
thorized for participa-
tion expenses.
Ante, p. 1319.
U.S. C., p. 85.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S.,see.3709, p. 733,
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Vehicles.
Printing and binding.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
1554
May 18, 1936.
[H. R. 10589.]
[Public, No. 600.]
Missouri River.
Bridge construction
at Niobrara, Nebr.
Textual changes.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 1074.
Amendment.
May 18, 1936.
[H. R. 10847.]
Ist
[Public, No. 601.]
New York Ci
N.Y
ty,
‘Acquisition ef land
near, for cemeterial
purposes, authorized.
Appropriation
thorized.
Post, p. 1641.
au-
741m CONGRESS. SESS. Il. CHS. 420, 421. MAY 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 420.] -
AN ACT
To amend section 32 of the Act entitled “‘An Act to authorize the construction
of certain bridges and to extend the times for commencing and/or completing
the construction of other bridges over the navigable waters of the United
States, and for other purposes’, approved August 30, 1935.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That subsection (a)
of section 32 of the Act entitled “An Act to authorize the construction
of certain bridges and to extend the times for commencing and/or
completing the construction of other bridges over the navigable waters
of the United States, and for other purposes”, approved August 30,
1935, is amended by striking out “the village board of the village
of Niobrara, county of Knox, State of Nebraska”, and inserting in
lieu thereof the following: “the county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
Src. 2. Subsection (b) of such section 32 is amended by striking
out “the Village Board of the Village of Niobrara, county of Knox,
State of Nebraska”, and inserting in lieu thereof the following: “the
county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
Src, 3. (a) Subsection (c) of such section 32 is amended by strik-
ing out “The said Villiage Board of the Villiage of Niobrara, county
of Knox, State of Nebraska”, and inserting in lieu thereof the
following: “The said county of Knox, State of Nebraska”.
(b) Subsection (c) of such section 32 is further amended by strik-
ing out “to fix the charge tolls for transit” and inserting in lieu
thereof the following: “to fix and charge tolls for transit”.
Src. 4. Subsection (d) of such section 32 is amended by striking
out “After a sinking sufficient for amortization shall have been so
provided, said bridge” and inserting in lieu thereof the following:
“After a sinking fund sufficient for such amortization shall have been
so provided, said bridge”.
Sec. 5. The right to alter, amend, or repeal this Act is hereby
expressly reserved.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 421.]
AN ACT
To authorize the acquisition of land for cemeterial purposes in the vicinity of
New York City, New York.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of War be, and he is hereby, authorized to acquire by purchase,
condemnation, or otherwise such suitable lands in the vicinity of New
York City as in his judgment are required for enlargement of exist-
ing national cemetery facilities, and the sum of $250,000, or so much
thereof as may be necessary, is hereby authorized to be appropriated
from any funds in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, which
sum shall remain available until expended.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
74mm CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 422, 423. MAY 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 422.]
AN ACT
To amend section 5 of the Act of March 2, 1919, generally known as the “War
Minerals Relief Statutes.”
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in any claim
that has heretofore been filed within the time and in the manner
provided by the Act approved March 2, 1919 (40 Stat. 1272), as
amended, generally referred to asthe “War Minerals Relief Statutes”,
in which the Supreme Court of the District of Columbia under the
authority conferred upon said court by the Act approved February
13, 1929 (45 Stat. 1166), has adjudged or decreed interest. payments
or obligations to be losses reimbursable within the meaning of the
Act of March 2, 1919 (40 Stat. 1272), as amended, the Secretary of
the Interior shall open or reopen such claim and include in his
adjustments and payments of losses, interest which has been paid or
has accrued to the date of approval of this Act: Provided, however,
That such losses shall be shown to the satisfaction of the Secretary
of the Interior as a matter of fact to be the result of a legal obliga-
tion incurred within the statutory period as provided in said Act of
March 2, 1919: And provided further, That the sum paid in satisfy-
ing said claims shall not exceed in total $1,250,000. It is also
provided that all settlements under this Act and pursuant to its
provisions shall constitute full and complete discharge of all obliga-
tions of the United States accruing under the War Minerals Act
and Acts amendatory thereof.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 423.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To provide for participation by the United States in the Ninth International
Congress of Military Medicine and Pharmacy in Rumania, in 1937; and to
authorize and request the President of the United States to invite the Inter-
national Congress of Military Medicine and Pharmacy to hold its tenth
congress in the United States in 1939, and to invite foreign countries to par-
ticipate in that congress.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That there is hereby
authorized to be appropriated, out of any money in the Treasury not
otherwise appropriated, the sum of $11,500, or so much thereof as
may be necessary, for the expenses of participation by the United
States in the Ninth International Congress of Military Medicine and
Pharmacy to be held in Rumania in 1937, including personal services
in the District of Columbia or elsewhere without reference to the
Classification Act of 1923, as amended; stenographic reporting and
other services by contract if deemed necessary without regard to
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes (U.S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent;
traveling expenses; purchase of necessary books, documents, news-
papers, periodicals, and maps; stationery; official cards; entertain-
ment; printing and binding, including the payment of not to exceed
$500 to the Association of Military Surgeons of the United States
toward the cost of printing the report of the American Delegation
to the Ninth Congress; and such other expenses as may be authorized
by the Secretary of State, including the reimbursement of other
appropriations from which payments may have been made for any
of the purposes herein specified, to be expended under the direction
of the Secretary of State.
1355
May 18, 1936.
_ [8.1432]
[Public, No. 602.]
“War Minerals Re-
lief Statutes’, amend-
ment.
Vol. 40, p. 1272; Vol.
42, p. 322; Vol. 45, p.
1166.
Post, p. 1619.
Interest payments on
certain claims under.
Provisos.
Condition.
Limitation on total
amount.
Settlements; dis-
charge of liability.
May 18, 1936.
[H. J. Res. 538.]
[Pub. Res., No. 93.]
Ninth International
Congress of Military
Medicine and Phar-
macy, Rumania, 1937.
Sum authorized for
participation expenses.
Post, p. 1634.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S., sec. 3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Printing and bind-
ing; report of Ameri-
can Delegation.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
1356
Invitation to hold
10th congress in United
States; foreign govern-
ments to participate.
May 18, 1936.
[H. J. Res. 547.]
[Pub. Res., No. 94.]
Great Lakes Exposi-
tion, Cleveland, Ohio.
Dutiable articles, im-
ported for exhibition
purposes, etc., ad-
mitted free, under regu-
lations.
Ante, pp. 1248, 1352.
Sales permitted.
Provisos.
Duty on articles
withdrawn.
Deterioration allow-
ance.
Marking require-
ments.
Articles abandoned.
Transfer privileges.
Exposition deemed
sole consignee of mer-
chandise.
Incurred Federal ex-
penses reimbursable.
74a CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS, 423, 424. MAY 18, 1936.
Sec, 2. That the President be, and he is hereby, authorized and
requested to extend to the International Congress of Military Medi-
cine and Pharmacy an invitation to hold its tenth congress in the
United States in 1939, and to invite foreign governments to partici-
pate in that congress.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 424.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
Providing for the importation of articles free from tariff or customs duty for the
purpose of exhibition at Great Lakes Exposition to be held at Cleveland,
Ohio, beginning in June 1936, and for other purposes.
Resolved by the Senate and House. of Representatives of the United
States of America in Congress assembled, That all articles which
shall be imported from foreign countries for the purpose of exhibi-
tion at the international exposition to be held at Cleveland, Ohio,
beginning in June 1936, by Great Lakes Exposition, or for use in
constructing, installing, or maintaining foreign buildings, or exhibits
at the said exhibition, upon which articles there shall be a tariff or
customs duty shall be admitted without payment of such tariff, cus-
toms duty, fees, or charges under such regulations as the Secretary of
the Treasury shall prescribe; but it shall be lawful at any time during
or within three months after the close of the said exposition to sell
within the area of the exposition any articles provided for herein,
subject to such regulations for the security of the revenue and for the
collection of import duties as the Secretary of the Treasury shall pre-
scribe: Provided, That all such articles, when withdrawn for con-
sumption or use in the United States, shall be subject to the duties,
if any, imposed upon such articles by the revenue laws in force at the
date of their withdrawal; and on such articles which shall have
suffered diminution or deterioration from incidental handling or
exposure the duties, if payable, shall be assessed according to the
appraised value at the time of withdrawal from entry hereunder for
consumption or entry under the general tariff law: Provided further,
That imported articles provided for herein shall not be subject to an
marking requirements of the general tariff laws, except when ach
articles are withdrawn for consumption or use in the United States,
in which case they shall not be released from customs custody until
properly marked, but no additional duty shall be assessed because
such articles were not sufficiently marked when imported into the
United States: Provided further, That at any time during or within
three months after the close of the exposition any article entered
hereunder may be abandoned to the Government or destroyed under
customs supervision, whereupon any .duties on such article shall be
remitted: Provided further, That articles which have been admitted
without payment of duty for exhibition under any tariff law and
which have remained in continuous customs custody or under a cus-
toms exhibition bond and imported articles in bonded warehouses
under the general tariff law may be accorded the privilege of trans-
fer to and entry for exhibition at the said exposition under such
regulations as the Secretary of the Treasury shall prescribe: And
provided further, That Great Lakes Exposition shall be deemed, for
customs purposes only, to be the sole consignee of all merchandise
imported under the provisions of this Act, and that the actual and
necessary customs charges for labor, services, and other expenses in
connection with the entry, examination, appraisement, release, or
custody, together with the necessary charges for salaries of customs
officers and employees in connection with the supervision, custody of,
747H CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 424, 495, 497. MAY 18, 19, 1936.
and accounting for articles imported under the provisions of this Act,
shall be reimbursed by Great Lakes Exposition to the Government
of the United States under regulations to be prescribed by the Secre-
tary of the Treasury, and that receipts from such reimbursements
shall be deposited as refunds to the appropriation from which paid,
in the manner provided for in section 524, Tariff Act of 1930,
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 425.]
JOINT RESOLUTION
To authorize an appropriation for the expenses of participation by the United
States in a conference at Brussels to revise the Convention for the Protection
of Literary and Artistic Works concluded at Bern, September 9, 1886, and
revised at Rome, June 2, 1928.
Resolved by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any money in the
Treasury not otherwise appropriated, the sum of $6,500, or so much
thereof as may be necessary, for the expenses of participation by
the United States in the conference to convene at Brussels, Belgium,
for the purpose of revising the Convention for the Protection of
Literary and Artistic Works, concluded at Bern, September 9, 1886,
and revised at Rome, June 2, 1928, including personal services in
the District of Columbia and elsewhere without reference to the
Classification Act of 1923, as amended; stenographic, reporting, and
other services by contract, if deemed necessary, without regard to
section 3709 of the Revised Statutes (U.S. C., title 41, sec. 5); rent;
traveling expenses; purchases of necessary books, documents, news-
papers, periodicals, and maps; stationery; official cards; entertain-
ment; printing and binding; and such other expenses as may be
authorized by the Secretary of State, including the reimbursement
of other appropriations from which payments may have been made
for any of the purposes herein specified, to be expended under the
direction of the Secretary of State.
Approved, May 18, 1936.
[CHAPTER 427.]
AN ACT
To authorize certain officers of the United States Navy, officers and enlisted men
of the Marine Corps, and officers and enlisted men of the United States Army
to accept such medals, orders, diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have
been tendered them by foreign governments in appreciation of services rendered.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the following-
named officers of the United States Navy, and officers and enlisted
men of the Marine Corps, are hereby authorized to accept such
medals, orders, diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have been
tendered them by foreign governments in appreciation of services
rendered :
United States Navy: Admiral William H. Standley; Rear Admiral
David F. Sellers; Rear Admiral Wat T. Cluverius; Rear Admiral
Hayne Ellis; Rear Admiral Ernest J. King; Rear Admiral Louis
M. Nulton, retired; Rear Admiral Yates Stirling, Junior; Rear
Admiral John R. Y. Blakely, retired; Rear Admiral Edward H.
Campbell; Rear Admiral Walter N. Vernou; Rear Admiral Harley
H. Christy; Rear Admiral Henry V. Butler; Rear Admiral Walter
S. Crosley; Rear Admiral Frank B. Upham; Rear Admiral Edward
1357
Deposit of, as re-
funds.
Vol. 46, p. 741.
U.S. C., p. 894.
May 18, 1936.
[H. J. Res. 569.)
~ [Pub. Res., No. 95.]
Convention for the
Protection of Literary
and Artistic Works,
Gonterenice for revision
of.
Sum authorized for
participation expenses.
Post, p. 1633.
Contracts without
advertising.
R.S., see. 3709, p. 733.
U.S. C., p. 1803.
Reimbursement of
other appropriations.
May 19, 1936.
__[S. 1975.]
(Public, No. 603.]
Navy, Marine Corps,
and Army.
Acceptance of certain
decorations, etc., ten-
dered by foreign gov-
ernments to designated
officers, etc., authorized.
Navy.
1358
Navy—Continued.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
B. Fenner; Rear Admiral George T. Pettengill; Rear Admiral Clark
N. Woodward; Rear Admiral William H. Allen; Captain Reuben
B. Coffey; Captain Vaughn K. Coman; Captain Gordon W. Haines;
Captain Alfred G. Howe; Captain Victor A. Kimberly; Captain
David M. Le Breton; Captain William R. Sayles; Captain Halsey
Powell; Captain Willis W. Bradley, Junior; Captain Frank H.
Roberts; Captain Arthur B. Cook; Captain Benyaurd B. Wygent;
Captain Rufus F. Zogbaum, Junior; Captain Frank Jack Fletcher;
Captain Matthias E. Manly; Captain Alfred W. Brown; Captain
Augustine T. Beauregard; Captain Harold M. Bemis; Captain Her-
bert H. Michael; Captain MacGillivray Milne; Captain Milo F.
Draemel; Captain Edward A. Evers, Naval Reserve; Captain
Edward T. Hooper, Supply Corps; Captain Holden C. Richardson,
Construction Corps, retired; Captain Kent C. Melhorn, Medical
Corps; Captain Lucius W. Johnson, Medical Corps; Commander
Ernest L. Gunther; Commander Hamilton V. Bryan; Commander
John D. Price; Commander Harold C. Train; Commander Ward W.
Waddell; Commander William W. Smith; Commander Calvin N.
Cobb; Commander Patrick N. L, Bellinger; Commander Harry G.
Patrick; Commander Earl W. Spencer; Commander William H.
Pashley; Commander Aaron S. Merrill; Commander Douglas W.
Fuller; Commander Ralph F. Wood; Commander Joel T. Boone,
Medical Corps; Commander Joseph A. J. MeMullin, Medical Corps;
Commander Gordon D. Hale, Medical Corps; Commander Walter
C. Espech, Medical Corps; Commander Maurice M. Witherspoon,
Chaplain Corps; Commander Bernhard H. Bieri; Lieutenant Com-
mander Albert S. Marley; Lieutenant Commander Charles G.
Moore, Junior; Lieutenant Commander John J. Carrick, Naval
Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Emil J. Carroll, Naval Reserve;
Lieutenant Commander Francis G. Donebrink; Lieutenant Com-
mander Victor C. Barringer, Junior; Lieutenant Commander Ralph
A. Ofstie; Lieutenant Commander Lucien B. Green, Second, retired;
Lieutenant Commander Dallas D. Dupre; Lieutenant Commander
Harold B. Crow, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Edward
O. McDonnell, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Schuyler F.
Cumings, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant Commander Charles W. Steven-
son, Supply Corps; Lieutenant Commander Charles R. O'Leary,
Supply Corps; Lieutenant Commander Hardy V. Hughens, Medical
Corps; Lieutenant Commander Thomas L. Morrow, Medical Corps;
Lieutenant Commander Louis E. Mueller, Medical Corps; Lieu-
tenant Commander Victor B. Riden, Medical Corps; Lieutenant
Commander Wiliam M. H. Turville, Medical Corps; Lieutenant
Commander Horace R. Boone, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Com-
mander Warwick T. Brown, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander
Vincent Hernandez, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Harry
S. Harding, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Robert W. Wim-
berly, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Hillard L. Weer,
Medical Corps; Lieutenant Robert F. Hickey; Lieutenant Harvey
R. Bowes; Lieutenant Buell F. Brandt; Lieutenant George H.
De Baun; Lieutenant John M. Brewster; Lieutenant Curry E.
Eason; Lieutenant Maxwell B. Saben; Lieutenant John F.-Gillon;
Lieutenant Colonel H. Mansfield, Chaplain Corps; Lieutenant
Joseph O. Saurette; Lieutenant Robert H. Smith; Lieutenant Don-
ald R. Tallman; Lieutenant John Davis, retired; Lieutenant Walter
L. Bach, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Walter G. Kilbury, Medical
Corps; Lieutenant Hugh E. Mouldin, Dental Corps; Lieutenant
(Junior Grade) James H. Taylor; Lieutenant tyanier Grade)
Frank E. Latauzo, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Robert C. Douthat, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
74mm CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
Freeman C. Harris, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
Warren G. Wieand, Medical Corps; Lieutenant (Junior Grade)
George H. Mills, Dental Corps; Ensign Howard F. Hozey, Naval
Reserve Force; Chief Boatswain William C. Baker; Chief Pharma-
cist Roy Aikman; Chief Pharmacist Leon H. French.
United States Marine Corps: Major General James C. Breckin-
ridge; Brigadier General George Richards; Brigadier General Rufus
M. Lane, retired; Brigadier General Hugh Matthews; Brigadier
General Randolph C. Barkeley; Brigadier General Frederick L.
Bradman; Brigadier General Louis McCarty Little; Brigadier Gen-
eral Douglas C. McDougal; Brigadier General Richard T. Williams;
Colonel Richard M. Cutts; Colonel Presley M. Rixey, Junior; Colonel
Seth Williams; Colonel James J. Meade; Colonel Clayton S. Vogel;
Colonel Calvin B. Matthews; Lieutenant Colonel Lauren S. Willis,
retired; Lieutenant Colonel Jeter R. Horton; Lieutenant Colonel
Franklin B. Garrett; Lieutenant Colonel Calhoun Ancrum; Lieu-
tenant Colonel William S. Wise; Lieutenant Colonel William B.
Smith; Lieutenant Colonel Charles F. M. Price; Lieutenant Colonel
Ross FE. Rosell; Lieutenant Colonel John Marston; Lieutenant
Colonel Julian C. Smith; Lieutenant Colonel Roy E. Geiger; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Harry Schmidt; Lieutenant Colonel De Witt Peck;
Lieutenant Colonel William B. Sullivan; Lieutenant Colonel Henry
L. Larsen; Lieutenant Colonel Arnold W. Jacobsen; Major Thomas
S. Clarke; Major Joseph C. Fegan; Major Frederick R. Hoyt;
Major Marion B. Humphrey; Major Allen H. Turnage; Major
Louis M. Bourne; Major Matthew S. Kingman; Major John F. 8.
Norris; Major Anderson C. Deering; Major Ralph J. Mitchell;
Major Samuel L. Howard; Major Oscar R. Cauldwell; Major
Thomas E. Watson; Major Walter C. Sheard; Major Roger W.
Peard; Major Lloyd L. Leach; Major Raphael Griffin; Major
Thomas P. Cheatham; Major Louis W. Whaley; Major Leroy P.
Hunt; Major Leo D. Merale; Major Lemuel C. Shepherd, Junior;
Major James E. Davis; Major Alphonse De Carre; Major James T.
Moore; Major Alfred N. Noble; Major Franklin A. Hart; Major
William N. Beat; Major Herbert Hardy; Major Ralph E. West;
Captain Graves B. Erskine; Captain Robert Yowell; Captain
Francis P. Mulcahy; Captain Maurice C. Holmes; Captain Eugene
F. C. Collier; Captain Otto Salzman; Captain Carl S. Schmidt;
Captain Harry W. Gamble; Captain Roscoe Arnett; Captain
Maurice S. Gregory; Captain James P. Smith; Captain Edward G.
Kuefe; Captain Max Cox; Captain Oliver P. Smith; Captain Joseph
O. Ward; Captain Edward L. Durvall, Junior; Captain John C.
Wood; Captain Jacob Lienhard; Captain Victor F. Bleasdale; Cap-
tain Leonard H. Rea; Captain James P. Schwerin; Captain John
H. Parker; Captain Walter S. Casper; Captain Willett Elmore;
Captain Benjamin W. Gally; Captain James A. Nixson, Captain
Frederick M. Howard; Captain Lee W. Brown; Captain Harold G.
Major; Captain Bernard Dubel; Captain Hamilton M. H. Fleming;
Captain Claude A. Phillips; Captain Harold W. Whitney; Captain
Harry Paul; Captain Frank N. Costtge; Captain Byron F. Johnson ;
Captain William J. Livingston ; Captain George E. Monson; Captain
Amor L. Sims; Captain George R. Rowen; Captain Brady L. Vogt;
Captain Clinton W. McLeod; Captain Roy C. Swick; Captain
Reuben B. Price; Captain William J. Whaling; Captain Frank N.
Gilman; Captain Monitor Watchman; Captain George L. Maynard;
Captain Benjamin W. Atkinson; Captain William L. Bales; Cap-
tain Frederick C. Diebush; Captain Terrell J. Crawford; Captain
John T. Walker; Captain William P. T. Hill; Captain Jesse A.
Nelson; Captain Henry A. Carr; Captain Wilham C. Hall;
1359
Navy—Continued,
Marine Corps.
1360 747H CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
ti Matine Corps—Con- Captain Edwin J. Farrell; Captain Louis E. Woods; Captain
Augustus H. Fricke; Captain William §. Fellers; Captain Herbert
S. Keimling; Captain Walter W. Wensinger; Captain Ernest E.
Lincort; First Lieutenant William L. McKittrick; First Lieutenant
Max D. Smith; First Lieutenant David A. Stafford; First Lieu-
tenant Roy W. Conkey; First Lieutenant Harold N. Rosecrans;
First Lieutenant Horace D. Palmer; First Lieutenant Hayne D.
Royden; First Lieutenant Christian F. Schilt; First Lieutenant
James H. Strother; First Lieutenant Ivan W. Miller; First Lieu-
tenant John C. McQueen; First Lieutenant William W. Davies;
First Lieutenant James W. Smith; First Lieutenant Lewis A. Hohn;
First Lieutenant Lucian C. Whitaker; First Lieutenant Ralph E.
Forsyth; First Lieutenant Pierson E. Conradt; First Lieutenant
Cregon A. Williams; First Lieutenant Evans F. Carlson; First
Lieutenant John W. Lakes; First Lieutenant George F. Good,
Junior; First Lieutenant William R. Hughes; First Liéutenant Max-
well H. Mizell; First Lieutenant Charles W. Kail; First Lieutenant
Lewis D. Fuller; First Lieutenant Joe N. Smith; First Lieutenant
Herbert F. Becker; First Lieutenant Alexander W. Kreiser; First
Lieutenant Edward J. Trumble; First Lieutenant James C. Brauer;
First Lieutenant Francis J. Cunningham; First Lieutenant Paul A.
Putnam; First Lieutenant John S. E. Young; First Lieutenant Wil-
liam D. Saunders; First Lieutenant Lofton R. Henderson; First
Lieutenant John N. Coffman; First Lieutenant Peter P. Schrider;
First Lieutenant Robert L. Griffin; First Lieutenant James P.
Risely; First Lieutenant Samuel S. Jack; First Lieutenant Frank
M. June; First Lieutenant Miles 8S. Newton; First Lieutenant Ira
L. Kames; First Lieutenant Reginald H. Ridgely; First Lieutenant
Nols H. Nelson; First Lieutenant Frank C. Dailey; First Lieutenant
Frank H. Wirsig; Second Lieutenant Robert L. Peterson; Second
Lieutenant Kenneth H. Weir; Second Lieutenant Arthur F. Binney;
Second Lieutenant Clovis C. Coffman; Second Lieutenant Perry O.
Parmelee; Second Lieutenant Lester S. Hamel; Second Lieutenant
Ernest E. Pollock; Second Lieutenant Frank C. Croft; Second Lieu-
tenant Newin O. Hammond; Second Lieutenant Frank H. Schwable;
Second Lieutenant Joseph H. Berry; Second Lieutenant James P.
Berkeley; Second Lieutenant Peter A. McDonald; Second Lieu-
tenant Michael M. Mahoney; Second Lieutenant Fred D. Beans;
Second Lieutenant Edgar O. Price; Second Lieutenant Lebulon C.
Hopkins; Second Lieutenant William A. Willis; Second Lieutenant
John M. Davis; Chief Marine Gunner John F. Evans; Chief Marine
Gunner Otho Wiggs; Chief Marine Gunner Jesse W. Stamper;
Chief Marine Gunner Frank F. Putcarmer; Chief Marine Gunner
Frank O. Lundt; Chief Marine Gunner Michael Wederczyk; Chief
Marine Gunner Harold Ogden; Chief Quartermaster Clerk August
F. Schonefeld; Chief Quartermaster Clerk William A. Warrell,
retired; Chief Quartermaster Clerk Albert O. Woodrow; Chief
Quartermaster Clerk Elmer W. Darde; Chief Pay Clerk Benjamin
H. Wolever; Chief Pay Clerk Clinton A. Phillips; Chief Pay Clerk
Timothy E. Murphy; Marine Gunner Kennard F. Bubier; Marine
Gunner Albert S. Nunach; Marine Gunner Harry R. Baley; Marine
Gunner Thomas Whitezel, Marine Gunner Walter N. Hendersen;
Marine Gunner Robert 8S. McCook; Sergeant Major James M.
Barmead; Sergeant Major Carl Svenson; Sergeant Major Charles
A. White; Quartermaster Sergeant Frederick J. Widman; Quarter-
master Sergeant Rupert F. Stone; Master Technical Sergeant Mil-
lard T. Shepard; Paymaster Sergeant Fred Parquette; First Ser-
geant Edwin C. Clarke; First Sergeant Cecil N. Bietz; First Ser-
geant Charles H. Gray; First Sergeant William O’Grady; First
(4th CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 427. MAY 19, 1936.
Sergeant Alfred Sylvester; First Sergeant Harry Watkins; First ;
Sergeant Nicholas M. Griece; First Sergeant Frederick Dalton;
First Sergeant Louis N. Bertol; First Sergeant Russell O. Beard;
First Sergeant Otto Poland; First Sergeant Richard Shaker; First
Sergeant Charles E. Stuart; First Sergeant Frank Verdier; First
Sergeant Curtis O. Whitney; Gunnery Sergeant Joseph A. Saunders;
Gunnery Sergeant Bernard J. Durr; Gunnery Sergeant John J.
Rogers; Sergeant Olin L. Beall; Sergeant George Washington;
Sergeant Joseph L. Bonville; Sergeant Joseph Konepka; Sergeant
Charles L. McIndoc; Sergeant Frank J. Murphy; Sergeant Douglas
S. Catchis; Sergeant Daniel J. Donahoe; Sergeant Charles Sorenson;
Private John David.
United States Navy: Admiral William B. Caperton, retired; Rear
Admiral Charles 8. Freeman; Captain William D. Puleston; Captain
Walter S. Anderson; Captain Stephen B. McKinney; Captain Wil-
liam O. Spears; Captain Augustin T. Beauregard; Commander Leo
H. Thebaud; Commander Clarence Gulbranson; Captain Charles
St. J. Butler, Medical Corps; Captain William S. Bainbridge, Medi-
cal Corps, Naval Reserve, retired; Commander Morton D. Willcutts,
Medical Corps; Commander William Henry P. Blandy; Commander
Edwin C. Ebert, Medical Corps; Lieutenant Commander Roscoe H.
Hillenkoetter ; Lieutenant Commander Joel J. White, Medical Corps;
Lieutenant Albert L. King, Naval Reserve; Lieutenant (Junior
Grade) Walter C. Ford; Captain Herbert 8. Howard, Construction
Corps; Lieutenant Commander Leslie C. Stevens; Lieutenant Com-
mander William K. Vanderbilt, United States Naval Reserve.
United States Marine Corps: Colonel Robert L. Denig; Colonel
Henry L. Roosevelt, Marine Corps Reserve, deceased; Colonel Wil-
liam C. Harllee, retired; Colonel Julius S. Turrill, retired; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Harry L. Smith; Lieutenant Colonel William M.
Small, retired; Major Andrew E. Creesy; Major Donald J. Kendall;
Major Chester L. Fordney, Marine Corps Reserve; Captain Louis
Cukela; First Sergeant George Nelson.
That the following-named officers and enlisted men of the United
States Army are hereby authorized to accept such medals, orders,
diplomas, decorations, and photographs as have been tendered them
by foreign governments in appreciation of services rendered:
General Douglas MacArthur; Major General Dennis E. Nolan;
Major General Malin Craig; Major General Paul B. Malone; Major
General Frank Parker; Major General Frank R. McCoy; Major
General Albert J. Bowley; Major General Benjamin D. Foulois;
Brigadier General Frank C. Bolles; Brigadier General Casper H.
Conrad, Junior; Brigadier General Andrew Moses; Brigadier Gen-
eral Thomas W. Darrah; Brigadier General Francis LeJ. Parker;
Brigadier General Guy V. Henry; Brigadier General John W.
Gulick; Brigadier General Robert C. Foy; Colonel Joseph A. Baer;
Colonel Charles Burnett; Colonel W. Goff Caples; Colonel Edward
Davis; Colonel Charles W. Exton; Colonel James Malcolm Graham;
Colonel W. Lee Hart; Colonel Jacob C. Johnson; Colonel Roy C.
Kirtland; Colonel Osmun Latrobe; Colonel E. R. Warner McCabe;
Colonel Charles H. Patterson; Colonel Russell P. Reeder; Colonel
Francis A. Ruggles; Colonel Frederick W. Van Duyne; Colonel
Richard H. Williams; Lieutenant Colonel Frank M. Andrews; Lieu-
tenant Colonel Lester D. Baker; Lieutenant Colonel Reginald B.
Cocroft; Lieutenant Colonel John F. Curry; Lieutenant Colonel
Ernest J. Dawley; Lieutenant Colonel Robert H. Fletcher, Junior;
Lieutenant Colonel William W. Hicks; Lieutenant Colonel Donald
C. McDonald; Lieutenant Colonel Frederick W. Manley; Lieutenant
1361
Marine Corps—Con-
nued.
Navy.
Marine Corps,
1362
Army—Continued.
May 19, 1936.
[H. R. 12162.]
[Publie, No. 604.]
United States courts.
Vol. 36, p. 1116; U.
8. C., p. 1247.
Mississippi judicial
districts.
Northern district.
Eastern division.
Western division.
Delta division.
Terms of court.
Eastern division.
747m CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 427, 428. MAY 19, 1936.
Colonel Maxwell Murray; Lieutenant Colonel Henry C. Pratt; Lieu-
tenant Colonel John W. N. Schulz; Lieutenant Colonel Martin C.
Shallenberger; Lieutenant Colonel Daniel I. Sultan; Lieutenant
Colonel Edwin M. Watson; Lieutenant Colonel Barton K. Yount;
Major George E. Arneman; Major Rosenham Beam; Major Enrique
M. Benitez; Major Peter C. Bullard; Major Henry B. Cheadle;
Major Joseph O. Daly; Major Herbert A. Dargue; Major James A.
Dorst; Major Asa N. Duncan; Major Charles R. Finley; Major
Abraham Garfinckel; Major James A. Gillespie; Major Paul R.
Hawley; Major Charles B. Hazeltine; Major Edgar Erskine Hume;
Major George E. Lovell, Junior; Major Davenport Johnson; Major
Raymond E. McQuillin; Major Joseph J. O'Hare; Major James B.
Ord; Major Alvan C. Sandeford; Major Martin F. Scanlon; Major
James C. R. Schwenck; Chaplain (Major) Aristeo V. Simoni; Major
Julia C. Stimson; Major Robert H. Van Volkenburgh; Major Robert
LeG. Walsh; Major Charles A. Willoughby; Major Walter F. Win-
ton; Captain John R. D. Cleland; Captain Carl W. Connell; Captain
Virgil N. Cordero; Captain Robert EK. Cummings; Captain Thomas
J. Davis; Captain Vernon C. DeVotie; Captain Fernand G. Dumont;
Captain Ira C. Eaker; Captain Richard E. Elvins; Captain Muir
S. Fairchild; Captain James M. Gillespie; Captain Leslie R. Groves,
Junior; Captain Albert F. Hegenberger; Captain Eugene J. Heller;
Captain Jack C. Hodgson; Captain Arthur B. McDaniel; Captain
William J. McKiernan, Junior; Captain Eugene A. Regnier; Cap-
tain Charles McK. Robinson ; Captain Timothy Sapia-Bosch ; Captain
Kinsley W. Slauson; Captain Bernard 8. Thompson; Captain Leon-
ard D. Weddington; Captain Ennis C. Whitehead; Captain Royden
Williamson; Captain Ralph H. Wooten; First Lieutenant Joseph
M. Glasgow; First Lieutenant John L. Hines, Junior; First Lieu-
tenant Kenneth C. Nichols; First Lieutenant Benjamin B. Talley;
First Lieutenant Hugh B. Waddell; Staff Sergeant Edward F.
Springer; Sergeant Leshe B. Hopkins.
Approved, May 19, 1936.
[CHAPTER 428.]
AN ACT
To create an additional division of the United States District Court for the
Southern District of Mississippi to be known as the Hattiesburg division.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 90
of the Judicial Code, as amended (U. 8S. C., 1934 edition, title 28,
sec. 170), is amended to read as follows:
“Src. 90. The State of Mississippi is divided into two judicial
districts to be known as the northern and southern districts of
Mississippi. The northern district shall include the territory em-
braced on the 1st day of December 1923 in the counties of Alcorn,
Attala, Chickasaw, Choctaw, Clay, Itawamba, Lee, Lowndes, Monroe,
Oktibbeha, Pontotoc, Prentiss, Tishomingo, and Winston, which shall
constitute the eastern division of said district; also the territory
embraced on the date last mentioned in the counties of Benton,
Calhoun, Carroll, De Soto, Grenada, Lafayette, Marshall, Mont-
gomery, Panola, Tate, Tippah, Union, Webster, and Yalabusha,
which shall constitute the western division of said district; also
the territory embraced on the date last mentioned in the counties
of Bolivar, Coahoma, Leflore, Quitman, Sunflower, Tallahatchie,
and Tunica, which shall constitute the Delta division of said district.
The terms of the district court for the eastern division shall be held
at Aberdeen on the first Mondays in April and October; for the
741H CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 428, 439.
western division, at Oxford on the third Monday in April and the
first Monday in December; and for the Delta division, at Clarksdale
on the fourth Monday in January and the third Monday in October.
The southern district shall include the territory embraced on the Ist
day of December 1923 in the counties of Amite, Copiah, Franklin,
Hinds, Holmes, Leake, Lincoln, Madison, Pike, Rankin, Simpson,
Smith, Scott, Wilkinson, and Yazoo, which shall constitute the
Jackson division; also the territory embraced on the date last men-
tioned in the counties of Adams, Claiborne, Humphreys, Issaquena,
Jefferson, Sharkey, Warren, and Washington, which shall constitute
the western division; also the territory embraced on the date last
mentioned in the counties of Clarke, Jasper, Kemper, Lauderdale,
Neshoba, Newton, Noxubee, and Wayne, which shall constitute the
eastern division; also the territory embraced on the date last men-
tioned in the counties of George, Hancock, Harrison, Jackson, Pearl
River, and Stone, which shall constitute the southern division of said
district; also the territory embraced on the date last mentioned in
the counties of Covington, Forrest, Greene, Jefferson Davis, Jones,
Lamar, Lawrence, Marion, Perry, and Walthall, which shall con-
stitute the Hattiesburg division. Terms of the district court for the
Jackson division shall be held at Jackson on the first Mondays
in May and November; for the western division, at Vicksburg on
the third Mondays in May and November; for the eastern division,
at Meridian on the third Mondays in March and September; for
the southern division, at Biloxi on the third Monday in February
and the first Monday in June; and for the Hattiesburg division, at
Hattiesburg on the second Mondays in April and October. The
clerk of the court for each district shall maintain an office in charge
of himself or a deputy at each place in his district at which court
is now required to be held, at which he shall not himself reside,
‘which shall be kept open at all times for the transaction of the
business of the court. The marshal for each of said districts shall
maintain an office in charge of himself or a deputy at each place of
holding court in his district.”
Approved, May 19, 1936.
[CHAPTER 432.]
AN ACT
To provide for rural electrification, and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That there is
hereby created and established an agency of the United States to
be known as the “Rural Electrification Administration”, all of the
powers of which shall be exercised by an Administrator, who shall be
appointed by the President, by and with the advice and consent of
the Senate, for a term of ten years, and who shall receive a salary
of $10,000 per year. This Act may be cited as the “Rural Electrifi-
cation Act of 1936”.
Src. 2. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to make
loans in the several States and Territories of the United States for
rural electrification and the furnishing of electric energy to persons
in rural areas who are not receiving central station service, as here-
inafter provided; to make, or cause to be made, studies, investiga-
tions, and reports concerning the condition and progress of the elec-
trification of rural areas in the several States and Territories; and
to publish and disseminate information with respect thereto.
43115°—36——_18
MAY 19, 20, 1936.
1363
Western division.
Delta division.
Southern district.
Jackson division.
Western division.
Eastern division.
Southern division.
Hattiesburg division.
Terms of court.
Jackson division.
Western division.
Eastern division.
Southern division.
Hattiesburg division.
Clerks and marshals;
offices.
May 20, 1936.
[S. 3483.]
[Public, No. 605.]
Rural Electrification
Act of 1936.
Rural Electrification
Administration creat-
ed.
Administrator; pow-
ers, appointment, etc.
Citation of title.
Loans in States and
Territories authorized.
Studies and reports
concerning rural areas;
publication, ete.
1564
Reconstruction
nance Corporation. ~
Loans to Administra-
tor by, authorized.
Maximum, 1937.
Interest.
Fi-
Provisos.
Proportion to secu-
rity.
_ Amortization of ob-
ligations.
Maturity provisions.
Assignment of obli-
gations to Reconstruc-
tion Finance Corpora-
tion.
Appropriations
thorized.
au-
Allotments of por-
tion of annual sums for
loans; basis of.
Unallotted portion;
basis of loans.
Post, p. 1365.
Proviso.
Limitation.
Availability of unex-
pended balances dur-
ing ensuing year.
Provisos.
Limitation.
Loans to Adminis-
trator to cease June 30,
1937.
_ Payments covered
in; exception,
74tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 432. MAY 20, 1936.
Src. 3. (a) The Reconstruction Finance Corporation is hereby
authorized and directed to make loans to the Administrator, upon his
request approved by the President, not exceeding in aggregate
amount $50,000,000 for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1937, with
interest at 3 per centum per annum upon the security of the obliga-
tions of borrowers from the Administrator appointed pursuant to
the provisions of this Act or from the Administrator of the Rural
Electrification Administration established by Executive Order Num-
bered 7037: Provided, That no such loan shall be in an amount
exceeding 85 per centum of the principal amount outstanding of
the obligations constituting the security therefor: And provided
further, That such obligations incurred for the purpose of financing
the construction and operation of generating plants, electric transmis-
sion and distribution lines, or systems shall be fully amortized over
a period not to exceed twenty-five years, and that the maturity of
such obligations incurred for the purpose of financing the wiring of
premises and the acquisition and installation of electrical and plumb-
ing appliances and equipment shall not exceed two-thirds of the
assured life thereof and not more than five years. The Administrator
is hereby authorized to make all such endorsements, to execute all
such instruments, and to do all such acts and things as shall be
necessary to effect the valid transfer and assignment to the Recon-
struction Finance Corporation of all such obligations.
(b) There is hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any
money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, for the fiscal year
ending June 30, 1938, and for each of the eight years thereafter,
the sum of $40,000,000 for the purposes of this Act as hereinafter
provided.
(c) Fifty per centum of the annual sums herein made available or
appropriated for the purposes of this Act shall be allotted yearly by
the Administrator for loans in the several States in the proportion
which the number of their farms not then receiving central station
electric service bears to the total number of farms of the United
States not then receiving such service. The Administrator shall,
within ninety days after the beginning of each fiscal year, determine
for each State and for the United States the number of farms not
then receiving such service.
(d) The remaining 50 per centum of such annual sums shall be
available for loans in the several States and in the Territories, with-
out allotment as hereinabove provided, in such amounts for each
State and Territory as, in the opinion of the Administrator, may be
effectively employed for the purposes of this Act, and to carry out
the provisions of section 7: Provided, however, That not more than
10 per centum of said unallotted annual sums may be employed in
any one State, or in all of the Territories.
(e) If any part of the annual sums made available for the purposes
of this Act shall not be loaned or obligated during the fiscal year for
which such sums are made available, such unexpended or unobligated
sums shall be available for loans by the Administrator in the follow-
ing year or years without allotment: Provided, however, That not
more than 10 per centum of said sums may be employed in any one
State or in all of the Territories: And provided further, That no
loans shall be made by the Reconstruction Finance Corporation to
the Administrator after June 30, 1987.
(f) All moneys representing payments of principal and interest
on loans made by the Administrator under this Act shall be covered
into the Treasury as miscellaneous receipts, except that any such
moneys representing payments of principal and interest on obliga-
tions constituting the security for loans made by the Reconstruction
74mm CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 482. MAY 20, 1936.
Finance Corporation to the Administrator shall be paid to the
Reconstruction Finance Corporation in payment of such loans.
Seo, 4. The Administrator is authorized and empowered, from the
sums hereinbefore authorized, to make loans to persons, corporations,
States, Territories, and subdivisions and agencies thereof, municipali-
ties, peoples utility districts and cooperative nonprofit, or limited-
dividend associations organized under the laws of any State or Ter-
ritory of the United States, for the purpose of financing the con-
struction and operation of generating plants, electric transmission
and distribution lines or systems for the furnishing of electric energy
to persons in rural areas who are not receiving central station serv-
ice: Provided, however, That the Administrator, in making such
loans, shall give preference to States, Territories, and subdivisions
and agencies thereof, municipalities, peoples utility districts, and
cooperative, nonprofit, or limited dividend associations, the projects
of which comply with the requirements of this Act. Such loans
shall be on such terms and conditions relating to the expenditure of
the moneys loaned and the security therefor as the Administrator
shall determine and may be made payable in whole or in part out
of income: Provided, however, That all such loans shall be self-
liquidating within a period of not to exceed twenty-five years, and
shall bear interest at a rate equal to the average rate of interest pay-
able by the United States of America on its obligations, having a
maturity of ten or more years after the dates thereof, issued during
the last preceding fiscal year in which any such obligations were
issued: Provided further, That no loan for the construction, operation,
or enlargement of any generating plant shall be made unless the
consent of the State authority having jurisdiction in the premises is
first obtained. Loans under this section and section 5 shall not be
made unless the Administrator finds and certifies that in his judg-
ment the security therefor is reasonably adequate and such loan will
be repaid within the time agreed.
Sec. 5. The Administrator is authorized and empowered, from the
sums hereinbefore authorized, to make loans for the purpose of finan-
cing the wiring of the premises of persons in rural areas and the
acquisition and installation of electrical and plumbing appliances
and equipment. Such loans may be made to any of the borrowers
of funds loaned under the provisions of section 4, or to any person,
firm, or corporation supplying or installing the said wiring, appli-
ances, or equipment. Such loans shall be for such terms, subject
to such conditions, and so secured as reasonably to assure repayment
thereof, and shall be at a rate of interest equal to the average rate of
interest payable by the United States of America on its obligations,
having a maturity of ten or more years after the dates thereof, issued
during the last preceding fiscal year in which any such obligations
were issued.
Src. 6. For the purpose of administering this Act and for the
purpose of making the studies, investigations, publications, and
reports herein provided for, there is hereby authorized to be appro-
priated, out of any money in the Treasury not otherwise appro-
priated, such sums as shall be necessary. ,
Sec. 7. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to bid for
and purchase at any foreclosure or other sale, or otherwise to acquire,
property pledged or mortgaged to secure any loan made pursuant to
this Act; to pay the purchase price and any costs and expenses
incurred in connection therewith from the sums authorized in section
3 of this Act; to accept title to any property so purchased or acquired
in the name of the United States of America; to operate or lease
such property for such period as may be deemed necessary or
1365
Loans for financing
generating plants, dis-
tribution lines, etc.
Provisos. _
Preferential loans.
Loans to be self-
liquidating.
Interest.
Consent of State au-
thority.
Security; repayment.
Wiring premises, in-
stalling appliances, etc.
Loans for; terms, se-
curity, etc.
Interest.
Appropriations
authorized for adminis-
trative, etc., expenses.
Post, p. 1604.
Acquisition of mort-
gaged, etc., property
by Administrator, au-
thorized.
Operation, ete., of
acquired property,
1366
Sale.
Disposal of encum-
bered property, etc.,
by borrower.
Prior loans and con-
tracts; administration
may be vested in Ad-
ministrator.
Transfer of records,
property, and person-
nel.
Nonpartisan admin-
istration of Act.
Merit system of ap-
pointments, etc.
Removal of officials,
etc., for violation.
Annual reports to
Congress.
Utilization of volun-
tary, etc., services.
Attorneys, engineers,
and experts; appoint-
ment, compensation,
etc.
_ Expenditures author-
ized.
Ante, p. 1365.
Time extension on
payments, authorized.
Provisos.
_Loans on plants,
lines, ete.
74ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 482. MAY 20, 1936.
advisable to protect the investment therein, but not to exceed five
years after the acquisition thereof; and to sell such property so
purchased or acquired, upon such terms and for such consideration
as the Administrator shall determine to be reasonable.
No borrower of funds under section 4 shall, without the approval
of the Administrator, sell or dispose of its property, rights, or
franchises, acquired under the provisions of this Act, until any loan
obtained from the Rural Electrification Administration, including
all interest and charges, shall have been repaid.
Src. 8. The administration of loans and contracts entered into by
the Rural Electrification Administration established by Executive
Order Numbered 7037, dated May 11, 1935, may be vested by the
President in the Administrator authorized to be appointed by this
Act; and in such event the provisions of this Act shall apply to said
loans and contracts to the extent that said provisions are not incon-
sistent therewith. The President may transfer to the Rural Elec-
trification Administration created by this Act the jurisdiction and
control of the records, property (including office equipment), and
personnel used or employed in the exercise and performance of the
functions of the Rural Electrification Administration established
by such Executive order.
Sec. 9. This Act shall be administered entirely on a nonpartisan
basis, and in the appointment of officials, the selection of employees,
and in the promotion of any such officials or employees, no political
test or qualification shall be permitted or given consideration, but
all such appointments and promotions shall be given and made on
the basis of merit and efficiency. If the Administrator herein pro-
vided for is found by the President of the United States to be guilty
of a violation of this section, he shall be removed from office by the
President, and any appointee or selection of officials or employees
made by the Administrator who is found guilty of a violation of this
Act shall be removed by the Administrator.
Src. 10. The Administrator shall present annually to the Congress
not later than the 20th day of January in each year a full report of
his activities under this Act.
Src. 11. In order to carry out the provisions of this Act the
Administrator may accept and utilize such voluntary and uncom-
pensated services of Federal, State, and local officers and employees
as are available, and he may without regard to the provisions of civil-
service laws applicable to officers and employees of the United States
appoint and fix the compensation of attorneys, engineers, and experts,
and he may, subject to the civil-service laws, appoint such other
officers and employees as he may find necessary and prescribe their
duties. The Administrator is authorized, from sums appropriated
pursuant to section 6, to make such expenditures (including expendi-
tures for personal services; supplies and equipment; lawbooks and
books of reference; directories and periodicals; travel expenses;
rental at the seat of government and elsewhere; the purchase, opera-
tion, or maintenance of passenger-carrying vehicles; and printing
and binding) as are appropriate and necessary to carry out the
provisions of this Act.
Sec. 12. The Administrator is authorized and empowered to extend
the time of payment of interest or principal of any loans made by the
Administrator pursuant to this Act: Provided, however, That with
respect to any loan made under section 4, the payment of interest or
principal shall not be extended more than five years after such pay-
ment shall have become due, and with respect to any loan made
under section 5, the payment of principal or interest shall not be
extended more than two years after such payment shall have become
74mm CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 432-434. MAY 20, 1936.
due: And provided further, That the provisions of this section shall
not apply to any obligations or the security therefor which may be
held by the Reconstruction Finance Corporation under the provisions
of section 3,
Src. 13. As used in this Act the term “rural area” shall be deemed
to mean any area of the United States not included within the
boundaries of any city, village, or borough having a population in
excess of fifteen hundred inhabitants, and such term shall be deemed
to include both the farm and nonfarm population thereof; the term
“farm” shall be deemed to mean a farm as defined in the publications
of the Bureau of the Census; the term “person” shall be deemed to
mean any natural person, firm, corporation, or association; the term
“Territory” shall be deemed to include any insular possession of the
United States.
Sec. 14. If any provision of this Act, or the application thereof to
any person or circumstances, is held invalid, the remainder of the
Act and the application of such provision to other persons or circum-
stances shall not be affected thereby.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 433.]
AN ACT
To amend article 3 of the ‘‘Rules Concerning Lights, and so forth’’, contained
in the Act entitled ‘An Act to adopt regulations for preventing collisions upon
certain harbors, rivers, and inland waters of the United States’, approved
June 7, 1897.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the first sen-
tence of article 3 of the “Rules Concerning Lights, and so forth”,
contained in the Act entitled “An Act to adopt regulations for pre-
venting collisions upon certain harbors, rivers, and inland waters of
the United States”, approved June 7, 1897, is amended to read as
follows:
“Arr. 3. A steam vessel when towing another vessel or vessels
alongside shall, in addition to her side lights, carry two bright white
lights in a vertical line, one over the other, not less than three feet
apart, and when towing one or more vessels astern, regardless of the
length of the tow, shall carry an additional bright white light three
feet above or below such lights: Provided, That on the Red River of
the North and the rivers emptying into the Gulf of Mexico and their
tributaries, this article shall not affect the signal lights used on towing
vessels which propel the tow by pushing at the rear of the tow.”
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 434.]
AN ACT
To amend section 4321, Revised Statutes (U. 8. C., title 46, sec. 263), and for
other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 4821,
Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sec. 263), be,
and is hereby, amended to read as follows:
“The form of a license for carrying on the coasting trade or fish-
eries shall be as follows: :
“License for carrying on the (here insert ‘coasting trade’, ‘whale
fishery’, ‘mackerel fishery’, or ‘cod fishery’, as the case may be).
1567
Loans excluded.
Ante, p. 1364.
Definitions.
“Rural area.’”
“Farm.”
“Person.”’
“Territory.”
_Separability provi-
sion.
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 10308.]
[Public, No. 606.]
Navigation.
“Rules Concerning
Lights, ete.’’
Vol. 30, p. 97.
U.S.C., p. 1455.
Lights of steam ves-
sel towing another ves-
sel alongside.
When towing astern.
Proviso.
Exceptions,
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 11036.]
~ [Public, No. 607.]
Vessels in domestic
commerce.
R.S., sec. 4321, p. 835.
U.S. C., p. 2005.
License for coasting
trade or fisheries.
Form prescribed.
1368
Provisos.
Licensing for the
“coasting trade and
mackerel fishery.”
Touching at foreign
ports.
R.S§., secs. 4364, 4365,
p. 844; U.S.C., p. 2010.
Enrolled and licensed
vessels, Great Lakes
and connecting waters.
R. §., sec. 4318; U.S.
C., p. 2004.
May 20, 1936.
[H. R. 11302. ]
[Public, No. 608.] _
United Confederate
Veterans, Reunion
Committee.
Loan of Army equip-
ment for encampment
at Shreveport, La., au-
thorized.
747TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 434, 435. MAY 20, 1936.
“In pursuance of title L (Revised Statutes 4311-4390), ‘Regula-
tion of Vessels in Domestic Commerce’, of the Revised Statutes of
the United States (inserting here the name of the husband or man-
aging owner, with his occupation and place of abode, and the name
of the master, with the place of his abode), having sworn that the
(insert here the description of the vessel, whether ship, brigantine,
snow, schooner, sloop, or whatever else she may be), called the (insert
here the vessel’s name), whereof the said (naming the master) is
master, burden (insert here the number of tons, in words) tons, as
appears by her enrollment, dated at (naming the district, day, month,
and year, in words at length, but if she be less than twenty tons,
insert, instead thereof, ‘proof being had of her admeasurement’),
shall not be employed in any trade, while this license shall continue
in force, whereby the revenue of the United States shall be defrauded,
and having also sworn (or affirmed) that this license shall not be
used for any other vessel, or for any other employment, than is
herein specified, license is hereby granted for the said (inserting here
the description of the vessel) called the (inserting here the vessel’s
name), to be employed in carrying on the (inserting here ‘coasting
trade’, ‘whale fishery’, ‘mackerel fishery’, or ‘cod fishery’, as the case
may be), for one year from the date hereof, and no longer. Given
under my hand and seal, at (naming the said district), this (insert-
ing the particular day) day of (naming the month), in the year
(specifying the number of the year in words at length) ;”: Provided,
That vessels of five net tons and over entitled under the laws of the
United States to be enrolled and licensed or licensed for the coasting
trade may be licensed for the “coasting trade and mackerel fishery”,
and shall be deemed to have sufficient license for engaging in the
coasting trade and the taking of fish of every description, including
shellfish: Provided further, That the provisions of sections 4364 and
4365, Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, secs.
310 and 311), shall be, and are hereby, made applicable to vessels so
licensed: And provided further, That vessels operating on the Great
Lakes and their connecting and tributary waters under enrollment
and license issued in conformity with the provisions of section 4318,
Revised Statutes of the United States (U.S. C., title 46, sec. 258),
shall be deemed to have sufficient license for engaging in the taking
of fish of every description within such waters without change in the
form of enrollment and license prescribed under the authority of
that section.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 435.]
AN ACT
To authorize the Secretary of War to lend to the Reunion Committee of the
United Confederate Veterans three thousand blankets, olive drab, numbered
4, one thousand five hundred canvas cots, to be used at their annual encamp-
ment to be held at Shreveport, Louisiana, in June 1936.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of War be, and he is hereby, authorized to lend, at his discretion
to the Reunion Committee of the United Confederate Veterans,
for use at the United Confederate Veterans’ Encampment, to
be held at Shreveport, Louisiana, June 9, 10, 11, and 12, 1936, two
hospital ward tents, with all pegs, poles, and equipment necessary
for their erection; one storage tent complete with all equipment; one
large wall tent complete with all equipment; six small wall tents
74ra CONGRESS. SESS.II. CHS. 435, 440,444. MAY 20,21,29,1936. 1369
complete with all equipment; ten pyramidal tents complete with all
equipment; fifty 14-quart G. I. buckets; three thousand blankets,
olive drab, wool; one thousand five hundred canvas folding cots; one
thousand five hundred comforters; one thousand five hundred cotton-
felted pillows complete with cotton pillow cases; three thousand
cotton bedsheets: Provided, That no expense shall be caused the
United States Government by the delivery and return of said prop-
erty; the same to be delivered from the nearest quartermaster depot
at such time prior to the holding of said encampment as may be
agreed upon by the Secretary of War and the Confederate Reunion
Committee: Provided further, That the Secretary of War, before
delivery of such property, shall take from said Reunion Committee
of the United Confederate Veterans a good and sufficient bond for
the safe return of said property in good order and condition, and
the whole without expense to the United States.
Approved, May 20, 1936.
[CHAPTER 440.]
AN ACT
To convey certain lands to Clackamas County, Oregon, for publie-park purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of the Interior is authorized and directed to issue a patent to Clack-
amas County, Oregon, on behalf of the United States, for the south
half southwest quarter and the west half northeast quarter southwest
quarter section 11, township 3 south, range 4 east, Willamette merid-
jan, in the State of Oregon, containing one hundred acres, more or
less, on condition that such county shall accept and use such lands
solely for public-park purposes; but if such county shall at any time
cease to use such lands for public-park purposes, or shall permit the
use of such lands for any other purpose, or shall alienate or attempt
to alienate them, they shall revert to the United States: Provided,
That there shall be reserved to the United States, its patentees, or
their transferees, the right to cut and remove therefrom the merchant-
able timber, reserving to Clackamas County, Oregon, when such sale
is made under the provisions of the Act of June 9, 1916 (39 Stat. 218),
a preference right to purchase the timber at the highest price bid.
Sec. 2. The Secretary of the Interior shall prescribe all necessary
regulations to carry into effect the foregoing provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 21, 1936.
[CHAPTER 444.]
AN ACT
To supplement the Act of June 25, 1929 (ch. 41, 46 Stat. L. 41), which authorized
and directed the Attorney General to institute suit against the Northern
Pacific Railway Company and others.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in the suit
entitled United States of America, plaintiff, against Northern Pacific
Railway Company and others, defendants, numbered E4389, insti-
tuted and pending in the District Court of the United States for
the Eastern District of Washington, under the authority and direc-
tion of the Act of June 25, 1929 (ch. 41, 46 Stat. L. 41), now on
reference to a special master for hearing under an order of said
court entered in said suit on April 21, 1936, a direct review by the
Provisos.
No Federal expense.
Bond.
May 21, 1936.
[H. R. 5058. }
[Public, No. 609.]
Clackamas County,
Oreg.
Conveyance of land
for public-park pur-
poses, authorized.
_Reversionary provi-
sion.
Proviso.
Timber reservation.
Vol. 39, p. 218.
Regulations to be
prescribed.
May 22, 1936.
{S. 4594.]
(Public, No. 610.]
Northern Pacific
Railway Companyand
others.
Review by appeal to
U. S. Supreme Court
of certain questions in
pending suit, author-
ized.
Vol. 46, p. 41.
1370
Time limitation.
Right of review of
final judgment not
fected.
May 22, 1936.
[H. R. 1398.]
af-
[Publiec, No. 611.]
Crescent City, Calif.
Establishment
of
Coast Guard station
at, authorized.
May 22, 1936.
[H. R. 8370.]
[Publie, No. 612.]
Port Washington,
is.
Establishment of
Coast Guard station
at, authorized.
May 22, 1936.
[H. R. 10321.)
[Public, No. 613.]
Rio Grande, use of
waters, etc. _
Correction in Act
lating to.
Public Laws,
sess., p. 661.
Te-
Ist
741TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 444-447. MAY 22, 1936.
Supreme Court of the United States by appeal may be had by any
party to said suit of any order or decree of said district court entered
upon a review of the report of the master to be made pursuant to
said order of April 21, 1936, and also of the order or decree of said
district court entered in said suit on October 3, 1935, as amended by
an order of January 29, 1936. Such direct review by the Supreme
Court of either or both of the said orders or decrees may be had by
appeal taken within sixty days from the date of the order or decree
of the district court entered upon a review of the report of the
master to be made pursuant to the said order of April 21, 1936. The
right of review of any final judgment, authorized by said Act of
June 25, 1929, shall continue in force and effect.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 445.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of a Coast Guard station at or near Crescent
City, California.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of thé
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized to establish a
Coast Guard station on the Pacific coast at or in the vicinity of
Crescent City, California, in such locality as the Commandant of
the Coast Guard may recommend.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 446.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of a Coast Guard station at Port Washington,
Wisconsin.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of
the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the
Secretary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized to estab-
lish a Coast Guard station on Lake Michigan at Port Washington,
Wisconsin, at such point as the Commandant of the Coast Guard
may recommend.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 447.]
AN ACT
To amend section 4 of Public Act Numbered 286, Seventy-fourth Congress,
approved August 19, 1935, as amended.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That section 4 of
Public Act Numbered 286, Seventy-fourth Congress, approved
August 19, 1935, is amended by striking out the words “section 3
hereof” and inserting in lieu thereof the words “section 2, para-
graph 2, and section 3 of this Act”.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
~”
74rH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 448, 449. MAY 22,26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 448.]
AN ACT
Authorizing the erection of a memorial to those who met their death in the
wreck of the dirigible Shenandoah.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secretary
of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed to
erect near Ava, Ohio, on the spot where the Shenandoah fell, a
suitable tablet or marker to commemorate the heroic services ren-
dered by Commander Landsdowne and other members of the crew
who died when the Navy dirigible Shenandoah was destroyed.
Sxc. 2. There is hereby authorized to be appropriated, out of any
money in the Treasury not otherwise appropriated, the sum of
$2,500 to carry out the provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 22, 1936.
[CHAPTER 449.]
AN ACT
To authorize the Secretary of War to grant to the city of Buffalo, New York, the
right and privilege to occupy and use for sewage-disposal facilities part of the
lands forming the pier and dikes of the Black Rock Harbor improvement at
Buffalo, New York.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That in addition
to the grant made by the Secretary of War to the city of Buffalo
pursuant to the Act of Congress entitled “An Act making appropri-
ations for the construction, repair, and preservation of certain public
works on rivers and harbors and for other purposes”, approved
February 27, 1911, for the purpose of establishing a public park and
landing facilities on that part of the structure known as Bird Island
Pier on Niagara River lying north of Albany Street extended, in
the city of Buffalo, New York, and forming a part of Black Rock
Harbor improvement and the lands of the United States under
water on both sides of said pier to the established harbor lines, sub-
ject to the terms, conditions, and stipulations in said grant specified,
the Secretary of War is authorized to grant to the city of Buffalo,
New York, also the right and privilege of occupying said lands and
lands under water, and also the lands owned by the United States
on the west side of Black Rock Canal, described as follows: Begin-
ning at a point where the northerly line of property formerly owned
by William H. Slade, or that line extended, intersects the United
States Government property line (formerly New York State Blue
Line) ; thence easterly parallel to the line forming the northeasterly
boundary of lands heretofore granted to the city of Buffalo by the
United States and known as Bird Island Pier until a point is reached
in direct prolongation of the easterly boundary line of said last
mentioned lands; thence southwesterly in direct line with said
easterly boundary of said lands to the northeasterly corner of said
lands heretofore conveyed to the city of Buffalo by the United
States; thence westerly along the northeasterly boundary of said
Bird Island Pier lands to said United States Government property
line; thence northeasterly along said last mentioned line to the place
of beginning, or so much thereof as may be necessary, for use either
by the city of Buffalo or by the Buffalo Sewer Authority (created
by chapter 349 of the Laws of the State of New York of 1935) for
sewage-disposal facilities, on such terms, conditions, and stipulations
as he may deem expedient and equitable and necessary for the pro-
tection of all the interests of the United States in and to said
1371
May 22, 1936.
(H.R. i054)
[Public, No. 614.]
Dirigible ‘‘Shenan-
doah.””
Erection of memorial
to dead in wreck of,
authorized.
Location.
Appropriation au-
thorized.
May 26, 1936.
(S. 4317.]
~~ [Publie, No. 615] _
Buffalo, N. Y.
Right to use certain
land for public pur-
poses, granted to.
Vol. 36, p. 935.
Description.
1372
Proviso. P
State sanction. -
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 8287.]
[Public, No. 616.]
Virgin Islands.
Establishment of
assessed valuation real
property tax.
Based on actual
value.
Uniform rate in each
municipality.
Provisional rate.
President to pre-
scribe regulations if no
municipal levy, etc.
Deposit of collections,
Virgin Islands Com-
pany.
Payments by, in lieu
of taxes.
Other property
owned by the United
States.
741m CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 449, 450. MAY 926, 1936.
premises: Provided, however, That the city of Buffalo shall have
secured the sanction and consent of the State of New York through
its constituted agencies.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 450.]
AN ACT
To establish an assessed valuation real property tax in the Virgin Islands of the
United States.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That it is the policy
of Congress to equalize and more equitably to distribute existing
taxes on real property in the Virgin Islands of the United States and
to reduce the burden of taxation now imposed on land in productive
use in such islands.
Sxc. 2. For the calendar year 1936 and for all succeeding years
all taxes on real property in the Virgin Islands shall be computed
on the basis of the actual value of such property and the rate in each
municipality of such islands shall be the same for all real property
subject to taxation in such municipality whether or not such prop-
erty 1s in cultivation and regardless of the use to which such
property is put.
Sec. 3. Until local tax laws conforming to the requirements of this
Act are in effect in a municipality the tax on real property in such
municipality for any such calendar year shall be at the rate of
1.25 per centum of the assessed value. If the legislative authority
of a municipality shall fail to enact laws for the levy, assessment,
collection, or enforcement of any tax imposed under authority of
this Act within three months after the date of its enactment, the
President shall then prescribe regulations for the levy, assessment,
collection, and enforcement of such tax, which shall be in effect
until the legislative authority of such municipality shall make
regulations for such purposes.
Sec. 4. All taxes so levied and collected shall be deposited in the
municipal treasury of the municipality in which such taxes are
collected.
Sec. 5. The Virgin Islands Company shall pay annually into the
municipal treasuries of the Virgin Islands in lieu of taxes an amount
equal to the amount of taxes which would be payable on the real
property in the Virgin Islands owned by the United States and in
the possession of the Virgin Islands Company, if such real property
were in private ownership and taxable, but the valuation placed upon
such property for taxation purposes by the local taxing authorities
shall be reduced to a reasonable amount by the Secretary of the
Interior if, after investigation, he finds that such valuation is
excessive and unreasonable. The Virgin Islands Company shall also
pay into the municipal treasuries of the Virgin Islands amounts
equal to the amounts of any taxes of general application which a
private corporation similarly situated would be required to pay into
the said treasuries. Similar payments shall be made with respect
to any property owned by the United States in the Virgin Islands
which is used for ordinary business or commercial purposes, and the
income derived from any property so used shall be available for
making such payments.
74ma CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 450, 451. MAY 26, 1936.
_ Sec. 6. Nothing in this Act shall be construed as altering, amend-
ing, or repealing the existing exemptions from taxation of property
used for educational, charitable, or religious purposes. Subject to
the provisions of this Act, the legislative authority of the respective
municipalities is hereby empowered to alter, amend, or repeal, sub-
ject to the approval of the Governor, any law now imposing taxes
on real and personal property.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 451.]
AN ACT
To provide for the establishment of the Fort Frederica National Monument, at
Saint Simon Island, Georgia, and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That when title
to the site of Fort Frederica, on Saint Simon Island, Georgia, and
such other related sites located thereon, as may be designated by
the Secretary of the Interior, in the exercise of his discretion, as
necessary or desirable for national-monument purposes, shall have
been vested in the United States, said area not to exceed eighty acres
shall be, and is hereby, set apart as a national monument for the
benefit and inspiration of the people, and shall be called the “Fort
Frederica National Monument”.
Sec. 2. That the Secretary of the Interior be, and he is hereby,
authorized to accept donations of land, interests in land, buildings,
structures, and other property within the boundaries of the said
national monument as determined and fixed hereunder, and dona-
tions of funds for the purchase and maintenance thereof, the title
and evidence of title to lands acquired to be satisfactory to the Secre-
tary of the Interior: Provided, That he may acquire on behalf of
the United States out of any donated funds, either by purchase at
prices deemed by him reasonable, or by condemnation under the pro-
visions of the Act of August 1, 1888, such tracts of land within the
said national monument as may be necessary for the completion
thereof.
Sec. 3. (a) The Secretary of the Interior is authorized, in his
discretion, to maintain in some suitable structure within the national
monument a museum for relics and records pertaining to Fort
Frederica, and for other articles of national and patriotic interest,
and in his discretion to accept, on behalf of the United States, for
installation in such museum, articles which may be offered as addi-
tions to the museum. ee
(b) Any State or political subdivision thereof, organization, or
individual may, with the approval of the Secretary of the Interior,
erect monuments or place tablets commemorating historic events or
persons connected with the history of the area, within the bound-
aries of the Fort Frederica National Monument.
Sec. 4. The administration, protection, and development of the
aforesaid national monument shall be exercised under the direction
of the Secretary of the Interior by the National Park Service, sub-
ject to the provisions of the Act of August 25, 1916, entitled “An
‘Act to establish a National Park Service, and for other purposes”,
as amended.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
1375
Property used for
educational, religious,
ete., purposes.
Amendment or re-
peal of existing laws.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 8431.]
[Public, No. 617.]
Fort Frederica Na-
tional Monument, Saint
Simon Island, Ga.
Establishment of.
Acceptance of dona-
tions, etc.
Proviso.
Purchase of land from
donated funds.
Vol. 25, p. 357.
U.S. C., p. 1785.
Maintenance of mu-
seum.
Erection of monu-
ments or placing of tab-
lets.
Administration.
Vol. 39, p. 535; U. 8.
C., p. 591.
1574
May 26, 1936.
(H. R. 8784.)
{Public, No. 618.]
Executive branch of
the Government.
Withholding of com-
pensation where pay-
ments have been made
illegally, authorized.
Proviso.
Existing laws not
affected.
May 26, 1936.
[H. R. 10267.)
[Public, No. 619.]
Railway Mail Serv-
ice.
Adjustment of com-
pensation.
Vol. 43, p. 1061.
U.S. G., p. 1751.
U.S. C., p. 85.
Appropriations made
available.
May 26, 1936.
(H. R. 10934.]
[Publie, No. 620.]
Salem, Mass.
Transfer of custom-
house to Department
of Interior, authorized.
74ruH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 452-454. MAY 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 452.]
AN ACT
To authorize withholding compensation due Government personnel.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That hereafter,
whenever upon the statement of the account of any disbursing officer
of the United States in the General Accounting Office credit shall
have been disallowed for any payment to any person in the executive
branch of the Government, otherwise entitled to compensation from
the United States or from any agency or instrumentality thereof,
such compensation of the payee may be withheld until full reim-
bursement has been accomplished under such regulations as may be
prescribed by the head of the department, branch, or independent
establishment (including corporations) under which such payee is
entitled to receive compensation: Provided, That nothing contained
in this Act shall be construed to repeal or in any way modify exist-
ing laws relating to the collection of the indebtedness of accountable
or disbursing officers.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 453.]
AN ACT
To provide for adjusting the compensation of division superintendents, assistant
division superintendents, assistant superintendents at large, assistant super-
intendent in charge of car construction, chief clerks, assistant chief clerks,
and clerks in charge of sections in offices of division superintendents in the
Railway Mail Service, to correspond to the rates established by the Classifi-
cation Act of 1923, as amended.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Post-
master General is authorized and directed to adjust the compensa-
tion of division superintendents, assistant division superintendents,
assistant superintendents at large, assistant superintendent in charge
of car construction, chief clerks, assistant chief clerks, and clerks
in charge of sections in offices of division superintendents, Railway
Mail Service, to correspond, so far as may be practicable, to the rates
established by the Classification Act of 1923, as amended, for posi-
tions in the departmental service in the District of Columbia. Any
appropriation now or hereafter available for the payment of the
compensation of employees in the Railway Mail Service shall be
available for payment of compensation in accordance with the rates
adjusted in accordance with the provisions of this Act.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 454.]
AN ACT
To authorize the transfer of the customhouse at Salem, Massachusetts, from the
jurisdiction of the Treasury Department to the Department of the Interior.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Secre-
tary of the Treasury be, and he is hereby, authorized and directed
to transfer to the control and jurisdiction of the Secretary of the
Interior the customhouse at Salem, Massachusetts, and such ad-
joining property, both real and personal, as may now be under the
jurisdiction of the Secretary of the Treasury.
“41H CONGRESS. SESS. II. CHS. 454,462. MAY 26, 27, 1936.
Sec. 2. That the Secretary of the Interior be, and he is hereby,
authorized to acquire the above property for the purpose of estab-
lishing same as an historic site or otherwise preserving the buildings
and grounds in connection therewith: Provided, That the Secretary
of the Treasury may retain sufficient space in the building for the
necessary operation of the Bureau of Customs.
Approved, May 26, 1936.
[CHAPTER 462.]
AN ACT
To provide for the continuation of trading in unlisted securities upon national
securities exchanges, for the registration of over-the-counter brokers and
dealers, for the filing of current information and periodic reports by issuers,
and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the
United States of America in Congress assembled, That subsection (£)
of section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is amended to
read as follows:
“(£) Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this section, any
national securities exchange, upon application to and approval of
such application by the Commission and subject to the terms and
conditions hereinafter set forth, (1) may continue unlisted trading
privileges to which a security had been admitted on such exchange
prior to March 1, 1934; or (2) may extend unlisted trading privileges
to any security duly listed and registered on any other national
securities exchange, but such unlisted trading privileges shall con-
tinue in effect only so long as such security shall remain listed and
registered on any other national securities exchange; or (3) may
extend unlisted trading privileges to any security in respect of which
there is available from a registration statement and periodic reports
or other data filed pursuant to rules or regulations prescribed by the
Commission under this title or the Securities Act of 1933, as amended,
information substantially equivalent to that available pursuant to
rules or regulations of the Commission in respect of a security duly
listed and registered on a national securities exchange, but such
unlisted trading privileges shall continue in effect only so long as
such a registration statement remains effective and such periodic
reports or other data continue to be so filed.
“No application pursuant to this subsection shall be approved
unless the Commission finds that the continuation or extension o
unlisted trading privileges pursuant to such application is neces-
sary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of
investors. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to
any security pursuant to clause (2) or (3) of this subsection shall
be approved except after appropriate notice and opportunity for
hearing. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to any
security pursuant to clause (2) or (3) of this subsection shall be
approved unless the applicant exchange shall establish to the satis-
faction of the Commission that there exists in the vicinity of such
exchange sufficiently widespread public distribution of such security
and sufficient public trading activity therein to render the extension
of unlisted trading privileges on such exchange thereto necessary
or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection of
investors. No application to extend unlisted trading privileges to
any security pursuant to clause (3) of this subsection shall be
approved except upon such terms and conditions as will subject the
issuer thereof, the officers and directors of such issuer, and every
beneficial owner of more than 10 per centum of such security to
1375
Preservation of,
an historic site.
as
Proviso.
Space for Customs
Bureau.
May 27, 1936.
[S. 4023.]
[Public, No. 621.]
Securities Exchange
Act of 1934, amend-
ments.
Vol. 48, p. 894; U. S.
C., p. 536.
Trading in unlisted
securities upon na-
tional exchanges.
Continuance of cer-
tain categories.
Security admitted
before March 1, 1934.
Listed and registered
on another exchange.
Equivalent registra-
tion statement avail-
able.
Conditional contin-
uance of privileges.
Notice and hearing.
Establishment to be
in public interest.
Obligations imposed.
1376
Exceptions.
Publication of trans-
actions or quotations;
differentiation between
listed and unlisted se-
curities.
Other than by ticker.
Suspension of privi-
leges when in public
interest, etc.
Termination of privi-
leges; notice and hear-
ing.
Withdrawal of secur-
ity by issuer; exception.
Inadequate distribu-
tion, trading activity,
ete.
Notice, hearing, etc.
74TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 27, 1936.
duties substantially equivalent to the duties which would arise pur-
suant to this title if such security were duly listed and registered on
a national securities exchange; except that such terms and conditions
need not be imposed in any case or class of cases in which it shall
appear to the Commission that the public interest and the protection
of investors would nevertheless best be served by such extension of
unlisted trading privileges. In the publication or making available
for publication by any national securities exchange, or by any person
directly or indirectly controlled by such exchange, of quotations or
transactions in securities made or effected upon such exchange, such
exchange or controlled person shall clearly differentiate between
quotations or transactions in listed securities, and quotations or
transactions in securities for which unlisted trading privileges on
such exchange have been continued or extended pursuant to this sub-
section. In the publication or making available for publication of
such quotations or transactions otherwise than by ticker, such
exchange or controlled person shall group under separate headings
(A) quotations or transactions in listed securities, and (B) quota-
tions or transactions in securities for which unlisted trading priv-
ileges on such exchange has been continued or extended pursuant to
this subsection.
“The Commission shall by rules and regulations suspend unlisted
trading privileges in whole or in part for any or all classes of
securities for a period not exceeding twelve months, if it deems such
suspension necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for
the protection of investors or to prevent evasion of the purposes
of this title.
“Unlisted trading privileges continued for any security pursuant
to clause (1) of this subsection shall be terminated by order, after
appropriate notice and opportunity for hearing, if it appears at
any time that such security has been withdrawn from listing on
any exchange by the issuer thereof, unless it shall be established to
the satisfaction of the Commission that such delisting was not
designed to evade the purposes of this title or unless it shall appear
to the Commission that, notwithstanding any such purpose of evasion,
the continuation of such unlisted trading privileges is nevertheless
necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection
of investors. On the application of the issuer of any security for
which unlisted trading privileges on any exchange have been con-
tinued or extended pursuant to this subsection, or of any broker or
dealer who makes or creates a market for such security, or of any
other person having a bona-fide interest in the question of termina-
tion or suspension of such unlisted trading privileges, or on its own
motion, the Commission shall by order terminate, or suspend for a
period not exceeding twelve months, such unlisted trading privileges
for such security if the Commission finds, after appropriate notice
and opportunity for hearing, that by reason of inadequate public
distribution of such security in the vicinity of said exchange, or by
reason of inadequate public trading activity or of the character
of trading therein on said exchange, such termination or suspension
is necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the protection
of investors.
“In any proceeding under this subsection in which appropriate
notice and opportunity for hearing are required, notice of not less
than ten days to the applicant in such proceeding, to the issuer of
the security involved, to the exchange which is seeking to continue
or extend or has continued or extended unlisted trading privileges for
such security, and to the exchange, if any, on which such security
is listed and registered, shall be deemed adequate notice, and any
broker or dealer who makes or creates a market for such security,
74tH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 97, 1936.
and any other person having a bona-fide interest in such proceeding,
shall upon application be entitled to be heard.
“Any security for which unlisted trading privileges are continued
or extended pursuant to this subsection shall be deemed to be reg-
istered on a national securities exchange within the meaning of this
title. The powers and duties of the Commission under subsection
(b) of section 19 of this title shall be applicable to the rules of an
exchange in respect of any such security. The Commission may, by
such rules and regulations as it deems necessary or appropriate in
the public interest or for the protection of investors, either uncondi-
tionally or upon specified terms and conditions, or for stated periods,
exempt such securities from the operation of any provision oe edion
13, 14, or 16 of this title.”
Src. 2. Any application to continue unlisted trading privileges
for any security heretofore filed by any exchange and approved by
the Commission pursuant to clause (1) of subsection (f) of section
12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and rules and regulations
thereunder shall be deemed to have been filed and approved pursuant
to clause (1) of said subsection (f) as amended by section 1 of this
Act.
Src. 3. Section 15 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is
amended to read as follows:
“Src. 15. (a) No broker or dealer (other than one whose business
is exclusively intrastate) shall make use of the mails or of any means
or instrumentality of interstate commerce to effect any transaction in,
or to induce the purchase or sale of, any security (other than an
exempted security or commercial paper, bankers’ acceptances, or
commercial bills) otherwise than on a national securities exchange,
unless such broker or dealer is registered in accordance with sub-
section (b) of this section,
“(b) A broker or dealer may be registered for the purposes of
this section by filing with the Commission an application for regis-
tration, which shall contain such information in such detail as to
such broker or dealer and any person directly or indirectly con-
trolling or controlled by, or under direct or indirect common control
with, such broker or dealer, as the Commission may by rules and
regulations require as necessary or appropriate in the public interest
or for the protection of investors. Except as hereinafter provided,
such registration shall become effective thirty days after the receipt
of such application by the Commission or within such shorter period
of time as the Commission may determine.
“An application for registration of a broker or dealer to be formed
or organized may be made by a broker or dealer to which the broker
or dealer to be formed or organized is to be the successor. Such
application shall contain such information in such detail as to the
applicant and as to the successor and any person directly or indirectly
controlling or controlled by, or under direct or indirect common
control with, the applicant or the successor, as the Commission may
by rules and regulations require as necessary or appropriate in the
public interest or for the protection of investors. Except as herein-
after provided, such registration shall become effective thirty days
after the receipt of such application by the Commission or within
such shorter period of time as the Commission may determine. Such
registration shall terminate on the forty-fifth day after the effective
date thereof, unless prior thereto the successor shall, in accordance
with such rules and regulations as the Commission may prescribe,
adopt such application as its own.
“Tf any amendment to any application for registration pursuant
to this subsection is filed prior to the effective date thereof, such
amendment shall be deemed to have been filed simultaneously with
1377
Securities hereunder
deemed registered.
Commission’s powers
extended.
Vol. 48, p. 898.
U.S. C., p. 538.
Exemptions permit-
ted.
Vol. 48, pp. 894, 895,
896.
Applications to con-
tinue trading privileges
for security heretofore
approved.
Vol. 48, p. 894.
Over-the-counter
markets.
Vol. 48, p. 895; U. S.
C., p. 536.
Use of the mails,
etce., by unregistered
brokers, etc.
Applications for regis-
tration; contents.
Effective date.
Application by brok-
er or dealer to be
formed or organized;
contents, etc.
Effective date.
Adoption of applica-
tion by successor.
Amendments to ap-
plications.
1378
Postponement of ef-
fective date by Com-
mission.
Registration; denial
or revocation for speci-
fied causes.
Misleading, etc.,
statements in applica-
tion.
Previous conviction.
Subject to court in-
junction, ete.
Willful violations of
law, etc.
Postponement of ef-
fective date of registra-
tion.
Suspension of regis-
tration.
Withdrawal from reg-
istration by brokers,
etc.
Cancelation of regis-
tration or application
by Commission.
Use of mails, etc., to
induce purchase or sale
by fraudulent, etc., de-
vice.
Definition by Com-
mission.
(4TH CONGRESS. SESS. II. CH. 462. MAY 97, 1936.
and as part of such application; except that the Commission may, if
it appears necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the
protection of investors, defer the effective date of any such registra-
tion as thus amended until the thirtieth day after the filing of such
amendment.
“The Commission shall, after appropriate notice and opportunity
for hearing, by order deny registration to or revoke the registration
of any broker or dealer if it finds that such denial or revocation is
in the public interest and that (1) such broker or dealer whether
prior or subsequent to becoming such, or (2) any partner, officer,
director, or branch manager of such broker or dealer (or any person
occupying a similar status or performing similar functions), or any
person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by such broker
or dealer, whether prior or subsequent to becoming such, (A) has
willfully made or caused to be made in any application for regis-
tration pursuant to this subsection or in any document supplemental
thereto or in any proceeding before the Commission with respect
to registration pursuant to this subsection any statement which was
at the time and in the light of the circumstances under which it was
made false or misleading with respect to any material fact; or (B)
has been convicted within ten years preceding the filing of any such
application or at any time thereafter of any felony or misdemeanor
involving the purchase or sale of any security or arising out of the
conduct of the business of a broker or dealer; or (C) is permanently
or temporarily enjoined by order, judgment, or decree of any court
of competent jurisdiction from engaging in or continuing any con-
duct or practice in connection with the purchase or sale of any
security; or (D) has willfully violated any provision of the Securities
Act of 1933, as amended, or of this title, or of any rule or regulation
thereunder. Pending final determination whether any such regis-
tration shall be denied, the Commission may by order postpone the ©
effective date of such registration for a period not to exceed fifteen
days, but if, after appropriate notice and opportunity for hearing, it
shall appear to the Commission to be necessary or appropriate in
the public interest or for the protection of investors to postpone the
effective date of such registration until final determination, the Com-
mission shall so order. Pending final determination whether any
such registration shall be revoked, the Commission shall by order
suspend such registration if, after appropriate notice and oppor-
tunity for hearing, such suspension shall appear to the Commission
to be necessary or appropriate in the public interest or for the pro-
tection of investors. Any registered broker or dealer may, upon
such terms and conditions as the Commission may deem necessary
in the public interest or for the protection of investors, withdraw
from registration by filing a written notice of withdrawal with the
Commission. If the Commission finds that any registered broker or
dealer, or any broker or dealer for whom an application for regis-
tration is pending, is no longer in existence or has ceased to do
business as a broker or dealer, the Commission shall by order cancel
the registration or application of such broker or dealer.
“(c) No broker or dealer shall make use of the mails or of any
means or instrumentality of interstate commerce to effect any trans-
action in, or to induce the purchase or sale of, any security (other
than commercial paper, banker’s acceptances, or commercial bills)
otherwise than on a national securities exchange, by means of any
manipulative, deceptive, or other fraudulent device or contrivance.
The Commission shall, for the purposes of this subsection, by rules
and regulations define such devices or contrivances as are manipu-
lative, deceptive, or otherwise fraudulent.
=
Pr im
SAA
AAA = AAA — AA
a
AA AA pa a neem
AAAARAAA Ranaann~
rn
~~,
Bane
RAR) Aanaaaa aA: S543
A ARAARAAAaAAARA AAAS a nA
RAAAAAA an agnaste aARARAARARAS
ag _ BARAAREEE A hs -_ .
WAAR aaa
RRA APRA RAR AAS
Se aapee iy
lm a
AA
BRRAAREAE
em eam)
a aaeenaa. =>
AAAA A AAA i> y
A tchtsannnaaapeaanareer
| | ee Aaaaae
Blalela 7 \AAAA ABE aasere AES Annamenn
an AAAnAA A055 = aya i GR BR PH
Maaaaaacessac=2--.--.;saapennenens ,
nla
ARRARAA A 2 | Ane aaae aA AAA aAaaalaee
NANA = Va
z SAAR AR
=~ /— Vom
Y a) = m— _ "
J } ] ) }
} \
| or)
fea j } | |
manaanalnas
ae nanan
mn nnnnnnos
ARAN
WAAR AAR Anan Annnene !
ARABARARAARRARARARARARA An aeaae
EN ES
a. AAA
‘ena
Ranann
nanan
r. a
aA Safe Vala a gl
ARAAZAAatAReaae aga
See AAAnaAiAAAAAAAAaD PRED 3 ge RRAARAR
anank PY nlgnignigin
Nae nm CEA ar
Bona BEAR AR RRR ARR RRR RAAARAEE Ee
l Val a en ca AAR) sal gD NAY aa
Yaa |
anne pals,
ain) sae a oa am
BB RAAARAAR RAR RRR
saan fare foam bee AAAA ! =e
AR RRR mm A ARAAananaannaan a
RARARR = Aaaaae PN PX Rm om ARAM ARARRnAnmnnen
| RARAR=nAARARaae RAARARAAR
AARRARAaacae AAARAAAAAARAS= AVS AAAAA AEN EN
PP aalaaaaaaiaiae CGaaa sean anaeacae
FR
Fel | a annnnh
FAAARR AAA Aanr®
saaaaaaaanaal ARAaAARES See RRA apap
APTN ~ ' DAAAAAA mpm om om om mo A
iaaaaaa@aaaaeee: a BAAR SS
ARARAA a ann AA mae eee RAR ana
ARAARAAA
saaARsanaaa RRR RRA RRR.
| AAAA PAAR aan nnaamaeerye are
ARAASES aeeae alo
Wit
3 9088 0
il
iT